KW.09.0128 - DOC - 11.12.12 - 1 of 5 - Specifications - Structural & Architectural PDF

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Volume III: CIVIL ANDARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISIONNO./
SECTIONNO.
DESCRIPTION PAGE No.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Project Name: Wafra Housing Complex 01 03 January 2011
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01009 Important Note 01009-1 - 1
Section 01010 Summary of the Works 01010-1 - 7
Section 01025 Applications for Payment 01025-1 - 2
Section 01030 Alternatives 01030- 1 - 2
Section 01035 Modification Procedures 01035-1 - 2
Section 01039 Coordination and meetings 01039-1 - 3
Section 01040 Project Coordination 01040-1 - 2
Section 01045 Cutting and Patching 01045-1 - 2
Section 01050 Field Engineering 01050-1 - 3
Section 01090 References 01090- 1 - 1
Section 01200 Project Meetings 01200-1 - 3
Section 01300 Submittals (Product Data, Architectural Samples & Mock-ups) 01300-1 - 5
Section 01315 CPM Schedules 01315-1 - 6
Section 01340 Shop, Records and As Built Drawings 01340-1 - 4
Section 01380 Construction Photographs 01380-1 - 2
Section 01400 Quality Control 01400-1 - 4
Section 01410 Testing Laboratory Services 01410-1 - 3
Section 01421 Reference Standards and Definitions 01421-1 - 5
Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01500-1 -13
Section 01514 Temporary Telephone 01514- 1 - 2
Section 01530 Barriers and Enclosures 01530-1 - 2
Section 01569 Construction Cleaning 01569-1 - 1
Section 01580 Project Identification and Signs 01580-1 - 2
Section 01590 Project Field Offices and Sheds 01590-1 - 11
Section 01600 Materials and Equipment 01600-1 - 3
Section 01631 Equals and Substitutes 01631-1 - 2
Section 01700 Contract Closeout 01700-1 - 4
Section 01710 Final Cleaning 01710-1 - 1
Section 01720 Project Record Documents 01720-1 - 2
Section 01730 Operation and Maintenance Data 01730-1 - 3
Section 01740 Warranties 01740-1 - 4
Section 01750 Maintenance Period Duties 01750-1 - 4

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISIONNO./
SECTIONNO.

DIVISION 2 SITE WORKS

Section 02010 Subsurface Investigation 02010- 1 1
Section 02072 Demolition 02072- 1 - 2
Section 02100 Site Preparation 02100-1 2
Section 02140 Dewatering 02140-1 - 3
Section 02150 Earthwork Support 02150-1 3
Section 02200 Earthwork 02200-1 - 7
Section 02210 Lightweight Fill 02210-1 - 3
Section 02281 Termite Control 02281-1 3
Section 02510 Road Paving 02510-1 - 3
Section 02525 Precast Concrete Kerbs 02525-1 - 2
Section 02580 Roadway and Parking markings and Signs 02580-1 - 1
Section 02760 Traffic marking Paint 02760-1 - 1
Section 02764 Landscape Joints & Sealants 02764-1 - 4
Section 02780 Pavements 02780-1 - 4
Section 02810 Landscape Irrigation System 02810-1 -10
Section 02900 Landscaping Works 02900-1 - 4
Section 02905 Plant Procurement and Delivery 02905-1 - 6
Section 02920 Planting Soil Mix 02920-1 - 3
Section 02925 Planting Procedures and Materials 02925-1 - 6
Section 02930 Lawns 02930-1 - 3
Section 02950 Trees, Shrubs, Vines and Ground Covers 02950-1 - 4
Section 02960 Hardscape Materials 02960-1 - 3
Section 02970 Landscape Maintenance 02970-1 - 9
Section 02985 Steel Edging 02985-1 - 2

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE

Section 03100 Concrete Formwork 03100 1 7
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03200 1 6
Section 03300 Cast-in-place Concrete 03300 1 25
Section 03345 Concrete Finishes 03345 1 3
Section 03521 Lightweight Concrete 03521 1 4
Section 03532 Concrete Screed 03532 1 5

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISIONNO./
SECTIONNO.

Section 03600 Grout 03600 1 5
Section 03998 Concrete Repair 03998 1 - 3

DIVISION 4 MASONRY

Section 04200 Concrete Unit Masonry 04200-1 -14
Section 04400 Exterior Stonework 04400-1 - 7
Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810-1 -15
Section 04851 Dimension Stone Cladding 04851-1 - 9
Section 04852 Stone Veneer-faced Strongback Cladding 04852-1 - 3

DIVISION 5 METALS

Section 05120 Structural Steel 05120-1 - 7
Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 05500-1 - 8
Section 05501 Miscellaneous Metal Work 05501-1 - 8
Section 05521 Pipe and tube Raililng 05521-1 - 7
Section 05530 Gratings 05530-1 - 3

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07105 Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing 07105-1 - 4
Section 07120 Fluid Applied Waterproofing 07120-1 - 3
Section 07140 Cementitious Waterproofing 07140 1 - 4
Section 07160 Bituminous Damp proofing 07160-1 - 3
Section 07210 Building Insulation 07210-1 - 3
Section 07241 Exterior Insulation and Finish System 07241-1 - 8
Section 07500 Protected Membrane Roofing 07500-1 - 6
Section 07600 Metal Flashing and Sheet Metal Work 07600-1 - 4
Section 07841 Through-Penetration Firestop System 07841-1 - 7
Section 07900 Exterior Sealants 07900-1 - 7
Section 07905 Interior Sealants 07905-1 - 4
Section 07920 Joint Sealants 07920-1 - 8

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISIONNO./
SECTIONNO.


DIVISION 8 WINDOWS AND DOORS

Section 08110 Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08110-1 - 7
Section 08210 Wood Doors and Frames 08210-1 - 6
Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors 08211-1 - 5
Section 08311 Access Doors and Frames 08311-1 - 4
Section 08346 Sound Control Door Assemblies 08346-1 - 1
Section 08411 Architectural Entrances 08411-1 - 8
Section 08520 Aluminum Doors, Windows and Louvers 08520-1 - 9
Section 08710 Finish Hardware 08710-1 -20
Section 08800 Glazing 08800-1 -13
Section 08805 Glass and Glazing - Internal 08805-1 -10

DIVISION 9 FINISHES

Section 09200 Lath and Plaster 09200-1 -10
Section 09210 Artisan Plaster 09210-1 - 7
Section 09220 External Plaster 09220-1 - 5
Section 09225 Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum 08225-1 - 7
Section 09271 Glass Reinforced Gypsum Fabricants 09271-1 - 3
Section 09310 Ceramic Tile 09310-1 - 8
Section 09410 Precast Terrazzo Tiles 09410-1 - 5
Section 09510 Acoustical Ceilings 09510- 1 8
Section 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09511- 1 - 8
Section 09638 Stone Flooring 09638-1 - 7
Section 09900 Paints and Coatings 09900-1 -12

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISIONNO./
SECTIONNO.


DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

Section 10165 Plastic Laminate Toilet Compartments 10165-1 - 3
Section 10200 Louvers 10200-1 - 6
Section 10270 Access (Computer) Flooring 10270-1 - 1
Section 10810 Toilet Accessories 10810-1 - 9

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS

Section 12482 Entrance Mats 12482- 1 2
Section 12485 Foot Grilles 12485- 1 - 1
Section 12515 Motorized and Manually Operated Shades 12515-1 - 5
Section 12900 Building Accessories 12900-1 - 1

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Section 13150 Swimming Pool and Jacuzzi Construction 13150-1 - 16

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS

Section 14200 Elevators 14200-1 24


DOCUMENT III -1

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Document III-1, General Specifications shall include the following:

1. MPW General Specifications roads administration December 1984.

2. MPW General Specification for building engineering work 1990.

3. MEW General Specifications for electrical installation 1984 or latest amendment.

4. Similarly for fresh and brackish water network, electrical work and other related works, the General
Specification for water works and electrical works (both latest editions) as issued by MEW.

5. For telephone works, the General Specifications and regulations of MOC shall be followed when
applicable and otherwise is not provided.

6. Specifications and regulations of other Ministries of the State of Kuwait shall also be taken into account
where appropriate.

7. Notwithstanding anything herein the contractor shall be responsible for complying in all respect with
such by laws and regulations as may be in-force at the time of execution of the works.

The above specifications are not provided with the contract documents but shall be purchased by the contractor
from the concerned Ministries.

Clauses in the above specifications which are concerned with methods of measurement and payment, or matters
relating thereto, shall not be applicable to this contract.

Particular attention is drawn to Document III-2 (Particular Specification) which provides the specifications for
certain items and are must be taken to adopt such, where Particular Specification are provided.

IMPORTANT NOTE 01009-1
Project No.: KW.09.0128 12 December 2011
Project Name: Wafra Housing Complex 01

SECTION 01009

IMPORTANT NOTE

1. FOR ANY WORK/S NOT COVERED BY THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS, THE GENERAL SPECIFICATION,
LAWS, BYE-LAWS, RULES AND REGULATIONS ISSUED BY THE VARIOUS MINISTRIES AND STATUTORY
AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION; SUCH AS THE MINISTRY OF PUBLIC WORKS (AND ITS VARIOUS
DEPARTMENTS LIKE SANITARY ENGINEERING AND ROADS/HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT), THE MINISTRY OF
ELECTRICITY AND WATER, THE MINISTRY OF COMMUNICATIONS, THE KUWAIT MUNICIPALITY, THE KUWAIT
FIRE BRIGADE, ETC. ETC. SHALL APPLY.

IT WILL BE THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO ASCERTAIN THE NAMES OF ALL THE MINISTRIES AND
AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, THE DETAILS OF THEIR APPLICABLE STATUTES, AND THE METHODS
TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE WITH THEM IN CONSONANCE WITH OTHER CONTRACT CONDITIONS LIKE THE
PROGRAMME OF WORK ETC.

2. INCASE THERE IS A CONFLICT BETWEEN THE VARIOUS TENDER DOCUMENTS, THE TENDERER SHALL
PRICE FOR THE MOST EXPENSIVE COMBINATION OF REQUIREMENTS.

3. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE AND THE TURN OVER DATE MEAN THE SAME.

ENDOF SECTION

SUMMARY OF THE WORKS 01010-1
SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF THE WORKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work covered by this Contract
B. Work performed under other contracts
C. Contractor's use of premises
D. Occupancy
E. Standards
F. Abbreviations and Symbols
G. Samples of work
H. Future Works

1.02 WORK COVERED BY THIS CONTRACT

A. The scope of work to be executed under this Contract originally comprised the construction, completion,
commissioning, handover and maintenance of Buildings and External Works for Site Wafra Housing
Complex 01.

B. The site is located at Salmiya, Block-4, Plot-7, Kuwait.

The Project site components are identified as follows:-
Residential Tower and other amenities on site 5,476 square meter belonging to the owner.

C. The works will consist of:
Tower
Parking
Pool/ ponds
Landscape/hardscape

D. The works shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Civil Works
2. Architectural works
3. Mechanical
4. Electrical works / Home Automation
5. Fire Fighting
6. External works
7. Etc.

A complete picture of the works shall, however, be obtained from a study of all the tender documents taken
together.

E. Maintenance of all the works for two years from the Date of Substantial Completion.

F. Guaranteed maintenance of designated works for longer periods.

1.03 Nominated Contractor to be determined by Owner


1.04 Nominated Contractor

1.05 WORK PERFORMED UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

1.06 COORDINATION ETC. WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS

A. The Contractor shall allow for all costs in connection with scheduling and executing his construction
operations in conjunction with works by other Contractors.

B. Items indicated on Drawings as NIC (Not in Contract), where indicated in Contract Documents, provide
roughing and services to NIC items.

C. Co-ordinate and co-operate fully with other separate contractors, within and outside the site boundaries, so
that work under those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under
this contract.

1.07 USE OF SITE

A. Contractor shall include for scheduling and executing construction operations and works at the site to allow:
1. Public Usage of adjacent roads and facilities by the public.
2. Requirements regarding suppression of noise shall be in accordance with Specification Section
01500. In addition the Contractor is prohibited from using such machinery or executing demolition
works or debris removal in a way which in the Engineer's opinion would create unacceptable noise
levels.

1.08 EMPLOYER OCCUPANCY

A. With the Contractor's agreement (which shall not be unreasonably withheld) the Employer may take possession of
parts of the Works as they are completed, provided they can be used conveniently and all necessary access,
services and other associated facilities are also complete.

B. Schedule and substantially complete designated portions of Work for Employer's use prior to Substantial
Completion of entire Work.

C. Any such Employer occupancy in advance of Substantial completion of the entire project shall be in
compliance with Clause 48 (1) of Document II.

1.09 STANDARDS

A. All reference to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Contract Documents shall mean the
latest edition, amendment or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Tender
Documents.

1.10 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

A. Reference to any Technical Society, Institution, Association or Government Authority is referred to in the
Specifications in accordance with internationally recognized abbreviations.

B. Refer also to List of Abbreviations contained on drawings.

1.11 SAMPLES OF WORK

A. Reasonable samples of all work shall be executed on site if required by and for the approval of the Engineer
or Engineer's Representative, whether specifically specified as mock ups or not all at the expense of the
Contractor. All materials, and workmanship thereafter shall conform fully with-the approved samples.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED
END OF SECTION

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01025-1
SECTION 01025

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for payment.

1.02 FORMAT

A. Application and Certificate for Payment Form and other related forms to be provided by the Engineers
Representative and approved by the Engineer.

B. For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following:
1. Item Number.
2. Description of work.
3. Scheduled Values.
4. Previous Applications.
5. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application.
6. Authorized Variation Orders.
7. Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application.
8. Percentage of Completion.
9. Balance to Finish.
10. Retainage.

1.03 PREPARATION OF APPLICATIONS

A. Present required information in typewritten form.

B. Execute certification by signature of authorized personnel.

C. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide K.D. value in each column for each line item for
portion of work performed and for stored (Material On Site) Products.

D. List each authorized Variation Order as an extension on a Continuation Sheet, listing Variation Order number
and K.D. amount as for an original item of Work. Insert percentage of work completed against each Variation
Order.
E. List all Material On Site (Stored Products). Attach all Purchase Orders and material Purchase invoices:
utilize approved format.

F. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified in Section 01700.

1.04 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Submit two copies of each Application for Payment with supportive Data.

B. Submit two copies of an updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment.

C. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.

D. Submit with transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 01300.

1.05 SUBSTANTIATING DATA

A. When Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying K.D. amounts in question.

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01025-2

B. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date,
and line item by number and description.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

ALTERNATIVES 01030-1
SECTION 01030

ALTERNATIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 ALTERNATIVE AND SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS

A. Definition: The term product shall mean any material including proprietary goods, equipment and manufactured
items.

B. The specifying of manufacturers or their products by name, trade name, catalogue number, etc., shall not act to relieve
the Contractor either from his responsibility to meet other specification requirements, or from his responsibility to make
material submittals for approval.

C. Alternative Products: References herein to approved equal or similar terms shall mean that the approval of the
Engineer is required to any alternative product proposed by the Contractor. The Contractors freedom, however, to
propose alternatives for the Engineers review and approval, shall not be limited to those products in respect of which
the term approved equal or similar has been used in the Contract Documents, and he may propose alternatives to
any specified products provided such alternatives are equal in all respects to the quality, durability and performance
characteristics of the specified product.

D. Substitute products: If the Contractor is unable to obtain the specified product in spite of his best endeavours, and if he
is unable to find and propose a suitable equal alternative he may propose a substitute for the Engineers review and
approval, which substitute shall be similar to, and as near as possible equal if not better than the quality, durability and
performance characteristics of the specified product. A substitute product will only be considered if the Contractor has
proved to the Engineers reasonable satisfaction that the specified product is unobtainable.

E. Engineers approval of alternatives and substitutes: The approval of any alternative or substitute product shall be
solely at the discretion of the Engineer and such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his liabilities
and obligations under the Contract. The burden of proof in satisfying the Engineer as to the suitability of any proposed
alternative or substitute product shall rest with the Contractor, and the Engineer may request and the Contractor shall
provide such supporting data, carry out such tests, etc., as the Engineer may reasonably require in order to satisfy
himself as to such suitability. Any delays or extra costs suffered by the Contractor because of his failure to propose
alternatives timorously so as to allow the Engineer reasonable time to review, or because of rejection of alternatives or
substitutes found by the Engineer to be unsuitable, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and he shall not be
entitled to additional payment nor extra time for completion in this respect.

F. Cost effect in approving alternatives and substitutes: Should any alternative or substitute product be approved by the
Engineer, any net increase in cost over and above the specified product shall be borne by the Contractor and, any net
saving in cost shall be to the benefit of the Employer.

Alternative or substitute products where permitted and approved, must conform to the Engineers designed space
requirements. Any such alternative or substitute product that does not meet such space requirements, whether
approved or not, shall be replaced at the Contractors expense and any modification of replaced systems thereby
arising shall also be made at his expense.

G. Submission of details of alternatives and substitutes: With any alternative or substitute proposal, submit copies of
detailed specifications, brochures, etc., and quotations, in respect of the alternative or substitute materials proposed,
for the Engineers review and approval.

PART 2 PRODUCT

Not Applicable.

ALTERNATIVES 01030-2

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Applicable.

END OF SECTION

MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035-1
SECTION 01035
MODIFICATIONPROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL


B. Documentation of variation in Contract Price and Time for Completion
C. Variation procedures
D. Construction Variation Directive
E. Price of Variation Order
F. Execution of Variation Orders
G. Correlation of Contractor submittals

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive variation documents, and be responsible for informing
others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of variations to the Work.

B. Variation Order Forms: Forms will be developed by the Engineers Representative and approved by the
Engineer.

1.03 DOCUMENTATION OF VARIATION IN CONTRACT PRICE AND TIME FOR COMPLETION

Pursuant to Clause No. 51 and 52 of the Particular Conditions, the Contractor shall :

A. Maintain detailed records of work done on a stipulated price basis. Provide full information required for
evaluation of proposed variations, and to substantiate costs of variations in the Work.

B. Document each quotation for a variation in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of the
quotation.

C. Provide additional data to support computations:
1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment.
2. Taxes, insurance, and guarantees or bonds.
3. Overhead and profit.
4. Justification for any variation in Time for Completion
5. Unit rates for additions/deletions.
Note : Price analysis is to be submitted if the contract rates are not applicable to subject variations.

D. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a stipulated price basis, with additional
information:
1. Origin and date of claim.
2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom.
3. Time records and wage rates paid.
4. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented.

1.04 VARIATION PROCEDURES

A. The Engineer will advise of minor variations in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or
Time of Completion as authorized in writing.

B. The Engineer may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed variation
with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a variation in Contract Time for executing the
variation with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested
price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within the requested time.

C. The Engineer may issue a Proposal Request which requests the Contractor to submit alternative options for
specific item(s), with all related drawings and specifications for the Engineers consideration.

D. The Contractor may propose a variation by submitting a request for variation to the Engineer, describing the
proposed variation and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the variation,
and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing
the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance
with the relevant section/s.

1.05 CONSTRUCTION VARIATION DIRECTIVE

A. The Owner may issue a directive to the Engineer/Engineer Representative instructing the Contractor to
proceed with a variation in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Variation Order.

B. After receiving this directive and within the period requested or within a reasonable period, the Contractor is
to submit his price and details to the Engineers Representative for issuing a Variation Order.

C. Promptly execute the variation in Work.

1.06 VARIATION ORDER PRICE

A. Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's priced quotation or Contractor's request for a Variation Order
by the Engineer, and negotiated with the Contractor, the Engineer will then determine the Variation Order
price.

1.08 EXECUTION OF VARIATION ORDERS

A. The Engineer will issue Variation Orders for signatures of parties for formalizing the variation order as
provided in the Conditions of the Contract.

1.09 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Variation
Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price.

B. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any variation in Time of Completion, revise sub-schedules to
adjust times for other items of work affected by the variation, and resubmit.

C. Promptly enter variations in Project Record Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED


ENDOF SECTION

CORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039-1
SECTION - 01039
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Coordination
B. Preconstruction conference
C. Site mobilisation conference
D. Progress meetings
E. Preinstallation conferences

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01050 - Field Engineering

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly
sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements.

B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in
service, such equipment.

C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated
diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts and conduit as closely as practicable; place runs
parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximum accessibility for other installations, for maintenance,
and for repairs.

D. In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets
with finish elements.

E. Coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for
portions of work designated for Employers partial occupancy.

F. After Employer occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in
accordance with Contract Documents, to minimise disruption of Employers activities.

1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Employer and Engineer will schedule a conference after Contractor has selected his major sub-trades and prior to signing
of Employer/Contractor Agreement.

B. Attendance Required; Employer, Engineer and Contractor.

C. Agenda:

1. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedules of values and progress schedule.
2. Designation of responsible personnel and manpower organization.
3. Procedures and processing of field decisions, shop drawings, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments,
proposal requests, variations, checklists and Contract closeout procedures.
4. Scheduling and sequence of work.

5. Use of premises by Employer and Contractor.
6. Employers requirements.

1.05 SITE MOBILISATION CONFERENCE

A. Engineer and Employer will schedule a conference at the Project Site prior to Contractor occupancy.

B. Attendance Required: Employer, Engineer, Contractor.

C. Agenda:

1. Use of premises by Employer and Contractor
2. Employers requirements
3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Contractor
4. Temporary Utilities provided by Contractor
5. Survey and building layout
6. Security and housekeeping procedures
7. Schedules
8. Procedures for testing
9. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
10. Requirements for start-up of equipment
11. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service construction period.
12. Guarantee period for all equipments.

1.06 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. The Engineer should schedule weekly and monthly construction progress meetings, co-ordination meetings and
preinstallation conferences, throughout progress of work for the proper management and coordination of the Contract and
as required by the Engineer.
B. The Engineer make physical arrangements, prepare agenda and distribute notice of each meeting to participants, three
days in advance of meeting date.

C. The Engineer will preside at meetings. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants,
to entities affected by decisions at meetings, with two copies to each of Engineer and Employer.

D. Location of Meetings: Conference Room on Site.

E. Attendance: Contractor, Project Manager, Subcontractors and Suppliers as appropriate to agenda; Employer, Engineer,
Professional Consultants.

F. Minimum Agenda:

1. Approval of minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of Work progress and CPM program.
3. Field observations, problems and decisions.
4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Review of off-site fabrication and deliver schedules.
7. Maintenance of progress schedule.
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10. Coordination of projected progress.
11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13. Safety.

14. Contractors Resources: management, Men, Money, Materials, Machinery.
15. Contractors on-site staff progress report.
16. Contractors Employers and Engineers Office Managements observations and remarks.
17. Other business relating to work.
18. Samples and mock-ups as required by the Engineer or the Employer before execution of the work.

G. Subcontractors Site Meetings :

1. The Contractor should hold meetings with appropriate subcontractors and suppliers shortly before main site progress
meetings to facilitate accurate reporting of progress.

1.07 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. When requires in individual specification Section, convene a preinstallation conference at work site prior to commencing
work of the Section.

B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by work of the Section.

C. Notify Engineer four days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes and distribute copies within two days after conference to
participants with two copies to Engineer.

E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures and coordination with related work.

PART 2 PRODUCT

Not Applicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Applicable.

END OF SECTION

PROJECT COORDINATION 01040-1
SECTION 01040

PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction
operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. General project coordination procedures.
2. Coordination Drawings.
3. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
4. Cleaning and protection.

1.02 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient
and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations with other Contractors
if any for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence coordinated with other Contractors if any, and
approved by the Engineer or Engineers Representative to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the work depends on installation of other components, before or after its
own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required
maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
4. Coordinate with other contractor(s) employed by the Employer, for all activities interfacing or
interfering with this work. Refer also to section 01340.

B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each Contractor involved, outlining special items
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at regular
coordination meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Employer and separate contractors where coordination of their
work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with
other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative
activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Schedules Preparation
2. Install and remove temporary facilities.
3. Delivery and processing of submittals.
4. Progress meetings.
5. Project closeout activities.

1.03 PROCEDURES

A. The Contractor shall comply with the procedures required by the Engineers Representative for the day to
day administration of the Contract with respect to submittals, safety, inspection, meetings, correspondence,
payment schedule, progress reports, etc. and the contract sum is deemed to include all costs associated
herewith.

PROJECT COORDINATION 01040-2
1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for installation
of products and materials. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates
maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components.
1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
3. Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and
conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Co-ordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of
uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

C. Conduct regular coordination meetings

ENDOF SECTION

CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-1
SECTION 01045

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The Contractor is responsible for all his cutting and patching works.

B. The Contractor will coordinate with Owner or other Contractors or statutory authority/ies if he requires to carryout
any cutting and patching works.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written request seven (7) days in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.

B. Include in request:
1. Identification of Project.
2. Location and description of affected work.
3. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
4. Description of proposed work, and products to be used.
5. Alternatives to cutting and patching, if available.
6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor or statutory authority, if and as involved.
7. Written permission of Owner or other Contractor or statutory authority/ies, if and as involved
8. Date and time the work will be executed.

1.04 APPROVAL

A. Do not proceed with cutting and patching works until approval in writing is received from the Engineers
Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to damage or movement
during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work.

C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and methods to
protect other portions of Project from damage.

B. Provide protection to other works or installations.

C. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work.

D. Maintain excavations free of water.

3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Execute cutting, fitting and patching to complete work.

B. Fit products together, to integrate with other work.

C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work.

D. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.

E. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.

F. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work with required temporary
support to hold in position.

G. Provide openings in finished works, as marked by Employer or other contractors or statutory authority/ies, if
and as involved

3.04 PERFORMANCE

A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to
receive patching and finishing.

B. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill as approved by the Engineer's Representative.
Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

C. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

D. Fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces.

E. At penetration of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely pack voids with
96kg/cu.m. density fibreglass material to full thickness of the penetrated element and seal both ends with
approved fire rated sealant. All complete to the satisfaction of the Engineer or Engineers Representative.

F. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or
natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

END OF SECTION

FIELD ENGINEERING 01050-1
SECTION 01050

FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Field Engineering Services.

B. Engineer or Engineer's Representative will identify control points and property line corner stakes.

1.02 STAFF QUALIFICATION

A. Professional diploma Surveyor or Engineer: About ten years experience in the discipline required for
specific service on Project.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name and resume of qualifications for Land Surveyor or Engineer before starting survey work.

B. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.

1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

B. On completion of major site improvements, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and site work.

C. Submit Record Documents under provisions of Section 01300.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, verify all measurements and be responsible for their
correctness. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual
measurements and the dimensions given in the Contract Documents. Any difference which may be found
shall be submitted to the Engineer or Engineer's Representative in writing for consideration before
proceeding with the works.

3.02 GENERAL

A. Site Bench Marks shall be accurately and safely established, protected, maintained and cleared away upon
completion of works or when no longer required all to the satisfaction of the Engineer or Engineer's
Representative. Such Benchmarks must be related to the nearest permanent Benchmark; fixed by the
related statutory authority.

B. Prepare a plan detailing the location of the Benchmarks and keep up to date throughout the operational
period of the Contract. Reproducible copies of the plan so prepared; shall be supplied to the Engineer or
Engineer's Representative, as and when it is required.

C. The Engineer or Engineer's Representative reserves the right to order levels to be taken at any time
considered necessary for the full and proper supervision and measurement of the works.

D. Before the works or any parts thereof are commenced the Contractor and the Engineer or their
Representatives shall together survey and take levels of the Site of the works and agree upon all particulars
on which setting out of the works shall be based.

E. Such levels shall be related to the Bench marks of aforesaid and plotted by the Contractor and after
agreement of the drawings shall be signed by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative and the
Contractor, and shall form the basis of setting out of the Works.

F. Failing such surveys and agreements being prepared and/or signed by the Contractor, the surveys of the
Engineer or Engineer's Representative shall be final and binding upon both parties.

G. The Contractor shall plot these levels and after they have been signed by the Engineer or Engineer's
Representative and the Contractor, the original with three (3) copies of it will be submitted to the Engineer or
Engineer's Representative and the Contractor shall bear the cost.

3.03 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS

A. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during
construction. Make no changes without prior written notice to Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

B. Promptly report to Engineer or Engineer's Representative the loss or destruction of any reference point or
relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. Replace dislocated survey control
points based on original survey control.

3.04 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

A. Establish, if required by Engineer or Engineer's Representative, other permanent bench marks on site,
referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project
Record Documents.

B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means:
1. Site improvements, including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement and utility
locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Building foundations, column locations, ground floor elevations, and the like.

C. Periodically verify layouts by same means.

D. Provide instruments and assistance for checking the laying out and levels.

3.05 LAYING OUT

A. Lay out the Works using methods and necessary instruments described in BS 5606 "Code of Practice for
Accuracy in Building" Section 5.

B. Obtain the true and accurate building lines from the Municipality and lay out the Works as shown on the
Drawings.

C. Submit details of methods and equipment to be used in laying-out the Works.

D. Check the levels and dimensions of the Site against those shown on the Drawings and record the results on a
copy of the Drawings. Notify the Engineer or Engineer's Representative in writing of any discrepancies and obtain
instructions before proceeding.

E. Inform the Engineer or Engineer's Representative when overall laying out is complete.

F. Arrange the setting out, erection, juxtaposition of components and application of finishes (working within the
practical limits of the design and Specification) to ensure that there is a satisfactory fit at junctions and that
the finished work has a well aligned, true and regular appearance.

G. Wherever satisfactory accuracy, fit and/or appearance of the work is likely to be critical or difficult to achieve,
obtain approval of proposals or of the appearance of the relevant aspects of the partially finished work as
early as possible.
H. Work which fails to meet the specified levels of accuracy must not be rectified without approval.

I. Submit proposals for such rectification and meet all costs arising, including effects on other work.

J. Allow for the possibility that approval will not be given, necessitating removal and replacement of the work.

END OF SECTION

REFERENCES 01090-1

SECTION 01090

REFERENCES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

Comply with all codes, regulations, specifications and standards referred to throughout the contract documents.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. All references to codes, regulations, specifications and standards referred to in the Contract Documents shall, unless
otherwise stated, mean the latest edition, amendment or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of
these Tender Documents. The Contractor shall obtain an original copy of the latest edition of all codes, regulations,
standards and technical literature referred to in the Contract Documents and the same shall be kept on the project site,
properly indexed and maintained in good order and available to the Engineer at all times.

B. Proof of Compliance: Whenever the Contract Documents require that a product complies with Federal Specification,
British Standard, ASTM Designation, ANSI Specification or other association, standards, etc., the Contractor shall
present an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that the product complies therewith. Where requested or
specified, submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance.

C. Where reference standard referred to herein is in the form of a recommendation or suggestion, such recommendation
or suggestion shall be deemed to be mandatory under this Contract unless conflicting with particular specifications
contained herein.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Where as shown, as indicated, as detailed, or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that
reference to the Drawings accompanying the Specifications is made unless otherwise state. Where as approved, as
reviewed, as accepted, or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the approval, direction,
requirement, permission, authorization review, or acceptance of the Engineer is intended, unless otherwise stated.

B. As used in the Contract Documents, provide shall be understood to mean provide complete in place, that is,
furnish and install.

PART 2 PRODUCT

Not Applicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Applicable.
END OF SECTION

PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-1
SECTION 01200

PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Pre-construction Conference
2. Pre-installation Conferences
3. Progress Meetings
4. Co-ordination Meetings

1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Pre-construction meeting: will be held within 7 days of the signing of the Contract and should be attended by
the Contractor and his major subcontractors together with the Engineer and Engineer's Representatives. The
meeting will be chaired by the Engineer.

B. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
1. Construction schedule.
2. Critical work sequencing.
3. Items required long delivery periods
4. Long hold-ups like backfill; curing periods; weather-proof enclosement of spaces; etc.
5. Designation of responsible personnel.
6. Procedures for processing field decisions and variation Orders.
7. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
8. Distribution of Contract Documents.
9. Lines of Communications
10. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
11. Preparation of record documents.
12. Use of the premises.
13. Parking availability.
14. Office, work, and storage areas.
15. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
16. Safety procedures.
17. First aid.
18. Security.
19. Working hours - Normal/Ramadan/Severe Summer/Other
20. Housekeeping.

1.03 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. Conduct a pre-installation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity that requires
coordination with other construction.


B. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the
installation, and its coordination or integration with other works, materials and installations that have
preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the Construction Manager and the Engineer's
Representative of scheduled meeting dates.
1. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity
under consideration at each pre-installation conference, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples.
g. Review of mock-ups.
h. Possible conflicts.
i. Compatibility problems.
j. Time schedules.
k. Weather limitations.
l. Manufacturer's recommendations.
m. Warranty requirements.
n. Compatibility of materials.
o. Acceptability of substrates.
p. Temporary facilities.
q. Space and access limitations.
r. Governing regulations.
s. Safety.
t. Inspecting and testing requirements.
u. Required performance results.
v. Recording requirements.
w. Protection.
2. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference, and the
approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the
Owner and the Engineer.
3. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate
whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene
the conference at the earliest feasible date.

1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Progress Meetings: Job site progress meetings will be held once a month, or as instructed by the Engineer's
Representative, to review the Contractor's Construction Schedule and to discuss work progress. Attendees
at this meeting shall include the Engineer and Engineers Representative, Contractor, approved
Subcontractors and other Contractors as required. The Engineer and the Engineers Representative shall
have the right to attend these meetings and shall be free to exercise their right at their separate discretions.
The job site progress meetings shall be convened as directed by the Engineer or Engineers Representative.
Such meetings will be chaired by the Engineer or Engineers Representative.

B. Agenda: Agenda for the forthcoming meeting will be circulated Seven (7) calendar days before the meeting.
Including topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the project.

C. Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of
significance that could affect progress.
Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's
Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind
schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule

revisions are required to insure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Time of
Completion.

D. Pre-Meeting Submittals: Three (3) days before each meeting, the Contractor must submit the following
information to the Engineer's Representative:
1. List of any variations in starting dates and in duration of outstanding activities from planned dates
and times.
2. Percentage completion in every activity.
3. Other information requested by the Engineer's Representative till say 2 days before the pre-
meeting submittal date.
4. Shop drawings submittals status log.
5. Contractor's submittals status log.
6. Material procurement status log.

1.05 COORDINATION MEETINGS

A. Conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals convenient for all parties involved. Project
coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular progress
meetings and pre-installation conferences.

B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for the
construction activities involved.

1.06 MINUTES OF MEETINGS

A. The proceedings of all meetings attended by the Engineer or the Engineers Representative shall be
recorded and minuted by the Engineers Representative. Distribution of the minutes of meeting shall be
done by Engineers Representative to all attendees and the concerned parties with a short/reasonable time.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

SUBMITTALS 01300-1
SECTION 01300

SUBMITTALS
(Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of
Architectural Works :
1. Product Data and Manufacturer's data.
2. Quality Assurance submittals.
3. Samples.
4. Mock-ups
5. Engineer & Engineer's Representative Action
6. Field and Engineering Data and Record

B. Other Submittals: Also refer to other Sections in Division 1 and other Specification Divisions and Sections
and other Contract Documents for requirements for other submittals.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Field Samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish
materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

B. Mock-ups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not
Samples.


A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction
activities at the Contractor's cost. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related
construction activities to avoid delay.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and
related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so
processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
The Engineer's Representative reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received.
3. Processing : To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to process
submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals.
a. Allow 14 days for initial review. Allow additional time if the Engineer's Representative
must delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.
b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal.
c. Allow the same period in (a) above again for re-processing each submittal.
d. No extension of Time for Completion will be authorised because of failure to transmit
submittals to the Engineer's Representative sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit
processing.

SUBMITTALS 01300-2
B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the
name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block.
1. Provide a space approximately 100 x 125mm on the label to record the Contractor's review and
signature and for Engineers action and remarks.
2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken.
1. Project name
2. Date
3. Name and address of the Engineer's Representative
4. Name and address of the Contractor
5. Name and address of the subcontractor
6. Name and address of the supplier
7. Name of the manufacturer
8. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
3. Contractor's Review:
1. Review submittals prior to transmittal; determine and verify field measurements, field
construction criteria, manufacturer's catalogue numbers, and conformance of submittal
with requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Coordinate submittals with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents.
3. Sign or initial each page of product data, and each sample label to certify compliance
with requirements of Contract Documents, identify as Coordinated Submittal. Notify
Engineer's Representative in writing at time of submittal, of any deviations from
requirements of Contract Documents.
4. Contractor's submission to contain complete information regarding all drawings,
materials used, and related items.
5. Do not fabricate products or begin work, which requires submittals until return of
submittal with Engineer's Representative acceptance.

C. Submittal Transmittal: Pack each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each
submittal to the Engineer's Representative using a transmittal form approved by the Engineer. The
Engineer's Representative will not accept submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.

On the transmittal, record all relevant information. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from
Contract Document requirements, including variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that
information complies with Contract Document requirements.
D. Submittal Procedures by Contractor
1. Samples : Three (3) sets of samples of each material or prefabricated component with transmittal
forms to the Engineer's Representative. Two (2) sets will be returned marked with the action
taken.
Maintain one (1) set of samples, as approved by the Engineer or the Engineer's Representative, at
the Project Site/sample room available for quality control comparisons throughout the course of
the construction activity.
2. Catalogues : Three (3) published copies of technical (not commercial) brochures, one of which
must be an original with transmittal forms to the Engineer's Representative. Brochures shall be in
English or accompanied by a certified English translation. Brochures in Arabic shall be acceptable
at the Engineer's Representative discretion.

E. Mock-up
1. Install at location/s and to the extent required for al important works.

F. Submittal of Correspondence :

SUBMITTALS 01300-3
1. All correspondence to the Engineer's Representative shall be submitted as follows:
a. Transmittals : One original and three photocopies of transmittals and letters, including
attachments/enclosures.
b. Letters : All correspondence from the Contractor to the Engineer's Representative shall
be submitted on A4 size paper. All correspondence shall clearly indicate:

1.04 PRODUCT DATA &MANUFACTURER'S DATA

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers specifications, manufacturer's
printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing. Also
submit standard coloured charts, catalogues cuts, standard wiring diagrams, painted performance curves,
operational range diagram, mill reports.

B. Study the Manufacturers instructions and Contract Documents, to combine the two to produce the most
stringent requirements to form the basis of contract price, execution method, material and time.

C. Submit standard product operating and maintenance manuals.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Quality Control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions,
manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the
Specifications.

B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or
installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer
certifying compliance with specified requirements.
1. Signature: Certificates shall be signed by the manufacturer's officer or other individual authorized
to sign documents on behalf of the manufacturer.
2. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from
approved testing agencies are specified in Section 01400 Quality Control.

C. Submittal and Approval Process shall be as follows :
1. Submission of material samples
2. Submission of material samples in system application
3. Installation of on-site mock-ups

1.06 SAMPLES

A. Submit full size, fully fabricated samples, cured and finished in the manner specified, and physically identical
with the material or product proposed for use.
1. Mount, display or pack samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated.
Prepare samples to match a designated sample where so indicated. Include the following
information.
a. Generic description of the sample.
b. Size limitations.
c. Sample source.
d. Product name or name of manufacturer.
e. Compliance with recognized standards.
f. Compliance with governing regulations.
g. Availability.

SUBMITTALS 01300-4
h. Delivery time, measured from the date of the Engineer's or Engineer's Representative
approval till the delivery on Project Site.
2. For review of kind, colour, pattern and texture for a check of these characteristics with other
elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between the submittal and the actual
component as delivered and installed :
a. Submit full range of manufacturers standard finishes (except when more restrictive or
definite requirements are specified for colours, textures and patterns) for Engineer's
representative selection.
b. Where variation in colour, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the
material or product represented by a sample, submit multiple units that show full range
of the variations.

B. Submission of Material Samples

Submit three samples of each material to the Engineers Representative, each at least 300 x 300mm in size.
No sample will be reviewed if it is submitted in sizes smaller than stated above. The Engineers
Representative shall review these samples and shall approve if they are as per the specifications or reject
and ask for new submittal if they are not as per the required specifications.

C. Submission of Material Samples in System Application

Submit three samples to the Engineers Representative for approval of finish building materials, shown
assembled in the proposed application for the project. The application samples must be at least 600 x
600mm in size to show the total assemblage of the intended materials. No sample would be reviewed if it is
submitted in sizes smaller than stated above. The Engineers Representative shall review these samples
and shall approve if they are as per the specifications or reject and ask for new submittal if they are not as
per the required specifications.

D. Should requirements relating to samples be mentioned in the Tender Documents elsewhere, the
combination and more stringent shall govern.

1.07 MOCK-UPS

A. After the approval of materials etc., the Contractor shall prepare full size mock-ups of such portion/s of the
building the Engineers Representative wishes to view on site at full scale. Exterior Mock-ups shall be
installed on the site, within a specific area approved on the site plan for permanent mock-up installations.
Interior Mock-ups shall be installed within the building shell structure at locations directed by Engineers
Representative.

B. Exterior mock-ups must be away from building construction works so that they are not damaged. They
should remain in place until the completion of majority of the finished building faade elements, represented
by them, on the main building.

C. Should requirements relating to mock-ups be mentioned in the Tender Documents elsewhere, the
combination and more stringent shall govern.

1.08 ENGINEER AND ENGINEER'S REPRESENTATIVE ACTION

A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required, the Engineer or
Engineer's Representative will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly,
compatible with the requirements of the review, generally in 14 calendar days but in less time when a
request for this has been accepted by the Engineer's Representative or more time when that is unavoidable
in the Engineer's Representative's opinion.

B. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.

SUBMITTALS 01300-5

C. Responsibility for Review:
1. The Engineer and Engineer's Representative review of submittals by the Contractor is for general
conformance with the design concept and information given in the contract Documents and such
review or approval shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any deviations from the
requirements of Contract Documents.
2. The Engineer's and Engineer's Representative review shall not be construed as a complete check
nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any kind in submittals, or from the
necessity of furnishing any work required by the Contract Documents, which may have been
omitted on the submittals. The Engineer and Engineer's Representative will review and will return
them to the Contractor with the Engineer's stamp applied thereto. No acceptance or approval of
submittals, nor any indication or request marked by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative on
any submittal, shall constitute an authorization for any increase in the Contract Sum or Time for
Completion or a change in the Contract requirements.
3. The Contractor will not be relieved from responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of
the Contract after approval of submittals by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative or such
deviation at the time of submitting submittals. The Contractor shall indicate on resubmitted
submittals, all revisions as well as those requested by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.
4. Comments by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative which increase Contract cost or time of
completion shall be brought to the Engineer's or Engineer's Representative attention before
proceeding with the Works.

D. Action Stamp :
1. Each submittal will be returned to the Contractor stamped or marked by the Engineer or
Engineer's Representative indicating the appropriate action as follows:
Action A : APPROVED means that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may
proceed.
Action B : APPROVED SUBJECT TO COMMENTS OR APPROVED AS NOTED
means that fabrication, manufacture, or construction may proceed provided
submittal complies with the Engineer's or Engineer's Representative's
comments. If, for any reason, the Contractor cannot comply with the
notations, the Contractor shall make revisions and resubmit as described for
submittals stamped RESUBMIT.
Action C : NOT APPROVED AND RESUBMIT means that the submittal does not
comply with the Contract Documents and that fabrication, manufacturer or
construction shall not proceed. Submittals stamped RESUBMIT are not
permitted on the Site of the Works and are not to be used. The Contractor
shall make the required revisions and resubmit.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct location of his works irrespective of approval by
the Engineer or Engineer's Representative and shall pay all costs and expenses incurred by other
contractors, if any, due to improper location of his works.
3. After submittals have been approved by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative they shall not
be departed from, unless resubmitted and approved by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative
or modified by Variation Order as provided under the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

SUBMITTALS 01300-6
PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

ENDOF SECTION

CPM SCHEDULES 01315-1
SECTION 01315

CPMSCHEDULES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the Critical Path Method (CPM) of
scheduling and reporting progress of the Work.
1. The work under this clause consists of the scheduling and reporting procedures required to be carried
out by the Contractor in conjunction with the progress of the project.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Critical Path Method (CPM): A method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are
arranged based on activity relationships and network calculations determine when activities can be performed and
the critical path of the Project.

B. Construction Schedule(s): The Contractor's developed schedule(s) for execution of the Contract that meets
the contract requirements for the performance of this contract and the requirements of the Construction
Program.

C. Contractor's cost loaded Construction Schedule: The Contractor's approved CPM schedule with assigned
cost values based on the priced Bills of Quantities and Schedule of Rates (Document III-4) that total to the
contract lump sum price. See clause 1.08.

D. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that establishes the
minimum overall project duration, which shall equal the Contract Period or the Extend Contract Period
approval by the Engineer.

E. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing the activities and activity relationship.
F. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling
the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path.
2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be started.

G. Event: An event is the starting or ending point of an activity.

H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement - more particularly the starting time
and completing time of every critical activity.

I. Float is the measure of leeway in activity performance. Accumulative float time belongs to the Employer.
1. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early
start of the following activity.
2. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting
the planned project completion date.

1.03 CPMSCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting adequate planning data and acceptable cost distribution
information for the development and maintenance of the Contractor's cost loaded construction schedule
(hereinafter referred to as the "Construction Schedule"), all to the approval of the Engineer or Engineer's
Representative detailed hereafter.


B. The Contractor shall use a computerized precedence Diagram CPM technique in preparing the Construction
Schedule. The software proposed to be used by the Contractor for the CPM is to be approved by the Engineer or
Engineer's Representative prior to generation of the construction schedule.
C. The Contractor shall develop the construction schedule demonstrating fulfillment of all contract requirements by
cost loading construction schedule activities. Each milestone activity should represent the related construction
activities hammocked within it by using true connections to reflect the progress on the milestone activity as
measured on the hammocked construction activities. "Summary collection" activities are not accepted as
hammocking tools.

D. Each revision of the construction schedule shall be signed by the duly authorised representative of the
Contractor and these documents, upon approval by the Engineer or the Engineer's Representative, shall
thereupon become incorporated in to the contract documents of the project.

E. Failure by the Contractor to submit such information punctually and in accordance with the contract
requirements may result in Contractor being penalised in the amount of KD 50/= per incident which shall be
deducted from monies due to him.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor's Representative: The Contractor shall designate a well experienced Scheduling Engineer (see
elsewhere for qualifications etc.) who shall be responsible for the content and development of the
Contractor's Construction schedule. This representative shall have direct control and complete authority to
act on behalf of the Contractor in fulfilling the requirements of the Construction Schedule requirements and
such authority shall not be interrupted throughout the duration of the contract.

1.05 CONTRACTORS CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE DEVELOPMENT

A. Within ten (10) days of the Signing of Contract, the contractor shall meet with the Engineer's Representative
to review the scheduling requirement of the project. This review will include the specific requirements of the
Contractor regarding restraints and milestones, including the interrelation with sub-contractors, if any, as
they relate to the overall construction programme. The Contractor will present restraints, if any, foreseen by
himself in the proposed Construction Schedule that may affect the construction programme.

B. Within twenty-one (21) days of the Signing of Contract, the contractor shall submit for the Engineer's
approval, the detailed construction schedule in a bar-chart time-scaled format, to show the sequence and
interdependence of activities required for complete performance of all items of work under the contract or
portion thereof Further this schedule shall reflect the milestones required by the contract documents. In
preparing the construction schedule, the contractor shall:
1. Exercise care to produce a clear, legible, and accurate diagram. Activities related to specific areas
of the project shall be grouped on the diagram for ease, understanding, and simplification. The
diagram shall show the following for each construction activity, where applicable.
a. Concise description of the work
b. Early start and finish dates
c. Number of calendar/working days
d. Manpower loading
e. Cost loading
f. Equipment & Machinery Loading
g. Total Float of each activity.
2. Include any trade or material restraints to indicate the movement of trades who are performing
major work.
3. Should the Contractor's scheduling software allow open ends to be shown, critical or not critical,
then the option of not critical will be adopted.
4. Demonstrate work activities in the Contractor's Construction Schedule to have maximum duration
of fifteen to thirty (15-30) days as approved by the Engineers Representative with not more than

2% exceeding these limits, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer or Engineer's
Representative except as to non construction activities (such as procurement of materials, delivery
of equipment).
5. The Construction Schedule developed above shall not be changed throughout the duration of the
project without getting prior approval from the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.
C. Include the time and/or labor and/or equipment required for activities other than actual construction; such as
aging periods, drying periods, curing periods etc.

D. Include the time and/or labor and/or equipment required for obtaining approval, placing order, manufacture,
shipping, custom clearance and transportation to site of all materials and equipment.

E. Include the time and/or labor and/or equipment required for meeting the following deadlines:-
1. Approval to Fire Protection and Fire Alarm equipment and working drawings shall be obtained
from the relevant authorities by a maximum of three (3) months from signing of the contract.
2. Municipal Cleanliness Certificate (NADAFA) shall be obtained a minimum of forty five (45) days
before the Turn Over Date.
3. Approval to Electrical and HVAC As-built drawings shall be obtained from the relevant authorities a
minimum of thirty (30) days before the Turn Over Date.
4. Approval of Telephone Works shall be obtained from the relevant authorities a minimum of Thirty
(30) days before the Turn Over Date.
5. Water supply and drainage works, including connections with their mains, if available, shall be
made a minimum of thirty (30) days before the Turn Over Date.
6. Permanent power (or power through generators) shall be obtained for the works and HVAC
commissioned a minimum of sixty (60) days before the Turn Over Date.
7. All soft landscaping planting shall be programmed to take advantage of the last planting season of
the contract period.
8. Kuwait Fire Brigades approval to the whole works including the Fire Protection and Fire Alarm
Works shall be obtained a minimum fifteen (15) days before the Turn Over Date.
9. All equipments shall be tested and commissioned with permanent electricity supply maximum by
the Turn Over Date.
10. The Contractor shall begin submitting (1) As-built Drawings (2) Spare Materials, and (3)
Guarantees and Warranties, three (3) months before the Turn Over Date and obtain Engineers
Representatives approval to the same, and finish the submittal of all the above and including
proper storage of all spare materials latest one month after the end of Turn Over Date.
11. The Contractor shall obtain from the Engineers Representative and begin attending to the snag
list/s latest one month before the Turn Over Date and complete all snags latest one month after
the Turn Over Date.

F. Within a week from the approval of the Contractors Construction Schedule and at monthly interval
thereafter, the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval, a detailed schedule developed from the
approved Construction Schedule, covering a period of the next 60 days and relating to the contractor's daily
work activities.

G. The Contractor shall submit the undermentioned supporting data with the submittal of his Construction
Schedule and any successive updates and revisions in an approved format by the Engineer or Engineer's
Representative.
1. The proposed number of working days per week.
2. The holidays, and other non-working days (except Fridays), including days lost due to diminished
productivity during Ramadan, observed during the duration of the contract (by date).
3. The planned number of shifts per day.
4. The number of hours per shift.
5. The planned usage of major construction equipment on the site, on a monthly basis.

6. The planned procurement and delivery of materials on a monthly basis.
7. The average weekly manpower (e.g. number of carpenters, steel fixers, labourers, etc.) usage for
each trade to be employed for the works considering activities, duration and production rates.
8. Explanation of all changes in logic in duration, manpower, and equipment.
9. Actual start dates and completion dates of activities already completed.
10. Computer generated text reports listing activities with their early and late start and finish dates
sorted by activity number, by early start and by criticality.
H. Failure to include any element of the works required for the performance of the contract shall not excuse the
contractor from completing all work required within any applicable completion date of each phase or the
whole of the project, notwithstanding the Engineer's Representative's approval of the Construction Schedule.

1.06 CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS LOG

A. Within 10 days from the Signing of Contract, the Contractor should meet with the Engineer's Representative
to explain the requirements and contents of the Contractor's Submittals Log.

B. After 7 days from the above meeting, the Contractor to submit his Submittals Log, listing all the items
requiring the Engineer's or the Engineer's Representative approval as per the Contract Documents, for the
Engineer's Representative initial review.

C. Within ten (10) days after the Engineer's approval of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, resubmit the
Contractor's Submittals Log, for the Engineer's Representative review and approval, after inserting all
particular dates and data from approved schedule.

D. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Engineer's
Representative, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post
copies in the Project meeting room and field office.

When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.

E. Updating: Revise and update the schedule in a regular manner, and submit (48) hrs prior to progress
meeting for the Engineer's Representative review.

F. Format: Utilize format as provided by the Engineer's Representative and approved by the Engineer.

1.07 CONTRACTOR'S PROCUREMENT LOG

A. Within 10 days from the Signing of Contract, the Contractor should meet with the Engineer's Representative
to explain the requirements and contents of the Contractor's Procurement Log.

B. After 7 days from above meeting, the Contractor to submit his Procurement Log, for the Engineer's
Representative initial review, including all those items required to be submitted as per the Contract
Documents.

C. After the development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submit the Contractor's
Procurement Log within 10 days, for the Engineer's Representative review and approval, after inserting all
particular dates and data from approved schedule, manufacturers/suppliers and agents confirmations.

D. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Engineer's
Representative, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with procurement dates indicated. Post
copies in the Project meeting room and field office. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and
post in the same locations.

E. Updating: Revise and update the Log in a regular manner, and submit (48) hrs prior to progress meeting for
the Engineer's Representative review.


F. Format: Utilize format as provided by the Engineer's Representative and approved by the Engineer.

G. The Contractor, in addition to above, will be required to provide, at any time required by the Engineer, full
and complete details of all product procurement data relating to all manufactured products which have been
ordered and/or procured by the Contractor for incorporation in the works.

H. Such details shall include copies of Letters of Credit, product order forms, confirmations from manufacturers
and/or suppliers, request for quotations, letters of enquiry, etc.

1.08 UPDATING OF CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor shall submit an updated Construction Schedule every three months.

B. Acceptance of the updated construction schedule and all supporting data is contingent upon compliance with
all other articles of this section and any other previous agreements or requirements made with or by the
Engineer or his representative.

1.09 ADJUSTMENT AND REVISIONS

A. Time for completion will be adjusted only in accordance with the provisions of legal clauses and conditions
and its amendments in particular conditions. In the event the Contractor requests an adjustment of the time
of completion, he shall furnish such justification and supporting data as the Engineer's Representative may
deem necessary for evaluation by the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor will be entitled to an
extension of Time for Completion. Submission of proof based on revised activity, logic, duration, and costs is
obligatory with any request.
B. The Contractor shall submit with every request, his revised Construction Schedule whenever the actual field
progress of the work does not conform to the latest approved Construction Schedule in force at the time of
the alleged delay.

C. The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time after receipt of a request for extension of time, advise the
Contractor through the Engineer's Representative of his decision.

D. When the Engineer has not yet made a decision as to any extension of time, and the parties are unable to
agree as to the amount of the adjustment to be reflected in the construction programme, and should the
Contractor choose to reflect the requested amount of time adjustment in this Construction Schedule, he will
do so at his own risk. Such reflection of time adjustment shall only serve the purpose of monitoring the
schedule of the works until such time as the Owner has made the final determination as to any extension of
time. The Contractor will revise his Construction Schedule thereafter in accordance with the Engineer's
decision and act and perform the works accordingly.

E. The Contractor shall submit, as requested by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative, a revision to the
Construction Schedule for any of the following reasons:
1. When delays in submittals or deliveries or work stoppage are encountered which make replanning
or rescheduling of the work necessary.
2. When the schedule does not represent the actual execution and progress of the works as being
performed in the field.

1.10 SCHEDULING SYSTEM

A. The Engineer's Representative has established Primavera Project Manager software (for windows) as the
standard scheduling application for this project. The latest version of this software shall be used to develop
all CPM construction schedules. The Construction Schedules information and supported data to be provided
on data diskettes compatible for use on the Engineer or Engineer's Representative computer system.

1.11 SUBMITTALS

A. All the submittals of the project construction schedule (for example but not limted to Master Schedule and
Detail Contractor Construction Schedule, Cost loaded construction
schedule/Revisions/Reports/Charts/Supporting data) shall be in soft and hard coloured copy (3 copies for
the Hard coloured copies).
B. The soft copy (electronic files) shall be compatible for use on the computer system of Engineer and
Engineers Representative.

C. The Contractor shall ensure that the provided floppy diskettes are free from any virus. The Contractor will
be held liable for any damages caused to the Engineers Representative if he provides virus inflected disks.


D. The hard copy shall be :
1. According to a format approved by the Engineers Representative.
2. 3 color copies in A0 or A3 size as required by the Engineers Representative.

E. The Contractor has to submit the following reports:
1. Monthly status report which shows detailed activities, actual start and completion dates, percent
complete or remaining duration, and any other requirement by the Engineer's Representative.
2. Material monthly status report which includes material description, unit, material delivered (during
the month, accum), material planned (during the month, accum), adjusted by V.0., variance
(quantity, %) and any other requirements requested by the Engineer's Representative.
3. Weekly Manpower Report that includes the following in accordance with the approval of the
Engineer's Representative:
a. Profession
b. Average Number
c. Average working days
d. Average working hours
e. Total man-hours
f Total man-days.
4. Weekly production report which includes the following:
a. Description of major work items
b. Contract quantity
c. Quantity installed during the week
d. Quantity installed to-date
e. Percent of the above

The number and type of the description of the work items shall be as required by the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

SHOP, RECORD AND AS BUILT DRAWINGS 01340-1
SECTION 01340

SHOP, RECORD AND AS BUILT DRAWINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittal of Shop, Record and As Built
Drawings and other miscellaneous quality control submittals.

B. Shop, Record and As Built Drawings include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Fabrication drawings.
2. Installation drawings.
3. Setting diagrams.
4. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
5. Templates and patterns.
Standard information prepared without specific reference to the project is not Shop, Record or as Built
Drawings.

C. Quality control submittals include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Design data.

D. Related Sections : The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Section 01040 "Project Coordination" specifies requirements governing preparation and submittal
of required coordination drawings.
2. Section 01050 "Field Engineering"
3. Section 01400 "Quality Control" specifies requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports
and the erection of mock-ups.
4. Section 01700 "Contract Closeout" specifies requirements for submittal of project record
documents, including copies of drawings, at project closeout.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. "Shop Drawings" shall establish actual plans, section and details of all construction assembled,
manufactured or fabricated items, indicate proper relation to adjoining work, amply design details whether or
not included in contract drawings of all work including but not limited to civil, architectural, interiors,
mechanical, electrical and site works in proper relation to physical spaces and incorporate minor changes of
design or construction to suit actual conditions at no additional cost.

B. "Record Drawings" are a record of the works actually installed as the work progresses including records of
all changes and deviations from the Contract Documents.

C. "As-Built Drawings" embody the latest amendment of shop drawings including variations to the Contract to
the standards set out in BS 308 part 2.


1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES BY CONTRACTOR

A. Drawings - For approval, every time : Three/Four (3 or 4) paper prints of each shop, record and as-built
drawing with transmittal forms to the Engineers Representative.

B. Drawings - After approval, for record and distribution : Three (3) paper prints of to the Engineers
Representative and more to all concerned sub-contractors as necessary

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS IF ANY

A. Should the Contractor be required to carry out any design, then design layouts provided shall be for the
propose of general guidance. The Contractor is required to submit full design shop drawings, complete with
calculations, catalogues etc. for the Engineers and Engineers representative scrutiny and approval before
ordering materials or proceeding with the work on site.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy
standard printed information as the basis of Shop Drawings.
1. Include the following information on Shop Drawings.
a. Dimensions using SI units.
b. Identification of products and materials included.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
2. Number shop drawings for each section of the works consecutively and the numbering system
shall be retained throughout all revisions.
3. Dimension: Metric measurements shall be used in all documents and drawings.
4. The size of shop drawings will be either A0 or A3 depending upon the content of the drawing and
as agreed by the Engineers Representative.
5. Shop Drawings shall bear the contractor's stamp and signature certifying that they have been
coordinated and checked by the Contractor for completeness and compliance with the Contract
and all respective sub-contractors, vendors and each subcontractor and each other contractor
shall indicate his approval on the reproducible original shop drawing/composite shop drawing.
In the event any one of the other contractors employed or to be employed by the Owner is not on
board in a timely manner, then coordination is to be done based on design drawings made
available by the Engineer or his representative. The Engineer or his representative will not accept
any shop drawing without this necessary coordination step having been completed.
6. Each shop drawing shall be clearly marked to indicate which product or item is being submitted for
consideration and each product or item shall be marked for identification with the applicable page
and paragraph number of the Specification and/or the detail and sheet number of the Contract
Drawings.
7. The Contractor shall submit composite Shop Drawings coordinating the work of his sub-
contractors for mechanical, electrical, structural architectural and site work. The composite
drawings shall be in sufficient detail to show overall dimensions of ductwork, piping conduit,
equipment, fixtures, structural members and related architectural features, and shall show
clearance between such work. The Contractor will, apart from individual trade drawings submit
composite co-ordinated shop drawings showing sections, elevations, reflected plans etc. resolving
all conflicts in level, alignment, access space etc.
8. Shop Drawings shall show in detail, materials, dimensions, thickness, assembly, joints,
attachments, relation to adjoining work, and all other pertinent data and information. In checking
shop drawings, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions and site conditions and shall check and
coordinate the shop drawings of any Section or Trade with the requirements of all other Sections
or Trades of other contractors if any; as related thereto, as required for proper and complete
installation and execution of the works. The works shall conform to the Contract Drawings or to
such other Drawings as may be issued from time to time during the progress of the Works by the
Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

9. The Contractor, is required, as described elsewhere, to provide design (where it is Contractor's
responsibility to carryout design), co-ordination, installation, shop and builder's drawings,
composite drawings co-ordinated between architectural , structural and services works and other
information as appropriate, collectively referred to as shop drawings. Allow for the completion of
all such drawings, checking and inspection by the Engineer's Representative and any subsequent
amendment, re-submission(s), and re-inspection(s), when preparing the Construction Schedule for
the Works and checking by Contractor.
10. Engineer's Representative Review: The Engineer's Representative will note any comments on one
copy of the drawings, date and sign to show that they have been inspected, then return to the
Contractor. Review of drawings, and any comments made by the Engineer's Representative will
not relieve the Contractor, subcontractors and/or suppliers of responsibility for compliance with
Contract requirements, design, documentation and checking as appropriate.
11. Amendments: Ensure that any necessary amendments to drawings are made in accordance with
any comments of the Engineer's Representative and resubmit without delay. Unless resubmission
is not required, obtain copies of amended drawings, check, re-submit to the Engineer's
Representative ensuring incorporation of necessary further amendments all as before.
12. Distribution of final version: Obtain final version of all drawings, submit the required number of
copies to the Engineer's Representative additional copies as appropriate to all concerned
subcontractors and suppliers, and keep at least one copy on Site. Ensure that work is carried out
in accordance with the final drawings.
13. Variations: Should any amendment to drawings required by the Engineer's Representative, or any
discrepancy, or divergence be considered a variation, notify the Engineer's Representative without
delay and in any case within 7 days, and do not proceed with ordering, fabrication, erection or
installation until subsequently instructed.

1.05 RECORD DRAWING

A. As the work progresses the Contractor shall maintain on a continuous basis a complete and accurate record of all
changes and deviations from the Contract Documents which shall be kept at the Site for inspection by the
Engineer, his representative, or Owners Representative.

1.06 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall prepare and furnish for the approval of the Engineer and Engineer's representative
accurate as built drawings embodying as a minimum all shop drawings and record drawings etc., or their
latest amendments, including variations to the Contract to the standards set out in BS 308.

B. The as built drawings shall show the works as executed complete with existing and finished levels and all
other things necessary to form an accurate pictorial record of the finished work.

C. Prior to the preparation of as built drawings the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineers
representative as to the size of drawings, quality of transparent sheets, method of drawing and other relevant
details.

D. All as built drawings shall be numbered and shall have a number series approved by the Engineers
representative. A drawing index shall be provided. All negatives of drawings so prepared shall be dated and
signed by the Contractor and, when approved, countersigned by the Engineer's representative.

E. The Contractor shall submit and resubmit till final approval by the Engineers Representative, four number of
copies during each submittal.

F. Finally submit after approval, properly identified in a permanent manner, four hard copies hung in parts for
the Engineers approval, in mobile drawings racks and diskettes stored in box/es also properly identified in a
permanent way, of all as-built drawings using the latest format of Autocad, as well as the format which is
compatible with the Owners computer system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED
END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 01380-1
SECTION 01380

CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for construction photographs.

B. Related Sections: The following Section contains requirements that relate to construction photographs:
Section 01300 Submittals specifies general requirements for submitting construction photographs.

C. Compare with the requirements listed elsewhere and comply with the total combined requirements.

1.02 ASSISTANCE TO OTHERS

A. The Contractor shall allow all reasonable facilities for the responsible Government Authorities to take
photographs and films or televise the works at no additional expense to the Employer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

2.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Before beginning the works at the site, take 30 colour photographs and submit in albums as during
construction photographs detailed below.

2.02 PHOTOGRAPHS ETC. DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Photographs and Albums
1. Take 30 colour project photographs (4 sets) in accordance with requirements as indicated, to best
show the status of construction and progress since taking previous photographs.
Frequency: Take photographs monthly, coinciding with the cut-off date associated with each
Application for Payment.
Vantage Points: Comply with the Engineer's Representatives directions concerning desired
vantage points for shots.
Use the same vantage points each time to create a time-lapse sequence when so directed.
2. Identification: Provide an attached narrative underneath each photograph indicating:
Name of the Project.
Date the photograph was taken.
Vantage Point: Description of vantage point, in terms of location, direction (by compass
point), and elevation or story of construction.
Vantage Point: Provide notation of vantage point marked for location and direction of shot on
a key plan of the site and building. Indicate elevation (story height).
3. Prints: Submit 4 album mounted and labelled prints of size 120 x 180mm of each view required
directly to the Engineer's Representative within 7 days of taking photographs.
4. Each album shall have a printed cover lettered to the approval of the Engineers Representative.

CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 01380-2
5. Extra Prints: When requested by the Engineer's Representative, the photographer shall prepare
extra prints of photographs. The photographer shall distribute these prints directly to designated
parties who will pay the costs for the extra prints.

ENDOF SECTION

QUALITY CONTROL 01400-1
SECTION 01400

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 QUALITY CONTROL (GENERAL)

A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, Site conditions, and workmanship,
to produce work of specified quality.

B. Provide and maintain effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections
and tests of all items of work, including those of Sub-Contractors, to ensure compliance with Contract
Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the Sections of work of the Specifications. Furnish
appropriate facilities, instruments and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function.
Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence.

C. Comply with manufacturers' instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. Should instructions
conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer or Engineer's Representative before
proceeding.

1.02 WORKMANSHIP

A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate
more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.

B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,
vibration, and racking.

1.03 QUALITY CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION

A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection:
1. Preparatory Inspection : Perform this inspection prior to beginning of work on any definable feature
of the Works. Include a review of the Contract requirements with the supervisors directly
responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products and
equipment have been tested, submitted and approved, check to assure that provisions have been
made for required control testing, examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has
been completed; physically examine materials and equipment to assure that they conform to Shop
Drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand.
2. Initial Inspection : Perform this inspection as soon as the work commences on a representative
portion of a particular feature; review control testing for compliance with Contract requirements.
3. Follow-up Inspection : Perform these inspections on a regular basis, to assure continuing compliance
with Contract requirements until completion of that particular work.
4. Documentation of CQC Program : Identify the inspections herein before specified and document in
the CQC report with a brief description of the subject matter covered and the personnel involved.

1.04 QUALITY CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS

A. When required by individual Specifications Section, submit manufacturer's certificate, in duplicate, that
products meet or exceed specified requirements.

B. The CQC representative at the fabricating plant shall be finally responsible to comply with the contract
requirements and for the release of the fabricated items for shipment to the Site. The CQC representative at the
Site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible
for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-Site storage and during
erection, installation and maintenance. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before it is used, final
acceptance of an item by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative is based on its satisfactory incorporation into
the works and acceptance of the completed Project.

1.05 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL (CQC) PLAN

A. Furnish a schedule outlining the procedure, instructions and reports to be used as follows:
1. Quality Control Organization.
2. Qualification of personnel.
3. Authority and responsibility of personnel.
4. Schedule of inspections and tests with personnel assigned to each task and duration of each task.
5. Test met hods.
6. Methods of performing and documenting control operations.

1.06 QUALITY CONTROL REPORTS

A. Inspections shall be recorded and submitted daily on approved forms certifying items correctly installed and
items found to be defective with a statement on corrective measures taken.

1.07 LATEST DOCUMENTS

A. The Contractor's Quality Control program shall provide for procedures which will assure that the applicable
portions of the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings and instructions required by the Contract are used for
fabrication, testing and inspection.

1.08 TESTING AND INSPECTION DEVICES

A. Provide and maintain all measuring and testing devices, equipment, instruments and supplies necessary to
accomplish the required site testing and inspection. All measuring and testing devices shall be calibrated
periodically against certified standards.

1.09 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES

A. When specified in respective Specification Sections, require supplier, manufacturer or appointed
representative to provide qualified personnel to observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and
installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance equipment as applicable,
and to make appropriate recommendations.

B. Representative shall submit written report to Engineer or Engineer's Representative listing observations and
recommendations.

1.10 ENGINEER'S CHECKING AND CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION PROCEDURES

A. To facilitate the Engineer's Representative checking of the quality of workmanship, compliance with
Specifications, etc., the Contractor shall submit signed "Request for Inspection" or "Check" lists, provided by
the Engineer's Representative and approved by the Engineer. The list shall be deemed to constitute:
1. A request by the Contractor for the Engineer's Representative to inspect the preparation or
completion of a certain element of the work in a particular location before proceeding with the next
stage in such work.

2. A representation by the Contractor to the effect that the work for which he is requesting inspection has
been properly coordinated between all trades, complies with the applicable Specifications, shop drawings
and other data included in the Contract or approved by the Engineer's Representative, and is complete in
itself and ready for such inspection and for the next stage of related work.

B. "Request for Inspection" Lists shall be dated and numbered in approved sequence and submitted for each of
the elements of the Works. Each of the "Request for Inspection" lists shall be signed by all concerned sub-
contractors thereby warranting that all trades have been properly coordinated and completed prior to the
"Request for Inspection" list submission.

C. In addition to the signature of all concerned subcontractors upon the "Request for Inspection" lists required
by the preceding Sub-Clause, such shall also submit, to the Engineer's Representative through the
Contractor, "Request for Inspection" for all mechanical and electrical elements of the works upon completion
and testing of sections thereof, prior to embedding in concrete, covering up with finishes, etc. Mechanical
and Electrical "Requests for Inspection" shall be signed by the Contractor and his concerned Sub-Contractor
on a form and in a manner as required and approved by the Engineer's Representative.

D. In case the Project is organised on the lines of multi-package contracts, a proposal for integrated "Requests
for Inspection" regime will be granted if found acceptable to the Engineer and the Engineer's Representative.

1.11 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Materials, products and equipment shall be properly packaged and protected to prevent damage during
transportation and handling.

B. More detailed requirements for transportation and handling are specified under the technical Sections.

1.12 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected. erected, used,
cleaned and conditioned as directed by the respective manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements
are specified.

1.13 IDENTIFYING MARKINGS

A. Name plates and other identifying markings shall not be fixed on exposed surfaces of manufactured items
installed in finished spaces.

1.14 PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

A. Refer to Section 01600.

1.15 TESTING OF MATERIALS

A. All materials and work will be tested as required in the Specifications and Testing shall be carried out at the
Contractor's expense at any of the following:
1. MPW Research Station Testing Facilities
2. Approved testing agency or approved testing laboratory.

The Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the Engineer or Engineer's Representative to the tests to be
conducted at any or all of the above facilities.

B. The Contractor shall allow for all necessary labour, containers, wrappings and labelling in connection with
the samples for testing and for all transport charges.

C. Samples for testing will be taken at the place of origin, or working site or from the works as appropriate and
as required by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.


D. The Contractor shall provide all facilities including testing equipment in connection with tests required to be
conducted at site.

1.16 MOCK-UPS

A. When required by individual specification section, erect complete full-scale mock-up of assembly at project
site. Test will be performed in accordance with this section. Remove mock-up at completion, when approved
and directed by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

B. Mock-up may remain as finished work if so indicated in specification section and approved.
C. All relative further materials and workmanship shall conform to standards of the approved mock-up.

1.17 PROJECT CONTROL FORMS

A. Format of required Project Control Forms to be provided by the Engineer to the Contractor at the
commencement of the project and updated/supplemented as may be necessary from time to time thereafter.
The Contractor will be required to utilize these formats/forms as directed by the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410-1
SECTION 01410

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction
operations including but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Selection and payment.
2. Contractor submittals.
3. Laboratory responsibilities.
4. Laboratory reports.
5. Limits of testing laboratory authority.
6. Contractors responsibilities.
7. Schedule of inspections and tests.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C802 Practice for Conducting and Inter laboratory Test Program to Determine the Precision of
Test Methods for Construction.

B. ASTM C1021 Practice for Laboratories Engaged in the Testing of Building Sealants.

C. ASTM C1077 Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in
Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.

D. ASTM C1093 Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry.

E. ASTM D290 Recommended Practice for Bituminous Mixing Plant Inspection.

F. ASTM D3740 Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and
Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.

G. ASTM D4561 Practice for Quality Control Systems for an Inspection and Testing Agency for
Bituminous Paving Materials.

H. ASTM E329 Practice for Use in the Evaluation of Inspection and Testing Agencies as Used in
Construction.
I. ASTM E543 Practice for Determining the Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Agencies.

J. ASTM E548 Practice for Preparation of Criteria for Use in the Evaluation of Testing Laboratories and
Inspection Bodies.

K. ASTM E699 Practice for Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality Assurance,
and Evaluating Building. Components in Accordance with Test Methods Promulgated by
ASTM Committee E6.

1.03 SELECTION AND PAYMENT

A. Employment and payment for services of either the MPW laboratory or any other testing laboratory approved
by the Engineers representative to perform specified inspecting and testing, by Contractor.


B. Employment of testing laboratory in no way relieves the Contractor of obligation to perform Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.


A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C802, ASTM C1021, ASTM C1077, ASTM C1093, ASTM D290, ASTM
D3740, ASTM D4561, ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM E548, ASTM E699.

B. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State of Kuwait.

C. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services.

D. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either
National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.

1.05 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and names of full
time registered Engineer.

1.06 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

B. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Engineer's Representative and Contractor in
performance of services.

C. Perform specified inspecting, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.

D. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

E. Promptly notify Engineer's Representative and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of
Work Products.

F. Perform additional inspection and tests required by Engineer's Representative.

G. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.

1.07 LABORATORY REPORTS

A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit two (2) copies of laboratory report to Engineer's
Representative and to Contractor.
B. Include:
1. Date issued,
2. Project title and number,
3. Name of inspector,
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection,
5. Identification of product and specifications section,
6. Location in the Project,
7. Type of inspection or test,
8. Date of test,
9. Results of tests,
10. Conformance with Contract Documents.

C. When requested by Engineer's Representative provide interpretation of test results.

1.08 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY

A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.

C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.

1.09 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which
require testing, along with proposed mix designs.

B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.

C. Provide incidental labour, transport and facilities:
1. to provide access to Work to be tested
2. to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested
3. to facilitate tests
4. to facilitate inspection by the Engineer and the Engineer's representative.
5. to provide storage and curing of test samples.

D. Notify Engineer's Representative and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring
inspecting and testing services.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01421-1
SECTION 01421

REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of Contract II and Part III, Section 2.

B. Where "as shown", "as indicated", "as detailed", or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that
reference to the Drawings accompanying the Specifications is made unless otherwise stated.

C. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by
authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry
that control performance of the Work.

D. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, and similar operations.

E. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, temporary
storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing,
curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

F. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

G. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee,
subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation,
erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they
are engaged to perform.
1. The term "experienced", when used with the term "installer", means having successfully completed a
minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with the special
requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Trades: Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as
"carpenter". It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades persons
of the corresponding generic name.
3. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction
activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations. The
specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over
which the Contractor has no option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract
requirements remains with the Contractor.
a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and
similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local
trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.

H. "Project Site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively
or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is
shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project
is to be built.

I. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or
tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those
inspections or tests.

J. Abbreviations and Symbols: The following abbreviations are used in the Bills of Quantities and other
documents. Other abbreviations may be used and explained in drawings.
Kg Kilogram
m or M Meter
mm Millimeter
cm Centimeter
m2 or M2 Square meter
m3 or M3 Cubic meter
No Number
IT or ITEM Item
T Tonne
Hrs Hours
Mths Months
L Litre
LS Lump sum
Should different but similar abbreviation/s be used in the various Tender Documents, the Contractor shall
obtain confirmation about its/their true meaning from the Engineer or the Engineer's Representative during
the tender period.

1.02 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the 16-Division
format and CSI/CSC's "Master Format" numbering system.

B. Specification Content: These Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These
conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is
abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not
stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural
and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract
Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mode and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mode are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain
locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must
be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted.
The words "shall", "shall be", or "shall comply with", depending on the context, are implied where a
colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.03 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable
Kuwaiti governmental and municipal, as well as USA and UK design and construction codes, regulations,
specifications and standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract
Documents to the extent referenced. Such codes, regulations, specifications and standards are made a part
of the Contract Documents by this reference and the Contractor shall comply therewith.

B. Publication Dates: All references to codes, regulations, specifications and standards referred to in the
Contract Documents shall, unless otherwise stated, mean the latest edition, amendment or revision of such
reference standard in effect as of the date this tender was submitted by the Contractor to the issuing
authority.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most

stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different but apparently equal to the
Engineer's Representative for a decision before proceeding.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum
provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality
specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements,
indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements.
Refer uncertainties to the Engineer's Representative for a decision before proceeding.

D. Within 15 days from the Date of Enterprise, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer adequate proof that the
referenced codes, regulations and standards have been ordered or are in the Contractor's possession and
available for use on site. Failure to provide this proof within the said 15 days or to have the codes etc. on site
within 30 days of the Date of Enterprise shall entitle the Engineer to purchase the referenced codes, regulations
and standards and the costs will be recovered from the Contractor.

E. Proof of Compliance: Whenever the Contract Documents require that a product complies with Federal
Specification, British Standards Institute, American Society of Testing and Materials, American National
Standards Institute or other association, standards, etc., the Contractor shall present an affidavit from the
manufacturer certifying that the product complies therewith. Where requested or specified, submit supporting
test data to substantiate compliance.

F. Where reference standards referred to herein is in the form of a recommendation or suggestion, such
recommendation or suggestion shall be deemed to be mandatory under this Contract unless conflicting with the
particular specifications contained herein.

G. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently
abbreviated. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standard s-generating organization,
authorities having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision.

H. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently
abbreviated. The following abbreviations and acronyms, as referenced in the Contract Documents, mean the
associated names. Unless otherwise stated the following abbreviations and names are from the U.S.A.:
AA Aluminum Association
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
ACI American Concrete Institute
ADC Air Diffuser Council
AFT Air Filter Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects
AIEE American Institute of Electrical Eng.
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
ALS American Lumber Standards
AMCA American Moving & Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ASAHC American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute

AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BIA Brick Institute of America
BRI Building Research Institute
BS British Standard Specification
BSCP British Standard Code of Practice
BSI British Standard Institute
CDA Copper Development Association
CEE International Commission on Rules for Approval of Electrical Equipment (Europe)
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CTI Cooling Tower Institute
EWS Engineered Wood Association
FSIWA Federation of Sewage & Industrial Waste Association
FTI Facing Tile Institute
GA Gypsum Association
HPMA Hardwood plywood Manufacturers Association
IEC International Electro-technical Commission
IEE Institute of Electrical Engineers of London (UK)
IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineering (UK)
IES Illuminating Engineering Society (UK)
ISO The International Organization for Standardization
KSS Kuwait Standard Specification
MIA Marble Institute of America
MLMA Metal Lath Manufacturers Association
MSSVFI Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industries
NBHA National Concrete Masonry Association
NEC National Electrical Code (NPFA No. 70)
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEMI National Elevator Manufacturing Industry, Inc.
NFC National Fire Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
NHPMA National Hardwood & Pine Manufactures Association.
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
NSC National Safety Council
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
NWC National Water Council (UK)
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration Portland Cement Association.
PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (USA)
RTI Resilient Tile Institute
SDI Steel Door Institute
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
SSPC Steel Structure Painting Council
SWFPA Structural Wood Fiber Products Association
TCA Tile Council of America
TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association

TPI Truss Plate Institute
UBC Uniform Building Code
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
USGS U.S. Geodetic Survey
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute

1.04 KUWAIT GOVERNMENT AGENCIES
A. The following list of Kuwait Government Agencies is not intended to be exhaustive and the Contractor shall
carry out all works in strict accordance with current Codes and Regulations of all Government Agencies
whether listed hereunder or not.
a. The Ministry of Electricity and Water (MEW)
b. The Ministry of Communications (MOC)
c. The Kuwait Fire Brigade (KFB)
d. The Kuwait Municipality (KM)
e. The Ministry of Health (MOH)
f. The Ministry of Interior (MOI) - General Traffic Department
g. The various departments of the Ministry of Public Works (MPW)

1.05 TECHNICAL LITERATURE

A. Provide the Engineer's Representative with one complete, latest edition copy of all standard specifications
referred to in these documents and further copies as necessary of all manufacturer's catalogues and the like
dealing with proprietary products specified or proposed as substitutes. Make such submissions within three
months of the Date of Enterprise or earlier as required by the Contractor's construction schedule or in the
case of substitute materials, as soon thereafter as is reasonably practicable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-1
SECTION 01500

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. The Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer or Engineer's Representative's approval, fully
dimensioned details of his proposed layout (based on drawing and information provided) of
temporary site accommodations and storage materials areas, showing access routes to or upon
the site, fences and gates, (only as required) location of Contractor's offices with accommodation,
details, personnel accommodation (senior and junior) including canteen facilities, sanitary
accommodation, location of Fire Fighting, first aid stations and the like, storage areas and all other
things necessary for the execution of the Contract.
2. Except as stated otherwise, all such temporary work shall be executed, maintained, operated and
relocated whenever necessary by the progress of work, and under the Engineer's direction, at the
Contractor's own expense. All shall be cleared away and the areas cleaned on completion of the
Contract and made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Engineer's Representative.
3. The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed for providing, maintaining and operating an
approved system for refuse collection surface water drainage and sewage disposal for the duration
of the Contract and for clearing away. De-odorizing, sterilizing and backfilling same as necessary
upon completion to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Engineer's Representative.
4. Adequate and proper provision shall be made for the storage and protection of materials, plant and
equipment to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Engineer's Representative.
5. All temporary facilities shall be constructed to the standards for similar permanent facilities.
6. Provide and maintain all temporary connections to utilities and services in locations and in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer, Engineer's Representative and local authorities having
jurisdiction thereof. Remove temporary installations and connections, and restore the services and
sources of supply to proper operating condition at the completion of the Works.
7. Temporary fencing and gates to areas of work and storage to details indicated on the drawings and to
temporary site accommodation and storage and workshop areas. Barricades around hazardous open
areas, openings in slabs, stair wells, excavations, etc.
8. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the relevant authorities' approval to construct all
temporary facilities.

1.02 USE OF PERMANENT FACILITIES

A. Permanent facilities shall not be used for storage without the approval of the Engineer.

1.03 TEMPORARY STORAGE AND PLANT

A. Owner's & Engineer's Representatives Offices : Refer to Section 01590

B. Contractors and Sub-contractors Offices and Storage and Plant :

The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for the provision and maintenance during the Contract of
offices and parking sheds, for his own and his Sub-contractors use. Adequate fire prevention measures shall
be provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Such offices shall be sited as approved by the Engineer or
Engineer's Representative and shall be cleared away on completion to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Provide and maintain in good condition, suitable open and watertight storage all at the Contractor's cost and
responsibility required for materials that may be damaged by storage in open. Provide adequate Fire
Protection as approved by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

C. The owner will permit reasonable use of open space within the property limit for this purpose. Any additional
space required is the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Include for timely obtaining all permissions from all statutory authorities having jurisdiction and for paying all charges
and fees.

E. On completion of the works, or when directed by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative, clear away all
temporary storage, plant and reinstate areas to their previous condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer or
Engineer's Representative.

1.04 TEMPORARY COVERINGS

A. Protect finished surfaces including jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which
materials are handled against possible damage resulting from conduct of work by trades.

B. Tight wood sheeting shall be laid under all materials stored on finished surfaces. Planking shall be laid
before moving materials over finished areas. Wheelbarrows used for such areas shall have rubber-tyre
wheels.

C. Finished surfaces including factory finished and job-finished items shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of
the Project to the Owner. The Contractor shall without extra compensation refinish such spaces where such
surfaces prove to have been inadequately protected and are damaged.

D. Waterproofed and roof surfaces shall not be subjected to heavy traffic nor used for storage of materials.
Where some activity must take place in order to carry out the work, adequate protection, subject to approval
by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative, shall be provided.

E. Provide all necessary protection to executed work to the approval of the Engineer or Engineer's Representative,
including but not limited to temporary coverings and protective measures stated herein.

1.05 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION OPENINGS

A. Provide openings in slabs, walls and partitions where required for moving in or out large pieces of equipment
and plant. Close or restore and finish all openings after the equipment and plant is in place or removed.
Structural modifications shall be subject to review by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

1.06 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

A. No signs or advertisements to be displayed on the Site without the approval of the Owner, Engineer or

B. Refer to section 01580 Project Identification and Signs.

1.07 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION

A. Provide all fire fighting facilities and equipment required by the Kuwait Fire Department, whether or not
specifically detailed herein.

B. Take adequate safety precautions during metal welding and torch cutting operations as follows:
1. Welding or torch cutting operations shall be carried out only in well ventilated spaces having little
or no combustible materials in the vicinity, and preferably in an area designated and used
exclusively as a 'welding shop.'

2. Where welding or torch cutting operations are carried out in-situ, surrounding areas shall be suitably
protected by the covering or screening off, and suitable portable fire extinguishers shall be kept
immediately available with an attendant standing-by.
3. The number of gas cylinders in any working area and the storage of such cylinders, full or empty, shall be
in accordance with the FOC leaflet, "Precautions to be observed in connection with the use of gas or
electric welding and cutting apparatus".

C. Gasoline and other flammable liquids shall be stored in and dispensed from 'UL' listed safety containers and
in conformance with requirements of the local fire authority. Storage shall not be within the building.

D. Tarpaulins used during construction work shall be made of material, which is resistant to fire, water and
weather. Tarpaulins shall have 'UL' approval and comply with US Federal Specifications CCC-D-746.

E. Make all arrangements for statutory inspection by Kuwait Fire Brigade and Insurance Inspectors, co-operate
with these authorities and experts and promptly carry out their recommendations.

F. Ensure that adequate, unimpeded means of egress from all parts of the Works, is available at all times in
case of fire.

G. At the completion of the Work, or at such times as the Engineer or Engineer's Representative may direct,
remove all temporary fire fighting installations and equipment and replace all worn or damaged parts of the
permanent systems leaving such systems in first-class condition equal to new.

1.09 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

A. Make all arrangements for temporary electrical service to the construction site, pay all expenses, provide all
equipment necessary for temporary power and lighting. The electrical service shall be of adequate capacity
for all construction tools and equipment (including welding equipment) without overloading the temporary
facilities and shall be made available for power, lighting and construction operations of all trades. If
temporary supply is not granted by the MEW, then the Contractor must make his own arrangements for
providing supply of electricity in order to complete the works.

B. Provide main feeding power points, as required throughout the Works for power tools of all kinds.
Termination of power distribution shall be at locations approved by the Engineer or Engineer's
Representative. Termination shall be provided complete with circuit breakers, disconnect switches and other
electrical devices as required to protect the power supply system.

C. Temporary lighting system shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor as required to satisfy
minimum requirements of safety and security. Temporary lighting system shall be adequate for illumination
in all areas of work. Where work is being performed at night, increase the illumination level. The Contractor
shall provide adequate outdoor lighting to illuminate staging, stockpiles, trenches, projections, etc., to the
satisfaction of the Engineer or Engineer's Representative and general illumination throughout, adequate for
watchmen and emergency personnel and all other persons.

D. Temporary equipment and wiring for power and lighting shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of
the governing codes. Temporary wiring shall be maintained in a safe manner and utilized so as not to constitute a
hazard to persons or property.

E. All temporary light and power installations shall conform to the requirements and standards of MEW,

F. At the completion of the works remove all temporary electrical equipment and wiring.

1.10 TEMPORARY ROADS AND ACCESS TO SITE

A. The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself regarding the suitability and availability for his use
during the Construction Period of access routes and the like and shall be entirely responsible for the
provision of any signs or directions on such routes that may be considered necessary for the guidance of his

personnel, Sub-Contractors, suppliers and the like and for obtaining all necessary permission from
Government, Ministry or Landowner concerned, for the use of such routes or the provisions of such signs or
directions. The Owner shall not be held responsible for any claims that may be made by any Landowner.
B. The Owner will not guarantee the suitability or availability of any particular access routes and will not
entertain any claim in respect of the non-suitability or non-availability for continuous use during the Contract
Period of any such route.

C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary means of access to the Site from the nearest
permanent roadway together with any necessary crossovers and all necessary temporary site roads leading
to or upon the site and/or working areas. The Contractor shall take over the existing temporary roads, utilize
them and maintain the same during the Contract Period, but the Contractor must co-ordinate and co-operate
and share these roads as necessary with the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Representatives and
other Contractors.

D. The means of access, crossovers and temporary roads shall be maintained, altered, adapted, etc., as may
be found necessary during the course of the Contract and excavated and cleared away upon completion
including forking over and leaving same to the satisfaction of the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

E. Access to the site storage area for delivery of construction material or equipment shall be made only from
locations approved by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

F. Contractor must ensure that access remains clear to provide access to other users such as may be required
for emergency vehicles, service vehicles and other contractors.

G. Construct and maintain temporary parking, as specified and indicated in the drawings and contract
documents, for the use of students and employees. Remove and demolish whenever instructed by the
Engineer.

1.11 TEMPORARY STAIRS, SCAFFOLDING, LADDERS, RAMPS, RUNWAYS, ETC.

A. Provide and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, scaffolding, ladders, ramps, runways, chutes,
tower cranes and/or other hoisting facilities etc., as required for the proper execution of works.

B. As soon as permanent stairs are erected, provide temporary protective treads, handrails and shaft
enclosures.

1.12 TEMPORARY MATERIAL AND PERSONNEL HOISTS

A. Provide temporary material hoists to the Engineer's or Engineer's Representative's approval and as required
facilitating the execution of Works. Such hoists shall be erected and maintained in compliance with any local
regulations and in accordance with ANSI A10.5 "Safety Requirements for Material Hoists", and shall not be
used for transporting personnel.

B. Hoists shall be erected and maintained in compliance with any local regulations and in accordance with
ANSI A10.4 "Safety Requirements for Personnel Hoists".

C. All hoists shall be constructed, maintained and removed so as not to cause damage, staining or marring of
the permanent work.

1.13 BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

PLEASE SEE SECTION 15300

1.14 TEMPORARY SANITARY ACCOMMODATION

A. The sanitary accommodation at the ground level shall comprise temporary toilet building(s) in an approved
location, of approved construction in compliance with the local authority having jurisdiction.


B. Comply with Municipal and Health Authorities regulations and provide the facilities ready for inspection by
such authorities whenever requested.

C. Toilets must be kept clean and sanitary.

D. Labour, workmen or staff found to be using areas other than this facility shall be discharged immediately.

1.15 TEMPORARY WATER

A. Furnish all water required for the performance of the contract. All water shall be clean, drinkable and free of
deleterious substances. No brackish water allowed to be used for construction of the Works. Water outlets
shall be conveniently located for Sub-Contractors and other contractors, about the Site at ground level. All
costs of providing temporary water and running costs shall be borne by the Contractor. Provide an adequate
supply of drinking water from approved sources of acceptable quality, satisfactorily cooled, for employees.
where required, furnish drinking water in suitable containers and provide hygienically clean cups for use of
employees. Drinking water dispensers shall be conveniently located where work is in progress.

B. Make provisions for drainage or collection of excess or spilled water.

C. These facilities to remain in operation until the completion of the Works, then remove all temporary water
service equipment and piping.

1.16 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE

A. Upon taking possession of the Site, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for draining rainwater, ground
water and water arising from construction processes. Also the Contractor shall provide and maintain such
temporary drainage installations as may be necessary during the period of construction in a manner approved by
the Engineer's Representative and so as not to adversely affect the permanent works or adjacent areas and
properties.

B. Temporary drainage installations (storm water and foul water) may be connected to existing drains provided
written permission is obtained from the local authorities that have jurisdiction thereof, and provided such
connection work is executed and maintained in strict accordance with those authorities' regulations and
directions.

C. At completion of the work, or at such times as the Engineer's Representative may direct, remove all
temporary drainage installations and make good existing to the Engineer's Representative satisfaction and
as required by the concerned authorities.

1.17 SECURITY

A. Protect work, products, materials, plant, temporary work, and Owner's operations, from theft, vandalism and
unauthorised entry.

B. Safeguard Engineer's staff

C. Initiate programme at job mobilisation, maintain throughout construction period until Engineer occupancy or
Engineer acceptance precludes the need for Contractor security.

D. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site. Allow entrance only to authorised persons with
proper identification. Maintain log of workmen and visitors, make available to Owner or Engineer or
Construction Manager on request.

E. Coordinate access of Owner's personnel to site.


1.18 KITCHENS AND CANTEENS

A. No Kitchens and Canteens allowed within the Project site.

B. Food and beverages served from all kitchens shall be prepared and provided in conformance with the latest
requirements of the Ministry of Public Health and the Kuwait Municipality. All kitchens shall be open to
inspections for hygiene conducted by the concerned governmental authorities.

1.19 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation.
Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration till substantial
completion.

B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without
damaging effects.

C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed
or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the
construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include. but are not limited to, the following:
1. Excessive static or dynamic loading.
2. Excessive internal or external pressures.
3. Excessively high or low temperatures-
4. Thermal shock.
5. Excessively high or low humidity.
6. Air contamination or pollution.
7. Water, hailstone, ice
8. Solvents.
9. Chemicals.
10. Light.
11. Radiation.
12. Puncture.
13. Abrasion.
14. Heavy traffic.
15. Soiling, staining, and corrosion.
16. Bacteria.
17. Rodent and insect infestation.
18. Combustion.
19. Electrical current.
20. High-speed operation.
21. Improper lubrication.
22. Unusual wear or other misuse.
23. Contact between incompatible materials.
24. Destructive testing.
25. Misalignment.
26. Excessive weathering.
26. Unprotected storage.
27. Improper shipping or handling.
28. Theft.
29. Vandalism.
1.20 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. Dust Control
1. Execute work by methods to minimise raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive
means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.

B. Erosion and Sediment Control
1. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and
waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.

2. Minimise amount of bare soil exposed at one time.
3. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes and drains, to prevent water flow.
4. Construct waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays.
5. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply
corrective measures.

C. Water Control
1. Rough grade site and provide all necessary drainage to prevent standing water and to direct surface
drainage away from excavations, trenches, adjoining properties, and public right-of-way until permanent
drainage is accepted.
2. Allow for removal of temporary drainage upon acceptance of the whole work.
3. Maintain excavations and trenches free of water. Provide and operate pumping equipment of a
capacity to control water flow.
4. Provide dewatering system to maintain excavations dry and free of water inflow on a 24 hours
basis.
5. Provide piping to handle pumping outflow to discharge in a manner to avoid erosion.
6. Remove equipment and installation when no longer needed.
7. Comply with the Local Authorities Regulations.

D. Noise Control
1. Fit all generators, compressors, percussion tools and vehicles with effective silencers of a type
recommended by manufacturers of generators, compressors, tools, or vehicles.
2. Comply with Municipality Regulations.
3. Electrical generators and other heavy equipment are to be housed in soundproof enclosure.

E. Pest and Rodent Control
1. Provide proper measures to control pests in occupied temporary accommodation and storage
areas.

F. Pollution Control
1. Provide methods, means and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere
from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.

G. Fire Control
1. Provide methods, means and facilities to prevent nuisance for smoke, dust, trash and the like.
2. Provide temporary fire protection system for the site as required by Clause 1.08 of this section.
Allow for removing temporary fire protection on completion and acceptance of the whole works.

1.21 SAFETY MEASURES AND STANDARDS

A. Accident Prevention Programme
1. Within 30 days of contract signing, the contractor will submit, for the Engineer's approval, his Accident
Prevention Programme naming the key person in his organization who will be responsible for administering
of Safety Programme, which follows, and in particular the safety requirements listed in the safety check list.
2. All employees will be physically qualified for performing the duties to which they are assigned.
Operators of equipment and vehicles shall be able to read and understand the signs, signals and
operating instructions is use. Prior to start of work, arrangements will be made for assistance from
medical services in existence in the vicinity of the project site. Communication and transportation
to effectively care of injured workers will be provided as necessary. First Aid Kits, in the ratio of
one unit for each 25 persons or less, will be provided on the job. They shall be easily accessible
to all the workers.


B. Safety Programme
1. The safety programme established and maintained on this project will incorporate the
requirements of the Safety and Health Requirements of the Government of Kuwait, the AGC
manual of Accident Prevention in construction, and all other local codes and regulations.
2. The purpose of the Programme is to elicit the interest and efforts of all personnel both
management and supervisory, required for the prevention of injuries and accidents, through proper
and through training and instructions to employees and labour.
The Contractor and all his subcontractors are responsible for the administration of a
comprehensive safety programme.
3. This safety programme embodies the prevention of accident injury, occupational illness and
property damage. Each contractor shall provide and maintain a safe, hazard free workplace for
their employees, for fellow workers and the general public. As a minimum, the contractor's safety
programme shall incorporate all of the principals of the project safety programme.
4. This project safety programme shall ensure the involvement and active participation of all project
employees by requiring safety training will promote recognition of unsafe acts, potential and actual
hazards and the immediate corrective action to be taken. All employees shall be constantly aware
of their responsibility to work in a safe manner.

C. Management Organization
1. A Safety Co-ordinator shall be responsible for the implementation and further development of the
safety programme. His duties will include the following:
a. Conduct monthly safety meeting with personnel and subcontractors
b. Inspect the project daily, and record all visible safety hazards, including identification of
violators.
c. Follow through on timely correction of safety hazards, making immediate corrections as
necessary.
d. Monitor on-the-job safety meetings and report the same on this Daily Report.
e. Foster a "Safety Awareness" in all tradesmen and supervisors on the Project.
f. Follow up, for insurance purposes, all relevant safety reports.
g. Check all areas at least once a day for housekeeping and cleanup. Take immediate
action to ensure compliance with requirements.
h. Submit Job Hazards Analysis for each major phase or element of work as necessary.
i. Post Safety signs on the project.

D. Subcontractor and Other Contractors Participation
The officers and personnel of all subcontractors shall be responsible for compliance with this safety
programme. This will entail indoctrinating their on-the-job representatives with a working knowledge of the
General Safety Programme on the job. They are further responsible to have their firms represented at all
project safety meetings.

E. Accident Prevention Responsibility
1. Safety Meetings will be held at least once a month at the job site. The meetings will be convened
and conducted by the safety coordinator. All supervisors and foremen are expected to be in
attendance. Each subcontractor will have a responsible representative present to follow through
on information and resolutions discussed and adapted at these meetings. The Engineer's
representative may attend these meetings.
2. The Agenda for the safety meetings will generally include inter-alia.
a. Development of timely topics for discussion and dissemination of safety bulletins, Signs
and Notices.
b. A review of the Safety Co-ordinator's inspection.

c. Identification of potential safety hazards in the coming month and discussion and
implementation of steps to be taken to avoid the same.
d. Appoint of safety Representatives for subcontractors.
3. All supervisors and foremen are responsible to plan and accomplish their work with due regard for
the safety of all individuals on the job site. They will be expected to eliminate all possible accident
hazards when planning the work under their control. It is expected the subcontractors will observe
and correct any accident producing practices before injury occurs. If an accident does occur, they
will investigate to determine the cause and take the required corrective action to prevent a
recurrence. All accidents shall immediately be reported to the Engineers Representative and to
the Engineer.

F. First Aid and Medical Facilities
The Contractor shall provide first aid and medical services as required by the relevant municipal and
ministerial authorities of Kuwait.

G. Accident Reporting
1. All lost time injuries, property damage accidents (excluding of project vehicle accidents) and
material losses in which the property damage exceeds KD 100/- will be reported in writing to the
Engineer within 48 hours of the accident or incident. Immediate notification will be provided in
advance of the written report.
2. In the event of any employees being sent to a doctor for treatment, a release will be obtained from
the doctor stating whether (1) the employee is not fit for duty; (2) the employee is fit for light duty;
or (3) the employee is fit for duty. A copy of this release will be accompanied with the accident
report.

H. Protective Equipment
1. Minimum requirements for protective equipment shall be the wearing of hard hats by all personnel,
including subcontractors, as well as protective clothing, as warranted.
2. Supplemental requirements for protective equipment shall be developed to cover specific areas of
the work for such items as eye protection, protective clothing, life belts and life lines as per the
requirements of this safety specifications.

I. Hand Tools and Power Tools
1. All hand tools and portable power tools to be used shall be of good order and shall be used for the
purpose intended. All electric power tools will be grounded and will be inspected frequently for
worn out parts and connections.
2. Circular saws shall be equipped with guards that automatically enclose cutting edges. Radial arm
power saws shall be equipped with automatic brakes. Explosives actuated tools and the use will
be discouraged, and must have prior written Engineer's Representative's approval before delivery
to the project.
1. Minimum Protective Clothing
a. Hard hats are required at all times.
b. Protective eye covering will be worn when welding, hammering metal, stone,
or concrete, grinding or cutting metal units.
2. Minimum Safety Observances
a. Work areas and access ways are to be free of trash, material and all tripping
hazards
b. Temporary electrical wiring will be protected form damage by traffic, be in good
condition and protected by ground fault interrupters.
c. All portable containers for gas and other inflammable liquids shall be UL or FM
approved, with self-sloshing lids. No plastic containers are allowed.

d. Maximum speed for automobiles and vehicles on the site is 10 Kilometres per
hour.
e. All accidents are to be reported directly to supervisors, the Engineer and the
Engineer's Representative. If serious injury is apparent or suspected, utilize
the pre-established emergency hospital service. The telephone number shall
be prominently displayed at all site telephone locations. Then attempt to put
out the fire with available fire extinguishers and water hoses until help arrives.
Do not endanger personnel in fighting the fire.
f. Heavy Equipment Operators/Sub-Contractors must obtain clearance from the
Engineer's Representative before commencement of their work.
g. All equipment must meet the Safety Standards, described in these
specifications.
h. No site visiting during nights weekends or holidays without prior permission.

K. Safety Check List
1. Prepare safety programme
2. Post safety programme on job bulletin. Prepare and post fire prevention programme
3. Analyse job for potential hazards and hazardous procedures
4. Establish plan for location of shanties, material storage, and personal facilities and traffic flow
5. Arrange for sanitary facilities
6. Arrange for debris removal
7. Establish procedure to obtain Subcontractor Safety Programme
8. Arrange-for Doctor
9. Arrange for Hospital
10. Arrange for ambulance service
11. Post phone numbers for police, fire, medical and ambulance service at each of the on site
telephone locations
12. Obtain claims forms
13. Contract loss Prevention Department of Insurance Carrier
14. Arrange for exposure check by Insurance Carrier
15. Obtain form the Engineer's Representative a report form for reporting accidents and injuries
16. Establish adequate first aid kit and stretcher facilities
17. Post chart to signify weekly check of first aid kits.
18. Hire qualified first aid personnel, if more than ten minutes from a medical facility with which normal
and emergency medical service link has been established
19. Conduct a pre-construction survey of surrounding property existing condition, if appropriate
20. Prepare and post at each on site telephone location "off hours emergency notification list"
21. Arrange for watchman service
22. Prepare a watchman's log
23. Obtain any required state forms and posters
24. Verify insurance on sub-contractors starting work on site prior to start of work by sub-contractors.
25. Obtain safety equipment appropriate to operations
a. Hard hats

b. Safety belts
c. Goggles
d. Ear protection
e. Carbon monoxide tester
Please see clause 2.01.
26. Post sketch, showing location of fire alarm boxes, hydrants and first aid facilities
27. Arrange for and post, safety posters and warning signs
28. Establish weekly tool box and safety talks
29. Set up an accident control chart
30. Establish monthly safety meeting
31. Appoint a safety supervisor and set date for the first safety meeting

L. Non-Compliance With Safety Requirements
1. Where the Contractor violates any of the safety provisions described within this section 01500, the
Engineer shall take the appropriate remedial action, and all costs associated therewith for the
Contractor's account.
2. On the occurrence of the first violation, the contractor shall be warned in writing by the Engineer's
Representative and shall be instructed to remedy the violation within a specified time. Where the
contractor fails to remedy the violation within the time stipulated, the contractor will be prohibited
from carrying out any further work within the affected area until the specific exposure has been
corrected.
3. On the occurrence of all further violations, the severity of each violation, shall be considered by the
Engineer's Representative. The contractor instructed accordingly. Where the contractor
unreasonably ignores the Engineer's Representative's instructions, then the foreman responsible
for operations in the area where the safety violations are occurred shall be dismissed from the site.
4. Should the contractor persistently breach the safety requirements with undue reason, then the
principal of the contractor shall be summoned to the site and instructed to take the appropriate
action to ensure that his employees comply with the safety requirements of the contract. The
following is a summary of engineer's action in the event of the contractor's non-compliance with
safety requirements.

Summary of Engineer's Action

In the Event of Contractor's non-Compliance
with Safety Requirements

CATEGORY SAFETY ITEM ORDER
ACTION
ACTION

Material
Or
Equipment

- Scaffolding

- Guard Rails
- Excavation Protection
- Safe Hand & Power Tools

- Temporary Elect.
Grounding
- Machinery & Mech.
Equipment

1.0

2.0

3.0

Contractor warned to rectify.

If Contractor fails to rectify,
Contractor is barred from working in
exposed area.

In the case of continuous breach,
employees and foreman responsible for
exposed area shall be dismissed from
site.
Protective
Garments
- Head Protection
- Eye Protection
- Hearing Protection

- Respiratory Protection
- Hand Protection
- Foot Protection

- Body Protection
1.0

2.0

3.0
Responsible employee prevented
from continuing work until properly
attired.

When same employees is in breach a
second time, he will be dismissed
from the site.

When more than 2 employees are
dismissed per week, then responsible
foreman shall be dismissed.
Facilities First Aid

Sanitation
Material Storage
Fire Protection
1.0

20

Contractor warned to supply.

If contractor fails to supply, engineer
shall supply and deduct the cost from
the contractor.

1.22 FURTHER/OTHER SAFETY REGULATIONS

A. Safety regulations are also specified in Part III, Section IV of the Tender Documents. The Contractor shall
comply with the combination of the requirements detailed there and above.

1.23 PARKING

A. Provide or construct temporary parking areas to accommodate use of construction personnel.

B. Maintain traffic and parking areas including that of the Engineer's Representative in a sound condition free of
excavation material, construction equipment, products and mud.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. All safety gears should be as to the approval of Kuwait Fire Brigade and KNPC Standards.

B. Products and Manufacturers specified herein are the only products that will be acceptable.

a. Safety Shoes - Redwing, USA
b. Safety Helmets - SEI, Kuwait - model certified by KNPC to ANSI Z89,
Jan. 86, Class A
c. Belts, Goggles, Gloves etc. - These should be as to the approval of Kuwait Fire
Brigade and KNPC Standards.
2.02 LABOURS SANITARY/TOILET FACILITIES

A. Provide sufficient number of prefabricated structure buildings as site toilets with all necessary plumbing, electrical,
electrical and ventilation connections required making the system operational. Type of facility, location and
relocation to be to the approval of the Engineer's Representative.

B. Each of the site toilets units shall comprise of the following:
1. Steel frame with sandwich panel to walls and partitions, and corrugated metal sheet roofing. Size
and layout to be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer's Representative.
2. Wall mounted lavatories with faucet, plastic shelf and mirror. At least 1 No. for the use of and per
each (25) persons.
3. Wall hung urinals with water stop valves. At least 1 number for the use of, and per each (25)
persons.
4. Water closets with plastic flush tank and flexible wash hose. At least 1 No. f or the use of and per
each (25) persons.
5. Electrical water heaters complete with safety valves.
6. Electrical connection for power and lighting.
7. Exhaust fans and ventilators.
8. Water supply connection from source provided by the Contractor.
9. Plumbing and drainage connections.
10. Percolating (collection) pits of proper capacity.
11. Drainage manholes as required.

C. Toilets must be kept clean and sanitary

D. The Contractor shall clear away and remove all structures, buildings, tanks, manholes, pits and to make the area
clean and tidy as and when instructed by the Engineer.

E. Comply with Municipal and Health Authorities regulations and provide the facilities ready for inspection by
such authorities whenever requested.
F. Labour, workmen or staff found to be using areas other than these facilities shall be discharged immediately.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED
END OF SECTION

TEMPORARY TELEPHONE 01514-1
SECTION 01514

TEMPORARY TELEPHONES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section concerns only the Temporary Telephone to the Municipality and Engineers Representative
Offices.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work.


A. Temporary telephone service.

B. Maintenance.

C. Removal.

1.04 SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Two MOC lines (without international call facility) and 4 mobile telephones with line.

B. Telephone service shall be for local calls only

C. Each receiver shall have equal access to outside lines. Each internal receiver shall enable caller to dial each
others receiver.

D. Provide one telephone instrument to kitchen and each desk specified under Section 01590.

E. Wreless DSL Internet connection service (not less than 28 Mb/ S speed) for the whole duration of the Project
alongwith the required network sharing software or appropriate hardware to match the number of computers
required under Section 01590.

1.05 COSTS

A. Pay costs of supply, installation, maintenance, monthly phone bills and removal of services.

1.06 SUBMITTAL

A. Submit any relevant product data for approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Must be new and adequate for the purpose.

B. Telephone Exchange (EPABX) shall be Panasonic, latest model and shall be as approved by the Engineer.

TEMPORARY TELEPHONE 01514-2

C. Telephone sets shall be equipped with display screen.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Products locally used or speciality devices compatible with Ministry of Communications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install service at time of site mobilization.

B. Modify and extend service as Work progresses.

3.02 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain system to provide uninterrupted service.

3.03 REMOVAL

A. Remove temporary system after obtaining Engineers Representatives approval.

END OF SECTION

BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES 01530-1
SECTION 01530

BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provision of safety fence and gates around all work areas, work includes the following:
1. Installation
2. Maintenance
3. Removal

1.02 EXISTING SITUATION
A. Examine the site to familarise with the existing situation where there is no existing boundary wall of required
height, provide safety fence as required by the various statutory authorities having jurisdiction.

1.03 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION

A. Safety fence and gates 2.00 m high of braced construction with fully closed panel construction to completely
enclose the site and prevent unauthorized persons violating the works site area. The site shall also include
all areas and lands approved by the Engineer for the use by Contractor for storage or as borrow pits, etc.

B. The safety fence and gates should be positioned to comply with the following requirements:
1. To provide sufficient and secure access gates as necessary
2. To make any adjustments as necessary to suit the various phases of the works, and to suit the
Contractor's approved Construction Schedule.
3. To comply with any instructions of the Engineer or Engineer's Representative in accordance with
the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer's Representative shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Show layout, details of construction, foundations, sizes, and grades of members.

C. Obtain Engineer's Representative approval and approvals of Authorities.


A. Erect fence/gate posts and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings,
resulting from a wind speed of 80 miles per hour - exposure C as per the Uniform Building Code, 1997.

B. Finish: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials and products specified herein shall take precedence over the safety program Section 1500.

B. Post and Gate Construction: Primed and painted steel and structurally sound, as shown on the drawings.


C. Fence Panels: 2.00 m high Steel Sheet Panels 26 gauge Kirby or similar factory painted finish, color
Ral9007

D. Gate Hardware: Secure locks and bolts to all gates.

E. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats. Colours designated by Engineer's Representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install safety fence and gates complete before areas of work may commence.

B. Erect safety fence and gates in approved location as approved on Site Layout Organization Chart submitted
by Contractor.

C. Install safety fence surface plumb and level. Anchor securely.

D. Paint sight-exposed surfaces of safety fence, posts and gates.

3.02 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain safety fence and gates including cleaning and repairing deterioration and damages throughout the
contract period, as required by the Engineer's Representative at no extra cost.

B. Repaint as necessary and whenever instructed by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.

3.03 REMOVAL

A. Remove safety fence and gates at completion of project after getting permission from the Engineer or

END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCTION CLEANING 01569-1
SECTION 01569

CONSTRUCTION CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01710 - Final Cleaning.

B. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific cleaning for Product or Work.


A. Daily cleaning and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish during construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Provide covered containers and chutes for deposit of waste materials, debris, and rubbish and include in the
Site Layout Plan.

B. Cleaning materials for products to be cleaned shall be according to the manufacturer of the product and as
approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CLEANING

A. Maintain areas, floors and buildings under Contractor's control free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish at
all times. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces and other closed or remote
spaces, prior to closing the space.

C. Clean interior areas and all floors and stairs daily to provide suitable conditions for work.

D. The Contractor must keep all working areas clear of obstructions, surplus materials unused plant and debris
that are unsightly as determined by the Engineers Representative, obstructive and/or hazardous to the
safety of all persons-expected to be on the premises at any time.

3.02 DISPOSAL

A. Comply with regulations of the local Authorities. All debris to be shifted from site by main contractors cost
and responsibility.

B. Provide cover as necessary, place and relocate at site as directed by the Engineer's Representative.

END OF SECTION

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS 01580-1
SECTION 01580

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Three nos. well lit project identification signs, each in both English and Arabic, of types as
shown on the drawings..
1. Design
2. Installation
3. Maintenance
4. Removal


A. Each project identification sign board will have the following information :
1. Perspective of Project
2. Name of the Owner/Employer
3. Name of the Project
4. Date of Enterprise and Contract Period
5. Value of Contract
6. Name of Project Manager
7. Name of Consultant
8. Name of Contractor
9 etc. Names of Approved Sub-contractors, one per slat.

B. The size of each board shall be 2.4 meter x 7.000 meter including the size of Perspective of Project which
shall be 1.9 x 2.40 meter. The English letters shall be in capital, of approx. size 20cm high x 1.25cm thick x
1cm distant within the same word and 2cm distant between adjacent words; the Arabic digits and letters
shall be similar and shall match; all to the approval of Engineer.

C. The lettering shall be in black colour, over white background Or as specified by the

D. The sign boards shall be erected within twenty-one (21) calendar days from the Date of Enterprise and shall
be dismantled and cleared away after completion of the project and the ground below made good.

E. The signboards should be illuminated with sufficient flood light projectors as shown on the drawings. The
Contractor to connect and provide all means of power supply.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings to the Engineers Representative (ER) for approval.

B. Submit design calculations of sign surface metal plates, foundations, supports, framing etc. to the Engineers
Representative for approval. For wind speeds etc, follow 80 miles/hour, exposure D as per UBC 97.

C. Show content, layout, lettering, colours, foundation, structure, sizes and grades of members.

D. Obtain approval of Engineers Representative and of Local Authorities having Jurisdiction.


PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS 01580-2

A. Installer : Engage professional installer with not less than five years experience in similar kind of work.
Submit details to the Engineers Representative for approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Structure and Framing : Steel, structurally sound.

B. Paint and Primers : Exterior quality, two coats. Colours as approved by the Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Ensure that project identification signs are installed to the Engineer's Representative approval and in
accordance with Project Construction Schedule.

B. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings.

C. Install sign surface in plumb and level and anchor securely.

3.02 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain signs and supports, clean and repair where deterioration or damages have occurred to the
satisfaction of the Engineer's Representative at no additional cost.

B. Repaint as necessary.

3.03 REMOVAL

A. The project identification and signs shall be removed after obtaining the Engineers approval.

END OF SECTION

FIELD OFFICES FOR ENGINEER'S SUPERVISION
Project No.: KW.09.0128 01590-1
Project Name: Wafra Housing Complex 01 12 December 2011

SECTION 01590

FIELD OFFICES FOR ENGINEERS SUPERVISION &TRANSPORT FACILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Temporary Field Offices

B. Maintenance and Cleaning

C. Removal

D. Obtain approvals from Authorities having jurisdiction, pay fees and provide guarantees as required.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01010 Summary of Work

B. Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, FURNISHINGS

A. Serviceable, new, adequate for required purpose.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install Field Offices ready for occupancy by supervision staff within 30 days after Date of Commencement of Works.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to foundations,
with steps and landings at entrance doors.

B. Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weathertight enclosures for office and storage spaces. Maintain during
progress of the Works and until removal is authorised.

C. Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls and Ceilings: Compatible with occupancy and storage
requirements.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 01590-2
D. Exterior Materials: Weather-resistant, and heat insulated finished in one colour acceptable to Engineer or Engineers
Representative.

E. Interior Materials in Offices: Laminated plywood sheet type materials for walls and mineral fibre tiles for ceilings, heat
and sound insulated resilient floors and bases.

F. Lighting for Offices: Fluorescent to all rooms, 500 lux at desk-top height, exterior lighting at entrance doors.

G. Fire Extinguishers: Appropriate type fire extinguisher at each office area and each storage area.

H. Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified conditions for storage of products.

I. Name plates to all offices doors.

3.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL

A. Heating, Cooling and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to maintain comfort conditions.

B. Storage Spaces: Ventilation as needed to maintain products in accordance with Contract Documents; adequate
lighting for maintenance and inspection of products.

C. Exhaust fan with automatic shutter, one per W.C. (fitting), kitchen and meeting rooms.

3.05 EMPLOYER AND ENGINEERS SUPERVISION OFFICES

A. Furniture &Equipment: All to be new.

B. Employer and Resident Engineers Furniture per room (two rooms 24 sq.m. minimum area each)

1 No. Desk size 1800 x 800 mm approx. including high back arm chair.
1 No. Side drawer unit 1600 x 400 x 600 mm approx.
2 Nos. Easy chairs for visitors.
1 No. Tack board size 2400 x 1200 mm approx.
1 No. Coffee table
1 No. Lockable filing cabinet 2600 x 400 x 1500 mm approx.
1 NO. 3 seater sofa and 2 Nos. single seat sofa
C. Corridor:

Notice Board: 2 nos. Fibre board with wood framing overall size 1200 x 600 mm approx.

D. Meeting Room (one room of area to suite the follwing furniture):

1 No. Table and chairs to seat 10 persons
1 No. Fibre writing wall board size 2400 x 1200 mm approx.
1 No. Telephone table
1 No. Telephone

E. Pantry, furniture/equipment (one room) :

1 No. Refrigerator with freezer compartment (12 cu.ft, double door).
1 No. Waste bin (plastic with cover).
1 No. Minimum of 1200mm length floor cabinet with stainless steel sink and 1200 mm wall cabinet.
1 No. Cooking range 2 hot plates electric and 1 unit gas with table gas cylinder and connection.
1 No. Crockery and cutlery for coffee and tea making.
1 No. Coffee set for 20 persons
20 Nos. Glasses
1 No. Water filter

Project No.: KW.09.0128 01590-3
1 No. Water cooler
1 No. Kitchen table
1 No. Water heater
1 No. Vacuum cleaner with spare bags.

F. Samples Room (one room 24sq.m. minimum area)

Complete shelving covering the whole room perimeter, demountable type with adjustable shelving height 6
Nos. shelves are required.

G. Miscellaneous
Complete bevarges as required for the site like coffee ,tea, milk, soft drinks, cool drinks ctc.

Air conditioning: a)to all staff rooms, split A/C units as appropriate for heating and cooling, All to be new,
quite operating and convenient.

Lighting: Fluorescent lighting to all rooms

Plumbing and Drainage: As required to provide a workable acceptable system, clear away on completion.

Sundries: Provide adequate number of waste baskets, ash trays, coat hangers and mail trays in each room.

H. Toilets

The following toilets are to be provided:

1. One toilet for the Employer / Engineers representative
2. Two toilet for the Contractors Staff.

Each toilet shall include W.C. with flexible hose, toilet roll holder, coat hooks, wash basin as required with hot
and cold water supplies, 1 disposable towel paper holder, 1 mirror above each wash basin

I. Provide shaded parking to accommodate atleast 4 Cars for the sole use of the Engineer and the Employer.

3.06 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

A. Attendance: Provide power, water, gas and clean and maintain offices daily.

B. Daily janitorial services for offices and sanitary facilities and daily cleaning and maintenance for office and
storage areas.

C. Maintain and clean office including equipment and furnishings until completion of the Project.

D. Maintain approach walks free of mud and water.

E. Provide delivery service between Employers offices, Engineers offices and Contractors offices.

F. Provide one full time tea boy to attend upon Employer and Engineers staff.

G. Provide all necessary consumable in connection with kitchen, toilet and janitorial services.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 01590-4

H. Provide mineral drinking water for Employer and Engineer staff.

3.07 REMOVAL

At completion of work and subject to Engineers approval remove buildings, foundation, furniture, utility
services and debris. Restore areas, obtain and submit Municipality clearance certificate.

3.08 PROJECT OFFICE REQUIREMENTS

Provide the following items including assembly, delivery, installation and consumables at the Engineers
Representatives office within 30 days of the date of appointment. All items to be new.

A. Camera: Provide digital camera Sony, MVC FD200 MAVICA 6X. (Latest model)

B. Binding Machine: Provide portable manual punch and wire bind machine for A4 size papers with adequate
wire binding elements.

C. Photo Copier: Provide one heavy duty photo copier model Canon NP or other equal and approved of
double unit providing A4 and A3 size copying with document feeder and collator.

D. Fax Machine: Provide two numbers fax (telephone plain paper photo copier A4 size) machine combined
with telephone handset for use of Employer and Engineer with dedicated MOC telephone line to fax without
international calls facility. Provide table and consumables for fax machine.

E. Computer: The Contractor is to supply and install the latest model of the personal computer hardware and
software for the use of Employer and Engineer for the duration of the Project including maintenance and
consumables supplies:

F. Consumables &Office Maintenance throughout Project Period:

1. Paper for photo copies, facsimile and computer.
2. Files of various sizes for correspondences.
3. Stationery items for each supervision staff.
4. Maintenance for photo copier, facsimile and computer.

END OF SECTION

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-1
SECTION - 01600

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Section 01030 - Alternatives
B. Section 01400 - Quality Control : Product quality monitoring

1.02 PRODUCTS

A. Products: means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures and system forming the work. Does not
include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products
may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.

B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components.

1.03 TRANSPORTATION, DELIVERY, RECEIVING AND HANDLING

A. PACKAGING, TRANSPORTATION

1. Transport materials and plant from source, whether inside or outside Kuwait to site.

2. Require supplier to package products in boxes or crates for protection during shipment, handling and
storage. Protect sensitive products against exposure to elements and moisture.

3. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact, abrasion and other damage. Effect insurance to the
full value of the shipped product.

B. DELIVERY AND RECEIVING

1. Arrange deliveries of products to the Site in accordance with construction progress schedules. Allow time for
inspection prior to installation.

2. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at site; work of other contractors; or
Employer; limitations on storage space; availability of personnel and handling equipment; and Employers
use of premises.

3. Deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original unopened containers or packaging with identifying
labels intact and legible.

Programme delivery and unloading to avoid traffic back-ups on or adjacent to Site.

4. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify equipment and contents to permit
easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly.

5. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to assure:

a. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals.

b. Quantities are correct.

c. Accessories and installation hardware are correct.

d. Containers and packages are intact and labels legible.

e. Products are protected and undamaged.

6. Replace damaged products and plant at no expense to the Employer.

C. PRODUCT HANDLING

1. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products, by methods to prevent soiling and damage.

2. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise damaging products,
packaging and surrounding surfaces.

3. Handle product by methods to avoid bending or overstressing. Lift large and heavy components only at
designated lift points.

4. Comply with suppliers/manufacturers and Engineers recommendations and instructions.

5. Observe safety regulations.

1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturers instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.
Store sensitive products in weathertight, dustproof, climate controlled enclosures.

B. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports, above ground and sand.

C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.

E. Storage loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

F. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage.

G. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water.

H. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids.

I. Maintenance of Storage:

1. Periodically inspect stored products on a schedule basis. Maintain a log of inspections, make available to
Engineer on request.

2. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturers product storage requirements.

3. Verify that manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually.

4. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected; that any weathering of
finishes is acceptable under requirements of Contract Documents.

J. Maintenance of equipment storage:

1. For mechanical and electrical equipment in long-term storage, provide manufacturers service instructions to
accompany each item, with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior of package.

2. Service equipment on a regularly scheduled basis, maintaining a log of services; submit as a record
document.

1.05 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products specified by reference standard or by description only: any product meeting those standards or description.

B. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers is deemed to include or approved alternative or
(approved substitute). Submit a request for substitutions for any equal product of any manufacturer not specifically
named.

C. Or approved alternative or (approved substitute) means the products of a different manufacturer may be substituted
if prior approval has been obtained, but the Engineer reserves the right to insist on the named product(s).

D. Rates or prices will be held to be based on the product(s) specified, unless otherwise agreed and any cost arising out
of the use of any substitute material or product shall be borne by the Contractor and any saving arising therefrom shall
be passed on to the Employer.

E. Where used in this combination:

1. Manufacturer means the firm under whose name the particular product is marketed.

2. Reference means the proprietary brand name and/or reference by which the particular product is identified.

F. Where a choice of manufacturer or source of supply is allowed for any particular product or material, the whole
quantity required to complete the work must be of the same type, manufacturer and/or source. Do not change without
prior approval of the Engineer.

G. Product written evidence of sources of supply when requested by the Engineer.

1.06 PRODUCTS LIST

A. Within 30 days after date of Employer-Contractor Agreement, transmit four copies of a list of all products which are
proposed for installation, including name of manufacturer.

B. Tabulate products by Specifications section number, title and Article number.

C. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalogue designation
and reference standards.

D. Engineer will reply in writing within (21) days stating whether there is reasonable objection to listed items. Failure to
object to a listed item shall not constitute a waiver of requirements of Contract Documents.

E. All materials and systems to be incorporated in the Project are subject to the approval of the Employer.

1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Except in special instances, the Specification gives one to three manufacturers of products specified and the products
of the listed manufacturers have been used for detailing and as the standard of quality appearance and function.
Products proposed for substitution shall conform basically to design and performance requirements.

B. Written requests for substitutions or approved alternatives (substitutions) products will be considered only within 45
days after date of Employer-Contractor Agreement. Subsequent requests will be considered only in case of product
unavailability or other conditions beyond control of Contractor. Allow sufficient time for Engineers review.

C. Substitutions will not be considered when indicated on shop drawings or product data submittals without separate
formal request, when requested directly by subcontractor or supplier, or when acceptance will require submittal
revision of Contract Documents.

D. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance and approval by the Engineer and
Employer.

E. Only ON REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION for each product will be considered. When substitution is not accepted,
provide specified product.

F. Engineer will determine acceptability of substitution.

1.08 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Submit separate request for each substitution. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance
of proposed substitution and detailed drawing with requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Identify product by Specifications section and Article numbers. Provide manufacturers name and address, trade name
of product and model or catalogue number. List fabricators and suppliers as appropriate.

C. Attach product data as specified in Section 01340.

D. List similar projects using product, dates of installation and names of Engineer and Employer.

E. Give itemised comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing variations and reference to
Specifications section and article number.

F. Give quality and performance comparison between proposed substitution and the specified product and compatibility
with adjacent components.

G. Give cost data comparing proposed substitution with specified product and amount of net change to Contract Sum.

H. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials.

I. State effect of substitution on construction schedule and changes required in other work or products.

1.09 CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATION

A. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor has investigated proposed product and has
determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product or that the cost reduction offered or
advantageous delivery dates is ample justification for accepting the offered substitution. Only with these reasons and
justifications would the Engineer consider the request for substitution.

B. Contractor will provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product.

C. Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for Work to be
complete in all respects.

D. Contractor certified that cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract.

E. Contractor waives claims for additional costs related to substitution which may later become apparent.


A. Submit three copies of request for substitution.

B. Engineer will review Contractors request for substitutions with reasonable promptness.


C. During the bidding period, no submittals for substitutions is allowed unless specifically requested.

D. After award of Contract, Engineer will notify Contractor, in writing of decision to accept or reject requested substitution
within 21 days.

E. For accepted products, submit shop drawings, product data and samples under provisions of Section 01340.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Applicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Applicable.

END OF SECTION

EQUALS AND SUBSTITUTES 01631-1
SECTION 01631

EQUALS AND SUBSTITUTES

PART-1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for approving
equals or substitutes presented by the Contractor.

B. Related Sections:

1. All Sections considered by the Engineer as relevant to this section shall be considered as
Related Sections.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. The term "product" shall mean any material including proprietary goods, equipment and manufactured items.

B. Wherever more than one manufacturer or item is listed in the contract documents, then the choice lies with
the Contractor, while the approval of the actual details shall be with the Engineer or the Engineer's
Representative.

C. Equal Manufacturers and Products: References herein to "approved equal" or similar terms shall mean that
the approval of the Engineer is required to any manufacturer and product not named in the contract but
proposed by the Contractor as equal to the named ones.

D. Substitute Products: If the Contractor is unable to obtain the named product or named manufacturers
product and if he is also unable to find and propose an approvable equal manufacturer and product in spite
of his demonstrated sufficient (in the opinion of the Engineers Representative) endeavors, he may propose
a substitute for the Engineer's review and approval, which substitute shall be similar to, and as near as
possible to the specified ones.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Equal or Substitute Request Submittal: The Engineer's Representative will receive requests as follows:
1. Submit 3 copies of each request for consideration. Submit requests in the form and according to
procedures required.
2. Identify the manufacturer and product, the fabrication, installation method in each request. Include
related Specification Sections and Drawing numbers.
3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements and the following as
appropriate:
a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by the owner and separate contractors,
if any, that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed equal or substitute.
b. A detailed comparison of all the specified and significant qualities of the proposed
equal or substitute with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities will include
elements, such as performance, weight, size, durability, and visual effect etc.
c. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
d. Samples, where applicable or requested.
e. A statement indicating the effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule.

f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net saving if any in the Contract Sum.
Additional costs are not accepted. This should be substantiated by comparative
quotations with complete rate breakdown for both the proposed equal/substitute item
and the specified item.
g. The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time, that may subsequently
become necessary because of the failure of the equal or substitute to perform
adequately.
h. Warranty
i. Reimbursement for review and redesign services, if applicable in the opinion of the

B. Engineer's Action: The approval of any equal or substitute product shall in no way relieve the Contractor
of any of his liabilities and obligations under the Contract. The burden of proof in satisfying the Engineer as
to the suitability of any product shall rest with the Contractor. The Engineer may request and the Contractor
shall provide such supporting data, carryout such tests, etc., as the Engineer may reasonably require in
order to satisfy him as to such suitability. Any extra costs of delay by the Contractor, because of his failure to
propose equals or substitute in a timely manner, so as to allow the Engineer reasonable time to review, or
because of rejection of equals or substitute found by the Engineer to be unsuitable, shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor, and he shall not be entitled to additional payment nor to extra time for this
reason.

C. Cost effect in approving equals or substitutes : Should any equal or substitute product be proposed by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, any increase in cost over and above the specified product
shall be borne by the Contractor.

Should a substitute product be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, then any saving
in cost shall be to the benefit of the Employer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUALS AND SUBSTITUTES

A. Specifying of manufacturers or their products by name, trade name, catalogue number, etc., shall not act to
relieve the Contractor either from his responsibility to meet other specification requirements, or from his
responsibility to make material submittals for approval.

B. Equal or substitute products where permitted and approved, must conform to the Engineer's designed
space requirements. Any such product that does not meet such space requirements, whether approved or
not, shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense and any modification of replaced systems thereby arising
shall also be made at his expense.

C. Refer to item 1.03E of Section 01600 Materials and Equipment and consider it repeated here.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION


CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-1
SECTION 01700

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART-1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01569 - Construction Cleaning
B. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
C. Section 01750 - Operation and Maintenance

A. Closeout Procedures.
1. Substantial Completion.
2. Closeout Submittals.
3. Statement of Adjustment of Accounts.
4. Contractor's Obligations.
B. Final Cleaning
C. Adjusting
D. Warranties
E. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.

1.03 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Substantial Completion
1. When Contractor considers work is about to be substantially complete, submit written notice with
list of items to be completed or corrected and the expected date of substantial completion.
2. Should Engineer inspection find Work is not substantially complete, he will promptly notify
Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies, citing his own date of completion of deficiencies
snags etc.
3. Contractor shall remedy all deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial
completion.
4. When Engineer finds Work is substantially complete he will prepare a Certificate of Substantial
Completion in accordance with provisions of the Contract Conditions and Documents
5. Work will be considered substantially complete when all works and systems and particularly the
electrical systems are tested and found to be acceptable to the Engineer and to the statutory
authorities.

B. Closeout Submittals
1. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities, and as requested by the
Engineer.
2. Project Record Documents: Under provisions of Section 01720.
3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Under provisions of Section 01730.
4. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.

5. Keys and Keying Schedule.
6. Evidence of Payment: In accordance with Conditions of the Contract.
7. Certificates of Insurance for Products and Completed
Operations: In accordance with Particular Conditions.
C. Statement of Adjustment of Accounts
1. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to Contract Sum indicating:
a. Original Contract Sum.
b. Previous variations
c. Deductions for uncorrected work
d. Deductions against Advance Payment if any
e. Deductions for delays penalties
f. Deductions for Engineer's fees
g. Other adjustments to Contract Sum
h. Total Contract Sum as adjusted
i. Previous payments
j. Sum remaining due
2. Engineer will issue a final Variation List reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum not
previously made by variations, for Company Authorization.

D. Contractor's Obligations during the last weeks of the Contract Period and during the Period determined by
the Engineer to enable the Contractor to attend tot he Snag List
1. Make good all damage consequent upon the work.
2. Touch up minor faults in newly painted/re-painted work, carefully matching colour, and brushing
out edges. Repaint badly marked areas back to suitable breaks or junctions.
3. Adjust, ease and lubricate moving parts of new work as necessary to ensure easy and efficient
operation, including doors, windows, drawers, hardware, appliances and controls.
4. Leave the Works secure with all accesses locked. Account for and adequately label all keys and hand
over to the Company with itemised schedule, retaining a duplicate schedule signed by the Company as
a receipt.
5. Where any section of the Works will, after its practical completion, depend for its adequate functioning
on work located elsewhere in the Work, complete such other work in time to permit Sectional
Completion as required.
6. During execution of the remainder of the Works insure that completed sections of the Works have
continuous and adequate provision of services, fire precautions, means of escape and safe
access.
7. Make arrangements with the Company's Representative and give him reasonable notice of the
precise dates of access to the various parts of the Works for purposes of making good defects.
Inform the Engineer when remedial works to the various parts of the Works are completed.

1.04 FINAL CLEANING

A. Description
1. Execute final cleaning in accordance with Section 01710

1.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

1.06 WARRANTIES


A. Form of Submittals
1. Bind in commercial quality 210 X 297mm (A4) two-ring side binders, with hardback, cleanable,
plastic covers.
2. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of
project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor; and name of responsible principal.
3. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual,
with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified,
and the name of Product or work item.
4. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing.
Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List subcontractor, supplier,
and manufacturer, with name, address, telephone and fax numbers of responsible agent in Kuwait
principal elsewhere.

B. Preparation of Submittals
1. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers, within fourteen days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for
items put into use with Company's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the
Date of Substantial completion is determined.
2. Verify that documents are in proper form and contain full information.
3. Co-execute submittals when required.
4. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

C. Time of Submittals
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with
Company's permission, submit documents within fourteen days after acceptance, listing the date
of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.
2. For items of work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit
within fourteen days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the
warranty period.

3. Make other submittals within fourteen days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
Application for Payment, listing the date of substantial completion as the beginning of the warranty
period.

1.07 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Products Required
1. Submit master spare list for review.
2. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance materials
specified in individual sections to be provided to Company, in addition to that required for
completion of Work.
3. Products: Identical to those installed in the Work. Include quantities in original purchase from
supplier or manufacturer to avoid variations in manufacture.

B. Storage, Maintenance
1. Store products with products to be installed in the work, under provisions of Section 01600.

2. After delivery of products to site, maintain spare products in same space and condition as products
to be installed in the Work.
3. When adequate, secure storage facilities are available at site, capable of maintaining conditions
required for storage and not required for Contract work or storage, spare products may be stored
in available space.
4. Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible, until delivery to
Company

C. Delivery
1. Coordinate with Company: Deliver and unload spare products to Company at Project site or
designated storage location and obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

FINAL CLEANING 01710-1
SECTION 01710

FINAL CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Final cleaning of project at substantial completion.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Execute final cleaning prior to inspection for Substantial Completion of each designated portion of the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS

A. Use materials which will not create hazards to health or property, and which will not damage surfaces.

B. Use only materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material being cleaned. Submit to
Engineer for approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FINAL CLEANING

A. To be executed by an industrial cleaning (Specialist) Subcontractor (and not by the Contractors own staff)
immediately prior to handing over the works at substantial completion . Cleaning operation shall include:
1. In addition to removal of debris and cleaning specified in other sections, clean interior and exterior
exposed to-view surfaces.
2. Remove temporary protection, wrappings, markings and labels not required to remain.
3. Clean finishes free of dust, stains, paint films and mortar splashes and other foreign substances.
4. Clean transparent and glossy materials inside and out to a polished condition; remove foreign
substances. Polish reflective surfaces to a clear shine.
5. Clean, scrub, damp, mop or wax and polish resilient and hard surfaced floors as specified.
6. Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication.
7. Clean and polish plumbing fixtures and equipment to a sanitary condition.
8. Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and replace disposable filters when units have
been operated during construction; in addition, clean ducts, blowers, and coils when units have
been operated without filters during construction.
9. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
10. Maintain cleaning until Substantial Completion.
11. Remove waste, foreign matter, and debris from roofs, gutters, area, and drainage systems.
12. Remove waste, debris, and surplus materials from site. Clean grounds; remove stains, spills, and
foreign substances from paved areas and sweep clean. Rake clean other exterior surfaces.

FINAL CLEANING 01710-2
END OF SECTION

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-1
SECTION 01720

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples.
B. Submittal of Record Documents and Samples.

1.03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES

A. In addition to requirements in General and Particular Conditions maintain in the Project Record Document
Room at the site for Engineer and Construction Manager one record copy of :
1. Contract Drawings
2. Project Manual
3. Addenda
4. Variations and other modifications to the Contract
5. Reviewed and stamped shop drawings, product data, and samples
6. Field test records
7. Inspection certificates and checklists
8. Manufacturer's certificates

B. Store Record Documents and samples in Field Office apart from documents used for construction. Provide
files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and samples.

C. Label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance with Section number listings in Table of
Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters.

D. Maintain record Documents in a clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for
construction purposes, and do not remove from record document room without prior approval from the

E. Keep Record Documents and samples available for inspection by Engineer.

1.04 RECORDING

A. Record daily "as-built" information on a set of blue or black line opaque drawings, and in a copy of a Project
Manual.

B. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording information.

C. Record daily information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required
information is recorded.

D. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:
1. Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations and sizes of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.

3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to
visible and accessible features of construction.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Changes made by Modifications.
6. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
7. References to related shop drawings and Modifications.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually installed, particularly
optional items and substitute items.
2. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.

F. Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's instruction manuals and certifications, inspection certifications,
field test records, and other Documents required by individual Specifications sections.

G. Labour Record
1. Each day, provide for verification by the Engineer a record showing the number and description of
craftsmen, labours. and other persons employed on or in connection with the Works including
those employed by Assigned Subcontractors.

H. Visitors Record
1. Maintain a record of visitors to the Site, and submit at weekly intervals to the Engineer.

I. Weather Records
1. Keep an accurate record of:
a. Daily maximum and minimum air temperatures (including overnight).
b. Number of hours per day in which work is prevented by inclement weather.
2. Provide at least two maximum and minimum thermometers at agreed locations inside the
buildings.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 45 days of the Date of Substantial Completion, for each of the relevant portions of the Work, submit
two original sepia prints (one regular size and one reduced size) and five printed sets of Record (As Built)
Documents plus four complete Drawings copies reduced to size 600 x 40Omm. Obtain approval of size of
drawings, quality of transparent sheets, method of drawing and the like, prior to preparation of drawings.
Also provide 2 copies of computer diskettes of all project drawings.

B. Transmit with cover letter in duplicate, listing:
1. Date
2. Project Title and Number
3. Contractor's Name, Address, and Telephone Number
4. Number and title of each Record Document and arrange in correct sequence
5. Signature of Contractor or authorized representative

C. Where provision of "record" drawings is required by Ministries or the Municipality as a precondition to
providing their service connections, approvals and the like, submit drawings at the correct time.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-1
SECTION 01730

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

This section is applicable to this contract to the extent that this contract includes such systems which require operation and
maintenance data.


A. Format and content of manuals.
B. Instruction of Company's personnel.
C. Schedule of submittals.


A. Prepare instructions and data by approved personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of
described products.

1.03 FORMAT

A. Prepare data in the form of an instruction manual.

B. Binders: Commercial quality, size A4 two-ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers; 25mm
maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.

C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of
Project and identify subject matter of contents.

D. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project
Manual.

E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major
component parts of equipment.

F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data.

G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text
pages.

1.04 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME

A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Engineer, Construction
Manager and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems indexed to content
of the volume.

B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers,
including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

C. Product Data : Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data
applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.

D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to
show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.


E. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each
procedure.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each.
1.05 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size,
composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured
products.

B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and
methods, precautions against 'detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning
and maintenance.

C. Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: include product data listing applicable reference
standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections,
maintenance, and repair.

D. Additional Requirements: As Specified in individual Specifications sections.

E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.

1.06 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts.
Give function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with
engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

B. Panel board Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications.

C. Include as-installed colour coded wiring diagrams.

D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences.
Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any
special operating instructions.

E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble shooting; disassembly, repair,
and reassemble instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for
maintenance.

J. Provide as-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.

K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with as installed colour coded piping diagrams.

L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control
diagrams.

M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be
maintained in storage.

N. Include test and balancing reports.

O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual Specifications sections.

P. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.

1.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work.
Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments.

B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by
Company, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.

C. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. Copy will be returned
after final inspection, with Engineer comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final
submittal.

D. Submit four copies of revised volumes of data in final form within ten days after final inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

WARRANTIES 01740-1
SECTION 01740

WARRANTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract
Documents both here and elsewhere, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special
project warranties. Compare the various requirements as stated here and elsewhere and provide for the
more/most stringent combination of the requirements.

B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve
the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and
limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to
countersign special project warranties with the Contractor.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular
products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Employer.

B. Special project warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents,
either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Employer.

1.03 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and
replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to
provide access for correction of warranted construction.

B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or
rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original
warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the
work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is
responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the Employer has
benefited from use of the work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. Employer's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Employer are in addition to implied warranties and
shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed
warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Employer can enforce such
other duties, obligations, rights or remedies.
1. Rejection of Warranties: The Employer reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection
to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

E. Where the Contract Documents require a special project warranty, or similar commitment on the work or part
of the work, the Employer reserves the right to refuse to accept the work, until the Contractor presents
evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

WARRANTIES 01740-2
A. Submit written warranties to the Engineer's Representative prior to the date certified for Substantial
Completion. If the Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties
other than the date of Substantial Completion for the work, or a designated portion of the work, submit
written warranties upon request of the Engineer's Representative.
1. When a designated portion of the work is completed and occupied or used by the Employer by
separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed
warranties to the Engineer's Representative within 15 days of completion of that designated
portion of the work.

B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a Subcontractor supplier or
manufacturer to execute a special project warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate
terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Engineer's
Representative for approval prior to final execution.

C. List of special warranties and form formats for special project warranties are included at the end of this
section. Prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Contractor.
1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special project warranties.

D. Form of Submittal: At Substantial Completion compile three (3) copies of each required warranty properly
executed by the Contractor. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table
of contents of the Project Manual.

E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable vinyl-covered loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents and sized to receive A4 paper.
1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab
to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,
including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the Installer.
2. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "Warranties", Project title
or name and name of the Contractor.
3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional
copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 LIST OF WARRANTIES

A. Schedule: Provide warranties on products and installations if and as specified in the following sections:
1. Section 02580 "Pavement Marking"
2. Section 02700 "Drainage"
3. Section 02800 "Site Improvements"
4. Section 02810 "Irrigation systems"
5. Section 07160 "Damp/ water Proofing"
7. Section 07722 "Roof Hatches"
8. Section 09310 "Ceramic Tiles"
9. Section 10800 "Toilet and Bath Accessories"

WARRANTIES 01740-3
10. Section 11460 "Unit Kitchens"
11. Section 14200 "Conveying Systems"
12. Section 14640 "Gantry Cranes"
13. Section 15300 "Fire Protection"
14. Section 15400 "Plumbing"
15. Section 15480 "Gas Service"
16. Section 15500 "General Requirement HVAC Works"
17. Section 15785 "Split DX Cooling Units"
18. Division 16 "Electrical"

B. Schedule: Provide Special Project Warranties on products and installations if and as specified in the
following sections:
1. Section 02282 "Termite Control"
2. Section 05161 "Space Frame"
3. Section 07110 "Waterproofing"
4. Section 07120 "Fluid Applied Waterproofing"
5. Section 07145 "Cementitious Waterproofing"
6. Section 07920 "Sealants"
7. Section 08110 "Steel Doors and Frames"
8. Section 08210 "Flush Wood Doors"
9. Section 08410 "Aluminum Entrances
10. Section 08520 "Aluminium Windows"
11. Section 08710 "Doors Hardware"
12. Section 08800 "Glazing"

C. Any other warranties if and as specified in any other sections.

3.02 WARRANTY FORM

A. The Contractor shall submit warranty forms in the format shown:

CONTRACTOR LETTER HEAD
Special Project Warranty

Date :
Contract Ref. No. :
Name of Project :
Employer :
Contractor :
Warranted System Validity :
Commencement Date : _______________ Expiry Date : _______________
We the undersigned (insert full name and address of Employer):

Contractor : ______________________________________________________

WARRANTIES 01740-4

Agree to provide the special project warranty of the (description and location of product/system)
...................................................................... agreeing to repair or replace subject to the warranty
requirements below and conditions stated in the contract documents during the period of (state period) from
the above mentioned commencement date at our own complete cost and expense to the full satisfaction of
the Employer or his approved Representative.

Warranty Requirements:
1. _____________________________ (describe nature of warranty responsibility) .
2. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction,
remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be
removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.
3. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by
replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty
shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
4. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or
rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work
regardless of whether the Employer has benefited from use of the work through a portion of its
anticipated useful service life.
5. Employer's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Employer are in addition to implied
warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under
the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the
Employer can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights or remedies.
a. Rejection of Warranties: The Employer reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit
selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
6. Where the Contract Documents require a special project warranty, or similar commitment on the
work or part of the work, the Employer reserves the right to refuse to accept the work, until the
Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to
do so.

Signatures Date

Contractor _________________________________ _________________

END OF SECTION

MAINTENANCE PERIOD DUTIES 01750-1
SECTION 01750

MAINTENANCE PERIOD DUTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Operation, Preventive Maintenance, Running Maintenance and Guaranteed Maintenance of all the works
carried out by the Contractor for a period of two years starting from the date/s the works are certified as
substantially complete comprising :
1. Administrative, logistical and supervisory requirements for co-ordinating activities during the said 2
years period
2. Reliability Tests
3. Training of Owners Personnel
4. Preventive Running and Guaranteed Maintenance as per the respective manufacturers
recommendation, including all materials, Tools and Spare Parts required as per the respective
manufacturers recommendation.
5. Keeping plant rooms and areas of work clean and tidy from the uncleanliness resulting from the
Contractors activities.
6. Maintenance of Records
7. Completion Certificate

B. Replanting of seasonal flowers six times during the said two year period.

C. All maintenance period duties mentioned anywhere else in the Tender/Contract.

D. Guaranteed Maintenance of the following works for a further period after the above period of two years is
over :
1. All roofing and waterproofing works for a further period of three years.
2. All sealed compressors; for a further period of three years.

E. The faultless operation/maintenance of the following will be considered as duties of utmost urgent
importance :- Air-conditioning, Power and Elevators.

The faultless operation/maintenance of the rest will also be considered as duties of utmost importance but
of urgency as determined on a case to case basis by the Employer.

1.02 OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Owner will supply all kinds of water from the turn over date for complete needs of the project and its
occupants, tree of cost to the Contractor.

B. Similarly, the Owner will supply all power needs of the Project and its occupants from the MEW also free of
cost to the Contractor.

1.03 RELATED WORK(S)

A. Section 01400 - Quality Control
B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Spare Parts
C. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data

D. Section 01740 - Warranties
E. Section 02970 - Landscape Maintenance
F. All other sections where maintenance period duties and staff etc. are mentioned.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineering (CIBSE), UK.


A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be used as the basis for maintenance.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit and resubmit to the Engineer till his approval operational and maintenance manuals with respect to
each and every work system, sub system or equipment requiring such a manual, listing or maintenance
program, method, tools, consumables, spares etc.

Begin this submittal process six months before and complete it min. one month before the Turn Over Date.

B. Submit and resubmit to the Engineer till his approval the CVs of the staff proposed for the maintenance
works.

Begin this submittal process three months before and complete it min. one month before the Turn Over
Date.

C. Begin to submit to the Owner the following at the beginning of the second year of the maintenance period of
two years.
1. Tools and Spare parts lists (for use by the Owner after the 2-year maintenance period is over) for
the Owner to approve, order and receive before the end of the said 2 years maintenance period.

1.07 REMEDY OF CONTRACTORS FAILURE

A. At the end of the maintenance period, or soon thereafter, and provided either that all works during that
period had been attended to promptly and satisfactorily by the Contractor or that the Owner is satisfied that
the costs of the works that the Owner, had to carry out, consequent upon the failure of the Contractor to
attend to them, shall not reasonably exceed the retention amount, the Owner shall release the retention
amount to the Contractor.

B. However, if the Owner in his sole discretion, had already released a certain amount against a bank
guarantee then the Contractor shall be at liberty to allow the said bank guarantee to lapse at the end of its
validity unless he receives a written communication from the Owner within the said validity period, instructing
the Contractor to extend the said bank guarantee for the reason that works that had arisen during the
maintenance period & which were being carried out by the Owner for reasons hereinabove, were expected
to cost an amount exceeding the retention.

C. The Owner shall then be at liberty, to encash the said bank guarantee, spend the necessary and certified
amounts as detailed hereinabove and pay the residue to the Contractor promptly upon the completion of the
relevant works.

D. The attention and diligence that the Contractor shall bestow on calls from the Owner and/or the Engineer
shall be as follows :
(i) First visit by the Contractor to site and meetings with the Owner
- Within a reasonable period, or
- Maximum, within one calendar day of the Owner's call to the Contractor.
(ii) Completion of work
- Within a reasonable period, or
- Maximum, within the time agreed with the Owner when the first visit was paid by the
Contractor.

The Owner shall be free to consider that the Contractor had defaulted on his obligations if the time
designated in (i) and/or (ii) above elapses and the first visit is not made and/or the work is not completed or
not completed satisfactorily.
1.08 CONTRACTORS STAFF DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

A. The Contractor shall provide the following staff and such additional staff as mentioned elsewhere in the
Tender/Contract, throughout the maintenance period of two years :

Position Qualification Exp. Duration of
Availability at Site
Penalty KD/
Day
1. Operation and
Maintenance Manager
Graduation Electrical/
Mechanical Engineer with
overall knowledge of
building services
10 2 hours/day + for
meetings and
emergencies + to be on
call at all other times
50
2. Civil Supervisor 1 - for
building & external
works
Diploma, Civil Engineering 10 -Do- 30
3. Landscape
Maintenance
Supervisor
Degree in horticulture/
Plant Science etc.
8 8 hours/day 40
4. Landscape Foreman Degree in horticulture/
Plant Science etc.
6 8 hours/day 40
5. Mechanical Supervisor Diploma Mechanical
Engineering
10 8 hours/day + on call at
all other times
30
6. HVAC Supervisor Diploma Mechanical
Engineering
10 -Do- 30
7. Electrical/Controls
Supervisor
Diploma Electrical
Engineering
10 -Do- 30
8. Mechanical/HVAC
Technician, 1 No.
Trade Certificate 10 8 hours/day 20
9. Electrical/Controls
Technician, 1 No.
Trade Certificate 10 8 hours/day 20

Note : 1. If a position requires more than one person to fill, the Contractor shall provide these
according to the Kuwait labour laws.
2. A day means a calendar day

B. The penalty noted above will be levied if, in the knowledge/opinion of the Owner :
1. the staff is absent, or
2. the staff fails to perform his duty inspite of being present.

C. The Owner shall provide free of cost the offices space and stores space for the Contractors maintenance
period staff.

D. It will be the Contractors responsibility to provide all his maintenance period staff with all their other
requirements such as furniture, mobile telephones, tools, instruments, stationery, etc. complete.

E. Please also see other parts of the Tender Documents for further requirements in this regard.

E. The above positions and their hours of work are the minimum. Additional hours or additional staff will have
to be provided without additional cost if it becomes necessary in the reasonable opinion of the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

Following activities shall be allowed for by the contractor.

A. Relaibility Tests
1. Conduct reliability tests for the HVAC system in accordance with specification Section 15500.

B. Guaranteed Maintenance
1. Repair/replacement of works, systems, sub-systems, equipment or components which may prove
defective due to design, manufacture, installation, testing, commissioning and where stipulated,
then due to reliability tests etc.

D. Soft Landscaping
1. The Contractor shall replant seasonal flowers six times during the said two year period.
2. The Contractor shall carryout all other works detailed in the relevant section or required in the
opinion of the Engineer to maintain the soft landscaping in a lush green and tidy, well-pruned, one
hundred percent live manner including replacing sick or dead trees and plants etc.

E. Spare Parts and Tools
1. Tools / equipment required for proper maintenance of the works shall be provided by the
contractor(s) and handed over to the Company / Owner at the end of the maintenance period.

F. Maintenance of Records
1. Log-books, log-sheets, maintenance job cards, etc. shall be maintained at site by the
Contractor(s).
2. A written report, including dates, parts replaced etc., detailing the maintenance work performed, shall
be provided to the Company / Owner, at the end of the maintenance period.

G. Training of Owners Personnel
1. Owner's personnel shall be trained by the contractor for the operation and maintenance of all the
works of the Project such as :-
1. HVAC Systems
2. Pumps and all other rotating systems
3. Electrical and low voltage system such as fire alarm system, data communication system, access
control system, CCTV system, public address system, audio visual system, TV and satellite
system and telecommunication system etc. etc.
4. Building management system
5. All other works, systems and equipment.
6. Test run Diesel Generator once every 15 days with his own diesel for 30 minutes.

END OF SECTION

SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
Project No: KW.09.0128 02010-1
Project Name: Wafra Housing Complex 01 21 July 2011

DIVISION 2 SITE WORK

SECTION 02010

SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. SOILS REPORT AND BORE HOLES

1. A soils report has been prepared for guidance and convenience only (as they do not form part of the
Contract Documents). A copy is included in the Tender Package.

2. The availability of this report to the Contractor does not relieve the Contractor of obligations to thoroughly
investigate the nature of the Site and the Sub-soil conditions therein, nor does it relieve the Contractor of
any obligations and responsibilities under the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.

B. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY

The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the Site prior to submitting his Tender and made all necessary
inspections and investigations and, to have decided for himself the means of access and working space, the nature of
the ground and sub-soil, the presence of existing foundations or other hidden obstructions, the level of the water table,
the extent of rock, support to neighbouring properties and structures and all factors affecting the Work and shall be
deemed to have allowed for these in his Tender. Any information made available to the Contractor, either in these
documents or the soils reports will not relieve the contractor of his responsibility to decide for himself the nature and
extent of the work, nor will it guarantee that similar conditions will apply on other parts of the Site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Applicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Applicable.

END OF SECTION

DEMOLITION
Project No: KW.09.0128 02010-1

SECTION02072

DEMOLITION

PART - 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The work covered by this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and
materials, and performing all operations in connection with demolition of all the existing buildings and works,
all at once or in stages/phases as appropriate and disposal of all the demolished material to authorised
dump. All useful/ useable material shall be removed from site as Contractors property, unless otherwise
notified here or elsewhere.

PART - 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART - 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DEMOLITION

Prior to any demolition the Contractor shall execute the following :

- Get necessary approvals form all related authorities for the disconnection of existing scurvies and disconnect
them with out any damage for others.

- Survey the site and report to the Engineer all bench marks and other information found on works to be removed.

- Locate and mark positions of services affected by the work in liaison with the Owner and/or the appropriate
authorities.

- Arrange with the Owner and/or the appropriate authorities for disconnection at an appropriate time and stage.

3.02 SCHEDULES &PROCEDURES FOR DEMOLITION&RELATED OPERATIONS ETC.

The Contractor shall submit & resubmit till Engineer's approval, his schedules & methods to carryout demolition works,
propping & supporting works, for keeping services operative, for installing & maintaining safety measures, for abating
noise, for completely excluding dust and other pollutants, for allowing other operations adjacent to the "site" to continue
with minimal hinderance etc.

Nevertheless, the Contractor shall remain responsible for all works regardless of the Engineer's approval to any of his
schedules & methods.

3.03 During demolition, if the contractor damages any of the works and services that are not required to be demolished, they
shall have to be rectified without any extra cost.

3.04 During demolition works, care must be taken that the existing activities and operation of the Owner and of others are not
disturbed.

3.05 SAFETY AND NUISANCE

The following duties shall be performed by the Contractor to protect persons and properties and avoid nuisance.

DEMOLITION
Project No: KW.09.0128 02010-2

- When demolishing structures against adjoining property adequate support and protection at each stage shall be
provided and arrangement made for inspection by the Engineer.

- When demolishing, inform workers and person in the vicinity to be vigilant and take necessary precautions.

- All openings and pits shall be illuminated and protected as necessary.

- Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent fire or explosion caused by gas, vapour or flammable
substances.

- Disturbance and noise shall be minimised while water, wind and dust shall be completely stopped from entering
enclosed spaces.

3.06 DISPOSAL

Debris and rubbish arising from demolition etc., shall include removal from the site to the dumping areas selected by the
Contractor and approved by the Municipality.

3.07 CLEANUP AND KEEP CLEAN

A. The Contractor shall clean up all areas on a regularly scheduled basis or whenever deemed necessary by the
Engineer, as well as upon completion of the work.

B. Adjacent buildings, paved surfaces etc. shall be kept clean during the execution of works

END OF SECTION

SITE PREPARATION
Project No: KW.09.0128 02010-1

SECTION 02100

SITE PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. General preparation of the site by removal of all impediments prior to the commencement of the work.

B. Clear the site from trees, plant and grass.

C. Remove complete roots of trees and shrubs.

D. Remove surface debris.

E. Divert utilities and other services (if any) in compliance with regulations.

F. Disposal of removed materials away from site and in a legal manner in full compliance with local authorities rules and
regulations.


These hereinafter listed related sections are intended to be used as a helpful indication of the related sections within
the Project Specifications. They are not necessarily comprehensive are complete and it is the Contractors
responsibility to ascertain all applicable sections required to understand the full scope of works intended.

1. Section 02010 - Subsurface Investigations.

2. Section 02200 - Earthwork

1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to local codes and regulations for disposal of debris.

B. The approval of the Engineer that the site has been properly prepared shall be obtained before subsequent
earthworks are put into operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Remove all debris from the site of the Works inclusive of loose and semi-buried pieces of concrete, etc. which require
disposal, to avoid incorporation with excavated material which may be used in filling into excavations.

B. Scrape out all growing vegetation including roots, which require disposal, to avoid incorporation with excavated
material which may be used in filling into excavations.

SITE PREPARATION
Project No: KW.09.0128 02010-2
C. All material removed under this section shall be disposed of in a place of deposit found by the Contractor who shall be
responsible for all charges in connection therewith. Burning of materials on site will not be allowed.

END OF SECTION

DEWATERING
Project No: KW.09.0128 02140-1
SECTION 02140

DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

The work included in this Section covers the complete dewatering of the Site as required during the excavation and
construction of the building, including the provision of temporary piezometer.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

The work includes but is not limited to the labour, materials, equipment and services required for designing, furnishing,
installing, maintaining, operating, monitoring and moving systems for dewatering the site, controlling surface water and
collecting and disposing of discharge water during the construction process, and until sufficient dead load of the
structure is in place to prevent floatation.

1.03 DEWATERING SYSTEM(S) DESIGN

A. The Contractor shall submit for approval his proposed design and detailed layout for the dewatering
system or systems he intends to install. The proposed system(s) shall be designed to ensure the
following:

i) The lowering of the water table over the site to allow excavation to proceed and maintaining
the water level below the base of excavation as it proceeds (drawdown period).

ii) The reduction of piezometric levels in the underlying strata sufficiently during the drawdown
stage to ensure stability of the excavation.

iii) Once excavation is complete the water level in the ground must be maintained, during the
construction period, at least 0.50 meter below the deepest excavation level until the Engineer
decides that dewatering may be stopped.

Restoring the water level to its initial position shall be made after the space between the face
of the excavation and the basement wall is backfilled and once the weight of the structure
exceeds the hydrostatic uplift. In any event, the decision as to

when dewatering operations shall cease or be reduced shall be exclusively that of the
Engineer.

iv) That heave of the excavation base due to upward groundwater pressure does not occur.

v) The System(s) must run twenty-four (24) hours a day and the design shall include sufficient
standby pumps connected in the system(s) so as to operate automatically in case of pump
failure.

1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

Perform dewatering work in accordance with applicable rules, regulations, codes and ordinances of local
authorities, and in accordance with the requirements of the public utility owners having jurisdiction over the work.
Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and certificates and give all notices as required during the
performance of the dewatering work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

DEWATERING
Project No: KW.09.0128 02140-2

A. Before commencing any work under this Section submit the following for approval by the Engineer:

i) Detailed shop drawings system(s) layout, pumps, standby pumps, generators, access,
temporary piezometers etc., and complete design criteria and calculations.

ii) A dewatering programme showing commencement and completion dates for the various
stages of the dewatering works and indicating the methods and sequence of operations
involved, with full details of the necessary attendant labour to be provided on a full time
round-the-clock basis.

B. The Engineers approval to the above referred submittals shall not relieve the Contractor from his
obligations and liabilities under the Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible for selecting,
operating and maintaining an efficient dewatering system(s) such as will ensure dry working conditions
throughout the drawdown and construction periods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DEWATERING EQUIPMENT AND MONITORING PIEZOMETERS

A. Provide and maintain complete dewatering equipment necessary for lowering and maintaining the
water table at the required level.

B. Provide all necessary perimeter trenches, pipes, pumps, etc., as required for the purpose of collecting
and disposing of all excess water inflow into the bottom of excavations.

C. Provide and maintain minimum one temporary piezometer for monitoring the water table levels on site
on a daily basis during the drawdown and construction phases. The location and design of the
temporary piezometer shall be approved by the Engineer.

D. Failure of equipment or system(s) installed by the Contractor shall not entitle the Contractor to
additional payment or extra time for completion in respect of any additional measures necessarily
employed by him in order to provide and maintain dry working conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL:

A. Install and maintain complete dewatering system(s) and temporary piezometer in accordance with the
approved shop drawing and dewatering program.

B. All pumps and other equipment shall have proper safety guards and locations of all equipment shall be
properly lit and supervised at all times. Stations in the Contractors Watchmans Tour System shall
include the dewatering system(s).

C. Provide and maintain easy and safe access to all pumps and valves in the dewatering system(s).

D. Maintain the area between the shoring line and the structure and keep free of any oil, fuel, rubbish,
etc., arising from the operation and maintenance of the dewatering system..

END OF SECTION

EARTHWORK SUPPORT
Project#: KW.09.0128 2150-1
Project: Wafra Housing Complex 01 21 July 2011
SECTION 02150

EARTHWORK SUPPORT

PART 1 - GENERAL

To be read with Division 1 General Requirements


A. Provide all labour, material, equipment and services required for designing, furnishing, installing and maintaining a
lateral support system, including bracing and tiebacks, installed to the depths required for the support of the perimeter
of the excavation and adjacent facilities.

B. Design, furnish, install, test and maintain lateral bracing or tieback systems including the vertical shoring support
system if required.

C. Provide adequate and continuous support of structures, streets, utilities, sidewalks and other facilities within the
vicinity of the excavation to protect such facilities against damaging movements or other effects of the work.

D. Provide support for including underpinning of walls of adjacent property should this be necessary.

E. Provide shop drawings for the lateral support system for the approval of the Engineer.

F. Continually inspect and monitor the performance of the system and report findings to the Engineer. The Engineer may
request independent inspections and testing of the system. Such inspections and testing if requested shall not relieve
the Contractor of the responsibility to carry out his own inspections.


A. This schedule is intended to be used as a helpful indication of the related sections within the Project Specifications. It
is not necessarily comprehensive or complete and it is the Contractors responsibility to ascertain all applicable
sections required to understand the full scope of work intended.

1. Section 01300 - Submittals
2. Section 02140 - Dewatering
3. Section 02200 - Earthwork

1.03 REFERENCES

A. BS 5950 Code of Practice for the structural use of steel in building.

B. BS 5268 Code of Practice for the structural use of timber.

C. BS 8110 Code of Practice for the structural use of concrete.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit for approval manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for each item of
proprietary material used, and shall confirm his intention to comply with such requirements.

B. Shop drawings showing overall plan layout of the system indicating clearances from existing and proposed utilities,
structures or other obstructions. Indicate the dimensions, material properties, locations, spacing and penetration
depths of all members and the locations of the various types of lateral supports.

EARTHWORK SUPPORT
Project#: KW.09.0128 2150-2
C. Written data and calculations showing the design intent for the lateral support systems, to include Engineering
calculations and design assumptions for determination of loads and stresses acting on and within the lateral support
systems. The calculations shall be prepared by a Registered Professional Engineer, who is experienced in this field.

D. As-built information for the lateral support system including a detailed as-built location plan of all members showing
identification, size, plan, location plan at the top and excavation level for each member, length and top elevation of
each member, support levels, location of walling, and other supplementary members.

1.05 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Design earthwork support under the direct supervision of a professional Structural Engineer experienced in this work
and registered with Kuwait Society of Engineers. Work should conform to necessary code requirements.

B. The Contractor shall provide personnel, qualified by training and experience to perform the required tests and to
monitor, record, plot and report the data.

C. The Engineer may be present for selected installations and shall be allowed unrestricted access.

D. Examine the site and all work prepared by others and monitor as work progresses and report to the Engineer any
defects having detrimental effects on work of this Section.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for making prompt and continuous evaluations of the test data and written weekly
reports of the lateral support system performance and whenever necessary, taking immediate steps to correct any
deficiencies in the capacities of individual members or providing other corrective measures which may be required to
prevent damage or excessive movement.


A. Work shall comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of all authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Obtain all necessary permits. Obtain written permission from adjoining property owners if proposed system of the tie-
back anchors will project beyond the vertical projection of the contract limit lines. Submit such permissions with shop
drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Structural steel used for shoring and lateral bracing systems shall be designed in accordance with BS 5950 Code of
Practice for the Structural Use of Steelwork in Building.

B. Timber used for shoring and lateral bracing system shall be in accordance with BS 5268 Code of Practice for the
Structural Use of Timber.

C. Concrete used for lateral bracing system shall be in accordance with BS 8110 Code of Practice for the Structural
Use of Concrete.

D. Tieback tendons if required shall consist of either high strength bars or groups as recommended of wire strand cables;
the sizes and capacities to be proposed by the Contractor.

E. Cement biased special strength grouting materials and admixtures for tieback anchorages shall be proposed by the
Contractor for approval of the Engineer.

EARTHWORK SUPPORT
Project#: KW.09.0128 2150-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. The following Geotechnical data is available and included in this document for the Contractors information Soil
Investigation Report. The accuracy of the bore hole test information cannot be guaranteed. The bore hole logs and
related information depict subsurface soil and

Groundwater conditions at the specific locations and dates indicated. Soil conditions and water levels at other
locations and times may differ from conditions occurring at the specific bore hole locations.

B. The Contractor shall visit the site and make such inspections as he deems necessary and reach his own conclusions
regarding the nature of the ground and the conditions likely to be encountered. No claim due to site conditions, nature
of soil and obstacles encountered will be entertained.

C. Perform preparatory work to discover, protect, maintain and restore utilities or other facilities located in close proximity
of the lateral support bracing system.

3.01 APPROVED LOCAL CONTRACTORS.

Brookner
Kuwait foundations
Or equal approved.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Subsurface soil and water data for use in determination of lateral pressures for design of the lateral support system
are provided to the Contractor for information only within the Soil Investigation Report, see 3.1A. It is intended that the
Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design of excavation supports, which must take into account the actual
field conditions.

B. The Contractor is to supply a method statement for the execution of the work endorsed by a qualified Geotechnical
Engineer.

C. The Contractors design shall take into account all soil pressures, hydrostatic pressures, applicable traffic and
construction equipment loads, stockpiles and any other surcharge loads.

D. The lateral support system shall retain and provide support for adjacent soil, water, subsurfaces, utilities, streets and
other features and protect them from damage due to settlement, lateral movement, loss-of-ground, vibration or any
other causes related to the work. All precautions should be taken to prevent such damage.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring the movements of the lateral support system by carrying out regular
tests or inspections of specific reference points in the support system. All such data are to be collected, recorded and
submitted to the Engineer for approval.

F. The Contractor shall take steps to control any unacceptable movement in the lateral support system immediately by
providing supplemental bracing or other measures (working 24 hours per day if necessary) as required if any of the
following occur :

a) Field measurements indicate that significant or sustained movements are occurring to the lateral support
system.

b) Detrimental movements of adjacent structures, utilities and other facilities are noted.

3.04 SCHEDULE

EARTHWORK SUPPORT
Project#: KW.09.0128 2150-4

A. Produce a program scheduling the start and finish date of the works and the sequence of operations.

B. Agree schedule with the Engineer and Construction Manager.

END OF SECTION

EARTHWORK
Project No: KW.09.0128 02200-1
SECTION 02200

EARTHWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

Excavation of all types of material to elevations and limits indicated, including removal of existing foundations abandoned
utilities and other sub-surface structures.

Removal of all loose and unsuitable soil, as defined by the Engineer, below foundations, if encountered at the required
bearing elevation, and backfilling of such over-excavation with Lean Concrete Fill or Compacted Structural Fill.

Placement of working mats of the type, thickness and to the limits indicated after final excavation for protection of foundation
bearing surfaces.

Backfill, fill and grade as required to complete all work shown on the drawings.

Co-ordination of the work specified in this section with other ongoing works.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

Submit to the Engineer for approval at least two weeks prior to the start of any excavation work, a site plan showing limits
and sequence of excavation stages, proposed locations of access ramps and benched excavations. The plan shall contain
sufficient detail and written explanation to fully describe the work.

Deliver to the Engineer for approval at least five working days prior to use, a representative bag sample for each proposed
backfill material. Each sample shall be clearly labeled as to source of material, sieve analysis, proposed use, date of delivery
and shall weigh approximately 22 kg.

1.03 REQUIREMENTS, RESTRICTIONS ANDQUALITY CONTROL

Work shall comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of all authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain all necessary
permits.

Labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to make the work comply with such requirements shall be provided at
no additional cost to the Owner.

Contractor's quality control of earthwork operations will be monitored by the Engineer. During final stages of excavation,
subgrade preparation, placement of working mats, and controlled filling operations, the Contractor shall provide sufficient
notice to the Engineer prior to the work and shall co-operate with the Engineer in all respects to facilitate any testing or
observations required.

1. 04 NATURE OF SOIL

The Contractor shall visit the Site, make such inspections as he deems necessary and reach his own conclusions regarding
the nature of the ground and the conditions likely to be encountered.

The Contractor is referred to the Site Investigation Report which is issued with the Tender and Contract Documents. Making
this Report available shall in no way or guarantee that similar conditions as revealed therein will apply generally to the Site or
at the time of executing the Works.

The Contractor shall at his own expense verify the soil bearing capacity with the one considered in the design and report
his findings to the Engineers Representative.

EARTHWORK
Project No: KW.09.0128 02200-2

No claim due to site conditions, nature of soil and obstacles encountered will be entertained.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

Earth materials used as fill shall be as designated herein.

A. Structural Fill

Compacted Structural Granular Fill shall be sandy gravel or gravelly sand, free of organic material, loam, and other
objectionable materials, well-graded within the following limits.

ASTM Sieve Size Total %Passing By Weight
51mm 100
38mm 70 - 100
25mm 55 - 85
19mm 50 - 80
9mm 40 - 70
No. 4 30 - 60
No. 10 20 - 50
No. 40 10 - 30
No. 200 5 - 15
Crushed stone shall consist of clean, hard, durable natural rock, free of organic matter, rock dust and other contaminates.

Gradations in the table above represent the limits which shall determine the suitability of aggregate for use from the
sources of supply.

Structural fill may be classified as well-graded granular soils - Group 1 (non-plastic soils with a uniformity coefficient
exceeding 10.)

Use structural fill under concrete slabs, sidewalks, paving, under utility pipes, and at other soil bearing situations for fill
within 300mm measured horizontally of foundation walls, retaining walls, edges of footings and other below-grade vertical
surfaces as approved by the Engineers Representative, except where drainage fill is indicated or specified.

If sufficient structural fill materials is not available from excavations under this Contract or spoil heaps excavated under
separate Contracts, then additional fill, suitable for use, shall be brought to the Site from other sources. Both excavated
material from the Site or spoil heaps for use as structural fill and material brought to the Site for use as structural fill, shall
meet the above requirements.

B. Ordinary fill

Shall consist of well-graded natural soil substantially free of organic materials, loam, wood, trash and other objectionable
materials which may be compressible or which cannot be compacted properly. Ordinary Fill shall not contain stones larger
than 150mm in largest dimension and shall have physical properties such that it can be readily spread and compacted.

Ordinary fill may be classified as uniformly graded material - Group 2 (non-plastic soils with a uniformity coefficient of 10
or less).

Use ordinary fill for spot reinforcement, general grading and backfilling except in areas where structural or drainage fill is
required.

If sufficient ordinary fill material is not available from excavations under this Contract or spoil heaps excavated under
separate Contracts, then additional fill, suitable for use, shall be brought to the Site from other sources. Both excavated
material from the Site or spoil heap for use as ordinary fill and material brought to the Site for use as ordinary fill, shall
meet the above requirements.

EARTHWORK
Project No: KW.09.0128 02200-3

C. Drainage Fill

Unless otherwise specified, drainage fill material shall be fine aggregate, clean, well-graded, free-draining sand, complying
with ASTM C33. Shall be washed, hard, durable crushed stone, and/or crushed or uncrushed gravel and well-graded within
the following limits:

Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight
(16mm) 100
(12mm) 85 - 100
(10mm) 15 - 45
#4 0 - 15
#8 0 - 5

D. Lean Concrete Fill

Shall be concrete having compressive strength of 15 N/mm
2
at 28 days, and having a slump not exceeding 150mm as
measured at the time of placement. Other requirements shall be as specified for Section: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

Provide adequate quantities of fill materials listed hereinbefore where existing on-site materials are insufficient or unsuitable
for use as specified.

E. Sand

The sand shall be as specified in section 03300 herein.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

Examine the site and all work prepared by others and report to the Engineer in writing any conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the work of this section.

3.02 EXCAVATION

Excavation consists of the removal and disposal of materials encountered when establishing the required limits and grade
elevations.

Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated on the drawings or required for the work and approved by the Engineer.

Except where noted otherwise on the drawings, excavate and remove below grade portions of previous foundations,
abandoned utilities, etc.

Remove from the site all debris and other excavated material not suitable for use as fill, to a dump area approved by
competent authorities.

Rock or boulders encountered in the excavation shall be removed within required excavation limits and to such additional
depth and extent as directed and authorized by the Engineer.

When excavation has reached the required subgrade elevation, notify the Engineer who will make an inspection of
conditions to observe the strength and bearing capacity of the soils.

If disturbed and otherwise unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the required subgrade elevations, carry
excavations deeper and replace the excavated material with Lean Concrete Fill or Compacted Structural Granular Fill as
directed by the Engineer.

EARTHWORK
Project No: KW.09.0128 02200-4
Removal of disturbed material and its replacement as directed shall be at the Contractor's own expense.

In excavation for foundations, take care not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. Excavate by hand or smooth-blade
bucket to final grade just before the working mat is placed. Trim and groom bottom of excavation by hand to the required
lines and grades to leave a solid base to receive concrete.

Bearing surfaces for foundation mat shall be compacted with two passes with a vibratory plate compactor or other similar
equipment.
Dewatering shall be performed as required in accordance to section 02140, DEWATERING. If water has been allowed to
accumulate or stand in foundation excavations, such water shall be removed and softened or disturbed soil removed to firm
bearing. Excavation and backfilling with Lean Concrete Fill or Compacted Structural Granular Fill of such disturbed or
softened soil shall be conducted, at no additional cost to the contract.

Deepening during intermediate stages of excavation shall commence at least 6 meters from the earth support system and
then advance in successive stages toward the perimeter of the excavation.

As soon as a section of the required excavation for foundation has been approved by the Engineer, a working mat of the
type, thickness and limits proposed by the contractor and approved by the Engineers representative, shall be placed over
the soil bearing surface within the same work day. If excavation is begun for foundation which will not be protected by a
working mat

prior to the end of that work day, the excavation bottom shall remain at least 300mm above the design bottom of foundation
bearing level until just before the working mat is placed.

Excavate trenches to the depth indicated or required. Carry the depth of trenches for piping to establish the indicated flow
lines and invert elevations.

Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for the entire body of the pipe.

3.03 REMOVAL OF WATER

The excavations shall at all times be kept free from stormwater, percolating water or subsoil water by any means
necessary, on condition not to disturb the excavation surface. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and clear away on
completion any equipment necessary together with temporary drains and the like.

In pumping out excavations and in any lowering of the water table the Contractor shall pay due regard to the stability of
neighbouring structures.

Dewatering shall be carried out by competent staff and adequate equipment. The Contractor shall verify for himself the
soil type and conditions and plan his dewatering system accordingly. Well points with filters must be used.

The Contractor shall ensure adequate safety for excavation walls, beds, existing and proposed structures and guard
against undesirable settlements or movement of the soil.

Dewatering must continue until

a) All foundation work and damp proofing has been carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineers Representative.

b) Adequate compensation of uplift forces, increased by a suitable factor of safety has been attained.

3.04 FILLING ANDCOMPACTING

Materials: Materials for fill and backfill shall be as hereinbefore specified, obtained from the required excavation on Site, if
acceptable, or from borrow sources.

EARTHWORK
Project No: KW.09.0128 02200-5
Suitable excavated material for fill and backfill as defined in Paragraph Materials, shall be approved by the Engineer.
Material which is suitable for use as fill under exterior slabs and pavings and for backfill shall be separated from material
which is only suitable for general grading.

Provide additional material, if required, at no additional cost to the Employer. Acceptable borrow shall consist of suitable
material as hereinbefore specified. Representative samples of each type of borrow material considered suitable shall be
delivered to the Engineer for approval.

Place fill materials in horizontal loose layers in such manner as to produce a uniform thickness of material. Placement shall
start in the deepest area and progress approximately parallel to the finished grade. Thickness of layers after compacting
shall not exceed 200 mm for cohesive soils nor 30 mm for cohesion less soils.

1. No fill material shall be placed on areas where free water is standing or on surfaces which have not been
approved by the Engineer.

Compact each layer of fill with equipment to achieve the following percentages of maximum density at optimum moisture
content when tested in accordance with ASTM D1557:

LOCATION %MAX. DENSITY

Under Isolated and Continuous Footings. 95
Under Paved Areas and Kerbs. 95
Under Mat Slabs and Slabs on Grade. 95
General Grading. 90

Do not compact soil when the moisture content varies more than 3%from the optimum moisture content. Maintain
moisture content by wetting or drying manipulation. Suspend compacting operations when satisfactory results
cannot be obtained because of rain or other unsatisfactory conditions.

In lieu of drying by manipulation, hydrated lime, monohydrated lime or similar beneficial ingredients may be used
to reduce the moisture content, reduce the plasticity index or improve workability. Apply such ingredients in a
manner and quantity as recommended by the manufacturer or as required by the Government Testing Station
and approved by the Engineer.

3.05 BACKFILLING AGAINST FOUNDATIONWALLS

After completion of foundation walls and removal of forms, clean the excavation of all rubbish and debris before application
of waterproofing and placement of backfill. Backfill as hereinbefore specified for fill operations. Maintain symmetrical backfill
loading and compact each layer by hand tampers or other suitable equipment.

Do not backfill against foundation or basement walls until completion of supporting floor construction to top of
backfill or to first level above top of backfill unless approved by the Engineer. In placing backfill, take special care
to prevent wedge action, eccentric loading or overloading of the structure by equipment used in compacting
backfill material, and to prevent damage to waterproofing on walls.


A. Employ, at no extra cost to the Employer, the Government Testing Station to perform all tests and submit reports
specified in this Section.

B. The Government Testing Station shall be responsible for conducting and interpreting the tests, shall state in each
report whether or not the test specimens comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents and shall
specifically note any deviations therefrom.

C. Testing of Materials: The Government Testing Station shall perform all tests herein specified and any additional
tests as may be required and submit test reports to the Engineer, include the following :

EARTHWORK
Project No: KW.09.0128 02200-6
1. One optimum moisture maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered in subgrades and
fills under isolated and continuous footings, slabs on grade and paved areas. Determine maximum
densities in accordance with ASTM D1557.

2. Each type of borrow material shall receive :

a. Mechanical Analysis. ASTM D422/AASHTO T88.

b. Plasticity Index Determination. ASTM D4318/AASHTO T91.

c. Moisture-Density Curve Determination. ASTM D1557.

d. CBR test as a measure for bearing capacity when required.

3. The Government Testing Station shall determine the suitability of materials to be used for fills and to the
approval of the Engineer.

D. Testing of Subgrade and Fill Layers: Subgrades and fill layers shall be approved by the Government Testing
Station and the Engineer before construction of any further work thereon. Tests of subgrades and fill layers shall
be taken as follows:
1. The top 300 mm of subgrade resulting from excavation shall have the maximum density at optimum
moisture as hereinbefore specified. In fill areas, each layer of fill shall meet the required density as
hereinbefore specified. Make at least one (1) field density test of the subgrade for every two hundred
square metres (200 M2) of isolated and continuous footings, paved area or slabs on grade, but in no
case less than three (3) tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one (1) field density test for every
overlaying two hundred square metres (200 M2) of isolated and continuous footings, paved area or
slabs on grade, but in no case less than three (3) tests. Perform field density tests in accordance with
ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2167.
2. At foundation wall backfill take at least three (3) field density tests (ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2167) at
locations and elevations as directed by the Engineer.

E. Cooperate with the Government Testing Station in every respect in the performance of the required. Tests.

F. If, based on reports of the Government Testing Station and inspection, the subgrade or backfills are found to be
below the specified density, the Engineer may require additional compaction and testing and all this shall be
carried out at the expense of the Contractor.

3.07 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATEDMATERIALS

A. The following material shall be disposed of legally off the site unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
1. Unsuitable excavated materials.

2. Excess excavated material.

B. Excess suitable excavated material may, if approved by the Engineer, be deposited in spoil heaps at locations,
within the boundary of the Campus, directed by the Engineer.

C. Material resulting from clearing and grubbing operations must not be burnt on the site. Dispose of all such material
legally off the Employers property and surrounding areas.

3.08 SAFETY ANDAVOIDANCE OF NUISANCE

A. Perform all work in such manner as to ensure the safety of the Works, the public and adjoining sites and so as to
cause as little inconvenience as possible to the public and adjoining Owners, and allow in the Tender for all
necessary precautions to that end.

EARTHWORK
Project No: KW.09.0128 02200-7

END OF SECTION

LIGHTWEIGHT FILL
Project No: KW.09.0128 02210-1
SECTION 02210

LIGHTWEIGHT FILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The Work covered in this Section of the Specifications includes the construction described in Paragraph B,
including all labor necessary to perform and complete such construction, all materials and equipment
incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction and all services, facilities, tools and equipment
necessary or used to perform and complete such construction.
B. The Work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Furnish and install lightweight aggregate fill.
2. Furnish and install lightweight foam filler.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit samples and manufacturer's cut sheets and specification for all products and material herein
specified for Landscape Architect's approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATE
A. Lightweight aggregate to be used as fill shall be Rotary Kiln Expanded shale aggregate of the extruded type.

B. The shape of the extruded material shall be subangular to angular. When delivered to the project site,
expanded shale aggregate shall conform to the following requirements:

GRADATION
Sieve Percentage
Size Passing
19.05mm 100
12.7mm 90-100
9.52mm 55-65
6.35mm 5-15
4.75mm 0-10

Test Requirements
Density 608kg/cubic meter minimum
673 kg/cubic meter maximum
Minimum 1000 chm-crn min.
Resistivity

Chlorides 500 ppm maximum
Sulfates 2000 ppm max.

2.2 LIGHTWEIGHT FOAM FILLER UNDER PLANTED AREAS, LANDSCAPE STRUCTURES AND NON-VEHICULAR
PAVING

LIGHTWEIGHT FILL
Project No: KW.09.0128 02210-2
A. Lightweight Foam filler under planted areas shall be .8476kg/square meter - 1.1189kg/square meter type #
IX density expanded polystyrene rigid foam insulation material, or 1.0172kg/square meter extruded
polystyrene rigid foam insulation material. This foam filler does not need to be aged.
B. Lightweight Foam filler under non-vehicular paving and all landscape concrete structures shall be
.8476kg/square meter - 1.1189kg/square meter # IX density expanded polystyrene rigid foam insulation
material, or 1.0172kg/square meter extruded polystyrene rigid foam insulation material. This foam filler shall
be aged sufficiently (minimum 57 degrees C for 5 days or manufacturered by Pentane Extraction process),
prior to installation, to prevent shrinkage.
C. Size of panel or special shapes shall be as shown on Drawings or approved by Landscape Architect.
2.3 LIGHTWEIGHT FOAM FILLER UNDER VEHICULAR PAVING

A. Lightweight Foam filler under vehicular paving shall be Type VI, 1.3562 kg/square meter extruded
polystyrene rigid foam insulation material. This foam filler shall be aged sufficiently (minimum 57 degrees C
for 5 days or manufactured by Pentane Extraction process), prior to installation, to prevent shrinkage.
B. Size of panel or special shapes shall be as shown on Drawings or approved by Landscape Architect.
2.4 LIGHTWEIGHT FOAM FILLER UNDER HARD & LOOSE FINISH AND ROOF.
A. Lightweight Foam filler shall be minimum 900kg/cum density for all hard finish roofs and 600kg/cum for all
loose laid roof.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine all surfaces to receive lightweight fill to verify it is acceptable and proper to the application. Correct
all defects before installation of accessory.
B. Install per all Manufacturers project specific instructions and approvals and per all additional project
requirements as requested by the Landscape Architect and as detailed and shown on the Drawings.

C. The lightweight aggregate fill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 30cm in thickness. The lift shall be
compacted by hand held or hand guided compacting equipment. Compact to achieve a density of 90%
percent of the maximum density.

D. The bulk density for in place compacted lightweight aggregate fill shall not exceed 1121.3kg/m3. Maximum
depth of lightweight aggregate fill shall not exceed 60cm. During the course of the project test samples are
to be taken for gradation, bulk and particle density, moisture content, and in place density by an independent
testing laboratory. For more specific details the manufacturer's methods of laying in place or as directed by
the Landscape Architect shall be applicable to obtain maximum desirable results.

3.2 LIGHTWEIGHT FOAM FILLER

A. Loose-Laid Over Insulation.
1. Verify that exposed conditions are consistent with work requirements, will provide a sound,
smooth, continuous level surface suitable for foam filler installation and subsequent work and will
in no way deleteriously affect proper installation of this work and subsequent installations.

LIGHTWEIGHT FILL
Project No: KW.09.0128 02210-3
2. Proceed with no work until Insulation Layer has been completely installed.
3. Lay-out per details on drawings and as instructed by Landscape Architect.
4. Provide vertical drainage channels as shown on drawings.

B. Lightweight Foam filler shall be placed in sheets or blocks, stacked in accordance with layout and spacing
shown on drawings. Where necessary shape or taper foam fill to achieve correct profiles. Provide sufficient
temporary or permanent overburden to maintain sheets in place prior to final placement of overlying
materials. Provide vertical drainage channels as shown on the drawings.

C. Where indicated or as necessary, adhere foam sheets to insulation or other foam sheets.

3.3 CLEAN-UP

A. The Contractor shall remove from the Site all leftover foam filler.

END OF SECTION

TERMITE CONTROL
Project No: KW.09.0128 02281-1
Project Name : Wafra Housing Complex 01 21 July 2011
SECTION 02281

TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED WORK :

A Section 02200 Earthwork : Backfill materials

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES :

A. Soil treatment below slabs-on-grade for subterranean insects.
B. Soil treatment at interior and exterior foundation perimeter, for subterranean insects.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Building Research Establishment.

1. Overseas Building Notes No.170 : Termites and Tropical Building.


A. Applicator: Company specializing in soil treatment for termite control with five years documented experience.

B. Materials : Provide certification that toxicants conform to specified requirements.

C. Materials Packaging: Manufacturers labels and seals identifying contents.

1.05 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.

B. Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, and intended application rate.

C. Submit manufacturers installation instructions under provisions of Section 01340.

1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Accurately record moisture content of soil before treatment, date and rate of application,
areas of applications, diary of meter readings and corresponding soil coverage.

1.07 WARRANTY ( Defined in General conditions as defects liability)

A. Provide ten year warranty for material and installation under provisions of contract from
the date of certified completion.

B. Warranty: Cover against invasion or propagation of subterranean termites, damage to
building or building contents caused by termites; repairs to building or building contents
so caused.

C. Inspect work annually and report in writing to Employer.

TERMITE CONTROL
Project No: KW.09.0128 02281-2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Toxicant Chemical: Water based emulsion, uniform composition and synthetic dye to permit visual
identification of treated soil, of the generic chemical chlordane, aldrin or dieldrin.
Recommended manufacturers

2.02 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERES

Hamilton Pest & Weed Control
Or equal
Local compeny accepted by engineer.

2.03 MIX DILUTION

A. Dilute toxicant chemical aldrin or dieldrin to a 0.5 percent
solution.

B. Dilute toxicant chemical chlordane to a one percent solution.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify the soil surfaces are sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, ready to receive treatment.

B. Beginning of application means acceptance of soil
conditions.

3.02 APPLICATION

A. Apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of slab-on-grade or finish grading outside
foundation walls.

B. Apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

C. Apply toxicant to soil at the following rates, using metered applicator:

1. Under floor slabs-on-grade : 5 litters/m
2

2. Both sides of foundation wall 6 litters/linear meter/300mm depth of soil
backfilling.

D. Apply extra treatment to structure penetrations,
pipe, ducts, and other soil penetrations.

E. Apply as a coarse spray to ensure uniform distribution.

F. Coordinate soil treatment at foundation perimeter with finish grading and landscaping work to avoid
disturbance of treated soil. Retreat disturbed treated soil.

TERMITE CONTROL
Project No: KW.09.0128 02281-3

3.03 RETREATMENT

A. If inspection identifies the presence of termites, retreat soil and retest.

B. Use same toxicant as for original treatment.

END OF SECTION

ROAD PAVING 02510-1
SECTION 02510

ROAD PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The work covered by this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials
and performing all operations in connection with :-
i) Asphaltic concrete paving to extent indicated on drawings.
ii) Connections to existing roads.
iii) Surface sealer.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 02100 - Site Preparation
B. Section 02200 - Earthwork
C. Section 02525 - Concrete Kerbs
D. Section 02545 - Aggregate Surfacing
E. Section 02580 - Roadway and Parking Marking


A. General Specifications of the Roads Administration of MPW - Latest Edition

B. ASTM D946 - Penetration - Graded Asphalt Cement for use in Pavement Construction

C. TAI - (The Asphalt Institute)
- MS-2 Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and other mix Types
- MS-3 Asphalt Plant Manual
- MS-83 Asphalt Paving Manual
- MS-19 Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual

D. Where these standards conflict with the other specified requirements, the must restrictive requirement shall
govern.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Paving : Designed for parking and light duty commercial traffic movement of trucks up to 15000 Kg.


A. Perform work in accordance with MPW Standards

B. Mixing Plant : Conform to MPW Standards

C. Obtain materials from same source throughout.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 4
o
C or surface is wet.

ROAD PAVING 02510-2
1.07 TESTS

A. Testing and analysis of asphaltic mix will be performed under provision of Section 01400 -Quality Control.

B. Submit proposed mix design for review one month prior to commencement of work.

C. Contractor will take samples from completed work and perform tests in accordance with specified standards.

1.08 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data for seal coat.

B. Submit manufacturer's instructions.

PART - 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIX MATERIALS :

A. Primer : Homogeneous medium curing liquid asphalt, MC 70 in accordance with AASHTO M-82.

B. Tack Coat : Emulsified Asphalt Cationic in accordance with AASHTO M-208.

C. Asphalt Cement : 60/70 penetration grade in accordance with AASHTO M-20.

D. Coarse aggregate : Retained in No. 8 sieve. Crushed natural stone, and gravel, cement coated in
accordance with :
Sampling AASHTO T-2
Sieve Test AASHTO T-27 And T-11
Soundness AASHTO T-104 Maximum sodium sulphate soundness of 10%
Abrasion loss AASHTO T-96 40% Max.

E. Fine Aggregate : Natural sand passing No. 8 sieve. Clean and free from organic matter. Sampling :
AASHTO T-11, T-27; Sand Equivalent : AASHTO T-104 10% Maximum.

F. Mineral Filler : Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime, or other approved mineral dust, free of
foreign matter in accordance with AASHTO M-17 and T-219. Hydrated lime in accordance with ASTM C-50.

G. Seal Coat : Asphalt Institute Manual MS-4, Sand type.

2.02 ASPHALT PAVING MIX

A. Use dry materials to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly.

B. Asphalt Base Course : 3.5 to 5 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture. Air voids 3-8%.

C. Asphalt Binder/Levelling Course : 4 to 6.5 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture. Air voids 3-8%.

D. Topping Course : 5.5 to 7.5 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture. Air voids 3% minimum.
Gradation includes hydrated lime.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

ROAD PAVING 02510-3

A. Verify compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads. Check for any "soft
spots"

B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

ROAD PAVING 02510-4
3.02 PREPARATION

A. Compact subgrade to 95% maximum dry density, conforming to levels and slopes (refer to Items 3.01 H &
3.02 E, Part III - Execution, Section 02200 - Earthwork.
B. Apply primer over base course at uniform rate of 1 KG./sq.m.
C. Apply primer to 1/3 or 1/2 the surface width at a time, overlap adjacent applications.
D. Use clean sand to blot excess primer after 24 hours from time of application.
E. Apply primer to contact surfaces of concrete curbs, gutters.
F. Coat surfaces of manhole catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt paving.

3.03 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT

A. Place asphalt base course to thicknesses indicated within 24 hours of priming base surfaces.
B. Place Tack coat at rate of 0.5 Kg./sq.m.
C. Place binder/levelling course to thickness indicated within two hours of placing and compacting base course.
D. Place wearing course to thickness indicated. Compact pavement by rolling. Do not displace or extrude
pavement from position.
E. Develop rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks.
F. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.
G. Joints to be constructed so that even, integrated, compatible waterproof surface transitions are achieved,
where a cold joint must be made, cut back already placed asphalt concrete to a clean, vertical surface and
paint surface with hot asphalt cement immediately prior to application of fresh mix.
H. Make connections to existing asphaltic concrete where indicated on the drawings at correct elevations.
Prime edges of existing asphaltic concrete first.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Flatness : Maximum variation of 6 mm measured with 3 M straight edge.

B. Compacted Scheduled Thickness : Within 6 mm of design thickness.

C. Variation from True Elevation : Within 12 mm.

3.05 SEAL COAT

A. Apply seal coat in accordance with Asphalt Institute Manual MS-13 and manufacturers instructions.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400 - Quality Control.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury.

B. Do not allow vehicular traffic on newly paved areas until surface has cooled to atmospheric temperature.
END OF SECTION

PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS 02525-1
SECTION 02525

PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials
and performing all operations in connection with Precast Concrete Kerbs.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

Section 02200 - Earthwork
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete


The work shall conform to the codes and standards of the following agencies as further cited herein.

1. BS 368 - Precast Concrete Flags.
2. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates
3. ASTM C39 - Compressed strengths of cylindrical concrete specimens.
4. ASTM C150 - Portland cement

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Prepare and submit shop drawings in accordance with the requirements of the contract and as directed by
the Engineer and obtain the Engineer's approval before proceeding with the fabrication and work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit all samples and other information as requested by the Engineer of materials specified herein in
accordance with requirements of the contract, and before ordering materials, obtain written approval from the
Engineer.

B. After the material samples have been approved, build for the Engineer's approval a sample lengths of
precast concrete kerbs, in conjunction with the sample panel of concrete pavers, showing materials and
jointing to be used.

Combined sample of concrete pavers and precast concrete kerbs to be retained as assurance of the
minimum standard acceptable, protect sample for the duration of the works and remove upon completion.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All materials, in so far as practicable shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original packing and shall be
stored in a dry place. Materials such as cements which are partially caked, the containers for which show
water stains, or which are otherwise damaged or unsuitable for use, shall be removed from the site
immediately.

B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent chipping, cracking, or other damage, during the unloading, and
storage on the site. Damaged kerbs will not be allowed to be installed, and should any damage be found in
installed work, such work shall be removed immediately and replaced with new material. The Contractor
shall assume all expenses incurred therefrom.


1.07 COORDINATION

The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other Sections. Verify dimensions
and work of other trades which adjoin materials of this Section before the installation of items herein.

1.08 Approved Local supplier

National Industries
Aziz Block
Or equal approved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS

A. Precast Concrete Kerbs shall be formed on hydraulic presses and shall have a 28 day cube strength of 350
kg/cm
2
.

B. Face Section of Precast Concrete Kerbs shall consist of Portland Cement conforming to ASTM : C-150,
Type v and BS No. 12 sulphate resistant cement.

C. Desert sand to BS 882 or 1201. The maximum clay and silt content should not exceed 3%.

D. Coarse aggregate to BS 882. Aggregate shall be free of deleterious materials and organic matters.

E. Bitumen impregnated 18 mm thick celotax board will be used in expansion joints.

The Contractor shall purchase all the required type of precast kerb stones from M/s National Industries Company or
any other local source as approved by the Engineer.

2.02 BEDDING MATERIALS

A. Concrete Bedding materials shall be in accordance with Specifications Section 03300.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WORKMANSHIP

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing a proper surface to receive precast concrete kerbs.

B. Provide plain concrete backing and foundation (K140) to all concrete kerbs as shown on the drawings.

C. Floor slabs and concrete to receive precast concrete kerb finish shall be clean and free of all foreign matter
detrimental to the bond.

D. 18mm thick bitumen impregnated celotax board will be used every 2 - 3 meter as directed by the Engineers
Representative while installing precast kerbs.

3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

A. At the end of each day, remove from the site and dispose of all cartons, rubbish and debris resulting from the
work of this section.


END OF SECTION

ROADWAY AND PARKING MARKINGS AND SIGNS 02580-1

SECTION 02580

ROADWAY AND PARKING MARKINGS AND SIGNS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant , labour equipment appliances and materials and
performing all operations in connection with Roadway and Parking Marking


A. Provide Roadway and Parking Markings and Signs as specified below.

1. All markings and signs shall be in accordance with the State of Kuwait Traffic Signs Manual Volumes 1
and 2 of September, 1988.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. All materials shall comply with the above two documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 All roadway and parking markings and sings shall be executed as per the above two documents.

END OF SECTION

TRAFFIC MARKING PAINT
Project No: KW.09.0128 02760-1

SECTION 02760


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The work included in this section comprises furnishing a plant, labour equipment appliances and materials and
performing all operations in connection with Roadway and Parking Marking


A. Ministry of Public Works Traffic Manual dated September 1988.

B. General Specifications for Kuwait Motorway/Expressway System dated September, 1987.

1.03 GENERAL

Provide Roadway and Parking Marking as specified below.

A. Traffic Markings

All roadway markings shall be in accordance with the Traffic Signs Manual prepared by the Kuwait Municipality
and shall be constructed in white thermoplastic in accordance with the General Specification, Roads
Administration.

Traffic signs and Traffic markings shall comply with Ministry of Public Works Traffic Manual dated September
1988.

B. Parking Markings
1. Traffic markings such as lines, arrows, parking bays, and areas of no parking shall be marked out in
paint. All markings shall be in white, except arrows for the exit path and markings for no parking
areas shall be in yellow.
2. The dimensions of markings shall comply with the above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. All materials shall comply with the General Specification, Roads Administration.

B. Marking Paint : Modified alkyd synthetic resin paint with elastomeric additive such as chlorinated rubber
especially manufactured for pavement marking.

C. Glass powder as recommended by paint manufacturer for mixing in paint prior to application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

Project No: KW.09.0128 02760-2

LANDSCAPE JOINTS & SEALANTS
Project No: KW.09.0128 02764-1
SECTION 02764

LANDSCAPE JOINTS &SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Work of this Section of the Specifications includes the construction described in Paragraph B, including
all labor necessary to perform and complete such construction, all materials and equipment incorporated or
to be incorporated in such construction and all services, facilities, tools and equipment necessary or used to
perform and complete such construction.

B. The Work in this Section shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Furnish and install control, expansion, and isolation joints.
2. Joints of a nature similar to that of joints indicated on the schedule shall be sealed with same
sealer, whether indicated on the drawings to be sealed or not.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit full scale 1.0 meter long mock ups of sealant work in the field for Landscape Architect's approval.
Mock ups shall indicate tooling of joint, color, backer materials, etc. These mockups are not part of the finish
product and must be maintained for reference until the completion of the work then disposed of.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by the
Landscape Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINTS SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Provide manufacturers standard, chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base
Polymer indicated, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
1. Type M (multi-component).
2. Grade P (self leveling), NS (non-sag).
3. Class 25 (minimum plus or minus 25% joint movement), 12-1/2 (minimum plus or minus 12-
1/2% joint movement).
4. Use T (traffic), NT (non-traffic exposure), M (mortar substrata), G (glass substrata), A
(Metals, glazed tile, smooth plastics), O (other uses as indicated).

Project No: KW.09.0128 02764-2
5. Hardness: Where hardness does not impact joint movement capability, use a sealant which has a
minimum shore hardness of 40.
B. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use T
Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with the following requirements for Uses:
1. Use T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
C. Multi-Part Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T
Type M, Grade P, Class 25, and complying with the following requirements for Uses:
1. Use T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
D. Underwater sealants at pool areas for use NT
Grade NS, Class 25, medium movement silicone sealant complying with the following requirements for
Uses:
1. Use T, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
2.4 APPROVED BRAND.
DOW CORNING.
2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-waxing, non-extruding strips of flexible,
non-gassing plastic foam of material indicated below nonabsorbent to water and gas; and of size, shape and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
1. Either open-cell polyurethane foam or closed-cell polyethylene foam, unless otherwise indicated,
subject to approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold-applied sealants only.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where
such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from pre-construction joint sealer substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to
manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent
nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant
adhesion or in-service performance.
C. Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces
adjacent to joints.
2.7 JOINT FILLERS FOR CONCRETE PAVING
A. General: Provide joint fillers of thickness and widths indicated.

Project No: KW.09.0128 02764-3
B. Bituminous Fiber Joint Filler: Preformed strips of composition shown below:
1. Asphalt saturated fiberboard, thickness shown on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Joints indicated to receive joint sealers with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface-Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with
recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; old joint sealers; oil; grease;
waterproofing; water repellants; water; surface dirt.
2. Clean concrete, masonry and similar porous joint substrata surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast
cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrata capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles
remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal and other nonporous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not
harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer
based on pre-construction joint sealer substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint
sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage
or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS
A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with manufacurers recommendations for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.
C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealant during application and at position
required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
2. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
3. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.
4. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with
dry material.

Project No: KW.09.0128 02764-4
D. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers, or back of joints where adhesion of sealant to
surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure.
E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven technique that result in sealants directly contacting and
fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing
uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement
capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and
to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces
adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved
by sealant manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect Joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and re-seal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer
installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur.

END OF SECTION

PAVEMENTS 02780 - 1
SECTION 02780

PAVEMENTS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The Work covered in this Section of the Specifications includes the construction described in Paragraph B,
including all labor necessary to perform and complete such construction, all materials and equipment
incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction and all services, facilities, tools and equipment
necessary or used to perform and complete such construction.
B. The Work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Furnish and install stone pavers.
2. Furnish and install stone tile pavement

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed pavement
installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, type, and variety of unit pavers, joint materials, and setting
materials from a single source with resources to provide products and materials of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples and manufacturer's cut sheets and specification for all products and material herein
specified for Landscape Architect's approval.
B. Submit full scale 1.5m x 1.5m mock-up of finish pavements for Landscape Architect's approval. These
mockups are not part of the finish product and must be maintained for reference until the completion of the
work then disposed of.
PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect all materials during storage and construction against wetting by rain, or ground water and against
soilage or contamination from earth and other materials.
B. Protect adhesive materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature. Store in a dry location in a
waterproof container. Keep containers tightly closed and away from open flame.
2.2 SAND JOINT MATERIAL
A. Sand for Joints: Sand shall be finely graded, sharp sand with 100 percent passing the 2.36mm sieve and 95
percent, the 1.18mm sieve.
2.3 JOINTS AND SEALANTS
A. Joints and Sealants shall conform to requirements of Section 02530.

PAVEMENTS 02780 - 2
2.4 LANDSCAPE EDGING
A. Edging shall conform to requirements of Section 02985.
2.5 DRAINAGE BOARD &FILTER FABRIC
A. Foam Filler, Drainage Board, and Filter Fabric shall conform to requirement of Section 02860.
2.6 LIGHTWEIGHT FOAMFILL
A. Lightweight Foam fill shall conform to the requirements of Section 02210.

2.7 STONE PAVERS
A. Stone pavers shall be of size as shown on the Drawings. Colors to be selected by the landscape architect.
Finish shall be thermal top and sawn sides and honed back.
2.8 STONE TILE
A. Stone tile at pool area shall be 30mm thick and of size as shown on the Drawings. Finish shall be thermal
top and sawn side and honed back. Colors to be selected by the landscape architect.

2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT

A. Latex mortar and grout for setting granite pavers shall conform to requirements specified in Section 04400,
2.03 Mortar and Grout.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOB CONDITION

A. Contractor will coordinate the work of this Section with all other trades involved in the Work.
B. Contractor is cautioned to use extreme care so as not to damage existing waterproofing, protection board,
etc., at on-deck construction. Contractor will repair damaged conditions at his own expense.

3.2 PAVEMENT CUTTINGS FOR STONE PAVEMENTS

A. When existing pavement of any description requires cutting for removal, Contractor shall obtain Landscape
Architect's approval of cutting locations prior to execution.

B. When new pavement of any description requires cutting to facilitate pattern layouts, Contractor shall obtain
Landscape Architect's approval of cutting locations prior to execution.

C. When paving pattern terminates at a radius, Contractor shall cut pavement material into equally sized radial
segments as approved by Landscape Architect or as shown on drawings.

D. When paving pattern terminates with an excess of paving pattern material, Contractor shall cut the last two
paving segments to equal lengths if requested by Landscape Architect so as to minimize the appearance of
a size differential.

PAVEMENTS 02780 - 3
E. When a paving pattern requires a filler segment to end a paving pattern, said filler requirement shall be
brought to the attention of the Architect so that its location may be approved by the Landscape Architect
prior to start of bedding the paving material pattern.

3.3 LANDSCAPE EDGING

A. Install landscape edgings where and as detailed on the Drawings.

3.4 FILTER FABRIC

A. Install filter fabric where and as detailed on the Drawings.

3.5 STONE BLOCK AND TILE PAVEMENT
A. Spread latex setting bed mix over specified subgrade to a uniform thickness as called for on the Drawings.
B. Mix and place only the amount of setting bed which can be covered with pavers prior to an initial setting of
bed. Cut back, level edge, remove and discard any setting bed material which has reached initial set prior to
placing of pavers.
C. Wet pavers thoroughly prior to setting.
D. Set pavers before initial set of bed occurs. Do not set pavers on dry bed. Tamp pavers to final required
elevation and insure complete contact with setting bed.
E. Set and level each unit immediately. Do not set large areas and level later.
F. Set pavers in pattern shown with uniform joints 9.5mm width as shown on the Drawings.
G. Set tile pavers in color pattern as shown on Drawings.
H. Expansion joint filler and sealant shall be as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Section 02530.
I. Newly laid pavers shall be protected at all times by panels of plywood, panels that can be moved as the
work progresses. However, the plywood protection must be kept in areas that will be subjected to the
continued movement of materials and equipment.
3.6 STONE PAVERS ON LATEX MORTAR
A. Install stone pavers at pool Areas in latex mortar setting bed where and as detailed on the Drawings.

3.7 ORIENTATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF FRAME AND COVER OF CATCH BASINS, DRAINS, MANHOLES, ETC.

A. The Contractor shall orient, place into position and adjust to grade frames and covers of all catch basins,
drains, manholes, etc. Walls shall be extended where necessary with brick and mortar and\or with steel
extension rings and shall be of the same thickness as walls of the existing structures. Both sides of
extended work shall be parged with 1.27cm mortar. Frames shall be set on mortar beds. The orientation
and adjustment of frames of existing structures are included hereunder.
3.8 CLEANING

PAVEMENTS 02780 - 4
A. Pavement shall be cleaned by removing all superfluous mortar and other foreign matter and washing with
5% solution of Muriatic Acid and water, preceded and following with a second thorough washing with clear
water. Fiber brushes only shall be used for this cleaning except where steel brushes are absolutely
necessary for obstinate spots.
B. Clean pavement not less than six (6) days after completion of work.
C. Contractor shall provide final protection and maintain conditions, in manner which ensures the paving being
without damage, discolorations or deterioration during subsequent construction and until time of substantial
completion and final acceptance.
END OF SECTION

LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810-1

SECTION 02810
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Irrigation Heads
B. Pipes, Fittings and Valves
C. Remote Control Valves and Automatic Controllers
D. Wiring and Related Electrical Works
E. Fog System
1.02 RELATED WORK(S)
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork
B. Section 02950 - Landscape Planting
C. Section 15245 - Electrical Works in connection with Mechanical Services
D. Section 15400 - Plumbing Services
E. Division 16 - Electrical Services
1.03 REFERENCES STANDARDS
A. ASTM D 1785 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipes, Schedules 40, 80 and 120
B. ASTM D 2241 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR series)
C. ASTM D 2466 Socket type PVC Pipe-fittings, Schedule 40
D. ASTM D 2564 Solvent Cement for PVC Pipes and Fittings
E. ASTM D 2855 Standard Practice for Making Solvent Cemented Joints with PVC Pipes and Fittings
F. ASTM D 2239 Polyethylene (PE) Pipe - SDR-PR
G. ASTM D 2737 Polyethylene (PE) Tubing
H. ASTM D 2609 Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe
I. NEMA 1 - CS Enclosures for Electrical Appliances
J. BS 6004 Copper Conductors, PVC Insulated and PVC Sheathed (Suitable for Direct Burial)
K. ASTM D 2666 Polybutylene Plastic Tubing (SDR-PR)
L. ASTM F 845 Plastic Insert Fittings for Polybutylene Tubing
A. Landscape irrigation system shall be executed by a contractor, engaged in the installation and maintenance
of such systems as primary business for at least three (3) immediately preceding years in Kuwait and
approved for the purpose by the Public Authority for Agricultural Affairs and Fish Resources (PAAFR).
B. Equipment used in the system shall have local agents, certified by the manufacturer to check, test, adjust,
commission and maintain the same.
C. Materials
1. Materials incorporated in the work covered by this Section shall be unused, new products in good
condition. Materials spoiled due to improper storage or mishandling shall be rejected
2. Materials of similar nature shall be products of the same manufacturer. Mixing up products of different
standards or those of different manufactures shall not be permitted for the same service
3. System components shall be of the type and construction, capable of withstanding the local ambient
conditions and shall be resistant to deterioration from high incidence of ultra violet rays
4. Materials to equivalent British (BS), German (DIN), or Japanese (JIS) or other international standards
shall be acceptable, provided that the Contractor substantiates their equivalence and ensures their
compatibility with other components of the system. Copies of current version of reference standards
shall be submitted for comparison, if required by the Engineer
5. Test certificates for materials used in the work covered by this Section, from approved independent
laboratories or testing agencies shall be furnished at no extra cost if required by the Engineer

6. Copper alloys used in the construction of valves etc., which comes in contact with water, shall be
dezincification resistant type.
7. Requirements of product quality, workmanship, materials etc. are identified by a known product of a
particular manufacturer and is written as Ref. : ... This shall be construed to include the term or
approved equal as well

D. Irrigation system and the system components described herein and detailed in the drawings are intended to
supply adequate amount of water to the various kinds and configurations of planting, for their sustained
growth, throughout the seasons. Contractor shall, in his tender, high light and allow for alterations /
modifications to the system or the system components; which in his opinion are necessary to accomplish the
intended purpose.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data and shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract:
1. Manufacturers printed brochures and catalogues (one original and three copies) with relevant
information high lighted (or irrelevant information struck out), along with write up of selection criteria
2. General piping layout drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:200
3. Irrigation piping layout plans of planted areas to a scale not smaller than 1:50, clearly indicating the
throw / area of coverage of each individual head.
4. Builder's work layout plans to a scale of 1:200 with details to a scale not smaller than 1:20
5. Installation details of Irrigation heads, valve boxes etc to a scale of 1:10
6. Electrical wiring diagrams (NTS) and controller installation details (1:20)
7. Calculations / details to substantiate the shop drawings
8. Test and performance certificates of equipment, where required
B. Copies of irrigation heads and valves ordering schedules shall be submitted for approval, prior to ordering
the same.
C. Project record documents of all works installed under this section shall be submitted in accordance with the
General Conditions of Contract.
D. Three (3) hard bound copies of Operation and Maintenance Manual" shall be submitted in accordance with
the General Conditions of Contract, with complete data for each piece of equipment installed, as detailed
below:
1. Manual shall contain:
a. Table of contents
b. Irrigation system material submittal with the Engineer's and local authoritys approval
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions
d. Manufacturer's internal wiring diagrams
e. Manufacturer's assembly details
f. Replacement, parts number listings and description
g. Preventive maintenance schedules listing frequency of service and or replacement
h. Name and addresses of manufacturer, sales and service agency and local representative /
distributor including telephone and Fax numbers
i. Names and address of Contractor's maintenance department, including emergency contact
telephone numbers
2. Contents of the manual shall be arranged in sections with tags, grouping each class of equipment as
piping, valves, irrigation heads, controls, etc. Contents of each section shall be arranged in sequence as
listed above
E. Contractors inability to comply with the requirements of the Contract shall be billed to the Review of
Submittals: Time expended for repetitive reviewing (more than twice) due to Contractor at the Engineers
standard hourly rates.
A. A set of below grade reinforced cement concrete (RCC) tanks receive inflow from the city water supply
mains through in-line, automatic, self-cleaning filters of 100 microns filtration fineness.

B. One (1) nos. packaged, pressure controlled booster pump set draw water from the tanks and supply under
pressure to the irrigation system.
C. Automatic, self-cleaning, screen filter of 200 mesh filtration fineness filtration fineness will be installed at the
system side.
D. A pilot operated, diaphragm type pressure reducing / sustaining valve is installed on the fresh water supply
mains, at the discharge side of the screen filter, so as to:
1. Maintain constant system pressure irrespective of varying demand and / or filter conditions, and
2. To shut-off the booster pump set in runaway conditions (rupture of piping)
B. Pressure reducing type control valves will be used for the various zones, as appropriate, in order to attain
optimum performance and to retain flexibility.
C. Pressurised fresh water supply points are furnished within the open courtyards in buildings for irrigating the
planting therein.
D. All piping from these points of connection (POC) and the rest of the system are in the scope of this section.
E. Pop up type spray will generally be used for irrigating turf.
F. Drip system will be used for ground cover and trees.
G. Bubblers will be used for narrow strips, trees in paved areas and seasonal planting beds irrespective of the
type of planting.
H. Quick coupling valves will be provided at reasonable intervals, all over the area, for manual watering.
I. Flush valves will be provided in each zone, as appropriate.
1.07 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Products shall be delivered to site, stored and protected under provisions of the General Conditions of
Contract.
B. Products shall be stored in manufacturers original packing in a neat and orderly manner, with labels on each
container.
C. Plastic and rubber products shall be stored out of direct sunlight.
D. Pipes shall be stored on elevated racks only.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Irrigation System Components
1. Rainbird, USA
2. Weathermatic, USA
3. Hunter, USA
4. Torro, USA
5. Approved alternatives / substitutions under provisions of the General Conditions of Contract
B. Valves
1. Nibco, USA
2. Crane, USA
3. Kitz, Japan
4. Approved alternatives / substitutions under provisions of the General Conditions of Contract
2.02 PIPING - GENERAL
A. PVC pipes and fittings shall be manufactured from virgin Polyvinyl Chloride compound to ASTM D 1784 type
12454-B (PVC 1120) or approved equal.
B. Threads of fittings shall be side gated injection moulded type. Nipples shall be standard weight, moulded type.

C. Pipes shall have the following, continuously printed on them.
1. Manufacturer's name
2. Nominal pipe size
3. Schedule or class
4. Pressure rating
5. Date of manufacture


2.03 PIPES AND FITTINGS
Service Location Type
A. Pressure lines From POC to uPVC
All sizes control valve schedule 40
B. Distribution lines for all systems From control uPVC
Other than drip valves onwards schedule 40
C. Distribution lines for From control PE
Drip systems valve onwards tubing
D. Supply laterals for From emitter PE
Drip system onwards capillary
2.04 PIPE JOINTS
A. UPVC - Socket type: Solvent cemented joints. Threaded adapters / flanges shall be used as appropriate.
B. PE: Plastic insert (compression) type joints. Threaded adapters / flanges shall be used as appropriate.
C. Joints shall be rated for 1034 kPa (150 psig) working water pressure at ambient temperature.
2.05 VALVES
A. General
1. Valves from same manufacturer shall be provided throughout the project, where possible
2. Pressure Rating
a. Valves shall be rated for 1379 kPa (200 psig) working water pressure at ambient
temperature, unless otherwise indicated or dictated by selection
b. Contractor shall allow for selecting higher pressure rated valves to meet the valve
construction features
3. Valve Operators
a. Hand wheels / operating levers shall be provided for valves as appropriate. Hand wheels for
gate and globe valves 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and smaller, shall be non-ferrous metal (die cast
zinc / aluminium alloy etc.)
b. One key / wrench of appropriate size shall be provided for each lever operated valve
installed
B. Gate Valves
1. Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body, non-rising stem and union bonnet, solid wedge or disc,
threaded ends
2. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), outside screw and Yoke
(OS&Y), solid wedge, renewable seats, flanged ends
C. Globe Valves
1. Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body, rising stem, union bonnet, renewable composition
disc, threaded ends
2. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), rising stem, OS&Y,
renewable seat, flanged ends
D. Ball Valves
1. Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring,
lever operated, threaded ends
2. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Cast steel body; stainless steel, full bore, floating ball; Teflon
seat and stuffing box seals, lever or key operated flanged ends
E. Check Valves
1. Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze, in-line, resilient seat and disc, spring loaded, screwed ends
2. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze trim, spring loaded, renewable composite
disc and seat, flanged ends

F. Drain Valves: Bronze angle globe pattern; key operated; threaded inlet and hose connection outlet with cap
and chain.
G. Flush Valves: Ball valves of uPVC construction, with solvent weld / compression ends.
Ref. : Rain Bird BLT - S series

2.06 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. For Spray Zones (Ordinary Type)
1. Type Globe pattern, normally closed, electrically operated
2. Construction Heavy duty, glass filled nylon with nylon reinforced rubber diaphragm and stainless steel /
brass trim
3. Connections Threaded inlet / outlet
4. Inlet Pressure 1034 kPa (150 psig)
5. Outlet Pressure 100 to 1034 kPa (15 to 100 psig)
6. Accessories Grit Strainer, manual open / close facility
7. Electrical Power supply 24 volts / 1 phase / 50 Hz
Ref. : Rain Bird EP - F series OR EFA - CP series
B. For Spray Zones (Pressure Reducing Type)
1. Type Globe pattern, normally closed, electrically operated
2. Construction Heavy duty, glass filled nylon with nylon reinforced rubber diaphragm and stainless steel /
brass trim
5. Outlet Pressure 100 to 1034 kPa (15 to 100 psig)
6. Accessories Grit Strainer, manual open / close facility, pressure reducing module
Ref. : Rain Bird EP - F -PRS series OR EFA - CP - PRS series
C. Drip Zones
1. Type Y - Globe / angle pattern, normally closed, electrically operated compression type
2. Construction uPVC with stainless steel / brass trim
6. Accessories Manual open / close facility
Ref. : Rain Bird EY / ECV series
2.07 IRRIGATION HEADS
A. Schedules / legend on drawing shall be referred to for details of selection and performance of
respective heads.
2.08 VALVE BOXES
A. High density polystyrene body and locking type cover, of approved colour and size and appropriate
size. The valve boxes shall have approved identification code lettering stencilled on them.
Ref. : Carson
2.09 QUICK COUPLING VALVE
A. Red brass construction with 3/4 inch female threaded inlet, key operated retracting stop, quick coupling
outlet with self closing thermoplastic rubber cover and coupling adapter (key) and swivel elbow with 3/4 inch
hose threaded outlet.
Ref. : Rain Bird 33 DRC with 33 K and SH - 0

2.10 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
A. Electro-mechanical or independent station computer type, with appropriate no. of stations, capable of fully
automatic or manual operation; as appropriate. Details of selection shall be as follows:
1. Housing: Weather proof, heavy duty, lockable, steel cabinet
2. No. of programs: Two (2)
3. No. of valves per station: 3 (as appropriate)
4. Station timing: 0 to 99 minutes
5. Automatic starts: Any quarter hour (up to 4 per day per station)
6. Programming schedule: 14 days dial for every day, every other day starts etc. for a two-week
period
7. Interruption facility: Master on / off switch (with out loss of program)
8. Electrical supply: 240 v / 1 ph / 50 Hz input and 24 v / 1 ph / 50 Hz output


9. Overload protection:
a. Circuit breaker with manual reset for the controller
b. Value output surge protection
10. Accessories:
a. Wall mounting bracket / pedestals appropriate
Ref. : Rainbird
2.11 WIRING CABLES
A. Solid copper, PVC insulated and PVC sheathed, single conductor cables, rated for 600 volts and suitable for
direct burial. The cable shall have a minimum sectional area of 1.5 mm2.
2.12 WIRE CONNECTORS
A. Water proof and corrosion resistant housing with 3 # flapped openings for insertion of wires; copper crimp
sleeves and snap on cover, UL listed for this application.
Ref. : Rain Bird ST 03
2.13 WATER METER PIT ACCESSORIES
A. Manhole cover and frame: Medium duty, single seal, 1100 x 450 mm clear opening, cast iron cover and
frame with closed key holes.
Ref. : Kuwait Foundry (Similar to Code no. M 02017)
B. Screen Filter: All plastic construction with opaque top with threaded ends, transparent bowl and 140 mesh
filtration fineness replaceable screen; suitable for 120 US gpm flow.
Ref. : Rain Bird RB 120 - 140
C. In line Y - Strainers, 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends, screwed on
retainer cap with threaded plug and twenty (20) mesh stainless steel screen. Provide blow off connection
with valve on the retainer cap, where required.
Ref. : Watts 777 series
D. Valves: Clause 2.04 above shall be referred to and complied with as appropriate.
2.14 BOOSTER PUMP SETS
A. Pumps: Vertical, multistage, centrifugal type of 2900 rpm speed. Materials of construction shall be as
follows:
1. Impellers Stainless steel
2. Shaft Stainless steel
3. Stage pieces .......................................... Stainless steel
4. Base and head ...................................... Cast iron
5. Seal Mechanical
B. System piping: uPVC with solvent welded joints; with flanged manifold ends.
C. Valves: All bronze gate valves at suction and discharge of each pump and bronze wafer type self closing
(non-slam) check valve at discharge of each pump.
D. Base frame: Fabricated steel, with resilient mounting for pumps, where required.
E. Pressure vessel (for pressure controlled sets only): Welded steel construction with polypropylene lining on
wetted areas, butyl rubber diaphragm, hooded charging valve etc. suitable for 1600 kPa (232 psig) working
pressure, pre-charged with nitrogen. Capacity to be suitable for limiting the number of pump starts to 15 per
hour.
F. Relief Valve: Bypass pressure relief valve shall be provided between discharge and suction manifolds to
prevent pump operation at shutoff head.

G. Accessories: Compound gauge at suction manifold and pressure gauge at discharge manifold, flexible
connections at suction and discharge connections.
H. Finishing: The assembly shall be given two (2) coats of primer and one (1) coat of gloss enamel at the
factory.
I. Capacity: Schedules on drawings shall be referred to for types and capacities.
J. Pump motor and control panel: Section 15245 shall be referred to for details.
Ref. : Grundfos CP / CR series
2.15 FOG SYSTEM
A. System will comprise the following, factory pre-engineered to create fog in designated areas of the project:
1. High pressure pump of bronze/stainless steel fitted construction and GRP enclosure, as appropriate.
2. In-line cartridge filter, electrical solenoid valve and piping at the suction side of the pump .
3. High pressure nylon tubing with bronze, compression fittings at the discharge side of the pump.
4. Fog nozzles of appropriate type and size.
5. Supports, hangers etc. as appropriate
6. Controller for programmed operation of the system with interfaces with other systems.
7. Electrical works starting from the outgoing terminals of the isolator/switch-fuse, as appropriate.
Ref.: Arizona Mist., USA

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CO-ORDINATION
A. Contractor shall study all drawings and specifications and familiarise with the structural and architectural
details and the work of other trades.
B. Contractor shall ensure that the work under this section will not interfere with those of other trades and are
compatible with the surrounding finishes; prior to placing orders, fabrication and installation.
C. Contractor shall co-ordinate with the electrical trade for the exact power requirements and the location and
type of interface(s). Information as required by MEW for obtaining approvals shall be furnished.
D. Necessary templates, patterns, setting out plans and other items shall be furnished to relevant trades for
incorporation or leaving necessary provisions in the work.
E. Conflicts in requirements with other trades shall be resolved by the Contractor. Only those which cannot be
solved, without changes to structure or those which involves major changes to system design shall be
referred to the Engineer.
F. Acceptability of sizes and locations of the points of connection (POC) shall be checked and confirmed to the
plumbing trade.
G. Piping layout and the installation of the irrigation heads shall be co-ordinated with the planting plans;
accomplishing changes / modification necessary to attain a harmonious installation.
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Piping shall be routed in an orderly manner, maintaining gradient.
B. Factory manufactured fittings shall be used where changes in pipe direction occur. Bending or forming of
rigid piping shall not be permitted (flexible polyethylene lines for drip system excluded).
C. During progress of work, the ends of piping shall be kept closed with factory manufactured plugs to prevent
the entry of foreign matter.

D. Piping, control valves, quick coupling valves and other system components shall be installed within the
planting bed, unless otherwise noted or directed by the Engineer.
E. Threaded pipe fittings shall be assembled using Teflon thread sealing tapes.
F. Piping trenches shall be wide enough to allow a minimum of 100 mm (4 inch) between parallel pipe lines.
The depth of the same shall be to provide a minimum cover from finished grade as follows:
1. Pressurised supply lines ....................................... 450 mm (18 inch)
2. Non-pressurised distribution lines ........................ 300 mm (12 inch)
G. Piping shall not be installed one over the other, in the same trench.
H. Trenches shall be back-filled with clear agricultural soil and manually compacted, to a dry density equal to
that of the adjoining soil, to the adjoining finished grade. If settlement occurs after completion of the work,
necessary adjustments shall be made to piping and the system components, as directed by the Engineer.
I. Schedule 40 galvanized steel sleeves / UPVC duct shall be used for irrigation piping crossing roads and
similar areas subjected to traffic loading.
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION - PARTICULAR FOR UPVC PIPING
A. Only approved (recommended by the piping manufacturer) solvent cement shall be used for making the
joints.
B. Solvent joints shall not be made in humid or dusty atmosphere.
C. Prior to making the joint, the required penetration and fitting alignment shall be marked in a clearly visible
manner on the pipe end, for later verification.
D. Pipelines shall be filled only after allowing a minimum period of twenty-four (24) hours from the time of
making the joint.
3.04 VALVES
A. Valves shall be same size as pipeline, except where shown otherwise on the contract drawings.
B. Valves with flanged ends shall be used in valve pits, irrespective of size.
C. Valves shall be installed with stem upright or horizontal, not inverted; except with written permission of the
Engineer for each location.
D. Ball / gate valves shall be used for shutoff and to isolate equipment, part of systems or risers.
E. Appropriate valve gland packing, sealing and gasket materials shall be selected for the temperature,
pressure and chemical properties of the water encountered.
3.05 ELECTRICAL CABLING - PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS
A. Low voltage cables shall be installed in the same trench as the pressure supply lines or in a separate trench
as approved by the Engineer.
B. When more than one cable is placed in a trench, these shall be bound together with dead locking type
plastic cable ties at intervals not exceeding 1,000 mm (40 inch).
C. 300 mm (12 inch) of extra length of cable shall be provided at each termination.
D. Continuous single length of cable shall be used between controller and the control valves. Where splices are
essential (generally not permitted), the same shall be executed only after obtaining written approval of the
Engineer, providing a valve box with identification at the splice. Connector housing shall be filled with jelly
(sealant) after connections are made.
E. Grounding wires for the controllers / control valves shall be coloured green / green and yellow.
F. Crimped on brass terminal lugs shall be used for termination of cables and terminals shall be numbered with
slip-on ferrules for quick identification.
G. Cables shall be sized such that the voltage available at the valve shall be within 24 2 volts.
3.06 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS

A. Internal transformer shall be selected to suit the local system power supply parameters and to furnish the
power supply at the control valve at 24 2 volts.
B. Two (2) nos. keys shall be furnished for each of the controllers along with an identification tag, registered
with the suppliers.
C. Power supply to the controller shall be obtained from the standby power supply system, where possible.
3.07 IRRIGATION HEADS
A. Irrigation heads shall be located and adjusted to minimise splash of water on non-planted areas.
B. Spacing recommended by the manufacturer shall not be exceeded, in respect of irrigation heads, under any
circumstance.
C. Turf sprinkler and rotor heads shall be set to finished grade.
D. Schedules and details on drawings shall be referred to for the installation details of other types of heads.
E. Irrigation heads shall be installed on branches with offsets, swing joints etc. even if they are not specifically
indicated in the drawings.
F. Approved type spikes or similar rigid supports shall be provided for all irrigation heads.
G. Irrigation heads shall not be installed, until after the complete piping system has been thoroughly flushed.
3.08 VALVE BOXES
A. Co-ordinated valve identification schedule shall be submitted for the approval of the Engineer. The approved
schedule shall be used for locating the control stations in the as-built drawings.
B. Approved, identification codes shall be painted on the valve boxes in 50 mm (2 inch) high lettering with
white, resin based epoxy paint.
3.09 INSPECTION, TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. During the manufacture (at Contractor's premises only), installation and after completion of works; the
system, sections of the system or its components shall be tested by the Contractor / specialist Subcontractor
in the presence of the Engineer, as directed below or else where. Contractor shall procure all testing
instruments and accessories and bear all costs in connection with the same.
1. Basic materials for conformity with the specified standards
2. Controller for start, operating period and cut off; tolerances, alarms etc.
3. Control valves for water tightness; cut-in and cut-out; pressure and flow
4. Electrical wiring for continuity and dielectric resistance
B. Following shall be balanced and regulated, prior to start of planting:
1. Irrigation program - flow matched with the source capacity
2. Control valve discharge pressure
3. Irrigation heads throw and direction
3.10 TESTING OF SUPPLY PIPING
A. Irrigation water supply piping starting from the main isolating valve up to the control valve, shall be pressure
tested by this section.
B. Piping shall be filled with clean water, leaving all high points open to allow purging of air.
C. System shall be pressurised using manual pumps in increments of 25 % of the test pressure. A standing
period of 10 minutes shall be allowed after each pressure increment. Pressure testing using motor driven
pumps will not be permitted.
D. System shall not be over-pressurised under any circumstance. If the test pressure is close to the maximum
permissible working pressure of any of the system components, calibrated pressure relief valves shall be
installed in the tested circuit.

E. Piping system shall be tested with water at a pressure of 1,034 kPa (150 psig) for a minimum period of 4
hours. Circuit temperature shall be recorded along with the pressure readings and pressure fluctuations due
to temperature variations allowed for in computations.
F. Joints shall be checked for leaks by swabbing with a dry tissue. Drop in pressure to the order of 10 kPa (1.5
psig) per hour shall be considered as acceptable.
G. Leakage through the seat shall be considered as reasonable grounds for rejecting the control value.
3.11 TESTING OF DISTRIBUTION PIPING
A. Because of the limitations in conducting a pressure test on the piping system, this requirement is waived; but
the piping shall be tested for line and gradient.
B. Integrity of the pipe joints, in respect of pressure tightness, shall be subject to scrutiny and piping with
leaking joints shall be repaired / replaced.
3.12 SYSTEMFLUSHING
A. On completion of the piping, but prior to the installation of the heads, the complete system shall be
thoroughly flushed to remove all debris.

3.13 IRRIGATION SYSTEMPROGRAMMING
A. Plant watering shall preferably be done before sunrise and after late in the evening to facilitate the optimum
use of the landscaped areas. This restriction shall not be applicable to systems which do not have surface
sprays and which are watering areas not used for sitting.
B. Alternate programs shall be furnished for summer and winter so as to economise the water use without
sacrificing the basic intent.
3.14 SYSTEMDEMONSTRATIONS
A. Services of a competent engineer shall be provided by the Contractor to supervise the commissioning of all
equipment and to train the Owner's personnel in all aspects of the same during a five (5) working days
period, during normal working hours. All expenses in connection with the above shall be allowed for by the
Contractor.
B. System demonstrations shall be conducted only after the substantial completion of the project. A minimum
of one week's written notice shall be given and the Owner's written consent obtained, prior to such
demonstrations.
3.15 GUARANTEE (Defect Liability) AND MAINTENANCE
A. Requirements of the General Conditions of Contract shall be referred to and complied with as appropriate.

END OF SECTION

LANDSCAPING WORKS 02900-1
SECTION 02900

LANDSCAPING WORKS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. All labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install all exterior landscape works.

B. All works included in the following sections :
Section 02900 Landscaping Works
Section 02905 Plant Procurement and Delivery.
Section 02920 Planting Soil Mix
Section 02925 Planting Procedures and Materials
Section 02930 Lawns
Section 02950 Trees, Shrubs, Vines and Ground Covers.
Section 02960 Hardscape Materials
Section 02965 Kool Deck
Section 02970 Landscape Maintenance.

1.02 ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS

A. All local ministry, municipality, State of Kuwait laws and rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion
of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications and their provisions shall be
carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in the specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any
of the above rules and regulations or requirements of same. However, when the specifications and/or drawings
call for or describe materials, workmanship or construction of a better quality, higher standard or larger size,
specifications and/or drawings shall take precedence over the requirements of said rules and regulations.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Prior to any landscape work, locate all existing underground installations and protect same. Repair any damage
to these installations at no cost to the Owner.

B. Coordinate all work with other trades so that conflicts will not exist nor delay the work in any way.

1.04 GRADING

A. At all landscaped areas, the landscape contractor shall be responsible for providing final grades in accordance
with the requirements of the drawings, soils report and site work specification requirements.


A. Work must be performed with personnel experienced in the landscape work required. The Contractor must
show proof of the qualifications and experience of the Sub-contractor and/or all personnel proposed for this
contract to the satisfaction of the Engineers Representative. The following items must be included within each
individual's curriculum vitae in addition to experience and/or education.
1. Major Landscape and Irrigation Projects on which the person has worked, the respective client,
construction cost of each project, and the specific responsibility and position of the person in question.
2. Three references who can attest to the ability of the person. This information must be submitted to
the Engineer/Resident Engineer for review and approval at least six weeks prior to construction start
up date. The Contractor will be fined a minimum of KD. 200/- per day for each member of his

previously approved Construction Crew, who is not on site at the beginning of a particular portion of
the work for which that member is necessary.
B. Personnel : This Contract will require a minimum of the following personnel :
1. The Landscape Architect who must have a BS Degree in Ornamental Horticulture or Landscape
Architecture and a minimum of eight years experience in Landscape Construction. Seven (7) years of
additional experience in Landscape Construction may substitute for the Degree. He must have a
minimum of four years experience as overall Project Manager on Major Landscape Projects in arid
climates similar to Kuwait. Experience in farming or plant production operations shall not be
acceptable.
2. The Landscape Foreman
Must be skilled in the installation of planting and associated landscape elements with a minimum of 10
years experience in Landscape Construction. A minimum of three years of this ten years experience
must have been in arid climates similar to Kuwait.
Experience in the handling and planting of up to 10 meter height Phoenix dactylifera palms,
Washingtonia filifera palms, Washingtonia Robusta Palms and 24 box, 36 box and 48 box size
trees is required.
3. All Landscape Labourers must be skilled in the installation of planting and associated Landscape
elements with a minimum of 2 years experience in Landscape Construction.
4. Horticulturist/Arborist must have a BS degree in Ornamental Horticulture and a minimum of five years
field experience. Five years additional field experience in Ornamental Horticulture may be substituted
for BS degree. Forestry or agriculture degrees or experience may not be substituted. The experience
must be in an arid climate similar to Kuwait.

C. Equipment

The Contractor or his Sub-contractor must show proof of his ability to mobilize the following list of equipment (or
a list which has been previously approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer) and have it on site when
beginning a particular part of the work for which that piece of equipment is necessary.

1. Air compressor
2. Back hoes
3. Mini loaders
4. Bus and minibus
5. Concrete mixer
6. Dumper
7. Dump trucks
8. Earth compactor
9. Jack hammer
10. Loaders
11. Pick up
12. Rotovator
13. Sedan cars
14. Trenchers - sizes as needed
15. Truck
16. Tractor with disk harrow
17. Augers of required sizes
18. Water tanker with spray mister hose attachment
19. Rotary type mowers
20. Pruning equipment

21. Tractor trailer for transporting large palms (Upto 10 meters brown trunk height) and large trees upto
48 box size.
22. Crane for loading and planting large palms and trees
23. The Contractor may be fined KD. 300/- per day for not supplying the previously approved equipment
when beginning a particular part of work in which that piece of equipment is necessary.

D. Planting Season : Ensure that the planting of the soft landscape works is done during an appropriate planting
seasons compatible with other activities and the contract period of the contract.

1.06 GUARANTEE

A. The guarantee period for all plant material shall begin at the date of acceptance of the planting operation as
complete.

B. Planting operations will be accepted as complete when the Contractor receives a Notice of Substantial
Completion from the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

C. All plant material shall be guaranteed by the Contractor, for a period of two (2) years from the date of notice of
substantial completion to be in good, healthy, and flourishing condition.

D. When the work is accepted in parts, the guarantee periods shall extend from each of the partial acceptances to
the terminal date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all guarantee periods terminate at one time.

E. The Contractor shall replace, immediately and without cost to the Owner all dead plants and all plants not in
vigorous, thriving condition. The plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips, and shall bear
foliage of a normal density, size and colour. Replacements shall match adjacent specimens of the same
species. Replacements shall be provided immediately and shall be subject to all requirements stated in this
Specification.

F. The Contractor shall make all necessary repairs due to plant replacements. Such repairs shall be done at no
extra cost to the Employer and within a reasonable time as determined by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

G. The guarantee of all replacement plants shall extend until the end of the two year guarantee period.

H. Any plant not found in an acceptable condition during the guarantee period will be replaced immediately and if
said replacement occurs within 120 days of the end of the guarantee period this period will be extended by 120
days from the date the last plant was installed.

1.07 ACCEPTANCE

A. Substantial Completion
1. The Engineer/Resident Engineer will inspect all work for substantial completion upon written request
of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least ten (10) calendar days before the anticipated
date of inspection.
2. Acceptance of plant material by the Engineer/Resident Engineer will be for general conformance to
specified size, character and quality and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full
conformance to the contract documents including correct species.
3. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the
Engineer/Resident Engineer, the Engineer/Resident Engineer will recommend to the Owner that he
accept the work as substantially complete.
4. The work may be accepted as substantially complete in parts when it is deemed to be in the Owner's
best interest to do so, and when permission is given to the Contractor in writing to complete the work
in parts. Acceptance and use of such areas by the Owner shall not waive any other provisions of this
contract.
5. The guarantee period shall commence upon acceptance as substantially complete.

B. Final Acceptance

1. At the end of the maintenance and guarantee periods, the Engineer/Resident Engineer will inspect all
work for Final Acceptance upon written request of the Contractor . The request shall be received at
least thirty (30) calendar days before the anticipated date for Final Inspection.
2. Upon completion and reinspection of all repairs or renewals necessary in the judgement of the
Engineer/Resident Engineer, the Engineer/Resident Engineer shall certify in writing to the Owner as
to the Final Acceptance of the work.
1.08 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall keep reproducibles of the drawings exclusively for the purpose of recording all changes
and deviations in the locations of plants or materials. All changes shall be indicated thereon as the job
progresses. Contractor shall deliver these modified Mylar reproducibles to the Engineer/Resident Engineer
upon completion of the work. As-built drawings shall also be provided on CDs.

1.09 CLEANUP

A. The Contractor shall clean up all areas on a regularly scheduled basis or whenever deemed necessary by the
Engineer/Resident Engineer, as well as upon completion of the work before acceptance and during the
guarantee period.

B. Waste materials shall be removed daily. The Contractor shall restore, to previously established grade
elevations, all areas damaged by irrigation equipment, rainfall, or other natural or man made causes, such as
contour grading. Prepared planting soil mix and mulch top dressing shall also be restored to levels and
conditions shown on the plans and in the specifications. This work shall be incidental to all other work, and no
additional compensation shall be made for it.

C. The Contractor shall protect new plants from injury during installation and until acceptance of the work as
specified herein.

D. Adjacent walks, paved surfaces and road shoulders shall be kept clean during the installation of landscape
works.

END OF SECTION

PLANT PROCUREMENT AND DELIVERY 02905-1
SECTION 02905

PLANT PROCUREMENT AND DELIVERY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Locating all plant materials as specified in the plant list.

B. Tagging of plant materials.

C. Organization and supervision of the digging and assembling of plant materials at the source.

D. Packaging and shipping of all plant materials to the project holding nursery.

E. Temporary planting (Heeling-in), storage and maintenance of Palms and other plants.

F. All labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to procure and deliver all landscape plant materials
including trees, palm trees, shrubs, vines, ground cover and related items as indicated or specified.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI Z 60.1 - 1990.

B. Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services. Division of Plant Industry Publication Grades
and Standards for Nursery Plants - Part II Palms and trees.

C. Hortus Third, Staff of Bailey Hortorium, Macmillan Publishing Co. Inc., New York, USA.

D. Sunset Western Garden Book, June 1995, Sunset Publishing Corporation, Menlo Park, California.


A. For inspection and identification securely attach durable, legible labels stating in weather resistant ink, the
correct plant name (botanical name and common name) and size, as specified in the plant list, to all plants,
bundles and containers of plant material delivered to the Site.

B. Selection of Plants
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating the plant material in the Plant List. All plants as
stipulated in the drawings and/or Bill of Quantities shall be provided prior to planting. The
Contractor shall satisfy himself by personal inspection that the plants meet the specified
requirements and shall place his personal tag on plants provided that the quantity of any one
species is less than 50 units. Where more than 50 units of one species are specified, Contractor
shall tag 10% of the required number as "Sample Plants" and all plants of this species delivered to
the job shall match the quality of the sample, as determined by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.
The foregoing applies in particular to trees, palms, shrubs and groundcover plants in containers.
For plants in liners, the Engineer/Resident Engineer will accept sample plants in lieu of tagging.
2. Plants Required: The species (scientific and common names) sizes, manner in which to be
furnished, and the approximate number required, are given in the plant list. Plant quantities on the
list are indicated only for convenience. Furnish all plant material necessary to complete the
plantings as shown on the landscape plan. Surplus or shortages on the plant list shall not be used
for additional claims to the Owner.

3. Once the Contractor has satisfied himself that he has located all the specified material in the
nursery(s), he shall notify the Engineer/Resident Engineer in writing within thirty (30) days of date
of enterprise. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer/Resident Engineer fifteen (15) days prior to
digging or assembling plant materials for shipping.
4. The designated representatives, three (3) maximum, will visit the Nursery(s) to inspect the
selected material and may require photographs of representative samples of the materials for
approval. The Contractor will bear the expense of these visits.
5. Plant Inspection Schedule shall be submitted for review and approval within one (1) month of date
of enterprise.
6. The contractor shall submit samples of the plant tags proposed for use. Tamper proof plant tags
are mandatory for all tagging.
7. Plant substitutions will not be permitted. If a plant is not available in the local market, it shall be
sourced in the international market. The Contractor shall include in the tender, the additional cost
of the plants, shipping charges, Kuwait customs fees, etc. for all imported plants.
8. It is the Contractor's responsibility to organize a waiver of Kuwait Quarantine laws with respect to
the importing of all plant material.

C. Existing Trees and Palm Trees
1. All existing Washingtonia robusta palms, phoenix dactylifera palms, washingtonia filifera palms
and selected trees shall be carefully removed from site during early phases of demolition work.
They shall be Heeled in at a facility and location as approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.
2. These palms and trees shall be maintained there in a healthy condition by the Contractor until they
are re-planted on site or in any other location as directed by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

D. Applicable References, Standards and Measurements
1. Contractor shall comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of the State of Kuwait, the
locality where the plants are acquired, and of all authorities having jurisdiction. All labour,
materials, equipment and services necessary to make the work comply with such requirements
shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.
2. All plant material entering Kuwait from outside of the country must be clearly labeled for NAS
Housing Complex, Client: NAS - Kuwait" in both English and Arabic. Plants which do not clearly
bear this label will not be permitted to enter the country.
3. Nomenclature: Plant names shall agree with the nomenclature of Hortus Third Standardized Plant
Names. Names of varieties not listed therein shall conform generally with names accepted in the
nursery trade.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Requests for Nursery Inspection
1. The Contractor shall submit letter(s) to the Engineer/Resident Engineer requesting inspection for
the selection of palms while in place, in the ground at the nursery or grove prior to their being dug
for shipment. This letter shall be submitted at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to the
inspection date and in accordance with contract schedules.
2. The Contractor shall submit letter(s) to the Engineer/Resident Engineer requesting inspection for
the selection of all container grown plants at the source of purchase. This letter shall be submitted
at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to the inspection date and in accordance with contract
schedules.
3. The Contractor shall include in these letters the proposed method of shipping, time schedules, list
of plants, travel routes and estimated times of arrival in Kuwait, time allowance for customs
clearance, and estimated time of arrival at the project Holding Area.


B. Certificates
1. The Contractor shall furnish phytosanitary certificate of inspection from the country of origin of
plant materials as may be required by State of Kuwait and all other authorities to accompany
shipments.
2. Contractor(s), prior to final acceptance, shall certify in writing to the Owner that the plants supplied
and delivered to the site are alive, healthy, free from disease, insect pests, eggs or larvae of any
kind, are dug and prepared for shipment, and shipped and handled according to this specification.
3. The Engineer/Resident Engineer reserves the right to reject any plant found to have diseases or
pests which in his judgement may jeopardize the other plants health. Rejected plants shall be
replaced at no cost to the Owner.

C. Bills of Lading
1. All shipments shall be accompanied by a bill of lading, giving detailed descriptions of the plants,
the date of shipment, the quantity of plants in each shipment, and the transportation route travelled
from point of origin to receiving site(s).

D. Submit data from the manufacturer on the following items:
1. Anti-desiccant
2. Fungicide

1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Plants of kinds other than those indicated on the plant list will be considered by the Engineer/ Resident
Engineer only upon submission of proof that any plant is not procurable. Replacement plant will be
approved on the grounds that it resembles the plant specified in regards to appearance, ultimate height,
shape, habit of growth, general soil, water and other requirements.

1.06 DELIVERY AND HANDLING

A. Palms
1. The Contractor shall dig and prepare palms, including existing palms on site, for shipment in a
manner that will not cause any damage to the fronds, bud, shape, root system and future
development of the plants after replanting.
2. All suckers and flowering and fruiting parts and approximately 2/3 of fronds shall be removed prior
to digging. A minimum of 26 fronds for Phoenix dactylifera sufficient to enclose and protect the
growing bud shall be lifted upward so as to surround the growing bud, then be wrapped and
securely tied with burlap. Palm bud splints padded with burlap shall then be placed along each of
two sides of the wrapped fronds and shall be firmly wired in place during all diggings, transporting
and planting operations. A minimum of five wooden battens per palm (10cm by 6cm by 60cm)
shall be adequately padded with several layers of burlap and be firmly wired in place around trunk
for protection from lifting devices during digging, transporting and planting operations. Under no
circumstances will nailing of battens to trunk be allowed. Digging shall be by hand or by
mechanical means or both.

B. Trees
1. Trees shall not be moved from the nursery or approved source until the Contractor has received
the approval from the Engineer/Resident Engineer.
2. Notify the Engineer/Resident Engineer fifteen (15) days in advance of time and manner of delivery
of plants.

3. Immediately before shipping all plant material in partial or full leaf shall be sprayed with anti-
desiccant, applying an adequate film over trunk, branches, twigs and/or foliage.
4. Plants shall be prepared for shipment in a manner that shall not cause damage to the branches,
shape and future development of the plants after planting. Plant material and the Contractor's
tags shall be checked and any missing shall be added (securely attached by twine or plastic tie) to
all plant material delivered to the holding area for the purpose of inspection and plant identification.

C. Container Grown Plants
1. Containerized plants shall not have their containers broken or their root systems cracked or
damaged in any way. No root bound containerized plants shall be accepted. No alteration to the
root ball shall be permitted without written approval of the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

D. General
1. All plant material shall be packed to provide adequate protection against climatic, seasonal, or
breakage injuries during transit.
2. Plants transported to the project in open vehicles shall be covered with tarpaulins or other suitable
covers securely fastened to the body of the vehicle to prevent injury to the plants. Closed vehicles
or shipping containers shall be adequately ventilated or air conditioned when necessary to prevent
overheating of the plants.
3. Evidence of inadequate protection, carelessness while in transit or improper handling shall be
cause for rejection. All plants shall be kept moist, fresh and protected at all times. Such protection
shall encompass the entire period during which the plants are in transit, being handled or being
planted.
4. If transportation/shipping time for plants, one (1) gallon and larger, from place of origin to Kuwait
will be longer than two (2) weeks, provisions must be made to water plants in transit. Plants
smaller than one (1) gallon in size shall not go any longer than three (3) days between waterings.
5. Upon arrival at the holding area, plants will be inspected for proper transit procedures. Should the
roots be dried out, large branches be broken, balls of earth be broken, or loosened, or areas of
bark be torn, or should the plant have desiccation, leaf shredding, diseases, insect eggs, insect
infestation, frost damage, damage from brousing or grazing, the Engineer/Resident Engineer, will
reject the injured plant(s). The plants which are likely to recover shall be placed in holding areas
upto forty five (45) days and new inspection made to assess the plants. In case they do not
recover they will be rejected. When a plant has been so rejected, the Contractor shall at once
remove it from the Holding Area and replace it immediately at no cost to the Owner.

1.07 ACCEPTANCE

A. The Engineer/Resident Engineer will inspect all plant material upon arrival and again after unloading. The
plant shall be delivered to the Plant Holding Area. Upon acceptance of the plant material as to the correct
species, quantities, and condition, written approval will be given and notice to proceed with unloading.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLANT MATERIALS

A. Quantities, species and condition shall be as indicated on the planting drawings and schedules and of the
quality set forth in referenced standards. However quantities shown in bills of quantities are only for
guidance and may not reflect actual number of plants required on the drawing or in the field.
B. Use only plant material that is well-formed and shaped, true to type and free from scale, disease, insects
and defects such as knots, sunsealed injuries, abrasions or disfigurements.

2.02 ACCESSORIES


A. Containers: All plant containers shall be rigid plastic, no metal containers or plastic bags will be permitted.

B. Anti-Desiccant: Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion which provides a protective film over plant surface and
permeable enough to permit transpiration. It should be delivered in containers of the manufacturer, mixed
according to the manufacturer's directions, and shall be "Wiltpruf", manufactured by Nursery Speciality
Products, Inc., Groton Falls, New York; "D-Way", manufactured by Plant Producers Company, Blue Point
Long Island; or "Foli-Gard", manufactured by W-Z F10 Chemical Company, Columbus Ohio, USA, or
approved equal.

C. Hogwire: Hogwire shall be 12 1/2 gauge or preshaped wire baskets to fit shape and size of tree balls.

D. Burlap : Burlap shall be 10 ounce (283.5 grams) or approved equal.

E. Twine : Twine shall be 3 ply sisal or heavier, no plastic or synthetic is permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. All precautions that are customary in good trade practice shall be taken to ensure the arrival of the plants at
their destination in good condition for successful growth.

B. Branches of plants shall be tied as necessary to ensure their safety during loading and unloading operations
and in transit. No plant shall be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break
branches. Upon arrival in the holding area all plants except palms shall be opened and all binding removed
at the direction of the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

3.02 TRANSPORTING AND UNLOADING

A. The plants, immediately after loading, shall be transported to the holding area by the shortest, quickest, and
most efficient routes, so that their time in transit is at the absolute minimum.

B. Plants shall be handled and loaded onto and off conveyance carefully in order to avoid damaging the root
balls, trunks, or branches. Container grown plants shall be handled and moved only by the rootball or
container. Under no circumstances will plants be dropped from trucks to the ground or handled by the trunk,
canes or stems when in the container.

C. Plants shall not be overcrowded on conveyance. Plants damaged by transport shall not be accepted.

D. The Contractor shall unload and supervise the unloading of the plants at the Plant Holding Area.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for meeting requirements of all governing bodies while transporting
plants to the holding nursery, including customs clearance.

F. All plant material shall be placed in the designated areas of the Holding Area shade structure upon arrival,
and subject to Engineer/Resident Engineer's approval.

G. All palms shall be planted in their designated locations on the project site according to the plans immediately
upon arrival. If unforeseen circumstances prevent the planting of these palms upon their arrival then they
shall be transported immediately to the holding area where they must be heeled-in under the direction of the
Engineer/Resident Engineer.

H. All palms, prior to planting, shall have the ends of their roots trimmed. All palm roots shall be dusted with
sulphur prior to planting.

3.03 HEELING-IN OF PALMS

A. A trench shall be dug for the placement of Palms which cannot be planted upon their arrival to the site.

B. Palms shall be placed in the trench with ample room for manoeuvering the crane while placing them and
subsequently removing them.

C. Palm root balls shall then be covered with approved prepared soil mix to a depth 60cm above the top of the
existing root ball.

D. Care shall be taken that the root ball is planted intact and the terminal bud is undamaged. Damaged palms
shall be removed from site immediately and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

E. Palms shall be irrigated by flood irrigation and beds shall be prepared to retain the water within the bed
area.

F. Palms which are shipped with rootballs encased in boxes shall not be heeled-in. They shall be placed on
the ground in their boxes and irrigated by drip method throughout the duration of the holding period.

END OF SECTION

PLANTING SOIL MIX 02920-1
SECTION 02920

PLANTING SOIL MIX

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Procurement of materials
B. Stockpiling of materials
C. Mixing planting soil mix

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards:
1. C 136-81 Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
2. D 442-63 (1972) Particle - Size Analysis of Soils
3. D2974-71 Standard Classification of peats, mosses, humus and related products.
4. D2974-71 Standard method of test for moisture, ash and organic matter of peat materials.
5. D2976 Standard method of testing pH of Peat Materials.

B. Official Methods of Analysis (11th Edition, 1 October, 1970).


A. Perform work with personnel experienced in the work required of this section under direction of an
experienced foreman.

B. Quality Assurance, Section 02900 Landscaping Works.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The following data shall be submitted:
1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard packaged products.
2. An independent laboratory analysis of all materials submitted to the Engineer/Resident Engineer
for review.
3. Manufacturer's or Vendor's certified analysis for fertilizer materials.
4. Organic Amendment: Prior to shipping material to the project submit an analysis to the
5. Sand: Prior to the beginning of borrowing activities submit to the Engineer/Resident Engineer
laboratory analysis showing items under fertility, agricultural suitability and particle sizes or as
required by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.
6. Prepared soil mix: Prior to placement of prepared soil mix in the landscape, submit to the
Engineer/Resident Engineer laboratory analysis showing items in fertility and agricultural suitability
as required.
7. To ensure prompt proceeding of the work, stock piling of material after it has been tested and
approved is permitted.

B. The following samples shall be submitted :

1. Water: Samples of irrigation water in use shall be submitted to Engineer/Resident Engineer.
Submit 1 1/2 litres.
2. Sand and Organic Amendments: Samples of sand and organic materials shall be submitted to the
Engineer/Resident Engineer. Submit 1 kg of each.
3. Fertilizer: Samples of fertilizers shall be submitted to the Engineer/Resident Engineer. Submit 1
kg.


A. Packaged Materials
1. Store fertilizer separately from pesticides in a dry storage area away from contaminants and plant
materials as approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.
2. Stockpile bulk materials on site, covered and protected to prevent deterioration from sun and wind.
3. Packaged materials will be delivered in labelled sealed containers showing the weight, analysis,
name of manufacturer, point of origin and dealer, including expiration date.
4. All pesticides shall be stored in a locked container in an air conditioned room. Herbicides shall be
stored separately from other chemicals. Both storage areas shall be locked.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLANTING SOIL MIX COMPONENTS

A. Sand

Sand for prepared soil mix shall be obtained from approved borrow sources. It will conform to the following
physical and chemical characteristics.

1. Physical Characteristics:
a. Material passing a No. 10 sieve 100%
b. Material passing a No. 35 sieve 90% - 100%
c. Material passing a No.140 sieve 0% - 10%
d. Material passing a No.270 sieve 0% - 3%

2. Chemical Characteristics:
a. Salinity (Ece x 1000) less than 4
b. SAR (Sodium Absorbtion Ratio) less than 4
c. Boron (saturation extract) less than 1.5 ppm
d. pH less than 8.0

B. Organic Amendment - Bark Mulch

Soil organic amendment shall be composted fir bark mulch as supplied by (1) Sequoia Horticultural
Products, P. O. Box 963, Dinuba, CA 93618 (Tel : 209-528-2118), (2) Nordig Bark A8 (Tel : 46-454-640-00),
(3) Bulrush Peat Co. Ltd., New Ferry Road, Bellaghy, Magherafelt, Coderry, BT458ND (Tel : 44-1-648-
386555) or approved equal.

1. Physical Characteristics:
a. Particle size shall be not less than 6mm diameter and not greater than 20mm diameter.
b. Bulk Density : 300 - 400 kg/m
3

2. Chemical Characteristics:

a. Organic matter greater than 80%
b. pH 5.0 - 6.5
c. Salinity (ECe x 1000) 0.5 - 2.0
d. Total nitrogen 0.7 - 2.0
e. Available phosphorous 100 - 500 ppm
f. CEC (meg/100 gms) 80 - 120 ppm
g. Boron (by hot water extraction) less than 5 ppm
h. SAR less than 2.0

C. Fertilizers

Provide fertilizers as indicated below for soil mix.
1. Controlled release Fertilizer shall be Osmocote as manufactured by Sierra Chemical Company,
Strijkviertel 35 II, 3454 PJ De Meern, Netherlands, or approved equal and shall be organic resin
coated complete fertilizer with an analysis of 20-10-5+Fe and a release longetivity of 12-14 months
at 21 degrees C soil temperature.
2. Agriculture grade sulphur, 99% sulphur content with 100% passing a 16 mesh screen and 50%
passing a 100 mesh screen.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Soil mix shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Salinity (ECe x 1000) less than 4.0
2. SAR less than 4.0
3. pH 6.5 to 7.5
4. Boron (by saturation extraction) less than 0.7 ppm

B. Soil mix is to be mixed in the quantities of proportions as indicated below according to the procedures
outlined in 3.01 E
1. Planting Soil Mix:
a. 75% Sand
b. 25% Composted fir bark mulch
c. 2 Kg Controlled Release Fertilizer per cubic meter.
d. 2 Kg Soil Sulphur per cubic meter

C. In the event that the pH of soil mix exceeds 7.5 the sand portion of the mix will be amended with suitable
additives (soil sulphur, sulphuric acid, or other approved amendments) to bring the resultant soil mix into the
specified range of 6.5 to 7.5. Such additives will be added to the sand prior to addition of the organic
amendment. After adding such additives the sand will be leached to bring the salinity, SAR, pH and Boron
of the resultant mix within the ranges indicated in Part 3.01 A.

D. One trial lot of two (2) m
3
will be prepared by the Contractor prior to the start of full soil mixing operations.
Samples of these trials will be submitted for analysis. The analysis will include specific recommendations for
changes in the soil mix formulations. The Contractor shall submit such analysis and recommendations to
the Engineer/Resident Engineer. With the Engineer's/ Resident Engineer's approval, the Contractor may
begin full soil mixing operations.

E. Soil mixing procedure:

1. Mix physical ingredients (sand, sulphur, composted fir bark mulch and fertilizer) to a uniform
mixture. Mixing method shall be by wind rowing/tilling on an approved hard surface area and
according to acceptable horticultural practices as approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.
The organic portion should be moist.
2. Apply fertilizer ingredients and mix until homogenous.

F. The resultant mix will be moistened to about 5-10%.

END OF SECTION

PLANTING PROCEDURES AND MATERIALS 02925-1
SECTION 02925

PLANTING PROCEDURES AND MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Setting out by staking on site the location of all individual plants prior to construction of irrigation works.

B. Transporting plants from plant holding area.

C. Digging plant pits to size specified in planting details.

D. Placing, compacting and leveling planting soil.

E. Planting all trees, palms, shrubs, ground covers and vines.

F. Supplying and installing tree staking and guying materials.

G. Maintain plant material and associated landscape materials throughout the installation and maintenance
period.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute Z60.1 (ANSI).


A. Perform work with personnel experienced in the work required of this Section under direction of a skilled
foreman.

B. Personnel and equipment shall be as specified in Section 02900/1.05.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples shall be submitted in the approved form to the Engineer/Resident Engineer for review/approval.
No materials shall be used until they are approved in writing by the Engineer/Resident Engineer. Samples
shall be retained by the Engineer/Resident Engineer and all subsequent delivery of materials shall conform
to the approved samples.

1. Prepared soil mix (1 kg) with laboratory test report
2. Tree stakes (one), tree tie (one)
3. Soil separator (one square meter)
4. Decomposed granite top dressing (2 kg.)
5. Stone surfacing (2 kg.)
6. Wood battens for palms (3 Nos.)
7. Burlap and wire for wrapping palms (1 sq. m & 1m)
8. Drainage stone (1 kg)
9. Clay fired brick pavers
10. Stone paving materials i.e. granite, limestone, etc.
11. Ceramic tile
12. Drainage matt
13. GRP Liner

14. Fir bark mulch top dressing (1 kg)
15. Kool deck surface (one square meter)
16. Wood decking

B. Manufacturer's Literature:

1. Submit two (2) copies of manufacturer's literature for the following products. Products shall be
reviewed and approved in writing by the Engineer/Resident Engineer. Materials shall not be used
until approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer. Samples shall be retained by the
Engineer/Resident Engineer and all subsequent delivery of materials shall conform to the
approved samples and labels.

a. Fertilizer
b. Pesticide
c. Anti-desiccant
d. Tree wound paint

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLANT MATERIALS

A. All plant materials are as specified in drawings and plant list.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Prepared soil mix as per approved soil mix of this section.

B. Mulch: Nitrified composted fir bark mulch with iron by "Forest Magic" or approved equal.

C. Guying and Staking Material:
1. Stakes shall be straight and sound of approved soft wood. They shall be not less than 5 cm
square or 6 cm diameter if round. If insect repellant wood is not used, stakes shall be treated with
an approved preservative. Stakes to be approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.
2. Tree ties:
Guying cable shall be 12 gauge U.S. pliable galvanized steel. Hose for protecting the tree against
abrasion of the cable shall be reinforced two-ply rubber or plastic hose of suitable length and
diameter.

D. Fertilizer
1. Fertilizer to be added to tree, palm and shrub pits shall be SIERRATABS 21 gram slow release
fertilizer tablets manufactured by Sierra Chemical Co., or approved equal.
2. Fertilizer to be added to trees, palms and shrubs during maintenance period shall be as specified
elsewhere in this specification.
3. Agriculture grade sulphur, 99% sulphur content with 100% passing a 16 mesh screen and 50%
passing a 100 mesh screen.

E. Fungicide : Fungicide shall be as required to be reviewed and approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

F. Anti-desiccant : Anti-desiccant shall be an emulsion which provides a protective film over plant surface and
permeable enough to permit transpiration. It should be delivered in containers of the manufacturer, mixed
according to the manufacturer's directions, and shall be equal to "Wiltpruf", manufactured by Nursery
Speciality Products, Inc., Groton Falls, New York,; "D-Way" manufactured by Plant Produce Company, Blue
Point, Long Island; or "Foli-Gard, manufactured by E-Z F10 Chemical Company, Columbus, Ohio, U.S.A.

G. Herbicide : Pre-emergence and post emergence herbicide shall be as approved by the Engineer/Resident
Engineer.

H. Tree Wound Paint : Tree Wound paint shall be Cabot's dressing or approved equal.

I. Soil Separator : Soil separator shall be "TERRAM 1000" by ICI Fibers-Gwent, UK, "Weed-check Landscape
Mat" by Brighton By-products Co. Inc, New Brighton, PA, USA, "Mirafi 140S" 30 mil, nonwoven
polypropylene and polyethylene fabric 150 pounds, by Celanese Fibers Marketing Co., distributed by
Bowman Construction and Supply Inc., Denver, Colorado, U.S.A. or approved equal.

J. Drainage Stone : Drainage Stone shall consist of minimum 2.5 cm diameter angular crushed stone. It shall
be washed free of dirt, organic matter, clay, clay film and objectionable material and be in conformance with
ASTM C-33 Table 2. It shall be located as shown on details and plans.

K. Decomposed granite top dressing : Decomposed granite top dressing shall be inch minus size, Madison
gold colour.

L. Protective Fencing: Protective fencing shall consist of wire fencing and steel posts.
1. Wire fencing shall be galvanized steel 10 gauge wire with wires spaced not more than 15 cm
vertically and 15 cm horizontally. Total height of fencing shall be not less than 1.2 meters from
grade to the highest wire.
2. Steel posts shall be specifically made for the purpose and of a length appropriate to the height of
the fence. Posts shall have provision for attaching wire fencing integral with the construction of the
post. Posts shall be galvanized and painted black.

M. Stone surfacing:

Stone surfacing for water feature shall be a minimum of 1 cm. diameter and maximum of 2.5 cm. diameter.
It shall be of hard, igneous rock with smooth, rounded form. It shall be in earth tone colors of brown, beigh,
gray, etc. It shall be free of dirt, organic matter, clay and other objectionable material.

N. Fir bark mulch top dressing : Mulch top dressing shall be composted fir bark mulch. Particle size shall be
not less than 5mm dia and not greater than 8mm dia.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. The Contractor shall review the applicable architectural or engineering drawings and shall be familiar with
the alignment of utility lines, ducts, irrigation lines and buried cables existing in the area. The Contractor
shall field check the location of utilities shown on the drawings before any installation of material or plants.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage resulting from any neglect or failure to comply with this
requirement.

B. Rough grading shall be examined to ensure that rough grading and all other subsurface work in planting
beds is done prior to starting of planting.

C. After the installation of all planting and irrigation, the Contractor shall also fine grade all areas other than
those receiving ground cover. These areas shall be recompacted where necessary and raked to remove
any rocks, stones, or other debris greater than 12 mm in diameter. The grade shall be smooth, even, and
continuous with variations from finish grade to be no greater than plus or minus 25 mm.

3.02 MARKING AND LAYOUT

A. Prior to the construction of irrigation works the contractor shall set the following groups of plant species
using a suitable marker, flag etc. to denote the location of the plants for approval by the Engineer/Resident
Engineer.
i) Palm Trees
ii) Canopy Trees

iii) Small Trees
iv) Large Shrubs
v) Small shrubs and Vines
vi) Ground cover plants (typical sample areas only)

B. No excavation or placement of planting soil mix shall begin until layout of the planting beds and trees has
been approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer. Contractor shall supply replacement soil at no
additional cost to the Owner.

C. Layout of bed outlines shall be staked and stakes shall be driven in at tree and shrub locations. All shrub
and typical sample ground cover plant rows shall be marked and coordinated with tree locations.

D. The Contractor shall give the Engineer/Resident Engineer a fifteen (15) day notice in writing before the
inspection of staking. Daily inspections will be made as necessary. The Engineer/Resident Engineer
reserves the right to refuse inspection if, in his opinion, an insufficient quantity of work is available to be
checked.

E. The Engineer/Resident Engineer will inspect the staked locations of the bed outlines and palm tree and
canopy tree locations in the field, and will direct the Contractor to adjust their locations as required.

3.03 GROUND COVER BED PREPARATION

A. Protect all existing underground improvements and utilities from damage. Any damage to such
improvements and utilities must be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the
Employer.

B. Remove all foreign material, debris, roots, stones, plant parts and contaminated soil from the site. Do not
bury such material on site.

C. The planting soil mix shall be placed over the compacted sub-base and compacted using water saturation to
the full mix depth. The area shall be levelled to within plus or minus 50 mm and then again be thoroughly
irrigated with water to eliminate air pockets and settle soil. The soil shall be evenly moistened to a depth of
300 mm. After the irrigation system has been installed the Contractor shall recompact and settle all
disturbed areas and fine grade to a smooth continuous grade.

D. All germinating weeds shall be removed from the area and the soil shall form a smooth continuous grade,
after planting and during maintenance.

3.04 EXCAVATION OF PLANTING PITS

A. Excavation for planting shall extend to the required subgrades as indicated on the Drawings. The minimum
depths of plant pits or beds shown on the Drawings shall be measured from finished grade. If sides of
planting pits become glazed, the glazed surfaces shall be scarified.

B. The Contractor shall take precautions not to damage the previously installed irrigation system. Damage to
irrigation shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner.

C. Remove all excavated material from the site on a daily basis.

D. If rock, underground construction, or other obstructions are encountered in the excavation of plant pits,
alternate locations may be selected as determined by the Engineer/Resident Engineer. Where location
cannot be changed, as determined by the Engineer/Resident Engineer, the Contractor shall alter or remove
the obstruction to a depth of not less than 500 mm below the required pit depth.

E. The Engineer/Resident Engineer shall determine if a drainage test is required and shall instruct the
contractor accordingly.


3.05 PLANT PIT DRAINAGE TEST

A. Testing the drainage of plant pits shall be done by auger hole percolation test procedure which includes
filling each pit 10 cm deep with water. The Engineer/Resident Engineer shall be notified of any plant pit that
does not drain the water in Three (3) hours. Planting shall not proceed until the Engineer/Resident Engineer
has reviewed test pit results.
B. If remedial action is required because of unsatisfactory drainage of planting pits, the Engineer/Resident
Engineer will advise the Contractor as to what remedial action should be taken. The Contractor shall not
undertake remedial action until approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

3.06 PLANTING

A. Where possible planting operations shall be confined to one area at a time. The object being to prepare,
plant and finish each landscape area in one operation complete with its own functioning irrigation system.

B. Excavate soil from pits as required. Remove all excavated material from the site.

C. Loosen subsoil at base of planting pits. Place drainage rock and soil separator, if required, before addition
of prepared soil mix.

D. Set the plants at the same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the ground from which they were
dug or soil level in their container. This does not apply to planting palms.

E. Move and handle plants by container or rootball only. Large Palms and Trees which are moved by crane or
front end loader must be protected so as not to damage the rootball, trunk, branches or fronds, See Section
02905.

F. Set all planting plumb and brace trees, palms and shrubs rigidly in position until the prepared soil mix has
been consolidated around rootball by water settlement.

G. When planting Trees and Palms, backfill the tree pits in 500 mm lifts of prepared soil mix, water thoroughly
and lightly tamp to eliminate all air pockets in the prepared soil mix.

H. Cut ropes or strings from the tops of all plants after plant has been set and guyed, except palms.

I. Plant containers shall be cut off all container grown plants and removed. Do not break or disturb rootball
while planting.

J. Shape grade around tree pits and planting beds as shown on the drawings and correct all compaction
deficiencies.

K. Ground cover and small shrub areas shall be planted in neat rows with spacing as shown on drawings.

L. Water all plants immediately after planting. Install a water basin around each plant during the plant
establishment period as directed by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

M. Immediately after planting, all plant material should be sprayed with anti-desiccant, applying an adequate
film over trunks, branches, twigs, and/or foliage.

N. Each fifteen (15) gallon tree shall be staked in accordance with the details, immediately following planting
and spraying. Plants shall stand plumb after staking.

O. Apply fir bark mulch, stone or other top dressing at the specified depth to all planting beds as noted on the
drawings.

P. Contractor shall take extreme care in the handling of plant material to avoid breaking or damaging the root
ball. Plants that have been damaged by poor handling may be rejected by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

3.07 PRUNING

A. Pruning shall be done after planting and staking operations are complete.

B. Pruning shall be done only by an experienced horticulturist or arborist. Do not prune until guidelines for
pruning have been established in the field with the Engineer/Resident Engineer. The Engineer/Resident
Engineer shall require that several trees or shrubs be pruned by the Horticulturist or Arborist in his presence,
such pruning being prototypical for the entire job.
C. Plants shall be pruned according to standard horticultural practice to preserve the natural character of the
plant. Tip back crowns if so instructed.

D. Remove all dead wood, suckers and broken or badly bruised branches.

E. All saw cuts on branches larger than 2 cm, to be made with 3 cuts, i.e. undercut, stub cutoff and final cut.

F. Only clean sharp proper tools shall be used. Do not use pruning shears where loppers are required or
loppers where a pruning saw is required.

G. All cuts over 1.0 cm in diameter shall be covered with tree wound paint.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTIVE FENCING

A. Fences shall be erected around planting beds or as directed by Engineer/Resident Engineer.

B. Fence posts shall be spaced at intervals not to exceed 2.5 meters. Posts shall be driven such that they are
plumb.

C. Wire fencing shall be stretched taut and secured to posts.

D. Fences and posts shall be removed from the site by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer/ Resident
Engineer.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF GRAVEL MULCH TOP DRESSING

A. Gravel mulch to be used as a top dressing around the base of trees and palms except as otherwise shown
on plans and details.

B. Gravel mulch top dressing shall be placed in designated areas in an even layer 4cm thick.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF FIR BARK MULCH TOP DRESSING

A. Fir Bark mulch to be used as top dressing in planting beds where gravel mulch is not specified.

B. Fir Bark mulch top dressing shall be placed in an even layer 2cm thick.

C. Fir Bark mulch top dressing should be placed immediately after planting and installation of the irrigation
systems.

END OF SECTION

LAWNS 02930-1
SECTION 02930

LAWNS

To be read in conjunction with Conditions of Contract and other Conditions.

PART 1 - GENERAL

Lawn areas (Grass) to be Paspalum Vaginatum planted from stolens or Stenotaphrum Secundatum (St. Augustine Grass)
planted from Sod.

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Preparation of subgrade to receive planting soil mix.
B. Spreading/compaction/levelling of planting soil mix.
C. Stolonising, laying sod and fertilizing
D. Maintaining stolonised and sodded areas throughout Maintenance Period.
E. Restoration

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z60.1-1990
B. See Section 02905, Division 1.03
C. American Society of Agronomy Publication - Turfgrass, Monograph 14.
D. Golf Course Management by James B. Beard
E. Grass - U.S.D.A. Year Book of Agriculture.


A. Planting Soil Mix must conform to Section 02920.

B. Perform work with personnel experienced in the work required of this Section under direction of an
experienced foreman who has directed stolonising and sod laying operations of similar scale and preferably
in arid climates similar to Kuwait.

C. See Quality Assurance, Section 02900 Landscaping works.


A. Deliver Paspalum Vaginatum (Adalyd grass) stolons in original containers as provided by INTURFCO, P. O.
Box 3098, Plan Desert California, USA., telex 751705 TURFUD or approved equal. Stolons must arrive in
healthy growing conditions suitable for immediate planting.

B. Deliver Stenotaphrum Secundatum (St. Augustine Grass) Sod in rolls.

C. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis and name of manufacturer.

D. Standard of measurement for stolons shall be a bushel which shall be defined as 10 lbs of stolons material.

E. Stolons and Sod must be shipped in cold storage. Temperature range in shipment shall be 45 deg. to 50
deg. F. Maximum time allowed from cutting stolons or sod at the supplier to placing them in the ground shall
no shall not exceed 10 weeks, provided they are kept refrigerated.

LAWNS 02930-2
F. Time between removal from refrigeration and placement shall not exceed 10 days and storage during that
time shall be in a cool, dry place with temperatures not exceeding 75 degrees F.

G. Close co-ordination between the Contractor and supplier is essential to assure that stolons and sod arrives
on site at the proper time for planting.
H. Proof of Supplier's cutting date and time must be shown to the Engineer/Resident Engineer upon the arrival
of the stolons and sod to the project site. If the time from cutting the stolons or sod to its arrival on site
exceeds that which is specified in Item 1.05 E above, the stolons will be rejected by the Engineer/Resident
Engineer.

1.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Beginning the work stipulated in this Section means acceptance of existing conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GROWING MEDIA

A. See Section 02920 Planting Soil Mix, for growing media.

B. Lawn fertilizer shall be 16-20-00 used one time per year. Urea shall be used for all remaining treatments.
Urea shall be used on the regular bases during growing season or as directed by the Engineer/Resident
Engineer.

2.02 GRASS STOLONS AND SOD

A. Grass Stolons shall be Paspalum Vaginatum and shall be fresh living sections or rhizomes and stems having
nodes which will produce growth when properly layed and maintained. Stolons shall be grown from high
quality vegetative materials in soil treated with approved pesticides, and be free of diseases, insects and
weeds or weed seed.

B. Stolons shall be cut to between 3.0cm and 10cm in length.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Herbicides
1. Pre-emergent herbicide shall be Balon or Surflan by Elanco Products Co., Indianapolis, Indiana
46206, U.S.A. or approved equal.
2. Post emergent herbicide shall be reviewed and approved by Engineer/Resident Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 LAWN AREA PREPARATION

A. The Contractor shall identify and protect all existing underground improvement and utilities from damage.
Any damage to such improvements and utilities must be repaired or replace by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the owner at the discretion of the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

B. Remove all foreign material, debris, roots, stones, plants and contaminated soil from the site. Do not store
such material on site.

C. Do not lay sod without permission of Engineer/Resident Engineer if night time temperature fall below 45 Deg
- 50 Deg. F.

LAWNS 02930-3
D. All grass areas will be rough graded to a depth of 30 cm below finished grade plus or minus 5.0 cm by the
contractor.

E. The planting soil shall then be place over the compacted subgrade and compacted by flooding it and
bringing it to field capacity. The area shall be levelled to within plus or minus 2.5 cm and then be thoroughly
irrigated with water to a depth of 20 cm to eliminate air pockets and settle soil. After the irrigation has been
installed the Contractor shall recompact and settle all disturbed areas and fine grade to within plus or minus
0.6 cm.

F. After a period of ten days, all germinating weeds shall be removed from the stolon area and the soil mix
reveled to form a smooth continuous grade.
3.02 STOLONISING

A. Stolons should be spread over the prepared area at rate of 8 bushels per 1000 square feet (8 bushels per
95 square meters) and pressed 1/2" (1.27 cm) into the soil by means of a stolon crimper, by hand or other
piece of approved equipment. It shall then be rolled and leveled int eh even of low spots.

B. Immediately after planting the area shall be irrigated until the top 8.0 cm is wetted. The planting soil must be
kept damp at all times until the stolons shown signs of significant growth.

3.03 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Period shall be until final acceptance.

B. Maintain surfaces and supply additional planting soil mix where necessary, including areas affected by
settling.

C. Water to ensure uniform sod growth.

D. Apply water slowly so that surface will neither puddle nor crust.

E. Mow grass regularly with a reel-type mower. Mowing shall commence when 50% of the grass exceeds 4.0
cm. Remove clippings immediately after mowing.

F. After first mowing water grass sufficiently to moisten soil to 7 to 15 cm depth.

G. Apply herbicides when weeds start developing, during calm weather, according to manufacturers
recommendations.

H. Re-Stolonise any bare, thin or dead areas and eroded areas larger than 15cm x 15cm.

I. Fertilizer shall be distributed on designated areas during period when grass is dry. Fertilizer conforming to
physical condition, packaging and marking as specified under Products shall be provided. For each
application of fertilizer, apply 1.0 kg/100 square metres uniformly over the area, in two successive
applications using half of the quality for each application, applied at right angles to each other. In
refertilization operations, the following sequence shall be observed.
1. Mow turf
2. Apply fertilizer
3. Surface irrigate to force fertilizer downward.

3.04 RESTORATION

A. Restore pavement, concrete, grassed areas, planted areas, or structures, damaged during execution of work
of this Section at no additional cost to the Owner, as directed by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

3.05 ACCEPTANCE

LAWNS 02930-4

A. Stolonised areas shall have total coverage of 75% in the first 2 months after planting. Contractor must
restolonise bare areas to provide an even stand of turf.

B. Stolonised areas will be accepted at the end of the maintenance period if the grass exhibits vigorous free
growth, is completely established, and provides a coverage of 100% with no bare, dead, or brown spots.

END OF SECTION

TREES, SHRUBS, VINES AND GROUND COVERS 02950-1
SECTION02950

TREES, SHRUBS, VINES AND GROUND COVERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Preparation of subsoil

B. Plant quality and size

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI Z 60.1-1990

B. FS O-F-241 - Fertilizers, mixed, commercial.


A. Nursery: Company specializing in growing and cultivating plants and approved by the Agricultural Department of
Kuwait.

B. Installer: Company specializing in installing and planting plants and approved by the Agricultural Department of
Kuwait.


A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 02905.

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 02905.

C. Deliver fertilizer in waterproofing bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer.

D. Protect plants until planted.

E. Deliver plant materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plants moist.


A. Consider local conditions and the planting and growing season in Kuwait.

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the work of this Section with installation of underground irrigation system, utilities, piping and
watering heads.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLANT SIZE AND QUALITY

A. Palms:

1. The Contractor shall supply palm trees as specified in the plant list. They shall be of a quality equal to
palms designated as "Florida Fancy", in the Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Service
Publication - Part II Palms and Trees referred to in this section.
2. All palms shall be of sound health, vigorous and free of disease or insect infestation or damage.
3. Fronds shall exhibit no signs of moisture stress. All palms shall have straight trunks. Any tree having
a weak or thin trunk not capable of supporting itself when planted in the open will not be accepted.
4. The minimum acceptable sizes are as follows:
Ten meter and six meter - The trunk portion, exclusive of fronds shall be ten meter or six meters in
length. The root ball shall be full and fibrous and 120 cm in diameter or 1.5 times the diameter of the
trunk measured at the base of the crown whichever is larger.

B. Trees:
1. All parts shall be of sound health, vigorous and free of all disease or insect infestation or damage.
2. The Contractor shall supply trees as specified in the plant list. They shall be of a quality equal to
standards set forth in referenced standard ANSI Z60.1 - 1990.
3. Trees shall have a straight trunk throughout their height and any tree with a weak, thin trunk not
capable of supporting itself when planted in the open will not be accepted. The minimum acceptable
size of all plants measured before pruning, with branches in normal position, shall conform to the
measurements specified within the plant list. Plants larger in size than specified may be used, but the
use of larger plants shall not affect the contract price. If larger plants are used, increase the ball of
earth or spread of roots proportionately.

C. Container Grown Plants:
1. All container grown plants shall be healthy, vigorous, well rooted and established in the container
which they are to be planted from. They shall have tops which are of good quality, normal size for the
species, and are in healthy growing condition. Plants shall not be root bound.
2. Plants shall conform to the varieties specified in the plant list and be true to botanical name as listed in
Hortus Third Standardized Plant Names. Plants shall be in accordance with ANSI Z60.1 - 1990
except as otherwise stated in the specifications or shown on the plans. Where the drawings or
specifications are in conflict with ANSIZ60.1 - 1990 the drawings and specifications shall prevail.
a. Container grown plant shall be a plant transplanted to a container and grown in that
container sufficiently long for the new fibrous roots to have developed so that the root mass
will retain its shape and hold together when removed from the container.
b. Liner stock shall be free from abnormal circling, kinking or twisting of the root systems.
Container size shall be 2-1/4 inches or 5.0cm (trade designation).
c. The Engineer/Resident Engineer reserves the right to have the contractor remove any plant
from its container to inspect the roots for binding or inadequate development.

3. Container sizes are of the following trade designations.

Sizes for most standard trees and shrubs are as follows:

SIZE CONTAINER SIZE OR
EQUIVALENT VOLUME

1 Gallon 15 cm dia x 20 cm deep
5 Gallon 23 cm dia.x 26 cm deep
15 Gallon 40 cm wide x 45 cm deep
24 Box 60 cm wide x 60 cm deep


2.02 PLANTING SOIL MIX

A. Planting soil mix shall be as specified in Section 02920.

B. Mix prepared soil as herein specified prior to being placed in planting pits.
2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Wrapping Materials: Burlap.

B. Stakes: Softwood lumber, pointed end.

C. Cable, Wire, Eye Bolts and Turnbuckles: Non-corrosive, of sufficient strength to withstand wind pressure and
resultant movement of plant life.

D. Plant Protectors: Rubber sleeves over cable to protect plant stems, trunks and branches.

2.04 VERIFICATION

A. Provide certification of inspection by the Agricultural Department of Kuwait.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that prepared subsoil is ready to receive work of this section.

B. Saturate soil with water to test drainage.

C. Verify that required underground utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.

3.02 PREPARATIONOF SUBSOIL

A. Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas. Maintain profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual.
Blend slopes into level areas.

B. Remove foreign materials, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove contaminated subsoil.

C. Dig pits and beds larger than plant root system as shown on drawings and details.

3.03 PLANTING

A. Place plants for best appearance for review and final orientation by Engineer/Resident Engineer.

B. Set plants vertical.

C. Set plants in pits or beds, partly filled with planting soil mix. Remove wires or containers from the root ball.

D. Place plant materials so roots lie in a natural position. Backfill planting soil mix in layers. Maintain plant
materials in vertical position.

E. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of prepared soil mix and again when full.

3.04 PLANT LOCATIONS

A. Place trees no closer than 1 meter to a fence, wall, 1 1/2 meters to a building foundation.


B. Place shrubs at least 50 cm from foundation, walls and walks for protection of stem walls, and as much further
as character of growth demands.

C. The Engineer/Resident Engineer will check the stakeout of all planting areas and planting pit locations prior to
excavation.

3.05 PLANT SUPPORT

Brace plants vertically with plant protector wrapped guy wires and stakes to the following;

Tree Size Tree Support Method

15 gallon 3 stakes with two ties
24 box 3 stakes or guyed
4 meter Ht. Date Palms Wood braces (3) as shown in details

END OF SECTION

HARDSCAPE MATERIALS 02960-1
SECTION 02960

HARDSCAPE MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

Hardscape materials to include clay fired brick pavers, granite pavers and limestone pavers and cladding. Limestone pavers
and cladding to be as specified in section 04400, exterior stonework of the architectural specification.

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work covered by this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliance and materials
and performing all operations in connection with hardscape materials.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following ;
1. BS 7533-1 : 2001
2. BS 7533 : Part 3 : 1997
3. BS 6677 : Part 1 : 1986
4. ASTM Standards : C43, C67, C88, C410 and C418


A. The fabricator shall have a minimum of 10 years successful experience in the fabrication of granite and brick
pavers in sizes, shapes and finishes to units required for this project and shall have adequate facilities to
provide the units.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings : Submit shop drawings indicating the dimensions of units, details of special shapes and
reinforcing for each unit and installation layout indicating reference to nearest grids and any other important
features.

B. Samples :
1. Submit 200 x 100 x 65mm samples of clay fired brick pavers in all colours and finishes for
preliminary approval of colour and finish. The colour range and texture for the finished units shall
be within limits established by the approved samples.
2. Submit 300 x 600 x 65mm samples of granite pavers in all colours and finishes for preliminary
approval of colour and finish. The colour range and texture for the finished units shall be within
limits established by the approved samples.
3. Submit 100x100x80mm Basalt stone sample in all colours and finishes for preliminary approval of
colour and finish. The colour range and texture for the finished units shall be within limits
established by the approved samples.

C. Product Data : Submit manufacturers technical data for the types of manufactured hardscape units.
Including certification that the types of manufactured units comply with specified requirements.

1.05 VISUAL MOCK-UP

A. Following approval of the samples construct full scale visual mock-ups of hardscape materials showing all
patterns and edge conditions, to simulate final condition. Mock-up, if approved, may be used in the final
work.


A. All materials, in so far as practicable shall be delivered in the manufacturers original unopened containers
and packages with seals unbroken and labels intact and shall be stored in a dry place. Materials such as
cements which are partially caked, the containers for which show water strains, or which are otherwise
damaged or unsuitable for use, shall be removed from the site immediately.
B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent chipping, cracking or other damage during the unloading, and
storage on the site. Damaged hardscape materials will not be allowed to be installed, and should any
damage be found in installed work, such work shall be removed immediately and replaced with new
material. The Contractor shall assume all expenses incurred therefrom.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other Sections. Verify dimensions
and work of other trades which adjoin materials of this Section before the installation of items herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Clay Fired Brick Pavers

The clay pavers shall be wirecut chamfered pavers with integral spacers and shall be classified as Type PB
to BS 6677 : Part 1 : 1986. The pavers shall exhibit the following technical characteristics :

Classification PB type paver, BS 6677 : Part 1 : 1986, Table 1
Durability FL Designation, BS 3921 : 1985, Table 3
Transverse breaking load > 20 kN (mean)
Limits of Size Type PB BS 6677 : Part 1 : 1986, Table 2
Standard Work Size 200 x 100 x 65mm (including integral spacers)
Dry weight per paver 2.8 kg (typically)
Density 2300kg/m
3
(typically)
Skid Resistance Mean wet unpolished skid resistance value (UPV) : >70
Mean wet polished skid resistance value (PPV) : > 50
Abrasion resistance < 300mm
3

Clay type Coal measure clay shale
Colours : To be Selected by the clients
Marshalls PLC
Southowram
Halifax, UK

National Industries Kuwait

Or equivalent approved

B. Granite Pavers :


1. General : Provide granite stone of soundness (hardness and density), texture, graining, finish,
crystal patterning, colour and tone matching the sample in the Resident Engineer office (and
subject to the Engineers review) and satisfying the performance criteria specified. Granite shall
be sound and free from cracks, seams, starts and other defects which will impair strength,
durability, finish appearance and is supplied from a single quarry source, with sufficient capacity,
to satisfy the total requirements of the project.
a. Quarry and fabrication plant facilities shall be available for the Owners and the
Engineers inspection at any time.
b. The Owner shall test the granite stone in accordance with the requirements of Paragraph
Quality Control.
c. Visual Qualities of Granite : The Colour, grain and general character of all granite
provided shall be of a range consistent with the samples submitted to the Landscape
Architect. Granite which, in the opinion and judgement of the Landscape Architect, fails
to comply with this requirement may be rejected by the Landscape Architect at any time
during the course of the work. The Contractor shall bear all the costs associated with the
removal and replacement of such rejected stone with acceptable material.

2. Granite : Comply with ASTM C119, Natural Building Stone, in addition to the other reference
standards specified for the respective species.

C. Sand :

1. Sand to be pure silica sand complying with ASTM C144 sieve size.
2. The clay and silt content shall not exceed 3%.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WORKMANSHIP

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing a proper surface to receive the hardscape materials.

B. Floor slabs and concrete to receive a hardscape paving finish shall be clean and free of all foreign matter
detrimental to the bond.

3.02 PROTECTION OF CLEAN UP

A. At the end of each day, remove from the site and dispose of all cartons, rubbish and debris resulting from
the work of this section.

END OF SECTION

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 02970-1
SECTION02970

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE

PART I - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Contractor shall furnish and supply all materials, equipment and labor for maintenance of all landscaped
areas installed as part of this contract.

B. The work shall include, but not be limited to mowing, weed control, insect control, disease control, pruning and
replacement of sub-standard or dead plant material.

C. The Contractor shall perform all work in a manner to comply with the original installation specifications.

D. The Contractor shall also be responsible for required maintenance as contained in other Sections of the
contract.

E. Contractor shall perform maintenance for a period of two years commencing with substantial completion of the
project.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials
B. ANSI : American National Standards Institute
C. BS : British Standard


A. Ordinances and Regulations:

Local Ministry, Municipality, State of Kuwait laws, and rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion
of this work, are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications, and their provisions shall be
carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with
any of the above rules and regulations of requirements of the same. However, when these specifications and
drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, construction operations/ maintenance of a better quality,
higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, the provisions of these
contract documents shall take precedence.

B. Manufacturer's Directions:

Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers used in
the contract furnish directions covering points not explained in the contract documents.

1.04 STANDARDS AND CODES

A. Unless otherwise stated, the standards, codes and publications in their latest edition at date of enterprise shall
be considered as part of this specification.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. The following shall be submitted unless otherwise approved elsewhere.
1. Manufacture's certified analysis of standard packaged products.

2. For other than standard products, analysis by a laboratory and methods approved by the
3. Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for fertilizer micronutrients and chemical control (weed,
insect, disease) products.
4. Sand and organic amendments: a laboratory analysis containing the items as indicated below by
methods and a laboratory approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

a. Salinity (EC)
b. pH
c. Boron (by hot water extraction method)
d. Particle sizes and percent passing using U.S. Standard sieves.
e. Moisture content
f. Bulk density
g. Organic matter (by ash)
h. Total Nitrogen (%)
i. Organic Nitrogen (%)
j. Nitrate Nitrogen (ppm)
k. Ammonium Nitrogen (ppm)
l. Available Phosphorous (ppm)
m. Available Potassium (ppm)
n. Available Calcium (ppm)
o. Available Magnesium (ppm)
p. Dilute Acid Soluble Ion (%)
q. Half Saturation percentage

Note: Values for items d-q based on dry weight
5. Contractor shall submit a schedule of materials within 30 days after acceptance of the contract. This
schedule shall include:

a. Proposed equipment
b. Chemicals and fertilizers which the Contractor anticipates using on the job, including those
for the fertilizer injection units of the pump house.
c. A sample label for each producer being submitted for approval.

1.06 RECORD

A. The Contractor shall keep on site a maintenance log. The Contractor shall record daily all operations
performed. Copies of the daily work sheets log shall be sent to Owner and Engineer/Resident Engineer. This
log shall include:
1. Materials used including unit quantity, total quantity and method of application including water and
fertilizer consumption.
2. Repair work performed including plant replacements and equipment status.
3. Directions from Engineer/Resident Engineer and course of action taken.
4. A log of all required tests and inspections as outlined in these specifications.
5. Any other documentation necessary to provide a clear, traceable maintenance procedure.
6. A maintenance manual stipulating a complete schedule of resources including equipment,
consumables, and tasks to be performed, together with a list of suppliers and costs for each
maintenance function and resource.
7. A list of all maintenance personal and their C.V.'s shall be submitted to the Engineer/Resident
Engineer for approval. The designated personnel shall be on site full time during normal working
hours. All maintenance personnel shall wear uniforms during normal working hours. Contractor shall

submit a sample of the uniforms for approval. Penalty for non-compliance with this requirement shall
be KD. 10/- (Kuwaiti Dinars Ten only) per man per day.

1.07 ALTERNATE MATERIALS

A. Substitution of any product, material or equipment without prior written approval of the Engineer/Resident
Engineer shall not be permitted.

1.08 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened containers, with each container identified with
manufacturer's name, brand or type. Materials shall be stored at location and in a manner approved by the

1.09 SCHEDULING

A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the facilities program coordinator monthly all of the activities scheduled for
the complex and the allowable forms of maintenance, any restricted areas and priorities. After schedule has
been prepared it shall be submitted to the Engineer/Resident Engineer for approval.

PART 2- PRODUCTS, MATERIALS ANDEQUIPMENT

2.01 GENERAL

A. Safety - Contractor shall be responsible for using, maintaining and storing all equipment and products in a safe
manner. this safety requirement includes but is not limited to, providing additional safety equipment, training of
all employees, protection of environment, protection of all persons within the area and determination of proper
weather conditions for safe use.

B. Suitability - The Contractor shall be responsible for determining suitability of any specific product for his need.
Use of an unsuitable or non-effective product does not release Contractor from his responsibility for the project.

C. Testing and Submittals
1. Contractor shall have a minimum of 6 soil samples and 2 water samples (one brackish and one fresh)
at locations as directed by Engineer/Resident Engineer, tested and analyzed for all items shown in
Section 1.05 A, 4. These tests shall be performed by a competent licensed soils testing laboratory as
approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.
2. Contractor shall cause to be performed, any and all tests necessary to identify or confirm a disease,
pest, nutrient or herbicide problem or suspected problem. These tests shall be at Contractor's
expense.
3. Engineer/Resident Engineer may cause to be performed, any tests which in his opinion will identify a
heretofore unidentified problem. Should these tests indicate or identify the problem, they shall be at
Contractor's expense.
4. Contractor shall submit, within 30 days of the date of enterprise, an anticipated list of products to be
used. This list must be approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer prior to use. Should additional
unanticipated products be required, these must be approved prior to use on site.
5. In addition to regularly scheduled soil testing, the contractor shall supply the following equipment for
use in monitoring soil fertility.
Two (2) Model B Oakfield Tube Soil samplers, each sample shall include:
one (1) 12" handle
two (2) 12" extension rods
one (1) 12" tube with No. S-2 tip
one (1) No. 13 carrying case
One (1) No. SD 3006S Solu-bridge Soil Tester Kit including the following:
one (1) SD-BI5 Soil Tester
one (1) CEL-PS2 Conductivity Cell
one (1) Thermometer
two (2) Measuring Flasks
one (1) Carrying Case

D. Warranty of Products - Should any product not perform as per manufacturer's warranty, the Contractor shall
immediately remedy the problem on site. Contractor may then elect to pursue the issue with the manufacturer.
Under no circumstances shall contractor delay treatment or remedy, pending manufacturer's honor or warranty.
Likewise, non-effectiveness of products does not release contractor from any and all responsibilities as outlined
in these specifications.

2.02 CHEMICAL PRODUCTS

The following products are suggested for use. These products must be approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer prior
to use. Other products may also be used and should be included on the list of anticipated products by the Contractor.

A. Pesticides
1. Malathion or Diazinon - Contact, leaf applied pesticide. Use according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Metasystox-R [2-(ethsulfinyl) ethol] 0.0 - dimethyl phoshorothioate - Systemic, leaf-applied pesticide.
3. Di-system 0.0 - diethyl X-[z-8 ethylthiote) ethyl] phosphorotioate - Systemic, soil applied pesticide.

B. Herbicides - The Contractor shall not, under any circumstances, use soil sterilants on this site.
1. Surflan 75-WP-oryzalin - Pre-emergent herbicide
2. Ronstar-G-4%-oxa-dizaon - Pre-emergent herbicide.
3. Dacthal-DCPA - Pre-emergent herbicide
4. Buctril and Brominal - Both made from Bromoxynil. Should be used while weeds are young.
5. Fusilade - Fluzaisop - Buryl - For control of grasses in broadleaf shrubs.
6. Roundup - Glyphosate - Systemic herbicide. Contractor must be careful to avoid contact with
desirable vegetation.

C. Fertilizers:
1. Flowering ground covers - use fertilizer with 8-15%N, 30-45%p, 15-20%k. the use of a soluble
product for use through the drip system is recommended.
2. Ground Covers - 20-20-20 is recommended in soluble form for use through the drip system.
3. Shrubs and Trees - A high nitrogen fertilizer is recommended.
4. Iron - Iron chelate molecule 138.
5. Zinc - In form of zinc chelate, EDTA.

2.03 PLANT MATERIAL

A. Plant material shall be replaced in the same sizes as the original material with the following exceptions: plants
which have declined or died as a result of disease, pests, lack of water or negligence on the part of the
Contractor, shall be replaced with the same species of plant and of a size equal to the adjacent plant or the
average of all plants on site of the same species at the discretion of the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

B. Replacement material shall be the same as the original quality specified.

2.04 INERT MATERIALS

A. Inert materials shall conform to original installation specifications in all aspects.

2.05 PERSONNEL

A. Maintenance Supervisor - The maintenance Supervisor shall have eight years experience in arid lands
landscape maintenance, of which six years are in a supervisory capacity. Four years of the supervisory
experience shall be as supervisor over an annual maintenance volume of KD 150,000. In lieu of eight years
experience, the landscape maintenance supervisor may have a degree in Horticulture, plant Science, Agronomy
or related Field and have four years supervisory experience over an annual landscape maintenance volume of
KD 150,000.
B. Landscape Foreman - The landscape Foreman shall have six years experience in arid lands landscape
maintenance, of which four years are supervisory over a crew of at least five people. In lieu of six years
experience, the landscape Foreman shall have a degree in Horticulture, Plant Science, Agronomy or a related
field and have two years maintenance experience in a supervisory capacity over a crew of at least five people.

C. Horticulturist - The Horticulturist should have a background in plant protection and be fully knowledgeable in arid
lands plant diseases, pests and other problems. The Horticulturist shall have a degree in Horticulture and 5
years experience or shall have 10 experience in Horticulture. Degrees in agronomy and or farming shall not be
acceptable.

D. The following skills are required on site. These skills do not necessarily have to be different personnel from
those specified above.
1. Mechanic - An equipment maintenance mechanic with two years experience in maintaining landscape
equipment. This person should have the capability to perform a major engine overhaul.
2. Soil test analysis - One member of the maintenance staff shall have the ability to read and interpret a
soil analysis report. This person shall be able to formulate a course of action to correct any problems
indicated in the soils reports.
3. Plant disease and pest identification - One member of the maintenance staff must have the ability to
identify and diagnose and pest problems. In addition, this person shall be able to select an
appropriate course of action to correct or eradicate those problems.

F. Above Personnel shall begin work immediately after the first area has been planted subject to the stipulations in
Section 02900. This shall not be construed as the Commencement of the Maintenance Period.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall perform all operations in a safe and workmanlike manner. All operations shall conform to
any applicable codes and environmental safety standards.

3.02 CHEMICAL APPLICATIONS

A. Pesticide Program
1. Safety - The Contractor shall supply all workers handling pesticides with proper clothing and
equipment necessary to insure worker safety. This includes, but is not limited to, coveralls, gloves,
eye protection and/or face protection. All pesticide application equipment shall be kept in a working
condition that will not endanger workers.
2. Training - The Contractor shall be responsible for training all workers utilizing pesticides. This
includes, but is not limited to, mixing techniques, rates and timing of application, use and maintenance
of equipment, safety precautions, disposal of waste.
3. Performance
a. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer/Resident Engineer a list of anticipated pesticides for
approval. Along with this list, contractor shall submit a label sheet from each pesticide.
Additional pesticides not anticipated in the list must be approved by the Engineer/Resident
Engineer prior to use on the job. Non-approval or delays in approval shall not release
contractor from responsibility as outlined in d. below.

b. Contractor shall inspect, on a monthly basis, all plant material for presence of pests. This
inspection shall be noted in the maintenance log. Contractor shall also make casual
inspection during the course of other work for pest problems. These problems shall also be
noted in the maintenance log.
c. Upon detection of a pest problem, contractor shall immediately cause proper correctional
measures to be taken. These measures shall also be noted in the maintenance log.
d. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by pests, whether detected or not.
Repair of damages may include additional fertilizers, amendments or replacement as
deemed necessary by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.
4. Storage - Contractor is responsible for storing all pesticides in a safe manner. This includes complying
with all recommendations on the label as well as all applicable codes. No pesticides shall be left
unlabelled on site. All pesticides shall be stored in an airconditioned locked storage room or building
located in the Contractor's site maintenance area. Herbicides shall be stored separate from other
chemicals.

B. Herbicide Program
1. Safety - The Contractor shall supply all workers handling herbicides with proper clothing and
equipment necessary to insure worker safety. This includes, but is not limited to protective clothing
and properly functioning equipment.
2. Training - The Contractor shall be responsible for training all workers utilizing herbicides. This training
shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, mixing techniques, rates of applications methods of
application, use and maintenance of equipment, safety precautions, disposal of waste and protection of
desirable vegetation.
3. Performance - The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all landscape areas under this
contract in a weedfree condition.
a. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer/Resident Engineer a list of anticipated weed control
products. Along with this list, Contractor shall submit a label sheet for each product.
Additional products not included on the list must be approved by the Engineer prior to use
on the job. Non-approval or delays in approval shall not relieve contractor from
responsibility as outlined in b. below.
b. Contractor shall inspect and remove, by chemical or manual means, all weeds and
unwanted vegetation from the project on a weekly basis.
c. Pre-emergents - The Contractor shall supply pre-emergents twice annually to reduce the
occurrences of weeds on the site. This pre-emergent shall be applied to all turf, rock and
shrub areas except those adversely affected by such chemicals.
d. Broadleaf Weed Control - The Contractor shall spot treat broadleaf weeds as they occur. If
needed, selective herbicides may be applied in areas of broad leaf infestation.
e. General weed Control - The Contractor may apply systemic herbicides in areas heavily
infested by weeds and unwanted grasses. Contractor shall exercise care not to damage
any desirable vegetation. Any plant material indicating herbicide damage shall be
immediately replaced at Contractor's expense.
f. Exclusions - Under no circumstances are soil sterilants to be used in this site.
4. Storage - Contractor is responsible for storing all herbicides in a safe manner. This includes
complying with all recommendations on label as well as all applicable codes. No herbicides shall be
left unlabled on site. All herbicides shall be stored in a locked interior storage room located in the
Contractor's maintenance area.
5. If the Engineer/Resident Engineer advises the Contractor of a pest/disease problem, the contractor
shall implement a control program immediately upon receipt of such notification.

C. Fertilizers

1. Safety - The Contractor shall supply all workers handling fertilizers with proper clothing and equipment
necessary to insure worker safety. This includes, but is not limited to, protective clothing and properly
functioning equipment.
2. Training - The Contractor shall be responsible for training all workers applying fertilizers. This training
shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, rates of application, methods of application, use and
maintenance of equipment, safety precautions & disposal of waste.
3. Performance
a. Upon receipt of quarterly soil and water reports, Contractor shall develop a program to
supply adequate nutrients indicated in the report. This program shall be approved by the
Engineer/Resident Engineer but does not release Contractor from providing additional
nutrients needed to maintain plants in healthy condition.
b. The contractor shall perform a quarterly walk-through with the Engineer/Resident Engineer
to inspect the plant material. The Contractor shall, as part of the quarterly program, design
proper nutrient feedings to alleviate any specific problem areas identified by the
c. Should any plant materials show continuing nutrient deficiencies through two consecutive
quarters, contractor shall replace such material and supply proper soil mixes to alleviate this
deficiency problem.
d. The Contractor shall supply, furnish, mix and place in tanks at the pump house, all fertilizers
and micronutrients required by the plants and duly approved by the Engineer/Resident
Engineer.

D. Disease Program
1. Safety - The Contractor shall supply all workers handling chemicals with proper clothing and
equipment necessary to insure worker safety.
2. Training - The Contractor shall be responsible for training all workers applying disease control and
preventive products. This training shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, rates of application,
methods of application, use and maintenance of equipment, safety precautions and disposal of waste.
3. Performance
a. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer/Resident Engineer a list of anticipated disease
control agents for approval. Along with this list, Contractor shall submit a label sheet from
each product. Additional products not anticipated on the list must be approved by the
Engineer/Resident Engineer prior to use on the job. Non-approval or delays in approval
shall not release contractor from responsibility as outlined in d. below. The contractor shall
implement a preventative control program once a disease is identified or discovered. The
implementation of such a program shall be at the direction of the Engineer/Resident
Engineer and shall be considered incidental to the maintenance program and no additional
payment will be made for it.
b. Contractor shall inspect all plant material for presence or indication of disease on a monthly
basis. This inspection shall be noted in the maintenance log. Contractor shall also make
casual inspection during the course of other work for indications of disease problems.
These problems shall be noted in the maintenance log. Once identified, the Contractor
shall advise the Engineer/Resident Engineer in writing of the disease problem and submit a
control program for review by the Engineer/Resident Engineer. At that time the decision to
implement a preventative or a curative control program will be made by the
c. Upon detection of a disease problem, Contractor shall immediately institute a program to
eradicate this disease. This program shall be noted in the maintenance log.
d. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by disease, whether detected or not.
Repair of damages may include disease control products, fertilizers and/or replacement.
Should any plants show moderate decline due to disease (as judged by the
Engineer/Resident Engineer), Contractor shall immediately replace these plants.


3.03 TREES, SHRUBS, VINES AND GROUND COVERS

A. Addition of Nutrients
1. Iron - The Contractor shall add iron in the form of iron chelates - Molecule 138 to all plants as needed.
Iron will be deemed as needed whenever soil tests show a deficiency or plant material shows
indication of iron chlorosis. Contractor is to add iron chelates at manufacturer's prescribed rate. The
sulfate forms of iron will not be considered appropriate action for iron deficiency.
2. Fertilizer - Trees, shrubs, vines and ground covers may be fertilized utilizing a liquid fertilizer injected
through the drip system or by hand applying fertilizers to each plant. Should hand-applied methods
be used, these must be hand- watered to assure dissolving of fertilizers into soil. Plants are to be
fertilized according to a schedule as approved by the Engineer/Resident Engineer. Should soils
indicate or general plant condition indicate need for additional nutrients, these shall also be added.
a. All plant material shall be fertilized as indicated by soil tests and plant conditions.
b. Flowering shrubs and ground covers shall be encouraged to bloom by use of a high
phosphorous fertilizer.

B. Pest and Disease Control
1. Contractors shall conform to all inspection and treatments listed under Section 3.02.
2. Contractor is responsible for replacement of all plants which are significantly deformed or damaged by
pests and disease. Any replacements shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Trimming and Pruning
1. Trees
a. Palms shall have old frond bases cut as directed by the Engineer/Resident Engineer. This
work shall be executed immediately after substantial Completion.
b. Frequency - The primary pruning of trees will be once per year, however certain species
which grow quickly may require more frequent pruning. Additional pruning is required if
there is damaged, dead or deformed growth on the tree.
c. Performance - Contractor shall:
* Prune trees to select and develop permanent scaffold branches that are smaller
in diameter than the trunk or branch to which they are attached. These scaffold
branched should be encouraged at 18"-48" spacing with radial orientation so as
not to overlay one another.
* Prune trees to eliminate diseased or damaged growth.
* Prune trees to eliminate narrow U-shaped branch forks that lack strength.
* Prune trees to maintain growth within space limitations.
* Thin crown to reduce toppling and wind damage.
* Prune palm trees to remove dead fronds.
d. Restrictions - Under no circumstances shall the Contractor strip lower branches from young
trees. Lower branches shall be retained in a "tipped back" or pinched condition with as
much foliage as possible to promote caliper trunk growth. Lower branches may be cut from
trunk only after the tree is able to stand erect without staking or other support.
2. Shrubs and Ground Covers
a. Frequency - Shrubs and ground covers are to be trimmed twice per year. However certain
species which grow quickly may require more frequent pruning. Additional prunings are
required if shrub or ground covers are overgrowing walks or entrances or if there is
diseased, damaged or deformed growth.
b. Performance - The Contractor shall:
* Prune shrubs to develop thick, full foliage and growth indicative of the species.
* Prune ground covers to promote full coverage of the area.
* Prune lateral branches or buds or prune flush with trunk. "Stubbing" is not permitted.

c. Pruning: Shrubs and ground covers (except Wedelia) shall be clipped into boxed forms as
required by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.

D. Staking
1. Inspection - Staking of trees shall be inspected on a regular basis. Any broken stakes shall be
replaced immediately as per original construction standard.
2. Removal - The Contractor shall remove staking when a tree can stand in a vertical and erect form and
can withstand climatic conditions or as directed by the Engineer/Resident Engineer.
3. Girdling - Contractor shall assure that no staking is girdling the tree. Should this occur, the Contractor
shall either remove the stake if Item #2 above applies, or adjust the wire to alleviate this problem.
Girdled trees are not acceptable and shall be replaced with another like tree of same current tree size
at Contractor's expense.
4. Responsibility - Contractor shall be responsible for any trees damaged by improper staking or lack of
staking. These trees shall be replaced with same species and current size tree and at no additional
cost to the Owner.

E. Replacement

Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all trees, shrubs, vines and ground covers in a healthy condition.
Any dead or diseased or declining plant material shall be immediately replaced and at no additional cost to the
Owner.

F. Leaching
1. Contractor shall flush salts from the root zone. This shall be done whenever plants show indication of
salt burn or soil tests indicate salts beyond levels agreed as acceptable in brackish irrigation water.
2. Contract shall leach as follows:-
a. Run system as normally run.
b. Probe rootzone to determine normal water penetration levels.
c. Run system with fresh water for three times the normal running time (a normal one-hour
cycle will be run for three hours).
d. Check penetration of water. Water zone should be expanded well beyond the root system.
If not, increase timing to four times normal.
e. Use increased timing and fresh water for three days.
f. Return system to brackish water use. Allow landscape to partially dry out prior to
commencement of regular irrigation.
3. Leaching should be done based upon tests and visual observation of the plants.

3.04 INERT MATERIALS

A. Weed Control - The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all planting areas in a weed-free condition.
This may be attained using herbicides (in completiance with other Sections of these specifications) or by manual
removal. Weed removal shall occur on a weekly basis.

B. Debris Removal - All debris, including trash, leaves and organic debris, shall be removed on a weekly basis.

C. All gravel surfaces are to be raked to a neat, clean and even appearance on a weekly basis. Any mulch or other
soil that has moved out of bounds (i.e. onto paving or turf) is to be removed and/or replaced in planting beds. All
edges of mulch areas to be neat and even.

D Contractor shall add additional material to areas not conforming to original specified thickness every six months.

E. Contractor shall maintain all planting areas in a neat and raked condition. Area shall be inspected and raked as
needed on a weekly basis. Planting area maintenance shall include weekly weed control and removal, erosion
repair and litter removal.

END OF SECTION

STEEL EDGING 02985 - 1
SECTION02985

STEEL EDGING

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Read and comply with applicable requirements of Section CC "Conditions of the Contract" and all
Sections of Division 1 as a part of this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish material and install steel edging.

B. Guarantee all Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit samples of steel edging for approval by the Architect before commencing work. Approved
samples may be used in construction.

B. The Architect reserves the right to make substitutions of any nature.

C. Contractor's claim for an extra, if any, for substitutions must be submitted in writing to the Architect.
The claim shall state the reason for the extra and be substantiated by facts and cost figures.

1.4 APPROVAL

A. Wherever the terms "approve", "approval" or "approved" are used in the specifications, they shall
mean the approval of the Owner or Architect in writing.

1.5 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor and any subcontractors hereunder guarantee their respective work against defective
materials, workmanship, for a period of one (1) year from date of filing Notice of Completion by the
Contractor and acceptance by the Architect.
B. The Contractor shall further guarantee that during the period of the Guarantee he will repair and
replace all work that is disturbed, damaged, or destroyed from any cause at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LANDSCAPE STEEL EDGING

A. Steel edging shall consist of lengths of hot rolled steel sections, .63cm thick by 12.7cm in depth x 6m
in length. Tapered steel stakes, 45cm long, shall be spaced 75cm on center along the length of the
edging. Joints between edging strips shall be overlapped as indicated on the Drawings and welded.
All edging and stakes shall be shop painted with primer and two coats of semi-gloss black outdoor
enamel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LANDSCAPE STEEL EDGING

STEEL EDGING 02985 - 2
A. Steel edging shall be installed at planted and seeded areas and .63cm below finish grade of
pavement at locations as shown on the Drawings.

B. All bends and curves shall be smooth and uniform. Where bends or curves are of such radius as to
make field bending impracticable, they shall be made in the shop.

3.2 CLEANING

A. At the completion of all work, the surfaces of the finished Work and adjoining area surfaces shall be
cleaned of all foreign matter and left in a neat, satisfactory condition acceptable to the Architect.

END OF SECTION 02985

CONCRETE FORMWORK
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03100-1
SECTION 03100

CONCRETE FORMWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular conditions and Division 1
Specifications, apply to this Section.

B. The responsibility for the design, fabrication, erection, striking, safety and adequacy of the whole of the formwork shall
rest entirely with the Contractor.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
B. Section 03300 - Cast-in Place Concrete.
C. Section 03451 Plant-Precast Architectural Concrete.

1.03 REFERENCES

Comply with the following codes and practices in addition to all regulations and standards set by local authorities
having jurisdiction over the project.

A. American Concrete Institute:

1. ACI 117 Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

2. ACI 301 Specification for Structural Concrete.

3. ACI 318M Metric Building Code Requirement for Structural Concrete.

4. ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

B. American Forest and Paper Association:

1. AF&PA National Design Specifications for Wood Construction.

C. The Engineered Wood Association:

1. APA/EWA PS 1 Voluntary Products Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood.

D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:

1. ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.

E. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ASTM D1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion
Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-
extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

F. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau:

1. WCLIB Standard Grating Rules for West Coast Lumber.

CONCRETE FORMWORK
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03100-2

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Personnel's Qualification: Design and construction shall be executed and supervised by fully qualified personnel

B. MOCK-UP

1. Section 01400 Quality Requirements: Requirements for mock-up.

2. Construct mockup, 3.00x3.00 m in size, including formwork, form liners, form and accessories.

3. Locate where directed by Engineer.

4. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work.

1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Formwork systems shall be prefabricated and properly designed to meet the requirements herein and any portion
which shows signs of sagging or displacement shall be rectified.

B. All formwork shall be constructed plumb, true water and mortar tight, sufficiently rigid and strong to prevent
sagging between supports and to maintain true position and shape during and after placing of concrete without
bowing and distortion.

C. Exceptional care shall be taken to minimize fins, ridges, offsets, leaking of fins and other defects.

D. Design shall take into account:

1. Height of pour

2. Thickness of member

3. Rate of pour

4. Concrete slump

5. Placing temperature

6. Texture of finish

7. Concrete density

8. Construction joints

9. Wind load

10. On soffit forms (in addition to concrete weight):

a. An additional live load of 2.5 KN/sq.m,

OR

b. If a motorized cart is used, an additional live load of 3.75 KN/sq.m

11. Minimum design load for combined dead and live load:

a. 5.00 KN/sq.m

CONCRETE FORMWORK
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03100-3

b. If a motorized cart is used, 6.24 KN/sq.m

12. The worst combination of:

a. Self-weight

b. Formwork forces

c. Reinforcement Weight

d. Wet concrete weight

e. Construction loads

f. Wind loads

g. Incidental dynamic effects caused by placing, vibrating and
compacting concrete.

h. The use of externally applied vibrators.

13. Methods of concrete discharge.

E. Design formwork to be:

1. Sufficiently rigid to maintain the correct position shape and profile so that the final concrete
structure is within the dimensional tolerance specified in ACI-301, Chapter 4.

2. Demountable without shock, disturbance or damage to concrete. Soffit formwork, properly supported
on props only, shall be capable of being remained in position during concrete maturing period.

F. Adjustable steel supports and props shall allow form boards and framework to be accurately adjusted to line and
level. Design shall allow free movement and accessibility under formwork.

G. Props for abnormal ceiling heights shall be specially designed.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit samples of all materials proposed for use in formwork.

B. Submit samples of ties proposed for use in the following situations:

1. Water retaining structures

2. Above water table in general situations

3. In fair faced concrete.

C. Submit all other information requested by the Engineer.

1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. Submit shop drawings of formwork design, including plans and sections, giving the following minimum information
for each level:

1. Details of individual panels.

CONCRETE FORMWORK
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03100-4

2. Position, size and spacing of adjustable steel props.

3. Position, size and spacing of joints, soldiers, ties and the like.

4. Details of formwork for columns, beams, parapets, slabs and kickers.

5. Detail of formwork for column, beam junctions.

6. Details of retaining walls and deep beams showing the position and size of ties, joints, soldiers and sheeting,
together with detailed information on erection and casting sequences and construction joints.

7. General assembly details.

8. Full calculation sheets.

9. Proposals at the penetrations through concrete.

10. Proposed sequence of de-propping beams and slabs for different spans and floor heights and number of
floor heights and number of floors propped, and the striking time for supported and suspended structural
elements, clearly identifying the supported element and suspended element.

B. Scales of shop drawings:

1. Details 1:1, 1:5, 1:10, 1:20.

2. Construction 1:50

C. Allow fourteen (14) days for the Engineer's review of shop drawings.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Doka Formwork Technology
P.O. Box 2217 Salmiyah, 22023 Kuwait
Tel: +965 484 24 62
Fax: +965 482 24 72

B. Quebeisi SGB Sharja
Tel: +971 6 334870
Fax: +971 6 331808

C. Golf Scaffolding Company
P.O. Box: 6901, Sharjah, UAE
Tel: +971 6 5422770
Fax: +971 6 5421571

D. Substitution under provisions of Section 01600

2.02 FORMWORK:

A. For unexposed surfaces and rough work, use exterior Type Douglas Fir, Grade B-B (concrete form) plywood,
conforming to NBS PS-1, minimum 19mm thick. Before reusing forms, withdraw nails and thoroughly clean
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

CONCRETE FORMWORK
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03100-5
B. For exposed surfaces not otherwise specified use special exterior Type Douglas Fir, Grade A-B plywood,
conforming to NBS PS-1, minimum 19mm thick OR density (60-60) overlay ply-form, Class 1 EXTDFPA, sanded
grade trade marked by the American Plywood Association having a hard semi-opaque resin-fibre overlay on both
sides, minimum 19mm thick and constructed so that finished concrete will be straight, smooth, dense, free from
honeycombs, bulges, or depressions. Keep joints between plywood sections to a minimum and make tight and
strongly backed so that adjoining edges remain flush and true. Unsightly joint marks will not be permitted. Cover
joints on exposed surfaces will be smooth-faced fibre reinforced tape as manufactured by Techtrade
International, 54 Old Christchurch Road, Bournemouth, Dorset, U.K. or other equal and approved of proprietary
brand to be approved by the Engineer.

C. Location of joints must be submitted to Engineer for approval.

D. Prefabricated formwork systems may be used for all classes of concrete provided the manufacturer's printed
instructions and recommendations are followed and the system has been approved by the Engineer. Joints
between sections of prefabricated forms shall be taped unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and
provided always, in the case of such recommendation, the forms are water and mortar-tight to the Engineer's
satisfaction.

2.03 FORMCOATING:

A. B. P. CM3 (British Petroleum) or B. P. CCM3 (V Petroleum) or Calform (Caltex) or from wax of a type which does
not import any stain to concrete nor interfere with the adhesion of any finish, sealant, or waterproofing material
applied to any concrete surface and which must be approved by the Engineer.

2.04 FORMTIES:

A. Surface retarding agents shall not be used when securing forms where surfaces will be exposed in the finish
work. In such cases use tie screws with removable plastic cones, removable bolts, special removable ties, tie
wires or Series 300 stainless steel snap ties.

B. For all other forms, either bolts or wires maybe used. Use ties of such type that when forms are removed, no
metal is closer than 40mm from the finished concrete surface.

2.05 FILLET AND CHAMBER MOULDING STRIPS:

A. PVC, or timber to the approvals of the Engineer.

2.06 TAPES:

A. Tapes for sealing joints formwork panels for smooth finished concrete shall be plastic faced adhesive type to the

2.07 SAMPLES:

A. The Contractor shall provide free of charge samples of all the materials he proposes to use for formwork together
with samples of each type of facing necessary for the special finishes required. Samples for ties, chambers,
tapes, and all other related materials to be used along with the formwork system shall also be supplied.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION:

A. Supports: Props and supports shall be, to the Engineer's opinion is sufficient strong to support the work.
Supports shall in all cases be in accordance with the formwork design approved by the Engineer.

B. Ties: Position of ties to be strictly as per approved shop drawings, especially for exposed concrete surfaces and
in all cases the approval of the Engineer must be obtained prior to construction.

CONCRETE FORMWORK
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03100-6

C. Release Agents:

1. Apply evenly to face to formwork, where required.

2. Avoid contact with reinforcement and previously cast concrete at construction joints.

3. Where concrete is to be permanently exposed, use one approved agent over the whole area.

4. The Contractor must allow in his Tender for testing the type of form releasing agent he proposes to use.

D. Cambers:

1. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, the soffit of beams exceeding 5m span shall be laid to the
following cambers.

Camber = ( span x span) / ( 7200 x depth)

2. Depth of beam at all points in the span shall be as indicated and shown on the drawings.

E. Anchor bolts, plates, sleeves, pipes, inserts, fixtures, electrical boxes, reinforcing steel, duct openings, conduits,
etc., shall be installed as per drawings. Ample time shall be allowed for the proper installation of such items.

3.02 STRIKING:

A. Forms for beams shall be designed to permit removal of at least one side without shock to the partially set
concrete and without disturbing the bottom portion of the forms or its supports.

B. Where finished surfaces have re-entrant angles, remove formwork as early as possible to avoid shrinkage cracks.

C. Where re-propping is required to implement early striking whilst minimizing sag or creep, the capacity and
spacing of such props shall be adequate for the purpose and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall be
carried out immediately after striking the original formwork.

D. The following shall be the minimum periods before striking formwork, unless otherwise directed by Engineer's
Representative, at normal temperatures:

1 Vertical formwork to columns, walls and large beams 2 days
2 Beam sides 2 days
3 Beam soffit formwork 15 days
4 Props to beam 21 days
5 Soffit formwork to slab 7 days
6 Props to slab 15 days

The periods above are to be considered after the day of casting.

E. Striking of formwork: Striking of formwork within the time limits listed above is subject to successful crushing
cube, compressive strength results etc.

3.03 FORMCLEANING

A. All forms shall be thoroughly cleaned before placement of concrete and suitable temporary openings provided to
permit removal of undesirable materials from the interior without disturbing the whole formwork. All surfaces in
contact with concrete shall be wetted or treated with an approved form releasing agent before placing of
reinforcement. All formwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of any old concrete, other deposit etc. before reuse.

CONCRETE FORMWORK
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03100-7
B. Ensure that during concreting, formwork and supports are inspected and approved by the Engineer and that any
portion which shows signs of sagging or displacement is straightened.

END OF SECTION

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03200-1
SECTION 03200


PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular conditions and Division 1
Specifications, apply to this section.

B. Before any order is placed by the Contractor, he shall notify the Engineer of the prime source of supply where
the reinforcement is drawn or rolled. The Contractor shall ensure that all steel deliver to the site shall come
from the source accepted by the Engineer. Merchants and stockholders will not be an acceptable source
unless it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the whole of the reinforcement applied to the
contract complies with this Specification.

C. All batches or reinforcement in which unacceptable material has been mixed with acceptable material shall be
rejected and shall be removed from the site forthwith.

D. Reinforcement shall be protected at all times from contamination and corrosion from the ground and
atmosphere during all storage, bending and handling operations.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork

B. Section 03300 - Cast-in Place Concrete

1.03 STANDARDS

A. American Concrete Institute:

1. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete.
2. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
3. ACI 318M Metric Building Code Requirements for Structural
Concrete.
4. ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A82 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Structural Reinforcement.

2. ASTM A184/A184M Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete
Reinforcement.

3. ASTM A497 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire
Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement.

4. ASTM A615/A615M Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.

5. ASTM A641/A641M Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.

6. ASTM A704/A704M Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete
Reinforcement.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03200-2

7. ASTM A706/A706M Standard Specification for Low Allow Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.

8. ASTM A767/A767M Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.

9. ASTM A775/A775M Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.

10. ASTM A884/A884M Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Fabric
for Reinforcement.

11. ASTM A934/A934M Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing
Bars.

12. ASTM A996/A996M Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.

13. ASTM A615/A615M Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-Coated
Reinforcing Steel Bars.

C. American Welding Society:

1. AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel.

D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute:

1. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

2. CRSI Placing Reinforcing Bars.


A. Supervisory staff shall at least the qualifications and experience to meet the requirements of this
Specification.

B. Welders: Only certified welders shall be employed for welding reinforcement.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Provide cut lengths of reinforcing as request by the Engineer for testing or evaluation by the
Testing Laboratory.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit detail fabrication and placement drawings for all reinforcing steel which are
correlated wit forming and concrete placement techniques and requirements.

1. Reinforcing shall be detailed based on construction joint locations which have been shown on
shop drawings reviewed by the Engineer.

2. The drawings shall be in such detail as to ensure that there will be a minimum, if any, of difficulties
in execution of the work in the field.

3. The drawings shall consist of sections, plans and details clearly showing locations, sizes and
spacing of all reinforcing steel, supporting bars and accessories. Include schedules and diagrams to
indicate bends, sizes and lengths of all reinforcing bars.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03200-3
4. A separate set of shop drawings, which shows the construction joint locations, shall show all floor
openings, wall openings and edges of concrete. Floor openings, wall openings and sleeves for all
mechanical, plumbing and electrical work shall be coordinated with the respective trades and shown
on these shop drawings in accordance with the criteria indicated on the Contract Drawings.

5. No work shall be fabricated until both sets of shop drawings (Reinforcing Steel and
Concrete Dimensions) have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer (with corrections and re-
submittals as required by the Contacts Documents). After approval by the Engineer, furnish all copies
needed for fabrication and erection and for use of other trades.

6. Be fully responsible for furnishing and installing all materials called for or required by the Contract
Documents even though these materials may have been omitted from the approved shop drawings.

7. Allow fourteen (14) days for the Engineer's review of shop drawings.

C. Certificates

1. Submit for each consignment from each source a certificate verifies compliance with this
Specification.

2. Submit Reinforcement Manufacturer's routine test records.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Suppliers

The United Steel Industrial Company (UNISTEEL) Kuwait.
UGS Saudi
Or equal approved.

2.01 BAR REINFORCEMENT

A. Bar reinforcement shall be high strength deformed bars complying with ASTM 615M having a characteristic
strength not less than 4200 Kg/cm (60,000 psi). Refer General Notes on Drawing # S-01.

B. Mesh reinforcement and wrapping fabric shall conform to ASTM 497.

C. Reinforcement shall be cut and/or bent in accordance with CRSI manuals.

D. Bends in reinforcement shall have a substantially constant curvature. Where the temperature of the steel is
below 50C, special precautions may be necessary such as reducing the speed of bending or, with the
Engineer's approval, increasing the radius of bending.

E. Where it is necessary to bend reinforcement projecting from concrete, care should be taken to ensure that
the radius of bend is not less than that specified in CRSI manuals.

F. No welding of reinforcement should be carried out without the Engineer's approval.

G. Bundle and tag reinforcement with suitable identification to facilitate sorting, transporting, storing and
placing at the Site.

H. All reinforcement shall be cut and bent to shape as per the approved bar bending schedule. All bars shall
be tagged showing the correspondence bar number as shown on the relevant Bar Bending Schedule.

2.02 BAR SUPPORTS:

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03200-4

A. Spacer blocks with cast in tie wire maybe used with written agreement of the Engineer for support of the
bottom layer of reinforcing in the raft foundation slab only. The blocks shall be of minimum size and made from
cement sand small aggregate mix to match surrounding concrete strength appearance and durability.

B. Other spacers shall be of such materials and designs as will be durable, not lead to corrosion of the
reinforcement and not cause spoiling of the concrete cover. The type spacers acceptable shall be one of the
following:

a. High density plastic

b. Hot-dipped galvanized bar supports with plastic feet.

2.03 TIE WIRE:

A. Tire wire shall be annealed iron wire not less than No. 16 gauge or approved fasteners, unless shown
otherwise on the drawings.

2.04 TESTING:

A. Tests will be required by the Engineer on steel reinforcement and they shall be carried out in strict
accordance with the provisions of the above British Standards.

B. Tensile tests providing information on elastic limit, ultimate strength, and stress- strain curve will be
required from each delivery of reinforcement and measurements will also be required of cross-sectional area and
deformation/bond characteristics of deformed bars.

C. The Contractor is to allow for four tensile and four bond tests, at his own cost, for each size of bar to
be used in the concrete construction.

D. One set of test results for each bar size shall be submitted to the Engineer three (3) weeks before concrete
work commences on Site. Remaining tests will be carried out at the discretion of the Engineer.

E. Further tests may be called for when the source of supply of reinforcement changes in which case the cost
of such extra testing will be borne by the Contractor. When any test results do not conform to the above
standard the reinforcement steel shall be removed from the Site and the cost of subsequent testing and any remedial
work shall be borne by the Contractor.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall supply and incorporate in the work all such steel reinforcement including the wire,
support and spacer blocks and the like whether shown or not on the drawings which are necessary to complete the
work, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

B. The Contractor shall check his bending schedules against the latest drawings and any discrepancy must be
immediately referred to the Engineer. The Contractor is responsible for ordering all materials required to complete the
job according to normal good practice and to the approval of the Engineer.

C. All reinforcement will be properly stored under cover to avoid contact with the ground, moisture, dust and
salts and to avoid distortion once bent to shape. Improper storage will be sufficient cause for rejection of
reinforcement.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03200-5
D. All steel, before being placed in position, shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose rust, scale and any
other coating that will destroy or reduce bond. If reinforcement has been badly rusted or pitted it will be rejected.
Mechanical brushes shall be used in cleaning the steel bar.

E. Where there is delay in depositing concrete after the placement of the reinforcement the Engineer may
require the Contractor to restore the reinforcement to a satisfactory condition and may require protection of same
from further corrosion.

F. Ends of bars which are left projecting for any period exceeding 4weeks shall be painted with a heavy coat of
neat cement grout which shall be removed prior to continuation of concreting.

G. Reinforcement that has in any way been previously used shall not be used in the work.

3.02 CUTTING AND BENDING

A. No welding (including spot welding) will be permitted.

B. Cut and bend reinforcement to approved shop drawings and details, unless otherwise instructed.

C. Re-bending if specially allowed by the Engineer in writing, bars shall be bent at the ambient temperature; in
mild steel the internal radius of bend shall not be less than 4 x bar diameter and, in hot-rolled and cold-worked high
yield steel, not less than 6 x bar diameter. Inspect each re-bent bar for signs of fracture.

D. Reinforcement projecting from concrete shall not be bent without prior written approval from the Engineer.

E. All reinforcing bars must be bent cold unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

F. The Engineer's approval is to be obtained in writing before cutting or heating any reinforcement detailed on
the drawings.

3.03 SPLICES

A. The splice lengths of all reinforcing bars which have to be spliced shall, unless otherwise shown on the
drawings, be in conformity with the following:

a. Plan round bars (60x Bar diameters) 600mm min.

b. Deformed bars (60 x Bar diameters) 600mm min,

c. Epoxy coated bars (65 x Bar diameters) 650mm min,

d. Fabric 200mm min, but overlap measured between outermost
wires of each sheet not less than pitch of secondary
reinforcement wires.

e. Spliced bars are to be securely tied together.

B. Splices to be staggered to the approval of the Engineer, and the fabric
is to be securely tied layer to layer.

C. Bars shall have the minimum anchorage and lap lengths in accordance
with ACI 318 requirements unless specifically required by Contract
Document.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03200-6
3.04 ERECTION:

A. Give the Engineer at least 24 hours notice before commencing fixing reinforcement to allow inspection
of formwork.

B. Ensure that spaces to receive reinforcement are clean and free debris.

C. All reinforcement shall be placed accurately in position and securely fastened in place to prevent
displacement during the placing of the concrete. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that protective cover to
reinforcement specified on the drawings is obtained by the use of approved plastic tipped steel chairs for lower
reinforcement and cranked bars for upper reinforcement. All bars shall be securely tied together at every
alternate intersection, or as approved by the Engineer.

D. Secured reinforcement against displacement outside the specified limits to Comply with ACI Standard 301
unless specified otherwise.

1. The actual concrete cover shall be not less than the required nominal cover minus 5mm.

2. Where reinforcement is located in relation to only one face of a member (e.g. a straight bar in a
slab) the actual concrete cover shall not be more than the required nominal cover plus:

i) 5mm on bars up to and including 12mm size.

ii.) 10mm on bars over 12mm up to and including 25mm
size.

iii.) 15mm on bars over 25mm size.

E. Spacer chairs or other support detailed on Drawings, together with such other support as may be necessary
shall be used to maintain the reinforcement in its correct position. In a member where the nominal cover is dimension
as the nominal cover. Spacers shall be of such materials and designs as will be durable, not lead to corrosion of the
reinforcement and not cause spoiling of the concrete cover.

Non-structural connections for the positioning of the reinforcement shall be made with steel wire, tying
devices or by welding. Care should be taken to ensured that the projecting ends of ties or clips do not encroach into
the concrete cover.

The position of reinforcement shall be checked before and during concreting, particular attention being paid
to the position of the top reinforcement in cantilever sections.

F. Surface Condition of Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall not be surrounded by concrete unless it is free
from mud, oil, paint, retarders, loose rusts, loose mill scale, Grease or any other substance which may adversely
affect the steel or concrete chemically or reduce the bond.

G. Laps and Joints of Reinforcement: Laps and joints shall only be made by methods specified and at the
position shown on the Drawings or as agreed by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

CAST-INPLACE CONCRETE
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-1
SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide cast-in-place concrete in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.02 STANDARDS

A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and
recommendations of the following. In addition to other Standards and Codes refered to through this section (latest
editions):

ACI 211.1 Practice for selecting proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting.
ACI 318 Building Code Requirement for Reinforced Concrete and Commenting.
ASHTO M148 Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
AASHTO M182 Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf.
ASTM A105 Welded wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregate
ASTM A615 Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bards for Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM A706M-01 Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM A 775 Epoxy Coated Reinforced Steel Bars.
ASTM C40 Test Method for Organic impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete
ASTM C88 Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium
Sulfate.
ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete.
ASTM C114-00 Standard Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement
ASTM C117 Test Method for Material Finer Than 75 um (No.200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by
Washing.
ASTM C125 Definitions of Terms Relating to Concrete and Concrete Aggregates.
ASTM C131 Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of small-size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion
and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
ASTMC138 Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric)of Concrete.
ASTM C142 Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates.
ASTM C143 Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
ASTM C150 Portland Cement.
ASTM C156 Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials.
ASTM C171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
ASTM C227 Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement Aggregate Combinations.
ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
ASTM C289 Test Method for Potential Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method).
ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
ASTM C332 Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete.
ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
ASTM C495 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Lightweight Insulating Concrete.
ASTM C641 Test Method for Staining Materials in Lightweight Concrete Aggregates.
ASTM C979 Specification for Pigments for Intergrally Coloured Concrete.
ASTM E96 Test Methods for Water Vapour Transmission of Materials.
ASTM E154 Methods of Testing Materials for Use as Vapour Barrier Under Concrete Slabs and as
Ground Cover in Crawl Spaces.
BS 4449 Hot rolled Steel bars for the reinforcement of Concrete

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-2
BS 4466 Bending Dimensions and scheduling of Bars for the Reinforcemetn of Concrete
BS 4483 Steel Fabric for the Reinforcement of concrete
BS 8110 The Structural use of Concrete Part 1 Design and construction
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
K.S.S. 36 Ordinary and Quick-solidifying Portland Cement.
K.S.S. 39 Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement
K.S.S100 Testing Techniques for Portland Cement Properties.
FHWA-RD-77-85 Standard Method of Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in Concrete.
CIRA Data Sheet Concrete Pressive on Formwork )Concrete Society Technical Report No.13)

Copies of all the above codes shall be submitted to the Engineer within 30 days from the Date of Enterprise.

B. This Specification section shall govern all cast-in-place concrete work for the complete project except where more
stringent or specialized requirements are indicated. All work shall be performed to secure for the entire project
homogeneous concrete having the required strength, surface finish, materials, durability and weathering resistance,
without planes of weakness or other structural defects, and free of honeycombs, air pockets, voids, projections, offsets
of plane and other defacements of concrete. The Contractor will be fully responsible for any defects or damage in the
building arising from faulty materials or workmanship and the costs of remedial measures in order to ensure that the
completed work complies with the Contract Documents.

C. Base construction methodology on the construction indicated in the Contract Documents. No alterations or
substitutions of the structural systems shown on the Drawings will be permitted unless otherwise specified.

D. Supervise and coordinate all phases of the concrete construction process and be responsible for the complete
manufacturing process for all concrete work. All methods of manufacture and practices of handling raw materials and
manufactured concrete shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to execution of the concrete work.

E. Only materials of known quality shall be incorporated in the work. All materials shall be properly selected, reviewed
with the Engineer before use, and maintained during shipment, storage and use. Construction systems and
techniques shall be properly selected, reviewed with the Engineer before use, and maintained throughout the
complete concrete construction phase. Adequate spare equipment, parts, additional components and repair facilities
shall be available for all tools and equipment.

F. Regardless of reviews and approvals by the Engineer, be responsible for all materials, methods and the work, and if
any work does not satisfy the Contract Documents, implement removal, replacement or remedial work and revise
procedures or materials to prevent recurrence of unacceptable work at no additional cost to the Employer.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit detail fabrication and placement drawings for all formwork reinforcing steel which are
correlated with forming and concrete placement techniques and requirements.

1. Reinforcing shall be detailed based on construction joint locations which shall have been shown on shop
drawings reviewed and approved by the Engineer.

2. The drawings shall be in such detail as to assure that difficulties in execution of the work in the field are
minimized.

3. The drawings shall consist of sections, plans and details clearly showing locations, sizes and spacing of all
reinforcing steel, supporting bars and accessories. Include on the shop drawings, schedules and diagrams
to indicate bends, sizes and lengths of all reinforcing steel bars.

4. A separate set of shop drawings, which shows the construction joint locations, shall show all floor openings,
wall openings and edges of concrete. Floor, wall openings and sleeves for all mechanical, plumbing and
electrical work shall be coordinated with the respective trades and shown on these shop drawings in

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-3
accordance with the criteria indicated on the Contract Drawings and contained in the various applicable
sections of the Specifications.

5. No work shall be fabricated until all shop drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer (with
corrections and re-submittals as required by the Contract Documents). After review and approval by the
Engineer, furnish all copies needed for fabrication and erection, and for use of other trades.

6. Be fully responsible for furnishings and installing all materials called for or required by the contract
Documents even though these materials may have been omitted from the reviewed shop drawings.

7. Submit shop drawings for all formwork showing locations of joints, tie bolts, cones, dummy cones, openings,
chamfers, inserts, fittings and accessories for the approval of the Engineer before fabrication of formwork.

8. Submit design calculations in accordance with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 4, Para. 4.2, wherever required
for the supporting system of the formwork along with the shop drawings for the supporting system, for

B. Samples

1. Provide cut lengths of reinforcing as requested by the Engineer for testing or evaluation by the Government
Research Station Laboratory, or any other Laboratory as required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not
fabricate any reinforcing bars prior to the approval of the Engineer.

2. Provide samples of all materials and concrete accessories of every type proposed for use including
component parts of prefabricated formwork systems and manufacturers technical literature relating thereto.
Prepare mock-ups and carry out such tests on the proposed prefabricated formwork systems as may be
required by the Engineer in order that he may be satisfied as to the systems suitability.

3. Furnish reinforcement and accessories for sample panels and mocked-ups portions of the structure as
required using all materials and techniques as they will be used in actual construction.

C. Mill Tests: Furnish the Engineer with certified mill test reports for cement, steel reinforcement, welded wire
fabric and pre-stressing strands.

D. Certifications for Admixtures: As specified under admixtures.

E. Test Reports: Submit preliminary test results for the Engineers approval at least three weeks prior to the beginning of
the work. In addition to the test reports specified under Quality Control, submit the following directly to the Engineer:

1. Preliminary Design Mix Reports (BS 8110 Section 6)
2. Aggregate Soundness Test Reports (ASTM C88)
3. Aggregate Staining Test Reports (ASTM C641)
4. Air Entrainment Test Reports (ASTM C260)


A. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Hot Weather Concreting: Refer to Clause 1.02 STANDARDS. (ACI 305).

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-4
1.06 Aproved Supplaires

A. KBRC Kuwait Britesh ready mix
B. National Industries.
C. Bubiyan Ready Mix.


A. Preliminary Tests (Trial Tests)

1. Target Mean Strength: The concrete mix shall have at least the required minimum cement content and
mean strength greater than the required characteristic strength by at least the current margin. The current
margin shall be taken as the lesser of:

a. 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 100 separate batches of concrete of
nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period not exceeding 12
months by the same plant under similar supervision, but not less than one sixth (1/6) of the
characteristic strength for concrete of grade 140 or not less than 37.50 kg/cm2 for concrete of
grade 200 or above.

b. 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 40 separate batches of concrete of
nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period exceeding 5 days but
not exceeding 6 months by the same plant under similar supervision, but not less than one third
(1/3) of the characteristic strength for concrete of grade 140 or not less than 75 kg/cm2 for
concrete of grade 200 or above.

If enough data is not available to satisfy the requirements of either (a) or (b) above mentioned, the
margin shall be taken as two-thirds (2/3) of the characteristic strength for concrete of grade 140 or
100 kg/cm2 for concrete of grade 200 or above. When required characteristic strength
approaches maximum possible strength of concrete a smaller margin but not less than 75 kg/cm2
shall be permitted. Evidence shall be submitted to the Engineer for each grade of concrete
showing that at the intended workability, the proposed mixed proportions and manufacturing
method will produce concrete of required quality. Declare any change in source of material and
any change in cement content, nature and source of each material, full details of tests on trail
mixes, proposed quantities of each ingredient per cubic metre of fully compacted concrete.

2. To establish the suitability of any material used in the concrete work, unless specified otherwise, make
preliminary tests and prepare design mixes, in accordance with ACI-301, Chapter 3, paragraph 3.8, Method
1 or Method 2, in a design laboratory acceptable to the Engineer.

3. In addition to the tests required to establish the suitability of materials, make one test for each design mix to
verify that the total chloride (CI) iron content and the total Sulphate (SO3) content of each mix is within the
specified limits. Perform Chloride tests in accordance with Standards Method of Sampling and Testing for
Total Chloride Iron in concrete as contained in Report no. FHWA-RD-77-85 published by U.S. Department
of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration. Perform Sulfate (SO3) tests in accordance with ASTM
C114.

4. Trial Mixes

a. Where trial mixes are requested by the Engineer, three separate batches of concrete shall be
made using materials likely to be typical of the proposed supply and preferably under full scale
production conditions. If circumstances make this inconvenient the batches may be mixed in the
laboratory only if approved by the Engineer.

b. Sampling and testing shall be strictly in accordance with B.S.1881. The workability of each batch
of concrete shall be determined and three (3) cubes made from each batch of concrete for test at
28 days. A further three (3) cubes from each batch shall be made for test at earlier age. The trail

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-5
mix proportions shall be approved by the Engineer if the average strength of nine (9) cubes tested
at 28 days exceeds the specified characteristic strength by the appropriate margin or if nine(9)
cubes tested at an earlier age indicate that it is likely to be exceeded by this amount. The
appropriate margin is the margin as given in Clause 1.06.A.1 herein for concrete of nominally
similar proportions and of similar materials to the trial mix. For this purpose if the trial mix does not
differ by more than 30 kg/m3 of cement from reference mix of similar workability, then the
proportions may be regarded as nominally similar and the current margin for the reference mix
can be taken as the appropriate margin for the trial mix. If trail mixes are required to demonstrate
that the maximum free water/cement ratio is not exceeded, two batches shall be made in a
laboratory with cement and saturated sand surface dry aggregate known from past records of the
suppliers of the materials to be typical. The proposed mix proportions shall be accepted only if
both batches have the correct cement content and free water/cement ratio below the maximum
specified value at the proposed degree of workability.

5. Have a representative present at the laboratory when the preliminary tests are made. Whenever a change
of brand or source for any of the concrete ingredients occurs, additional Preliminary tests will be required
and the cost of these tests shall be borne by the Contractor.

B. Plant and Field Tests and Inspection

1. Concrete work will be subject to detailed inspection and tests. Notify the Engineer one
day in advance of concrete work. Inspection, field tests and sampling of concrete taken
from the job will be carried out under the direction of the Engineer.

2. Concrete shall be produced in accordance with BS 5328. BS 5328 requires that tests are made on the
constituent materials in accordance with the relevant British Standard, (Refer to part 2 of this Section), and
that control tests are made on concrete to ensure compliance with the specified requirements.

3. When tested, the concrete shall meet the appropriate requirements specified in BS 5328, i.e.:

a. Characteristic compressive strength;
b. Specified mix proportions;
c. Minimum or Maximum cement content;
d. Maximum free-water/cement ratio;
e. Workability;
f. Air content of concrete;
g. Temperature of fresh concrete; h.
Density of fully compacted concrete.

4. Rate of sampling and testing shall be as specified and/or as directed by the Engineer. The cost of sampling
and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

5. Facilitate sampling procedure and provide labour and material as required. Notify the Engineer when
reinforcing steel is in place in order to facilitate any inspection he deems necessary. Submit checking
sheets placing concrete. Do not place concrete until these inspections have been completed and all
deficiencies reported by the Engineer have been corrected to the Engineers satisfaction.

6. Supply all moulds required for tests as described below, using moulds of the same type and manufacture for
making all test specimens. If field tests show excessive slumps or other violations of the Contract
Documents, the entire batch of concrete from which the sample in question was taken will be rejected and
shall be removed from the site at the Contractors expense. The Engineer will inspect all concrete
operations in the plant and in the field.

7. If ready mix concrete is used, each load of concrete arriving at the job shall be accompanied by the delivery
ticket which shall be subject to checking by the Engineer at the plant and which shall contain the following
information:

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-6
a. The strength of the mix of concrete being delivered.

b. The exact time the cement and aggregate were discharged into the delivery truck. If upon
reaching the job the concrete cannot be placed within the time limits stated, or if

the type of concrete delivered is incorrect, the Engineer will reject the load and it shall be removed
from the Site at the Contractors expense.

c. List of admixtures and concentration percentage.

8. Under the supervision and direction of the Engineer the Contractor will take specimens of each class of
concrete from different locations on the job as follows:

a. At least twelve (12) specimens for each 40 cubic metres or fraction thereof of each class of
concrete and in any case not less than twelve (12) specimens for any one days operations.

b. Test specimens will be taken at pouring locations to give a fair average of the concrete in the part
of the contraction indicated.

c. Samples will be obtained in accordance with B.S.1881.

d. At least two slump tests: ASTM C143

e. Testing shall conform to B.S. 1881 in making, curing and subsequently handling test specimens,
except as modified herein. Cubes shall be engraved with the date of placing and the serial
number of the cubes (1 to 12) plus a universal serial number representing the number of the pour.

f. The cubes shall be placed in laboratory storage on site under moist curing conditions at
approximately 21C within 24 hours after molding and maintained therein until ready for testing at
the site Laboratory. Three cube specimens will be tested at seven days, and if the seven day
strength is deficient, the Contractor will be notified. Three cubes will then be tested at 14 days,
three cubes at 28 days, and the remaining 3 cubes will be tested as directed by the Engineer,
having been cured with curing compound for 28 days.

g. Two unit weight and yield tests: ASTM C138

9. Under the supervision and direction of the Engineer the Contractor will take specimens of each class of
concrete, and an independent Testing Agency, approved by the Engineer, will perform one test for each 100
cubic metres to verify that the total chloride ion content and the total sulfate content are each within the
specified limits. As soon as the concrete is no longer plastic, but in no event more than 24 hours after
placement, the Testing Agency will perform tests in accordance with the procedures herein specified under
paragraph 1.06.A.3.

10. Keep records of all specimens taken and tests made using a proforma approved by the Engineer. Such
records shall be signed by the Contractor and the Engineer.

C. Change of Current Margin:

When the results of a sufficiently large number of tests show that the previously established margin is significantly too
large or too small, a change in the current margin used for judging compliance with the specified characteristic
strength may be appropriate. Recalculation of the margin shall be carried out as

before, but the adoption of recalculated value will not generally be justified if the two values differ by less than 18%
when based on tests on 40 separate batches or less than 11% when based on tests on 100 separate batches, or less
than 5% when based on tests on 500 separate batches. This recalculated margin if adopted becomes the current
margin for the judgement of compliance with the specified characteristic strength of concrete.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-7
D. Testing Plan

1. Each set of 3 cubes shall be made from a single sample taken from a randomly selected
batch of concrete. The sample shall be taken from the point of discharge from the
delivery vehicle. The characteristic strength of concrete shall comply with the following
requirements:

a. The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive sets of test cubes exceeds
the specified characteristic strength by not less than 0.3 times the current margin.

b. Each individual test result is greater than 85% of the specified strength.

The current margin shall be taken as given in Paragraph 1.06.A.1. If only one cube result fails to
meet the second requirement mentioned above, that result may be considered to represent only
the particular batch of concrete from which that cube was taken, provided the average strength of
the group satisfied the first requirement. If more than more cube fails to meet the second
requirement or if the average strength of any group of four consecutive test cubes fail to meet the
second requirement, then all the concrete in all the batches represented by all such cubes shall be
deemed not to comply with the strength requirements.

2. Enforcement: When the average strength of four consecutive test cubes fail to meet the first requirement
mentioned in the testing plan, the mix proportions of subsequent batches of concrete shall be modified to
increase the strength. The Engineer shall decide as to what action may be taken for test cubes that fail to
meet the requirements mentioned. In estimating the quality of the sub-standard concrete and in determining
the action to be taken the following shall be considered.

a. The validity of test results and confirmation that specimen sampling and testing have been carried
out in accordance with B.S. 1881. Concrete shall be judged by the strength of specified
characteristic strength, together with the cement content, in comparison with the specified minimum
cement content.

b. The mix proportions actually used in concrete under investigation.

c. The actual section of the structure represented by the test cubes.

d. The possible influence of any reduction in concrete quality in the strength and durability of this
section of structure.

The Engineer may require tests to be carried on the hardened concrete in structure. Where tests
show that concrete is below specified strength remove all, or a part of, the concrete in all of the
batches deemed not to comply with the strength requirements as directed by the Engineer. Full
cost of removal of low strength concrete and its replacement with concrete of proper specified
strength shall be borne by the Contractor.

3. Strength: Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by tests made on cubes at an
age of 28 days. Not more than 5% of the cube test results shall be allowed to fall below the characteristic
strength of concrete.

E. Lightweight Insulating Concrete:

Refer to Section 0352 Light Weight Concrete

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-8

A. Manufacturers: The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of establishing
minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, will be considered acceptable.
The decision of acceptability will rest with the Engineer.

B. Cement

1. Alkali Content For all Types of Cement: Maximum 0.6% equivalent of Sodium Oxide (Na2O) (ASTM C227).

2. Ordinary Cement: B.S. 12 or ASTM C150, Type I or K.S.S.36, non-staining.

3. Sulphate resisting Portland Cement: B.S.4027 or ASTM C150, Type V.

4. Sulphate resisting cement shall be used as directed by the Engineer in all work below the ground floor level
which is in contact with soil or waterproofing or protection board or vapour barrier.

5. Cement shall originate from sources and manufactures acceptable to the Engineer and shall be delivered in
sealed bags. Only one brand of cement shall be used for each type of cement. When received at the batch
plant, all bags shall be intact and cement shall be completely dry. Cement exposed to moisture or wetting of
any kind during shipment or storage shall not be used on the job.

6. Stale cement or cement with cakes or lumps shall not be used.

7. All cement stored at site shall be kept thoroughly dry and shall be stored in water tight sheds on a floor
raised at least 200mm above ground. Cement stacks shall have labels indicating dates of manufacture and
arrival at the storage site. A maximum of fifteen bags shall be stacked if the storage period is not more than
weeks and eight bags if the storage period is over four weeks but

not more than three months. Any cement stored for more than three months shall not be used without the
explicit written permission of the Engineer.

8. When tests performed on field samples, subsequent to the original approval tests, show that the cement
does not comply with the Specifications, the entire consignment from which the sample was taken shall be
rejected. Rejected cement shall not be permitted in storage areas or on the site and shall be removed within
twenty four hours.

9. Cement shall be protected from direct exposure to sun. Cement temperature shall not exceed 50C.

10. All Type V Cement shall have tricalcium aluminate content not exceeding five percent (5%).

C. Aggregate

1. In general, aggregate shall comply with B.S. 882, Concrete Aggregates from Natural Sources, or ASTM
C33, and shall be graded in accordance with these requirements, irrespective of whether concrete is mixed
on site or elsewhere. The Contractor shall nominate the source of supply and shall provide grading curves of
aggregates for approval.

2. Aggregate shall consist of fine sand or stone aggregates and crushed stone, crushed rock or gravel.
Separate stockpiles of fine aggregate and each size of coarse aggregate gradation shall be used. Each
aggregate type shall be from a single consistent source.

3. Storage piles of aggregates shall be placed on concrete hardstand which has good drainage. Stockpiles
shall have walls separating adjacent materials and shall be covered to preclude segregation or intrusion of
foreign materials and to preserve the gradation. Sufficient storage shall be maintained to assure placement
of concrete at the necessary rate. Use properly constructed sheds to protect aggregates from direct sun
radiation and from blowing sands.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-9
4. Aggregates shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and dust and when directed by the
Engineer, shall be washed and sieved to remove deleterious substances.

5. Aggregates shall not contain harmful materials, such as salts, iron pyrites, coal, mica, shale or similar
particles which may reduce the strength or durability of the concrete. Aggregates shall not contain nay
material that may be chemically active with reinforcement or that may react to cause efflorescence or that
may be alkali reactive.

6. Alkali reactive limestone aggregates such as Dolomitic shall not be used.

7. The grading of each size of aggregate from each pit, quarry or other source of supply shall be determined at
least once weekly. The results of such tests shall be reported to the Engineer and shall be used to check
whether the gradings are similar to those of the samples used in the establishment of bath weight used.

8. Suppliers certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval of the source of aggregate.

9. Aggregate for exposed unpainted concrete shall be specially selected for colour as approved by the
Engineer and shall come from a single source.

10. All aggregates shall be screened and washed and shall have less than the following maximum salt contents
as acid soluble chlorides and sulphates. The table also shows the maximum salt content allowed in the
mixed concrete. Aggregates for coloured concrete must be approved by the Engineer prior to use.

Chloride Sulphate
Percent of weight of
Fine aggregate 0.06 0.4

Percent of weight of
Course aggregate 0.03 0.4

Total percent in concrete as
Percent by weight of cement 0.1 (OPC)
0.2 (SRPC) 0.4

a. Fineness modulus shall not vary more than 0.20 from value used in establishing mix proportions.
If greater deviation, the use of such aggregates shall be discontinued until suitable adjustments in
mix proportions can be made and reviewed.
b. Magnesium Sulfate Soundness: Max. 5% loss, ASTM C88, 5
cycles.

c. Potential Reactivity: Not reactive ASTM C289

d. Content of Clay Lumps: Max. 1% by weight ASTM C142.

e. Gradation requirements as follows:

Size of Sieve opening Percentage by weight
(Square openings) Passing ASTM C33, C117

3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 100
No.4 (4.75 mm) 95-100
No.8 (2.36 mm) 80-100
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50 -85
No. 30 (0.60 mm) 25-60
No.50 (0.30 mm) 15-30
No.100 (0.15 mm) 3-10

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-10
No.200 (0.075 mm) 0.5

Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permitted upon submission of
relevant data and review by the Engineer.

f. Fine aggregates shall be free of organic materials (ASTM C40) and other foreign matter.

12. Coarse aggregates for concrete shall consist of crushed gravel or crushed stone. The crushing shall be
regulated so that the material retained on the No.8 (2.36 mm) sieve, at least 90 percent by weight shall
consist of pieces with at least one fractured face and at least 75 percent by weight shall consist of material
with at least two fractured faces. In addition, the coarse aggregates shall meet the following requirements:

a. Magnesium sulfate soundness: Max. 5% loss. ASTM C88, 5 cycles.

b. Potential Reactivity: Not Reactive ASTM C289

c. Abrasion: Max. 10% loss ASTM C131, 100 revolutions.

d. Flat and Elongated Particles: 3:1max. 30% ASTM C125 5:1 max. 10%

e. Content of Clay Lumps: Max. 0.5% by weight ASTM C142

f. Shale: Max.2% by weight.

g. Bulk saturated surface Dry Specific Gravity: Min. 2.58 ASTM C125.

h. Gradation requirements as follows:

Size of Sieve Opening Percentage by weight
(Square Opening) Passing ASTM C33

1-1/2 inch 1 inch inch
(37.5mm) (25.4mm) (19.0mm)
Size Size Size
2 inch (50.0 mm) 100 - -
1-1/2 inch (37.5mm) 95-100 100 100
1 inch (25.4 mm) 60-85 95-100 -
inch (19.0 mm) 35-70 60-85 95-100
inch (12.7 mm) 20-50 25-60 60-75
3/8 inch(9.5 mm) 10-30 15-45 20-55
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 0-5 0-10 0-10
No.8 (2.36 mm) - 0-5 0-6

Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permitted upon submission of
relevant data and review by the Engineer.

i. The maximum size of aggregates shall be 1 inch (25.4mm) for columns, walls and basement
slabs, and inch (19.0 mm) for slabs and beams. In addition, the maximum aggregate size shall
not exceed 20 percent of the narrowest member that is being concreted, nor shall it exceed 75
percent of the clear spacing between adjacent steel reinforcement or between reinforcement and
adjacent formwork.

13. Lightweight Aggregates for insulating concrete shall comply with ASTM C332.

D. Water:

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-11
1. Water for washing aggregates and for mixing of concrete shall be clean, fresh and free of harmful matter
such as oil, salts, acids, alkali, sewage, deleterious minerals or organic matter. Water shall be filtered to
remove any colour or residues present due to contamination from water piping or transportation or storage
methods.

2. Water shall comply with the requirements of BS 5328

3. Water shall be tested in accordance with BS 3148

E. Admixtures:

1. Suitable admixtures of the following approved types may be incorporated in the concrete only with the prior
written approval of the Engineer.

a. Water reducing set retarders.
b. Set retarders
c. Water reducing agents.
d. Air entraining admixtures for lightweight concrete.

2. The Engineer shall be advised in advance of the following data:

a. The typical dosage and detrimental effects of under-dosage and over-dosage.

b. Chemical name(s) of the main active ingredient(s) in the admixtures.

c. Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used at manufacturers
recommended dosage.

d. Admixtures containing chlorides in excess of 0.03% by mass of the cement, nitrates, calcium
chloride, sulphides and sulphates shall not be used.

e. Admixtures submitted for Engineers approval shall be certified in writing by the manufacturer to be
in compliance with B.S.5075 or ASTM C494.

f. Air-entraining admixtures for lightweight concrete shall comply with ASTM C260 or B.S. 5075 :
PART (2).

g. The type of admixtures selected in accordance with the above mentioned standards must be to
the approval of the Engineer. All admixtures must be mutually compatible.

h. Admixtures used in the work shall be obtained from reliable manufactures whose products have
previously been used successfully in Kuwait or on other international projects in countries having
similar climate to Kuwait.

i. Admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions and
recommendations and shall be certified by the manufactures to be suitable for use during hot
weather extremes. Admixtures shall be stored safe from adverse temperatures in accordance with
manufacturers printed instructions or recommendations.

j. The suitability and effectiveness of any admixture approved by the Engineer, shall be verified by
trial mixes with the cements, aggregates and other materials to be used in the works before final
approval is given.

k. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his Tender for testing
the type of admixture he proposes to use.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-12
l. Admixtures where approved may be added only by using the manufacturers recommended
dispensers no adding of admixtures by hand is allowed.

m. The entire amount of materials used for concrete shall have controlled sources of individual
components such that the total mix meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. Unless
specified otherwise, the total Chloride (C1) ion content in the entire mix shall not exceed 0.20
percent of the weight of cement when SRPC is used and 0.1 percent when OPC is used. The
total water-soluble Sulfate (SO3) content in the entire mix shall not exceed 4 percent SO3 of the
weight of cement in the mix. The total Calcium chloride (ca C12) content in the total mix shall not
exceed 0.01 percent of the weight of cement.

n. The total alkali content of the concrete mix of Na2O equivalent shall not exceed 3 kg/m3. All
sources of alkali shall be taken into account for calculating the total alkali content. In particular the
contribution of Sodium Chloride whether from aggregate or from mixing water must be included.

F. Reinforcement:

1. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed bars complying with BS 4449 type 2 deformation having a
characteristic strength (fy) not less than 4100 kg/cm2 (410 N/mm2) or complying with ASTM A615 grade 60
steel. Dowels projecting from typical flow beams to be re-bent into concrete topping shall be grade 40
(ASTM) grade 50 (BS) hot rolled mild steel having a characteristic strength (fy) not less than 2500 kg/cm2.

2. Mesh reinforcement and wrapping fabric shall conform to BS 4483 or to ASTM A185.

3. Reinforcement shall be cut and/or bent in accordance with BS 4466.

4. Bends in reinforcement shall have a substantially constant curvature. Where the temperature of the steel is
below 5C, special precautions may be necessary such as reducing the speed of bending or, with the
Engineers approval, increasing the radius of bending.

5. Where it is necessary to bend reinforcement projecting from concrete, care should be taken to ensure that
the radius of bend is not less than that specified in BS 4466.

6. Where it is necessary to reshape mild steel bars previously bent, this should only be done with the
Engineers approval and each bar should be inspected for signs of fracture.

7. No welding of reinforcement shall be carried out without the Engineers approval. Welding shall be in
compliance with ACI 318 or BS 8110.

8. Bundle and tag reinforcement with suitable identification to facilitate sorting, transporting, storing and placing
at the site.

9. All reinforcement bars shall be cut and bent to shape as per the approved bar bending
schedule. All bars shall be tagged showing the corresponding bar number as shown on
the relevant Bar Bending Schedule.

G. Bar Support:

1. Spacer blocks with cast in tie wire may be used with written agreement of the Engineer for support of the
bottom layer of reinforcing in the raft foundation slab only. The blocks shall be of minimum size and made
from cement sand small aggregate mix to match surrounding concrete strength, appearance durability.

2. Other support devices and spacers shall be of such materials and of adequate strength and approved
design as to be durable and so as to prevent displacement and corrosion of reinforcing steel and prevent
discoloration and spalling of concrete cover. The type of spacers acceptable shall be one of the following:

a. High density plastic.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-13
b. Hot-dipped galvanized bar supports with plastic feet.
c. Stainless Steel.

3. Individual and continuous slab bolsters and chairs shall be of a type to suit the various conditions
encountered and must be capable of supporting a 140 kg (1.37 KN) concentrated load without measurable
permanent deformation of the reinforcement or indentation of the supporting surface.

H. Testing of Reinforcement Steel

1. Tests will be required by the Engineer on steel reinforcement and they shall be carried out in strict
accordance with the provisions of the above British Standards. (BS 4449, 4757 and 4483).

2. Tensile tests providing information on elastic limit, ultimate strength, and stress-strain curve will be required
from each delivery of reinforcement and measurements will also be required of cross-sectional area and
deformation/bond characteristics of deformed bars.

3. The Contractor is to allow for four tensile and four bond tests, at his own cost, for each size of bar to be used
in the Concrete construction.
4. One set of test results for each bar size shall be submitted to the Engineer three (3) weeks before concrete
work commences on Site. Remaining tests will be carried out at the discretion of the Engineer.

5. Further tests may be called for when the source of supply of reinforcement changes in which case the cost
of such extra testing will be borne by the Contractor. When any test results do not conform to the above
standard the reinforcement steel shall be removed from the site and the cost of subsequent testing and any
remedial work shall be borne by the Contractor.

I. Vapour Barrier: Polyethylene sheeting minimum 0.15 mm thick of approved manufacture tested in accordance with
ASTM E96 and E154.

J. Curing Materials:

1. Liquid Membrane Compound: ASHTO M148 or ASTM C309, Type 1-D with fugitive dye
and Type 2; formulated to disintegrate after 28 days, and guaranteed not to affect the
bond of applied finishes.

2. Polyethylene Film: ASTM C171, 0.10mm thick, opaque black.

3. Reinforced Waterproof Building Paper: ASTM C171, opaque.

4. Burlap: AASHTO M182.

5. Water: B.S. 5328 and B.S.148.

6. Methods for determining the efficiency of curing compounds shall be in accordance with ASTM C156.

7. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his Tender for testing the type of
curing compound he proposes to use.

K. Moist Cure, Hardener and Sealer

1. Hardeners
a. Lapidolith- Sonneborn Contech, U.S.A.
b. Anti-Hydro- Anti Hydro Co., U.S.A.
c. Sciolith - Chem-Masters Corp.,U.S.A
d. Eucosil - The Euclid Chemical Co., U.S.A.
e. Pena-lith- W.R.Meadows Inc., U.S.A.
f Nitoflor Fosroc U.S.A.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-14

2. Sealers

a. Son-No-Mar - Sonneborn Contech, U.S.A.
b. A-H Clear Cure- Anti Hydro Co., U.S.A
c. Traz - Chem Masters Corp., U.S.A.
d. Eucopoxy I - The Euclid Chemical Co., U.S.A
e. Tiah - W.R. Meadows Inc., U.S.A.
f. Surcoat - Al Hamra Co. Kuwait
g. Or approval equal.

L. Waterstops: Extruded shapes formed of virgin polyvinyl-chloride, tensile strength 134 kg/cm2, minimum
elongation 200%. The type and size of the waterstop shall be suitable to its particular application as recommended by
the manufacturer and be subject to the approval of the Engineer

M. Expansion Joint Filler: Refer to Section 07910, Joint Fillers and Gaskets for expansion joint fillers.

N. Sealants: Refer to Section 07920, Sealants for joint sealants.

O. Formwork

1. For unexposed surfaces and rough work, use Exterior Type Douglas Fir plywood, complying with BS 1204
Part 1(4) type BR, minimum 19mm thick. Before reusing forms, withdraw nails and thoroughly clean
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

2. For exposed surfaces not otherwise specified use special exterior type Douglas Fir, complying with BS 1204
Part 1(4) type to BP, minimum 19mm thick or high density (60-60) overlay plyform, Class 1 EXT-DFPA,
sanded grade trade marked by the American Plywood Association having a hard semi-opaque resin-fibre
overlay on both sides, minimum 19mm thick and constructed so that finished concrete will be straight,
smooth, dense, free from honeycombs, bulges, or depressions.

Keep joints between plywood sections to a minimum and make tight and strongly backed so that adjoining
edges remain flush and true. Unsightly joint marks will not be permitted. Cover joints on exposed surfaces
with smooth-faced fibre reinforced tape as approved by the Engineer.

3. Location of joints must be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

4. Prefabricated formwork systems may be used for all classes of concrete provided the manufacturers printed
instructions and recommendations are followed and the system has been approved by the Engineer. Joints
between sections of prefabricated forms shall be taped unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer
and provided always, in the case of such recommendation, the forms are water and mortar-tight to the
Engineers satisfaction.

P. Form Coating: B.P. CCM3 (British Petroleum) Or B.P. CM3 (British Petroleum) or Calform (Caltex) or Form
wax of a type which does not import any stain to concrete nor interfere with the adhesion of any finish, sealant,
waterproofing material applied to any concrete surface and must be approved by the Engineer.

Q. Form Ties: For securing forms where surfaces will be exposed in the finished work, use tie screws with
removable plastic cones, removable bolts, special removable ties, tie wires or series 300 stainless steel snap ties. For
all other forms, either bolts or wires may be used. Use ties of such type that when forms are removed, no metal is
closer than 40mm from the finished concrete surface.

R. Pigmented Concrete: Pigments for integrally colored concrete submitted for the Engineers approval shall be
certified in writing by the Manufacturer to be in compliance with ASTM C979.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-15
2.02 MIXES

A. Proportioning of Concrete

1. Comply with ACI Standard 211.1, or BS 8110, Section 6, Para. 6.2.4. Assume full responsibility for the
strength, consistency, water/cement ratio, and handling of concrete. Cement, fine aggregate and the
various sizes of coarse aggregate shall be measured by weight.

2. Water/Cement Ratio: Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Para. 6.2.4, OR ACI 301, Chapter 3, Para
3.8, Method 1 or 2. The water/cement ratio of a batch of concrete shall not exceed the specified maximum
value by more than 5% of that value. If a maximum water/cement ratio has been determined the ability to
comply with that requirement at a suitable level of workability, shall be determined by trial mixes. Maximum
water/cement ratio may be judged from workability tests and approved by the Engineer.

3. Cement Content: The cement content of any batch of concrete shall not be less than the specified minimum
value minus 5% of that value, nor more than the specified maximum value plus 5% of that value. The
cement content may be determined from samples representative of any batch of concrete provided suitable
test is used to measure the cement content of fresh concrete to an accuracy of +-5% of the actual value with
a confidence of 95% and approved by the Engineer. Table 6.1 of BS 8110.

Part 1: 1985 gives the minimum cement required when using a particular size of aggregate in a Portland
cement concrete, to provide acceptable durability under appropriate conditions of exposure. The reduced
minimum cement contents shall only be used when trial mixes have verified that concrete with a maximum
free water/cement ratio not greater than that given for a particular condition can be consistently produced
and it is suitable for the conditions of placing and compacting. The Engineer shall determine the degree of
exposure to be adopted for mix design.

4. Requirements for Fresh Concrete: Workability of concrete shall be such that the concrete is suitable for
the conditions of handling and placing so that after compaction it surrounds all reinforcement and completely
fills the formwork. Workability shall be assessed by means of the slump test or compacting factor test. An
acceptable value for the mean slump for each concrete mix shall be agreed with the Engineer and a value of
65mm can be taken as a guide. Following are the limits of workability of concrete for these tests:

Slump +-25mm or CF +- .03 where required value is 0.9 or more

+- .04 where the required value is less than 0.9 but more than 0.8

+- .05 Where required value is 0.8 or less.

The amount of water shall be measured by volume or by weight. The batch weights of aggregates shall be
adjusted to allow for a moisture content typical of the aggregates being used. The accuracy of the
measuring equipment shall be within +- 3% of the quantity of cement, water or total aggregates being
measured and within +- 5% of the quantity of any admixture being used. All measuring equipment shall be
maintained in a clean, serviceable condition. The mixer shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1305 or
B.S.4251 where applicable. The mixing time shall be not less than that used by the manufacturer in
assessing the mixer performance.

5. Adjustment to Mix Proportions: During production adjustments of mix proportions will be made in order to
minimise the variability of strength and to approach more closely the target mean strength as approved by
the Engineer. Such adjustments are regarded as part of the proper control of production but the specified
limits of minimum cement content and maximum water/cement ratio shall be maintained. Such adjustments
to mix proportions shall not be taken to imply any change tot he current margin.

B Clauses of Concrete

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-16
GRADE CHARACTERISTIC CUBE
STRENGTH (28 DAYS)
TYPE AND USE
150

350

150 Kg/cm2

350 Kg/cm2
Blinding Concrete

All Cast-in- Place reinforced concrete, unless
otherwise noted on drawings

Where a sudden change in weather conditions occurs or is imminent during continuous casting operations such as
will, in the Engineers opinion, affect the quality of the concrete, the specified characteristic cube strength for cast-in-
place reinforced concrete shall be increased by 50 kg/cm2.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FORMWORK

A. General

1. The responsibility for the safety and adequacy of the whole of the formwork shall rest entirely with the
Contractor. Coordinate the work of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section.

2. Except when they are varied by the requirements of these Specifications, the requirements of the British
Standard BS 8110 Section 6 shall form a binding part of these specifications.

3. Give 24 hours minimum notice to the Engineer as to when formwork will be ready for inspection and allow
sufficient time for inspection and adjustment.

4. Any work showing signs of damage through premature loading shall be demolished and reconstructed at the
Contractors expense.

B. Workmanship:

1. Reference shall be made to BS 5975 and appendix C of the Concrete Society Technical Report No. 13,
Formwork and the CIRIA Data Sheet, Cement Pressure on Formwork.

2. Except for areas having suspended false ceiling within the project, most of the structure is either exposed or
receiving applied finish. Tolerances specified under this part are more stringent than those specified in BS
5606 or ACI 301.

3. Provide cambers as specified on drawings.

4. All formwork shall be constructed plumb, true, water and mortar tight, sufficiently rigid and strong to prevent
sagging between supports and to maintain true position and shape during and after placing of concrete
without bowing and distortion.

5. Exceptional care shall be taken to minimize fins, ridges, offsets, leaking of fins and other defects.

6. Only workmen experienced in formwork shall be used for this work.

7. Supports shall be designed to withstand the worst combination of self-weight and other loads including
formwork, reinforcement, wet concrete, construction and wind loads together with all incidental dynamic
effects caused by placing vibrating and compacting of concrete.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-17
8. Deflection: The maximum permissible deflection under all loads shall not exceed 2mm or 1/600 of
the free span, whichever is less.

9. Forms for beams and girders shall be designed to permit removal of at least one side without shock to the
partially set concrete and without disturbing the bottom portion of the forms or its supports.

10. Prefabricated formwork shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions and
approved shop drawings.

11. Provide 15 x 15mm wrought hardwood fillet or other suitable material in the angles of the formwork as
shown on drawings or as required by the Engineer to provide chamfers in columns and beams and walls.

12. Anchors bolts, plates, sleeves, pipes, inserts, fixtures, electrical boxes, reinforcing steel, duct openings,
conduits, etc.., shall be installed as per drawings. Ample time shall be allowed for the proper installation of
such items. All steel items (other than reinforcement) embedded in concrete shall be hot-dipped galvanized.

13. Form Cleaning: All forms shall be thoroughly cleaned before placement of concrete and suitable temporary
openings provided to permit removal of undesirable materials from the interior without disturbing the whole
formwork. All surfaces in contact with concrete shall be wetted or treated with an approved form releasing
agent before placing of reinforcement. All formwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of any old concrete or other
deposit before re-use.

14. During concreting, formwork and supports shall be inspected by experienced workmen and any portion
showing signs of sagging or displacement shall be rectified.

15. All formwork shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer. This approval, however, does not relieve the
Contractor of any of his liabilities and responsibilities under the Contract.

16. The Contractor must allow in his Tender for cost of testing the type of form releasing agent he proposes to
use.

3.02 REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with B.S.4449; B.S. 4461; B.S.4482; B.S 4483 OR ACI 301, Chapter 5, Paragraph 5.1, and
ASTM A775.

B. Fixing

1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 7, Para. 7.3 OR ACI Standard 301, Chapter 5, Para. 5.5
Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement outside the specified limits unless specified
otherwise:

a. The actual concrete cover shall be not less than the required nominal cover minus 5mm.

b. Where reinforcement is located in relation to only one face of a member (e.g. a straight
bar in a slab) the actual concrete cover shall not be more than the required nominal
cover plus:

(i) 5mm on bars up to and including 12mm size.

(ii) 10mm on bars over 12mm up to and including 25mm size.

(iii) 15mm on bars over 25mm size.

2. Spacer chairs or other supports detailed on shop drawings, together with such other supports as
may be necessary shall be used to maintain the reinforcement in its correct position. In a member

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-18
where the nominal cover is dimensioned to the links, spacers between the links and formwork
shall be of the same dimensions as the nominal cover.

3. Non-structural connections for the positioning of reinforcement shall be made with steel wire or
tying devices. Care should be taken to ensure that the projection ends of ties or clips do not
encroach into the concrete cover.

4. The position of reinforcement shall be checked before and during concreting, particular attention
being paid to the position of top reinforcement in cantilever sections. Where there is delay in
depositing concrete after the placement of the reinforcement the Engineer may require the
Contractor to restore the reinforcement to a satisfactory condition and may require protection of
same from further corrosion.

5. Surface condition of Reinforcement: Concrete shall not be placed unless reinforcement is free
from mud, oil, paint, retarders, loose rust, loose mill scale, grease or any other substance badly
rusted or pitted reinforcement will be rejected. Mechanical brushes shall be used in cleaning steel
bars.

6. All reinforcement shall be stored under cover to avoid contact with the ground, moisture, dust and
salts and to avoid distortion once bent to shape. Improper storage will be sufficient cause for
rejection of reinforcement.

7. Laps and joints of Reinforcement: Laps and joints shall only be made by methods specified and at
the positions shown on the Drawings or as agreed by the Engineer.

8. The splice lengths of all reinforcing bars which have to be spliced shall, unless otherwise shown
on the drawings, be in conformity with the following:

a. Deformed bars (60 diameter) 600mm minimum

b. Fabric (175 mm minimum, but overlap measured between outermost wires
of each sheet not less than pitch of secondary reinforcement wires)

c. Spliced bars are to be securely tied together.

9. Splices to be staggered, to be approved from the Engineer, and the fabric is to be securely tied
layer to layer.

10. All reinforcement shall be placed accurately in position and securely fastened in place to prevent
displacement during the placing of the concrete. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that the
protective cover to reinforcement specified on the drawings is obtaining by the use of approved
plastic tipped steel chairs for lower reinforcement and cranked bars for upper reinforcement. All
bars shall be securely tied together at every alternate intersection, or as approved by the
Engineer.

11. Ends of bars which are left projecting for any period exceeding 4 weeks shall be painted with a
heavy coat of neat cement grout which shall be removed prior to continuation of concreting.

12. Concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings and the allowable tolerance
shall be in accordance with BS 8110.

13. Tie wire shall be annealed iron wire not less than No.16 gauge or approved fasteners, unless
shown otherwise on the drawings.

14. Reinforcement that has in any way been previously used shall not be reused in the work.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-19
15. Welding of Reinforcement: Welding on site shall be avoided if possible, but where suitable
safeguards and techniques are employed and provided that the types of steel (including high yield
steel to B.S. 4449 and B.S.4461) have the required welding proportions, it may be undertaken.
Generally, however, all welding shall be carried out under controlled conditions in a factory or
workshop. The competence of the operators shall be demonstrated prior to and periodically
during the welding operations.

16. Cutting and Bending Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall be cut and/or bent in accordance with
B.S.4466. Bends in reinforcement shall have a substantially constant curvature. Where the
temperature of the steel is below 5C, special precautions may be necessary such as reducing the
speed of bending or, with the Engineers approval, increasing the radius of bending. Where it is
necessary to bend reinforcement projecting from concrete, care should be taken to ensure that the
radius of bend is not less than that specified in B.S. 4466. The Engineers written approval shall
be obtained before cutting or heating any reinforcement detailed on the drawings. All
reinforcement bars, coated and uncoated, shall be bent cold unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer. Where it is necessary to reshape steel previously bent, this shall only be done with the
Engineers approval and each bar shall be inspected for signs of fracture.

17. Reinforcement (particularly grade 410/425 should not be subjected to mechanical damage or
shock loading prior to embedment. It is permissible to bend grade 250 reinforcement projecting
from concrete provided that care is taken to ensure that the radius of bend is not less than that
specified in BS 4466. Grade 410/425 bars should not be rebent or straightened without the
Engineers approval.

3.03 MIXING CONCRETE

A. Ready Mixed Concrete

1. Comply with ASTM C94.

2. Add mixing water only at the Site.

3. Discharge the concrete completely at the site within one hour after the introduction of the water to the
aggregates. In hot weather reduce this time limit so that no stiffening of the concrete shall occur until after it
has been placed.

4. Begin the mixing operation within thirty minutes after the cement has been intermingled with the aggregates.

B. Batch Mixing at Site (if permitted by Governmental authority having jurisdiction)

1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, OR ACI 301, Chapter 7, Paragraphs 7.2 and 7.5.

2. Excessive mixing requiring the addition of water to preserve the required consistency will not be permitted.
Mix concrete to a consistency which can be readily placed without segregation.

3. Where admixtures are specified, equip mixers with a device for measuring and dispensing the admixture.

C. Hand Mixed Concrete: This is not permitted.

3.04 JOINTS AND EMBEDED ITEMS

A. Construction and Control Joints

1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Paragraph 6.12, OR ACI 301, Chapter 6, Paragraph 6.1 and B.S.5337.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-20
2. Construction joints other than when formed at movement joints shall be kept to a
minimum possible consistent with convenience of construction and design consideration.
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to locations of construction joints.

3. Where it is necessary to introduce construction joints, careful consideration shall be given to their exact
location. The location of construction joints shall be subject to agreement between the Engineer and the
Contractor before any work commences. Construction joints shall be at right angles to the general direction
of the member and shall take due account of shear and other stresses.

4. Vertical joints shall be formed against a stop board. The top surface of a layer of concrete shall be level and
reasonably flat unless design considerations make this undesirable. Joint lines shall be so arranged that
they coincide with features of the finished work.

5. Kickers (i.e. a starter stub) shall be at least 150mm high and carefully constructed and shall be cast along
with the main concrete.

6. Immediately prior to recommencement of concreting on a joint, the surface of the concrete against which
new concrete will be cast shall be free from laitance and shall be roughened to the extent that the largest
aggregate is exposed but not disturbed. Care shall be taken that the joint surface is cleaned immediately
before the fresh concrete is placed against it

7. Saturate the cleaned surface with water and slush with a coating of 1:1/2 cement sand grout. Place new
concrete before grout has attained its initial set. Clean horizontal construction joints and pour the cement-
sand mortar over joints in walls to a depth of 25mm before depositing concrete. In walls, do not space
construction joints more than 15 metres apart, unless otherwise shown.

8. Care shall be taken in the placing of the new concrete close to the joint. This concrete shall be well
compacted and vibrated.

9. Control joints for control of thermal cracking should be formed using crack inducers or waterstops having
built-in inducers. Control joints shall be placed in slabs-on-grades, tanking walls and retaining walls at
spacings indicates on structural drawings. Control joints in concrete topping to PC beams at typical floors
and at other locations in slabs and cast-in-place beams and shall be formed in accordance with the details
shown on structural drawings.

B. Waterstops: Comply with B.S.5337, Appendix D, Paragraph D4, or ACI 301, Chapter 6, Paragraph 6.3. Clamp
waterstops at top to prevent displacement.

C. Embedded Items:

1. Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 6, Paragraphs 6.4 and 6.5.

2. Set anchorage devices by line and transit, and coordinate the locating of all anchorage devices to be set for
the accommodation of the work of other trades.

3. Locate anchor bolts and/or threaded type inserts and bars as shown on the drawings and on shop drawings.
Obtain necessary templates from the mechanical trades as required for the setting of anchor bolts and other
items for mechanical equipment, as required.

4. Assist other trades in the installation of piping, pipe sleeves, conduit and similar items where such items are
to be installed in concrete. Provide frames to securely hold anchor bolts and anchorage devices in place
during construction, and take care that no displacement occurs during the placing of concrete. Under this
Section furnish and set items not furnished by other trades using approved standard type items suitable for
their intended purpose.

3.05 PLACING CONCRETE

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-21

A. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para 8.1 for preparation before placing and with BS 8110, Section 6, Para
6.5 and 6.8. Notify the Engineer 24 hours before each placement so that the forms and reinforcement may be
examined. Do not place concrete until inspection has been made or waived.

B. Concrete shall not be mixed or placed at shade air temperature below 2C on a rising thermometer, or at a shade air
temperature below 3C on a falling thermometer. When the shade air temperature is 32C and rising, special
precautions shall be taken during concrete operations, such as shading of the aggregates, formwork and plant, cooling
of the mixing water or other methods approved by the Engineer so that the temperature of the concrete when placed
shall not exceed 30C. The temperature of the concrete can be reduced by cooling the water and the aggregate.

C. Fresh concrete placed at these temperatures shall be shaded from the direct rays of the sun to the satisfaction of the
Engineer for a period of 24 hours. Concrete is not to be mixed and placed when the shade air temperature is 38C or
above.

D. Before concrete is placed, clean mixing and conveying equipment from hardened concrete and foreign matter. Check
forms for construction and detail. Secure reinforcement sleeves and inserts in correct position. Forms shall be free of
water and all debris. Sprinkle with water any semi-porous sub-grade to eliminate suction. Water shall be removed
from excavation before depositing concrete, such water shall not be allowed to wash over newly formed concrete.

E. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para 8.2 for conveying concrete. Concrete shall be transported from the
mixer to the formwork as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the
ingredients and maintain the required workability. Concrete shall be placed and compacted without addition of water.
Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or movement of formwork and damage to faces of
formwork.

F. Care shall be exercised to prevent segregation of concrete and to prevent splashing the forms while placing concrete.
Concrete shall be placed through canvas tremie tubes only equipped with suitable hopper heads. Chutes or trunking
shall be of variable lengths so that the free fall of the concrete from the end shall not exceed one metre and a
sufficient number shall be used to ensure that the concrete surface is approximately level at all times. Where
alternative provisions can be made, which are acceptable to the Engineer, then low slump concrete can be dropped
vertically through greater heights than one metre.

G. Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration, pressure, shock or other means during the operation of placing
and thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around embedded fixtures and into corners of the formwork to form
a solid mass free from voids and which will have required surface finish when formwork is removed. Vibration shall be
applied continuously during the placing of each batch of concrete until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and
there is no secretion of ingredients. Care shall be taken that the vibrator is not used any closer than 75mm from the
formed surface. Where permanent precast concrete formwork is used in the structure, its energy absorption should be
taken into account when deciding on the method of vibration to be used and the Engineers prior approval shall be
obtained in respect thereof.

H. Concrete which has achieved its initial set and cannot be properly compacted shall not be placed in the forms.

I. Concrete Topping: Before application the surfaces shall be thoroughly wetter and brushed over with a coat of neat
cement grout. The topping shall be placed before the grout has started to set.

J. Slope surfaces to drains where indicated. Slope shall be as indicated on Drawings.

3.06 CURING

A. General

1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Para. 6.6 and 6.8 and ACI Standard 301, Chapter 12.

2. The methods of curing and their duration shall be such that the concrete will have satisfactory durability and
strength, and the member will suffer a minimum distortion, be free of excessive efflorescence and will not

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-22
cause by its shrinkage, undue cracking in the structure. Insulate the concrete so that it is maintained at a
suitable temperature or both to prevent excessive moisture loss from the concrete. Curing shall be
appropriate to different members and products. Where necessary special care shall be taken to ensure that
similar components are cured under the same conditions.

3. Curing shall be promptly commenced, be total in coverage and continued without interruption.

B. Curing Methods

Curing compounds shall be used for curing concrete unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

1. Curing Compounds

a. Curing membrane solution shall be applied at the coverage rate recommended by the
manufacturer (two coats, one at right angles to the other), immediately after placing concrete.

b. Concrete surfaces shall be damp when the coating is applied. Curing compounds shall not be
used if bond is necessary such as in base slab of two course floor.

c. Conventional curing compounds shall not be used if a special finish is to be applied. In such
cases, special resin solutions that do not affect adhesion of finishes may be used as approved by
the Engineer.

C. The following curing methods may be considered for use subject to the Engineers approval

1. Ponding with Water: Effective for flat surface. Curing water shall not be more than 11C (52F) cooler than
the concrete and shall be free of substances that may stain or discolour concrete.

2. Saturated Material: Saturated material shall be held in close contact with concrete surfaces and maintained
in moist condition so that a film of water remains on the concrete surface throughout the curing period.
Saturated materials shall be kept wet for a minimum of seven days after stripping.

3. Intermittent Spraying with water: Care shall be taken that newly finished concrete is not damaged by
water erosion. If spraying is done at intervals, concrete surfaces shall not dry out between applications of
water.

4. Top of columns and walls shall be cured after initial setting. As soon as formwork is loosened water curing
shall be applied to sides of columns and walls, and shall continue uninterrupted for a minimum of seven
days.

5. Slabs and flat surfaces shall be cured by flooding. Flat concrete surfaces shall be covered immediately after
concrete is placed, tamped and levelled, with polyethelene sheet and flooded with water as soon as initial
hardening of concrete occurs. Covering surface shall follow progress of concrete placement until the whole
surface is covered and flooded. Polyethelene sheet may be removed after 24 hours and regular flooding
maintained for a minimum of 7 days.

6. Use special thermometers of sufficient length of stem to monitor the concrete
temperature of the raft foundation slab as soon as concrete is placed to the required
level. Monitor temperature of concrete for 7 days and provide the Engineer with daily
records.

D. Curing Periods: Seven (7) days is the minimum curing period for all cast-in-place concrete. At the discretion of the
Engineer the curing period may be extended.

3.07 STRIKING OF FORMWORK

A. Comply with BS 811:85, Section 6, Para.6.9.3 or ACI 301, Chapter 4, Para 4.5.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-23

B. Do not remove forms or supports until the concrete has thoroughly hardened and has attained sufficient
strength to support its own weight and construction live loads to be placed thereon, without damage to the
structure. Do not disturb forms or supports until the concrete has attained at least 40% of design strength
for side forms and 80% of design strength for bottom forms. Be responsible for proper form removal and
replace any work damaged due to inadequate maintenance or improper or premature form removal.

C. The following shall be the minimum periods before striking formwork, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer:

1. Vertical formwork to columns,
walls and large beams - 24 hours

2. Beam Sides - 24 hours

3. Beam soffits formwork - 15 days

4. Props to beams - 21 days

5. Soffit formwork to slab - 6 days

6. Props to slab - 15 days

D. The removal time may be decreased with the Engineers approval where surface temperature of concrete is 16C and
above; refer to Table 6.6, Section 6 of BS 8110, part 1.

E. Protect the newly placed concrete from high and low temperatures using suitable means of insulation for the duration
of the curing.

F. Care shall be exercised in form removal to prevent chipping of corners and other damage. Experienced foremen shall
supervise form removal.

G. Removal of bottom form linings between props prior to the removal of supports may be permitted, provided the
formwork has been designed to allow such removal without disturbing the supports.

H. No new permanent structure shall be constructed on any part of the erected structure while the latter is still supported
by formwork unless walls are built above another wall carried on a properly supported base. This requirement does
not prohibit the use of props to take the load of more than one level of framing.

3.08 TOLERANCES

A. Comply with B.S. 5606 OR ACI Standard 117-81, Part 5, unless noted otherwise.

3.09 CLEANING FINISHED EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES

A. Efflorescence, stains, oils, grease or any unsightly accumulation of foreign materials that are visible on the exposed
exterior and/or interior surface of finished concrete, shall be removed. Such action may cover all exposed concrete or
when irregular lapping can be avoided, only such parts as are affected by the stains or other unsightly appearances.
No such remedial action shall be taken without the approval of the Engineer.

3.10 PATCHING

A. Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 9.

3.11 FINISHING

A. General Requirements for Flatwork: Strike off top surfaces of finished fill and monolithic slabs true and level within a
tolerance of 3mm in 3 meters and measured with a 3 metre straight edge placed in any direction at any location.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-24

B. Monolithic Floor Finish (CSFI): Level surface and remove excess laitance by tamping, screeding, and
preliminary wood floating. When the slab has hardened sufficiently so that water and fine material will not
be worked to the top, compact the surface with motor-driven floats of the disc type and trowel smooth with
two steel trowelling operations. Do the second trowelling after the concrete has becomes so hard that no
mortar will adhere to the edge of the trowel. Leave floors with a smooth, hard finish free of blemishes and
true to a maximum tolerance of 3mm in 3 metres. Monolithically finish surfaces scheduled to receive the
following:

1. Hardener and Sealer

C. Mortar Float Finish: Level surface and remove excess laitance by tamping, screeding, and preliminary wood floating.
When the slab has hardened sufficiently so that water and fine material will not be worked to the top, compact the
surface with motor-driven floats of the disc type. Leave floors/roofs with a smooth finish and true to a maximum
tolerance of 3mm in 3 metres. Motor float finish surface scheduled to receive the following:

1. Membrane Waterproofing

D. Rough Slab Finish: Tamp the concrete using special tools to force the aggregate away from the surface, then screed
with straight edges to produce a reasonably true and uniform surface. Rough slab finish surfaces scheduled to
receive the following:

1. Floor beds.

E. Wood Float Finish (CSF2): Tamp the concrete using special tools to force aggregate away from the surface, then
screed with straight edges to bring surfaces to the required lines. While the concrete is still green, wood float to a true
and uniform plane to a 3mm in 3m tolerance with no coarse aggregate visible and apply a medium stiff broom finish
striated uniformly at right angles to traffic pattern and in the direction indicated then moisture and seal the following:

1. Driveway, Ramps and parking

F. Interior Exposed Concrete Surfaces of Slab, Beams, Columns and Walls: Unless otherwise shown, leave a smooth
finish, even-textured and free of blemishes. Repair or replace defective areas, as directed. As soon as the face forms
are removed, remove all fins and other projections carefully, level offsets and grind where necessary.
Repairing, replacing and pointing and filling voids shall be done to the Engineers satisfaction. Patch as specified
under paragraph Patching. Refer to architectural drawings to determine surfaces scheduled to receive paint.

G. Im-printed Concrete surface:

1. Concrete shall be placed and screeded to the required grades, and then floated.
Apply an even application the approved colour hardener to the concrete surface as per the manufacturere
instructions.

2. Apply the release agent to the surface of the concrete as per the manufactuere instructions.

3 While concrete is still in its plastic state, apply the stamped concrete tool, of the approved pattern, to
the suface of concrete. Tools shall be properly tamped into the surface to achieve the required
texture.

4. Control joints shall be cut at pre-determend areas no later than 12 hours after concrete has been placed or
as otherwise instructed by the manufacturer. Excess release agent shall be removed in accordance with the
manufactuere instructions.

5 Apply minimum of one coat of clear protective coating as per the manufacturer instructions.

3.12 FLOOR SLABS ON GRADE

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03300-25
A. Examine condition of porous fill and remedy any unsatisfactory portions prior to applying vapour barrier.

B. Cover porous fill with vapour barrier of polyethylene sheeting. Do not lay sheeting until immediately prior to placing of
reinforcing mesh and concrete. Seal seams as recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Do not place concrete over vapour barrier until all breaks have been patched and sealed.

3.13 HARDENER AND SEALER

A. Apply in accordance with the approved manufacturers printed instructions, on the following concrete floor surfaces:

END OF SECTION

CONCRETE FINISHING 03345 - 1
SECTION03345

CONCRETE FINISHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 Reference Standards

Conform to requirements of the following Reference Standards or as modified and supplemented hereinafter.

1. ACI Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301
2. ACI Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting, ACI 306
3. ACI Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting, ACI 605

1.02 Quality Assurance

Concrete Work: Concrete work where indicated to be exposed is architecturally finished concrete; special care
must be taken to provide specified, finished surfaces without gravel pockets, and other defacements. Engineer
shall inspect concrete after removal of forms and before concrete repair work begins.

1.03 Protection

Protect persons and adjacent materials and finishes from dust, dirt and other surface or physical damage during
finishing operations, including materials driven by wind.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Repairs

A. Immediately after removal of forms and inspect all surfaces for defects. Repair or patch defects only
after defects are inspected by the Engineer and then only with the Engineers permission. Do all cutting
and repair within 48 hours after removal of forms; cure repairs same as new concrete.

B. Defective Areas: Where patches are allowed, repair and patch areas; must match the surrounding areas
in color and texture so as to be indistinguishable after completion, including curing and finishing.
Determine mix for color by trial mixes before patching; after initial cure, dress patch or repair area
mechanically or by hand for texture match.

3.02 Finishes for Formed Surfaces

A. Rough Form Finish: Provide for surface of walls and footings adjacent to grade or below grade. This is
the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material use with tie holes and defective
areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or
chipped off.

B. Smooth Formed Finish: Provide a smooth formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to view.
This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged in an orderly
and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Remove fins and other projections completely and
smoothed. Repair and patch honeycombs and defective areas as directed by the Engineer. Tie holes
shall not be filled.

C. Sacked Finish:

1. On all designated surfaces of the exposed concrete, provide a sacked finish by coating the
concrete with sacking mortar. Sacking of patched or defective concrete surfaces may be
required by the Engineer for areas not other wise already requiring this work.
2. Repair and patch tie holes, honeycombs and defective areas and trowel to smooth finish.
Remove fins and other projections completely and smoothed.
3. Thoroughly wet surface to prevent absorption.
4. Coat entire surface with sacking mortar as soon as surface of concrete approaches surface
dryness.
5. Thoroughly and vigorously rub mortar over area with clean burlap pads to fill all voids.
6. While mortar is still plastic but partially set (so it cannot be pulled from voids), sack-rub surface
with dry mix of sacking mortar (leave out water). There should be no discernible thickness of
mortar on concrete surface, except in voids; all surfaces should be uniformly textured.
7. Immediately begin a continuous moist cure for 72 hours.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent
to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.
Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless
otherwise indicated. Provide for face surface of walls adjacent to plaza, walks and stairs.

3.03 Finishes for Unformed Surfaces

A. Screed all slabs, for whatever finish, to true levels or slopes, work surfaces only to the degree required
to produce the desired finish; do no finishing in areas where water has accumulated, drain and rescued;
in no case use cement and sand sprinkling to absorb moisture. Carefully finish all joints and edges with
proper tools, unless otherwise specified. Applay minimum 4 mm thick self leveling epoxy grout with 2
cots of PU finish.

B. Rough Screed Finish: Consolidate, level, and screed all surfaces to obtain evenness and uniformity;
remove all surplus concrete after consolidation by striking off with sawing motion against guide strips.
Provide for top horizontal surfaces of non-exposed footings. Provide for concrete slab under synthetic
safety surfacing.

C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slabs to receive trowel or other finishes. After screeding,
consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating,
using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has
stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power
driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to
tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155.
Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling,
re-float surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a non-slip broom finish to all exterior concrete slabs, stairs, walks, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming
with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

E. Defective Work: Remove and replace when directed by the Engineer, surfaces which show excessive
shrinkage cracks.

3.05 Curing

A. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures;
maintain minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for necessary hydration time and
proper relatively constant temperature for necessary hydration time and proper hardening of concrete.

B. Duration of Curing: In addition to the initial overnight curing, continue final curing operations until the
cumulative number of days or fractions thereof (not necessarily consecutive) occurs, during which time
the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50 degrees F, equals 7 days. If high-

early strength concrete has been used, continue final curing operation for 3 days total time, calculated as
before. Take care to prevent rapid drying at the end of the curing period. If early removal of forms is
approved and forms are removed during the curing period, apply one of the curing methods specified in
City of Seattle Standards Specifications (most recent edition), Section 9-23 and continue curing for the
remainder of the required curing period.

3.06 Inspection

Contractor shall notify Engineer that they are starting concrete finish repair work at least 48 hours prior to the
beginning of work.

3.07 Cleaning

Leave premises clean and free of residue from work in this section.

END OF SECTION

LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03521-1
SECTION 03521


PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes lightweight concrete fill over structural slabs to extend, thickness and slopes indicated on
drawings.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Lightweight Concrete: Low-density concrete, with an oven-dry weight not exceeding 50 lb/cu.ft.(900 kg/cu.m):

1. Aggregate Type Lightweight Concrete: Low density concrete made with Portland cement, water, air-
entraining admixture, and perlite mineral aggregates.

2. Cellular type lightweight Concrete: Concrete made with Portland cement, water air-producing foaming
agents.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (Latest Edition)

1. ASTM C 138: Test Method for unit weight, yield and Air content (Gravimetric) of concrete.

2. ASTM C 150: Specification for Portland Cement

3. ASTM C 260: Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for concrete.

4. ASTM C 332 (R91): Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete.

5. ASTM C 495: Test Method for Compressive strength of lightweight insulating concrete.

6. ASTM C 612: Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include mixing and application instructions for each type lightweight
concrete.

1. Include lightweight concrete design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing
compliance with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings including plans, sections, and details showing roof slopes, insulation thickness, roof penetrations, roof
perimeter terminations and curbs, control and expansion joints, and roof drains.

C. Design mixes for each lightweight concrete mix, including oven-dry unit weight, and compressive strength.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03521-2
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery materials in manufacturers original undamaged packages or acceptable bulk containers.

B. Store packaged materials to protect them from elements or physical damage.

C. Do not use cement that shows indications of moisture damage, caking, or other deterioration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANFACTURERS

A. Aggregate Lightweight Concrete

1. W.R.Grace & Co.
Construction Products Div.
62 Whittemore Ave.
Cambridge, MA 02140
Tel: (617) 876-1400
Fax: (617 498-4311

2. Mandoval Vermiculite Products Inc.
3340 Bingle Rd.
Houston, TX 77055
Tel: (713) 462-1709
Fax: (713) 462-8707

3. Saudi Perlite Ind.
P.O. Box 42010
Riyadh 11541
Saudi Arabia
Tel: 4792473, Fax: 4775719

4. Or approved equal

LOCAL SUPPLIERS

1. Jassim Al Nisf

2. Al Hamra Kuwait Company

3. Al Bahar & Bardawil

4. Or equal aproved

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

B. Mineral Aggregate: ASTM C 332, Group I, perlite or vermiculate.

C. Water: Clean, Portable.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260

E. Control Joint Filler: ASTM C 612, Class 2, glass-fibre type; compressing to one-half thickness under a load of 25 psi
(172 kPa)

Project No.: KW.09.0128 03521-3

2.03 DESIGN MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for type and strength of lightweight concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field test data
methods. For the trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed
mix designs.

1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of portland cement by weight.

B. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement or cementitious material permitted
by ACI 301.

2.04 AGGREGATE TYPE LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE

A. Design mix to produce lightweight concrete with the following minimum physical properties using the minimum amount
of water necessary to produce a workable mix.

1. Do not exceed maximum air content recommended by aggregate manufacturer.

B. Perlite Aggregate Mix: As follows:

1. As-Cast Unit Weight: 610 to 705 kg/cu.m at point of placement, when tested according to ASTM C 138.

2. Oven-Dry Unit Weight: 385 to 480 kg/cu.m, when tested according to ASTM C 495.

3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 125 psi (860 kPa), when tested according to ASTM C 495.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Control Joints: Install control joints at perimeter of roof deck and at junctures with vertical surfaces, including curbs,
walls, and vents, for full depth of lightweight concrete. Fill joints with glass-fibre control joint filler.

1. Provide 25mm wide joints for roof areas with dimensions up to 30m in length; 38mm wide joints for roof area
dimensions exceeding 30m.

3.02 MIXING AND PLACING

A. Mix and place lightweight concrete according to manufacturers instructions, using equipment and procedures to avoid
segregation of mix and loss of air content.

B. Deposit and screed lightweight concrete in a continuous operation until an entire panel or section of roof area is
completed. Do not vibrate or work mix except for screeding or floating. Place to depths and slopes indicated.

C. Finish top surface smooth, free of ridges and depressions, and maintain surface in acceptable condition to receive
subsequent roofing application.

D. Begin curing operations immediately after placement, and air cure for not less than 3 days according to manufacturers
recommendations.


Project No.: KW.09.0128 03521-4

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency, acceptable to Engineer, to take samples and conduct
tests to evaluate lightweight concrete. Do not use same testing service that provided initial mix designs.

1. Determine compressive strength and oven-dry unit weight according to ASTM C 495. Make a set of at least
6 molds for each days placement, but not less than 1 set of molds for each (465 sq.m) of roof area.

3.04 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Refinish, or remove and replace, lightweight concrete surfaces that are excessively scaled or too rough to receive
roofing, according to current published requirements of roofing manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace lightweight concrete that fails to meet compressive strength and oven-dry unit weight
requirements.

END OF SECTION

CONCRETE SCREED
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03532-1
SECTION 03532

CONCRETE SCREED

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and Division 1

1.02 SUMMARY

1. This Section includes concrete screed with hardener and sealer

A. Related Sections:

1. Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete

1.03 STANDARDS

A. Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendation of the following (Latest Edition):

ASTM A 185
ASTM C 150
ASTM C 171
ASTM C 309
ASTM C 404
ASTM C 881
ASTM D 224
ASTM D 4263

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.


A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturers labels indicating
brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other components, and application.

B. Store materials to comply with manufacturers written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other
detrimental effects.

PART 2 - PRODCUTS

2.01 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Epoxy joint filler: Two component, semi-rigid, 10 percent solids, epoxy resin with a shore a hardness of 80 per ASTM
D 224.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, type I or II

C. Sand: ASTM C 404, fine aggregate passing No. 16 (1.2 mm) sieve.

CONCRETE SCREED
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03532-2

D. Water: Potable

E. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, Type V, two component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp
surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements.

F. Mesh reinforcement: Shall conform to ASTM A 185

2.02 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 25 percent solids content,
minimum.

2.03 SCREED

A. Mix:

1. Grout: 1 Part cement to 11/4 part sand, with sufficient water to make a stiff slurry.

2. Bond Coat: 1 part cement to 11/4 part sand to 2 parts coarse aggregate mixed with bonding agent as
approved by the Engineer. The amount of water shall not exceed 19 liters per 50 kg bag of cement.

3. Top Coat: Same mix as bond coat.

2.04 Aproved Supplaires

A. KBRC Kuwait Britesh ready mix
B. National Industries.
C. Bubiyan Ready Mix.

B. Handener:

1. Floors shall be surfaced with a monolithic surface hardening compound containing non-metallic rust free
aggregates which shall be applied to the freshly laid concrete floor by the dry-shake method. The
compound shall have the ability to improve the abrasion resistance of concrete by 225%.

2. Properties:

a. The aggregate shall have a hardness value of 7 on Moh Scale

b. 28 days compressive strength of cubes shall be 70N/mm2

C. Sealer

CONCRETE SCREED
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03532-3
1. Multi-role curing and sealing compound, complying to the requirements of ASTM C309 for Type 1 Class B
materials, based on a blend of piolite/acrylic resins in a solution of quick drying solvents.

2. Properties:
Appearance: Clear liquid
Specific gravity: 0.82 at 20 degrees C.
Flashpoint: 88 degrees C
Finished Film Appearance Clear, tack free water repellent film

2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (HARDENER AND SEALER)

A. FOSROC

B. Alghanim Specialist

C. Or approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, for conditions affecting performance of screed. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.

B. Verify that base slabs are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by the plastic sheet method
accordingly to ASTM D 4263.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound concrete. Mechanically abrade
base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile with an amplitude of 6mm.

1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs.

2. Mechanically remove contaminants from existing concrete that might impair bond of screed.

3. Saw cut existing contraction and construction joints to a depth of inch (13 mm) and fill with epoxy joint
filler.

B. Install joint-filler strips where screed abuts vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extended joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with screed surface, unless
otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips inch (13mm) below screed surface where joint sealant, specified in
Division 7 Section Joint Sealant, are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip
sections together.

3.03 APPLICATION

CONCRETE SCREED
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03532-4

A. Existing Concrete: Apply epoxy-bonding adhesive, mixed according to manufacturers written instructions, and scrub
into dry base slabs to thickness of (1.5 to 3mm), without pudding. Place screed while adhesive is still tacky.

B. Completely cover the wet substrate surfaces with grout, applied with force and brushed in to assure full coverage.

C. Apply bond coat not less than 16 mm thick immediately after application of grout and bring to true lines, levels and
profiles. Thoroughly compact and roughen the bond coat to form a key for the top coat.

D. Before the bond coat has set, apply the top coat to such thickness that the total of the work measured from substrate
to finished surface will be shown, less only thickness of finish covering.

E. Place screed continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to achieve tight contact with bonding surface.
Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop within pour strip.

1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

2. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated.

3. Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane free of humps or
hollows.

F. Finishing: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats as soon as screed can support equipment and operator.
Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with
a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first trowel finish and consolidate screed by power-driven
trowel so no blisters develop. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is smooth and
uniform in texture.

a. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between screed surface and an unleveled
freestanding 3m long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface,
does not exceed 6.4mm.

2. Apply hardener and sealer in accordance with recommendations of the manufacturer.

G. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of screed, at locations
indicated or as approved by Engineer.

1. Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive at locations where screed is placed against hardened or
partially hardened screed.

H. Construction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or
diamond-rimmed blades. Cut (3mm) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise
damage surface and before screed develops random contraction cracks.

1. Form joints in screed over contraction joints in base slabs, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one-half of screed thickness, but not less than 13mm deep.

3.04 PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed screed from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

CONCRETE SCREED
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03532-5
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to screed surfaces in hot, dry, or windy conditions before and during
finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturers written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating
or darbying screed, but before float finishing.

C. Begin curing immediately after finishing screed. Cure by one or a combination of the following methods, according to
screed manufacturers written instructions:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with water or absorptive
cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover screed surfaces and edges with 12 inch (300 mm)
lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture retaining cover for curing concrete,
placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300mm), and sealed by
waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears
during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations by power spray or roller according
to manufacturers written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.05 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare and clean contraction joints and install epoxy joint filler, according to manufacturers written instructions, once
screed has fully cured.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cutting, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and
dry.

C. Install epoxy joint filler full depth of contraction joints. Overall joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after
hardening.

3.06 REPAIRS

A. Repair and patch defective screed areas, including areas that have not bonded to concrete substrate.

END OF SECTION

GROUT
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03600-1
SECTION 03600

GROUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED WORK:

A. Section 03300 - Cast in Place Concrete
B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry
C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications


A. Pre-mixed and packaged non-shrinking grout.
B. Site mixed grout/concrete containing an expanding additive.

1.03 STANDARDS

A. Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following (Latest Edition):

CRD C 621
ASTM C 827
ASTM C 309


A. CONTROL SAMPLE:

1. Complete a sample of the premixed and site mixed work in an approved location and obtain Engineer or
Engineers Representatives approval before proceeding. Additive Manufacturers representative to be
present to supervise control sample.

1.05 SUBMISSIONS:

A. SAMPLES:

1. Submit sample of any proposed additives before delivery of material generally.

2. Submit sample of any proposed premixed grout before delivery of material generally.

B. PRODUCT DATA:

1. Submit name of manufacturer of premixed grout and additives and specific brand name.

2. Submit copies of manufacturers technical data.

3. Submit copies of manufacturers recommended mixing and placing instructions.

C. METHODS:

1. Prior to commencing work submit details of methods and techniques proposed for the design and execution
of the work.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE

GROUT
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03600-2
A. DELIVERY:

1. Cement: As specified in Section 03300.

2. Premixed Grout and Additive: Materials to be delivered to site in manufacturers unopened containers, the
labels of which shall bear the date of manufacture. Shelf life shall not exceed one year.

B. STORAGE:

1. Cement: As specified in Section 03300.

2. Aggregates: As specified in Section 03300.

3. Premixed Grout and Additives: in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:

A. TEMPERATURE:

1. As specified in Section 03300, and to manufacturers instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER

A. Non Metallic: Use one products of the following manufacturer or approved equal.

1. Sono Grout - (Sonneborn Contech)

2. Five Star Grout (U.S. Grout Ciro.)

3. Masterflor 713 (Master Building Company)
4. Conbextra FOSROC

2.02 PREMIXED GROUT

A. Non shrink non metallic grout formulated to comply with U.S. Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-C-621 and
indicating no decrease in volume change when tested under conditions of ASTM C827. Early volume change of
Cementitious Mixtures.

B. Curing compound (for application to exposed surfaces of grout) conforming to ASTM C-309.

2.03 CEMENT:

A. CEMENT GENERALLY:

1. Portland cement as specified in Section 03300.

2.04 AGGREGATES:

A. GENERALLY:

1. To be as specified in Section 03300.

2. Selected to reduce bleeding to a minimum.

GROUT
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03600-3

B. FINE AGGREGATE:

1. Washed dry sand.

C. COARSE AGGREGATE:

1. Rounded and evenly graded, 10mm nominal size except where pumping is employed when 6mm nominal
size to be used.

2. Percentage passing No. 16 sieve not to exceed 5%.

D. ADDITIVES:

1. To the approval of the Engineer or Engineers Representative.

E. WATER:

1. As specified in Section 03300.

2.05 MIXES:

A. Select the mix proportions and workability for each type of grout to produce the required performance.

B. The minimum characteristic strength of the grout shall be equal to the strength of concrete.

C. Grout for filling uncongested areas over 50mm wide:

1. Mix proportions-1:1.25:1.75 (Cement/fine aggregate/course aggregate) by weight. Or adjusted to meet B
above.

2. Workability - slump 100-200mm.

D. Grout for filling narrow areas less than 50mm wide:

1. Mix proportions - 1:2 (cement : fine aggregate) by weight.

2. Workability - slump to be kept to a minimum to allow placing.

E. Dry packing for area over 75mm wide:

1. Mix proportions - 1:1:2 (cement/fine aggregate/course aggregate
10mm nominal size) by weight.

2. Workability - Slump not to exceed 5 mm.

F. Dry packing for areas less than 75mm wide:

1. Mix proportions - 1:2 (cement : fine aggregate) by weight.

2. Workability - slump not to exceed 5mm.

G. Alternative mixes incorporating additives to be used with the Engineers prior approval.

H. Premixed grout to voids of small widths and apertures of limited accessibility.

GROUT
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03600-4
2.06 FORMWORK:

A. As specified in Section 03300.

B. For smaller areas to manufacturers instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and conditions to which the work of this Section is to be applied to ensure that they are adequate to
provide a satisfactory application.

B. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Engineer or Engineers Representative.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Scab concrete surfaces to provide key.

B. Ensure spaces to receive grout are clean and free from debris.

C. Thoroughly wet surfaces and allow free water to disperse prior to application of grout.

3.03 FORMWORK:

A. Generally refer to Section 03300.

B. Fix edge formwork where necessary.

C. Edge formwork to base plates to be to the level of the plate. Clearance between formwork and plate normally 75mm.

D. Strike formwork within 24 hours of filling or as manufacturers recommendation.

3.04 APPLICATION - PREMIXED GROUT

A. Mix non shrink grout in accordance with manufacturers instructions in relationship to temperature and workability
conditions.

B. Basically in all conditions, materials shall be applied in a plastic or trowelable workable condition, firmly pressed,
rubbed into place or hand trowelled. Should conditions be such that flowable condition be considered more practical,
obtain Engineer or Engineers Representatives prior approval. Flowable application must allow for high points to be
adequately vented to allow entrapped air to escape, and an approved method of containing grout until set.

C. Strike edges clean and compress to conditions as indicated on the drawings.

D. Materials shall be applied in position within one hour of mixing (unless manufacturers literature states otherwise).
After half an hour discard any grout mix that shows signs of stiffening.

E. As soon as grout sets, cure exposed surfaces with curing compound applied in strict accordance with manufacturers
instructions.

3.05 APPLICATION SITE MIXED GROUT

A, MIXING:

GROUT
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03600-5

1. Mix grout by mechanical mixer (colloidal type) for large quantities or by hand for small quantities (one
quarter of cubic metre or less) on a clean, level banker board.

2. Thoroughly mix grout so that all individual constituents are incorporated early.

3. Do not over mix.

4. Use grout as soon as possible after mixing, maximum period 1 hour.

5. Do not use grout after commencement of initial set.

6. Do not re-mix or re-temper grout after commencement of initial set.

B. GENERALLY:

1. Pour grout into recesses or formwork and work into position to completely fill the void.

2. Ram dry packing to ensure optimum compaction.

3. Work from one side to avoid formation of air pockets or voids.

4. Preferably bolt pockets shall be filled at same time as packing to base plates. If separate operation, fill bolt
pockets to within 50mm of the level of the concrete surface before main filling.

5. Do not vibrate grout.

6. Form neat chamfered edge to packing under plates.

7. Do not place grout when concrete temperature is less than 5 Deg. C. or more than 35 Deg. C.

8. Cure grout by covering with moist hessian for not less than 5 days.

3.06 CLEAN-UP

A. Promptly, as the Work proceeds and upon completion, scrape off and remove all grout materials from adjacent
surfaces. Clean up and remove any surplus material and rubbish resulting from the work of this Section.

END OF SECTION

CONCRETE REPAIR
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03998-1

SECTION 03998

CONCRETE REPAIR

PART - 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and
performing all operations in connection with concrete repair works.


A. The work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following agencies as further cited herein:

BS 1881 Concrete Repair

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the specified materials have been successfully utilised on
work of a similar scope to that shown and specified for this Project. The system examples cited shall have been
completed and in use for a minimum two (2) years without any evidence of failure.

B. Concrete repair works shall be executed under supervision of the approved manufacturer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers Data: Submit to the Engineer Manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for the concrete
repair materials and other data to show compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Contractors Review: Before commencing work submit written statement signed by the Contractor stating that the
Contract Documents for the Concrete repair system have been reviewed with a qualified representative of the
Concrete repair system materials manufacturer and that he is in agreement that the selected materials for Concrete
repair system are proper, compatible and adequate for the application shown.


The Contractor shall deliver the approved products to the job site in their original unopened containers clearly labelled
with the manufacturers name, brand, designation, type and class as applicable, and the date of manufacture and
expiration (if any).

Products shall be stored in an approved dry area. Products shall be kept dry at all times.

Products shall be handled in a manner that will prevent breakage of containers and/or damage to the products.


A. Do not fix concrete repair system during inclement weather or when air temperature is outside the range
recommended by the manufacturer.

1.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect of the concrete repair material from damage during construction period so that it will be without any indication
of abuse or damage at time of completion or covering with other materials.

CONCRETE REPAIR
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03998-2

B. Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and dropping of materials. Repair and restore other
work damaged during operations.

C. Prevent materials from running into and clogging drains.

D. Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during delivery, storage and installation of flammable
materials specified herein. Comply with local ordinances and fire regulations in the installation of hazardous materials
specified or required under this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Shrinkage compensated polymer fibre reinforced, thixotropic repair mortar in powdered form and when mixed with the
correct amount of water produces a thixotropic, high strength repair mortar, reinforced with acrylic polymer fibres. The
material must possess bond characteristics to steel reinforcement and to concrete. Material must be shrinkage
compensated, low permeability and durable. Must be able to be both spray or trowel applied.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. The product and manufacturer specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of establishing minimum quality
standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than, those specified may be acceptable subject to the Engineers
approval.

1. Emaco S 88 CT

. 2. FOSROC

3. Alghanim

4. Or Engineers equally approved alternative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONDITIONS OF SURFACES

A. Examine all surfaces to which the Concrete repair is to be done. Do not proceed with the application until all
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and approved by the Engineer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of debris and deleterious material which would impair the work.

B. Preparation of surface shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Application of concrete repair material shall be in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions except as
hereinafter specified.

B. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

CONCRETE REPAIR
Project No.: KW.09.0128 03998-3
C. Application of concrete repair material / system in accordance to the manufacturers instructions. It shall not be applied
during, or when rain or dust storms are to be expected.

END OF SECTION

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04200-1
SECTION 04200

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Furnish and install:
1. Concrete masonry unit construction as back-up for exterior stone walls.
2. Ties or anchorage items as indicated in the Drawings.
3. Reinforcing, ties, anchors, and other metal accessories, for anchoring unit masonry together and
to other materials.
4. Compressible joint fillers for control joints in unit masonry work
5. Built-in masonry flashing.
6. Control joints in concrete masonry.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards and those others referenced in this Section,
under the provisions of Section 01420 - REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified
requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) and American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ACI
530.1/ASCE 6 - Specifications for Masonry Structures
a. Revise ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 - Specifications for Masonry Structures to exclude Sections 1.4
and 1.7; Parts 2.1.2, 3.1.2 and 4.1.2; and Articles 1.5.1.2, 1.5.1.3, 2.1.1.1, 2.1.1.2, and
2.3.3.9 and to modify Article 2.1.1.4 by deleting requirement for installing vent pipes and
conduits built into masonry.
2. "TEK" Information Series, Published by the National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA).
3. ASTM A 82 - Steel Web, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
4. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products.
5. ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
6. ASTM A 641 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
7. ASTM C 5 - Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
8. ASTM C 90 - Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
9. ASTM C129 - Non-Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
10. ASTM C 140 - Method of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.
11. ASTM C 144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
12. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
13. ASTM C 207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
14. ASTM C 270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
15. ASTM C 404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
16. ASTM C 476 - Grout for Masonry.
17. ASTM C 595 - Blended Hydraulic Cement.
18. ASTM C 780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced
Unit Masonry.
19. ASTM C 1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.
20. ASTM C 1072 - Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength

21. ASTM C 1093 - Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry.
22. ASTM D 1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
23. ASTM D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products.
24. ASTM D 2287 - Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion
Compounds.
25. ASTM E 119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
26. ASTM E 447 - Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.
27. IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction

B. The following reference materials are hereby made a part of this Section by reference thereto:
1. UL Fire Resistance Directory.
2. IMI: Masonry Construction Guide Manual.
3. PCA, Concrete Masonry Handbook.
4. NCMA applicable TEK Bulletins.

C. Where the language in any document referred to herein is in the form of a recommendation or suggestion,
such recommendations or suggestions shall be deemed to be mandatory under this Contract. In the event
of conflict between referenced standards, this specification or within themselves, the more stringent standard
or requirement shall govern.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following under provisions of Division I General Requirements:
1. Literature: Manufacturers product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical
properties for each item furnished hereunder.
2. Material certificates: Provide for the following, signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying
that each material complies with requirements.
a. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of
manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery.
b. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.
c. Each type and size of joint reinforcement.
d. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
3. Material test reports from a qualified independent laboratory employed and paid by Contractor
indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following proposed masonry
materials with requirements indicated:
a. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270.
b. Grout mixes: Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.
c. Masonry units; report for tests performed within the previous six months.
4. Samples:
a. Samples of each masonry accessory or anchorage item required, if requested by
Engineer
5. Shop Drawings
a. Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of reinforcement bars and
details for all reinforced masonry. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of
Concrete Reinforcing". Submit bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bending diagrams for
bars and arrangement of masonry reinforcement.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Work shall be done by skilled workmen, fully instructed as to the requirements of this Specifications
and adequately supervised during the work.


A. General: Provide and maintain an effective Quality Control program and perform sufficient inspections,
surveys and tests of all items of Work, including those of other trades, to ensure compliance with the
Contract Documents. Furnish appropriate facilities, accurately calibrated instruments and testing devices
required to perform the quality control operations and with sufficient work forces to cover the construction
operations within the actual construction sequences. Coordinate this work with the quality control
requirements of other technical Sections of the Specifications and with requirements of the Employer and
governing authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Single-source responsibility for concrete masonry units: Obtain concrete masonry units for the project from a
single manufacturer.

C. Single-source responsibility for mortar materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color
for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and
producer for each aggregate.

D. Contractor's Testing: Perform testing in an independent certified testing laboratory acceptable to the
Engineer. Furnish the laboratory sufficient quantities of specimens to comply with referenced testing
standards. Test and furnish test reports for materials specified.
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Testing: After the Engineer's review of samples, test each type, class and
grade of concrete masonry unit specified in accordance with ASTM C140. Provide testing
specimens from actual production batches. Perform the following tests:
a. Compressive strength.
b. Absorption.
c. Moisture content.
d. Weight.
e. Dimensions.
2. Prism Test: Provide a prism test for each type of wall construction indicated. Prism test concrete
masonry units to determine the actual f'm of the CMU wall construction. Construct and test CMU
prisms in accordance with ASTM E447, Method B, and to comply with requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction. Test grouted and hollow CMU wall specimens. Test all CMU
thickness and mortar types intended for use on the Project. Test prisms a minimum of 16 in. in
height.
3. Aggregate Testing: Test aggregate as follows:
a. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
b. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
4. Mortar Testing: Test mortar samples in accordance with ASTM C780 for mortar composition and
properties. Test each mortar type and color each week. Prior to commencement of Work, provide
preconstruction tests to establish a basis for comparison.
5. Grout Testing: Test and submit test reports of grout samples in accordance with ASTM C1019.
Test grout during construction for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. Prior to
commencement of Work, provide preconstruction tests to establish a basis for comparison.
6. Chloride Ion Testing: Test each mortar and grout mix to verify that the total chloride (Cl) ion
content of each mix is within the specified limits. Perform chloride tests in accordance with ACI
318.


A. Fire performance characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies whose fire resistance has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting
organization, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.



A. General: Do not deliver cement, lime, and similar perishable materials to the site until suitable storage is
available. Store such materials in weatherproof structures, and ensure that materials are in perfectly fresh
condition when brought for use. Protect masonry units and manufactured products of all types from wetting
by rain or snow, and keep covered when not in use.

B. Masonry face units: Handle all masonry units carefully in transit and on the site, so as to keep units whole,
with edges sharp, and faces clean and undamaged. Deliver all masonry units on pallets; or handle units
individually, and properly stack same.

C. Aggregates: Deliver, store and handle aggregate materials so as to prevent contamination with earth or
other foreign materials.
1. Store cement, lime and similar products under cover and from direct contact with earth or floor
slabs.

D. Manufactured items: Deliver manufactured products in original containers plainly marked with product
identification and manufacturers name.
1. Store metal accessories and the like under cover and from direct contact with ground, and in
manner to prevent rust.
E. Damaged material: Remove any damaged or contaminated materials from job site immediately, including
materials in broken packages, packages containing water marks, or which show other evidence of damage,
unless Engineer specifically authorizes correction thereof and usage on project.


A. Do not erect masonry when the temperature is below 40 deg. F. unless provisions for heating and drying the
materials and protecting the completed work comply with the requirements specified in Paragraph 2.3.2.2 of
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures". Do not build upon frozen work. Do not lay
masonry units having a film of water or frost on their surfaces.

B. Do not erect masonry when the temperature is above 100 deg. F. or 90 deg. F with a wind velocity greater
than 8 mph to comply with the requirements specified Paragraph 2.3.2.3 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6
"Specifications for Masonry Structures".

1.10 MOCK-UP

A. Build sample wall panels at job site, where directed. Build separate wall panels for each of the following
masonry units:

B. Clean mock-ups with materials and techniques intended for use on the Project.

1.11 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCING

A. Coordinate work with that of other trades which require placement and building-in of, as work progresses,
anchor bolts, wood blocking, hollow metal frames, and anchorage items.

B. Examine all Drawings as to requirements for the accommodation of work of other trades. Provide all required
recesses, chases, slots, and cutouts. Place anchors, bolts, sleeves and other items occurring in the masonry
work. Take every precaution to minimize future cutting and patching. Closely coordinate the location and
placement of such items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Approved Manufacturers

1. Aziz Block Factories

2. Maseelah Blocks & Tiles Company

3. National Industries

4. Hebel Blocks (Light weight)


2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Load bearing solid concrete masonry units for walls to which architectural finishes such as marble, granite
etc. are attached. Conform to ASTM C90, Type 1, Class 1, normal weight :
1. Plain-faced units of nominal thickness indicated on the Drawings, nominal 200 mm by 400 mm
face dimension with light gray color and uniform medium-fine texture, sound, true to plane and
line, and free from chips, cracks, and other defects.
2. Aggregate: sand and gravel: conform to ASTM C 33.
3. Minimum allowable compressive strength for an individual unit of not less than 130 Kg/cm
2
when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 140.
4. Oven dry density: 2 Kg/l (125 pounds per cubic foot).
5. Moisture content for average of 3 units, when delivered, not exceeding 35 percent of the total
absorption, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140.
5. Provide units clearly labeled as Load-bearing.

B. Non-loadbearing solid concrete masonry units at all locations other than those listed in A above.
Conformto ASTMC129, Type 1 :
1. Plain-faced units of nominal thickness indicated on the Drawings, nominal 200 mm by 400 mm
face dimension with light gray color and uniform medium-fine texture, sound, true to plane and
line, and free from chips, cracks, and other defects.
2. Aggregate: sand and gravel, conform to ASTM C 33.
3. Minimum allowable compressive strength for an individual unit of not less than 50 Kg/cm
2
; when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 140.
4. Oven dry density:
a. Normal weight units: 2 Kg/l (125 pounds per cubic foot).
5. Moisture content for average of 3 units, when delivered, not exceeding 35 percent of the total
absorption, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140.
6. Provide units clearly labeled as non-load-bearing.

2.03 MORTAR

A. Mortar: Site-mixed portland cement mortar complying with ASTM C 270 as specified herein.

B. Mortar materials for site mixed mortar:
1. Portland cement for masonry conforming to ASTM C 150, Type I, non-staining, without air
entrainment.
2. Aggregates for grout: Conforming to ASTM C 144 for fine aggregate and ASTM C 404, Size 8 or
89.
3. Aggregate for concrete masonry mortar: Clean, washed uniformly well graded sand conforming to
ASTM C 144. Seive Size Percentage Passing
4. Mortar: Approved brand of plastic hydrated lime, conforming to ASTM C 207, Type S.
5. Water: Clean and fresh without contaminants.

C. Mortar types:
1. General: The total chloride (CL) ion content in the entire mortar or grout mix shall not exceed
0.10% of the weight of cement. Mortar and grout with excess chlorides will be subject to removal.

2. Mortar for masonry below grade or in contact with earth: ASTM C 270 type M using the property
specification.
3. Mortar for load bearing masonry: ASTM C 270 type S using the property specification.
4. Mortar for non-load bearing masonry above grade: ASTM C 270 type N using the property
specification.

2.04 GROUT MIXES

A. Grout: ASTM C476, Portland Cement Grout; provide individual mixes for fine aggregate grout and coarse
aggregate grout as specified.

2.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE MATERIALS

* A. Rod Reinforcement: 6mmsteel pencil rods.

B. Deformed Bar Reinforcement: ASTM A615 steel, Grade 60; hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A123. Provide sizes and spacing as shown.

C. Anchors and Ties: ASTM A951; Steel, hot-dipped heavily galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A153,
Class B-2, complying with the following requirements:
1. Partition Top Anchors: Provide hot dip galvanized steel partition top anchors developed to provide
lateral shear resistance at the upper limit of the masonry walls and permitting

vertical deflection of the slab above; Provide "#PTA420 Partition Top Anchor" and/or "#PTA422 Partition Top Anchor"
(Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.) or approved equal.
2. Anchor Bolts: 2 in. dia., complying with ASTM A307, Grade A, hot-dipped galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A153, Class C; 12 in. long with a 2 in. turned leg, unless otherwise shown.
Provide bolts with galvanized hex nuts and flat washers.
3. Column and Beam Anchors: ASTM A36 steel, 3 in. minimum thickness; hot-dipped galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A153, Class B-1. Provide units of profiles and sizes as required for
locations shown.
4. Wire Ties: 10 gage, looped at both ends.
5. Wire Mesh Ties: 16 gage, 2 in. mesh, 3 in. wide, length as required.
6. Hardware Cloth: 16 ga. 2 in. mesh, size as required.
7. Anchor Straps: 1-3 in. x 1/8 in. by length required, with ends turned up 2 in.

D. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: Truss type, fabricated from 9 ga. cold drawn steel wire complying with
ASTM A82; hot dip galvanized as per ASTM A153 Class B2; deformed side rods; smooth cross rods; out to
out spacing of side rods not less than 2 in. less than nominal wall dimension. Provide manufacturer's
standard or custom fabrications to comply with the specified requirements.

E. Reinforcing steel, additional to rods which are embedded in concrete: As specified under Section 03300 -
Cast-in-Place Concrete.

F. Stone anchors, dowels, ties, cramps and supports: ASTM A 580 Type 304 stainless steel; of sizes and
configurations required for horizontal and vertical support of stone and applicable superimposed loads.
1. Bolts, washers and nuts used with stone anchors and supports shall be type 316 stainless steel.

2.05 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Exposed flashing: cold-rolled sheet copper 16 ounce per square foot, lead coated at rate of 3.40 kg per
9.29m
2
(7.5 pounds per 100 square feet).

B. Concealed flashing: Copper-fabric flashing consisting of 5 ounce (per square foot) sheet copper permanently
bonded between two layers of ductile asphalt impregnated woven fiberglass fabric, equal to:
1. Afco Products, Somerville MA, 001-617-623-7700, product Copper-Fabric Flashing.
2. Advanced Building Products, Inc., Springvale ME, 001-207-490-2306, product Copper-Fabric
Flashing.
3. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc., Amsterdam NY, 001-518-843-0093, product Copper-
Fabric.

C. Lap sealant for concealed flashing: Cut-back fibered asphalt type recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self-expanding,
continuous in length, and in width to fill the joint to a point 20 mm (3/4 inch) back from each face of wall or
partition.

B. Compressible filler for joints at tops of non-load bearing masonry partitions, and for expansion joints in
masonry walls: Closed cell PVC foam board, soft grade, 25 percent thicker than joint width, continuous in
length, and in width to fill the joint to a point 20 mm (3/4 inch) back from each face of wall or partition.

C. Premolded control joints for concrete masonry construction: Solid rubber of profile as indicated (to maintain
lateral stability of wall), 60-80 shore A hardness.

D. Weeps: 9 mm (3/8 inch) outside diameter, minimum 90 mm (3-1/2 inches) long polyethylene hollow tubes,
with stainless steel mesh screen insert and cotton wick.
1. Dur-O-Wal, Aurora IL, 001-630-851-8400, model 1005.
2. Hohmann & Barnard, Hauppauge NY, 001-516-234-0600, model 341.
Or equal approved by engineer.

E. Mortar netting: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) course geotextile fabric having a 90 percent open weave
mesh, with stepped topped edging, shaped in a manner to catch and hold mortar droppings and preventing
blockage of weep hole vents, nominal 25 mm (1 inch) thick by 1.5 m (5 feet) long by 250 mm (10 inches)
high.
1. Hohmann & Barnard, Hauppauge NY, 001-516-234-0600, product Mortar Net.
2. Mortar Net USA, Ltd., Highland IN., 001-219-972-6320, product Mortar Net.

F. Cleaning solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

G. Stone setting buttons shall be of plastic or lead.

2.07 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortar and grout in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 270, ASTM C 94, and ASTM C 476 as
applicable. Control batching procedure to ensure proper proportions by measuring materials by volume.
Amount of mixing water and mortar consistency shall be controlled by mason.

B. Compressive Strength: Minimum 28-day strength as follows:
1. Type N: 750 psi.
2. Type S for Reinforced Masonry Only: 1800 psi.

C. Use accurate measuring devices to mix materials by volume. The use of shovels for measurement is
prohibited.

D. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before mixing process.

E. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Provide uniformity of mix
and coloration.

F. Pouring grout shall be fluid consistency (as fluid as possible for pouring without separation of constituent
parts).

G. Mix only sufficient mortar as required at a given time. Retempering will be permitted only within the first two
hours of initial mix. Discard mortar that has partially set.

2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Preconstruction testing: Contractor will employ and pay a qualified independent testing laboratory to perform
the following preconstruction testing indicated as well as other inspecting and testing services required by
referenced unit masonry standard or indicated herein for source and field quality control:
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each different concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be
tested for strength, absorption, and moisture content per ASTM C 140.
2. Prism tests: For each type of wall construction indicated, masonry prisms will be tested per ASTM
E 447, Method B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive the work of this Section.

B. Verify built-in and other items provided by separate Sections of the work are properly sized and located.
C. Verify foundation walls supporting masonry is constructed within tolerances required by code

D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of site conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Foundations:
1. Do not commence installation until foundations are clean, rough, and level.
2. Sandblast the foundation tops, if necessary, and remove all laitance and foreign material.
3. Verify that the foundation elevation is such that the bed joint thickness shall not vary from specified
thickness, and that the foundation edge is true to line with masonry not projecting over more than
6 mm (1/4 inch).

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure
provides permanent bracing.

C. Protect surfaces of windows, door frames, louvers and vents as well as similar finish products with painted
and integral finishes from mortar droppings and stains.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the related documents as specified in
Paragraph "Standards".


B. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for
accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of
less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations.

C. Lay masonry plumb, true to line with level and accurately spaced courses; corners plumb and true; each
course breaking joint with the course below, except as may be otherwise indicated or specified. Maintain
plumb bond. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above and install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.

D. Anchor, tie, reinforce and bond masonry at corners and intersections in accordance with the applicable
requirements of governmental authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment,
complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening.

F. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 2-unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3-unit
length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry
units lightly (if required), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

G. No cracked, chipped, broken, discolored, defaced or open celled units will be permitted on exposed
masonry.

H. Cutting, patching and repairing in connection with masonry work as required to accommodate the work of
other trades shall be performed under this Section.

I. Use motor driven diamond saw designed to cut masonry units with clean sharp corners. Cut units as
required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever
possible. Avoid the use of less than half-size units at corners, jambs and at other locations.

J. Joints: Tool exposed joints slightly concave unless otherwise shown. For surfaces to be plastered, rake
joints to obtain bond. Lay masonry unit with uniform joint widths. Tool joints to squeeze mortar back into
joints. Tool after mortar has taken its initial set. At inside face of exposed masonry air shafts, strike joints
flush.

K. Anchors and Ties: Provide loose anchors and ties where shown and where required to supplement other
reinforcement specified and in accordance with the applicable requirements of governmental authorities
having jurisdiction..
1. Space loose anchors and ties a maximum of 16 in. o.c. horizontally and vertically.
2. Set anchors, with vertical legs, within the core of the masonry wythe and fill core solid with mortar
or grout.
3. Provide wire mesh ties, hardware cloth, or expanded lath below core space to retain mortar or
grout at embedded anchors.
4. Provide loose anchors at columns, beams and other structural elements as shown and as required
to support imposed loads. Install anchors to structural elements to prevent rattle and lateral
displacement in any direction.

L. Install loose lintels, relieving angles and other miscellaneous support steel where shown. Adjust as required
to provide square, level, plumb and true openings for attachment and alignment of other work. Grout lintels
fully. Provide minimum lintel bearing at each jamb of 4 in. for openings that do not exceed 6 ft. and 8 in. for
openings in excess of 6 ft.
1. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 in.) under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise shown.

2. At underside of relieving angles and other miscellaneous support steel where shown or required,
provide compressible filler.

3.04 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum variation from true surface level for exposed to view walls and partitions:
1. Unit-to-unit tolerance: 2 mm (1/16 inch).
2. Surface, overall tolerance: 6 mm (1/4 inch) in 3000mm (10 feet) in any direction and 12 mm (1/2
inch) in 6000 mm (20 feet) or more.
a. Where both faces of single wythe wall or partition will be exposed to view, request and
obtain decision from the Engineer as to which face will be required to conform to the
specified surface level tolerance.
B. Maximum variation from plumb: For lines and surfaces of walls do not exceed 6 mm (1/4 inch) in 3000mm
(10 feet), 9 mm (3/8 inch) in any story up to 6000 mm (20 feet) maximum. At expansion joints and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 6 mm (1/4 inch) in 3000mm (10 feet).

C. Maximum variation from level: For lines of sills, tops of walls and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3
mm (1/8 inch) in 900 mm (3 feet), 6 mm (1/4 inch) in 3000mm (10 feet), and 12 mm (1/2 inch) in 9000mm
(30 feet).

D. Maximum variation of linear building line: For position shown in plan relating to columns, walls and partitions,
do not exceed 12 mm (1/2 inch) in 6000 mm (20 feet) or 19 mm (3/4 inch) in 12000mm (40 feet).

E. Maximum variation in specified height: 12 mm (1/2 inch) per story.

F. Maximum variation of joint thickness: 3 mm (1/8 inch) in 75 mm (3 feet).

G. Maximum horizontally projected unsupported masonry unit: 28 mm (1-1/8 inches).

3.05 COURSING, BONDS AND JOINTS

A. Coursing, joints and bond pattern: Running bond except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
1. Exposed to view masonry: except as specified below, fill all joints with mortar, strike off flush, and
when mortar is thumb print hard tool joints with a non-staining tool. Joints shall be free of drying
crack.
a. Horizontal joints
i. Exterior joints at concrete masonry units: Rake joints, brush clean, point with
mortar to a flat cut joint. When thumbprint hard, the joints and beds shall be
tooled with a round jointer having a diameter 1/8 inch larger than the width of
the joint
ii. Interior joints (all): Tool joints flush.
b. Vertical joints (all): Tool joints flush.
2. Concealed from view masonry, including masonry which will be concealed by flashings and similar
materials: Fill joints with mortar and strike joints flush. Concave tool exterior joints below grade.

3.06 CONTROL JOINTS

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints.

B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with
manufacturers recommendation.

C. Locate control joints where shown on Drawings, at corners adjacent to openings in masonry, changes in wall
height and intersections with structural walls as approved by Engineer.

D. Size control joints in accordance with the requirements of Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

3.07 LAYING MASONRY - GENERAL

A. Build the masonry walls and partitions in the various combinations and thickness as indicated on the
Drawings.

B. Erect all masonry work in compliance with the line and level tolerances specified herein. Hold uniform joint
sizes. Correct, or replace, as directed by the Engineer, non-conforming masonry work at no additional cost
to the Contract.

C. Lay out coursing before setting to minimize cutting closures or jumping bond, Avoid the use of less-than-half-
size units.

D. Laying masonry units:
1. Lay masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints; uniformly joint with other work.
2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
3. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
4. Interlock intersections and external corners.
5. Cut all exposed masonry with a motor-driven carborundum blade saw to ensure straight and clean,
unchipped edges.
a. Lay no unit having chipped edges or face defects where such unit would be exposed to
view. Remove any such unit, if installed, and replace with an undamaged unit, and bear
all costs therefor.
6. Do not spread any more mortar than can be covered before surface of mortar has begun to dry.
7. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made,
remove entirely, clean off mortar, and reset with fresh mortar.
8. Except for cleaning down and repointing, finish all masonry as the walls and partitions are carried
up.

E. Build-in reinforcement and anchorage items as the work progresses, grouting for secure anchorage.
1. Where steel reinforcing rods have been cast into concrete slabs, and left with upturned ends,
carefully place masonry units down over the upturned ends of the rods, and fill cells of masonry
units with specified grout.

F. Except as indicated otherwise, isolate masonry from overhead structure:
1. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint.
2. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or
decks with compressible joint filler.
G. Provide control joints at 9000 mm (30 feet) on center maximum spacing, and keep clean of mortar
droppings.

H. Provide complete protection against breakage and weather damage to all masonry work, including
substantial wood boxing around door jambs, over the tops of walls and wherever necessary to protect work
at all stages of completion. Protect masonry when not roofed over, at all times when masons are not working
on the walls. Apply tarpaulins or waterproof paper, properly weighted, or nailed, to assure their remaining in
place to protect masonry from all possible hazards.

I. Point and fill all holes and cracks in new mortar joints with additional fresh mortar; do not merely spread
adjacent mortar over defect or use dead mortar droppings. Do all pointing while mortar is still soft and
plastic. If hardened, chisel defect out and refill solidly with fresh additional mortar, and tool or rake joints as
specified herein.

J. If the temperature is in excess of 80 degrees Fahrenheit at time of installation, lightly moisten contact
surfaces of masonry units by brushing with water.

3.08 FLASHING

A. Provide and build-in through-wall flashings at lintels, heads and sills of openings and infill openings.
Additionally provide flashing where indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein and all conditions which
may be considered similar to those indicated on the Drawings.
1. Install flashing dripedge with hemmed 45 degree edge extending beyond face of masonry. Ensure
through-wall flashing is in proper position in wythe without forming pockets. Lap through-wall
flashing over top of dripedge 12 mm to 19 mm (1/2 to 3/4 inch) behind face of masonry; mastic
between flashings.
2. Extend flashing to back up wall, turn up a minimum of 200 mm (8 inches) and terminate as follows:
a. Concrete - terminate into reglet.
b. Masonry - terminate into horizontal joint of masonry, extending to 12 mm (1/2 inch) of
interior face of wall, turning back 25 mm (1 inch) on itself.
c. Metal stud and gypsum sheathing - terminate behind sheathing, securing top edge of
flashing to face of stud with 12 mm (1/2 inch) type S-12 low profile head screws.
3. Form end dams at horizontal terminations; turn flashing, fold and seal (not cut) at corners, bends
and interruptions. Seal watertight using flashing manufacturers recommended adhesive and
sealer.
4. Carry head flashing 150 mm (6 inches) beyond both ends of lintels. At steel lintels, apply a heavy
bed coat of compatible adhesive mastic and embed thru-wall flashing in the mastic before laying
brick.
5. Apply surface conditioner over dirty and dusty surfaces, over concrete block, over surfaces having
irregular or rough texture, and those conditions where recommended by wall flashing
manufacturer.
6. Apply flashings to substrates, when properly positioned, remove release paper and adhere to
substrate, press firmly into place.
7. Overlap adjacent pieces of flashings 50 mm (2 inches), roll all overlaps with steel hand roller or
blunt object.
8. At heads, sills and other horizontal terminations of flashing, turn-up ends a minimum of 50 mm (2
inches), cut and make careful folds to form a pan and seal with flashing mastic.
9. Seal all punctures with an elastic cement mastic recommended by flashing manufacturer.

C. Build-in counter flashing as indicated in the Drawings and as specified herein.
1. Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections that might puncture or otherwise
damage flashing membrane.
2. Carefully fit flashing around projections, neatly fold and bed in mastic or mortar so as to direct
moisture to the outside. Form flashing to required profiles without wrinkles or buckles and install in
such a manner as to direct moisture to the outside.

3.09 CAVITY WALL CONSTRUCTION

A. Build inner wythe of cavity walls ahead of outer wythe to receive insulation and air/vapor barrier adhesive.
1. Install continuous row of mortar netting at base of wall and over all wall openings directly onto
flashing. Install multiple thickness of mortar as required to match cavity widths and if excessive
droppings are expected.

B. Install mortar netting against back of outside wythe with dovetail section facing up. Cut netting as required to
prevent contact with wall ties, conduit, plumbing and or other materials that bridge or intrude into cavity.

C. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space
or to plug weeps.

D. Anchorage for stone veneer: Install specified anchors as shown on Drawings, if not shown, install one
anchor every 400 mm (16 inches) horizontal and vertical.
1. Place additional anchors around perimeter of openings and within 300 mm (12 inches) of ends of
walls.
2. Place additional wall ties on each side of expansion joints, install within 100 mm (4 inches) of joint.

3.10 WEEP HOLES

A. Provide weep holes in head joints in first course of veneer immediately above all through-wall flashing, shelf
angles, lintels and bottoms of walls.

B. Install weep hole tube/rope in head joint., provide 800 mm (32 inch), or greater, lengths.

C. Space weep holes as follows:
1. Stonework: 600 mm (24 inches) on center maximum.

D. Keep weep holes and area above flashing free of mortar droppings.

3.11 ENGINEERED MASONRY

A. Lay masonry units with core cells vertically aligned and clear of mortar and unobstructed.

B. Place mortar in masonry unit bed joints back 6 mm(1/4 inch) from edge of unit grout spaces, bevel back and
upward. Permit mortar to cure 7 calendar days before placing grout.

C. Refer to the Drawings for locations where vertical steel reinforcing rods will be required in masonry walls.
Reinforce masonry unit cores with reinforcement bars and grout.

D. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at intervals not exceeding 192 bar
diameters. Splice reinforcement in accordance with Section 03300.

E. Wet masonry unit surfaces in contact with grout just prior to grout placement.

F. Grout spaces less than 50 mm (2 inches) in width with fine grout using low lift grouting techniques. Grout
spaces 50 mm (2 inches) or greater in width with course grout using high or low grouting techniques.

G. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) below top of upper
masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout placement.

H. Low lift grouting: Place first lift of grout to a height of 400 mm (16 inches) and rod for grout consolidation. Place
subsequent lifts in 200mm (8 inch) increments and rod for grout consolidation.

3.12 BUILDING-IN WORK

A. As work progresses install built-in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, wood
nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates and other items to be built-in the work.

B. Install built-in items plumb and level; take care not to distort alignment of such items.

C. Bed anchors of metal frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout except where joints
are indicated to receive caulking and sealant. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 25 mm (1
inch) from framed openings.

1. Rake joints to receive sealant to a uniform depth of 19 mm (3/4 inch) for installation of caulking
and sealant.

D. Do not build-in organic materials subject to deterioration.

3.13 BUILDING-IN LINTELS

A. Install loose lintels over all openings, whether or not scheduled.

B. Where not detailed otherwise, maintain 200 mm (8 inches) minimum bearing for lintels on each side of
opening.

3.14 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Reinforce horizontal joints with continuous masonry joint reinforcement, spaced 400 mm (16 inches)
vertically commencing one course above supporting concrete slab.

B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joint above and below openings. Extend 400
mm (16 inches) each side of opening.

C. Place joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.

D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 150 mm (6 inches). .

E. Install preformed units (or optional field-formed units) at corners, reveals, and offsets in exterior masonry, at
intersections of all masonry walls and partitions, and wherever walls and partitions change directions.

F. Do not bridge control and expansion joints in the wall system.

G. Embed anchors in concrete. Attach to structural steel members. Embed anchorages in every second block.
Embed anchorages in sixth brick joint.

3.15 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Loading: Do not apply loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls and partitions. Do not apply
concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry columns, walls or partitions.

B. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at
end of each days work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 600 mm (24 inches) down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
2. Where one wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure
cover a minimum of 600 mm (24 inches) down face next to un-constructed wythe and hold cover in
place.

C. Stain prevention: Provide protection and prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of exposed
masonry and building finishes. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter.
1. Remove immediately all grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
D. Curing
Block to be properly wet before using on site to avoid absorbing moister from the mortar. Start curing the
block walls 8 hours after construction for a minimum period of 7 days.

3.16 CLEANING

A. During the progress of the work, keep the exposed surfaces of masonry clean at all times, and protected
against damage. As each segment of the masonry is erected, dry-brush the surfaces free from mortar spots
and droppings.

B. Prior to performing the final cleaning work, examine all face joints in exposed masonry to locate cracks, holes or
other defects in the mortar; and point up all such defects and fill with mortar as specified herein. Where necessary,
in the opinion of the Engineer, cut out defective joints in masonry and replace with new materials, exercising
extreme care to match original work.

C. At a time approved by the Engineer, perform final cleaning operations on all masonry as specified herein.
1. Perform the final cleaning work only when the ambient temperature is above 40 degrees
Fahrenheit, and rising.
2. Do not use wire brushes or other abrasive tools in the cleaning operations.
3. Perform final cleaning operations from the top down. If masonry cleaning work is performed after
windows, doors, frames, and other work has been installed, provide complete protection for said
items; be fully responsible for any damage due to the cleaning operations.
4. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or
chisels.
5. Perform final cleaning of masonry units by scrubbing with stiff bristle fiber brushes and clear water,
changing the water frequently.

D. Provide suitable protective coverings for all other surfaces and materials during the final cleaning
procedures, and bear full responsibility for correcting any damage caused by these operations, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

EXTERIOR STONEWORK 04400-1

SECTION 04400

EXTERIOR STONEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Work Included:
1. Exterior random facing to walls including all fixings and accessories.
2. Exterior stone facing.
3. Exterior stone paving
4. Stone copings.
5. Stone Krebs and dividing strips.
6. Window surrounds sills and base to glass screen
Etc. As shown in the drawings.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Fabricator: A firm with a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the fabrication of stone units of
similar sizes, shapes, materials and finishes to the units required for this Project, and which has ample
production facilities to produce, furnish and supply the units as required for installation without delay to the
Work.

B. Erector: A firm with a minimum of 5 years experience in the successful erection of stone units of similar
sizes and shapes and of similar quantities to the units required for this Project.

1.03 STANDARDS

A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable
provisions and recommendations of the following:
1. National Building Granite Quarries Association (NBGQA) "Specifications For Building Granite".
2. Indiana Limestone Institute of America ( ILI) "Indiana Limestone Institute Handbook".
3. Marble Institute of America (MIA) "Design Manual".

B. Where the language in any document referred to herein is in the form of a recommendation or suggestion,
such recommendations or suggestions shall be deemed to be mandatory under this Contract.

1.04 MOCK-UPS

A. Following approval of sample slabs construct mock-ups as follows to the satisfaction of the Engineer:
1. Provide approx. 3 meter high by 5 meter wide mock-ups of every type of stonework and location.
Assemble mockups to simulate final condition, direction of graining, and showing joint conditions.
Erect the mock-ups adequately reinforced and braced to sustain imposed loads. Build in all items
of anchorage and supports. Show pointing where relevant.
2. Alter or revise mock-ups as directed, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The approved mock-ups
shall remain as the standards of aesthetics and workmanship for the Project. Mock-ups, if
approved, may be utilized in the final work.

1.05 DESCRIPTIONS OF EXTERIOR WALL FACING SYSTEM


(Stone Type: To be Selected by Owner)

A.
1. Mandatory Dimensions : Heights and lengths and pattern of stones will be as shown on drawing
No. A-222, Detail 2.
2. Dimensions : Height of courses and length of stones as measured from the drawings.
3. Corners shall be cut and rounded to form L shaped profiles.
4. Provide stone shapes as shown on drawing.
5. The thickness and number of supports shown in the drawing are minum.

D. J oints for Stone: Wherever mechanical fixation is not indicated, joints shall be pointed and finished
with a depressed square section over the entire width of the joint, 5mm deep; Color of pointing
mortar to match stone. J oint pattern shall be continuous and random horizontal joints and random
vertical joints as defined on the drawings. Width of joints shall be as shown on drawings.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop and Setting Drawings: Submit shop and setting drawings of stonework. Show in detail the
dominant face grain pattern, the jointing, anchors and dowels, dimensions, sizes and locations of
cut-outs, relation to work of other trades, and all other pertinent data and information. Number
each piece on the setting drawings to correspond to the identification number on the back of each
stone.
1. Submit procedures for the replacement of stones after installation for each type of setting
method.
2. Submit shop and setting drawings of stone installations. Show in detail the wall and
paving patterns, differentiating between finishes, dimensions, jointing, setting bed system
and underlayment, edge conditions, anchors and locations of cut-outs, relation to work of
other trades, and all other pertinent data and information.

B. Samples: Submit the following:
1. Stone Samples: 12 in. sq. x thickness shown sample slabs of each type and finish of
stone specified, indicative of the entire range of materials and their respective finishes.
2. Grout Samples: For each color required, showing the full range of exposed color and
texture expected in completed Work.

C. Single Source Availability Certification: After review of samples by the Engineer and prior to
fabrication, certify in writing and submit evidence required indicating that sufficient quantity of
materials within the range of accepted mock-up materials is available from a single quarry to satisfy
the total requirements of the Project.

D. Test Results: Provide coefficient of friction test results for all stone pavers assemblies.

E. Substrate Acceptability: Prior to commencing erection, submit a certified statement issued by
each firm awarded stone paver and facing work attesting that all areas to receive stone facings and
pavers have been inspected and found satisfactory for the reception of this Work. Application will
be construed as acceptance of surfaces.

F. Maintenance Manual: Submit two copies of an assembled and bound maintenance manual,
describing the materials, devices and procedures to be followed in cleaning and maintaining each
specified type stone and glass paver. Provide information re : procedures for replacement of
stonework for all different systems.

G. Stone Standards:

Stone: Architectural flat stock stone complying with the recommendations and standards as published by the
National Building Granite Quarriers Association and ASTM C615.


H. Fabrication Tolerances:
Thicknesses: + 3 mm, - 0 mm after finishing.
All exposed stone edges to be gauged so that abutting stones have a constant thickness.

Overall length of piece: +/- 1.5 mm in overall unit dimension.

Overall height of piece: +/- 1.0 mm in overall unit dimension.

Requirements for dowel holes:

All dowel holes to be drilled at works (in the factory).
Location measured along thickness +/- 1mm (to be measured from the exposed face).
Depth +3 / -1 mm.
Diameter +1 / -0.5 mm.

J. Thickness:

Granite: Minimum 1-3/16 (30 mm) (after finishing) with special thicknesses as shown or required to suit
detailing through 100%Construction Documents.

Species and Finishes: Obtain each type of exterior stone from a single source with resources to
provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties, including the capacity to
acquire, handle, cut and finish (fabricate), and supply material without delaying the progress of the Work and
who has a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the fabrication of stone cladding of similar sizes,
shapes, and finishes as required for the Work.

Granite: Natural Stone Granite with a polished finish matching Architects sample range. A polished finish
shall be defined as a uniform highly reflective mirror gloss finish with the full color and crystal structure of the
stone visible through the finish. Evidence of swirl shall not be permitted.

Black Basalt stone: with a honed finish matching the Architects samples. A honed finish is defined as a
uniform finish with dull sheen and no evidence of swirl.

Minimum Physical Properties:

K. Granite:

Absorption by Weight: 0.14%maximum per ASTM C97*.

Density: 2800 kg/m
3
minimum per ASTM C97*.

Compressive Strength: 25,000 psi minimum per ASTM C170*.

Flexural Strength: 2.8 N/mm
2
minimum per ASTM C880*.

Modulus of Rupture: 2200 psi minimum per ASTM C99*.

* = Test methods only. . The acceptance criteria is defined in ASTM C 615.

L. Black Basalt.


Flexure strength, 24.6MPA

Water absorption, 0.584%

Compressive strength, 142.4MPA

Density, 2850 kg/m

Stone slabs for samples, visual mock-ups, and sample installations will be required.

1.07 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Stone Pavers
1. Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum abrasive hardness of 10, as determined per ASTM
C241.
2. Static Coefficient of Friction: Per ASTM C1028:
a. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
b. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6.
c. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
3. Coefficient of Friction Testing: ASTM C1028: "Standard Test Method For Evaluating the
Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal
Dynamometer Pull Method"; 12 tests in total, 6 tests each wet and dry. Samples shall be
finished as proposed for use on the Project.


A. Carefully pack and load finished stone for shipment and take necessary precautions against
damage in transit. Do not use material for blocking and packing that would cause staining or
discoloration and exercise care to prevent staining during the storage period.

B. Deliver packaged setting materials in the original packages and containers of the manufacturer.
Keep aggregate dry and free from soiling.

1.09 WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Employer of other rights the Employer may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and are in addition to and run concurrent
with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STONE

A. General: Provide stone of soundness (hardness and density), texture, graining, finish, crystal
patterning, color and tone matching samples available for viewing at the Gulf Consult Offices.
Stone shall be sound and free from defects which will impair strength, durability, finish appearance
and is supplied from a single quarry source, with sufficient capacity to satisfy the total requirements
of the project.
1. Single Quarry : Quarry and fabrication plant facilities shall be available for the
Employer's inspection at any time.
2. Stone: Provide the stone types in the materials schedule shown on drawings
3. Visual Qualities of Stone: The color, grain and general character of all stone provided
shall be of a range consistent with the samples approved by the Engineer. Stone which, in
the opinion and judgement of the Engineer, fails to comply with this requirement may be
rejected by the Engineer at any time during the course of the Work. The Contractor shall
bear all the costs associated with the removal and replacement of such rejected stone
with acceptable material.


2.02 FIXINGS

A. Stone Anchors: Provide anchors embedded within stone in sizes, configurations and profiles as
shown or as required to sustain imposed loads without exceeding allowable design stresses, and
install anchorages and supports free from rattle or displacement.
Select stainless steel for this project :
1. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302 or 304.
a. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A666, Stretcher level sheets.
b. Bar Stock: ASTM A276.
c. Angles: AISI Type 304.
d. Pins, Dowels, Rods and Other Custom Anchors: AISI Type 304.
2. Fasteners and Anchorage Devices: Type, grade, class and style best suited for the
respective purpose.
a. Fasteners for Stainless Steel Stone Anchors: Fasteners for Stainless-Steel
Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers of same alloy as
anchors. ASTM F593 for bolts and ASTM F594, for nuts.

C. Anchor Inserts: Provide stainless steel inserts located in masonry or concrete for the attachment
of stone anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed.

D. Cushions: Clear plastic shims and/or 50 Durometer neoprene pads non-staining, sized to suit
joint thicknesses and bed depths of stonework involved without intruding into required depths of
mortar joints or joint sealants or causing third-side adhesion between sealant and cushions.

2.03 MIXES AND MORTARS

A. Epoxy Cement: Epoxy resin based adhesive in grade (liquid or knife grade) as recommended by
manufacturer for purpose intended.

B. White Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, non-staining in accordance with the definition and
test requirements of ASTM C91.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

D. Sand: Pure silica sand complying with ASTM C144 sieve size or white marble dust.

E. Shrinkage Reducing Accelerator: "Sika Set" (Sika Corp.), or equal.

F. Mineral Coloring Pigments: Finely ground, synthetic, limeproof, non-fading mineral oxides
having purity of 98%; maximum additive of 5% of the cement by weight.

G. Water: Clear and free of deleterious material which would impair the Work.

H. Mortar for Setting Stone Paving: One part waterproof white Portland cement, four parts sand.
Mix as dry as can be worked.

I. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Proportion and mix Portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with directions of latex additive
manufacturer and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface at time stone is set.

J . Mortar for Setting All Other Stone: One part white Portland cement, one part hydrated lime, five
parts sand. Provide waterproof admixture for exterior stone.

K. Pointing Mortar: One part white Portland cement, two parts sand, mineral coloring admixture as
required to match stone. Mixed as dry as can be worked. Provide waterproof admixture for
exterior pointing.

L. Grout for Paving Joints: Mix grout in proportions by volume of one part Portland cement to 2
parts aggregate to match Engineers sample for color. Use only enough water to produce grout
with consistency of thick cream. Add latex additive in proportion and concentration recommended


by admixture manufacturer. Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color
required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1-to-10, by weight.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES

A. Prior to installation examine surfaces to receive stone and do not proceed until any defects
detrimental to the finished work are corrected, including moisture protection, structural supports,
provisions for expansion, or any other condition which might affect the finished work in
appearance, or integrity of the completed installation.

B. Verify all measurements and dimensions, coordinate the installation of inserts for this work and
coordinate and schedule this work with the work of other trades. Give particular attention to the
location and size of cutouts required to accommodate mechanical, electrical, and other work or
adjoining construction, in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings for such trade.

C. Review and approve shop drawings of items or assemblies related to the support or anchorage of
stone work, including requirements for clearances for proper installation.

3.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Accurately cut, dress, drill, fit and finish stone work to shapes and dimensions shown on Drawings
and final shop and setting drawings. Make exposed plane surfaces true in line.

B. Cut all joints and edges square and at right angles to face, and with backs parallel to face. Make
arises straight, sharp, true, and continuous at joints.

C. Cut and drill stones in shop as required for supports, anchors, ties, bolts, and other inserts. Cut
slots, kerfs, holes and other recessed cutouts leaving smooth surfaces and eased intersections
between changes of surfaces planes, free from sharp edges and arises, to reduce stresses at
anchor locations.

D. Allow for expansion and contraction within the limits of the joint material when cutting for anchorage
devices.

E. Carefully inspect finished stones at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements relative to
qualities of appearance, material, and fabrication; replace defective stones with ones that do
comply. Grade and mark stones for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural
variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stones match range of colors and other
appearance characteristics represented in approved samples and field-constructed mock-ups.

F. Dimensional Tolerances : As follows :
a. Height : +/- 1.5 mm
b. Width : +/- 1.5 mm
c. Thickness : +1.5 mm 0.0 mm
d. Out of Square : +/- 1.5 mm
e. Exposed Face Flatness : +/- 1.5 mm

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish items requiring building in to concrete or masonry work, along with location drawings, in
sufficient time so as not to delay job progress.

B. Set and anchor stone in accordance with applicable requirements and specifications of the trade
association referenced in Paragraph "Standards" unless otherwise shown or specified.

C. Set stone in accordance with final setting drawings, level, plumb, square, and true with uniform
joints, accurately aligned with grain running in the direction shown.

D. The quality of field cutting shall be the same as for shop cutting.

E. Provide fixings in sufficient quantity to eliminate "rattle" or loose pieces and to ensure a rigid
installation. Extent of anchorage and installation details shown are intended to indicate minimum
requirements. Additional anchorage shall be provided where necessitated by size, thickness,
setting or shape. Where shown or required, provide stone liners properly sized and secured to


backside of stone facing with epoxy adhesive. Adhesives, when utilized shall not be allowed to
contribute to the structural capacity of the anchor assembly.

F. Make joint widths, as shown on the drawings.

G. Exterior Wall Facing : Set wall stones before landscape finishes or paving are completed. Secure
with fixings as required for rigid installation, cemented in place with material used for spotting.
Butter joints fully as each panel is set, using mortar with mineral color added to match stone. Use
plastic cushions and spacers where required to maintain uniform joints. After setting, tool joints
flush and smooth.

H. Paving (Mortar Set)
1. Saturate substrate with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
2. Apply cement-paste slush coat over surface of substrate about 15 minutes before placing
setting bed. Limit area of slush coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do
not exceed 1.5mm thickness for cement-paste slush coat.
3. Apply mortar setting bed over cement-paste slush coat immediately after slush coat has
been applied. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations
required for accurate setting of stone to finished grades indicated. Mix and place only as
much mortar setting bed as can be covered with stone before initial set. Cut back, bevel
edge, remove, and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set before placing
stone.
4. Place reinforcing wire fabric, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and supported so mesh
becomes embedded in middle of setting bed. Do not butt edges against vertical surfaces.
5. Place stone before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing stone on
setting bed, apply uniform 1.5mm thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each stone
unit with a flat trowel. Tamp stone into setting bed with mallet until firmly bedded to the
proper level. Set each unit in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to
areas already set and disturb stone for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or
adjusting joints.
6. Where grinding is required to completely align and level joints, permit a minimum of six
days of setting time to elapse before commencing. Perform grinding by wet abrasion, in a
manner as to retain the finish, to match the balance of stone paving, and so as to be free
of depressions and grind marks. Exercise care to avoid damage or soiling of adjacent
work.
7. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into joints,
taking care not to smear grout on adjoining stone and other surfaces. After initial set of
grout, finish joints by tooling to produce a slightly concave polished joint, free from drying
cracks. Do not use sanded grout for polished stone. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp
condition for 7 days, except as otherwise recommended by latex additive manufacturer.
8. Installation Tolerances
a. Variation in Line: For position shown in plan and continuous joint lines, do not
exceed 3mm in 3.0 m, 4.5mm in 7.0m or 4.5mm maximum.
b. Variation in Surface Plane of Paving: Do not exceed 3mm in 3.0 m, 4.5mm in
7.0m or 4.5mm maximum. maximum from level or slope indicated.
c. Variation in J oint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1.50 mm or one-
fourth of the nominal joint width, whichever is less.
d. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 0.75m
difference between planes of adjacent units.


3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. General
1. Variation from Plumb: 1.5mm in 3 meter
3mm in story height, noncumulative
2. Variation from level +/- 1.5mm in any bay or
for horizontal lines: 7m, noncumulative

B. Match finished work to mock-up.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. After initial cleaning, provide non-staining temporary wood guards at corners and other surfaces
subject to damage.

B. Stone Paver Protection: Rope off pavings to permit curing of setting bed and prohibit traffic from
installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours. Protect stone paving during construction with
nonstaining craft paper or other materials as recommended by the Installer. Protect work from
damage due to subsequent building operations. Remove all protection when directed.

C. Protect work from damage due to subsequent building operations.

D. Repellent coating to be added on final handover as recommended by the supplier.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Immediately prior to completion of the Work clean stone by washing with water and bristle brushes;
removing all stains, dirt and other discolorations. Do not use acids, cleaning compounds or wire
brushes.

B. On completion of construction, remove all temporary protection.

3.07 ACCEPTANCE

A. The completed installation shall have the acceptance of the Owner and the Engineer. Installed
units which are chipped, cracked, or otherwise damaged or which, in the opinion of the Owner or
the Engineer, do not conform to the Specification requirements shall be removed and replaced.

END OF SECTION

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810-1
SECTION 04810

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
2. Mortar and grout.
3. Reinforcing steel.
4. Masonry joint reinforcement.
5. Ties and anchors.
6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
1. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 7 Section "Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days.
B. Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of
masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with
ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.
C. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements
including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of
the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing
average net-area compressive strength of units.
2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.
3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
5. Reinforcing bars.
6. Joint reinforcement.
7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.
2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength
requirement.
E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type,
provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-
area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a
uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single
manufacturer for each product required.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for
exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or
producer for each aggregate.
D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. Retesting of
materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140.
2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, per ASTM C 780.
3. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, per ASTM C 1019.
E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies
with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent
concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover
tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are
dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious
materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination
avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into
dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and
in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at
end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 600 mm down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after
building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or
painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on
ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral
finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar
and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI
530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed
tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses
units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated
tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and
other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.
1. Weight Classification: Normal weight, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Size (Width): As indicated on the Drawings.
3. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of plaster, provide
textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.

2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS
A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, at Contractor's option, complying with requirements below.
B. Concrete Lintels: Precast units made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color, texture, and
compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. Cure precast
lintels by same method used for concrete masonry units.
C. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam concrete masonry units
with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and
installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction.
Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III,
and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 6.5 mm thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the 1.18-mm sieve.
E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F. Water: Potable.
2.5 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 420.
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951.
1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 3.8-mm diameter.
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 3.8-mm diameter.
5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W1.7 or 3.8-mm diameter.
6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 407 mm o.c.

7. Provide in lengths of not less than 3 m, with prefabricated corner and tee units.
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.
2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that
comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, Z180 zinc coating.
3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with
at least 16-mm cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 50 mm parallel to
face of veneer.
C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but
resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 6.4-mm- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
2. Connector Section for Concrete: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached
to tie section; formed from 2.5-mmthick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
3. Tie Section for Concrete: Corrugated metal ties with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in
concrete and sized to extend to within 25 mm of masonry face.
D. Partition Top anchors: 2.5-mmthick metal plate with 10-mm- diameter metal rod 150 mm long welded to plate
and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
A. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with
ASTM A 563M hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.
B. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or grouted unit masonry and
equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5
(5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35
percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with
ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed
to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt
felt).
D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with
loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 3.6-mm steel wire, hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.
2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains,
efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry
surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of
masonry units being cleaned.
2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-
repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement and lime.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by
weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of
mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive
strength of masonry.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
3. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with
Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.
2. Provide grout with a slump of 200 to 280 mm as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing indicated
below:
1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.
2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's
expense.
B. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished, per ASTM C 140.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of
piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build
single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete
masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit
adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to
dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut
edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control
joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 12 mm maximum.
2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 6 mm in 3 m, or 12
mm maximum.
3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by
more than 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 12 mm maximum.
4. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1.5 mm
except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for
accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units,
particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not
use units with less than nominal 100-mm horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 100-mm.
Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 100-mm
horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do
not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units
and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with
masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire
mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 600 mm under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and
similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs
solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 13-mm clearance
between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 1200 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill
joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position.
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where
cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head
joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless

3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 16 mm on exterior side
of walls, 13 mm elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 150 mm.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 406 mm o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 203 mm o.c. in parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 203 mm above and below wall openings and extending 305 mm
beyond openings.
a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing,
pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the
following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 25 mm in width between masonry and structural member, unless
otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to
structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 610 mm o.c. vertically and 915 mm o.c. horizontally.
3.7 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow
materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
2. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints
free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant.

3. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for
application of sealant.
C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of
width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less
than 10 mm.
3.8 LINTELS
A. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 610 mm for block-size units
are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
B. Provide minimum bearing of 200 mm at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry
elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make
forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain
position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry
their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist
grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement,
including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 1520 mm.
A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare reports.
Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections.
1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes, and
locations of reinforcement.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests
and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:
1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.
2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's
expense.
C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 465 sq. m of wall area or portion thereof.
D. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.
E. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air
content and compressive strength.
F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.
3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do
not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate
evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with
mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform
appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and
smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid
strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces
thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.
6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on
exposed surfaces.
3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At
completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
END OF SECTION

DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851-1

SECTION 04851

DIMENSION STONE CLADDING

GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of dimension stone:
1. Panels set with individual anchors.
2. Trim units, including bands, copings, sills, jambs and soffits.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 3 Section Architectural Concrete" for setting dimension stone panels in architectural concrete
units.
2. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for steel stud frames supporting dimension stone cladding.
3. Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum" for installing dimension stone panels in aluminum systems.
4. Division 9 Section "Stone Paving and Flooring" for dimension stone used as paving and flooring.
5. Division 9 Section "Interior Stone Facing" for dimension stone applied as trim and paneling on building
interiors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions contained in ASTM C 119 apply to this Section.
B. Dimension Stone Cladding System: An exterior wall covering system consisting of dimension stone panels and
trim together with anchors, and fasteners used to secure the stone to building structure and to produce a weather-
resistant covering.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each stone accessory and other manufactured products indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for dimension stone cladding system, including
dimensions and profiles of stone units.
1. Show locations and details of joints both within dimension stone cladding system and between dimension
stone cladding system and other construction.


2. Show locations and details of anchors.
3. Include large-scale shaded elevations and details of decorative surfaces and inscriptions.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For joint materials involving color selection.
D. Stone Samples for Verification: Sets for each color, grade, finish, and variety of stone required; not less than 300
mm square.
1. Sets shall consist of at least four Samples, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual
characteristics expected and will establish the standard by which stone will be judged.
E. Welding certificates.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and testing agency.
G. Material Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency, as follows:
1. Stone Test Reports: For stone variety proposed for use on Project, provide test data indicating compliance
with required physical properties, other than abrasion resistance, according to referenced ASTM standards.
Base reports on testing done within previous five years.
2. For metal components, indicate chemical and physical properties of metal.
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing dimension stone cladding systems similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate dimension stone cladding
systems similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service
performance.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
D. Source for Stone: Obtain stone, from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
1. For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from same source for
each.
2. Make quarried blocks available for examination by Architect for appearance characteristics.
E. Source for Other Materials: Obtain each type of stone accessory, and other material from a single manufacturer
for each product.
F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel";


G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
2. Build mockups of typical exterior wall with dimension stone cladding, approximately 1800 mm long by 1200
mm high.
a. Show typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of installation.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in
mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature
changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes.
1. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if
required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports.
2. Store stone on wood skids or pallets with non-staining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight
evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
B. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with designations used on Shop Drawings to
identify individual stone units. Orient markings on vertical panels so that they are right side up when units are
installed.
A. Protect dimension stone cladding during erection as follows:
1. Cover tops of dimension stone cladding installation with non-staining, waterproof sheeting at end of each
day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of
600 mm down both sides and hold securely in place.
2. Prevent staining of stone from mortar, grout, and other sources. Immediately remove such materials
without damaging stone.
3. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over
wall surface.
4. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Remove
and replace dimension stone cladding damaged by frost or freezing conditions.


C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction and protection requirements for masonry
contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of inserts that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry, flashing reglets, and similar
items to be used by dimension stone cladding Installer for anchoring, supporting, and flashing of dimension stone
cladding system. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing such items and deliver to
Project site in time for installation.
B. Time delivery and installation of dimension stone cladding to avoid extended on-site storage and to coordinate
with work adjacent to dimension stone cladding.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Dimension Stone Units: Furnish finished stone panels in quantities as determined by the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STONE (Selected by client)
A.
1. Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum value of 10 Insert value, based on testing according to ASTM C 241
or ASTM C 1353.
2. Cut: Vein cut.
3. Finish: Match Architect's sample.
4. Thickness: Not less than 25 mm unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction.
Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.
1. Low-Alkali Cement: Portland cement for use with limestone shall contain not more than 0.60 percent total
alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III,
and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.


D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144; except for joints narrower than 1/4 inch and pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with
100 percent passing No. 16 sieve.
E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with
a record of satisfactory performance in mortar and containing no carbon black.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bayer, Industrial Chemicals Div.; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
b. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.
c. Solomon Colors; SGS Mortar Colors.
F. Water: Potable.
2.3 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
A. Fabricate anchors, including shelf angles, from stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 304, temper as required to
support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design stresses. Fabricate dowels and pins for anchors from
stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304.
B. Fabricate shelf angles for limestone from hot-dip galvanized steel, ASTM A 36/A 36M for materials and
ASTM A 123/A 123M for galvanizing.
2.4 STONE ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Shims: Strips of resilient plastic or vulcanized neoprene, Type A Shore durometer hardness of 50 to 70,
nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point loading of stone on anchors and of depths to suit
anchors without intruding into required depths of pointing materials.
B. Concealed Sheet Metal Flashing: Fabricate from zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel in thicknesses indicated, but
not less than 0.4 mm thick. Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim."
C. Cementitious Dampproofing for stone: Provide cementitious formulations that are recommended by ILI and that
are nonstaining to stone, and noncorrosive to anchors and attachments.
D. Weep and Vent Tubes: Medium-density polyethylene tubing, 6-mm OD and of length required to extend from
exterior face of stone to cavity behind.
E. Plastic Weep Hole/Vents: One-piece, flexible extrusion manufactured from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer,
designed to weep moisture in masonry cavity to exterior, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.


F. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from cotton or UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 6 to 10 mm in diameter, in
length required to produce 50-mm exposure on exterior and 450 mm in cavity between wythes.
2.5 STONE FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including
details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
B. Control depth of stone and back check to maintain minimum clearance of 25 mm between backs of stone units
and surfaces or projections of structural members, fireproofing (if any), backup walls, and other work behind stone.
C. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. Shape beds to fit
supports.
D. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, fasteners, supports, and lifting devices as indicated or
needed to set stone securely in place.
E. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone, except sawed reveals, to comply with requirements indicated for finish
and to match approved samples and mockups.
F. Quirk-miter corners, unless otherwise indicated; provide for cramp anchorage in top and bottom bed joints of
corner pieces.
G. Cut stone to produce uniform joints 10 mm wide and in locations indicated.
H. Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings, and similar features as required to accommodate
contiguous work.
I. Fabricate molded work, including washes and drips, to produce stone shapes with a uniform profile throughout
entire unit length, with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and with matching profile at joints
between units.
1. Produce moldings and molded edges with machines that use abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse
contour of molding shape.
J. Clean backs of stone to remove rust stains, iron particles, and stone dust.
K. Inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and
fabrication. Replace defective units.
1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural variations in
appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance
characteristics represented in approved samples and mockups.
2.6 MORTAR MIXES


A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions,
mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortar
of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics.
1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent
agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium
chloride.
2. Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer,
unless otherwise indicated. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set.
A. Source Quality-Control Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-
control testing indicated below.
1. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
2. Furnish test specimens randomly selected from same blocks as actual materials proposed for incorporation
into the Work.
3. Flexural Strength Tests: ASTM C 880, performed on specimens of same thickness, orientation of cut, and
finish as installed stone. One set of test specimens is required to be tested for every 300 sq. m, but not
fewer than 2 sets for each stone variety.
B. Testing agency will report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive dimension stone cladding and conditions under which dimension stone cladding will
be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of
dimension stone cladding.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SETTING DIMENSION STONE CLADDING, GENERAL
A. Before setting stone clean surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Clean
stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning
compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.
B. Coat Stone with dampproofing to extent indicated below:


1. Stone at Grade: Beds, joints, and back surfaces to at least 300 mm above finish-grade elevations.
2. Stone Extending below Grade: Beds, joints, back surfaces, and face surfaces below grade.
3. Allow cementitious dampproofing formulations to cure before setting dampproofed stone. Do not damage
or remove dampproofing while handling and setting stone.
C. Execute dimension stone cladding installation by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at Project site
to do necessary field cutting as stone is set.
1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Produce lines cut straight and true, with edges eased
slightly to prevent snipping.
D. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals, reglets, and openings as required to accommodate contiguous work.
E. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Install anchors, supports,
fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure dimension stone cladding in place. Shim and
adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated with uniform joints of
widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.
F. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated.
1. Sealing expansion and other joints is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Install concealed flashing at continuous shelf angles, lintels, ledges, and similar obstructions to downward flow of
water to divert water to building exterior.
H. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of stone units and backup wall; do not fill
cavities with mortar or grout.
1. Place weep holes in joints where moisture may accumulate, including base of cavity walls, above shelf
angles, and flashing. Locate weep holes at intervals not exceeding 600 mm. Use weep and vent tubes or
wicking material.
2. Place vents in cavity walls at tops of cavities, below shelf angles and flashing, and at intervals not
exceeding 6 m vertically. Locate vents in joints at intervals not exceeding 1500 mm horizontally. Use weep
and vent tubes or plastic weep hole/vents.
3.3 SETTING MECHANICALLY ANCHORED DIMENSION STONE CLADDING
A. Attach anchors securely to stone and to backup surfaces. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1242.
B. Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of dowels and
anchor tabs on stone.
C. Set stone supported on clips or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to
maintain uniform joint widths and to prevent point loading of stone on anchors. Hold shims back from face of
stone a distance at least equal to width of joint.


3.4 SETTING DIMENSION STONE CLADDING WITH MORTAR
A. Set stone in full bed of mortar with head joints filled, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not set heavy units or projecting courses until mortar in courses below has hardened enough to resist
being squeezed out of joint.
2. Support and brace projecting stones until wall above is in place and mortar has set.
3. Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of dowels
and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with mortar.
B. Fill space between back of stone units and backup wall solidly with mortar or grout.
C. Embed ends of sills in mortar; leave remainder of joint open until final pointing.
3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of walls, do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 9 mm
in 12 m or more. For external corners, corners and jambs within 6 m of an entrance, expansion joints, and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm in 12 m or more.
B. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, water tables, parapets, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm maximum.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portions of walls and partitions, do not
exceed 6 mm in 6 m or 12 mm in 12 m or more.
D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions indicated, do not exceed plus or
minus 6 mm.
E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus 3 mm or a quarter of
nominal joint width, whichever is less. For joints within 1500 mm of each other, do not vary more than 3 mm or a
quarter of nominal joint width, whichever is less from one to the other.
F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1.5-mm difference between planes of
adjacent units.

3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING


A. Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone, defective joints, and dimension stone
cladding that does not match approved samples and mockups. Damaged stone may be repaired if Architect
approves methods and results.
B. Replace in a manner that results in dimension stone cladding's matching approved samples and mockups,
complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean dimension stone cladding as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears
before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: Clean dimension stone cladding no fewer than six days after completion of pointing and sealing,
using clean water and stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning
agents containing caustic compounds or abrasives, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.
END OF SECTION

STONE VENEER-FAADE STRONGBACK CLADDING 04852-1

SECTION 04852

STONE VENEER-FAADE STRONGBACK CLADDING

Single Subcontract Responsibilities: Design, fabrication and erection of stone veneer-faced strongback cladding assemblies will
be by a single firm.

Design in accordance with ASTM C 1242 03a Standard Guide for Selection, Design and Installation of Dimensional Stone
Anchoring Systems

Performance Criteria:

Wind Loads, Air Leakage, Water Penetration, Thermal Performance, Building Frame Movements, Thermal
Movements, Exterior Wall Maintenance Equipment Criteria: Refer to Section 08900, EXTERIOR WALL,
GENERAL.

Stone Factors of Safety: Stone breakage and stone anchorage failure or displacement, shall not occur
under loading equal to the safety factors specified below. Calculations shall be based on the mean flex-
ural strength (Fs) value encountered during stone testing with a calculated standard deviation as de-
scribed in ASTM C880. The check for compliance with the safety factors shall be determined by dividing
the (Fs) value by panel flexural stress (Fb) values for the stone element (i.e. stone panel spans, kerfs)
being analyzed. The Architect will review stone testing data and may further modify safety factors as he
deems appropriate.

Minimum Safety Factors for Granite and Limestone Stressed in Bending from Gravity, Positive
and Negative Lateral, and Combined Gravity and Lateral Loads. Stress increases (safety fac-
tor reductions) for lateral loads will not be permitted.

Vertical Exterior: 6.0.

Stone flexural strength (FSF) as specified by ASTM is

Granite 4.0
Basalt 6.0

Minimum Safety Factor for Granite and Basalt Anchors: Maximum allowable stresses for an-
chors into the stone shall be in accordance with Stainless Steel Stone Anchors published by
the American Iron and Steel Institute (1975), except that the maximum design loads shall not
exceed the values defined in Paragraph 3, Stone Stresses at Connection points (Anchors).
Maximum allowable design loads for anchors into the stone shall not exceed 1/6th of the fail-
ure load of the anchor as determined by shear and tension stone anchor testing in the granite
and limestone being used for the project.

Embedded Into Stone: 6.0.

Safety Factors and Allowable Stresses for Anchors Embedded in Concrete: Design anchors and backup
structure(s) to withstand loads indicated without exceeding allowable working stresses established by
the following:

For Cast-in-Place and Postinstalled Fasteners in Concrete: One-fourth of tested capacity
when installed in concrete with compressive strength indicated.


Control of Corrosion and Staining: Prevent galvanic and other forms of corrosion as well as staining by
isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. Use specified mate-
rials that do not stain exposed surfaces of stone and joint materials.

Stone and Truss Engineering, Fabrication and Erection Standards:

Granite: Comply with the applicable recommendations and standards as published by the National Building
Granite Quarriers Association.

Basalt: Comply with the applicable recommendations and standards as published by the Indiana Institute.

Steel Trusses: American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC); Specifications for Structural Steel Build-
ings Allowable Stress Design.

Samples, visual mock-up and sample installations will be required.

Visual mock-up can be assumed to be a combination of all typical details into a single installation at the
stone fabricators facility.

Sample installations can be assumed to be a combination of all typical details into a single installation at the
site.

Testing: Contractor to retain an independent agency for purposes of verifying the physical properties of all exterior stone.

Setting System: Stone shall be secured to steel strongback trusses using stainless steel anchors and cramps. Fixed with nuts
and bolts as opposed to tec screws. Steel strong backs are defined as unitized, truss assemblies, fabricated of hot dip galva-
nized carbon steel tubes or channels, shapes and plates, to provide a framing grid to which stone veneer facings, and win-
dows will be affixed and erected as assemblies.

Anchors: All stone shall be set with anchors fabricated from Type 304 or 316 austenitic stainless steel in
thickness as required to sustain imposed loads and in no case less than 3/16 (4.5 mm) thick, complying
with ASTM A666. Only straps, discs, rods and similar anchors shall be utilized which resist positive and
negative loading in lieu of combination of wire ties and spot pargetting.

Stainless Steel Supports: Type 304 stainless steel in thickness as required to sustain imposed loads
and in no case less than 3/16 (4.5 mm) thick, complying with ASTM A276 for bars and shapes and
ASTM A666 for plate and flat bar. Provide machined, not torch burned, unslotted and slotted holes to
receive bolts.

Fasteners: Type 303, 304 or 316 austenitic stainless steel in standard commercial tempers and hard-
ness as required to sustain imposed loads complying with ASTM F593 or ASTM F738M for bolts and
screws, and ASTM F594 or ASTM F836M for nuts. Flat and lock washers shall be of same alloy as fas-
tener.

Structural Steel Channels Tubes, Shapes, Plates and Bars: All steel shall comply with ASTM A501,
A500, and A36/A36M and A6 unless otherwise indicated.

Fabricate structural steel channels and tubes, shapes, plates and bars from hot dip galvanized
stock. Comply with ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products and
ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. All steel shall be shop painted
with a compatible, black pigmented, primer coating so as to conceal strongback frames
through the open joints in the stone cladding.

Embeds: Anchor channel type, with filler strips, manufactured from formed hot or cold rolled carbon
steel channels with flange edges returned toward web, having a minimum of two (2) stud, or I, anchors
shop welded to the back of each channel, complying with ASTM A570. Provide channels, bolts, wash-


ers, and shims hot dipped galvanized per ASTM A153/A153M. Width, depth, and metal thickness as re-
quired to suit the performance requirements.

Fabrication Tolerances: As required to achieve erection tolerances and as follows:
Overall height and width:
3 m or under: +/- 1.5 mm.
3 to 6 m: +/- 1.5 mm.
6 to 9 m: +/- 1.5 mm.
over 9 m: +/- 1.5 mm per 6 m.
Out of square (difference in length of the two diagonal measurements): 3 mm per 1.8 m, but not more than
6 mm.
Openings (length and width of openings within one panel): +/- 3mm.
Insert, plate, handling device, locations: +/- 6 mm.
All node points (centroids) of each truss shall not vary by more than +/- 1.5 mm in any direction.

Erection Tolerances:

Variation from plumb: Do not exceed 3 mm in 6 m, or one story height; noncumulative

Variation from level: Do not exceed 3 mm in any bay or 6 m maximum, non-cumulative.

Edge to Edge Alignments: Do not exceed 1.5-mm difference between planes of adjacent units.

Face width of Joints: Do not exceed +/- 2 mm for joints. Horizontal joints must be 7 mm +2 /-0 (to en-
sure that the stone support shelf location does not have to be rebated).

Variation of fastening devices and embedments from established position in plan: Do not exceed 6 mm.

Joints:

Typical Joints: 6 to 8 mm wide horizontal open joints, 5 mm wide vertical open joints.

Perimeter Joints: 13 mm wide, sealant filled.
Impact Resistance

The stone faade must be capable of accommodating a soft body impact load of 1KN resulting from the
access cradle buffer.

END OF SECTION

STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1

SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The work covered by this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials and
performing all operations in connection with Structural Steelwork.

The work includes this sections covers frames, columns, perlins, gutters
1. Structural steel works for parking canopy.


A. All structural steel except as otherwise shown shall comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of
the following Codes, Specifications and Standards:
1. ASTM A6/A6M-99 Specification for the General Requirements for Rolled Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling,
and Bars for Structural Use.
2. ASTM A36/A36M-00 Specification for Structural Steel.
3. ASTM A325-97 Specification for Structural Bolts, Heat Treated, 120/105 KSI
Minimum Tensile Strength.
4. ASTM A325M-97 Specifications for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
(Metric).
5. ASTM A490-97 Specification for Heat-Treated, Steel Structural Bolts, 150 KSI
Minimum Tensile Strength.
6. ASTM A490M-97 Specification for High Strength Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
(Metric).
7. ASTM E709-95 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination.
8. AWS D1.1-92 Structural Welding Code - Steel.
9. AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural
Steel for Buildings latest Edition.
10. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
11. AISC Manual of Steel Construction (Allowable Stress Design), Latest
Edition.
12. AISC Manual of Steel Construction (Connections), Latest Edition
13. Industrial Fasteners Institute "Fastener Standards Book"
14. AISC Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490
Bolts.
15. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and
Specifications".

B. Copies of all the above codes and standards shall be submitted to the Engineer.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Structural steel work shall be executed by an approved well-experienced specialist Sub-Contractor unless the
Contractor can satisfy the Engineer that he (the Contractor) has sufficient experience and expertise in this field to
execute this work himself in which case his tradesmen and their supervisory personnel engaged in such work
must have successful experience with work comparable to that shown and specified including organized quality
control and testing procedures.


B. Engineering: Provide the services of a Professional Structural Engineer, registered in Kuwait to design and
certify that the work of this section meets or exceeds the performance requirements specified in this section
and as required by applicable local and international codes.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineer for approval shop drawings including structural calculations for all
structural steel components and their connection all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents showing the following:
1. Shop fabrication drawings which show type of material, size and weight of members and other
information necessary for the fabrication of each member and for shop assembly of members of
the structure. The drawings shall include the type, size, location and extent of all welds and bolts.
The drawings shall clearly distinguish between shop and field, bolts and welds.
2. Wind load for space frame at stairs 1 and 7 shall be determined as defined in Section 08900.
3. Field assembly and erection drawings which show all field assembly prior to erection and after
erection. The drawings shall indicate all details, schedules, procedures and diagrams showing field
assembly and sequence of erection. The information shall indicate locations of shorings and how
shoring is stabilized and controlled. The drawings shall indicate elevations of shored points and
splice locations. The procedures shall indicate step by step erection sequences including
intermediate surveys and allowances for temperature. Diagrams shall indicate erection equipment
size and weight and additional elements which may be required to support or stabilize elements
during erection.
4. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer written procedures for fabrication of the
steel work. The procedure shall describe the complete welding process including machine, current,
voltage, preheat, filler metal, welding system (manual, semi-automatic or automatic), positions of
welding, number of passes for each weld size, preparation of surfaces prior to welding, etc. These
procedures shall indicate the Contractor's quality control measures, monitoring and repair
procedures.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for the arrangement of all joints and their load carrying
capacities. The connection may or may not be shown on the Contract Drawings. Submit all details
along with calculations to Engineer prior to fabrication for approval.

B. Manufacturer's Literature
1. Submit to the Engineer manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for the following
products, including laboratory test reports and such other data to show compliance with these
Specifications (including specified standards):
a. Structural steel, (each type) including certified copies of mill reports covering the
chemical and physical properties, country and rolling mill of origin, and including a
statement indicating that the steel is new billet steel and that testing has been performed
in accordance with ASTM or equivalent standards.
b. High strength bolts (each type) including nuts and washers.
c. Welding electrodes (each type).
d. Shop coat primer paint, field touch-up paint.
e. Coal tar epoxy paint.
f. Bearing materials or assemblies.

C. Testing Reports
1. The following reports shall be submitted in triplicate directly to the Engineer by the Testing
Laboratory, with copy to the Contractor.
a. Shop Welders Certification.
b. Field Welders Certification.
c. Magnetic particle tests, shop welds and field welds.


d. Ultra-sonic tests, shop welds and field welds.
e. High strength bolted connection tests, shop and field.
1.05 TESTING

A. The Contractor shall engage, at his own expense, an independent certified Testing Laboratory approved by the
Engineer to inspect high strength bolted connections and welds, and to perform all tests and submit test reports to
the Engineer as herein specified.

B. The Contractor shall submit evidence regarding qualification of the proposed Testing Laboratory.

C. The Contractor shall provide the Testing Laboratory with the following:
1. A complete set of shop fabrication and erection drawings.
2. Cutting lists, order sheets, material bills, shipping bills and mill test reports. Provide certified copies of
mill test reports of bolts, nuts and washers, including names and locations of mills and shops and
analyses of chemical and physical properties.
3. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to shops.
4. Representative sample pieces requested for testing.
5. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material.
6. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, hoisting facilities, etc., for
inspection of the work in the mills, shop and field.

D. Bolted connections shall be inspected by the Testing Laboratory in accordance with AISC Specifications for
"Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325-97, ASTM 325M-97 and ASTM 490-97 or ASTM 490M-97.

E. Welding shall be inspected and tested by a Testing Laboratory approved by the Engineer during fabrication
and erection of structural steel as follows:
1. Certify all welders in accordance with AWS and make inspections and tests as required. Record
types and locations of all defects found in the work, and measures required and performed to
correct such defects.
2. In addition to visual inspection of all welds, magnetic particle and ultra-sonic inspection shall be
made of all welds indicated on the Drawings. Magnetic particle inspection shall be made on the
root pass and finished weld.
3. The method of magnetic particle inspection shall be in accordance with ASTM E109. Any type of
crack or zone of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be acceptable.
4. Ultra-sonic inspection shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1.

F. Each bolting crew and welder shall be assigned an identifying symbol or mark and all shop and field
connections shall be so identified so that the inspector can refer back to the crew or person making the
connection.

G. The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for conducting and interpreting the tests, shall state in each
report whether or not the test specimens conform to all requirements of the Contract Documents, and shall
specifically note any deviations therefrom.

H. Access to places where material for this Contract is being fabricated or produced shall be provided to the
Engineer and the Testing Laboratory for the purpose of inspection and testing. All costs relating to the
Engineer and his staff travel, lodging, and board etc. shall be paid for by the contractor.

I. The Engineer and the Testing Laboratory may inspect structural steel at the plant before shipment, however,
the Engineer reserves the right to reject any such material, which does not conform to all of the requirements
of the Drawings and Specifications, at any time before final acceptance.


J. The Testing Laboratory shall perform specified tests and submit reports to the Engineer. Corrective
measures, including additional and more complete testing, which may result from these tests shall be the
Contractor's responsibility; all costs of which shall be paid for by the Contractor.

K. The Contractor shall coordinate and allow for necessary time for the Testing Laboratory to complete all
testing and inspections prior to shop painting.
L. The Testing Laboratory shall prepare test specimen from steel samples cut from delivered material and shall
conduct tension tests in accordance with ASTM. The Contractor shall mill order 1.0 metre extra length for
the members noted on the Drawings to provide the steel for testing.

1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The Contractor shall fabricate and erect the structural steelwork as shown on the drawings and
specifications.

B. Substitutions of the structural system shown or member sizes of similar steel strengths will be permitted
providing the architecture is not changed and the structural strength and deflections are maintained. No
reduction in member sizes shall be permitted if steel strength exceeds the specified strength. See Section
01631 - Substitutions.


A. Do not handle structural steel until paint has thoroughly dried. Care shall be exercised to avoid abrasions
and other damage.

B. Stack material above ground out of mud and dirt and provide for proper drainage. Protect from damage or
soiling by adjacent construction operations.

C. Do not deliver material to the project site until the proposed method and sequence of erection has been
reviewed by the Engineer. Method and sequence shall be planned so as to avoid delay or damage to the
work of other trades.

D. Storage of fabricated steel at the job site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Material stored at the
job site shall not exceed design loads on existing or newly-constructed structures so that members will not
be distorted or otherwise damaged; and shall be protected against corrosion or deterioration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. All structural steel shall conform to as shown on the drawings.

2.02 BOLTS

A. All bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A490 and A325. All bolts shall be
cold forged with rolled threads.

2.03 WELDING ELECTRODES

A. All welding electrodes shall be E70XX and shall comply with the provisions of AWS Specifications A5.1,
A5.5, A5.17, A5.18, A5.20.

B. All welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds using not less than the minimum size based on
thickness of the thicker part jointed.
1. Thickness to 12mm - min. size 4mm
2. Over 12mm to 20mm - min. size 6mm



2.04 PAINT

A. Primers
1. Steel surfaces which are not embededed in concrete to be painted with coal tar epoxy: Anti-
corrosive primer (KPID), complying with B.S.5493, minimum dry film thickness 50 microns for all
members that will receive finishing coat. The surfaces required to be painted will be sand blasted
immediately before applying the first coat of paint. All other members/surfaces will receive 3 coats
of total thickness 150 microns.
B. Finishing Coat : All steel members exposed to view shall have at least 3 coats of epoxy paint with minimum dry
film thickness of each coat 100 microns Submit colour chart for Engineer selection.

C. Use spray application for painting. The minimum thickness shall be maintained on all corners, edges and
ends of pieces. The surface to be painted shall be dry and above 2
o
C; the temperature of the air shall be
over 5
o
C. Do not paint outdoors in rainy and dusty weather. Allow paint at least 24 hours drying time in good
weather before re-coating.

2.05 BEARINGS

A. Bearings for the steel columns shall be set over 5cm thick non-shrink grout suitable for such use.

The steel used in the plates shall be mild steel to ASTM A36.


A. Testing and inspection of structural steel will be performed by an independent structural steel testing agency
engaged by the Contractor, at his own expense and approved by the Engineer. Provide the testing agency
with the following:
1. A complete set of accepted documents required under Paragraph "Submittals".
2. Cutting lists, order sheets, materials bills and shipping bills.
3. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipments of materials to shops.
4. Representative sample pieces as requested by the testing agency.
5. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material.
6. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, etc., for inspection of the work in
the mills, shop and field.

B. The inspector will perform his duties in such a way that fabrication and erection are not unnecessarily
delayed or impeded, and as follows:
1. The Inspector will make all tests and inspections as required by "Structural Welding Code".
2. The edges of material to be welded will be ultrasonically examined for evidence of laminations,
inclusions or other discontinuities. The extent to which such defects will be permitted and the
extent of repair permitted shall be determined by the Inspector and made in accordance with
ASTM A6, Paragraph 9. Repairs made by welding shall be done in compliance with the
requirements of AWS D1.1 and the accepted welding procedures.
3. The root layer of all multiple pass welds and the backside of groove welds made from both sides, after
back gouging or chipping, will be examined by magnetic particle inspection (or dye penetration if
magnetic particle inspection is not feasible).
4. All shop and field welds shall be listed as stated on Drawings.
5. The technique of radiographic inspection will be in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1. A
double film technique will be used. One copy of each film will be sent to the Engineer, the other will be
retained by the Inspector.


6. Where inspection reveals defects, the extent of inspection will be increased as much as necessary
to ensure that the full extent of the defects in a joint has been found and to ensure that the same
defects are not present in welds made on similar parts or under similar circumstances.
7. Work that is not acceptable will be designated by "Repair" or "Reject", as applicable.
8. Shop welds will be inspected in the shop before the work painted or approved for shipment.
9. The Inspector will maintain a daily record of the work he has inspected and its disposition. Reports
of tests will be made in form prescribed in AWS D1.1. One copy of each of the reports will be
submitted to the Engineer on a weekly basis.
10. The Inspector will make all tests and inspections of high strength bolt connections as required by
AISC S314.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 BENCH MARKS

A. The Contractor shall employ the services of a registered professional Engineer, in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents, who shall establish permanent bench marks, field check all
elevations of concrete on which structural steel is to be placed and locations of anchor bolts, reporting any
discrepancies to the Engineer and obtaining the Engineer's approval before the work proceeds.

3.02 ERECTION

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accurate setting and levelling of all bearing plates or setting
plates. Bearing plates or setting plates shall be levelled on steel wedges or shims or as otherwise detailed.
Bearing and setting plates shall be grouted as specified.

B. Furnish templates for accurate setting of all anchor bolts. Furnish shim plates or developed fills where
required to obtain proper fit and alignment.

C. Oxygen cutting of structural steel in excess of 3mm for "fitting-up" purposes shall not be done except with
the prior approval of the Engineer.

D. The use of an oxygen cutting torch for correcting fabrication errors will be permitted only when the member
is not under load, and only after prior written approval of the Engineer to the procedures to be followed in the
event corrective work is necessary.

3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCE

A. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the correct fitting of all structural members and for the
elevation and alignment of the finished structure. Any adjustments necessary in the steel work because of
discrepancies in elevations and alignment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Unless otherwise noted, the structure shall be levelled and plumbed to an accuracy of 1 to 1000, but not to
exceed 12mm. The actual centrelines of truss chords shall not vary from theoretical centrelines by more than
12 mm at any point. The difference between offsets to the actual centrelines of truss chords at adjacent
panel points shall not exceed 3mm. All levelling and plumbing shall be done based on the mean operating
temperature of the structure. Allowances shall be made for the difference in temperature at time of erection
and the mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service.

C. All measurements relating to the above shall be on the theoretical centrelines of the members.

3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. No welding or bolting shall be done until as much of the structure as will be stiffened by the welding or
bolting has been properly aligned.


B. Drift pins shall not be used to enlarge unfair holes in main material. Holes that must be enlarged to admit
bolts shall be reamed. Burning and drifting may be used to align unfair holes in secondary bracing members
only, when acceptable to the Engineer.

C. When high strength bolts or high strength bearing bolts are used, the AISC specifications shall apply
including values as noted therein, and installation by either "turn of nut tightening" or with torque wrenches.
In using manual torque wrenches, the required torque can be read from the wrench dial. Care should be
taken that the wrench is properly calibrated. Nuts shall be in motion when torque is measured. In using
power wrenches, the recommendations of the wrench manufacturer shall be followed. Use Hardened
washer under bolt head or nut whichever is turned in tightening, unless the specified standards require
hardened washer under both head and nut.

All bolts shall be kept in dry storage until needed for installation. A325 bolts 1-1/8 inch (28mm) and 1-1/4
inch (32mm) diameter and A490 bolts 1 inch (25mm) diameter and over shall first have Johnson's Stick Wax
No. 140 applied to their threads before being assembled in the work. If bolts have been left out and have
become rusty before use, they shall be rejected and shall not be used until they have been cleaned and
waxed with Johnson's Stick Wax No. 140.

D. Bolted connections shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of Para. TESTING and as indicated
on the Drawings.

E. Welded connections shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of Para. TESTING and as indicated
on the Drawings.

3.05 SURVEY

A. Make an accurate survey of actual locations of steel members immediately upon the completion of erection
of steel but before removal of shoring and promptly submit same to the Engineer. Should locations very
beyond the allowable tolerances, take necessary corrective measures and modify details and/or procedure
as required.

B. Survey the final erected structural steel after release of shoring but prior to removal of shoring elements and
prior to the application of any other work, reporting any discrepancies from Contract requirements to the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION

METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1

SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Furnish and install the following steel fabrications:
1. Interior handrails as detailed in the drawings.
2. Security Fence.
3. Elevator pit ladders and sill support angles.
4. Loose lintels.
5. Overhead support for suspended ceilings.
6. Supports for millwork counters and counter tops..
7. Galvanized and painted gratings over airways, electrical and drainage trenches.
8. Custom canopies.
9. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
10. Miscellaneous framing and supports for overhead doors and grilles.
11. Miscellaneous framing and supports for elevator hoisting machines and sheaves.
12. Miscellaneous steel trim.
13. Steel angle corner guards.
14. Edgings.
15. Structural steel door frames.
16. Floor plate and supports.
17. Pipe guards.
18. Wheel guards.
19. Pipe bollards.
20. Steel plate column guards.
21. Rough hardware.

B. Furnish and install the following stainless steel grade A-316L fabrications:
1. Stainless steel gratings for planters and fountains
2. Stainless steel rung ladder in water tanks.

C. Furnish and install the following stainless steel grade A-304 fabrications:
1. Struts and cables for canopy and atrium end curtain wall on grid 6 and 22.


A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Building in of anchors into masonry walls.
B. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Structural stud framing.
C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing, blocking, subflooring and underlayment.
D. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Plastic Laminate counters requiring fabricated steel supports.
E. Section 08333 - Overhead Coiling Door: Steel framing for coiling grilles.
F. Section 09960 - High Performance Coatings: Applied high build coatings for painted rails and guards.
G. Section 09910 - Paints: Applied finish coatings other than those specified herein.

1.03 REFERENCES

under the provisions of Section 01420 - REFERENCES. Where these standards conflict with other specified
requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern.
1. ASTM A 123 - Zinc Coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel
Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
2. ASTM A 153 - Zinc-Coating on Iron and Steel Hardware.


3. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
4. ASTM A 276 Stainless and Heat- Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes.
5. ASTM A 283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars.
6. ASTM A 307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
7. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel.
8. ASTM A 361 - Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Roofing sheets.
9. ASTM A 386 - Zinc Coating on Assembled Steel Products.
10. ASTM A 446 - Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheets of Structural Quality, Coils and Cut Lengths.
11. ASTM A 480 General requirements Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet
and Strip.
12. ASTM A 500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and
Shapes.
13. ASTM A 501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
14. ASTM A 525 - Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized).
15. ASTM A 53 - Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.
16. ASTM A 569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial
Quality.
17. ASTM F 593 - Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws.
18. ASTM F 594 - Stainless Steel Nuts.
19. AGAI - Inspection Manual for Hot-Dipped Galvanized Products.
20. AISC - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
21. AISC - Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.
22. AISI. referenced standards.
23. AWS - Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following under provisions of Division 1 General Requirements:
1. Literature: Manufacturer's complete product data and specifications for all prefabricated items,
shop primer paints, liquid zinc coating, and hydraulic cements, to be furnished hereunder.
2. Shop drawings:
a. Include large scale details of items of all metal fabrications to be furnished hereunder,
showing proposed methods of anchorage to surrounding structure and conditions.
b. Include large scale details of stairs, intermediate landings and railings, bearing
registration stamp of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in Kuwait
c. Indicate on the shop drawings all erection marks for various places of miscellaneous
metals, and ensure that the actual field pieces bear corresponding marks.
3. Provide calculations for loading and stresses for metal stairs, landings and handrails. Show how design load
requirements and other performance requirements as required by applicable local and national codes have
been satisfied.
4. Selection samples:
a. Sample card indicating Manufacturer's full range of colors of shop applied finishes
available for selection by Engineer.
5. Quality standards sample: Fabricate a sample showing a typical handrail section demonstrating
component connections. Sample section shall be minimum 450 mm (18 inches) in horizontal
length and 300 mm (12 inches) in height and include a corner post. Provide a shop primed finish.
a. Accepted sample will be used to establish the quality standard for handrail and guardrail
fabrication and workmanship.
6. Verification samples: Two 75 mm (3 inch) by 150 mm (6 inch) samples of factory-applied coatings
and colors proposed for use for approval prior to coating application.


1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Fabricator, with a minimum of 3 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of
the type specified herein.


A. Engineering: Provide the services of a Professional Structural Engineer, registered in Kuwait to design and
certify that the work of this section meets or exceeds the performance requirements specified in this section
and as required by applicable local and international codes.
1. Prepare Shop Drawings for stairs, handrails, and handrail brackets under direct supervision of a
same Engineer experienced in design of this work.

B. Welders Certificates: Submit certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the
previous 12 months.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Be responsible for establishing locations and levels for all work of this Section, except such parts as may be
delivered to others and set by them. In such cases assist them in properly locating said parts.


A. All materials under this Section shall be carefully prepared for delivery, and handled and stored under cover in a
manner to prevent defacement, deformation, or other damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and to
prevent the accumulation of foreign matter on the metal work. All such work shall be repaired and cleaned prior to
erection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. All materials shall be new stock, free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance, and of best
commercial quality for each intended purpose. Unless specifically called for otherwise, work shall be
fabricated from the following:
1. Steel shapes, plates and bars: ASTM Designation A 36.
2. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, seamless pipe, black finish unless otherwise noted.
3. Structural steel tubing, square and rectangular shapes; ASTM A500, Grade B.
4. Steel tubular shapes: ASTM A 501.
5. Steel plates to be bent or cold-formed: ASTM A283, grade C.
6. Steel bars and bar-size shapes: ASTM A306, grade 65, or ASTM A36.
7. Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108.
8. Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336.
9. Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM
A525.
10. Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 167, Type 304.
11. Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
12. Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws: ASTM F 593, Type 304.
13. Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM F 594, Type 304.
14. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A325 or A307,as required for strength, galvanized to ASTM A153
for galvanized components.

B. Metal surfaces, general: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide
materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use
materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness,


and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-
leveled sheet.
C. Steel materials: to be hot dip-galvanized, provide steel chemically suitable for metal coatings complying with the
following requirements: Carbon below 0.25 percent, silicon below 0.24 percent, phosphorous below 0.05 percent,
and manganese below 1.35 percent. Notify galvanizer if steel does not comply with these requirements to
determine suitability for processing.

D. Provide all fasteners and attachments of the same material and finish as the metal to which it is applied
unless otherwise noted. Provide all fasteners and attachments as required for work specified herein and as
indicated on the Drawings.

E. Welding rods: AWS E70XX grade, or select in accordance with AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be
welded and in accordance with the recommendation of the welding rod manufacturer.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout: Ready mixed, non-metallic high strength controlled expansion grout of flowable consistency,
conforming to ASTM C 1107 with minimum compressive strength of 8,000 pounds per square inch (55.2
MPa) at 28 days.
1. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield CT, 001-203-336-7900, product Five Star Grout.
2. L&M Construction Chemicals, Omaha NE, 001-402-453-6600, Product: Crystex..

B. Metal paste filler: 2 component epoxy, high strength, structural adhesive putty:
1. Abatron, Inc. Gilberts IL, product: Ferrobond-P.
2. Dynatron/Bondo Corp., Atlanta, GA, product: Bondo Plastic Filler.
3. U.S. Chemical & Plastics Company., Massillon OH, product Metal filled epoxy.

C. Liquid zinc coating, for touch-up of welds, scratches, and abrasions in galvanized steel: Galvanic Zinc-rich
coating containing 95 percent metallic zinc, by weight in the dried film; recognized under the Component
Program of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as an equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing; conforming to FS DOD-
P-21035A (formally MIL-P-21035A) for repair of hot-dip galvanizing and meeting the requirements of MIL-P-
26915A USAF Specification for Zinc-Rich Paints. Acceptable products include:
1. Z.R.C. Chemical Products Company, Quincy MA, product: Z.R.C.
2. Duncan Galvanizing, Everett MA, 001-617-389-6721, product: ZIRP.
3. American Polywater Corp., Stillwater, MN, CG Zinc-Rich Cold Galvanizing.

D. Primer for non-galvanized steel surfaces, modified alkyd rust-inhibitive, high solids primer, equal to the
following:
1. International (Courtaulds Coatings), Louisville KY, 001-502-588-9200, product Interlac 260HS.
2. Rust-Oleum, Vernon Hills IL, 001-847-367-7700, product 1069 Heavy Duty Rust Inhibitive Red
Primer.
3. Sherwin Williams, Cleveland OH, 001-216-566-2000, product Kem Flash Primer HS, Red Oxide
E61R702.

2.03 FABRICATION - GENERAL

A. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free from mill scale, flake, rust and rust pitting; well formed and finished to
shape and size, true to details with straight, sharp lines, and angles and smooth surfaces. Curved work shall
be to true radii. Exposed sheared edges shall be eased.

B. Shop fabricate items wherever practicable, accurately fitting all parts and making all joints tight. Do not
fabricate materials until all specified submittals have been submitted to, and approved by, the Engineer.


C. Do all cutting, punching, drilling, and tapping required for attachment of anchor bolts and other hardware and
for attachment of work by other trades. All such work shall be done prior to hot-dip galvanizing of the various
components.

D. Grind all edges of bars and plates completely free from nicks and machine marks, prior to galvanizing and/or
shop priming.

E. Weld all permanent connections, make all welds in a continuous manner; tack-weld only where specifically
indicated on the Drawings. Grind all exposed-to-view welds completely smooth and flush to the surface
plane of the base metals. Perform welding work prior to galvanizing in all cases, except where field welding
is necessary, in which case, completely coat all such welds with two coats of specified liquid zinc coating,
after performing grinding operations.

F. Use screws and bolts only where welding cannot be performed, of sufficient size to ensure against loosening
from normal usage of miscellaneous metal items furnished hereunder.
1. Countersink all screw heads and bolt heads as far as practicable. Use not less than two screw,
bolts, or other anchorage items, at each connection point.
2. Draw up all threaded connections tightly, after buttering same with pipe joint compound, to exclude
water.

G. Carefully coordinate the installation of metal fabrications with the work of trades responsible for the
installation of interfacing work, and for the installation of work into the various assemblies furnished
hereunder, and permit the installation of the related materials to be made at the appropriate times.

H. Fit and assemble metal fabrications in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.
1. Galvanized assemblies: Where size of assembly is too large for galvanizing kettle, galvanize
components prior to fabrication and assemble after galvanizing.

2.04 FABRICATION - HANDRAILS

A. Refer to the Drawings for location and details of handrails to be furnished and installed hereunder.
1. Verify heights shown in Drawings comply with referenced codes and regulations.

B. Railing performance requirements; conform to requirements of applicable codes and regulations, but design
for the following minimum loads:
1. Design, fabricate and install all railings in a manner which will ensure the railings will be capable of
withstanding loads required by applicable codes.

2.05 FABRICATION - SUPPORTS

A. Supports for folding panel partitions: Fabricate support system to carry the entire load of moveable walls to
the structure above without transferring any horizontal or vertical load to ceiling system. Provide frequently
spaced holes for multiple adjustment. Provide diagonal bracing. Use of Unistrut type members are
acceptable.

2.06 HOT-DIP GALVANIZING

A. Surface preparation prior to galvanizing: Pickle steel prior to galvanizing in conformance with SSPC-SP8.
Remove all rust, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter, and other foreign matter.

B. Hot-dip galvanizing: Provide coating for iron and steel fabrications applied by the hot-dip process Deltagalv
by Duncan Galvanizing, meeting all requirements of this specification. Comply with ASTM A 123 for
fabricated products and ASTM A 153 for bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. Provide thickness
of galvanizing specified in referenced standards.
1. Wherever possible, perform galvanizing after assembly of items.


2. Galvanized items shall be straightened to remove all warpage and distortion caused by the
galvanization process.
3. Touch-up all breaks on hot-dip surfaces caused by cutting, welding, drilling or undue abrasion with
liquid zinc coating as specified herein above. Apply liquid zinc by brush or spray on all damaged
areas in two coats to a total dry film thickness of not less than 3 mils. Apply first coat within two
hours after damage to hot-dip film to prevent undue oxidation of exposed surface. On all welds
remove weld spatter by power wire brushing or equivalent before applying liquid zinc coating.
Repair material should extend at least 75 mm (3 inches) beyond all edges of the damaged
galvanized area as possible to assure continuity of galvanic protection.
4. Touch-up of galvanized surfaces with aerosol spray, silver paint, bright paint, brite paint, or
aluminum paints is not acceptable.

2.07 SHOP APPLIED COATINGS

A. Schedule: Shop applied coatings as scheduled at end of Section and as indicated on Drawings.

B. For non-galvanized steel surfaces:
1. Surface preparation prior to priming: Thoroughly clean all steel of all loose mill scale by power wire
brushing or sandblasting. Remove all rust, dirt, weld flux, weld spatter, and other foreign matter by
wire-brushing or scraping (power wire-brushing, if necessary). Grind smooth any sharp
projections.
2. Shop apply specified primers thoroughly and evenly on the surfaces and worked into the joints and
other open areas on the surfaces. Surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall be given two coats.
Dry film thickness of primer shall be not less than 2.4 mils per coat.

C. For hot-dipped galvanized steel items scheduled for field applied painted finish:
1. Touch-up all breaks on hot-dip surfaces caused by cutting, welding, drilling or undue abrasion with
liquid zinc coating as specified above under the Article entitle Hot Dip Galvanizing.
2. Provide factory-applied polyamide epoxy primer, 2.0 mils dry film thickness minimum, Primergalv

by Duncan Galvanizing meeting all requirements of this specification. Apply primer within 12 hours
after galvanizing at the galvanizer's plant in a controlled environment meeting applicable
environmental regulations, and as recommended by coating manufacturer. Engage the services of
a galvanizing facility which will assume single-source responsibility for galvanizing and primer
coating.
3. Touch-up finish in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide touch-up such that
repair is not visible from a distance of 1800 mm (6 feet).

2.08 A. Standard Bar Grating : Typical: Carbon Steel galvanized and painted with high performance coating
after fabrication; see Hot Dip Galvanizing above and Section 09960 for painting. Standard twisted or straight
cross bars.
1. Types suitable for application. Provide as required to conform to load requirements below.
a. Standard Bar Grating: NAAMM MBG 531, Type W.
b. Heavy Duty Grating: NAAMM MBG 532, Type W or R.
2. Load Requirements: As required for dead load plus live load meeting requirements of applicable
Building Code. Maximum deflection under design load not to exceed L/240.
a. Public Sidewalks and Areas subject to Vehicular Traffic: Whichever produces the
greater stress:
1) Minimum 1221 kg/rn
2
.
2) Minimum 3630 kg concentrated load placed over 0.23 m
2
area located to
produce maximum stress.
b. Private Areaways subject to Pedestrian Traffic but not Vehicular Traffic : 488kg/m
2
.
c. Other Conditions: As required by Code. Minimum 488 kg/m
2
.


3. Bearing Bars:
a. Provide abrasive bearing bar tops ; see "Anti-Slip Finish" under SHOP FINISHES below.
b. At areas subject to normal public pedestrian traffic, space bars not greater than 13 mm
clear.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION

A. Accurately set all work to established lines and elevations, and rigidly fasten in place with suitable
attachments to the construction of the building. At the completion of the work, check all work, re-adjust as
required, and leave in perfect condition. Grind all exposed to view welds smooth to the touch.

B. Construct and install stairs in strict accordance with the details, the approved shop drawings, and
requirements of all codes, laws, and ordinances bearing on the work.
1. Pipe rails set in exposed concrete surfaces shall be grouted with molten lead or expanding grout.
Hole to receive pipe shall be formed with galvanized sheet metal sleeve and provide at least 12
mm (1/2 inch) clearance around entire perimeter. Hold expanding grout back 12 mm (1/2 inch)
from finish surface and fill void with Portland cement grout to match color and texture of adjacent
surface.
3.02 FIELD WELDING

A. Field weld components indicated on Shop Drawings in accordance with AWS D1.1.

B. Immediately after welding, touch-up welds, burned areas and damaged surface coatings.
1. Thoroughly remove all spatter by power wire-brushing (or if inaccessible, wire brushing) per
SSPC, surface preparation specification SP2 or SP3. Allow surface to cool to ambient
temperature. Clean surface with solvent wipe to remove oils, grease and dirt in accordance with
SSPC surface preparation specification SP1.
2. Apply one coat of liquid zinc to attain a minimum of 1.5 mils dry film thickness. Coating should
extend at least two inches beyond either side of weldment to ensure complete coverage of welded
area.

3.03 FIELD BOLTING

A. Accurately drive all bolts into holes, protecting the bolt heads so as not to damage the thread during the
driving. Ensure that bolt heads and nuts rest squarely against the metal. Where structural members have
sloping flange faces, provide approved beveled washers at the bolted connections to afford square seating
for bolt heads or nuts. Nick bolt threads for unfinished bolts to prevent the nuts from backing off.

B. Use an approved calibrated manual or power torque wrench to obtain the proper torque and tension as
recommended by the bolt manufacturer for all A 325 bolts.

3.04 TOUCH-UP

A. Touch-up all welds, burned areas, scratches, abrasions, on galvanized metals, using specified liquid zinc
coating.

B. Touch-up all welds, scratches, abrasions, and other surface damaged on shop-primed or painted metals,
using the same coatings as specified under shop applied finishes, herein above.

3.05 SCHEDULES

A. General: Items listed hereinbelow provide further description of those already indicated in the Drawings. This
list does not represent a complete list of miscellaneous metal components or types required to complete the
Work.
1. Carefully review all Drawings and furnish and install metal fabrications required by the various
trades, whether or not specifically listed herein, such as miscellaneous clip angles, miscellaneous
steel bracketing, and other miscellaneous metal items as indicated on the Drawings, reasonably
implied therefrom, or reasonably necessary for the thorough completion of the work.

B. Steel pan stair and related support components, as detailed on the Drawings and specified herein above.


C. Steel stair and related support components:
1. Stair treads and landing: Cold-formed steel plate, 1.9 mm (14 gage).
2. Risers: 1.5 mm (16 gage) steel plate.
3. Channel stringer: 300 mm (12 inch) width of size to meet engineering requirements.
4. Handrails, stiffeners, clip angles and other structural components, of size and as required to meet
engineering and code requirements specified herein above.

D. Interior railings, as detailed on the Drawings. Connections and sizing to conform to engineering and code
requirements specified herein above.

E. Exterior handrails: 50 mm (1-1/2) inch (O.D.) stainless steel pipe as detailed on the Drawings. Where
fabricated assemblies are not indicated to be stainless steel, they shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
1. Pipe railings: To prevent unnecessary damage to the galvanized coating by field welding, provide
slip-fit method of connecting pipe railings. Fabricate pipe railing from mechanical steel tubing
internally vented with holes 3/4 the size of the pipe's internal diameter.

F. Elevator pit ladders: Stringers 9 mm (3/8-inch) by 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) flat bar, rungs 16 mm (5/8 inch)
diameter solid steel rods. Offset ladder from wall surface by 180 mm (7 inches) to centerline of rungs, with
brackets.
1. Fabricate ladders in accordance with OSHA requirements, and ANSI A14.3 standards.
2. Hot dip galvanized finish assembled elevator pit ladders.

G. Loading dock edge: 4 by 4 by 3/8 inch hot-dipped galvanized steel angle, for entire length of loading dock,
with welded studs, for placement by Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

H. Elevator sill support angles: 100 mm by 100 mm (4 by 4 inch) by 9 mm (3/8 inch) thick, shop primed.

I. Lintels: As scheduled on Structural Drawings.
1. Provide lintels 300 mm (12 inches) longer than masonry openings. Where lintel abuts column,
provide structural clip connection.
2. Lintels occurring in exterior walls shall be galvanized in conformance with the requirements of
ASTM A 143, and ASTM A 123.

J. Overhead Support system: Provide Unistrut type system, Unistrut Corp, Wayne MI, 001-734-721-4040.
meeting the following requirements in configuration shown on Drawings.
1. Material: 2.7 mm (12 gage) cold formed low carbon steel.
2. Finish: electrostatically applied, rust-inhibiting, baked-on, acrylic enamel paint.
3. Size: 40 mm x 40 mm (1-5/8" x 1-5/8") Series P1000 H3 with perforations at 50 mm (2") on center.
nominal.
4. Fasteners: P1047 and as required for configurations shown.
5. Accessories: Paintable PVC closure strip P1184 PVC for exposed channels.

END OF SECTION

MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORKS 05501-1

SECTION 05501

MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contract General Conditions and Special
Conditions apply to the Work of this Section.

B. Work Included:
1. Rough hardware.
2. Ladders.
3. Shelf and relieving angles.
4. Miscellaneous steel framing.

C. Manufacturer/Fabricator Location: International/Local

D. Installer/Erector Location: Local


A. Fabricator/Installer: A firm specializing in miscellaneous metal work similar to that indicated for this project
for a minimum of 5 years and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing
delay to the Work.

1.03 STANDARDS

1. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code".
2. AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel"
3. D1.2 Structural Welding Code Aluminum
5. NAAMM "Pipe Railing Manual".
6. NAAMM "Metal Stairs Manual".
7. SSPC "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications".
8. Industrial Fasteners Institute "Fastener Standards Book".

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each miscellaneous metal item,
including dimensioned plans and elevations, details of sections, connections, anchorage and accessory
items.

B. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings and templates for the location of miscellaneous metal items that
are to be embedded in or anchored to concrete or masonry.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FERROUS METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide
materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use
materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness,


and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for
stretcher-leveled sheet.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501; hot-formed, welded or seamless process. For exterior use and other locations
noted, provide hot-dip galvanized tubing in accordance with ASTM A53.

D. Steel Bars and Bar Size Shapes: ASTM A675, Grade 65, or ASTM A36.

E. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30.

F. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, grade 32510.

G. Ductile Iron Castings: ASTM A536, grade as selected by fabricator.

H. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported
rails, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A 47,
or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A
153.

J. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S, Grade A, suitable for close coiling, black finish unless galvanizing is
required; standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated or required to satisfy performance
criteria.


A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Type and alloy of filler metal and electrode recommended by producer
of metal to be welded, complying with applicable AWS specifications, and as required for color match,
strength and compatibility in the fabricated items.

B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide anchors of type, size, and material required for type of loading and installation
condition shown, as recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Use nonferrous metal or
hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior locations and elsewhere as required for corrosion
resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.

2.03 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Non-shrink Non-metallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive non-gaseous grout
specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications of the types specified in this Section:

2.04 FASTENERS

A. Fasteners and Anchorage Devices: Provide fasteners complying with the requirements of Industrial
Fasteners Institute standards. Type, grade, class and style best suited for the respective purpose. Use
countersunk flat-head Phillips type machine screws for exposed fasteners, except where Allen head screws
are required. Use galvanized steel or stainless steel fasteners for exterior construction and for fastening
components fabricated of galvanized steel.
1. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type
2. Lag Bolts: Square head type
3. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel.
4. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel.
5. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type.
6 Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel.

2.05 GALVANIZING AND PAINT


A. Galvanizing
1. ASTM A153, Classes A and B, for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2. ASTM A123, for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, strip 3mm thick
and heavier and for assembled steel products.

B. Paint:
1. Provide primer and finish paint supplied by a single manufacturer for the entire project.
2. Refer to Section 05120 for paint specifications.


A. Temperature Change: To prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners,
design, fabricate and install exterior components to provide for expansion and contraction over an ambient
temperature range of 49 deg. C. and a surface temperature range of 100 deg. C. without buckling, undue
stress on members or anchors, and other detrimental effects.

B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles, smooth surfaces and straight sharp edges.

D. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 0.75 mm, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal
corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop
strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove
welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so that no roughness shows, and contours of welded surfaces match those adjacent.

F. Locate exposed connections where least conspicuous, with hairline joints, flush and smooth, and with
threaded connections tight so that threads are concealed. Using concealed fasteners wherever possible.
Where exposed, use fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head countersunk screws or
bolts. Shoulder and head, dowel and pin abutting bars. Machine, fit and secure removable members with
Allen-head set screws.

G. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space
anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

H. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

I. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.

J. Make joints as strong and rigid as adjoining sections. Make welds continuous along entire line of contact,
except where spot welding is indicated. Welded connections may be used where bolted connections are
shown. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes
where water may accumulate.

K. Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the
work of this Section with the work of related trades (with particular attention given to the installation of items
embedded in concrete and masonry).

L. Galvanize all exterior ferrous metal and all items embedded in concrete, unless otherwise specified.
Galvanize all other items where specified or shown.

2.07 SHOP PAINTING


A. Shop paint metal fabrication work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or
masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded and stainless steel, unless otherwise specified.

B. Remove oil, grease and other contaminants in prior to any additional surface preparation specified.

C. Clean and prepare metal surfaces before applying shop coat. Remove rust and mill scale in accordance
with SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning".

D. Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions or as
specified in section 05120. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage and dry film thickness
specified.

E. Apply one shop coat of primer to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of primer to surfaces inaccessible
after assembly or erection. In addition, apply one shop coat of finish paint to entire surfaces of exterior loose
lintels, shelf and relieving angles, dunnage and other items as noted or specified. Change color of second or
finish coat to distinguish it from the first coat.

F. Separate dissimilar metals with one coat of dielectric separator. Do not extend coating onto exposed or
finished surfaces.

2.08 ROUGH HARDWARE

A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other
miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or
securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are
specified in Division 6 sections.

B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts
which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.

2.09 FABRICATION, SPECIFIC ITEMS

A. Steel Ladders: The Contractor shall fabricate ladders for the locations shown on the drawings, with
dimensions, spacings, details and anchorages as indicated. The Contractor shall provide hot dipped
galvanized steel ladders as shown on the drawings, complete with supporting brackets, stringers and rungs.
1. Extend side rails above top rung as shown on the drawings on the drawings, and return rails to
wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not
extend above the top rung, goose-neck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure
ladder access.
2. The Contractor shall provide non-slip surface on top of each rung, either by coating the rung with
aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung
which is filled with aluminum oxide grout.
3. Hot dip galvanize ladders.

B. Open Riser Stairs: The Contractor shall provide open riser steel stairs as shown on the drawings, The
Contractor shall provide steel stringers, supporting brackets, toe guards, carrying angles, treads, platforms
and railings. Comply with requirements specified hereinafter for railings. The Contractor shall provide
bracing of steel framing as required to sustain torsional loads applied by hanging stairs from the framing.
Steel treads shall be light duty welded plain surfaced steel with an abrasive coated steel nosing.

C. Structural Steel Door Frames for Overhead Coiling Doors: Fabricate steel door frames from structural
shapes and bars of size and to dimensions indicated, fully welded together, with steel bar stops, unless
otherwise indicated. Weld built-up members and continuously weld exposed joints. Secure removable stops
to frame with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced at not more than 254 mm on center. Reinforce
frames and drill and tap as required to accept finish hardware. The Contractor shall provide steel strap
anchors for securing door frames into adjoining concrete or masonry. Weld anchors to frame jambs Extend


bottom of frames to floor elevation indicated with steel angle clips welded to frames for anchoring frame to
floor with expansion shields and bolts. Galvanize all steel door frames and anchors for overhead coiling
doors and grilles.
D. Metal Bar Gratings The Contractor shall provide gratings, including supplementary framing and supports.
The Contractor shall provide gratings of electro-pressure welded type construction, rectangular pattern
accurately fabricated free from warps, twists or other defects affecting their serviceability or appearance.
Fabricate gratings from hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip and structural steel bars. The Contractor shall
provide saddle clip fasteners as required to fasten gratings to each steel support. Steel Finish: Hot-dip
galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 50.94 gram per .0929 m
2
of coated surface.

E. Catwalks: The Contractor shall provide hot dipped galvanized steel catwalks complete with gratings, toe
guards, railings, steel framing, bracing and support members. Comply with requirements specified for
railings. Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 50.94 gram per .0929 m
2
of coated
surface.

F. Steel Pipe Railings, Handrails and Guardrails: Fabricate pipe railings and handrails to comply with
requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of
pipe, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.
1. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt-welding or welding with internal connectors, at
fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated. At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of
intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end is joined and weld all around.
2. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending. Form simple and compound curves by
bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required;
maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe.
3. The Contractor shall provide expansion joints at intervals not to exceed 12m unless otherwise shown
on the drawings. The Contractor shall provide slip joints with internal sleeves extending 50mm
minimum beyond joint each side. Fasten internal sleeve securely to one side without exposed
fasteners. Locate joints within 150mm of posts as shown on the drawings. If required to accommodate
expansion and contraction, provide pressure relief holes at bottom ends of pipe in concealed locations.
4. The Contractor shall provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 5 mm thick steel plate in place or by use of prefabricated
fittings, except where clearance of end of pipe and adjoining wall surface is 6 mm or less.
6. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: The Contractor shall provide wall brackets, end
closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment
of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for
connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work.
7. For railing posts set in concrete fabricate sleeves from steel pipe not less than 150 mm long and
with an inside diameter not less than 13 mm greater than the outside diameter of post, with steel
plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve. The Contractor shall provide friction fit, removable
covers designed to keep sleeves clean and hold top edge of sleeve 13 mm below finished surface
of concrete.
8. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel pipe whose inside diameter is
sized for a close fit with posts and to limit deflection of post without lateral load, measured at top,
to not more than 1/12 of post height. The Contractor shall provide socket covers designed and
fabricated to resist accidental dislodgment.
9. Fillers: The Contractor shall provide steel sheet or plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or
required to support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads
through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses. Size fillers to
produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.
10. For steel railings and handrails formed from steel pipe with hot dipped galvanized finish, galvanize
fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. Hot-dip galvanized with a


coating weight of not less than 50.94 gram per .0929 m
2
of coated surface.

G. Corner Guards: The Contractor shall provide hot dip galvanized steel angle corner guards of size as shown
on the drawings, with anchors welded to backs of angles at 600 mm centers with a minimum of three (3)
anchors per unit.

H. Edge Angles: The Contractor shall provide hot dip galvanized steel edge angles of size as shown on the
drawings, with welded-on strap anchors 600 mm on centers. The Contractor shall provide angles in as long
lengths as possible. Miter and weld corners and provide splice plates for alignment between sections.

I. Trench Drain Cover System: Trench drain assemblies, gratings and frames fabricated from heavy duty hot
dip galvanized ductile iron castings or hot dip galvanized gray iron castings designed for vehicular loads, of
size as shown on the drawings. Provide units with continuous machined surfaces, integral anchors, outlet
pipes, end closures, bolts, and machined joints.

J. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: The Contractor shall provide steel framing and supports for
applications indicated or which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work.
Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent other construction
retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded
construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers,
and similar items. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into
masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. Except as otherwise indicated,
space anchors 600 mm on center and the Contractor shall provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel
straps 32mm wide x 6mm thick x 200mm long. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in exterior
locations and as noted on the drawings.

K. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: The Contractor shall provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown on the
drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars,
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible.
The Contractor shall provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and
installation with other work. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION

A. Accurately set all work to established lines and elevations, and rigidly fasten in place with suitable
attachments to the construction of the building. At the completion of the work, check all work, re-adjust as
required, and leave in perfect condition. Grind all exposed to view welds smooth to the touch.

B. Construct and install stairs in strict accordance with the details, the approved shop drawings, and
requirements of all codes, laws, and ordinances bearing on the work.
1. Pipe rails set in exposed concrete surfaces shall be grouted with expanding grout. Hole to receive
pipe shall be formed with galvanized sheet metal sleeve and provide at least 12 mm (1/2 inch)
clearance around entire perimeter. Hold expanding grout back 12 mm (1/2 inch) from finish
surface and fill void with Portland cement grout to match color and texture of adjacent surface.

3.02 FIELD WELDING

A. Field weld components indicated on Shop Drawings in accordance with AWS D1.1.

B. Immediately after welding, touch-up welds, burned areas and damaged surface coatings.
1. Thoroughly remove all spatter by power wire-brushing (or if inaccessible, wire brushing) per
SSPC, surface preparation specification SP2 or SP3. Allow surface to cool to ambient
temperature. Clean surface with solvent wipe to remove oils, grease and dirt in accordance with
SSPC surface preparation specification SP1.


2. Apply one coat of liquid zinc to attain a minimum of 1.5 mils dry film thickness. Coating should
extend at least two inches beyond either side of weldment to ensure complete coverage of welded
area.

3.03 FIELD BOLTING

A. Accurately drive all bolts into holes, protecting the bolt heads so as not to damage the thread during the
driving. Ensure that bolt heads and nuts rest squarely against the metal. Where structural members have
sloping flange faces, provide approved beveled washers at the bolted connections to afford square seating
for bolt heads or nuts. Nick bolt threads for unfinished bolts to prevent the nuts from backing off.

B. Use an approved calibrated manual or power torque wrench to obtain the proper torque and tension as
recommended by the bolt manufacturer for all A 325 bolts.

3.04 TOUCH-UP

A. Touch-up all welds, burned areas, scratches, abrasions, on galvanized metals, using specified liquid zinc
coating.

B. Touch-up all welds, scratches, abrasions, and other surface damaged on shop-primed or painted metals,
using the same coatings as specified under shop applied finishes, herein above.

3.05 SCHEDULES

A. General: Items listed below provide further description of those already indicated in the Drawings. This list
does not represent a complete list of miscellaneous metal components or types required to complete the
Work.
1. Carefully review all Drawings and furnish and install metal fabrications required by the various
trades, whether or not specifically listed herein, such as miscellaneous clip angles, miscellaneous steel
bracketing, and other miscellaneous metal items as indicated on the Drawings, reasonably implied
therefrom, or reasonably necessary for the thorough completion of the work.

B. Steel pan stair and related support components, as detailed on the Drawings and specified herein above.

C. Steel stair and related support components:
1. Stair treads and landing: Cold-formed steel plate, 1.9 mm (14 gage).
2. Risers: 1.5 mm (16 gage) steel plate.
3. Channel stringer: 300 mm (12 inch) width of size to meet engineering requirements.
4. Handrails, stiffeners, clip angles and other structural components, of size and as required to meet
engineering and code requirements specified herein above.

D. Interior railings, as detailed on the Drawings. Connections and sizing to conform to engineering and code
requirements specified herein above.
1. Stainless steel cable system at Lobby Stairs: Handrails shall be 5 mm (3/16 inch) vinyl coated
stainless steel, complete with adjustable and non-adjustable termination studs and turnbuckles,
swage terminals, toggle jaws, threaded studs, and other fittings required for complete installation.
Jobsite installation shall be performed using Nicropress hand swaging tool used to apply a series
of crimps to secure the cable to the fittings.

E. Exterior handrails: 38 mm (1 inch) internal diameter steel pipe as detailed on the Drawings. Where
fabricated assemblies are not indicated to be stainless steel, they shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
1. Pipe railings: To prevent unnecessary damage to the galvanized coating by field welding, provide
slip-fit method of connecting pipe railings. Fabricate pipe railing from mechanical steel tubing
internally vented with holes 3/4 the size of the pipe's internal diameter.


F. Elevator pit ladders: Stringers 9 mm (3/8-inch) by 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) flat bar, rungs 16 mm (5/8 inch)
diameter solid steel rods. Offset ladder from wall surface by 180 mm (7 inches) to centerline of rungs, with
brackets.
1. Fabricate ladders in accordance with OSHA requirements, and ANSI A14.3 standards.
2. Hot dip galvanized finish assembled elevator pit ladders.

G. Floor mat frame at Entrances (having stone flooring surround): 12 mm (1/2 inch) high (upturned edge) by
minimum 25 mm (1 inch) (bottom edge) by 3 mm (
1
/8 inch) thick stainless steel with US 32D finish.
1. Fabricate frame to be straight, level and square. Provide frame pieces in longest available lengths
to minimize joints. Form corners with tightly mitered joints or use prefabricated joint-less corners.
2. Shop fabricate framework to the greatest extent possible.

H. Loading dock edge: 4 by 4 by 3/8 inch hot-dipped galvanized steel angle, for entire length of loading dock,
with welded studs, for placement by Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

I. Elevator sill support angles: 100 mm by 100 mm (4 by 4 inch) by 9 mm (3/8 inch) thick, shop primed.

J. Lintels: As scheduled on Structural Drawings.
1. Provide lintels 300 mm (12 inches) longer than masonry openings. Where lintel abuts column,
provide structural clip connection.
2. Lintels occurring in exterior walls shall be galvanized in conformance with the requirements of
ASTM A 143, and ASTM A 123.

K. Overhead Support system: Provide Unistrut type system, Unistrut Corp, Wayne MI, 001-734-721-4040.
meeting the following requirements in configuration shown on Drawings.
1. Material: 2.7 mm (12 gage) cold formed low carbon steel.
2. Finish: electrostatically applied, rust-inhibiting, baked-on, acrylic enamel paint.
3. Size: 40 mm x 40 mm (1-5/8" x 1-5/8") Series P1000 H3 with perforations at 50 mm (2 inches) on
center. nominal.
4. Fasteners: P1047 and as required for configurations shown.
5. Accessories: Paintable PVC closure strip P1184 PVC for exposed channels.

L. Ventilation stacks : Fabricate as detailed on the Drawings of thickness sufficient to prevent distortion,
buckling, or oil-canning.

M. Security grate stainless steel fabrications: Fabricate as detailed on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521-1
SECTION 05521

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs.
2. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings" for ornamental railings fabricated from pipes and tubes.
3. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry " for wood blocking for anchoring railings.
4. Division 9 Section " Gypsum Board Assemblies and Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for metal
backing for anchoring railings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.
2. Fittings and brackets.
E. Welding certificates.
F. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish
dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other
contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1.6 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing
anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily
by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
Local supplier as accepted by the engineer.
.
2.2 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade
names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails,
2.3 STEEL AND IRON
A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).
B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and
weight are required by structural loads.
1. Provide Mild steel with weather proof epoxy coating finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads.
2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
E. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type I (expanded), Class 1 (uncoated).
1. Style Designation: 3/4 number 13.
F. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, diamond pattern, 50-mm woven-wire mesh, made from 3.5-mm nominal
diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510M.
2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide the following:
1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited
zinc coating.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to
produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work,
2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work,
unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated.
3. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place, chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-
resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
C. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19.
b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621.
c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313.
d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer.
e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670.
f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer.
g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.
D. Shop Primer for Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinc-coated steel and for compatibility
with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5.
E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-
Paint 20.
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with
ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and
spacing, details, finish, and anchorage.

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1
mm, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where
water may accumulate.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or nonwelded connections, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this
purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base
metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after
finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate
members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's
standard splicing method.
J. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. As detailed.
K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive
configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless
clearance between end of rail and wall is 6 mm or less.
N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to
interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-
resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and
prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate
anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with
supporting structure.
P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 150 mm long with inside dimensions not less
than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom closure.
Q. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven-wire mesh crimped into 25-by-13-by-3-mm
metal channel frames. Make wire mesh and frames from same metal as railings in which they are installed.

1. Orient wire mesh with diamonds vertical.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for
applying and designating finishes.
B. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.
2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
3. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
4. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by
plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
C. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous
components.
D. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves,
except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry.
E. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign
matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process.
F. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements
indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed
railings:
1. Exterior Railings (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interior Railings (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
G. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in
SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop
painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
1. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.
2. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of
concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not
already done.
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after
fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or
fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and
ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm in 3 m.
C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings
and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use
wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed
locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with
requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in
the field.
C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to
accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 50 mm beyond joint on either side,
fasten internal sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint within 150 mm of post.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into
sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply
with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of post for installing posts in
concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring material.
D. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 3-mm buildup, sloped away from
post.
3.5 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS
A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored to wall
construction with anchors and bolts.
3.6 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 38-mm clearance from inside face of handrail
and finished wall surface.
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.
2. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts.
2. For steel-framed gypsum board partitions, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel
reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads.
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for
touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply
with ASTM A 780.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved
by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work.
Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or
provide new units.
END OF SECTION

GRATINGS 05530-1

SECTION 05530

GRATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes formed floor gratings.

1. Section 03300 Cast-In-Place - Concrete Framed concrete opening.
2. Section 05500 Miscellaneous Metal Work.
3. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish.
.


A. Design Live Pedestrian Load: Uniform load of 4.7 kPa minimum; concentrated load of force 1330 N.

B. Maximum Allowable Deflection Under Live Load: 1/240 of span; size components for single span.

C. Maximum Spacing Between Bars: To restrict pedestrian shoe heels.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate details of gratings, component supports, anchorage, openings, perimeter
construction details, and tolerances. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding
symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

B. Product Data: Submit span and deflection tables.

C. Samples: Submit two samples, 300 x 300 mm in size illustrating surface finish, colour, and texture.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special requirements of opening, perimeter framing, and
finishing.

E. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01300 Administrative requirements certifying
welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Design gratings under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and
licensed in State of Kuwait.

1.05 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Co-ordinate Work with placement of frames, tolerances for openings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES

GRATINGS 05530-2

Approved manufacture by engineer.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Saddle Clips: stainless steel.

B. Perimeter Closure: Same material as grating.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate grates to sizes indicated in Contract drawing. AR-A-200.

B. Weld joints of intersecting metal sections.

C. Fabricate support framing for openings.

D. Top Surface: Non-slip.

E. Removable Panels: With recessed finger lift rings.

2.04 SHOP FINISHING

A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.

B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.

C. Prime paint items with two coats.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify opening sizes and dimensional tolerances are acceptable.

B. Verify anchors are correctly positioned.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Place frames in correct position, plumb and level.

B. Mechanically cut primed finish surfaces. Do not flame cut.

C. Set perimeter closure flush with top of grating and surrounding construction.

D. Secure to prevent movement.

E. Install Work in accordance with State of Kuwait Public Works standards.


A. Conform to NAAMM Metal Bar Grating Manual

B. Maximum Space between Adjacent Sections: 10 mm.

3.04 VARIATION

GRATINGS 05530-3

A. Maximum Variation from Top Surface Plane of Adjacent Sections: 1.5 mm.

B. Clean welds and damaged coatings and apply two coats of touch-up primer.

3.05 SCHEDULES

A. As indicated on drawings.

END OF SECTION

BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 07105-1

SECTION 07105

BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials
and performing all operations in connection with Bituminious membrane Waterproofing.

B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the application of :
1. Bituminious membrane waterproofing to external faces of basements and other underground and
water retaining structures.
2. Protection screed to horizontal surfaces.
3. Protection board to vertical waterproofing within the site.
4. Blockwork (SRC) to vertical waterproofing at site boundaries.


A. The work shall conform to the codes and standards of the following agencies as further cited herein:
NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Sheet membrane waterproofing shall be executed by an approved specialist Sub-Contractor
having a minimum of Fifteen (15) years successful experience in the installation of the specified material.
Employ only tradesmen experienced with the installation of the materials specified.

B. The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the specified materials to be used have been
successfully utilised on work of similar scope to that shown and specified for this Project. The waterproofing
system examples cited shall have been completed and in use for a minimum five (5) years without evidence
of failure.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Employer of other rights he may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and are in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Warranty: Provide a written warranty, for a Ten (10) years period, against leaks resulting from
defects of materials or workmanship. Upon notification of such defects, within the warranty period,
make the necessary repairs and replacements, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no
additional cost to the Employer and at minimum disturbance to the Employers use of the Project.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' specifications, installation instructions and other data to show
compliance with the Contract Documents.

B. Samples: Submit samples of membrane waterproofing . Samples shall be 300 mm square.


1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION CO-ORDINATION

A. Pre-waterproofing Conference :
1. After approval of all materials and prior to installation, a Pre-Waterproofing conference shall be
held at job site. In attendance shall be representatives of (1) the Engineer (2) the Contractor, (3)
Sub-Contractor and (4) Manufacturer's representative.
2. The parties shall review Drawings, specifications and approved materials. Correct conflicts, if any,
between approvals and specification requirements. Examine job site conditions, including
inspection of deck, material lables and methods of storing materials. Confirm that all curbs and
edges are provided and correctly installed. Review installation procedures, scheduling and
temperature requirements, and establish protection methods for finished roof from other trades.

1.07 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection shall be made by a representative of the material
manufacturer in order to ascertain that the system has been properly installed. Should there be any
deviation from this specification without the prior written consent of the material manufacturer, the
manufacturer shall have the option of refusing the guarantee.


A. Materials shall be delivered in their original, tightly sealed containers or unopened packages, all clearly
labelled with the manufacturer's name, brand name, and number and batch number of the material where
appropriate. Materials and equipment shall be stored as directed in a neat and safe manner. Storage area
shall be shaded, ventilated and maintained at a temperature between (10
o
C) and (40
o
C), and shall be
located away from all sources of excess heat, sparks or open flame. Containers of liquid material shall not
be left open at any time in the storage area.

B. Materials not conforming to these requirements will be rejected by the Engineer and shall be removed from
the site by the applicator and replaced with approved materials, at no additional cost to the Employer.

C. Deliver materials to site in ample time to avoid delay in job progress and at such times as to permit proper
co-ordination of the various parts.

1.09 PROTECTION

A. Protect waterproofing system installation from damage during construction period so that it will be without
any indication of abuse or damage at the time of completion.

B. Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and dropping of materials. Repair and
restore other work damaged during roofing membrane operations.


D. Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during delivery, storage and installation of
flammable materials specified herein. Comply with local ordinances and fire regulations in the installation of
hazardous materials specified or required under this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide the products and systems specified in the material manufacturer's latest published manual
for the type of substrate shown.


B. Manufacturers: The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of
establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, will be
considered acceptable. The decision of acceptability will rest with the Engineer.
C. Bitumen Sheet Membrane: Flame bonded single-ply membrane, 4 (+/-0.2) mm thick, composed of asphalt or
bitumen modified with thermoplastic resins and reinforced with non-woven polyester fabric. Provide the
following :
1. "Paralon NT4"; Imper, Italy
2. Testudo Polyester Spunbond 16"; Index, Italy
3. "Marley Torch 400S"; Marley Waterproofing Ltd.
4. Dermabit elasphalt 250 series.
5. Awazel ht-250
Or equal approved.

Provide no. of layers as shown in the drawings or provide two layers if none is shown.

D. Primer for Bitumen Sheet Membrane:

Provide the following:
1. "Impertene Primer", Imper, Italy, or
2. "Indemastic Primer", Index, Italy, or
3. "Marley Bitumen Primer", Marley Waterproofing Ltd, or
4. As recommended by the manufacturer of bitumen sheet membrane.
5. Dermabit
6. Awazel
Or equal approved.

E. Protection Screed
1:4 cement sand screed, using sulphate resisting cement type V.

F. Protection Board: Provide one of the following or as recommended by the manufacturer of waterproofing
membrane wherever mentioned or shown on the drawing.
1. "Sealtight Protection Course PC-2"; W.R. Meadows Inc.
2. "Elastoboard", The Celotex Corp.
3. "Servi-Pak", Servicised Ltd.
4. "Alphatect", Asphal Top SA
5. Dermabit sonoproof PE 6mm thick.
6. Awazel MS 60.

Thickness of the protection board to be as per the drawings or 6mm if none is mentioned therein.

G. Blockwork : Provide 100mm thick blockwall as protection to vertical waterproofing membrane at site
boundaries. The cement used for manufacturing the blocks as well as that for making the mortar shall be
sulphate resisting, type V.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.01 Approved local applicators.

1. Al Hamra
2. Al Bahar and Bardawil
3. Jasim Al Nisf
4. Al Wazzan
5. Or equal approved.

3.02 CONDITIONS OF SURFACE

A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is to be installed.
Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare the substrates in all areas and locations in accordance with each of the respective
manufacturer's instructions. Grind and fill concrete surfaces as required to meet tolerances specified by the
manufacturer.

B. Provide levelling screed in the thickness shown on the drawing or minimum 3mm if none is shown as well as
provide additional thickness so as to prepare a level surface for applying the waterproofing membrane.

C. Co-ordinate the installation of waterproofing membrane with floor drains, equipment bases and other
adjacent work. Mask adjacent work to prevent soil marks.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF MEMBRANE

A. Comply with the membrane manufacturer's directions for the installation.

B. Install and complete the system to assure that no water leakage through the system occurs.
C. At the start of the installation and periodically as work progresses provide the services of the manufacturer's
technical representative at the job site as often as deemed necessary by the manufacturer and/or the
Engineer to advise on all phases of this work.

D. Install the system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.

E. Install cant strips where shown or recommended by the waterproofing materials manufacturer.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION BOARD TO VERTICAL SURFACES WITHIN THE SITE

A. Areas where waterproofing is applied shall be protected from all traffic and backfilling. All damage to
finished portions of the waterproofing membrane by other trades shall be either repaired or replaced, or
both, in an acceptable manner and the cost of such corrective work shall be borne by the Contractor.

B. Upon completion of waterproofing, immediately install a protective course over membrane surfaces.
Protection course shall consist of protection board, or where indicated protection board shall be applied in
"dry" method over horizontal sections of membrane waterproofing. At vertical sections of membrane
waterproofing, protection board shall be adhered to membrane with membrane manufacturer's approved
adhesive.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF 100MMTHICK BLOCKWORK AT SITE BOUNDARIES

A. Refer and comply with 3.04A above.

B. Install 100mm thick blockwork as protection to vertical waterproofing if it abuts the site boundary.


C. Block work as protection to the waterproofing membrane will be done in a manner as not to damage the
membrane. The Contractor/Sub-contractor will be completely responsible.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION SCREED TO HORIZONTAL WATERPROOFING

A. Install the above, all as protection screed as shown in the drawings or 50mm thick if none is shown.

3.08 TESTING

A. On completion of membrane installation all areas shall be observed for leaks after removal of dewatering
system wherever applicable, or under natural conditions likely to occur after the contract is substantially
complete.

B. Any area where leaks occur shall be drained, thoroughly dried, repaired, and then fully re-tested.

3.08 CLEAN UP

The applicator shall remove all masking, protection, equipment, materials and debris from the work and
storage areas and leave those areas in clean, undamaged and acceptable condition.

END OF SECTION

FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
Project No.: KW.09.0128 07120-1

SECTION 07120


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

and performing all operations in connection with Fluid Applied membrane Waterproofing.

B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the application of :
1. Fluid Applied Waterproofing (CIM1060) for potable and non-potable water tanks etc.
2. Fluid Applied Waterproofing for wet areas like kitchens, toilets, pools etc. One layer of
Waterproofing membrane 4.5mm thick with minimum 250 polystyrene with water test and fluid
applied water proofing below the floor finishing.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following under provisions of Division 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
1. Literature: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical
properties and installation instructions for each item furnished hereunder.
2. Manufacturers instructions: Manufacturers installation instructions indicating special procedures,
and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
3. Qualifications Statement: Evidence indicating that the proposed applicators are qualified to
perform the work and are approved by the waterproofing manufacturer.


A. The work under this Section must be performed by an applicator approved by the membrane manufacturer.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary
crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper
performance of the work of this Section.

B. Prior to commencing work, the manufacturer of the fluid applied waterproofing membrane shall submit the
following:
1. Certification from an independent testing laboratory that their material meets the CGSB 37-GP-
50M standard for rubberized asphalt membranes.
2. Certification showing full time quality control of their production facilities and that each batch of
material is tested to insure conformance with the manufacturers published physical properties.

C. Upon completion of the work the membrane manufacturer shall inspect the location where membrane have
been carried out.

D. Upon completion of the work, furnish the Employer with a single source, Five-Year watertightness Warranty
from the manufacturer/supplier.

1.04 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All surfaces shall be clean, free of dampness, frost, dust, laitance or loose concrete, films of oil, grease,
curing compounds, lacquers or other substances which would affect the application of membrane
waterproofing.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 07120-2

B. Protect all adjacent work from damage by work performed under this section.

C. Deliver materials In original unopened containers of packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer's name,
brand name, Instruction for use, all Identifying numbers, and U.L. Labels.

D. Store materials in a clean, dry area protected from water and direct sunlight.

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Application of the membrane shall not commence nor proceed during inclement weather. All surfaces to
receive the membrane shall be free of water, dew, frost, snow and ice.

B. Application of membrane shall not commence nor proceed when the ambient temperature is below 32
degrees Fahrenheit.

C. Preparation and application of waterproofing must be conducted in well ventilated areas.

D. Over its service life, do not expose membrane or accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180
degrees Fahrenheit. (i.e. hot pipes and vents or direct steam venting, etc..).

E. Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat, etc.) to
come in contact with the waterproofing membrane. Any exposure to foreign materials or chemical
discharges must be presented to membrane manufacturer for evaluation to determine any impact on the
membrane assembly performance.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Waterproofing membrane manufacturer shall provide the following warranties and bonds under the
provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements.
1. Five Year - Watertightness Warranty
a. The waterproofing shall remain watertight for five years from substantial .completion.
b. In the event that the products fails to so perform, the manufacturer/supplier will make
repairs to the waterproofing assembly to enable it to perform as warranted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Description:
1. The Waterproofing System shall be a high solids, two component (for water tanks only), liquid,
cold applied, chemical resistant asphalt extended urethane elastomer that cures to a durable
abrasion resistant film. Forms a flexible impermeable barrier to water and most aqueous agents.
2. Product shall be EPA approved and meet NSF-61 criteria for direct contact with potable water and
shall meet the following performance data :

B. Manufacture: To establish a standard of quality, design and function desired, Drawings and specifications
have been based on the following:
1. For Potable Water Tanks :
Product: CIM 1000 - Commercial Industrial Membrane

2. For Wet Areas and Fountain Pools :
a. Mapei product: Planicrete W (urethane based).
b. Laticrete product Laticrete 9235 Waterproofing (non-solvent based).

Project No.: KW.09.0128 07120-3

c. SpEC Product : SpECtite HP 600
d. Fosroc Product : Nitro proof 600
e. CIM 600 :
f. Or equal approved.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 07120-4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the substrates adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is to be installed.
Do not proceed with the Work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare the substrate in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Grind and fill concrete
surfaces as required to meet tolerances specified by the manufacturer.

B. Apply waterproofing to substrate in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

C. Co-ordinate the installation of waterproofing with adjacent work.

3.03 LOCATION

A. All concrete water tanks on their floors, walls and soffits.

B. All toilets and kitchens on their floors, plus 1000 mm height on their walls and water features fountains etc.
wherever shown on drawings.

C. All pool fountains on their floors and walls.

D. Elsewhere to the extent shown in the drawings.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with waterproofing manufacturers directions for the installation.

B. Install and complete the system to assure that no water leakage through the system occurs.

C. At the start of the installation and periodically as work progresses provide the service of the manufacturers
technical representative at the job site as often as deemed necessary by the manufacturer to advise on all
phases of the Work.

D. Install the system in accordance with the manufacturers instructions, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.

E. Allow waterproofing to cure properly. During this period, block off all traffic and protect waterproofing from
physical damage.

3.05 TESTING

A. Test water tanks and all other areas receiving fluid applied waterproofing such as toilet and kitchen floors
against leaks after 48 hours (or more if manufacturer so recommends) from the start of the test.

B. Fill water tanks full. Fill with 10cm standing water in toilets and other wet areas. If leaks occur, drain and
allow it to be thoroughly dry, repair waterproofing and re test. Repeat process as often as required until no
leaks occur.

3.06 CLEAN-UP

A. Applicator shall remove all masking, protection, equipment, materials and debris from the work and storage
areas and leave those areas in clean, undamaged and in acceptable condition.

Project No.: KW.09.0128 07120-5

END OF SECTION

CEMENTATIOUS WATERPROOFING 07140-1
SECTION 07140

CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING

1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. The penetrating cementitious waterproofing materials specified herein shall be of the surface applied,
capillary action type, capable of providing the waterproofing qualities as stated under the Guarantee, for all
vertical and horizontal applications, at locations shown on the drawings or on the finish schedules.

B. All work of this Section shall comply with the Conditions of the Contract, the Drawings and any special
conditions forming apart of the Contract.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and appliances as required for the proper installation
cementitious type waterproofing as follows:

B. Prepare all surfaces, as specified herein, to receive penetrating cementitious waterproofing.

C. Provide waterproofing at all vertical and horizontal surfaces shown on the Drawings or Finish Schedule.

D. Manufacturer to provide all certifications, test data, affidavits or samples requested by the Architect.

E. Perform all installations to comply with local Rules and Regulations, OSHA Requirements for Health and
Safety and EPA Statutes complying with environmental protection

F. Perform all installations in accordance with the approved construction progress schedule or at such times
necessary for the orderly and expeditious completion of the work of the project.

G. Upon completion of waterproofing, remove all waste or rubbish resulting from waterproofing application and
all equipment used for same.

H. Pre-mixed factory formulation shall be guaranteed not to contain additives such as chlorides, sulphates, iron
oxides, asbestos or similar deleterious substances.

I. All materials used in the formulation shall comply with standards set forth herein, as follows:

J. Penetrating cementitious waterproofing compound shall be composed of specially prepared Portland
cement, fine oven-dried Quartz aggregates with a specific sand curve, and organic and inorganic chemicals
produced by Contite International.

2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Contite International, Shelton, CT
B. CIM - Chemical Construction Material
C. XYPEX Jassem Ahmad Yousef Al Nisf & Co.
D. VANDEX Al Hamra Kuwait Co.


2.02 TYPES OF PRODUCTS
A. Contite Slurry

B. Contite waterproofing Mortar.

C. Contite TA, broad cast powder application
D. Contite PA added to shot-crete mix

E. Contite Stop plugging material

3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Prior to commencing waterproofing operations inspect all containers for rips, tears or holes. Any damaged
containers shall be rejected and replaced with new materials.

B. Make sure that surfaces to be treated are free of laitance and foreign materials which will prevent the
chemical penetration. Floor hardeners or curing agents should not be used prior to the application.

C. Contite products CANNOT be applied if ambient temperature falls below freezing. Surfaces to be treated
shall be frost-free.

D. Surfaces to be treated shall have an open capillary system. joints and cracks exceeding 0.01 inch in size
should be routed out 3/4 deep and as narrow as possible

E. Remove all laitance, dirt, dust and rinse concrete slabs and cracks with water. The surfaces shall have a
dark not shiny appearance when the coating is applied.

F. Steam clean, acid-etch, or brush blast when necessary. Leavetie holes 1 back. Segregated areas and faulty
construction joints shall be routed out to sound concrete.

G. Construction joints and visible cracks in concrete surfaces exceeding hairline size (larger than 0.01) should
be routed out3/4 deep. Construction joints can be formed initially by use of cant strip 1 x 3/4

3.02 MIXING PROCEDURES

A. Slurry Mix

1. Mix contrite powder water. Proportions: 3 parts of powder to 1 part of water by volume.
Should the mixture start to thicken, stir again. Prepare only as much as can be applied within
a 30-minute period

B. Mortar Mix

1. Mix contrite mortar with water. Trowel until medium stiff consistency is reached. Prepare
only as much Contite as can be applied within a 35 minute period

3.03 SAFETY

A. Protect hands with rubber gloves. During spray or overhead applications use goggles.

3.04 APPLICATION

A. Apply Contite by masonry brush or broom with artificial fibers or spray equipment.

B. Apply Contite TA by broadcast on the concrete while the concrete is still plastic. Float or trowel by hand or
machine until desired finish is reached.

C. Horizontal Concrete Surfaces

1. Dry shake and Power Trowel, Wood or Bull Float

2. Broad cast Contite TA when horizontal concrete slab is still in the plastic state. Apply 1.0 lbs./sq.yd.
Trowel or float surface is specified finish.

3. Slurry Mix: Contite 2.5 0 3.0 lbs./sq.yd. in one coating.

4. Construction joints and pour/cold joints should be treated with Contite Slurry 2.5 to 3.0 lbs./sq.yd. in
slurry consistency immediately prior to placing of concrete

5. Installation of reglets and cant strips at time of forming is recommended. 1 x cold joints are filled with
Contite Mortar.

D. Vertical Concrete Surfaces

1. Honeycombed areas, faulty construction joints, cracks, and tie holes, fill with Contite Mortar

2. Coat interior/exterior surfaces of concrete walls 2.5 to 3.0 lbs/sq. yd with Contite by brush (two
coatings) or spray gun.

3. Fill reglets, construction joints, junction walls and slab and/or junction wall land footing with Contite
Mortar.

3.05 PROTECTION ANDCURING

A. Protect the freshly treated surfaces from rain for a minimum period of 24 hours. Maintain above freezing
temperature for 24hours.

B. Moisture cure all treated areas for a minimum period of two days in warm, dry and windy weather. Start with
water fog spraying the day following the application.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean all tools such as trowels, brushes, buckets and spray equipment IMMEDIATLY after use. Dried materials
can be removed by soaking in muriatic acid (10% solution).

3.07 PAINTING

A. Contite coated surfaces can be painted 14 days after coating.

B. A wash with vinegar water is recommended prior to painting

C. For application on cisterns and drinking water reservoirs, follow EPA requirements.


For special tanks, aquariums and industrial or processing installations, please contact: Contite International, 135 Dudley Road,
Wayland, MA 01778 (888)266-8483.

END OF SECTION

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROFING 07160-1

SECTION 07160

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, appliances and materials
and performing all operations in connection with Fluid Bituminous Damp proofing.

B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the following:-
1. Protective painting to concrete foundations, and all other concrete surfaces, in contact with soil
where waterproofing membrane is not shown to be applied/required.


A. The work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following agencies as further cited herein:

BS 3416 Rubberised Bitumen Paint

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the specified materials have been successfully
utilised on work of a similar scope to that shown and specified for this Project. The system examples cited
shall have been completed and in use for a minimum two (2) years without any evidence of failure.

B. Fluid applied bituminous dampproofing shall be executed by workers who are familiar with this type of work
for a minimum of two years.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers' Data: Submit to the Engineer Manufacturers' specifications and installation instructions for
the fluid applied dampproofing system and other data to show compliance with the Contract Documents.


A. The Contractor shall deliver the approved products to the job site in their original unopened containers
clearly labelled with the manufacturer's name, brand, designation, type and class as applicable, and the date
of manufacture and expiration (if any).

B. Products shall be stored in an approved dry area and protected from contact with soil and from exposure to
the elements. Products shall be kept dry at all times.

C. Products shall be handled in a manner that will prevent breakage of containers and/or damage to the
products.


A. Do not apply Bituminous Dampproofing during inclement weather or when air temperature is outside the
range recommended by the manufacturer.

1.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect Bituminous Dampproofing from damage during construction period so that it will be without any
indication of abuse or damage at time of completion or covering with other materials.


restore other work damaged during Bituminous Dampproofing operations.


hazardous materials specified or required under this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Rubberised Bitumen Paint

The rubber bitumen emulsion shall comply with BS 3416 Type I Class A or B and shall be a water bound
emulsion with a minimum 60% total solids content by volume, comprising bitumen with fine particles of
rubber. Not less than 10% nor more than 20% of the total solids shall be rubber. The consistency shall be
such that it can be applied to the surface by brush at normal temperature comply with CP 231 for application
of paint.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. The product and manufacturer specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of establishing minimum
quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than, those specified may be acceptable subject to
the Engineer's approval.
1. Nito Proof 100 - Fosroc International Ltd
2. Febit - FEB Construction Products
3. Pasta Imper - Imper Italia SPA

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section.
1. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive dampproofing are rigidly installed.
2. Verify surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves, or projections which may be detrimental to
successful installation.

B. Do not apply dampproofing to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty or surfaces which require cleaning.

C. Do not apply dampproofing unless curing of concrete is complete and approved by the Engineer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces of debris and deleterious material and surfaces are clean, dry, free from oil, grease or
loosely adhering particles such as mortar, laitance etc.

B. Do not proceed with Bituminous Dampproofing until all drains, piping, conduit, vents, ducts and other
projections through the substrate have been installed.

3.03 INSTALLATION


A. Install Bituminous Dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions except as
hereinafter specified.

B. Apply a first coat of bituminous dampproofing and allow to dry coverage rate should be approximately 3m
2

per litre.


C. The second coat shall be applied as soon as the first coat is dry at right angles to the first coat, also at the
same rate as the first coat.

D. The emulsion shall be applied by brush, squeegee or spraying strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. It shall not be applied during, or when rain or dust storms are to be expected.

E. Backfillings shall not be commenced until the second coat of emulsion is quite dry.

END OF SECTION

BUILDING INSULATION 07210-1

SECTION 07210

BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C 553-92 Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
C 578-95 Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
C 612-93 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
C 665-98 Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured
Housing.
E 84-98 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
E 119-98 Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
E 136-96a Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C.


A. Provide complete thermal separation between exterior and interior of air-conditioned spaces with R value of
not less than 10.

B. Exceptions:
1. Requirements for glazed areas, roofs, and other areas of construction not controllable under this
Section are specified elsewhere.
2. Below Grade Spaces: Perimeter insulation not required to extend more than 150 mm below grade
unless shown otherwise. Interior wall systems required full height.
3. Slab on Grade: Separation provided by perimeter insulation.

C. Firestoppinng: Coordinate with Section 07270 - Firestopping to achieve required fire resistance at
perimeter walls and edge of slabs.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature fully describing insulating products.


A. Provide only materials tested and certified to conform with specified requirements.


A. Delivery : Deliver products in original, unopened containers with contents, brand names, and manufacturer
plainly marked.

B. Storage: Store material in dry place. Protect from damage.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Rigid Insulation:
1. Extruded polystyrene foam: One of the following conforming to ASTM C 578, Type IV, with
compressive strength not less than 1.8 kg/cm
2
:
a. "Styrofoam" ("Square Edge" or "Scoreboard") by Dow Chemical Company.
b. "Foamular 250" by Owens Corning (previously UC Industries).
c. "Amofoam RCY" by Tenneco Building Products (Previously Amoco)
d. ISO board MD. By Iso foam insulating compeny.

2. Thickness 50 mm for walls and 75mm for roof unless otherwise shown on drawings.
3. Water Absorption: Not to exceed 0.1%.
4. Fire characteristics per ASTM E 84:
a. Flame spread: 75 maximum.
b. Smoke developed: 450 maximum.

B. Batt/Blanket Insulation:
1. Glass fiber, mineral fiber, or mineral wool materials. Acceptable manufacturers: Manville, Owens
Corning Fiberglass Corporation, U.S. Gypsum Company, Fibrex, Knauf, Rockwool Industries
Inc., Azel and Kimco.
2. Thickness as required to achieve the following thermal values: minimum R 12 typical for general
use and min. 15 for metal roofs. Widths as required and as suitable for application.
3. Facing:
a. Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I.

C. Semi-Rigid Insulation Board:
1. Glass fiber material by Owens Corning Fiberglas Corporation or Kimco.
2. Minimum R = 12.0.
3. Unfaced: Flame spread 20 or less by ASTM E 84, smoke developed 20.
a. Type 701, 24 kg/m~density, k = 0.24; ASTM C 553, Type III.

D. Spandrel Insulation.
1. Mineral insulation "Thermafiber Curtain Wall Insulation" by U.S. Gypsum Co. or equal by Fibrex or
Partek or approved equal from specified manufacturers. Provide with foil facing.
2. Minimum R = 12.0.

2.02 VAPOR BARRIER

A. Specified elsewhere.

2.03 FASTENING DEVICES

A. Adhesives: Provide mastics and adhesives made or recommended by the manufacturer for bonding
materials to the indicated substrate. See insulation anchors and perimeter insulation.

B. Fasteners:
1. Galvanized sheet metal screws and washers.
2. Rigid Wall Insulation System: Hand or pneumatic driven nails or self-threading screws as
recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Insulation Anchors:


1. Typical: Metal spindle on mounting plate and washer; "Insul-Anchor" by Midwest Fasteners Mfg.,
"Stic-Klip" by Eckel Industries of Canada, or approved equal.
2. Over Spray Fireproofing : Weld on type clips which permit attachment to steel substrate without
removal of fireproofing similar to products manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co.

D. Insulation Tape : "FasTape" No. 0821 by Fasson or approved equal. Foil/ scrim/kraft facestock coated
tape; coated one side with rubber based adhesive protected by a bleached kraft release liner.
Reinforced scrim. Typical for foil-faced products.

E. Supplemental Supports: Provide wire mesh, straps, flexible metal rods or similar devices where required for
supplemental support of insulation in permanent location. Galvanized finish typical except where aluminum
is required to prevent electrolysis.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive insulation and verify that they are ready for the installation. Remove loose particles,
dirt, and other foreign matter affecting bond of adhesives.

3.02 LOCATION

1. Exterior Wall Between stone and wall 50mm thick
extruded polystyrene insulation
2. Window Framing Pack perimeters of window framing with glass fibre batt
insulation where glazing system abuts wall construction; fill
all voids.
3. Glazed Curtain Wall Spandrels Spandrel insulation.
4. Underside of metal roofing for interior Glass fiber blanket insulation having aluminium foil facing and fixed
with chicken wire mesh.
5. Over R.C roof 75mm extruded polystyrene insulation

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Provide attachment/support as required and recommended by manufacturer to assure insulating materials
maintain their proper location and perform their intended function, all subject to review by Engineer.
1. Provide wire or strapping retainers at stud walls without board covering to maintain insulation in place.
Install retainers on open side of wall at 400 mm centers.

B. Rigid Insulation:
1. Foundation: (exterior side.)
a. Install on exterior side of foundation walls at slab-on-grade conditions; depth as shown
on drawings.
2. Wall:
a. Install on interior surface of exterior concrete or masonry wall.
b. Install insulation with tight joints with grooves oriented vertically.
c. Install metal furring vertically at 600 mm center to center into grooved insulation and
securely attach to wall with mechanical fasteners, all in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.

C. Semi-Rigid Insulation:
1. Install with insulation anchors at spacing recommended by insulation manufacturer.
2. Use weld-on type anchors at steel members with spray fireproof mg.


D. Install in spaces between framing members. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids.

E. Spandrel Insulation : Install per manufacturer's recommendations to hold insulation firmly and permanently in
place. No supports or fasteners shall be visible from exterior.

END OF SECTION

EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM 07241-1

SECTION 07241

EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide exterior insulation and finish system in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Exterior insulation and finish systems refer to exterior assemblies composed of an inner layer of insulation
board and an outer layer composed of a base coat glass-fiber-mesh-reinforcement and protective finish
coats in standard and high impact performance.

1.03 STANDARDS

1. EIMA "Guideline Specification for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems Class PB".

B. Where the language in any of the documents referred to herein is in the form of a recommendation,
suggestion or guide; such recommendation, suggestion or guide shall be deemed to be mandatory under
this Contract.


A. General: Provide systems complying with the following performance requirements:
1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components or between system and
supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other
in-service conditions.
2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into system and assemblies behind
it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating
effectiveness or other degradation of system and assemblies behind system, including substrates,
supporting wall construction, and interior finish.
3. Design, fabricate and install component parts providing a completely impervious air and vapor
barrier.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction that are identical to those tested
with the following fire-test-response characteristics, as determined by testing per ASTM test method
indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested individually per ASTM
E 84 or DIN 4102.
2. Smoke Developed of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 450 or less when tested individually per
ASTM E 84 or DIN 4102.

C. Exterior Insulation and Finish System Design Loads: Design, fabricate and install exterior insulation and
finish system and supporting system so that the completed system will withstand an inward/outward
pressure of 42 psf plus factor increases for BOCA-93, ANSI158.1 and ASCE-7-88, for the complete wall
systems and to maintain a deflection not to exceed 1/920 of the span between support points.


D. Design, fabricate and install component parts to provide for expansion and contraction of the exterior
insulation and finish system over an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F. and a surface temperature
range of 180 deg. F. without buckling, sealed joint failure, breakage, cracking, undue stress on members or
anchors, and other detrimental effects.
E. Design Modifications: Make design modifications of work shown only as may be necessary to meet performance
requirements and coordinate the work. Variations in details and materials which do not adversely affect
appearance, durability or strength shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. Maintain the general exterior
design concept without altering profiles and alignments shown.

F. Waterproofing to substructure be compatible with the adhesive used for fixing the polystyrene panels and
approved by system manufacturer/installer.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for system from one source and by a single manufacturer or
by manufacturers approved by the system manufacturer as compatible with other system components.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed systems similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance
and who is certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those indicated for this
Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code requirements for finish system.


A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install system when ambient outdoor air and substrate temperatures are 40
deg. F. and falling unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain ambient temperatures above 40
deg. F. during installation of wet materials and until they have dried thoroughly and become weather resistant, but
for not less than 24 hours after installation.

1.07 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of system with related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall
assemblies, including flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are protected against damage from the effects of
weather, age, corrosion, and other causes.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Provide five (5) years Contractor warranty against defective work by the manufacturer/installer as per
Section 01740.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Class PB System by one of the following:
1. Dryvit Systems Inc.
Outsulation MD System
Local Agent : M. A. Kharafi and Sons Co., P. O. Box 886, Safat 13009, Kuwait
Shuwaikh Industrial Area
Tel. : 4813622/25 Fax : 4832537/4816110
2. Caparol, Kuwait - Capatec SystemB


Local Agent : Gulf Rocks (S.A.K.C)
P. O. Box 1981, Safat 13020, Kuwait
Tel. : 244 5005/9 Fax : 244-3335
E-mail : steppke@caparol.me.com
3. Unitex
Local Agent : First United Trading and Contracting Co. WLL
Tel. : 461 0090/1/2/3 Fax : 461 0095
E-mail : futco@Kuwait.net
4. EIFS, Inc.
65, Davids Drive, Hauppauge, NY11788
Tel. : (516) 231-1300 Fax : 231 1329
5. Parex, Inc.
P. O. Box 189, 1870 St. Mtn. Lithonia Road
Redan, GA 30074
Fax : (770) 482-6878 E-mail : inform@parex.com
Web Site : www.parex.com
6. Plasti - Fab
No. 270, 3015 5
th
Ave. NE.
Calgory, AB T2A 6TB
Fax : (403) 248-9325 E-mail : mailbox@plastifab.com
Web Site : www.plasticab.com
7. Senergy, LLC
3550, St. Jones Bluff Road South
Jacksonville, F1 32224-2614
Fax : (904) 996-6041 E-mail : information@senergy.cc
Web Site : www.senergy.cc
8. W.R. Bonsal Co., "Surewall Flex MM Multi-Barrier System"
9. STO Industries, "Rain Screen System".

2.02 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

A. Provide exterior insulation and finish systems whose physical properties and structural performance comply
with the following requirements when tested per methods referenced.
1. Accelerated Weathering Characteristics: Sample of size suitable for test equipment and consisting
of 1 in. exterior insulation and finish system, cured for 28 days, shows no evidence of cracking,
flaking, peeling, blistering, or deleterious effects after testing for 2,000 hours per ASTM G23
Method 1 or ASTM G53.
2. Wind Driven Rain: Fed Spec TTC-555B. No visible leaks or dampness throughout the rear face
and less than 90 gram increase.
3. Water Penetration: Sample, consisting of 1 in. thick exterior insulation and finish system mounted
on 2 in. thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, shows no water penetration into the plane of the
innermost face of the test specimen under 2.86 psf of air pressure difference across the specimen
during a 15 minute test period when tested per ASTM E331.
4. Moisture Resistance: Sample, consisting of 1 in. thick exterior insulation and finish system
mounted on 2 in. thick board, cured for 28 days, shows no deleterious effects after testing for 14
days per ASTM D2247.
5. Drainage Performance: Test for determining the drainage performance and drying potential of
Class PB EIFS: ASTM E331 Modified; Passed.


6. Salt-Spray Resistance: Sample, consisting of 1 in. thick exterior insulation and finish system
mounted on 2 in. thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, shows no deleterious effects after testing
for 300 hours per ASTM B117.
7. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: Three samples, 4 by 8 by 1 in. in size, consisting of exterior insulation
and finish system coated on all sides with base and finish coats including reinforcing fabric, cured
for 28 days, show no visible change when subjected to 4 days' underwater soak followed by 60
cycles of alternating exposure for 2 hours to minus 10 deg C and 2 hours to plus 20 deg C. per
ASTM C67.
8. Mildew Resistance: Sample, consisting of finish coat applied to 2 by 2 in. clean glass substrate,
cured for 28 days, shows no mildew growth when tested per MIL Standard 810B, Method 508.
9. Abrasion Resistance: Sample, consisting of l in. thick exterior insulation and finish system
mounted on 2 in. thick gypsum board, cured for a minimum of 28 days, shows no evidence of
cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 500 liters of sand when tested per
ASTM D968, Method A.
10. Impact Resistance: Sample, consisting of 1 in. thick exterior insulation and finish system when
constructed, conditioned, and tested per EIMA 101.86, produces the following impact classification
and range:
a. Standard Impact Resistance: 25-49 inch-lb. above 8 feet of any floor level.
b. High Impact Resistance: 90-150 inch-lb. below 8 feet of any floor level.
11. Impact Loading: Measuring relative resistance of wall, floor and roof construction to impact
loading: ASTM E695, 60 lbs. impact mass; No cracking from a drop height of 6 feet.
12. Negative Wind Load Performance: Sample assembly, 48 in. by 48 in. in size, consisting of
scheduled studs, cement board, and 1 in. thick exterior insulation and finish system, shows
capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per ASTM E330.
13. Surface Burning Characteristics: UL 723; ASTM E84; Test specimen consists of base coat,
reinforcing mesh and finish coat; Flame spread less than 25 and smoke developed less than 450.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide board insulation, rail mounting system, reinforcing fabric, base and finish coat
materials, mechanical anchors, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use
by system manufacturer.

B. Channeled Insulation Board; Molded Expanded Polystyrene: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the
expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C578 for Type I;
with flame spread less than 25, and smoke developed ratings less than 450 in accordance with ASTM E84;
9 lbs/cu. ft. density; approved by system manufacturer for material qualities including corner squareness and
other dimensional tolerances.
1. Provide insulation in boards not more than 1000 x2000mm and in thickness indicated but not less
than that allowed by system manufacturer, nor more than 50mm for EF-1 and 80mm thick for EF-
2.
2. Age insulation in block form prior to cutting and shipping by air drying for not less than 6 weeks or
by another method approved by system manufacturer that produces equivalent results.
3. Profile: manufacturer's standard channeled insulation profile to allow for water/moisture drainage.

C. Railing Mounting System : System manufacturers profiled aluminim rail mounting system mechanically fixed
at recommended space and locations to prepared substructure with zinc steel screws and PVC dowels.
Including system manufacturers aluminium base rails, base rail edge profiles, edge protection rails, drop
edge profiles and base construction profiles.


D. Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced, alkali-resistant open-weave glass-fiber fabric treated for compatibility with
other system materials, made from continuous multi end strands with tensile strength of not less than 145 lb
and 150 lb in warp and fill directions per ASTM D5035, complying with ASTM D578 and the following
requirements for minimum weight:
1. Standard Reinforcing Fabric: 4.0 oz./sq. yd.
2. Impact-Resistant Reinforcing Fabric: 15 oz./sq. yd.
3. Strip Reinforcing Fabric: 3.75 oz./sq. yd.
4. Corner Reinforcing Fabric : 7.2 oz./sq.yd

E. Base Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following requirements for
material composition and method of combining materials:
1. Job-mixed formulation of Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or natural
color; and system manufacturer's standard polymer emulsion adhesive designed for use indicated.
F. Finish Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following requirements
for material composition and method of combining materials. Provide factory mixed formulation of polymer
emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers. Aggregate shall match
Engineer's sample in stone type and chips of size and color with system manufacturers elastomeric dirt pick
resistant finish. Provide color and texture of protective coating to match Engineer's sample.

G. Water: Clean and potable.

H. Mechanical Fasteners: System manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fastener assemblies, complete
with system manufacturer's standard washer attachments, selected for properties of pullout, tensile, and
shear strength required to resist design loads of application indicated, capable of pulling fastener head
below surface of insulation board, and of the following description:
1. For attachment to masonry and concrete substrates, provide hammer-driven pin and predrilled
expandable nylon sheath.

I. Flashing: Base and cap flashing shall be of materials compatible with EIFS system.

J. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard moisture barrier to be applied to the face of exterior cement
board prior to application of channeled insulation boards.

K. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with system
manufacturer's requirements, manufactured from zinc alloy. Coordinate depth of accessories with thickness
of base and finish coats required.
1. Control Joints: Prefabricated, 1-piece type manufactured with expanded metal flanges, formed to
provide double keying action with protective coating, extending only to face of insulation, with
removable tape on plaster face and 1/4-inch joint sight line and bellows configuration as indicated
below:
a. Deep Configuration: Bellows extends beyond finish coat to a depth of 3/4 inch (19 mm)
past face of flanges.
2. Corner Bead: Prefabricated small-nosed corner bead with expanded metal flanges extending
minimum of 2-7/8 in. from corner.
3. Casing Bead (Edge Molding Trim): Prefabricated 1-piece type for attachment to surface of
insulation or behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and, where attached
behind insulation, thickness of insulation as well.
4. Weep Bead: Manufacturer's standard prefabricated 1-piece type for attachment at horizontal
terminations of panel insulation to allow for weeping water moisture from within insulation
channels or grooves to the exterior.
5. Other Accessories: As standard of the EIFS manufacturer's System, suitable for intended use.


L. Elastomeric Sealants: Provide system manufacturer's recommended chemically curing, elastomeric sealant
that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials, and complies with
requirements of Division 7 Section 07900 "Exterior Sealants" for products corresponding to description
indicated below.
1. Silicone Rubber Polyurethene Sealant: ASTM C920, class and use as best suited for the
intended purpose; Provide a sealant approved for use by the EIFS manufacturer.

2.04 MIXING

A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not
introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as approved by system manufacturer. Mix materials
in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by system manufacturer or discard.

2.05 EIFS TYPES

A. General: The EIFS types shown are based on proprietary systems. Matching systems by manufacturers
and in conformance with these specifications are considered to be equivalent approved by the Engineer.

B. Type EF-1: Outsulation System
a. Finish: Sandpebble Fine
b. Color: Stephs Mood Ref. 463A - or equal and approved.

C. Type EF-2: Custom Triangular Pattern System.
a. Finish: Sandpebble Fine
b. Color : Stephs Mood Ref. 463A - or equal and approved.
c. EF-2 Chamfered triangular pattern panels to be formed and cut using Bossen-nuten System or
equal and approved method.
d. Chamfered triangular pattern panels to be reinforced using system manufacturers pre-formed
reinforcement fabric to suit dimensions of the chamfers.

D. The locations of EF-1 and EF-2 as shown on the Drawings.

2.06 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. If expansion joints occur in sub-station system.

B. At Building Expansion Joints.

C. Where prefabricated panels abut one another.

D. At the junction of dissimilar materials.

E. Where substrate changes.

F. In continuous elevations at intervals not exceeding 23m (75 feet)

G. Where significant structural movement occurs such as changes in roof line, building shape or structural
system.

H. Joints between EFIS and window, door and other openings to be sealed with system manufacturers
approved non-staining sealant.

I. Reveals movement and expansion joints to be located as indicated on the architectural elevation drawings
and at locations required by system manufacturer with Engineers approval. Reveal details to be as
provided by system manufacturer.

2.07 FIRE STOPS


A. Proprietary mineral wool fire stop batts to be located in voids between the sub-structure, EFIS
panels, windowopenings etc. in accordance with Kuwait Fire Brigade requirements and EFIS
systemmanufacturers recommendations and installation requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation of the system, ensure that the substrate :
1. Is flat within 6.4mm (1/4 in) in a 1.2m (4 ft) radius.
2. Is sound, connections are tight, there are no surface voids or projections, or other conditions that
may interface with the Outsulation System installation.
3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protection
1. Protect the EIFS materials by permanent or temporary means from weather and other damage
prior to, during, and following application until dry.
2. Protect adjoining work and property.

B. Surface Preparation
1. Prepare substrate so as to be free of foreign materials such as oil, dust, dirt, form-release agents,
paint, wax, water repellents, moisture, frost and any other materials that inhibit adhesion.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to the manufacturers printed installation guide System Application for complete application
instructions.

B. Install proprietary external finish insulating system ( EFIS)mechanical rail mounting system in accordance
with EFIS system manufacturer.

C. Proprietary EFIS system to consist of aluminium rail mounting system, mechanically fixed at recommended
spaces and locations using zinc steel screw, PVC dowels, with PVC spacers and shims to prepared
substrate with proprietary preshaped expanded polystyrane panels 20kg/m3 density, 50 and 80mm thick,
minimum 1000mm wide using circular mounting dowels with zinc steel screws and circular PVC Holders and
adhesive of 50 mm wide ribbons and three (3) dabs to be applied to the back of the polystyrene panels.

D. Adhesive shall provide at least 40% contact surface, panels shall be placed thoroughly from bottom to top
touching each other tightly. The rows of insulating panels must be applied 50% staggered one beneath the
other, exact vertical and horizontal alignment shall be observed and application cross joints shall be avoided.

E. The insulating panels shall be intensively pressed to the substrate surface and floated to their end position to
endure proper bonding, ensuring that joints are free to adhesive material.

F. Spaces or void that may occur shall be accurately filled with expanded Polystyrene foam wedges.

G. Surface irregulatries of polystyrene panels butt joints shall be abraded to achieve a smooth perfectly even
surface and all adherent dirt shall be removed.

H. Provide over all minimum base coat thickness sufficient to fully embed the mesh. Apply the base coat in two
(2) applications.


I. Proprietary cement based dry motor premixed for bonding polystryene panels reinforcing coat and bedding
reinforcing non sliding glass fibre fabric mesh shall be applied to the abraded and clean polystyrene
panels. All corner reinforcing fabric or corner guard profile shall be fully embedded into the propriety
reinforcing adhesive material.

J. The proprietary reinforcing adhesive material shall be applied on the polystyrene panels in the width of the
non- sliding glass fibre fabric, reinforcing web/sheet , and shall be thoroughly embedded sheet by sheet into
the freshly applied still wet bonding and reinforcing layer with an overlap of. 100mm

K. A following coat of bonding and reinforcing shall be immediately applied to guarantee a complete and total
reinforcing layer thickness of 4mm

L. Where applied, the proprietary corner guard profiles reinforcement fabric edges shall overlap the corner
areas for 100mm

M. A silicone - resin render textured tinted finish coating of 3.0mm with elastomeric Dust Pick Resistant shall be
applied. Colour of tint shall be as selected by the Engineer.

EFIS system shall include proprietary preshaped polystryene hard foam, FCKW free, flame retardant, 50
and 80mm thick, 1000 wide panels, Mineral premixed dry mortar, hydraulic bonded layer thickness of
4mm. Non sliding glass fibre alkaline resistant reinforcement mesh, edge protection fabric, diagonal
reinforcement for edges to opening, heavy duty reinforcement mesh for areas subject to stress, joint sealing
tape, fabric joining strip surface for filling and leveling areas for protruding ends of under frame, rendering
tape, base and lintels. Aluminium base rails, base rail edge profiles, edge protection rails, drop edge profiles
and base competition profiles

C. Coat outsulation surfaces in contact with sealant with manufacturers recommended coating. Do not seal to
textured finishes.


A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper application and installation of EIFS materials.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove all excess Outsulation System materials from the job site by the Contractor in accordance with
contract provisions.

B. Leave all surrounding areas, where the Outsulation System has been applied, free of debris and foreign
substances resulting from the Contractors work.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect the system from weather and other damage until permanent protection in the form of flashings,
sealants, etc. are installed.

END OF SECTION

PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING 07500-1

SECTION 07500

PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

and performing all operations in connection with Protected Membrane Roofing as shown in the drawings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers' Literature: Submit to the Engineer manufacturers' specifications and installation instructions
for roofing membrane and accessory items and for each item of proprietary material used, showing
compliance with these Specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing details, dimensions, locations and installation methods of
roofing system including membrane, insulation, tiles/pavers, flashings and all accessories; indicate the
following:- profiles, slopes, low and high points, dimensions, joints and arrangement and connections to
adjoining work or materials and anchoring. Indicate positions of service outlets including roof drains, vent
pipes, exhaust fans, roof hatches, skylights, etc., and co-ordinate with all other trades

C. Samples: Submit samples of membrane, light weight concrete, insulation, each metal flashing type,
concrete pavers/tiles and all other items.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Roofing manufacturer to have 15 (Fifteen) years documented experience demonstrating previously
successful work of the type specified herein.

B. Roofing applicator to have ten (10) years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work
of the type specified herein.

C. Roofing applicators foreman with a minimum of fifteen (15) years documented experience of the type
specified herein.


A. The manufacturers authorized representative shall provide a final inspection at the completion of the project
to insure, that the project has been completed in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Upon
approval and acceptance of the project, then a manufacturer's warranty certification shall be written,
executed and furnished to the Employer.

B. All roofing shall be as described in this Section and shall be provided and approved by the roof system
manufacturer. Any materials not manufactured or provided by manufacturer, shall have written approval
from the manufacturer stating the materials are acceptable and are compatible with the other materials and
systems required.

C. All roofing and flashing work shall be applied in strict accordance with the roofing manufacturer's written
requirements and specifications applicable to roof conditions. Where a conflict exists between the
manufacturers written specifications and those procedures specified in this section, the more stringent
requirements shall apply.



A. Deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened containers or packages with labels and package
seals intact and legible.

B. Store all materials in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Store rolled goods on clean,
raised platforms. Store other materials in dry areas, protected from water and direct sunlight.

C. Provide continuous protection of stored materials against deterioration for duration of project.

D. Store insulation on dunnage and completely cover with a water-resistant breathable material. Provide
weights to prevent wind damage to insulation.

E. Distribute any materials stored on roof levels for immediate use to prevent concentrated loads that would
impose excessive strain on deck or structural members. Protect roof stored materials to prevent
displacement by the wind and protect from exposure to inclement weather and sun.

F. Damaged material: Remove any damaged or contaminated materials from job site immediately, including
materials in broken packages, or show other evidence of damage, unless the Engineers Representative
specifically authorizes correction thereof and usage on project.


A. Apply roofing in dry weather; do not install roofing in inclement weather or when precipitation is predicted in
the media.

B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface.

C. Apply roofing when ambient temperature is above 4 degrees C. (40 degrees Fahrenheit).


A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing interfacing work, and
ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work.

B. Notify manufacturer's representative 48 hours in advance for deck acceptance. Avoid situations where
excessive drainage could pass into completed roofing.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Deliver to the Employer upon completion of the work of this Section, an unconditional warranty, on the work
of this Section agreeing to promptly repair the roofing as necessary to prevent penetration of water through
it.
1. Warranty shall cover product quality, performance, and workmanship for a period of 10(ten) years.
2. Warranty shall cover total roofing system including membrane, insulation, adhesives, sealant,
fasteners, membrane flashings, and other materials furnished and installed under this Section.
3. Warranty shall provide coverage for uplift created by maximum wind speed of 128 kilometers per
hour (80 miles per hour).
4. Warranty shall provide coverage for maximum peak gust wind speed of 128 kilometers per hour
(80 miles per hour).

1.09 PROTECTION

A. Protect Waterproofing system installation from damage during construction period so that it will be without
any indication of abuse or damage at the time of substantial completion of the project.

restore other work damaged during roofing membrane operations.



hazardous materials specified or required under this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of
establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, will be
considered acceptable. The decision of acceptability will rest with the Engineer.

2.02 LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE

A. System based on products by Esastizell of America, Ann Arbor, MI (734-761-6900) or approved equal.

2.03 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

A. General: Provide the products and systems specified in the material manufacturer's latest published manual
for the and type of substrate shown.

B. Bitumen Sheet Membrane: Flame bonded single-ply membrane, 4 (+/-0.2) mm thick, composed of asphalt or
bitumen modified with thermoplastic resins and reinforced with non-woven polyester fabric. Provide the
following or other equal and approved:
1. "Paralon NT4"; Imper, Italy
2. Testudo Polyester Spunbond 16"; Index, Italy
3. "Marley Torch 400S"; Marley Waterproofing Ltd.
4. Dermabit elasphalt 250 series.
5. Awazel ht-250
Or equal approved.

C. Primer for Bitumen Sheet Membrane:
1. "Impertene Primer", Imper, Italy.
2. "Indomastic Primer", Index, Italy.
3. "Marley Bitumen Primer", Marley Waterproofing Ltd.
4. Or as recommended by the manufacturer of bitumen sheet membrane.

D. Cant Strips: Cement and sand mortar, in the proportion of 1:3 by volume.

2.04 ROOF INSULATION

A. Roof Insulation: Shall be lap edged rigid extruded closed cell polystyrene foam insulation board, in thickness
as indicated on the Drawings, as approved by the Engineer. Expanded polystyerene will not be accepted as
a substitute. Insulation shall have the following characteristics:
1. Thermal Conductivity: Five year aged average "K" factor of .20 when tested at 24
o
C mean
temperature in accordance with ASTM C-518.
2. Compressive strength: of 2.8kg/cm
2
average, 1.75kg/cm
2
minimum, when tested in accordance
with ASTM D-1621.
3. Water Absorption: of 1% average when tested in accordance with ASTM D-2842 or 0.1% when
tested in accordance with ASTM C-272.


4. Water Vapor Permeability: of 0.6 perm-inch average when tested in accordance with ASTM C-
355.

B. Cover roof insulation with 250 micron (10 mil) polythene sheet/filter fabric.
(Note : 1 mil = 1 inch and 1 micron = 1 mm)
1000 1000


FILTER FABRIC

Norm. Unit Value
Length/Cross
*) CBR-test X DIN 54 307 N 780
*) CBR-test X-s N 700
Elongation % 30
*) Strip-test (200mm) ISO/DIS 10319 kN/m 3/3
Elongation % 35/45
*) Grab-test DIN 53 858 N/2, 5 cm 225/260
Elongation at break % 60/60
Plane strain test VSS Prfvorschriften kN/m 4/4/4
Elongation at break % 35/45/45
Tear Strength ASTM D-1117 N 100/70
Cone Drop Test (hole size) BS 6906 Part 6 mm 50
Puncture resistance Dorn : 6mm/110
o
N 150
Water-permeability kDarcy cm/sec. 9,0 x 10
-2

**) Flow at 10cm WC 1/sec/m
2
140

Pore Size d50% Not vibrated micron 80
d90% micron 80
Thickness at 2,0 kPA DIN 53 855 mm 0,7
Weight DIN 53 854 g/m
2
110
Fibre Bonding Needled/thermic bonded
Raw Material Polypropylene (PP) n x (CH2-CH-CH3)
Resistances Wet or dry, the properties shall remain un-changed be resistant to
attacks of dry, rot or fungi and to acids and alkalis.

2.05 PLAIN CONCRETE TILES

A. Plain Concrete Tiles shall be 400 x 400 x 40 mm thick, all as shown on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION CO-ORDINATION

A. Pre-Roofing Conference:
1. After approval of all materials and prior to installation, a pre-roofing conference shall be held at the
job site. In attendance shall be (1) Engineers Representative (2) Contractor, (3) Roofing Sub-
Contractor and (4) Manufacturer's representative.
2. The parties shall review Drawings, specifications and approved materials. Correct conflicts, if any,
between approvals and specification requirements. Examine job site conditions, including
inspection of deck, material labels and methods of storing materials. Confirm that all curbs and
edges are provided and correctly installed. Review installation procedures, scheduling and
temperature requirements, and establish protection methods for finished roof from other trades
and co-ordination of work by other trades.


3.02 INSPECTION

A. Surfaces to receive membrane roofing shall be free of projections, voids, depressions, scale efflorescence,
loose material, laitence, oil grease and other foreign contaminants. Before starting work, inspect all surfaces
to receive membrane and report in writing to the Engineer, any surfaces that are not suitable for correct
application of the membrane.

B. If any surfaces are unsuitable to receive membrane, the Contractor shall see that same are corrected by the
respective trade prior to application of his work.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. All preparation of surfaces, including construction joints shall be completed before membrane waterproofing
is installed. Commencement of application of membrane waterproofing to any surface will be construed as
acceptance of that surface as proper to receive the waterproofing and any defects in the work thereafter
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor without additional cost to the Employer.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF MEMBRANE ROOFING.

A. On completion of screed over the light weight concrete, laid to required slopes and falls, the membrane
roofing will proceed.

B. At the start of the installation, and periodically as work progresses, provide the services of the
manufacturer's technical representative at the job site as often as deemed necessary by the manufacturer to
advise on all phases of this work. The waterproofing membrane shall be in two layers.

C. Install roofing system alongwith all fixing accessories, in strict accordance with manufacturer's direction for
conditions of each application.

D. Prime all surfaces receiving roofing membrane. Use products and methods recommended by the roofing
membrane materials manufacturers.

E. Apply cant strips at all edges and around any penetrations in the roofing, as shown on Drawings.

F. Apply roofing membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Overlap
joints a minimum of 100 mm.

G. Flash all roof outlets, pipes, sleeves, and other projections through roof deck and provide tight construction
throughout.

H. Provide one additional reinforcing layer of the waterproofing membrane at all perimeters, junctions fulboras,
at the edges, at upstands etc. and as directed.

3.05 FLOOD TESTING

A. The horizontal areas of waterproofing shall be tested prior to the installation of protection board or insulation
as applicable.

B. Such testing shall be by flooding sections of the waterproofed area with a minimum 10 cm head of water for
72 (Seventy-two) hours. Flooding shall include proper damming of areas as required. This applicator shall
provide his own hoses. Mark any leaks and repair when the membrane is dry. Before flood testing,
ascertain from the structural engineer that the structure will withstand the dead load of the water.

C. Any area where leaks occur shall be drained, thoroughly dried, repaired, and then re-tested.

D. At completion of flood testing, remove all dams and traces of water to the satisfaction of the Engineer.


E. Installation of mortar beds, fill materials or concrete which are applied over the waterproofing shall not start
until such time as the membrane is leak free and has been accepted by the Engineer.

3.06 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Set polystyrene insulation in thickness indicated, using "dry method" (without the use of adhesive or
bitumen) as shown on drawings, with long joints continuous and short joints staggered, butting each panel
tightly to adjoining panel.

B. Discard all damaged insulation boards. Neatly cut and shape insulation at all projections through roof and at
all other vertical projections allowing at least 12mm clearance.

C. Apply no more insulation than can be covered with ballast on the same day. Under no circumstances allow
insulation to remain uncovered in damp, wet weather, overnight or exposed to sunlight for prolonged periods
of time.

D. Immediately after insulation is applied, apply polyester filter fabric directly on top of insulation.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF PLAIN CONCRETE TILES

A. Lay plain concrete tiles of size 400 x 400 x 40mm thick to slope, as shown on the drawings.

B. Tiles are to be loose laid.

C. Lay tiles firmly on the filter fabric, without mortar bed.

D. Laying of tiles shall be uniformly straight, in line and level.

3.08 GRAVEL

A. Install and lay gravel around the deck as shown in the drawings

3.09 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Make good, all damage to the building resulting from this work or operations. Particular care shall be taken
to avoid staining any part of the exposed structural or finished work. Hoisting of materials shall be done with
extreme care. Use approved means to protect exposed surfaces.

B. At completion of work under this Section, remove from the site and legally dispose of packaging, containers
and other accumulated materials, and leave the work in a clean and satisfactory condition.

END OF SECTION

METAL FLASHING AND SHEET METAL WORK 07600-1

SECTION 07600

METAL FLASHING AND SHEET METAL WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


1.02 REFERENCES

under the provisions of Section 01421 - Reference Standards and Definitions.
B. ASTM B 209 - Specification for Aluminum Alloy, Sheet and Plate.
C. ASTM B 221 - Specification for Aluminum Extrusions.
D. ASTM D 226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
E. ASTM D 4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
F. FS QQ-A-250d - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy, Plate and Sheet.
G. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, referred to herein as Sheet Metal Manual.
H. NRCA - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements:
1. Literature: Manufacturer's data sheets for each metal type and accessories furnished hereunder,
include material specifications, performance data, physical properties and finishes.
2. Certification: Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with the specified
requirements for the use indicated.
3. Shop drawings:
a. Fully dimensioned large scale design details showing material profiles, splices, flashing
terminations and other jointing details, fastening methods and installation details.
Indicate material type, sizes, and weights or gages. Indicate extent of adjacent work
specified under other Sections of the Specifications.
b. Fully detail methods of relieving stresses due to thermal movement, including sealing of
expansion seams.
c. All details bearing dimensions of actual measurements taken at the project.
4. Selection Samples:
a. Metal sample chips, indicating Manufacturer's full range of finish colors for factory
finishes available for selection by Engineer.
b. Manufacturer's sample boards for sealant colors.
5. Verification Samples:
a. 300 mm long samples of formed fascia and trim components.


A. Company specializing in fabrication and installation of sheet metal flashing work with minimum 5 years
documented experience.


B. Flashing and sheet metal applicator, with a minimum of five (5) years documented experience demonstrating
previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by product manufacturer.


A. General: Deliver, store, and protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600 -
Materials and Equipment.

B. Store preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide
ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.

C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage.


A. Coordinate the installation of flashings and sheet metal work with the various trades responsible for installing
interfacing materials, and install the work at appropriate times so as not to delay the progress of related
work.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide five (5) year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. Warranty shall include replacement of materials
due to the finish failing, chipping, scaling, or fading beyond industry standards.

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide sufficient quantity of each color finish coat material, for field touch-up work after erection, and pack
the additional coating materials with the components to be furnished hereunder.

B. Clearly label and package extra materials securely to prevent damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIMMATERIALS

A. Aluminum 2mm thick sheet .unless otherwise shown, finish No. 2D.

B. Solder: ASTM B32; for use with stainless steel, provide 60 - 40 tin/lead solder, with acid-chloride type flux,
except use rosin flux over tinned surfaces.

C. Fasteners: Screws, rivets and nails shall be of same material as sheet metal or of compatible material.
Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.

D. Sealant: As specified in Section 07900 - Sealants.

E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2 part non-corrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by metal
manufacturer for exterior/interior non-moving joints including riveted joints.

F. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating sealant.

G. Paper Slip Sheet: rosin-sized building paper.

H. Polyethylene Underlayment: Minimum 6 mil carbonated polyethylene film resistant to decay.

J. Dielectric Separator:


2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Underlayment: ASTM D226 No 15 asphalt saturated roofing felt, non-perforated.

B. Flashing cement: Trowel grade, composed of selected asphalts, solvents, and non-asbestos fillers,
conforming to FS SS-C-153 Type 1, ASTM D 2822, Type 1 and ASTM D 4586, Type 1 (Non-asbestoes) as
manufactured by Karnak Chemical Corporation, product N. 19 Flashing Cement, Koch Materials
Company, J & P Petroleum Products Company or other approved manufacturer.

C. Screws: Stainless steel flat head screws, of sizes most appropriate for the specific application, and equipped
with soft neoprene washers.

D. Sealant in conjunction with metal work: Sealant Type RP as specified under Section 07900 - Sealants.

E. Plastic cement as recommended by roofing manufacturer and eave protection manufacturer.

2.03 FABRICATED UNITS

A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Fabricate for waterproof and
weather-resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent
leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Form exposed sheet metal work
without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges
folded back to form hems.

B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Form seams, and solder. Rivet
joints for additional strength where required.

C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or
would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, filled
with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance
of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant.

E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating
concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and
reglets in place and nailing strips located.

B. Beginning of work shall constitute acceptance of the conditions of the surfaces to which this work is to be
applied.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabrication.

B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

C. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.


D. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with plastic wedges at maximum of 200 mm on
center. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant.

E. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners.

F. Cleat and seam all joints. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings,
asphalt shingle roofing or asphalt roll roofing.

G. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to
profiles.

H. Solder metal joints at gutters and rain leaders watertight for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash
metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. Seal metal joints watertight.

I. During the installation of work of this Section, protect the work of other trades against undue soilage and
damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or replace any work so damaged and
soiled.

3.03 FLASHING INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Except as otherwise shown on the reviewed shop drawings or specified herein, the workmanship of sheet
metal work, method for forming joints anchoring, cleating, provisions for thermal movement, etc., shall
conform to the standard details and recommendations of the sheet metal producer and those of producer
organizations and research institutions and associations concerning the sheet metal used, in addition to the
standards and details set forth in the referenced materials specified in this Section.

B. Face nailing will not be permitted, concealed cleating or other concealed method must be used to attach
sheet metal work to structure.

C. Ensure that fastenings do not exceed 200 mm on centers. Use flat head fasteners throughout, and seal all
fastener heads after installation thereof.

D. Fill all slip joints and overlapping surfaces in the assembly with specified sealant material, removing all
excess sealant material from the prefinished surfaces immediately, to prevent staining the finish.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Daily clean work areas by sweeping and disposing of debris.

B. Upon completion of the work of this Section in any given area, remove tools, equipment and all rubbish and
debris from the work area; leave area in broom-clean condition.

END OF SECTION

THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-1

SECTION 07841
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated
constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.
1. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
2. Division 13 Sections specifying fire-suppression piping penetrations.
3. Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations.
4. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.
A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings
and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and
installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,
and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire walls, fire partitions, fire barriers and smoke barriers.
2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes
of roof/ceiling assemblies.
B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per
ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:
1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than
that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings
indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with
adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:
a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
3. L-Rated Systems: Where through-penetration firestop systems are indicated in smoke barriers, provide
through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not more than 0.01524cu. m/s x sq. m at both
ambient temperatures and 204 deg C.
C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide
products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-
penetration firestop systems.


2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 100 mm in width and exposed to possible loading and
traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or
by other means.
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring
removal of insulation.
D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction condition
penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. Include firestop design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each
condition indicated.
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is
applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items.
2. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a
particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by
through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or
equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.
C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system,
along with the following information:
1. Types of penetrating items.
2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of
construction penetrated.
3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified
testing and inspecting agency.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product manufacturer.
F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies
with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop
Contractors."
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration firestop systems similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of
successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install
manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its through-penetration
firestop system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification
on buyer.
C. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint
systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction
condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.


E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following
requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:
1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and
inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop
systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1
Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-
penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Project Management and Coordination."
A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages
with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot
number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to
Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due
to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where
this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are
installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration
firestop systems.
C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop system
installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.
D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other
construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS


A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop systems that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated in the Through-Penetration
Firestop System Schedule on Drawings.
2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the
substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based
on testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill
materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by
through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for
firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill
materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
2. Substrate primers.
3. Collars.
4. Steel sleeves.
2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the
Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials
described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting
agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials.
B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting
of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the
sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to
moisture.
D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material
sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to
galvanized steel sheet.
F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or
silicone compounds.
G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.
H. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and
lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous
mortar.
I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination
of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives.


J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to
produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
K. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated
below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag
formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless
indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.
2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other
horizontal surfaces.
3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces.
2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system
manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing
equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to
produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening
configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to
comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could
interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing
optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning
operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer
using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow
spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining
surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or
damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials.
Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.
3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMINSTALLATION
A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article
and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and
applications indicated.


B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire
ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other
accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as
required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces
that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to
surfaces adjacent to and within 150 mm of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone
seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic
labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels
are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted.
Include the following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management
of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration
firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to
qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports.
B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with
requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports
are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials
that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage
materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration
firestop systems aithout damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection,
damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop
systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION

EXTERIOR SEALANTS 07900-1

SECTION 07900

EXTERIOR SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


B. The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment, appliances and materials
and performing all operations in connection with joint sealants, glazing sealants etc. and the accessories.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Applicator: The sealant work shall be performed by a firm having 5 years experience in the installation of
specified materials on projects comparable to this Project. The firm shall have the approval of the sealant
materials manufacturer.

1.03 MOCK UPS AND TESTING

A. Visual Mock-Up
1. Provide specified sealants, at Project site, where directed, in coordination with exterior wall work,
glass and glazing for the visual mock-up review by the Engineer.

B. Testing Mock-Up: Provide specified sealants and related accessories for testing mock-up in composite
configurations designed to fulfill the performance criteria, and representing the elements which will be used
in the final work.

C. Sealant Adhesion Evaluation
1. Perform sealant adhesion evaluation at the earliest possible time after award of the Contract.
2. The sealant manufacturer shall perform adhesion evaluation tests in accordance with ASTM C794
using the sealant and production run samples of the finished substrates which are to be used in
the test mock-up and in the final Work.
3. Furnish to the sealant manufacturer the finished substrate samples of such size and quantity as he
requires for the adhesion evaluation.
a. The substrate samples shall be of the alloy and with the temper, surface treatment and
preparation, primer and finish in each specified color, all as are to be used in the test
mock-ups and in the final Work.
4. If the materials used fail to meet the sealant manufacturer's requirements for structural glazing,
furnish additional samples with such modifications as may be necessary to meet the sealant
manufacturer's requirements and the requirements of the Contract documents.

D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Prior to testing of mock-ups, submit samples of all
materials that will contact or affect sealants to sealant manufacturers for compatibility and adhesion testing,
as indicated below:
1. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the
Work.
2. Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain sealant manufacturer's
written recommendations for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.
3. Testing will not be required when sealant manufacturer is able to submit joint preparation data
required above which is acceptable to Engineer and is based on previous testing of current sealant


products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching
those submitted.

E. Preconstruction Stain Resistance Testing: Prior to testing of mock-ups, submit samples of all materials that
will contact or affect sealants to sealant manufacturers, in sizes as required, for stain testing, as indicated
below:
1. Use test methods standard with manufacturer to determine resistance to staining. Submit
quantities of each type of contiguous joint substrate material, in sizes a s required by the sealant
manufacturer for testing.
Work.

1.04 WARRANTIES

A. Warranty: Provide a written warranty, agreeing to repair or replace silicone sealant compounds which have
failed to provide airtight and watertight joints for any reason, or which appear to have failed in adhesion,
cohesion, abrasion-resistance, migration-resistance, stain-resistance, general durability or any other form of
apparent deterioration (excluding inherent qualities and limitations clearly specified in the manufacturer's
data which was submitted). Period of warranty shall be twenty (20) years, and warranty shall be signed by
the Manufacturer, the installer and the Contractor.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers Literature: Submit to the Engineer the following information from the manufacturer.
1. Published data or manufacturer's letter, clearly indicating that each product to be furnished
complies with these Specifications, is recommended for the application shown and is compatible
with each other material in the joint system.
2. Complete instructions for handling, storage, mixing, priming, installation, curing and protection of
each type of sealant.

B. Samples: Submit to the Engineer (following the submittal of manufacturer's data), samples of each type of
exposed sealant. Provide samples 300 mm long installed between two samples of the materials to be
sealed, fully cured. Samples will be reviewed by the Engineer for colour and texture only. Compliance with
all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Compliance with Performance Requirements: Not-withstanding the types of sealant specified herein, the
Contractor shall in all cases be responsible for providing sealant materials the best of their respective kinds,
compatible with adjoining materials and suitable for the purpose intended, all at no additional expense to the
Employer.


A. Do not proceed with installation of sealants during inclement weather unless all requirements and
manufacturer's instructions can be complied with, and unless the work can proceed in accordance with the
agreements of the pre-installation meeting. Do not proceed with the installation of sealants under extreme
temperature conditions which would cause joint openings to be at either maximum or minimum width, nor
when such extreme temperatures or heavy wind loads are forecast during the period required for initial or
nominal cure of elastomeric sealants. Whenever possible, schedule the installation and cure of elastomeric
sealants during period of relatively low temperatures (but well within manufacturer's recommended range) so
that subsequent tensile stresses upon the cured sealants will be minimised.

1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Prior to the installation of caulking or sealants, and at the Engineer's direction, meet at the project site to
review the material selections, installation procedures and co-ordination with other trades. Meeting shall
include the contractor, manufacturer's representative, the Engineer and representatives of other trades or


Sub-Contractors affected by the sealant installation. Examine sample applications to determine and record
whether all parties agree that the proposed installations are likely to perform as required.

1.08 SAMPLE APPLICATION

A. Provide sample applications of caulking or sealants at locations designated by the Engineer. Samples shall
represent the primary types of materials, substrate surfaces, joint size, exposure, and other conditions to be
encountered in the work. Preparation, priming, application, and curing, shall comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and actual proposed methods. Schedule the applications, with allowance for sufficient
curing time, so that samples may be examined and any necessary adjustments made at least one (1) week
prior to date scheduled for commencing installation of the work.

B. The samples shall be visually examined for staining, dirt pickup, shrinkage, colour, general workmanship
and appearance. Cut and pull the caulking or sealant from each sample joint to examine for internal bubbles
or voids, adhesion, and general compatibility with substrate.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturers' unopened containers, fully identified with brand, type, grade, class and
all other qualifying information.

B. Store materials in a dry location, in such a manner as to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter.
Conspicuously mark "Rejected" on materials which have once been wet or damaged an remove from the job
site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL

A. Product Variations: If more than one of the manufacturer's products comply with the requirements for any
item specified herein, provide the specific product recommended by the manufacturer for the particular
condition of use in each case.

B. Manufacturers: The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of
establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, may be
acceptable subject to the Engineer's approval.

C. Compatibility: Provide only sealants, caulking compounds and joint primers which are compatible with the
joint surfaces and backing or filler materials, as stated in the manufacturer's published data, or as certified by
the manufacturer for each application. Confirm compatibility of sealants that may be in contact with each
other.

D. Determine the proper hardness or consistency of elastomeric sealants in consultation with the manufacturer,
considering joint movement and exposure for the size of joint shown.

E. Ranges of Hardness: In general, provide sealants with the following ranges of hardness (fully cured sealant
at 24 Deg.C):
1. For joints subject to maximum movement and nominal exposure to weather and abrasion: 15 to 25
Shore A durometer hardness.
2. For joints subject to moderate movements and severe weather exposure or moderate abrasion: 25
to 40 Shore A durometer hardness.
3. For joints subject to minimum movement and severe abrasion: 35 to 60 Shore A durometer
hardness.


F. Modulus of Elasticity: In general, for elastomeric sealants, provide sealants having the lowest modulus of
elasticity which is consistent with the degree of exposure to wear and abrasion. Any sealant exposed to
traffic must have strength and modulus sufficiently high to resist damage by traffic.

G. Colour: For fully concealed joints, provide the manufacturer's standards colour of sealant which has the best
overall performance characteristics for the application shown. For exposed joints provide the colour shown,
or if the colour is not shown provide colours as follows:
1. The colour, in each case, will be selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's standards colours,
to match or blend with adjoining materials in a manner to be determined by the Engineer.

H. Manufacturer's Representative: Do not use elastomeric sealants produced by any manufacturer who will not
agree to send a qualified technical representative to the project site when requested, for the purpose of
rendering advice concerning the proper installation of his materials.

2.02 SEALANTS

A. One-Part Silicone Rubber Sealant (1SRS): Exterior Glazing: One-component elastomeric sealant, FS-TT-
S-001543, Class A, Type II non-sag:
1. Silpruf; General Electric Co., Waterford, New York, USA.
2. 790 Building Sealant; Dow Corning Corp., Midland, Michigan, USA.

B. Two-Part Polyurethane Modified Sealant (2-PUMS): Exterior-general application: FS TT-S-00227, Class A,
Type II non-sag, elastomeric sealant:
1. Dymeric; Tremco Mfg. Co., Cleveland, Ohio, USA.
2. Iso-Flex 2000; Harry S. Peterson Co., Elmhurst, Illinois, USA.
3. Dynatrol II; Pecora Corp; Harleysville, Pennsylvania, USA.

2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of
base polymer indicated.

B. Silicone Rubber Weather Seal (Sealant Type 1): ASTM C920, class and use as best suited for the intended
purpose; Provide one of the following:
1. "Silpruf 2000 " (General Electric Co.).
2. "795 Building Sealant" or "790 Silicone Building Sealant"(Dow Corning Corp.).

C. Silicone Rubber Structural Sealant (Sealant Type 2): Complies with ASTM C920 and ASTM C1184
requirements, is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, and is specifically
formulated and tested for use as a structural sealant; class and use as best suited for the intended purpose;
Provide one of the following:
1. "Ultraglaze 4000 Silicone Structural Glazing Sealant" (General Electric Co.); "Ultraglaze 4200
Silicone Structural Glazing Sealant" (General Electric Co.) for use with insulating glass units and
"Ultraglaze 4400 Silicone Structural Glazing Sealant" (General Electric Co.) for use in the shop.
2. "795 Silicone Building Sealant" or "995 Silicone Building Sealant" (Dow Corning Corp.) for field
use and "983 Silicone Building Sealant"(Dow Corning Corp.) for use in the shop.

2.04 SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING JOINT SEALANTS

A. Non-Skinning Mastic Compounds
1. Mastic Compound: A non-drying, non-skinning, non-hardening compound for sealing small
concealed joints;
2. Polyisobutylene Mastic Compound: A non-drying, non-skinning, non-oxidizing, non-bleeding
heavy mastic sealing compound of polyisobutylene for sealing large concealed joints.


2.05 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: ASTM C834, Manufacturer's standard, one part, nonsag, mildew-resistant,
acrylic-emulsion sealant formulated to be paintable and recommended for exposed applications on interior
and on protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent.

2.06 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible,
nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below; nonabsorbent to water and gas; and of size, shape and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
1. Closed Cell Polyethylene: Not less than 3 psi for 25% compression resistance, highly resistant to
petroleum oils and solvents
2. Compressible Closed Cell Polyethylene Foam Rod: Types as shown, or as required for proper
performance of the sealant in the specific joint, which is compatible with sealant, as recommended
by sealant manufacturer.

C. Compressible Filler: Continuous closed cell neoprene with pressure sensitive temporary positioning
adhesive on one side; thickness and width as shown.


A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to
manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent
nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant
adhesion or in-service performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant
from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion
would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ACCEPTABLE CONDITIONS:

A. Examine the component surfaces and fillers of the joints to be sealed, and the conditions under which the
work is to be done. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean bonding joint surfaces to remove deleterious substances which might interfere with bond or otherwise
impair the work. Do not apply elastomeric sealants to joint surfaces previously painted or treated with sealer,
curing compound, water repellent or other coatings, unless a laboratory durability test of bond-cohesion has
been performed and successfully demonstrated that bond will be durable. Test method shall comply with
procedures of the Federal Specification, or other referenced standard, as applicable to the particular sealant.


B. Do not apply paint and other coatings or substances to surfaces adjoining joint surfaces until sealants have
been installed and are nominally cured, so that adhesion will not be impaired by migration of such
substances onto the joint surfaces.
C. Concrete and Masonry Joint Surfaces: Etch bonding surfaces with a 5% solution of muriatic acid to remove
excess alkalinity. Rinse thoroughly with a diluted ammonia solution, and then with clear water, and dry
before installation of elastomeric sealants.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for the use and installation of each type of sealant, unless
otherwise shown or specified.

B. Prime or seal the bonding joint surfaces in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
Avoid migration of primer or sealer onto adjoining surfaces and remove any spillage promptly.

C. Install bond breaker in joints as shown and wherever recommended by the sealant manufacturer to prevent
bond of the sealant to surfaces where such bond might impair the performance of the sealant. Do not
puncture surface or skin of compressible rod type bond breaker.

D. Have the manufacturer's technical representative present when beginning the installation of each major type
of sealant.

E. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations, except as may be otherwise shown,
or except as may be otherwise directed (and recorded) by the manufacturer's representative.

F. Employ only tradesmen who are experienced in the use of the materials specified. Use only the types of
equipment recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

G. Apply compounds in continuous beads or rivers, filling joint from the bottom without openings, voids or air
pockets. Force compound to sides of joint so as to carefully and thoroughly "wet" opposite joint bond
surfaces, forming equal areas of contact with sealant.

H. Confine compounds to joint areas shown by use of masking tapes or other precautions to prevent spilling
and migration onto adjoining surfaces. Apply compounds in concealed compression joints accurately so that
excess compound will not exude from the joint.

J. Apply sealants in the depth shown or, if none is shown, apply in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and the following general proportions and limitations:
1. Apply elastomeric sealants, in joints subject to traffic or other abrasion, to a depth equal to 75% of
the joint width, but not less than 10 mm and not more than 19 mm.
2. Apply elastomeric sealants, in joints not subject to traffic or other abrasion, to a depth equal to
50% of the joint width, but not less than 6 mm and not more than 13 mm.

K. Tool exposed surfaces so as to compress sealants to the profile shown or, if none is shown, tool surface
slightly concave except provide a slight wash on horizontal joints where horizontal and vertical surfaces
meet.

L. Against rough surfaces or in joints of uneven widths avoid the appearance of excess sealant by locating the
sealant well back into joint wherever possible.

M. Remove excess sealant promptly as the work progresses and clean the adjoining surfaces as may be
necessary to eliminate any evidence of spillage.

N. If job progress or any other condition requires the installation of sealants at temperatures below those
recommended by the manufacturer, consult the manufacturer's representative and establish the minimum
provisions required to ensure satisfactory work. Record in writing the conditions under which such
installations must proceed and the provisions made to ensure satisfactory work.


3.04 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Cure the sealants in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, to obtain maximum bond to surfaces,
cohesive strength and durability at the earliest possible date.

B. Protect the sealants during the remainder of the construction period, so that they will be without any
indication of deterioration or damage at the time of completion of the Works.

3.05 PERFORMANCE TEST

A. After curing exterior joints exposed to the weather, test for leaks by applying a stream of water
perpendicularly from a 19 mm hose at normal city water pressure or at a pressure determined by the
Engineer. Test approximately 5% of the exposed joint system where leakage could be observed. Conduct
tests in the presence of the Engineer who will determine the actual percentage of joints to be tested, and the
period of water flow exposure, based on any observed leakage. Repair leaks and re-test as directed.

END OF SECTION

INTERIOR SEALANTS 07905-1

SECTION 07905

INTERIOR SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide interior sealants in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1. Acoustical sealant.
2. Firestopping sealants.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit the following information from the manufacturer:
1. Complete instructions for handling, storage, mixing, priming, installation, curing and protection of
each type of sealant.

B. Samples: Submit samples of specified products, 12 in. long and installed between samples of the materials
to be sealed for the Project. Architect's acceptance will be for color only. Compliance with other
requirements is the Contractor's responsibility.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened containers, with manufacturer's name, brand,
hardness, type, class, grade, and color fully indicated thereon. In addition, provide manufacturers expiration
date on all sealant containers and/or include with shipping and installation packaging. Store in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit Material Safety Data Sheets with products delivered to job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 BULK COMPOUNDS

A. General: Provide sealants, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and
with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer
based on testing and field experience. Use non-sag compounds for all other areas except as shown or
specified.

B. Elastomeric Compounds
1. Silicone Rubber (Sealant Type 1): ASTM C920, class and use as best suited for the intended
purpose; Provide one of the following:
a. "Silpruf 2000 " (General Electric Co.).
b. "795 Building Sealant" or "790 Silicone Building Sealant"(Dow Corning Corp.).

C. Non-Elastomeric Mildew Resistant Compounds
1. Silicone Sanitary Rubber (Sealant Type 9): ASTM C920, Provide white color unless otherwise
shown or specified. Provide one of the following:
a. "Silicone Sanitary 1700 Sealant" (General Electric Co.).


b. "786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant" (Dow Corning Corp.).
c. "898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant" (Pecora Corp.).
d. "Rhodorsil 6B Silicone Sealant" (Tremco-Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.).
D. Non-Elastomeric Compounds
1. Acrylic Latex (Sealant Type 11): ASTM C834; Provide one of the following:
a. "AC-20" (Pecora Corp.).
b. "Acrylic Latex 834" (Tremco).
c. "Sonolac" (Sonneborn Building Products).

E. Color of Sealant: For concealed joints provide manufacturer's standard color which has the best overall
performance qualities for the application shown. For exposed joints the Architect will select colors from the
manufacturer's standard colors unless special colors are shown or specified.

2.02 JOINT FILLER MATERIALS

A. Compressible Rod: Use non-gassing rod fillers, types as shown, or as required for proper performance of
the sealant in the specific joint, which is compatible with sealant, as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
One of the following:
1. Closed Cell Polyethylene or Polyolefin Foam Rod: One of the following:
a. "Sof-Rod" (Applied Extrusion Technology).
b. "Green-Rod Polyethylene Backer Rod" (Nomaco, Inc.)
c. "HBR Backer Rod" (Hercules, Inc.).
2. Backer Rod for Silicone Sealants: One of the following:
a. "Denver Foam" as distributed by Pecora Chemical Corp. or Woodmont Products Inc.
b. "Sof-Rod" (Applied Extrusion Technology).

B. Select shape and size of joint filler in consultation with the manufacturer for proper performance in the
specific condition of use in each case.


A. Joint Cleaner: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are recommended by and acceptable
to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and
adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect
on sealant adhesion or in-service performance.

B. Joint Primer and Sealer: Provide non-staining compounds recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant
for the specific joint surface and condition.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant
from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion
would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

D. Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces
adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




B. Examine the substrates to determine if they are strong enough to withstand the forces which will be induced
by the sealants. Repair or strengthen substrates as required before proceeding with the work.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with
recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; old joint sealers; oil; grease;
waterproofing; water repellants; water; surface dirt; and frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate
surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these
methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint
sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or
blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile; and other nonporous
surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave
residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer
based on preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint
sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage
or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing sealant.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, unless otherwise shown or
specified.

B. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Where joint filler is used as backup for bulk compounds, install filler continuously to depth and
shape specified by compound manufacturer for proper application and performance of products.
Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to
produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which
allow optimum sealant movement capability. Provide watertight and airtight corners and joints in a
manner recommended by the manufacturer. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers and
do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have
become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers, compression seals, or back of joints
where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure.

C. Prime or seal substrates, except where manufacturer provides written reports of tests conducted by an
independent testing agency which demonstrates that primer or sealer is not required for the conditions of
use and the substrates involved. When priming, comply with the application instructions of the bulk
compound manufacturer. Apply compounds in continuous beads without open joints, voids or air pockets so
as to provide a watertight and airtight seal for the entire joint length and to allow optimum sealant movement
capability. Apply compounds to the depth and width ratio recommended by the bulk compound
manufacturer.

D. Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and
adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use


tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
Tool exposed surfaces of compounds to the profile shown or if none is shown, tool slightly concave to match
configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C962, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Protect sealants and related accessories during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints
with new materials to produce joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original
work.

B. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur.

END OF SECTION

JOINT SEALANTS 07920-1
SECTION 07920

JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this
Section:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between metal panels.
c. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers.
d. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
e. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Joints in stone paving units, including steps.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Other joints as indicated.
3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of concrete walls and partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator
entrances.
f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
g. Other joints as indicated.
4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
c. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
d. Other joints as indicated.
1. Division 2 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in pavements, walkways, and curbing.
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets.
3. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
4. Division 8 Section "Plastic Glazing" for plastic glazing sealants.
5. Division 8 Section "Structural-Sealant-Glazed Curtain Walls" for structural and other glazing sealants.
6. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to
reduce sound transmission.

7. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for sealing tile joints.
8. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical ceilings.
9. Division 9 Section "Chemical-Resistant Brick Flooring" for sealing flooring joints.
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without
staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
D. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum
adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and
adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for
adhesion.
F. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing
agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of
elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated
below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant
backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures
including use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on
previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and
other materials matching those submitted.

D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified
testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the
commencement of the Work.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to
conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920,
and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
3. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with
requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement,
adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.
4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications
and test methods.
E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project
joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab,
in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.
1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut
along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.
5. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore
cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For
sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory.
Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
F. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution:
1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint
sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant
manufacturer or are below 5 deg C.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.
1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric
joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees
to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the
following:
1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written
specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable
to design or construction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another
and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer,
based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied
chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class,
and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous
substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous
joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated
contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
D. Multicomponent Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant:
1. Available Products:
a. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto-Seal 227 Type II (Gun Grade).
b. Pecora Corporation; Synthacalk GC-2+.
c. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-350.
d. PolySpec Corp.; T-2235-M.

e. PolySpec Corp.; T-2282.
f. PolySpec Corp.; Thiokol 2P.
g. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolastic Polysulfide Sealant.
2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
a. Use O Joint Substrates: As indicated..
2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining
latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:
1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building
construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2.5 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured low-modulus silicone
extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral-curing silicone sealant for bonding
extrusions to substrates.
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.
b. GE Silicones; UltraSpan US1100.
c. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.
d. Tremco; Spectrem Ez Seal.
2.6 PREFORMED TAPE SEALANTS
A. Expanded Cellular Tape Sealant: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape sealant; factory coated with adhesive on both
surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following
types:
1. Type 1, for applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. Type 2, for applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates,
sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer
based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) O (open-cell
material) B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-
sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056,
nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 32 deg C.

Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant
depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint
substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and
adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint
substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint
configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-
sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including
dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and
compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water,
surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond
with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or
blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or
leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the
following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on
preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant
manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that
otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove
sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications
indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as
applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants
in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce
cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant
movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them
with dry materials.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are
installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant
movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool
sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to
eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or
adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in
ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
G. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.
2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone-
sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 10 mm.
Hold edge of sealant bead 6 mm inside masking tape.
3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and
substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both
extrusion and substrate.
4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical
joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife.

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 300 m of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint
substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 300 m of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab
Method B, Exposed Surface Finish Hand Pull Tab Method C, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Flap or
Method D, Water Immersion in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint-sealant
application indicated.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by
extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite
side.
3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified
requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.
4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore
cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate.
Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-
pull test criteria.
b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.
5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of
persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and
percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.
6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally
to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original
sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with
other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint
substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove
sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of
Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original
work.
END OF SECTION

INTERIOR HOLLOWMETAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-1

SECTION 08110

INTERIOR HOLLOWMETAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide hollow metal doors and frames in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1. Furnishing of finish hardware as specified in Section Finish Hardware.


A. Provide doors and frames manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of hollow metal work
for not less than 5 years.

B. Hollow metal doors and frames for fire rated openings shall be manufactured by a firm whose units are
inspected, tested and listed by UL for single point hardware.


A. Comply with the label requirements of NFPA and UL. Fabricate units in accordance with requirements of
NFPA Standard No. 80, 10B and UL Standard for Safety No. 63 "Outline for Proposed Investigation for Fire
Doors and Frames" and for the class of door opening corresponding to the hourly rating shown.
1. Provide required labels permanently fastened on each door and frame assembly which is within
the size limitations established by the labeling authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide anchors for labeled frames as required by authority having jurisdiction.

B. Temperature Rise Rating: At stairwell enclosures, provide doors which have a Temperature Rise Rating of
450
o
F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.

C. Safety Glazing Materials: Comply with the requirements of 16 CFR 1201 of the Consumer Products Safety
Act with respect to glass and glazing provided in conjunction with hollow metal doors and frames. Refer to
Section 08800 GLAZING.

1.04 STANDARDS

1. ANSI 250.8 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
2. DHI "Recommended Locations for Finish Hardware".
3. NAAMM/HMMA 840" Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".
4. NAAMM/HMMA 850 "Fire Rated Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".
5. "Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames (NAAMM).
6. "Metal Finishes Manual" (NAAMM).
7. AWS "Structural Welding Code".

B. Where the language in any of the documents referred to herein is in the form of a recommendation or
suggestion, such recommendations or suggestions shall be deemed to be mandatory under this Contract.


1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings
1. Submit shop drawings for hollow metal doors and frames. Include for each opening details of
frame, elevation of door design type, conditions at opening, details of construction, details of joints
and connections, description of anchorage and accessory items and location of reinforcement and
installation requirements for finish hardware.
a. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
2. Submit schedule of doors and frames utilizing reference numbers for details and openings as
shown.
3. Describe primer and method of application proposed.
4. Electric Hardware Devices:: Indicate routing of electrical metal raceway or electrical conduit for
electric hardware devices.

B. Samples
1. Submit an 18 in. x 24 in. cut-away sample door with provisions for lockset and a pair of hinges and
corner section of door frame. Include samples of anchorage. In addition, submit a 12 in. long
sample of the stainless steel cladding mounted on the steel frame.
2. Submit an 18 in. x 24 in. cut-away sample frame complete with specified glass and glazing.

C. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certification for each hollow metal unit which is shown for a labeled
opening but is larger than the size limitations established by the labeling authority having jurisdiction. State
that the unit has been constructed in accordance with applicable requirements for labeled construction.

D. Certification: Provide certification that the prime finish on the hollow metal doors and frames has been
tested and complies with ANSI A250.10.

1.06 MOCK-UPS

A. Provide minimum of one visual mock-up of each standard door and frame assembly and custom door and
frame assembly, in type of finish required, subject to review and acceptance of Engineer.

B. The accepted mock-up shall serve as a standard of quality for the assembly represented.


A. Protect hollow metal units from damage during transit, storage and installation. Tool marks, rust, blemishes
and any other damage on exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. Store material in a dry location, off the
ground and in such a manner as to prevent deterioration. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters
that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately.
Provide spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation.

B. Deliver hollow metal door frames packaged with one (1) frame per bundle, marked with frame type, size,
swing and wall thickness. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier
if damage is found.


A. Protect units during construction period so that units will be without any indication of deterioration, use or
damage at time of substantial completion.


B. Upon completion of installation, clean exposed metal surfaces as recommended by manufacturer and leave
ready for final painting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cold Rolled Sheet Steel: ASTM A366 and A568, free from scale, pitting or other defects; stretcher leveled
standard of flatness for doors.

B. Reinforcing Steel, Supports and Anchoring Devices: Structural steel, ASTM A36; or sheet steel, ASTM
A366 cold-rolled or ASTM A569 hot-rolled and ASTM A568; as shown but not less than 16 gauge where
shown to be built into exterior walls; hot-dip galvanize after fabrication; comply with ASTM A153, Class B.

C. Filler: Sound deadening and heat-retarding mineral fiber insulating material. At doors required to have
temperature rise rating, provide mineral fiberboard core.

D. Fasteners: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel.
1. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated or
required, flat washers.
2. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete:
a. Interior Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
3. Machine Screws: FS FF-S-92, carbon steel, Type III cross-recessed, design I or II recess, style
2C flat head.

E. Shop Primer: A baked-on primer compatible with the respective specified finish paint and complying with the
test procedure and acceptance criteria of ANSI A250.10.

F. Dielectric Separator: Cold applied type, non-sagging, resistant to severe corrosion conditions; applied in
two coats for an overall minimum dry film thickness of 25 mils. One of the following:
1. "Carbomastic 90" (Carboline Co.).
2. "Bitumastic 50" (Kop-Coat, Inc.)
3. "Jennite J-16" (Maintenance Inc.).

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors and frames to the design and dimensions shown in accordance with best shop practices
and in compliance with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Door and Frames". Unless
otherwise shown, fabricate doors and panels to a thickness of 1-: in. Take field measurements where
coordination with adjoining work is necessary.

B. Make hollow metal work strong, rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. Reinforce corners of doors
as required to prevent twisting or sagging.

C. Form exposed surfaces free from warp, wave and buckle, with all corners square, unless otherwise shown.
Form molded members straight and true, with welded joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in true
alignment. Dress welded joints on exposed surfaces smooth so they are invisible after finishing.

D. Provide clearances for doors, not otherwise specified or shown, as follows: 1/8 in. at jambs and heads, 1/8
in. at meeting stiles of pairs of doors and 3/8 in. at bottom where no threshold or carpet is required. Where a


threshold is shown provide 1/8 in. clearance above the threshold. Where carpet is shown provide 3 in.
clearance above the carpet. Prepare doors to receive weather-stripping where required.

E. Provide clearances for labeled doors and panels within the limitations established by the authority having
jurisdiction.

F. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors and frames at factory to receive mortise type hardware including
installation of 2 in. dia. galvanized steel conduit for routing of low voltage wire from electrical hinges to
electro-mechanical locks, in accordance with reviewed hardware schedule and templates. Provide steel
reinforcing, drill and tap for doors and frames to receive surface applied hardware, except at push plates and
kickplates provide reinforcing only. Use steel secured by spot welding as reinforcement. Prepare doors and
frames in accordance with ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115, except with the following modifications:
1. Butt and Intermediate Pivot Hinge Reinforcements: 10 gauge or equivalent number of threads on
doors and 7 gauge on frames.
2. Top and Bottom Pivot Reinforcements: 7 gauge steel by size as required by hardware
manufacturer.
3. Lock Fronts: 12 gauge by size as required by approved hardware manufacturer.
4. Flush Bolts: 12 gauge by size as required by approved hardware manufacturer.
5. Lock reinforcement units, 14 gauge by size as required by hardware manufacturer.
6. Closers and Hold Open Arms: 12 gauge one-piece channel, size as required by approved
hardware manufacturer.
7. Panic Device Reinforcement: 1/8 in. thick by 10 in. high by 4 in. wide centered on panic device
case body, unless otherwise recommended by panic device manufacturer.
8. Other hardware reinforcements as required for adequate strength and anchorage.
9. In lieu of reinforcement specified, hardware manufacturers' recommended reinforcing units may be
used.

G. Electrical Requirements
1. General: Make provisions for installation of electrical items; arrange in manner so wiring can be
readily removed and replaced.
2. Doors and Frames with Electric Hinges
a. General: Provide metal conduit raceway to permit wiring from electric hinge to other
electric door hardware.
b. Hinge and Pivot Location: Center or intermediate as applicable; top or bottom not
permitted.
c. Back Box for Electric Hardware Items: Weld back boxes for electric hardware items.
Weld Dust cover boxes or mortar guards for electrical hinges.
3. Future Work: Where marked /F, provide cutouts in doors and door frames to receive electronic
door hardware at a future date.

H. Provide a full miter continuously welded on back side at frame corners with edges straight and true. Grind
welds smooth and flush on exposed surfaces.

I. Accurately machine, file and fit exposed connections with hairline joints unless otherwise shown.

J. Conceal fastenings wherever possible. Countersink exposed screws using flat, Phillips head screws.

K. Provide welds of adequate strength and durability.

2.03 FLUSH DOORS


A. Standards and Door Construction: Fabricate doors with minimum gage face sheets below, with edges
welded and finished flush. Do not expose seams or joints on door faces or edges. Comply with the
following:
1. Provide metal doors complying with the following ANSI 250.8 levels and models:
a. Interior Flush Doors below 7 ft. height: ANSI 250.8, Level II, heavy-duty, Model 2,
Seamless Design, minimum 18 gage cold-rolled sheet steel faces.
b. Interior Flush Doors above 7 ft. height: ANSI 250.8, Level III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2,
Seamless Design, minimum 16 gage cold-rolled sheet steel faces.
2. Reinforce face sheets of flush doors with 20 gage interlocking vertical C or Z shaped reinforcing
members spaced not over 6 in. apart and spot welded to face sheets not more than 6 in. o.c.
Provide flush inverted 16 gage steel channels welded to face sheets at top and bottom of door.
Place filler between reinforcing members for full height of door. Provide removable moldings of 18
gage steel for glazed openings in doors applied with countersunk screws spaced not more than 12
in. on center.
3. Framing for Temperature Rise Rated Doors: A continuous mineral fireboard core, permanently
bonded to the inside face of the outer sheets.
4. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from only
cold-rolled steel.

2.04 FIRE RATED DOORS

A. Comply with the specifications herein for flush doors and to the requirements of Paragraph 1.02.

2.05 HOLLOWMETAL DOOR FRAMES

A. Provide combination type, fully welded, hollow metal door frames to be used as both door buck and trim,
formed to profiles shown and, unless otherwise shown, of the following minimum gages:
1. Interior frames: 16 gage steel for doors 7 ft. and under; 14 gage steel for doors above 7 ft. In
addition, frames scheduled to receive electrical locking devices shall be minimum 14 gage steel.
2. Glazed light frames: 16 gage steel, unless otherwise shown.
3. Cased Opening Frames: 14 gage steel.
4. Code requirements: As required.

B. Corner joints of frames shall have all contact edges closed tight, with trim faces mitered and continuously
welded and stops mitered. The use of gussets shall not be permitted.

C. Where partitions are set into door frames, fabricate frames with throat opening 1/16 in. larger than partition
thickness unless otherwise shown or specified.

D. Provide tee shaped corrugated or perforated metal anchors into adjoining masonry or concrete construction.
Use adjustable anchors with friction fit for frames set in masonry. Weld to frames set in concrete. Fabricate
anchors of steel no lighter than the gage used for the frame, 2-2 in. wide by 10 in. long, three (3) per jamb
up to 7 ft. high and four (4) per jamb up to 8 ft. high, and for openings over 8 ft. high, provide 1 anchor for
each 2 ft. of height or fraction thereof.
1. At fire rated frames in masonry construction, provide UL rated adjustable anchors consisting of
spot welded straps and adjustable corrugated or perforated anchors. Gauge of strap and anchor;
same as frame. Minimum size anchors; 2 in. wide by 10 in. long. Number of anchors shall be two
(2) per jamb to 5 ft. jamb height, with one additional anchor for each additional 30 in. or fraction
thereof.


E. Anchor frame jambs to concrete or masonry which has been placed prior to setting of frames with 3/8 in.
countersunk concealed flat head bolts into expansion type shields or inserts, provide one not more than 6 in.
from the top and bottom of each jamb with intermediate anchors spaced a maximum of 26 in. o.c. with a
minimum of 4 per jamb. Apply removable stops to cover anchor bolts.

F. Where frames are set into standard drywall or shaft wall (steel studs) weld 16 gauge anchor clips to each
jamb as follows:
1. Hinge Side:
a. One anchor above and below top hinge.
b. One anchor above each remaining hinge.
2. Strike Side: Match hinge side.
3. Clip Width: Match stud width.

G. Provide 16 gage steel channel temporary spreaders at the bottom of all 3 sided frames to prevent distortion
during shipment and storage and to hold frames in proper position until anchorage and adjacent construction
has been completed.

H. Terminate bottom of frames at the indicated finished floor level. Where floor fill or setting beds occur support
frame by adjustable clip angles anchored to the structural substrate. Angle floor clips shall be 12 gage,
welded to frame and punched for two (2) 3/8 in. fasteners.

I. Provide mullions and transom bars of closed or tubular construction, or as otherwise shown. Attach
members to heads and jambs of frame with butt-welded joints unless shown to be removable. Reinforce the
joints with concealed clip angles of the same thickness as the frame.

J. Reinforce head of frames over 3 ft. wide with 12 gage steel channel unless a structural lintel is provided to
support the wall construction above the frame or unless there is no wall construction above the frame.

K. Provide full enclosing electrical junction boxes or mortar shields over all mortises. Provide removable
access plates in the heads of frames to receive concealed door closers. Offset reinforcement so that faces
of hinges or keepers are flush with face of the frame rebate.

L. Provide holes for rubber door silencers: 3 for single doors and 4 for pairs of doors. Install plastic plugs in
silencer holes to keep holes clear during installation.

M. Where frames are to be fully grouted, coat the back of the frame with bituminous paint.

2.06 FIRE RATED DOOR FRAMES

A. Comply with specifications for hollow metal door frames and with requirements of Paragraph 1.02.

2.07 GLAZED LIGHT FRAMES

A. Form glazed light frames to the profiles shown. Provide anchors at jambs same as for door frames. Provide
closed mullion sections same as for door frames. Fabricate from 16 gage steel for interior work and 14 gage
galvanized steel for exterior work, unless otherwise shown or required.

B. Miter, fit and weld corners of panel moldings for glass panels in sidelights and borrowed lights to form
continuous frame around panels. Provide non-removable panel moldings on the exterior. Secure
removable moldings with not less than No. 6 x 32 Phillips oval-head countersunk machine screws at 12 in.
on center.

C. Provide continuous felt strips cemented in place, on all bed and stop surfaces for interior light frames to be
glazed so that at no time does metal touch glass.


2.08 SHOP PAINTING

A. Clean, treat and paint surfaces of fabricated hollow metal work, inside and out, whether exposed or
concealed in the construction.

B. Thoroughly clean all metal surfaces of loose scale, shavings, filings, dirt and other deleterious materials by
use of wire brushes or other effective means. Remove grease and oil by one of the methods specified in
SSPC-SP-1-63 "Solvent Cleaning". Fill as required to fill seams in edges.

C. Apply 2 coats of metal primer to all reinforcement and attachment steel and framing which will be in contact
with masonry or concrete.

D. Chemically treat surfaces with phosphate compound to assure maximum paint adhesion. Apply a sufficient
number of coats of an approved enamel filler, baked on, to obtain uniformly smooth exposed surfaces. In
addition, apply one coat of light-colored primer, baked on, to both inside and outside surfaces. Touch-up
surfaces having runs, smears or bare spots.

E. Provide minimum mil thicknesses of coatings as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Examination: Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and conditions under which the Work is to be
installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow Metal Frames: Set hollow metal frames to the pre installed metal sub frame at locations, in perfect
alignment and elevation, plumb, level, straight, true and free from rack. Brace frames to prevent
displacement. Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Install fire-rated frames
according to NFPA 80.
1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of
enclosing walls and ceilings
2. Extend frame anchorages below fills and finishes, except over membrane waterproofed areas.
Anchor bottom of frames to floors with anchor bolts or with power driven fasteners. Coordinate the
installation of built-in anchors for wall and partition construction as required with other work. For
openings 90 in. or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs.
3. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge
location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include
masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors.
4. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge
location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs
with screws
5. After wall construction has been completed, remove temporary braces. Leave surfaces smooth
and undamaged.

B. Hollow Metal Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames,
within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and
ANSI/DHI A115.1G.
1. Install labeled fire doors and frames to meet requirements of the Insurance Inspection and Rating
Bureaus having jurisdiction at the Project site so as to avoid any rate penalty. Correct any
installation that would subject the Owner to a rate penalty. Install fire-rated doors with clearances
as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80.


C. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions and Section "Finish Hardware" of
these Specifications. Drill and tap for machine screws as required. Do not use self-tapping sheet metal
screws. Anchor panels in place with concealed fasteners. Adjust door installation to provide uniform
clearance at head and jambs, and to contact stops uniformly. Remove and replace doors which are found to
be warped, bowed or otherwise damaged and cannot be properly fitted in frames.

D. Provide scheduled glass and glazing in accordance with Section 08805, Interior Glazing.


A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime
coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. Upon completion of installation, clean exposed
metal surfaces as recommended by manufacturer and leave ready for final painting.

B. Protect units during construction period so that they will be without any indication of deterioration, use or
damage at time of substantial completion.

C. Clean glass in accordance with Section 08805, Interior Glazing.

END OF SECTION

WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 08210-1

SECTION 08210

WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide wood doors in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1. Furnishing of finish hardware.
2. Wood panels and trim adhered to wood doors as shown.


A. Comply with the label requirements of NFPA and UL. Fabricate doors in accordance with requirements of
NFPA No. 80 and 10B for the class of door opening corresponding to the hourly rating shown, and which
have been tested and rated for single point hardware by UL.
1. Provide UL label on each listed labeled door.
2. Provide required labels permanently fastened on each door which is within the size limitations
established by the labeling authority having jurisdiction.

B. Temperature Rise Rating: Provide doors which have a Temperature Rise Rating of 450
o
F maximum in 30
minutes of fire exposure if it required as fire rated.

1.03 STANDARDS

1. "Quality Standards, Section 1300, Architectural Flush Doors, Premium Grade" (Architectural
Woodwork Institute).
2. "Commercial Standard 171, Hardwood Veneered Doors" (U.S. Department of Commerce).
3. "Wood Flush Doors Standard NWWDA I.S.1" (National Wood Window & Door Association).


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all wood doors showing location, size, and hand of each door;
elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of
hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. Indicate the dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for
scheduled hardware, dimensions and locations of cutouts, fire ratings for fire doors, requirements for veneer
matching and finish requirements and other pertinent data..

B. Samples: Submit samples of each type of door specified showing construction, finish, color and specular
gloss selected. Samples shall be 12 in. x 12 in. corner section. Submit samples of acoustical hardware
accessories.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data for each type of door. Include details of core and edge
construction, trim for openings, and louvers.


D. Test Reports
1. Submit copies of the following laboratory test results:
a. Cycle/slam tests, stile edge screw withdrawals tests and stile edge split resistance tests
for fire rated doors.

E. Certifications
1. Submit manufacturer's certification that all wood doors are manufactured to requirements of
NWWDA I.S.1 Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors and that they bear the NWWDA Wood
Flush Door Certification Hallmark.

1.05 MOCK-UPS

A. Provide minimum of one visual mock-up for each wood door and frame assembly, in type of finish required,
subject to review and acceptance of Engineer.

B. Provide visual mock-up for oversized Wedding Hall Lobby doors and second floor Meeting Room Lobby
doors, including the specific door hardware, trim and decorative items specific to each door. The accepted
mock-up shall serve as a standard of quality for the assembly represented.

C. The accepted mock-up shall serve as a standard of quality for the assembly represented.


A. Package prefinished doors and panels in heavy duty cardboard cartons at the factory prior to shipment.
Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop
drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings.

B. Protect doors against damage during handling, transit and storage. Store in a dry place, protected from the
weather. Stack in accordance with manufacturer's directions.


A. Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and
will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with
the referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-3 "Moisture Content".

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard door warranty for the life of the original installation. Warranty
shall provide for removal of defective door and replacement and finishing of new door, including installation
as originally specified. A representative of the door manufacturer shall inspect the installed doors and shall
note on the warranty that no provisions of the warranty have been nullified in the manufacture and/or
installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Particle Board Core: Single thickness slab of 3 ply particle board complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-L-1,
average density not less than between 28 to 32 pcf, hot pressed with synthetic resin glue. Linear expansion
shall not exceed 0.03% in either direction when tested in accordance with ASTM D1037, Sections 76
through 79. Faces of core slab shall be of 0.010 in. thick flakes, with resin content a minimum of 50% higher
than core resin content. Face layer density shall be a minimum of 25% higher than core density.

B. Lumber Core: Low density thoroughly kilns dried wood blocks not more than 2-1/2 in. wide, random lengths.


C. Mineral Core: Incombustible mineral composition free of asbestos fiber.
D. Top and Bottom Edge Bands: Thoroughly kiln dried hardwood.

E. Blocking: Manufacturer's standard designed for purpose intended.

F. Side Edge Bands: Thoroughly kiln dried hardwood, matching face veneers for natural finish.

G. Crossbands: Minimum 1/16 in. thick after sanding, properly dried hardwood.

H. Face Veneer (For Natural Finish): Standard thickness thoroughly dried conforming to CS35, Premium
Grade. Match faces of doors in pairs and end match transoms. Where indicated, provide doors with faces
produced from the same flitches as the adjacent wood paneling and arranged to provide the same matching
as required for the wood paneling. Face veneer shall be tapeless spliced with grain running vertically,
balanced and center matched, belt and polish sanded, of the following species:

I. Type I Adhesive: CS35, Type I (fully waterproof bond).

J. Type II Adhesive: CS35, Type II (water-resistant bond).

2.02 MANUFACTURER

A. Provide wood doors for the entire project from one of the following manufacturers:
GCC Manufacturers
1. Door Abul
2. Hasan Abul Establishment,
3. Al Dimnah Kuwait
4. Al-Ahlia Carpentry

2.03 FABRICATION

A. General: All doors and panels shall be 1-3/4 in. thick unless otherwise shown.

B. Type I Construction: AWI 1300 G-4 Premium Grade, PC-5 or PC-HPDL.
1. Core: Solid particleboard.
2. Vertical Stiles: Minimum 1-3/8 in. wide after trimming, 2 ply construction without fingerjoints,
consisting of 5/8 in. thick outerband (specie matching or compatible with face veneer) and : in.
thick mill option hardwood innerband.
3. Top and Bottom Rails: Minimum 1-3/8 in. wide after trimming, 2 ply construction without
fingerjoints. At Doors to receive surface mounted overhead closers, utilize 5 in. solid wood rails so
that doors are not through-bolted.
4. Crossbands: Full width of door with grain running horizontally, tapeless spliced without voids.
5. Face Veneer: Standard thickness thoroughly dried conforming to CS35, Premium Grade. Match
faces of doors in pairs and end match transoms. Face veneer shall be tapeless spliced with grain
running vertically, balanced and center matched, belt and polish sanded, of the following species:
a. Wood Type: Teak, as selected by Engineer to match sample on file in Engineers office.
All teak utilized in fabrication of wood doors shall certified to be harvested from
sustainable yield forests or farms.
6. Bonding
a. Core to stiles, rails and blocking: Type II adhesive.
b. Face veneers and crossbands to core and edges: Type I adhesive by hot plate process.


C. Type III Construction: AWI 1300 Premium Grade, G-4 FD-5. Construct in accordance with requirements of
NFPA Standard No. 80 and UL Standard for Safety No. 10B for class of door shown. Doors shall be listed
by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Provide UL label on each door. Comply with requirements of Paragraph
1.02 and the following minimum requirements:
1. Core: Incombustible, asbestos-free mineral composition, engineered to meet labeling
requirements.
2. Vertical Stiles: Provide balanced construction by furnishing stile edge screw holding reinforcement
to both vertical stiles as standard with the manufacturer and complying with the following:
a. Stile edge screw withdrawals when tested in accordance with ASTM D1037 shall exceed
740 lbs.
b. Stile edge split resistance when tested in accordance with ASTM D143 (modified) shall
exceed 750 lbs.
c. Cycle/Slam: Not less than 500,000 cycles with no loosening of hinge screws or other
visible signs of failure when tested in accordance with the requirements of ANSI A151.1.
3. Top and Bottom Rails: Top rails minimum 2 in. wide after trimming, bottom rails minimum 2 in.
wide after trimming with finger joints. Provide additional reinforcing as required by specified
hardware. At Doors to receive surface mounted overhead closers, utilize 5 in. solid wood rails so
that doors are not through-bolted.
4. Crossbands: Full width of door with grain running horizontally, tapeless spliced without voids.
5. Face Veneer: Standard thickness, thoroughly dried conforming to CS35, Premium Grade. Match
faces of doors in pairs and end match transoms. Face veneer shall be tapeless spliced with grain
running vertically, balanced and center matched, belt and polish sanded, of the following species:
a. Wood Type: Teak, as selected by Engineer to match sample on file in Engineers office.
All teak utilized in fabrication of wood doors shall certified to be harvested from
sustainable yield forests or farms.
6. Bonding: Manufacturer's standard to achieve specified rating.
7. Blocking
a. Provide 5 in. blocking at top rail for surface door closers.
b. Provide 5 in. x 18 in. blocking for locksets and exit devices.
c. Provide blocking for flushbolts and vertical rod exit device latches.
8. Carved Wood Panels: Where shown, provide carved wood panels applied to specified wood doors
of patterns, sizes and thicknesses indicated.

D. Fabrication Tolerances: Comply with NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1, AWI 1300 and the following.
1. Jambs: 1/8 in. each jamb. Lock edge beveled 1/8 in. in 2 in.
2. Head: 1/8 in.
3. Sill: Cut at time of installation. Cut at time of installation except for any label door that must be
machined under label service. Do not exceed clearance as required to meet labeling requirements.
4. Toilet Room Door Sills: Provide inch undercut at Toilet Room doors, unless otherwise
indicated.

2.04 DOOR TYPES

A. Doors to receive hardwood face veneers for natural finish (conversion varnish or thermoplastic film) or to
receive high density overlay face veneers for polyvinyl fluoride film finish shall be Type I construction.


B. Doors of the hourly ratings shown shall be Type III construction. Face veneers and finishes shall match
adjacent non-rated doors.

C. Transom and side panels shall match door construction in every respect.

2.05 REINFORCEMENT

A. Provide additional hardwood reinforcement (fire retardant treated if required) blocking for all mortise lock and
latchset applications, surface mounted closers, panic hardware and as required by hardware manufacturers
and authorities having jurisdiction.

2.06 PREFITTING AND PREMACHINING

A. Prefit doors and panels in accordance with tolerance requirements of Commercial Standard CS 171 and
AWI 1300-S-6, at the place of manufacture. Provide standard bevel or radius to edges of doors as required
by the installation.

B. Machine doors and panels for hardware requiring cutting of the doors at the place of manufacture.
Machining shall be in accordance with hardware templates, final hardware schedules and door frame shop
drawings.

2.07 PREFINISHING

A. General: Comply with applicable provisions and requirements of AWI Section 1500, Factory Finishing,
Premium Grade.

B. Natural veneer doors shall be finished with a conversion varnish to a cured film thickness of 1 mil and
complying with MIL-V-12954 and AWI 1500 Finish System #3, Premium Grade, at the place of manufacture.
Prior to application of finish prepare door faces with oil stains or toners as required to match Engineer's
sample. Apply a compatible finish to stile and rail edges and cutouts.

C. Transparent Polyurethane Finish for Wood Toilet Room Entrance Doors and Wood Toilet Stall Doors:
Provide transparent polyurethane finish complying with AWI Section 1500, Finish System #5, except non-
catalyzed polyurethane utilizing "Varathane, #90 Gloss" (Flecto Co. Inc.) clear liquid plastic.

2.08 FRAME FABRICATION

A. Lumber: AWI Section 100 with the following requirements:
1. Hardwood for Transparent Finish: AWI Section 100-S-1, Grade 1as follows;
a. Wood Type: Solid Teak Hardwood as selected by Engineer to match sample on file in
Engineers office; All teak utilized in fabrication of wood doors shall certified to be
harvested from sustainable yield forests or farms.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine doors and door frames, adjoining construction and the conditions which the Work is to be installed.
Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Do not hang doors with
an apparent defect.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install doors until concrete, masonry, plaster and tile work are completed and dried in the areas to
receive doors.


B. All doors and windows should be fixed to the sub frame as shown in the drawing.

C. Doors shall be conditioned to the average prevailing moisture (humidity) of the locality before hanging.
Doors shall not be subjected to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity. Avoid sudden changes such as forced
heat (used to dry out the building).

D. Clearances
1. Clearances for Non-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8 in. at jambs and heads; 1/16 in. per leaf at meeting
stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8 in. from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering.
Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 3 in. clearance from bottom of door to top of
threshold. Bevel non-rated doors 1/8 in. in 2 in. at lock and hinge edges.
2. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA 80. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 in. in 2 in.
at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.

E. Cutting, trimming, fitting and machining of prefinished doors will not be permitted.

F. Install doors in required openings as shown. Install flush panels with concealed fasteners. Provide pilot
holes of proper size for screws into particle board core doors. Use stainless steel sheet metal screws into
particle board.

G. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80
and local authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions and Section "Finish Hardware".
Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs, and to contact stops uniformly.
Remove and replace doors which are found to be warped, bowed or otherwise damaged and cannot be
properly fitted in frames.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect doors and hardware during construction. Marred finishes shall be touched-up to perfectly match
adjacent surfaces to the satisfaction of the Engineer or unit shall be replaced.

END OF SECTION

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-1
SECTION 08211

FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
2. Hollow-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
1. Division 06 Section " Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames including fire-rated wood
door frames.
2. Division 09 Sections "Painting" for field finishing doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction. Include factory-
finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction
details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 200 by 250 mm, for each material
and finish.
2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 200 by 250 mm, with door faces and edges representing actual
materials to be used.
a. Provide samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.
b. Finish veneer-faced door samples with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.
E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited
certification body.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards Illustrated."
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors
comply with requirements of grades specified..
D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide
certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for
tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.
2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a
maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 250 deg C above ambient after 30
minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and
humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 16 and 32
deg C and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 6.4 mm in a 1067-by-2134-mm section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm span.
2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of
defective doors.
3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Exterior Doors: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
5. Warranty Period for Hollow-Core Interior Doors: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain
urea formaldehyde.
B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: As indicated.
C. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extra Heavy Duty: public toilets, janitor's closets, assembly spaces, and exits.
3. Standard Duty: Closets (not including janitor's closets) private toilets, and where indicated.
D. Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2.
2. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 or M-2, except for
density.
3. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:
a. 125-mm top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.
b. 125-mm bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor
plates.
c. 125-mm midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.
4. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive
exit devices.
E. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 3100 N.
b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 1780 N.
F. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating
indicated.
1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply
with specified requirements for exposed edges.
2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-
steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified
requirements for exposed edges.
3. Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals.
a. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel same color as doors.
b. Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit devices).
G. Mineral-Core Doors:
1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and
testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.
2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors
of fire-protection ratings indicated as follows:
a. 125-mm top-rail blocking.
b. 125-mm bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates.
c. 125-mm midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates.
d. 114-by-250-mm lock blocks, in doors indicated to have exit devices.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding
capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
H. Hollow-Core Doors:
1. Construction: Standard hollow core.
2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows:
a. 125-by-460-mm lock blocks at both stiles.
b. 125-mm top- and bottom-rail blocking.
c. 64-mm midrail blocking.

2.2 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A. Exterior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Faces:
a. Apply medium-density overlay to standard-thickness, closed-grain, hardwood face veneers or
directly to high-density hardboard crossbands.
3. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood.
4. Core: Particleboard .
5. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed
before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
6. Adhesives: Type I per WDMA TM-6.
7. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
B. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option.
a. Apply medium-density overlay to standard-thickness, closed-grain, hardwood face veneers or
directly to high-density hardboard crossbands.
b. Hardboard Faces: AHA A135.4, Class 1 (tempered) or Class 2 (standard).
c. MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or 160.
4. Core: Particleboard .
5. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before
veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
6. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: As indicated.
C. Interior Hollow-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium .
2. Faces: Any closed-grain hardwood of mill option.
a. Hardboard Faces: AHA A135.4, Class 1 (tempered) or Class 2 (standard).
b. MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or 160.
4. Construction: Three plies.
5. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: As indicated.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced
quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3.
Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware
templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory
machining.
2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated
doors.
2.4 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 09 Section
"Painting". Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer.

2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting
doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top
and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive opaque finish.
C. Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: AWI conversion varnish or catalyzed polyurethane system.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics
and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced
quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not
trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for
hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 3.2 mm at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 3.2 mm from
bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold
is shown or scheduled, provide 6.4 mm from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 3-1/2 degrees at lock and hinge edges.
3. Bevel fire-rated doors 3-1/2 degrees at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling
agency.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be
repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311-1

SECTION 08311
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for blocking out openings for access doors and frames in
concrete.
2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for anchoring and grouting access door frames set in
masonry construction.
3. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof hatches.
4. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for mortise or rim cylinder locks and master keying.
5. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for suspended acoustical tile ceilings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, fire ratings,
materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 75 by 125 mm in size, in specified finish.
D. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types,
locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
E. Ceiling Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted items
including access doors and frames, lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and special trim are
shown and coordinated with each other.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a single
manufacturer.


B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and
frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed
and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames.
2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.
C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly
from sizes indicated.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed
plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or
ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate
complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS) with ZF180 zinc-iron-alloy
(galvannealed) coating or Z180 mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with
minimum thickness indicated representing specified thickness according to ASTM A 924/A 924M.
E. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to
remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust,
if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning,"
or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Surface Preparation for Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so
surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the
organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and
apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
a. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.


3. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
F. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.76-mm zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and
in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.
2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL MATERIALS
A. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793, manufacturer's standard finish.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. Remove tool and die marks and
stretch lines or blend into finish.
1. Finish: Directional Satin Finish, No. 4.
2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
2. Door: Minimum 1.5-mmthick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish surfaces.
3. Frame: Minimum 1.5-mmthick sheet metal with drywall bead flange.
4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type.
5. Latch: Cam latch operated by with interior release.
6. Lock: Cylinder.
a. Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Division 8 Section "Door
Hardware."
B. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel metallic-coated steel
sheet.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that indicated.
3. Temperature Rise Rating: 139 deg C at the end of 30 minutes.
4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum
thickness of 0.9 mm.
5. Frame: Minimum 1.5-mmthick sheet metal with drywall bead.
6. Hinges: Concealed-pin type.
7. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
8. Latch: Self-latching device operated by knurled knob with interior release.
9. Lock: Self-latching device with cylinder lock.
a. Lock Preparation: Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in Division 8 Section "Door
Hardware."\
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat
surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade
names, or roughness.


C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices
and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.
1. Exposed Flanges: As indicated.
2. For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board and gypsum base securely
attached to perimeter of frames.
3. For trimless frames with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinc-coated expanded
metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames.
4. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.
5. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. Furnish adjustable metal masonry
anchors.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.
1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets
and install in holes cut through finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent
finish surfaces.
C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END

SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES 08346-1
SECTION 08346

SOUND CONTROL DOORS ASSEMBLIES

The extent of sound control door assemblies work is indicated on the drawings.

Standards:

Frame: National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM), Hollow Metal Manufacturers
Association Division (HMMA) HMMA 865 Guide Specifications for Swinging Sound Control Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames.

Door: Quality Standards, 8
th
Edition, Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).

Frames: Heavy gauge cold-rolled steel; all welded seamless.

Doors: Flush type fire rated acoustical doors having mineral core with transparent finished, quarter sliced and figured,
bookmatched, wood face veneers for factory finish complying with AWI Section 1300 for FD-5 ME, Premium Grade.
Two species are presently required for the Project and are as follows, refer to the Attachment noted above for the ex-
tent of each:

To be selected by the owner

Seals: Batwing seals at door heads and jambs. Thresholds to be either surface applied drop down type or gasketed
threshold.

Finish:

Frames: Factory primed for field painting.

Doors: Factory finished.

Thicknesses:

Typical Door Assemblies: 50 mm.

Ballroom Door Assemblies: 54 mm.
END OF SECTION

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES 08411-1
SECTION 08411

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Exterior aluminum-framed storefronts.
a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
2. Exterior manual-swing aluminum doors.
3. Exterior aluminum door frames.
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with aluminum-framed systems
and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.
2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section.
3. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this Section.
4. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for units installed with aluminum-framed systems.
A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the
effects of the following:
1. Structural loads.
2. Thermal movements.
3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and
deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
5. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure.
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural
movements, to glazing.
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
f. Sealant failure.
g. Failure of operating units to function properly.
B. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 4.1 m and to 1/240 of clear
span plus 6.35 mm for spans greater than 4.1 m or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual
glazing lites to 19 mm, whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to
less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing
members and glazing or other fixed components directly below to less than 3.2 mm and clearance between
members and operable units directly below to less than 1.5 mm.
D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection
exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including
anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main
framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.
E. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems that pass large and
small missile-impact tests and cyclic-pressure tests according to.
F. Story Drift: Provide aluminum-framed systems that accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories
indicated.
1. Design Displacement: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Test Performance: Meeting criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested according to
AAMA 501.4 at design displacement and 1.5 times design displacement.
G. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 19.44 deg C, ambient; 48.89 deg C, material surfaces.
2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and
fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.
a. Test High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-surface
temperature of 27.78 deg C.
b. Test Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 24 deg C.
H. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing
areas of 0.03 L/s per sq. m of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-
pressure difference of 75 Pa.
I. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water
penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-
air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 300 Pa.
J. Water Penetration Under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water
leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure
equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 300 Pa.
1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating systems or appearing on systems' normally
exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters
that is drained to exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not considered water
leakage.
K. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having
condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

L. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having
average U-factor of not more than 3.92 W/sq. m x K when tested according to AAMA 1503.
M. Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having minimum
STC 32 according to ASTM E 413 and an OITC 26 according to ASTM E 1332, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 90.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
2. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within
the system to the exterior.
3. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and
locations.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.
E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of systems, made from 300-mm lengths of full-size
components and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery.
2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for
aluminum-framed systems.
H. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
I. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work of this Section and
who is acceptable to manufacturer.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum-framed systems including Shop Drawings
based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those
indicated for this Project and submission of reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard
assemblies.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic
effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment,
and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining
construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods
including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If
modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
D. Accessible Entrances: Comply with local accessibility code requirements having jurisdiction.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and
installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in Part 3 "Field Quality Control"
Article.
Completion.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum-framed systems without field measurements.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
c. Deterioration of metalsand other materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e. Failure of operating components to function properly.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B.
1. Schucco _ UAE.
2. Profilati _ Italy.
3. Wicona _France

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M.
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221M.
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-
PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation
methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC
standard.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and
reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Framing members are composite assemblies of two separate extruded-aluminum
components permanently bonded by an elastomeric material of low thermal conductance.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous
shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and
accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads,
or vibration, use self-locking devices.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
D. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent
materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to match framing and of sufficient thickness to
maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection.
E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, that maintain
uniform pressure and watertight seal.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.

2.5 DOORS
A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation.
1. Door Construction: 50.8-mm overall thickness, with minimum 4.8-mmthick, extruded-aluminum tubular
rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and
fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: As indicated.
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 255 mm above floor or ground
plane.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
B. Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except
containing no asbestos, formulated for 0.762-mm thickness per coat.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that is sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required
glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.
C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops).
D. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
E. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door
edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
F. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-
installed hardware before applying finishes.

G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for
designating aluminum finishes.
C. High-Performance Organic Finish (4-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with
inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 3-coat,
thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear
fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene
fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration.
6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces
with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by
manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces
with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and
to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp or rack.
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight closure.
2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware manufacturers' written
instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight
installation.
I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances:
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 3 mm in 3.7 m; 6 mm over total length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1.5 mm.
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 0.8 mm.
3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 3 mm.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems
with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive stages as indicated on Drawings. Do not
proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with
requirements.
1. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing
under Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.03 L/s per sq. m, of fixed wall area
when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 75 Pa.
2. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic
static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure difference specified for laboratory testing
under Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 200 Pa, and shall not evidence water
penetration.
3. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 23 m by 1 story of
aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not
evidence water penetration.
C. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced
or additional work with specified requirements.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Entrances: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware manufacturers' written
instructions.
1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period
for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 75 mm from the latch measured to the leading door
edge.
END OF SECTION

ALUMINUM DOORS, WINDOWS AND LOUVERS 08520-1

SECTION 08520

ALUMINUMDOORS, WINDOWS AND LOUVRES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


B. Work Included: The systems shown are a awning type zero sightline structural silicone glass and aluminum
assembly with all required operating hardware and fixed windows and doors with all required glass and
concealed aluminum supports as shown and includes the following:
1. Supper durable Powder coated extruded aluminum framing members without Thermal Break.
2. All glass and glazing.
3. Operating hardware.
4. Structural and weather sealants and all required accessories


A. Provide aluminum doors, windows & louvres units produced by a single firm, which has been producing such
units successfully for not less than five (5) years.

B. The installation of the aluminum doors, windows & louvres shall be performed by a firm which has been
installing such units successfully for not less than five (5) years and has received the prior approval of the
manufacturer.

C. Fabricator of insulating glass units shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in fabricating units
similar to those specified herein on Projects comparable to this project.

D. Producer of Low 'E' type coating shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the production of Low
'E' type coating in quantities similar to quantities required for this project.

1.03 STANDARDS

1. ANSI/AAMA 101 "Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum Prime Windows and Sliding Glass
Doors".
2. NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual".
3. GANA "Sealant Manual" and "Glazing Manual".
4. GTA "Engineering Standards Manual".
5. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel".
6. AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum".
7. AAMA 611 American Architectural Manufacturers Association Standards for Anodised
Architectural Aluminium.
8. Air Movement And Control Association Inc. AMCA Standard 500.
9. AAMA 2605 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.
10. AAMA 2603 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminium and Panels.


A. Award the window and door work to a single firm specializing in this type of work so that there will be
undivided responsibility for such work.


B. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance,
provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass
indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required.

C. Qualify welding process and welders in accordance with D1.2 Structural Welding Code Aluminium and
D1.3 Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel.


A. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with all applicable requirements including structural loading, air
infiltration, water resistance and condensation resistance and fabrication specifications specified in
ANSI/AAMA 101 classification C-HC40.

B. Design Loads: Design, fabricate, and install component parts so that the completed windows and doors
including glass will withstand a wind speed of 80 miles/hour for exposure D condition as per UBC 97.

C. Design, fabricate and install component parts so that the completed exterior metal louvers will withstand the
inward and outward pressures normal to the plane of the enclosure as noted on the drawings without
evidencing permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or
metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
Maximum allowable deflection L/180.

D. Deflections: Base calculations for the following deflections upon the combination of maximum direct
loadings, building deflections and erection tolerances. Do not permit any permanent deflections in the
finished work. Long term deflection shall not exceed 1/1000 of the clear span of the component part.
1. Normal to Plane Deflections: Design, fabricate and install each component part (other than glass)
so that deflections normal to any plane at full loading will not exceed 1/450 or 19 mm whichever is
less, of the clear span of the component part including glass-supporting members, except limit
deflection of centerpoint of glass to 13 mm and deflection of the entire assembly including glass to
25 mm.

E. Design, fabricate and install component parts to provide for expansion and contraction of the system over an
ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F. and a surface temperature range of 180 deg. F. without buckling,
sealed joint failure, glass breakage, undue stress on members or anchors, and other detrimental effects.

F. Design Factor of Safety: Failure of any structural component shall not occur at less than 1.5 times the
maximum "Design Loads" when tested in accordance with ASTM E330. Failure is defined as breakage,
component disengagement, or permanent deformation.
1. Structural components of the windows, doors and louvres, include members, glazing stops,
gaskets, weldments, connections, adhesives, and sealants used as adhesives. Note that
individual structural components will require different design factors of safety to resist failure at 1.5
times the maximum "Design Loads."

G. Leakage of Water and Air: Design, fabricate, and install the windows and doors, including joints and
flashings between this and other work, to effectively prevent leakage of either water or air into the building,
under any combination of the foregoing performance requirements when any type or amount of precipitation
occurs.
1. The window and door systems shall be designed to prevent the appearance of uncontrolled water,
other than condensation, on any underside part of the window or door when subjected to a
uniform static pressure of 0.564 kPa for a minimum of 15 minutes when tested in accordance with
ASTM E331.
2. The window and door systems shall be designed to limit air infiltration (air leakage) to a rate not
exceeding 0.30 L/s on a complete module or bay when subjected to a uniform pressure of 0.30
kPa in accordance with ASTM E283.


H. Thermal Movement: Design, fabricate and install window, door and louvre work to provide for expansion
and contraction of the exterior wall over an ambient temperature range of 50 deg. C. and a surface
temperature range of 82 deg. C. without buckling, sealed joint failure, glass breakage, undue stress on
members or anchors, and other
detrimental effects.
1. Dimensions shown on Drawings are based on an assumed design temperature of 21
o
C.
Fabrication and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature range at the
time of the respective operations.

I. Make provisions at sill to drain water and condensation to exterior face of the frames.
J. Design louvers so that objectionable noises are not created when installed louvers are subjected to wind
loads within the range from 0.0 kPa to the design load specified as demonstrated by testing manufacturers
stock units according to ASTM E90.

K. Design, fabricate and install louvers so that they are easily removable and replaceable ( in the event that
equipment or materials need to be moved through).

L. All exterior metal louvers utilized in the final Work shall provide the percentage of free air shown on the
Drawings for the respective locations.

M. Permanent deformation, weld or fastener failure, component disengagement or breakage shall not occur
under loading equal to 1.5 times the design load pressures (positive and negative) specified herein.
Permanent deformation is defined as deflection without recovery exceeding length/1000.


1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements:
1. Shop drawings:
a. 1:50 scale elevations and plans of each entrance and storefront system condition,
indicate all hardware mounting heights.
b. Large scale design details of entrance and storefront systems; indicating sizes, types, and
gauges of all metal components; expansion provisions, glazing details, indicating types and
thicknesses of glass; bracing and stabilizing members; attachment clips and brackets; and
complete installation details.
c. Provide all shop drawings bearing dimensions of actual measurements taken at the
project.
d. Design engineering shall be the responsibility of the framing systems manufacturer, and
may vary from those indicated on the Contract Drawings, but basic sight lines shall be
retained.
2. Selection Samples:
a. Provide physical samples as requested by Engineer for initial selection of finish and
colour.
b. Manufacturer's sample boards for sealant colors, for selections by the Engineer.
3. Verification Samples:
a. Provide operating hardware components in specified finishes as requested by Engineer.
b. After receipt of selected standard samples from the Engineer, submit at least two 300
mm long pieces of major metal extruded components of the systems, and 300 by 300
mm samples of finished aluminum sheet used for brake metal components, prefinished
in the specified finish system in selected color.


A. Deliver hardware scheduled for field installation packaged individually. Label and identify each package with door
opening code to match hardware schedule.

B. Protect pre-finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which
bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.

C. Store framing and glazing materials in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface
contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes.

1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.


A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for installing interfacing work, and
ensure that the work performed hereunder is acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work.


B. Do not order or deliver any materials until all submittals, required hereunder, have been received and approved by
the Engineer.

C. Arrange keying, and schedule delivery of keys, with Engineer.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Submit the following warranties under provisions of Division 1 - General Requirements:
1. Manufacturer's written warranty for entrance and storefront systems, covering repair or replacement of
any system which leaks, or exhibits defects in materials, finish, design, within two (2) years from date of
substantial completion of the General Contract. Failure due to defective materials or workmanship is
deemed to include, but not to be limited to:
a. Failures in operation of operating component or components.
b. Leakage or air infiltration in excess of the specified standard.
c. Deterioration of finish to an extent visible to the unaided eye.
d. Defects which contribute to unsightly appearance, potential safety hazard, or potential
untimely failure of the work of this Section or the Work as a whole.
2. Glass manufacturer's standard ten (10) years guarantee covering insulating glass against defects
in materials and workmanship, including failure of seals commencing at date of substantial
completion of the whole Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Doors and Windows
1. Kuwait aluminum.
2. Alico Kuwait
3. Schuco International
5. Technal, France
6. SEAGULL - General Trading Company
7. SAFCO Kuwait

B. Louvres
1. Dasco Aluminium Company
2. Safco Kuwait

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Members: Extrusions, formed members, sheet and plate, of the alloy, temper and thickness
1. Principal Framing Members: Extruded aluminum, alloy and temper 6063-T5 or T52, 6063-T6 or
6061-T6, with minimum thickness of 3 mm
2. Miscellaneous Non-Supporting Trim: Extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5 or T52 or 6063-T6, with
minimum thickness of 1.6 mm.
3. Principal Formed Metal Members: Sheet aluminum, alloy 5052, 5005, or 6061-T6, with minimum
thickness of 3 mm for structural items and minimum thickness of 1.6mm for closures and trim.

B. Louvres
1. Aluminum Extrusions: Shapes as shown and as required to fulfill performance requirements, but
not less than 3mm thick, unless otherwise shown. Suitable alloy and proper temper for extruding
and fabricating with adequate structural characteristics, and suitable for finishing as specified.


2. Aluminum Sheets and Plates: Sizes as shown and minimum thickness of 2mm and as required to fulfill
performance requirements. Suitable alloy and proper temper for forming and fabricating with adequate
structural characteristics and suitable for finishing as specified.

C. Aluminum Finishes:
1. Organic Coating (supper durable Powder Coating) : Electrolytically applied
baked-on acrylic or polyester enamel coating in colors and gloss selected by the Architect,
of minimum1.5 mils dry filmthickness complying with AAMA 2603 and AA-C12C42R1x
applied over manufacturers standard substrate preparation including a acid chromate
fluoride phosphate conversion coating.

D. Steel Sections, Angles, Plates, Anchors, Clips, Bars, Rods and other Steel Accessories Required to Join or
Reinforce Assembly of Aluminum Components: ASTM A36 and ASTM A283, galvanized or, if galvanized is
not compatible with alloy of component parts, shop painted with primer specified herein after cutting to size.
Galvanize all ferrous metals embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise shown or specified.

E. Aluminum Angles, Plates, Bars, and other Aluminum Members Required to Join or Reinforce Assembly of
Aluminum Components: Alloys recommended by manufacturer or fabricator to develop required strength of
assembly.

F. Framing System Gaskets and Joint Fillers: Window and door permanent type framing system gaskets and
joint fillers, depending on joint movement and sealing requirements, such as sliding joints, compression joint
translation, or non-moving joints.

G. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum items, where feasible;
otherwise provide non-magnetic stainless steel. At the fabricator's option, brackets for anchorage to
structure and not exposed to weather or abrasion may be hot-dipped galvanized steel. Provide non-staining,
non-ferrous shims for installation and alignment of work.

H. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard non-corrosive fasteners and accessories that are
compatible with materials used in the framing system and with exposed portions that match finish of the
windows and doors. Where movement should be expected, provide slip-joint linings of sheets, pads, shims,
or washers of fluorocarbon resin or a similar material recommended by the manufacturer.
1. Items for bolting aluminum extrusions and connecting members: Stainless steel.
2. Items for anchoring windows and doors to supporting structure: Zinc- coated steel fasteners.
3. Where fasteners anchor into aluminum less than 3 mm thick, provide non-corrosive pressed-in splined
grommet nuts or other type reinforcement to receive fastener threads. All screwed connections shall be
drilled and taped. Do not use self-tapping screws.

I. Sliding Bearing Pads: As required.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Aluminum Sheets for Apron, Skirt and Trim Panels: 3 mm thick plate. Suitable alloy and proper temper for
forming and fabricating with adequate structural characteristics and suitable for finishing as specified.

B. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft stainless steel flashing, complying with ASTM A 67, Series 304; minimum
0.4 mm thick.

C. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Aluminum sheet.

D. Slip Gaskets (at bolted slip-joints): high impact polystyrene or nylatron.

E. Separator Gaskets: (except at bolted slip-joints): Tape impregnated separators; thickness and width as
required.

F. Weep Baffles: PVC coated open cell reticulated urethane foam


G. Weather stripping: Provide compressible and removable type weather stripping formed from neoprene or
EPDM complying with ASTM D2000 or molded expanded EPDM or neoprene complying with ASTM C509,
grade as selected by the manufacturer.

H. Silicone Rubber (Sealant Type SE01): ASTM C920, class and use as best suited for the intended purpose;

I. Glass-Fiber-Mesh Insect Screen: 1.4 by 1.6 mm mesh of plastic-coated glass-fiber threads, woven and
fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather
deterioration. Comply with requirements of ASTM D 3656.

J. Paint
1. Rust Inhibitive Primer for Ferrous Metals Not Galvanized: One of the following:
a. "4-55 Versare" (Tnemec Co. Inc.); 2.0 - 3.5 mils d.f.t.
b. "GP-818" (Carboline Co.); 2.0 mils d.f.t.
c. "Amercoat 5105" (Ameron Protective Coatings); 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.
2. Dielectric Separator: Cold applied type, non-sagging, resistant to severe corrosion conditions;
applied in two coats for an overall minimum dry film thickness of 25 mils. Provide one of the
following:
a. "Carbomastic 90" (Carboline Co.).
b. "Bitumastic 50" (Kop-Coat, Inc.)
c. "Jennite J-16" (Maintenance Inc.).

K. Sound Damping Compound: Visco-elastic sound damping material in emulsion form, non-toxic, non-
flammable; spray, brush or trowel applied; air-dried after application to form a non-tacky, non-marring film of
medium hardness, with a flame spread rating of less than 25 and a smoke development rating of less than
50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Provide one of the following:
1. "Antivibe DL-10" (H.L. Bachford Ltd.; Distributed by AVNEC, Inc.).
2. "GP-1, Damping Compound" (Sound Coat; Distributed by Controlled Acoustics Corp.)
3. "Vibrasorb Damping Compound" (E.N. Murray Co., Inc.)

2.05 OPERATING HARDWARE

A. General: Provide as per Hardware Schedule.

2.06 LOUVER TYPES

A. Removable stormproof units designed to collect and drain water to exterior sill by means of gutters in front
edge of blades, and channels with blades and frames of profiles indicated.

2.07 GLASS

A. General: As specified in Section 08810 : Glass and Glazing.

2.08 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate metal-framed windows, doors and louvres to conform to design details and to meet and
performance criteria specified. Fit and assemble components in the manufacturer's shop to the fullest extent
practicable and prior to application of finishes. Shop assemble, mark and disassemble before shipment the
components which cannot be permanently shop assembled.


B. Construct windows and doors using extruded aluminum components similar to sections shown on Drawings,
except where formed aluminum members are indicated. Provide units that are reglazable without
dismantling sash or ventilator framing. Prepare units for glazing, except where preglazing at the factory is
indicated.

C. Fabricate components to allow for expansion and contraction, field adjustment, and minimum clearance and
shimming at perimeter. Rigidly fit and secure corners and joints with screw and spline, internal
reinforcement or welding. Make exposed framing and trim joints and connections flush, hairline and
weatherproof. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for units as shown, of profile and dimensions
indicated but not less than 1.6-mm thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and weld and dress
smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match units.

D. Design and assemble components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels,
condensation occurring within framing members and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior of
the units.

E. If shown or required, provide continuous aluminum panel perimeter apron finishing flush with glass, with
expansion joints and with locked and sealed or fully welded corners, and fascia on all sides. Provide
matching interior fascia where required.

F. Prepare components to receive anchor and connection devices and fasteners. Provide concealed connectors,
attachments and fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. Where fasteners exposed to view from interior are
permissible, provide bolts and screws with countersunk heads. Provide acceptable exposed fasteners with finish
matching the framing members or trim.

G. Complete the welding, cutting, drilling and fitting of joints prior to finishing. Weld with electrodes and by
methods recommended by the aluminum manufacturer. Use only methods which will avoid distortion or
discoloration of exposed faces. Grind weld areas smooth and restore mechanical finish condition before
proceeding with other treatment.

H. Install concealed steel items and fastenings required within the assemblies. Apply bituminous coating to
concealed steel surfaces and other dissimilar metals to come in contact with aluminum or use another
approved method for separation.

I. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of size indicated with allowances made for
fabrication and installation tolerances of louvers, adjoining construction, and perimeter sealant joints.
Reinforce members and joints for rigidity and strength as needed to fulfill performance requirements. Use
concealed stainless steel fasteners for jointing which cannot be welded.

J. Provide interior splash pans at the sill of all active louvers which catches water infilitration through the louver blades
and conducts it to the exterior via drainage weeps.

K. Provide removable, rewireable bird screens fabricated of same metal and finish as louvers set in a folded
extruded frame. Screen shall be 19mm x 19mm mesh of 1.6mm aluminum wire. Locate screens on inside
face louvers, unless otherwise shown. Secure screens to louver frames with screws spaced at each corner
and at 25mm on centres minimum.

L. Provide insulated blank-off plates in areas as shown and where ducts do not attach to louver, fabricated of
1.6mm thick aluminum. Finish shall match finish of louvers and frames.


PART 3- EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect all surfaces and verify that they are in proper condition to receive the work of this Section.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing project conditions.
C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of
this Section

D. Before proceeding with installation work, inspect all project conditions and all work of other trades to assure that all
such conditions and work are suitable to satisfactorily receive the work of this Section and notify the Engineer in
writing of any which are not. Do not proceed further until corrective work has been completed or waived.

3.02 ERECTION

A. Coordinate the installation of the entrance and storefronts systems, and related items to be furnished hereunder
with the work of the other trades responsible for providing receiving and interfacing materials, and ensure that all
receiving and supporting surfaces have been completed and ready to receive the work of this Section.

B. Perform the installation work in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings, and the manufacturers'
installation instructions, and the herein-referenced standards. Erect the various systems and items plumb and
true, in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades.

C. All shims shall be aluminum. Wood shims will not be acceptable.

D. Provide sheet aluminum closures as indicated or required to complete the Work.

E. Install flashings and set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.

F. Perform all glazing work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual SIGMA and LSGA standards, and with the
entrance and storefronts framing system manufacturers' recommended glazing procedures.
1. All glass at entrance and storefront frames shall be set by use of resilient glazing gaskets between
both interior and exterior stops and glass, weathertight, in strict accordance with the printed
glazing instructions of the manufacturers of aluminum work and glazing materials.
2. All glass at aluminum doors shall be set by the use of resilient glazing gaskets provided on the
glazing stops, in weathertight, in strict accordance with the printed glazing instructions of the
manufacturer.

G. Ensure that all metal-to-metal and metal-to-glass joints are completely weathertight, and that adequate provisions
have been made to permit expansion and contraction in the metal.

H. No permanent exposed to view labels of any kind will be permitted to remain on the doors, frames or glass.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustmSent to accommodate construction tolerances and other
irregularities. Erect the aluminum entrance and storefront systems plumb and level, free of warp or twist.
1. Install 2 mm per 3 metre, non-cumulative, maximum variation from plumb.
2. Install 2 mm maximum misalignment of two adjoining members abutting in plane.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware for smooth operation and tight fit. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.


B. Touch-up all scratches, abrasions, and other defects in the pre-finished metal surfaces with shop-coat finish
material, supplied with the various items to be furnished hereunder.

3.05 PROTECTIONANDCLEANING OF ENTRANCE SYSTEM

A. Clean all entrance system promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage. Thoroughly clean all metal
and glass surfaces free from dirt, handling marks, packing tapes, and foreign matter; remove excess sealant.
Remove labels from glass surfaces, and clean and polish same.

B. Touch-up all scratches, abrasions, and other defects in the prefinished metal surfaces with shop-coat finish
material, supplied with the various items to be furnished hereunder.

C. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

D. The manufacturer shall advise the Contractor of protective treatment and other precautions required by him
through the remainder of construction to ensure that the work of this Section will be without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion of the Contract.

3.06 CLEANING OF GLASS

A. Clean glass surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to the same. Remove excess
sealing compounds, mortar, paint, dirt, and other contaminants.

B. All exposed edges of sealant and gaskets shall be left smooth, uniform in line, and with edges neatly struck.

3.07 GLASS BREAKAGE

A. Replace in kind and thickness all glass breakage caused by the work performed under this Section, and bear all
costs therefor.

B. Replace in kind and thickness all glass breakage, caused by other trades, because of negligence or any other
reasons, with the costs being borne by the trade at fault, or the Contractor as applicable.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished metal surfaces from damage during fabrication, shipping, storage, and erection; advise the
Contractor of protective treatment and other precautions required through the remainder of construction.

END OF SECTION

FINISH HARDWARE 08710-1

SECTION008710

FINISHHARDWARE

PART 1- GENERAL

To be read with Division 1 General Requirements, Conditions of Contract and all associated drawings.

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Finish hardware in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work includes
architectural hardware for all interior and exterior doors unless otherwise specified elsewhere. Works includes but are
not limited to:

1. Hinges Pivots

2. Lock sets and Cylinders

3. Master keying system

4. Lever Handles

5. Door closers - Floor Springs

6. Flush bolts - Dust proof socket

7. Panic exit devices

8. Pull handles Mop plates Kick plates

9. Door stops Coordinators

10. Silencers

11. Automatic door bottom smoke seals

12. Sliding door hardware

13. Security Locks


1. Section 08100 Metal Doors and Frames

2. Section 08210 Wood Doors

3. Section 08305 Access Panels

4. Section 08711 Hardware Set Schedule

5. Section 08800 Glazing

6. Section 09900 Painting

1.02 REFERENCES


A. British Standard Institution (BSI)
November 15, 1994 (R) : BSI BS 476-31.1, Fire Tests on building Materials and structures part 31: Methods
of penetration through door sets and shutters assemblies section 31.1:
Method of measurement under Ambient Temperature Conditions (AMD
8366).
B. British Standards (BS)

1. BS 8300:2001 : Building and Facilities
Providing Accessibility and Usability
for Handicapped People
2. BS EN 1935:2002 : Building Hardware Single Axis
Hinges
3. BS EN 12209:2003 : Mechanically Operated Locks
& Latches
4. BS EN 1125:1997 : Panic Exit Devices Operated by a
Horizontal Bar
5. BS EN 179:1998 : Emergency Exit Devices Operated
by a
Lever handle or Push Pad
6. BS EN 1154:1997 : Controlled Door Closing
Devices
7. BS EN 1303:2005 : Cylinders for Locks
Requirements and
Test Methods
8. BS EN 1906:2002 : Lever handles & Knob
Furniture
9. BS 5499-5:2002 : Graphic symbol and Sign
Safety signs,
Inc. Fire Safety signs.
10. BS 7036-1/5:1996 : Safety of Power operated Doors for
Pedestrian Use.
11. BS EN 1527:1998 : Sliding & Folding Door Hardware
12. BS EN 1155:1997 : Electrically Powered Hold Open Devices
Requirements & Tests Methods
13. BS 8424:2004 : Pull Handles Requirements & Test
Methods
14. BS EN 1158:1997 : Door Coordinating Devices
15. BS EN 12051:2000 : Door and Window Bolts
16. BS EN 12320:2001 : Padlocks & Padlock fittings

C. Door and Hardware Federation (DHF) / Guild of Architectural Ironmongers
(GAI), Standards and regulations for Ironmongery

1. June 2006 : Published a new code of practice relating to
hardware for fire and escape doors.

D. British Wood working Federation (BWF):

1. 1990 Edition : Recommended locations for Builders
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames
2. 1976 Edition : Recommended location for Builders
Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and
Frames


E. BS 5588 / Fire Precautions & National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

F. CE Marked, BS EN1155, BS EN1634, BS476, BS EN 1125, BS EN179, BS EN
1935

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturers Literature Catalogue Cuts: Submit to the Engineer, for information only, copies of manufacturers
Specifications, maintenance and keying manuals, and installation instructions (templates to suit each particular
installation), for each item of finish hardware. Include photographs, catalogue cuts, marked templates and other data
as may be required to show compliance with these Specifications. Only original manufacturers catalogue will be
acceptable.

B. Samples : Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents each of the
samples:

Ball bearing hinge 4-1/2x4x3mm / 3.5mm
Ball bearing hinge 4x3-1/2x3mm
Panic exit device
Mortise lockset
Lever handles
Pull handle 25mm / 30mm x 300mm
Male or Female toilet sign
Extensions flush bolts as required for wood / Metal doors
Dust proof socket
Automatic flush bolt as required for Wood / Metal doors
Overhead door closer with / without stainless steel arm as specified
& required
Floor door stop
Wall door stop

C. Finish Hardware Schedule: Submit to the Engineer for review, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, copies of finish hardware schedule covering complete identification of all items required for the project.
Include manufacturers names and identification of finishes. Include a separate schedule of key and master key system
with final submittal of schedule. Engineers review of schedules shall neither be construed as a complete check not
shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors, deviations or omissions from requirement to provide complete
hardware for the project.

1. Co-ordinate hardware schedule with door manufacturers Door Schedule. Submit required templates to door
manufacturers to enable proper and accurate sizing and location of hardware.

2. Keying Schedule: Separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Employers final instructions on keying
of locks has been fulfilled.

D. Statement of Application : Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
one copy of a statement confirming that the finish hardware work complies with these specifications and, that the
methods of installation is proper and adequate for the condition of installation and use. The Statement of Application
shall be signed by the Contractor.

E. All door frames shall be furnished with door silencers of plug in type except frames having weather stripping or smoke
seal. Furnish each single door frame with 3 silencers and each double door frame with 2 silencers.


A. Manufacturers: Try to obtain each type of hardware from single manufacturers although several may be indicated as
offering products complying with requirements. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum
ten (10) years experience.


B. Installer Qualifications:

1. The hardware installer shall have extensive experience of not less than five (5) years in the installation of similar
hardware to large projects and must produce evidence in the form of reference from previous jobs.

2. The hardware supplier must provide an experienced qualified staff that has been with the hardware supplier for a
minimum of five (5) years. He must be available during the delivery and installation period and must be able to
attend the building site at other times as required by Engineer.

3. The hardware supplier should depute the technical staff with AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant) OR
dipGAI (Guild of Architectural ironmongers), certificate holders, to supervise and help in the technical clarifications
required then & there.

C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Hardware at Rated Openings: Furnish hardware in accordance with BS / NFPA Standard for openings specified,
shown or scheduled for a fire rated opening. In case of conflict between type of hardware specified and type
required for fire protection, furnish type required by British Standard.

2. Furnish hardware according to British Standard for usage with the types and size of fire doors and frames
required. Unless otherwise shown or specified, arrange doors at fire rated openings to remain in the normally
closed position by furnishing each unit with an automatic closing device. Furnish active latch bolts, of approved
throw, that cannot be hold in the retracted position.

D. Pre-Installation Meetings: After delivery of hardware and prior to its installation, meet with the Engineer and
manufacturers representatives. Compare final samples with actual hardware delivered to assure acceptability.
Review catalogues, brochures, templates, installation instructions and the final hardware schedule. Rehearse
installation procedures and workmanship with special emphasis on unusual conditions, so as to ensure correct
technique of installation, and co-ordination with other work.

a. Finish and colour of each hardware item is to match sample furnished to, reviewed and selected by the
Engineer as herein before specified.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE ANDHARDLING

A. Package and label each item of hardware separately. Tag each item in accordance with the final hardware schedule.
Each package shall contain appropriate fastenings, instructions and installation templates. Protect all items from loss or
damage in shipment.

B. All hardware shall be stored in a dry, secure area and in a manner to facilitate sorting, checking and unpacking.


A. Co-ordination: Co-ordinate work of this section with other directly affected sections involving manufacturer of any
internal reinforcement, or cutting for door hardware.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer, and Manufacturer agreeing
to repair or replace components or entire units which fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond
normal weathering and defects in hardware.

B. Warranty Period for door hardware shall be five (5) years after the date of
Substantial Completion.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.

B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS / SUPPLIERS

A. The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of establishing
minimumquality standards. Products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, will be
considered acceptable. The decision of acceptability shall rest with the Engineer.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Hafele- Germany

Local office: Hafele-Kuwait

2. CES-Germany

3. Dorma Germany

4. Geze- Germany

2. 2 FINISHPRODUCTS

A. Fasteners:

a. Provide concealed fastenings where ever possible. The use of self-tapping or sheet metal screws is prohibited
except for the application of flush mounted push and kick plates.

Concealed Fasteners: Furnish hardware items with appropriate type and length of screws or other
fastenings suitable to ensure permanent anchorage.

Exposed fasteners: Furnish hardware with countersunk Philips oval head type screws where
concealed fastening is not possible. The finish or colour of these screws is to match that of the
hardware item being fastened.

B. Hinges:

1. General: Pack all hinges with machine or wood screws as required by door and frame construction. Where
door jamb or trim projects to such an extent that the width of leaf specified will not allow the door to clear such
frame or trim; furnish hinges with leaves of sufficient width to clear. Furnish template hinges in accordance with
door and frame material required.

2. All hinges to be stainless steel minimum grade 304.

3. Hinge pins, except as otherwise indicated, shall be as follows:


a. Stainless steel pins.

b. Exterior door: Non-removable pins (NRP).

c. Interior doors: Non-rising pins.

d. Tips: Flat button.

4. Provide sufficient hinge width to allow door to clear the trim, if the projection of door trim prevents desired
degree of opening.

5. Furnish hinges complying to BS EN Standards, equipped with two ball bearing units and five knuckles.

a. Hinge Size:
(i) 114 x 102 x 3.4/3.5 mm CE, BS EN1935
(ii) 100 x 89 x 3 mm CE, BS EN1935

BS EN 1935: 2002, The standard classifies hinges using the eight digit coding system. Each digit relates to a
particular feature of the product measured against the standard performance requirements.

Digit 1 Category of use, Grade 4: Severe duty, hinges for use on doors
which are subject to frequent violent use.

Digit 2 Number of cycles, Grade 7: 200 000 test cycles.

Digit 3 Classification, Eight test door mass grades are identified
according to Table 1 of this standard.

Digit 4 Fire behaviour, Grade 1: suitable for use on fire/smoke resistant
door assemblies.

Digit 5 Safety, all hinges are required to satisfy the essential
requirement of safety in use. Therefore only grade 1 is identified.

Digit 6 Corrosion resistance, Grade 0 4 mild resistance.
Digit 7 Security Burglar resistance, Grade 1: Suitable for use on
burglar-resistant door assemblies, subject to satisfactory
assessment.

Digit 8 Hinge Grade 10 for use on doors with a mass to 60kg.

Manufacturers:
Hafele - Germany
Royde & Tucker Ltd UK
Hoppe / Arrone - UK

C. Mortise Locksets:

1. All locks and latches shall be mortise locksets with 55 mm standardized backset unless otherwise noted. Cases
shall be steel and standardized to one size to allow interchange of function. Lock cases shall be closed on all
sides to protect inner mechanism from corrosion and foreign matter and provided with heavy gauge steel
armored front. Extra heavy long throw latch bolt, with auxiliary deadlocking latch to be provided for positive,
secure latching. Where dead bolts are required they shall be full 21 mm throw and above. Locksets including
lever handle functions, to be easily reversible in field.

2. DIN 18251 Class 3. BS 476: Part 22: 1987. EN 12209.


The new standard EN 12209 will cover both security and performance. Products will be rated into grades.
Security and performance are rated separately. There are three grades of performance and five grades of
security. The standard also includes a cycle test and rates locks for single action exit and fire resistance.

The following qualities are measured to judge performance:
Minimum and maximum temperature for operation
Corrosion resistance
Strength of latch bolt and latch bolt springing
Maximum torque needed to operate latch bolt
Maximum torque needed to operate deadbolt
Strength of handle follower and mechanism strength of key.
Closing force necessary.

1) Categories of use
Grade 1 Light use
Grade 2 Normal use
Grade 3 Extreme use
2) Durability
The following lock case mechanisms must complete the following number of cycles in order to conform to
the appropriate CEN grade.
Grade Deadbolt Latchbolt Snib Mechanism
1 10,000 50,000 10,000
2 25,000 100,000 25,000
3 50,000 200,000 25,000

3) Door Mass
No Requirement

4) Fire Resistance
Classification is in two grades.
grade 0: no safety requirement
grade 1: products must have subjected to a successful fire test to prove the contribution of the product to the fire
resistance in the complete door assembly.

5) Safety
Classification is in two grades. grade 0: no safety requirement grade 1: all bolts must be operable by hand from
the inside, and must withdraw simultaneously with pressure not exceeding 6Nm.

6) Corrosion Resistance
Grade 0 No corrosion resistance See Below
Grade 1 Mild resistance Indoor Use
Grade 2 Moderate resistance
Grade 3 High resistance Outdoor Use g
Grade 4 Very high resistance Maritime Use NB. Brass products intended to
be cleaned frequently or those which are to develop a natural
surface patina (e.g. bronze) do not have to comply.

7) Security


The five grades of security are rated as follows:
Grade 1 Privacy locks for internal doors
Grade 2 Low security
Grade 3 Quite high security
Grade 4 High security
Grade 5 Extra high security

Note:- that the current British Standard BS 3621 is equivalent to grade 3 of pr EN 12209. The cycle test is used
to rate locks for low, medium or high frequency of use.

Manufacturers:
Hafele - Germany
CES - Germany
KABA Germany
BASI Germany
TESA - Spain

D. Lever handles:

1. All Lever trim shall be thru-bolted for greater strength and security and more accurate installation and comply
with BS EN 1906:2002-Class 4, fire approved. The attachment of the handle to be concealed with 8mm
spindle.

2. Design of lever trim shall be Grade 304.

BS EN 1906:2002, European standard specifies the performance requirements and test methods (i.e.
durability, static strength, operating torque, corrosion, safety, etc) for sprung and unsprung lever handles
and knobs for doors on back plates and roses. The standard has additional graded safety requirements
where a high risk of failing exists.

The standard classifies door furniture by using an 8 digit coding system. Each digit refers to a particular
feature of the product measured against the standard performance requirements.

Digit 1 Category of use, Grade 4: High frequency of use on doors which
are subject to frequent violent use.

Digit 2 durability, Grade 7: High use 200 000 cycles

Digit 3 Test door mass, No requirement.

Digit 4 Fire resistance, Grade 1: suitable for use on fire/smoke doors
assemblies

Digit 5 Safety, Grade 1: Safety application to qualify for this grade,
handles must have high strength and knobs that have handle to
plate and plate-to-door fixing and/or handle to spindle fixing,
such that they would withstand a person grabbing in order to
prevent falling.

Digit 6 Corrosion resistance, Grade 4: Very high resistance-
recommended for use in exposed marine atmospheres or very
polluted industrial environments.

Digit 7 security, Grade 4: Extra high burglary resistance. The main
requirements include resistance to drilling, close fitting plates or
escutcheons to help protect the lock and support the cylinder.

Digit 8 Type of operation U: unspring furniture. The following marking


denotes a lever handle for high frequency use on a door that is
also subject to frequent violent usage.

Manufacturers:
Hafele - Germany
Hoppe / Arrone - UK

E. Cylinders For Locks

BS EN 1303: 1998, The standard classifies cylinders using a 7 digit coding system. Each digit refers to a
particular feature of the product measured against the Standards performance requirements.

Digit 1 Category of use, Grade 1: Suitable for use at extremes of
temperature -20C to +80C

Digit 2 Durability, Grade 6: 100 000 cycles

Digit 3 Door mass, No requirement.

Digit 4 Fire resistance, Grade 1: Cylinders shall be fire tested in
accordance with current fire test requirements of pr EN 1634-1

Digit 5 safety, No requirement.

Digit 6 Corrosion resistance, Grade 1: Conform to grade 3 of BS EN
1670 as a minimum.

Digit 7 Security, Cylinders are classified in grades 1 to 5, where 5 is
the highest. The grade of security can differ from one side of
the double cylinder to the other.

Manufacturers:
Hafele - Germany
BASI Germany
Yale - UK

F. Panic Devices:

1. Furnish exit devices as indicated in the Hardware Set Schedule with utilized installation feature to suit various door
widths.

2. All models shall be comply with British Standard for fire rated doors to
BS 1125, Figure 02.

3. Furnish Panic device complying to British Standard as follows:

a. Panic Device:
Type 1: BS EN 1125, Figure 02

4. BS 476: Part 22: 1997. EN 1125. CE mark 1007 and CE 1008

BS EN 1125: 1997, The standard provides details on product types, classification by use, test cycles, door
mass, corrosion resistance, as well as definitions, product performance requirements, test apparatus, test
methods and marking of products. The emphasis for products covered by this standard is on safe exit rather
than security.


The main purpose of the performance requirements of this standard is to give safe and effective escape
through a doorway with minimum effort and without prior knowledge of the device, i.e. for locked doors on
escape routes where panic situations can be foreseen.

The standard classifies panic exit devices by using a 9 digit coding system. Each digit refers to a particular
feature of the product measured against the standards performance requirements.

Digit 1 Category of use Grade 3: High frequency of use by public and
others with little incentive to exercise care.

Digit 2 Number of test cycles Grade 7: 200 000 cycles

Digit 3 Test door mass Grade 6: up to 200 Kg

Digit 4 Fire resistance Grade 1: suitable for use on fire/smoke door
assemblies.

Digit 5 Safety, Grade 1: All panic devices have a critical safety function.

Digit 6 Corrosion resistance, Grade 4: Very high resistance

Digit 7 Security, Grade 2: Safety considerations will always be given
priority over security.

Digit 8 Projection of device, Grade 2: projection up to 100mm (low
projection)

Digit 9 Type of device, Type A: Panic device with push bar operation.

Manufacturers:
Hafele - Germany
Dorma Germany
TESA - Spain

G. Door Closers And Floor Springs:

1. Provide door closers and floor springs as indicated in the Hardware Set
Schedule. Hold open arms / parallel arms to be provided as per the requirement.

2. The spring power of the closer shall permit adjustment to suit any width of door.

3. Door closers shall be listed for fire rated doors, prEN 1634-1 and carry a
Five year guarantee.

4. Furnish floor door springs with statically controlled closing speed with back check. Spindles of floor springs should
be interchangeable with extensions to meet the required tolerances on bottom of doors.

5. Floor springs shall be listed for fire rated door and conform to BS standard.

6. Provide stainless steel cover to the body of door closers and floor springs as shown to the Hardware Schedule.

7. Furnish Door Closers and floor springs complying to BS as follows:

a. Door Closers:
BS 476, Part-22: 1987 CE Mark 1121
EN 1154: 1997-05 (EN 1154: 1996 D) and EN 1634.
Certifire CF294


b. Floor Spring (Double Action):
EN 1154: 1997-05 (EN 1154: 1996 D) and EN 1634. BS
476: Part 22: 1987.
Certifire CF 495

BS EN 1154: 1997, The standard includes a wide range of products than BS 6459 and covers all
controlled surface mounted, concealed, transom mounted closers as well as both single and
double action floor springs. The standard classifies door closers using the 6 digit coding system.
Each digit relates to a particular feature of the product measured against the standards
performance requirements.

Digit 1 Category of use, Grade 4: For closing doors from 180
open.

Digit 2 Number of test cycles, Grade 8: 500 000 test cycles. Only
one test duration is identified for door closing devices
manufactured to this standard.

Digit 3 Test door mass/size, Seven test door mass grades 1-7
with maximum mass of hinged leaf 160kg.
Digit 4 Fire behaviour, Grade 1: Suitable for use on fire/smoke
door assemblies, subject to satisfactory assessment.

Digit 5 Safety, Grade 1: All door closers are required to satisfy
the essential requirement of satety in use contained in the
Construction products Directive issued by the EU.
Therefore only grade 1 is identified.

Digit 6 Corrosion resistance, Five grades of corrosion resistance
are identified according to BS EN 1670.

Manufacturers:
Hafele - Germany
Geze Germany
TESA - Spain
Dorma - Germany

H. Flush Bolts:

1. All flush bolts are to be furnished in pairs. Furnish extension flush bolts with minimum length of 300mm for all rods
except where any door is higher than 2100, furnish the top bolt to a length sufficient to locate the flush bolt
operator no more than 1800mm above the finished floor. Furnish dust-proof sockets for bottom bolts.

2. Furnish flush bolts as indicated in the Hardware sets schedule and complying to British Standard as follows:

a. Flush Bolt:
BS EN 12051:2000

b. Dust Proof Strike:
BS EN 12051:2000

I. Door Stop:

1. Furnish door stops as indicated in the Hardware set schedule and
complying with British Standard.

J. Pull Handles:


1. Furnish door pull bars as indicated in the hardware set schedule and complying with BS 8424:2003 and material to
be of anti corrosive high grade stainless steel Grade 304.

K. Kick Plates and Mop Plates:

1. Kick plates and Mop plates as indicated in the hardware set schedule and complying to British Standard. The
thickness will be 1.5mm

I. Toilet Sign:

2. Furnish stainless steel finish sex indicator male/female/handicap, size 150 x 100mm or 76 mm dia, in material and
finish as indicated in the Hardware set schedule and complying with British Standard.

M. Automatic Drop Seals, Smoke Seals, Weather strips, Silencer:

1. Furnish concealed automatic drop seals to bottom edge of doors equal approved for fire, sound proof and external
doors, complying with British Standard.

3. Furnish Smoke Seals to Perimeter and Meeting Stiles complying to BS 476 Part 20, 22 or BS EN 1634-1.

4. Furnish door hinges locks and door closers with intumescent fire protection kits for the smoke stop & fire rated
doors. The installation must comply with specifications and must be independently tested by
recognized
test laboratories and comply with EN 1634-1, BS 476 part 22-1987 and
smoke element seals comply with the requirement of BS 476 part 31.

5. Concealed and Surface mounted door bottoms to be used for the
Fire rated doors and as required by the engineer as a variation.

6. Weather Strips, Smoke seals, Astragals etc has to be provided as per the
requirement, by the door manufacturer.

7. Door Silencers to be fixed on all metal frames, to be supplied by the door
manufacturer.

N. Door Coordinator to be added on the doors upon requested by the site
Engineer as a variation.

2.3 HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Hardware shall be of the best grade satin stainless steel grade 304 where possible, unless indicated otherwise.

B. All sizes of material given in the hardware sets are only for guidance. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish
the exact size and weight of hardware items to ensure proper function in each case.

C. Produce finishes to exactly matching with Engineers selected sample(s). Reduce variance in hue in the colour of each
finish, as much as possible, whether the base material is cast, forged or stamped, or when plating is applied over steel,
brass or bronze. Finishes of the same designation that comes from 2 or more sources shall match when the items are
viewed at arm length and approximately 600 mm apart. Unless otherwise specified, match the finish of each item of
hardware with the finish selected for lock sets & latches.

2.4 HARDWARE MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Mounting heights shall generally be in accordance with the Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware published
by the Doors and Hardware Institute (DHI) and to the approval of the Engineer.

B. The following mounting heights shall apply throughout the work, unless otherwise shown.


1. Lock Sets and Latches: 950mm to centre of handle from floor.

2. Butt Hinges: 305mm to center of lowest hinge from floor, 184mm to center of upper hinge from top of door,
space other hinges equally between lower and upper hinges.

3. Door Pulls: 1120mm finished floor to centre of pull, centre line in 125mm from edge of flush doors, and
centered on stile of narrow stile glass doors.

4. Deadlocks: Centre line of cylinder to align with centre line of cylinder for lock sets, unless indicated otherwise.

5. Cross-Bar of Exit Device: 950mm finished floor to centre of cross bar.

6. Push Bar: 1050mm finished floor to centre of push bar.

7. Push Plate: 1120mm finished floor to centre of plate through mounted to pulls.

8. Flush Bolt Operating Mechanisms: Top bolt 1650 to 1800mm above finished floor, bottom bolt 250 to 300mm
above finished floor.


A. Coordinate the application of hardware items with door and frame details and with methods of fastening as hereinafter
specified.

B. Adaptation of Hardware Items: Where the type of hardware specified is not adaptable to the finished size of members
requiring hardware; submit an item having a similar operation and quality to the Engineer for review.

C. Templates: Make finish hardware to templates, with wood and/or machine screws as applicable to door and frame
details. Furnish templates and schedules to door and frame manufacturers and other trades requiring same, so that
doors and frames can be cut, reinforced and prepared in the shop to receive hardware. Use template hinges
conforming to BS standards to establish location of holes for each size of hinge.

D. Try to avoid the names of the manufacturers on exposed parts of the hardware, as a part of publicity.

E. Single Source: Try to use only the products of one manufacturer for each type of hardware specified.

F. The Contractor should be responsible for the accuracy of the quantities, sizes, finish and proper hardware to be
furnished whether specifically mentioned or
not and shall be responsible for determining all details such as hand of doors, type of locks, standards required etc.

2.6 LOCK CYLINDERS ANDKEYING SYSTEM

A. Provide 3 change keys per cylinder.

B. A master key system has to cover all door types such as wood, hollow metal, and aluminium doors. The system has to
be designed by the manufacturer in accordance with the Employers and Engineers requirement.

C. Master keyed lock cylinders shall be under the same source euro profile type or equal and approved quality.

D. Provide keys of nickel silver or other equal and approved material.

E. Provide 3 keys for each master key level.

F. Finish of cylinders shall match with the finish of other hardware in accordance with British Standard.

G. Provide temporary cylinders as necessary for use during construction period only.


H. After completion of installation and prior to handing over to the Employers representative, call the manufacturers' local
authorized representative who shall organize the installation of the approved master key system. The master keys
must be handed over direct to the Employers representative by the manufacturer's local authorized representative and
a receipt obtained. Furnish the receipt to the Contractor as evidence of completing the obligation.

I. Provide steel key cabinet with cabinet lock having a capacity of 25 percent in excess of the total quantity of master
keyed cylinders.

J. On handing over, each key shall be fitted to a coloured nylon key tag with clear labeling of cylinder/key marking. On
handing over, all individual keys shall be placed on the hooks inside the key cabinet except the master keys, which
shall be handed over in a sealed envelope.
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on the prepared and reviewed
hardware schedule and as instructed by the manufacturer.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturers instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting
and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surface which are later to be painted or finished in another way,
coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the
Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Receive hardware for doors as shown and scheduled, and as specified in the applicable hardware portions of these
specifications. Store the hardware items in a locked space to prevent loss.

B. Apply to doors as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required. Fit locks and latch in their respective
doors and remove before painting. Reinstall after painting of doors in completed. Upon completion, adjust and
lubricate hardware for proper operation.

C. Instruct Employers personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware as per the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.

D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for
proper installation and operation.

3.4 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS ANDCHECKING

A. The hardware supplier shall assist the Contractor in adjusting and checking the installation of finish hardware. Check,
test and adjust moving parts to ensure free and smooth operation. Furnish to the Employer the special tools required to
adjust and maintain hardware including instruction sheets and operation manuals.

1. After the building is completed and in use, adjust hardware to compensate for air movement and other conditions,
so that all items will operate properly.

2. The manufacturer local authorized representative of the lock and latch manufacturer shall examine all hardware
furnished with the Engineer (6) months after the handing over to the Employer. Adjust the hardware for proper
operation.

3. Clean and polish all exposed hardware at the time of handing over to the Employer.


End of the Section

GLAZING 08800-1

SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: Provide glass and glazing in accordance with the Contract DocumentsThe Work of this Section
shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Windows; Heat strengthened, low E.
2. Aluminum Windows and Doors: Insulating glass units heat strengthened and low E
3. Glazed entrances; Tempered.
4. Interior door lites.
5. Decorative glass for interior applications.
1. Section 08411 Aluminum-framed Entrances
2. Section 08450 "All-Glass Entrances"
3. Section 08520 Aluminum Windows and Doors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.
D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on
interior surfaces of glass under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process. Failure excludes
glass breakage and maintenance and cleaning of insulating glass contrary to manufacturers written instructions.
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact
loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective
manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight;
deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass
thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness

GLAZING 08800-2

designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or
heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the
following requirements:
a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As per values specified in Division 08920
b. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 edges, provide
thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short
side length or, whichever is less.
1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads.
2) For insulating glass.
c. Thickness of Glass: Provide the same thickness for each type indicated throughout Project.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum
change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky
heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): , ambient;, material surfaces.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on
manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below:
1. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for
each lite.
2. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following
methodologies:
a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as.
b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200.
c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

E. Heat Strengthened Glass: Heat strengthened glass shall have a residual surface compression less than 50Mpa.
The glass shall be installed with any roller wave marks orientated horizontal (parallel to sill) where possible.
1. Roller wave distortion to be minimized by controlling the furnace temperatures and cooling beds during
manufacture. In general the roller wave should not give a disturbing, distorted image when viewed in
reflection or when viewing through the glass. Localized Bow or Roller Wave Distortion should be less
than 0.15mm over 300mm measured peak to trough
2. Permanent Identification marking shall be in the bottom right hand corner of each glass lite.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Samples:
1. For the following products, in the form of square Samples for glass and of long Samples for sealants.
Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing
system.
2. For visual and test mockups, full-size units as required.

GLAZING 08800-3

3. For decorative glass:
a. Each type of decorative glass.
b. Each edge treatment on type of decorative glass.
c. Each decorative film overlay on type of decorative glass.
d. Each applied coating on type of decorative glass.
C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule
listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For installers.
F. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing
sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and
other glazing materials.
G. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products:
1. Insulating glass.
2. Glazing sealants.
H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful
in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National
Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single
manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.
C. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified
testing agency based on testing glass products.
1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability
to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
D. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in "Submittals"
Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period.
1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
E. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers, for
testing indicated below, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and
glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants:

GLAZING 08800-4

1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are
required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and
glazing channel substrates.
2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-
sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures,
including the use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data based on previous
testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, glazing materials matching
those submitted.
F. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
1. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for
glazing lites :
a. More than in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with
Category II materials, for lites
b. Less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I
or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by
16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing
terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."
2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating
Glass Units."
H. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite
of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.
I. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups in the location as directed by Architect.
2. Build glass mockups by installing the following kinds of glass in mockups specified in Section 08450 "All
Glass Entrances to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods:
a. Fully tempered glass.
Completion.
J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Project Management and Coordination."

GLAZING 08800-5

A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to
glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from
rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits
permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. General: Submit warranties to repair or replace defective glass and glazing materials or workmanship for a
period of not less than 5 years after date of Substantial Completion, or longer where specified.
B. Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer
agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article. Submit a written
warranty agreeing to replace defective insulating glass for a period of 10 years after date of Substantial
Completion. Defects include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Failure of insulating glass edge seal as shown by frost, moisture, dust or corrosion within sealed air
space
2. Insulating glass spacer migration.
3. Failure to meet specified performance requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Warranty on Laminated Glass: Submit written warranty signed by insulating glass manufacturer
agreeing to furnish replacements for those laminated glass units that deteriorate as defined in the "Definitions"
article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning
practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years after date of Substantial
Completion.
D. Coated Glass Products: Submit written warranty signed by coated glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish
replacements for those coated glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of
manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only
deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to
glass manufacturer's published instructions.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years after date of Substantial
Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

GLAZING 08800-6

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each glazing product is based on the product named. Subject
to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of
the other manufacturers specified.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Glass, General: All glass of the same type shall be the manufactured product of one company. Provide glass
types for each application according to the glazing schedule found in part three of this section.
B. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process. Glass heat treatment should run in one direction as
installed in the building. Direction is subject to Architects approval.

1. Resulting heat treated glass shall minimize the roller distortion or ripples resulting from fabrication.
Where noticeable distortions exist, and are acceptable to the Architect, install glass with such distortions
running horizontally.
2. Glass within one type of opening shall be produced by the same heat treating process.
C. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a
dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in
this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist
thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design
requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated.
3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass units are
nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass
lites at unit's edge.
4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:
a. Grey Silicone
5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
6. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with the
following requirements:
a. Spacer Material: Mill finish
b. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
c. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.
D. Heat-Treated Glass: ASTM C 1048, Quality q3 (glazing select); Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I
(transparent glass, flat), and Class specified in Glazing Schedule at end of Section.

1. Kind HS - Heat Strengthened. (Heat strengthened glass shall be achieved by heat treating glass
resulting in a glass product capable of a surface compressive stress of not less than 3500 psi, nor more
than 7000 psi.)

E. Laminated Glass:

GLAZING 08800-7

1. Two lites of glass bonded to plastic, puncture resistant, polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer conforming to
the requirements of ANSI Z97.1, ASTM C 1172, and CPSC standard 16 CFR 1201 Category II, as
follows:

2. Clear Laminated Glass: One 1.5-mm or two (2) .7-mm thick layers of clear PVB.
3. Interlayer shall be compatible with all glazing sealants.
4. Approved Interlayer Products:

a. Saflex Clear as manufactured by Solutia, Inc.
b. Butacite as manufactured by E. I. Dupont de Nemours & Co., Inc.
F. Low-E Coated Glass Products: Clear monolithic glass with a high performance low-emissivity (low-E) coating
for use in an insulating unit:

a. Low-E coating(s) shall be neutral in transmitted and otherwise exhibit the visual and performance
characteristics of the products specified herein.
b. Visual quality control acceptance criteria of the coating shall be consistent with industry guidelines,
subject to approval by the Contractor.

G. Wired Glass: Monolithic Wired-Glass Units, ASTM C 1036, of form and mesh pattern specified in the schedule.
H. Decorative Glass:
1. Basis for design product: Bendheim, Product GRZS 327.
2. Fully tempered.
2.3 GLAZING ACCESSORIES:

c. Not in Direct Contact with Silicone:

1) Closed Cell Sponge Gaskets (Interior): Polychloroprene (neoprene) or EPDM gaskets complying
with ASTM C 509-84 (60 plus Shore A durometer).
2) Non-Cellular Gaskets (Exterior): Non-cellular polychloroprene (neoprene), or EPDM, or silicone
gaskets complying with ASTM C 864-84 (70 plus Shore A durometer).
3) Setting Blocks: Non-cellular(dense) extruded polychloroprene (neoprene) or EPDM: ASTM C
864-84 (90 plus Shore A durometer).
4) Spacers and Edge Blocks: Non-cellular(dense) extruded poly-chloroprene (neoprene) or EPDM:
ASTM C 864-84.

d. In Direct Contact with Silicone:

1) Glazing Gaskets: Heat-cured, extruded silicone rubber: ASTM C 1115 (70 plus 5 Shore A
durometer.
2) Setting Blocks: Non-cellular (dense) extruded silicone: ASTM C 1115 Type C (90 plus or minus
5 Shore A durometer hardness).
3) Spacers and Edge Blocks: Non-cellular (dense) extruded silicone: ASTM C 1115 (60 plus or
minus 5 Shore A durometer hardness).
2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS:
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

GLAZING 08800-8

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials
they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel
substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based
on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing
sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Grey.
2.5 SEALANT AND SEALANT BACKING MATERIAL:
A. Cellular Glazing Tapes: Open-cell, semi-rigid, adhesive-backed foam tape; provide Thermalbond V2100 or
Thermalbond V2200 as manufactured by Norton Industries.
B. Silicone Compounds, General: Where indicated provide silicone sealants which are specifically designed and
tested for use as structural silicone sealant. Secondary seal or weatherseal silicone sealants shall be
compatible with the neutral cure structural silicone sealant. Weatherseal shall accommodate a 50 percent
increase or decrease of joint width as measured at time of application in accordance with ASTM C 719.
1. Single-Component: ASTM C 1193, Type S, Grade NS.
2. Multi-Component: ASTM C 1193, Type M, Grade NS.
3. Color: Gray.
C. Sealant Backing Materials: Preformed foam plastics and synthetic rubbers, compressible, non-gassing, non
staining, and compatible with sealants and as recommended by sealant manufacturers. Backing shall be of the
sizes and shapes to suit the various conditions and shall be a color different than the sealant color. Backer rods
shall be 25 percent wider than the joint width.

1. Open/ Closed Cell Extruded Polyolefin Backer Rod: Provide Sof-Rod as manufactured by AET, Inc., or
approved equal.

2. Bond Breaker Tape: Provide Lithographer Tape as manufactured by 3M Company, Inc., or approved
equal.
D. Weep Hole Filter: PVC-coated reticulated open cell urethane foam, 20 to 45 pores/ inch.
E. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-
applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type,
grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
1. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants:
a. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
b. Class:
c. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
d. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated,
O.
1) Use O Glazing Substrates:
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

GLAZING 08800-9

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven
record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by
glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control
glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
1. Cellular Glazing Tapes: Open-cell, semi-rigid, adhesive-backed foam tape; provide Thermalbond V2100
or Thermalbond V2200 as manufactured by Norton Industries.
2. Silicone Compounds, General: Where indicated provide silicone sealants which are specifically
designed and tested for use as structural silicone sealant. Secondary seal or weatherseal silicone
sealants shall be compatible with the neutral cure structural silicone sealant. Weatherseal shall
accommodate a 50 percent increase or decrease of joint width as measured at time of application in
accordance with ASTM C 719.

a. Single-Component: ASTM C 1193, Type S, Grade NS.
b. Multi-Component: ASTM C 1193, Type M, Grade NS.
c. Color: Gray.

3. Sealant Backing Materials: Preformed foam plastics and synthetic rubbers, compressible, non-gassing,
non staining, and compatible with sealants and as recommended by sealant manufacturers. Backing
shall be of the sizes and shapes to suit the various conditions and shall be a color different than the
sealant color. Backer rods shall be 25 percent wider than the joint width.

a. Open/ Closed Cell Extruded Polyolefin Backer Rod: Provide Sof-Rod as manufactured by AET,
Inc., or approved equal.

4. Bond Breaker Tape: Provide Lithographer Tape as manufactured by 3M Company, Inc., or approved
equal.
G. Weep Hole Filter: PVC-coated reticulated open cell urethane foam, 20 to 45 pores/ inch.
2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances,
edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and
referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with
slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.
C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
2.8 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS

GLAZING 08800-10

A. Insulating-Glass Units:
1. Listed Manufacturers, including but not limited to following:
a. Viracon
b. AFGD
c. PPG Industries, Inc.
d. Pilkington -
e. Libby-Owens-Ford
f. Al Abbar Glass
g. Emirates Glass
h. Saudi American Glass
2. Overall Unit Thickness: 25mm.
3. Thickness of each lite: 6mm.
4. Interspace Content: Air.
5. Outdoor Lite: 6mm Clear HS. Low-E coating on no. 2 surface.
6. Indoor Lite: Type 1 (Transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (Clear) float glass. Annealed: Kind FT (fully
tempered) as required
7. Visible Light Transmittance: 60%.
8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.3.
9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.43
10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove
coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing
materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Provide glazing channel dimensions, to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances,
and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

GLAZING 08800-11

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site
and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that,
when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction
sealant-substrate testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless
otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel
bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than as follows:
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct
size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that
have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance
requirements.
2. Provide minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape,
use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing
channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing
publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite
side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.
K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket
manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended
by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing
stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking
weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control
depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to
glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held
away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface unless required for certification purposes. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

GLAZING 08800-12

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld
splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals
during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains;
remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes,
accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass
manufacturer.
3.6 GLAZING SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Drawings for glazing schedule.
END OF SECTION

GLASS AND GLAZZING INTERNAL 08805-1

SECTION 08805

GLASS ANDGLAZING - INTERNAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide glazing in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1. Section "Architectural Metal Entrances".
2. Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backerboard for mirror installation.


A. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, and
to comply with warranty requirements, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for
each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for
each type and class required. All glass processes of fabrication including tempering, application of thermal
coatings, ceramic enameled coatings and any process of lamination shall be manufactured by and
fabricated into insulating units by a single source with the ability to comply with and assume all specified
warranty provisions.

B. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Fabricator of insulating glass units shall have a minimum of 10 (ten) years experience in fabricating units
similar to those specified herein on Projects comparable to this project and shall be required to comply with
and assume warranty provisions specified herein.

D. Producer of decorative type coatings for glass shall have a minimum of 10 (ten) years experience in the
production of decorative type coatings in quantities similar to quantities required for this project.

1.03 STANDARDS

1. GANA "Sealant Manual" and "Glazing Manual".
2. GTA "Engineering Standards Manual".
3. NAMM "National Association of Mirror Manufacturers "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care, Tips for
the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."
4. GANA "Laminated Glass Design Guide."
5. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities having
jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing
requirements of CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. Subject to compliance with
requirements and local authorities having jurisdiction, provide safety glass with a removable
certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


1.04 SUBMITTALS


A. Samples: Submit samples of each type of glass, setting block, face shim, edge block, glazing sealant and
gasket. Provide sealant samples 12 in. long installed between samples of the materials to be glazed, fully
cured. Samples will be reviewed for color and texture only.

B. Glazing Schedule: Provide a glazing schedule utilizing the same designations shown on Drawings for
glazed openings listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

C. Product Data: Submit the following information from the manufacturer:
1. Statement that each product to be furnished is recommended for the application shown.
2. Product Test Reports: Provide product test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating the
following products comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products:
a. Coated float glass.
b. Ceramic patterned frit glass
c. Glazing sealants.
d. Glazing gaskets.
3. Complete instructions for handling, storing, mixing, priming, installing, curing and protecting each
glazing material.
4. Sealant adhesion test reports.
5. Mirror Product Data
a. Submit product data for mirrors including description of materials and process used to
produce mirrored glass, including source of glass, glass coating components, edge
sealer, and quality control provisions.
b. Mirror mastic glass coating compatibility test reports from organic protective coating
manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic has been tested for compatibility and
adhesion with organic protective coating. Include organic coating manufacturers'
interpretation of test results relative to performance and recommendations for use of
mastics with organic protective coating.

E. Statement of Application: Submit copy of statement signed by the Subcontractor and Contractor, stating that
the glazing materials complied with these Specifications and that the installation methods complied with the
manufacturer's printed instructions for each condition of use on this Project.

F. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish maintenance instructions for each type of glass for use during
construction and for use by the Owner after acceptance of the Work.

1.05 SAMPLE INSTALLATION

A. Prepare sample installation before proceeding with the work. Glaze sample in the presence of the glazing
materials manufacturer and glass manufacturer, not less than one (1) week in advance of the scheduled
glazing work.

1.06 MOCK UPS AND TESTING

A. Visual Mock-Up
1. Provide, at Project site, where directed, in coordination with glass and glazing for the visual mock-
up review by the Engineer, extent as shown, and representative of the finished Work in all
respects. Provide all features as will be used in the final Work.
2. Clean glass installed in mock-up with materials and techniques intended for use on the Project.
3. Replace unsatisfactory Work as required to obtain approval of the Engineer. The approved visual
mock-up will become the standard of workmanship for the project.


4. The approval of the visual mock-up does not relieve the Contractor of its obligation to perform the
work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. Testing Mock-Up: Provide glass and glazing and related accessories for testing mock-up in composite
configurations designed to fulfill the performance criteria, and representing the elements which will be used
in the final work. Extent of mock-up as directed by Engineer. Provide personnel to install glass and glazing
in mock-up as directed by the Engineer.

C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of all materials that will contact or
affect sealants to sealant manufacturers for compatibility and adhesion testing, as indicated below:
1. Use test methods standard with manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific joint
preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of sealants to joint
substrates. Perform tests under conditions of 72 deg. F. temperature and 50% relative humidity.
Manufacturer(s) of sealant(s) shall submit written recommendations when installations involve
adverse temperature or humidity conditions.
2. Submit not less than 9 pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint
sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
Work.
4. Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain sealant manufacturer's
written recommendations for corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.
5. Testing will not be required when sealant manufacturer is able to submit joint preparation data
required above which is acceptable to Engineer and is based on previous testing of current sealant
products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching
those submitted.

D. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Glass Coating Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to
manufacturer of protective organic coating for testing by coating manufacturer's standard test method to
determine compatibility of adhesive with mirrored glass coating.


A. Deliver glazing materials to Project site in manufacturers' unopened containers, fully identified with trade
name, color, size, hardness, type, class, and grade. Store each item in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.

B. Deliver, store and handle glass in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; protected from
weather, staining and damage. During storage and handling of glass provide cushions at edges to prevent
impact damage. Protect glass from scratches and abrasion.


A. Do not perform glazing when temperature is below 40 deg. F., unless the manufacturer of the glazing
materials specifically recommends application of his materials at lower temperatures. If job progress or
other conditions require glazing work when temperatures are below 40 deg. F. (or below the minimum
temperature recommended by the manufacturer), consult the manufacturer and establish the minimum
provisions required to ensure satisfactory work. Record in writing to the manufacturer, with copy to the
Engineer, the conditions under which such glazing work was performed and the provisions made to ensure
satisfactory work.

1.09 WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under
other provisions of the Contract Documents and are in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties
made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.


B. Warranty, Laminated Glass: Provide a (5) five year written warranty, directly to the Owner, warranting
against deterioration of laminated glass. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as the development of
manufacturing defects including edge separation or delamination which materially obstructs vision through
glass and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. Upon notification of
such defect, within the warranty period, make the necessary replacements at the convenience of the Owner.

C. Warranty, Coated Glass: Provide a ten (10) year written warranty, directly to the Owner, for the coated
glass against peeling, uneven color, fading cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. Upon
notification of such defect, within the warranty period, make the necessary replacements at the convenience
of the Owner.

D. Warranty, Decorative Patterned Ceramic Fritted Glass: Provide a (10) ten year written warranty, directly to
the Owner, for the ceramic enameled patterned glass against peeling, uneven color, fading cracking, and
other indications of deterioration in coating. Upon notification of such defect, within the warranty period,
make the necessary replacements at the convenience of the Owner.

E. Warranty, Mirror: Provide a 5 year written warranty, directly to the Owner, warranting against any evidence
of silver spoilage. Upon notification of such defects, within the warranty period, make the necessary
replacements at the convenience of the Owner.

F. Warranty of Backpainted Glass Panels: Provide a written warranty, directly to the Owner, stating that the
backpainted glass panels will not discolor, peel, craze, alligator or delaminate for a period of five (5) years
from date of final acceptance. If discoloration, peeling, crazing, alligatoring or delamination occurs, correct
or replace panels at the Owner's convenience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GLASS MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS

A. Gulf Glass Industries LLC

B. Al-Alamiah for Manufacturing Tempered Glass Co. (w.l.l.)

C. Emirates Glass

D. Refai Glass

2.02 GLASS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C1036 unless otherwise specified. Type and thickness as shown or specified.

B. Float Glass: Type I, Class 1, Quality q
3
.

C. Heat Treated Glass: Comply with ASTM C1048, unless otherwise specified. Type and thickness as shown
or specified.
1. Glass for Heat Treating
a. Float, Type I, Class 1, Quality q
3
.
b. Heat Absorbing, Type I, Class 2, Quality q
3
, Style B, color as shown.
2. Sizes and Cutting: Prior to heat treating, cut glass to required sizes as determined by accurate
measurement of openings to be glazed, making allowance for required edge clearances. Cut and
process edges in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations. Do not cut or treat
edges in the field.


3. General: For glass which has been heat-treated horizontally, maintain roller marks running
horizontally in the final installation, wherever possible. For glass which has been heat treated
vertically, locate tong marks along an edge which will be concealed in the glazing system.
a. Overall Bow and Warp Tolerances: Heat treated glass shall be examined by the glass
manufacturer to detect and discard any lights which exceed one half (50%) the
maximum bow and warp tolerances in any direction as listed in ASTM C1048 Table 2.
b. Roll Ripple Tolerances: Where the heat treatment process results in essentially parallel
ripples or waves, the deviation from flatness at any peak (peak to valley deviation) shall
not exceed 0.005 in. or the average rollerwave distortion shall be certified not to exceed
0.05 mm, with a maximum sag at the leading and trailing edge of 0.25 mm. (The more
stringent requirement) A site inspection if required for roller wave and bow tolerances
should be from a minimum distance of 3 meters.
4. Fully Tempered Glass: Comply with ASTM C1048, Kind FT, and meeting the requirements of
ANSI Z97.1. Surface compression shall be 10,000 psi minimum.
5. Heat-Strengthened Glass: Comply with ASTM C1048, Kind HS. Strengthen by manufacturer's
standard heat-treatment process to increase the flexural strength to not less than 2 times the
strength before treatment and having a surface compression stress of 5000 psi +/- 1500 psi.

D. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172, two sheets of g1ass permanently factory laminated under heat and
pressure with an interlayer of 0.060 in. thick clear, translucent, photographically patterned or colored,
plasticized polyvinyl butyl made specifically for laminating glass.
1. Provide type and thickness of glass sheets as shown or specified. Fabricate laminated glass to
produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets in a autoclave utilizing heat plus
pressure.
2. Prior to laminating, cut glass to required sizes and profiles as determined by accurate
measurement of openings to be glazed, making allowance for required edge clearances. Cut and
process edges in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations. Do not cut or treat
edges in the field.

E. Coated Glass: Provide coated glass coating complying with ASTM C1376 and as follows:
1. Sputter-Coated Float Glass: Float glass with metallic-oxide or metallic-nitride coating deposited by
vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any), complying with
requirements specified in glass type schedules.
2. Pyrolytic-Coated Float Glass: Float glass with solar-reflective metallic-oxide coating applied by
pyrolytic deposition process during initial manufacture, complying with requirements specified in
glass type schedules.

F. Patterned Ceramic Enameled Glass: Apply fused opaque ceramic enamel coating in pattern shown by heat
treatment process that heat strengthens the glass to not less than 2 times its flexural strength.
1. Provide type and thickness of glass as shown or specified.
2. Do not cut, nip or treat edges after heat treatment process.
3. Provide patterned ceramic enameled glass from one of the following manufacturer's:
a. Guardian Industries.
b. Viracon.

G. Mirror Glass
1. ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q
1
.
2. Provide silvering, copper backing and protective heat catalyzed paint coating on entire back
surface of mirror.


3. Exposed edges of all mirrors shall have a flat polished (eased) profile. Perform edge treatment
and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes. Do not cut or treat edges in the field.

H. Backpainted Glass Panel Assembly: Perform work in a "clean room" environment to ensure suitable
application conditions. Provide backpainted glass panel assemblies comprised of the following components:
1. Glass: As specified herein. Provide separation between glass and metal in all locations.
2. Paint for Backpainting: Apply paint after glass has been thoroughly cleaned and dust free; utilizing
materials and methods recommended by the paint manufacturer. Apply two (2) coats evenly to all
surfaces.
3. Particleboard Panel Core: AWI Section 200-G-2, either medium or high density classification,
thickness as shown.
a. If fire-retardant treated particleboard is required or shown, provide "Duraflake FR"
(Williamette Industries Inc.) or approved equal Seal surfaces of particleboard as
required to accept glass adhesive and in accordance with the recommendations of the
panel manufacturer.
b. Provide one piece seamless panel core behind each individual backpainted glass panel.
4. Edge Banding: Provide hardwood edge banding for particleboard on all edges whether exposed
or not unless otherwise shown.
5. Glass Adhesive: Provide adhesive setting compounds specially formulated for adhering painted
glass; and compatible with specified paint and sealed particleboard substrates.
6. Perimeter Supports and Edge Trim: Provide perimeter metal edge trims and panel supports for
each backpainted glass panel.
7. Setting Blocks: Provide neoprene or cured silicone setting blocks; hardness and locations as
recommended by glass manufacturer.

8. Panel Clips: Provide heavy duty panel clips in quantity and spacing to sustain loading and prevent
warping and bowing of panels.

2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Silicone Rubber (Sealant Type SE01): ASTM C920, class and use as best suited for the intended purpose;

B. Butyl Glazing Tape Reinforced: A pre-formed, non-sagging, non-oxidizing, non-staining butyl rubber tape
with core reinforcement, one of the following:
1. "Extru-Seal Butyl Rubber Tape" (Pecora Corp.).
2. "No. 166.6 Elastic Butyl Tape" (Presstite Div.).
3. "Pre-Shimmed Tremco 440 Tape" (Tremco).

C. Butyl Glazing Tape: A vulcanized butyl, self-adhesive, non-staining tape, one of the following:
1. "Duribbon 1082" (National Adhesives; National Starch & Chemical Corp.).
2. "606 Architectural Sealant Tape" (Protective Treatments, Inc.).

D. Glazing Gaskets: Continuous neoprene or polyvinyl chloride extrusions, of 50 Shore A durometer hardness
plus or minus 5

E. Glazing Gaskets


1. Solid Gaskets: Black, continuous extruded neoprene with a Shore A durometer hardness and
profile as required to provide pressure adequate to fulfill the overall performance requirements
specified and complying with the applicable provisions of ASTM C864.
2. Fully vulcanize gasket corners where compatible with installation procedures.

H. Lock-Strip Gaskets: ASTM C542, neoprene extrusions. Frames fabricated with injection molded corners.
Provide with separate lock (zipper) strips, Shore A durometer: 10 points harder than gasket body.

I. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864; neoprene blocks, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.

J. Face Shims: ASTM C864; neoprene blocks, 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness, self-adhesive on one
face only.

K. Edge Blocks: ASTM C864; neoprene blocks, 60 to 70 Shore A durometer hardness.

L. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, manufactured specifically for setting mirrors by spot
application, certified as compatible with back of mirror coating by organic protective coating manufacturer,
scheduled mirror substrate and approved by mirror manufacturer. Comply with mirror mastic manufacturer's
written instructions for size, number and pattern of mastic spots required for installation. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Gunther Mirror Mastics.
2. Palmer Products Corporation.
3. Glazers Choice, Inc.

M. Mirror Edge Sealer: A mirror edge sealer manufactured specifically for sealing mirror edges and that has
proven to be compatible with mirror coating and approved by mirrored glass manufacturer for use in
protecting against silver deterioration at mirror edges; Provide one of the following:
1. "Seal-Kwik" (C. Gunther Co.).
2. "No. 209 Mirror Edge Sealant" (Sprayway, Inc.).

N. Stainless Steel Angle Mirror Support and Frame: AISI Type 302 or 304; hot or cold rolled angle; 1 in. x 1 in.
x 1/8 in. thick; polish edge of exposed portion of angle to bright finish.

O. Joint Cleaner, Primer and Sealer: The products recommended by the manufacturer. Never apply or allow
primers to come into contact with glass surfaces.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances
complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated.

B. Cutting: Obtain sizes from shop drawings or by field measurement. Cut glass to fit each opening with edge
clearances and bite on glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. Do not nip glass edges. Factory cut
heavy heat absorbing glass and heavy float glass. Edges may be wheel cut or sawed and seamed at
manufacturer's option. For glass to be cut at site, provide glass larger than required so as to obtain, clean-
cut edges without seaming or nipping. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade glass after heat-tempering.

C. Edgework for Butt Glazing: Where glass is to be butt joined with silicone sealant, provide flat ground butting
glass edges having a satin finished flat edge with eased arrise corners.

D. Edgework for Exposed Edges: Where edges of glass are to be exposed in the finish work, provide ground
and polished edges and slightly eased arrises and eased corners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION



A. Prior to the start of the Work, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the Project site to review material
selections, methods and sequence of installation, glazing procedures standard of workmanship, quality
control requirements, evaluation of suitability of specified compounds and sealants for anticipated weather
conditions, coordination with other trades, and other pertinent topics related to the Work. The meeting shall
include the Engineer, the Contractor, the Contractor's project superintendent, subcontractor's
superintendent, primary component materials suppliers, and any other subcontractors whose work requires
coordination with this Work.

3.02 CONDITION OF SURFACE

A. Examine substrates, adjoining construction and conditions under which the Work is to be installed. Do not
proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels, stops and rabbets to receive glazing materials of obstructions and deleterious
substances which might impair the work. Remove protective coatings which might interfere with bond of
sealants. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately before
application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes.

B. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds, except where manufacturer provides written reports of tests
conducted by an independent testing agency which demonstrates that primer or sealer is not required for the
conditions of use and the substrates involved. When priming, comply with manufacturer's
recommendations.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Standards: Unless otherwise shown or specified, comply with recommendations and requirements of the
GANA "Glazing Sealing Systems Manual" and "Glazing Manual". For the installation of tinted or spandrel
glass comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install any pieces which are improperly
sized or have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or other evidence of damage. Remove labels from
glass immediately after installation.

C. Locate setting blocks at sill one-quarter of the width in from each end of the glass, unless otherwise
recommended by the glass manufacturer. Use blocks of sized 1/8 in. wider than the glass thickness and
1/16 in. to 1/8 in. less than the width of the glazing channel to support the glass and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Provide face shims for all large glass sizes to separate glass from stops, except where continuous glazing
gaskets or felts are provided. Locate face shims opposite each other and no farther than 24 in. apart and no
closer than 12 in. to a corner. Make bite of spacer on glass a nominal 3 in. or greater.

E. Provide edge blocks, located in glazing rebate as recommended by the glass manufacturer, to insure
against displacement of the glass and against metal to glass contact within the rebate and to ensure
permanently adequate bite of the glass within the glazing system.

F. Set glass in a manner which produces greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance. Where safety
glazing is scheduled or required, install glass after detaching removable safety glazing label unless
otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. If local authorities require permanent labeling, install
glass with permanent safety glazing label in concealed or inconspicuous locations subject to selection by the
Engineer.

G. Do not use 2 different glazing materials in the same joint system unless the manufacturer of each material
has stated in writing that his material is fully compatible with the other material.


H. Use suitable protection to limit coverage of glazing materials to the surfaces intended for sealants.

I. Miter-cut and seal joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to provide a
continuous watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations where joints are required. Vulcanize
corner joints where compatible with installation procedure. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into
one side of channel to pressurize gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot
walk out when installation is subjected to movement. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass
manufacturers for installing glass lights.

J. Butt or lap ends of tapes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

K. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing materials to provide a slight wash away from the glass. Install exposed
tapes and gaskets with a slight protrusion above stops in the final compressed condition.

L. Lock Strip Gaskets: Comply with ASTM C716 and gasket manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Miter-cut corners of loose lock-strips. Cut lock-strips slightly longer to provide
permanent compression at joints. Use special tool to install and remove filler strips; lubricate in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.

M. Mirror Glazing
1. Adhesive Mounting of Mirrors
a. Identify and examine surfaces over which mirror is to be mounted. Comply with
manufacturer's printed installation directions for preparation of mounting surfaces
including coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where
applicable or priming and sealing substrate as recommended.
b. Paint back of mirror with an additional coat of moisture-resistant paint of the type
recommended by the mirror manufacturer and compatible with mirror mastic and
substrate. Apply mirror edge sealer to all edges of mirror in accordance with
manufacturers instructions and recommendations.
c. Provide 2 in. thick fire-retardant treated plywood mirror backerboards as specified in
Section "Rough Carpentry". Provide 1 in. x 1 in. x 1/8 in. thick stainless steel angle
frame with mitered corners and bright polished finished exposed edges. Secure angle
frame to wall construction with fastening devices appropriate for substrates encountered
spaced 16 in. o.c. maximum. Secure plywood backerboard to wall using fastening
devices appropriate for substrates encountered spaced 12 in. o.c. maximum at perimeter
2 in. from corners and three rows of 3 fasteners each in the backerboard field.
Countersink fasteners flush with plywood surface. Butt adjacent panels without lapping.
Prepare panels for priming as required by manufacturer of mirror mastic.
d. Support mirror with stainless steel satin finished angle frame with bottom support
designed to withstand mirror weight. Provide 1/8 in. thick by 4 in. long x 3 in wide setting
blocks at quarter points. Apply mirror mastic in accordance with mastic manufacturer's
instructions utilizing mastic manufacturer's special tool to assure complete and accurate
coverage. Do not cover more than 25% of mirror back unless otherwise recommended
by the mastic manufacture. Provide neoprene shims, double face tape or other type
compatible material to allow for minimum clearances for mastic. Apply mirror to
substrate so that areas not covered with mastic will remain open for ventilation, with
minimum clearance from substrate as recommended by mastic manufacturer. Provide
temporary rigid support until adhesive has set.
e. Fill 1/8 in. wide joint between stainless steel angle and face of mirror with continuous
backer rod and clear silicone sealant (Sealant Type 1).
2. Channel Glazing of Mirrors: Use interior glazing system specified herein and comply with mirror
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.


N. Glass To Glass Glazing: Apply silicone rubber sealant (Type 2) to abutting surfaces of glass in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.

O. Entrance Glass/Visual Distraction Marks: Paint window and door distraction markings on glass surfaces, in
colors, uniform patterns and spacings shown and as required to comply with the requirements specified in
Paragraph "Standards". Provide one of the following methods:
1. Field paint glass utilizing glass preparation methods and paints as recommended by paint
manufacturer, to provide uniform characters with sharp edges and tightly registered patterns, free
from blemishes or other defects which, in the Engineer's opinion, will impair the finished work.
2. Provide decals (specifically manufactured for application to glass) applied to the glass to provide
uniform characters with sharp edges and tightly registered patterns, free from blemishes or other
defects which, in the Engineer's opinion, will impair the finished work.


A. Clean excess sealant or compound from glass and framing members immediately after application using
solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.

B. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation. Use streamers or ribbons suitably attached to
framing and held free of the glass. Do not apply warning markings directly to the glass. Do not permit
edges of glass to be exposed to standing water.

C. Protect glass and glazing materials during the construction period so that they will be without any indication
of damage or deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner. Cover glass to protect it from activities
that might abrade the surfaces.

D. Replace glass during the construction period which is broken, cracked, chipped or damaged in any way and
from any source, including weather, vandalism or accidents.

E. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction so that it will not become stained and will
not contribute to the deterioration of glazing materials. Conduct a systematic inspection program not less
than once a month for glass. Clean to meet above requirements.

F. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to acceptance by the Owner. Comply with instructions
and recommendations of the glass manufacturer and glazing materials manufacturer for cleaning in each
case.


A. After completion of exterior glazing and nominal curing of sealants and glazing compounds, test for water
leaks. Conduct tests in accordance with "Specifications for Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for Water
Leakage", AAMA Standard 501.2, except perform tests on not less than 5% of all exterior lights. Correct any
deficiencies observed as a result of test.

END OF SECTION

LATH AND PLASTER 09200-1
SECTION 09200

LATH AND PLASTER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide lath and Gypsum plaster in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1. Finish painting.
2 Veneer plasters systems.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The machine applied plaster work shall be performed by a firm having 3 years experience in the machine
application of plaster on projects similar in size and scope to this Project.

B. Obtain plaster ingredients, furring and lathing from a single source or manufacturer.


A. Wherever a fire resistance classification is shown involving lath and plaster (3-hr., 2-hr. and similar
designations), provide materials, accessories and application procedures which have been listed by UL or
tested according to ASTM E119 to achieve the rating required.

1.04 STANDARDS

1. ML/SFA "Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring".
2. ASTM C841 "Standard Specification for the Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring".
3. PCA "Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual".
4. ASTM C1063 "Standard Specification for the Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland
Cement-Based Plaster".
5. ASTM C926 "Standard Specification for the Application of Portland Cement Based Plaster".


1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings at full scale of all unusual conditions involving lath and
plaster Work, including expansion and control joints, special hangers, special runners, and details at light
fixtures and ceiling diffusers. Show locations of access panels occurring in plaster Work and details of rated
assemblies, with copies of their respective approvals. Coordinate all components which are specified
elsewhere, which are a part of, or are contiguous, with the system.

B. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings and templates for the location of lath and stucco items that are
to be embedded in or anchored to concrete and masonry.

C. Samples

1. Furnish sample panels for preliminary review of each color and finish not less than 2 ft. square, on
movable frames. Include typical control joint and expansion joint. Sample panels shall be
representative of materials, colors, textures and workmanship for the entire Work. Acceptance will
be for color and texture only.
2. Submit samples of the following:
a. Expansion joint and control joint: 12 in. long.
b. Each type plaster accessory: 12 in. long.

D. Product Data: Submit, for information only, manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for
each type of lath, mesh, channel, hanger, stud, joist, clip, bracket, bead, stop, expansion joint, control joint,
screed and special shape required, including other data as may be required to show compliance with the
Contract Documents.

E. Certification: Submit producer's certification for each type of aggregate and cement specified, evidencing
compliance with requirements.


A. The installed lath and stucco wall system, shall be withstand an inward and outward wind pressure of 10 psf
normal to the plane of the wall, without structural failure, cracking, crazing, permanent distortion or
displacement or other damage. Permanent distortion or displacement is defined as values exceeding 50%
of specified installation tolerances.

B. Deflection of support framing for lath and cement plaster (stucco) system shall be limited to 1/360 of the
span , except as otherwise shown or specified.

C. Design, fabricate and install component parts to provide for expansion and contraction over an ambient
temperature range of 120 deg. F. and a surface temperature range of 180 deg. F. without buckling, sealed
joint failure, undue stress on members or anchors, and other detrimental effects.

D. Design, fabricate and install lath and plaster Work to withstand building movements due to loading
deflections, shrinkage and creep whose values are shown or specified elsewhere.

E. Design Modifications: Make design modifications only as may be necessary to meet performance
requirements and coordinate the Work. Variations in details and materials which do not adversely affect
appearance, durability or strength shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.

1.07 VISUAL MOCK-UP

A. After approval of samples and sample panel(s), provide a visual mock-up of not less than 100 sq. ft. of each
texture and finish, including at least one expansion joint and one control joint, in a location on the building
where directed. Mock-up shall be representative of the finished Work in all respects.


A. Deliver in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade.
Handle and protect lath and plaster materials from damage. Store in a dry, ventilated space, off the ground.

B. Protect materials from contamination and dampness until used. Protect lime putty from sun exposure, and
prevent excessive evaporation when stored.

l.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. General: Comply with the requirements of Paragraph "Standards" and recommendations of the component
manufacturers for environmental conditions before, during and after performing the Work and as follows:
1. Interior Plaster: Do not start lath and plaster Work until the building is enclosed and interior
spaces are ventilated and continuously maintained at a uniform temperature not less than 40 deg.

F nor more than 80 deg. F for not less than one week prior to application. Continuously maintain
temperature one week after the plaster Work is complete. Provide ventilation to remove the water
in excess of that required for hydration of the plaster, immediately subsequent to its application
and set.
1.10 GUARANTEE

A. Guarantee specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under
other provisions of the Contract Documents and are in addition to and run concurrent with other guarantees

B. Guarantee: Provide a written guarantee, directly to the Owner, for a period of five years, guarantee signed
by the Contractor, subcontractor and manufacturer, stating that the bonding agent will not fail to provide a
complete bond between the plaster and the substrate. Upon notification of such defect, within the guarantee
period, make the necessary repairs at the convenience of the Owner with out any extra cost.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL MATERIALS

A. Non-Load Bearing Studs and Runners: ASTM C645 roll formed steel, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A525 Designation G60; type and size as shown. Minimum 25 ga. unless heavier gauge is shown or
recommended by the manufacturer for the wall system indicated.

B. Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Joists, Runners, Bracing and/or Bridging: ASTM C955;
hot dipped galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A446, Grade A for 20 ga. and below (33,000 psi
yield point), Grade B for 18 ga. to 20 ga. (37,000 psi yield point) and Grade D for 16 ga. and greater (50,000
psi yield point), Coating Designation G60.

C. Joists Hangers, Clip Angles, Flat Straps, Web Stiffeners, Hole Reinforcement Plates, and Joist End Clips:
ASTM C955; hot dipped galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A446, Grade A for 20 ga. and below
(33,000 psi yield point), Grade B for 18 ga. to 20 ga. (37,000 psi yield point) and Grade D for 16 ga. and
greater (50,000 psi yield point), Coating Designation G60.

D. Furring and Runner Channels: Either hot-rolled or cold-rolled steel, of the sizes shown or required by Code
or, if none are shown, of the following minimum weights per thousand lineal ft.:

SIZE, IN. HOT-ROLLED, LB. COLD-ROLLED, LB

300 300
1 410 ---
1-2 1120 475
2 1260 590

E. Hangers for Support of Runner Channels: Galvanized soft steel wire not less than 8 ga., or 3 in. round steel
pencil rods, or flat iron or soft steel straps, 3/16 in. x 1 in. Use wire hangers of monel metal not less than
0.125 in. diameter in high humidity spaces.

F. Hat Furring Channels: ASTM C645, roll-formed galvanized steel, flanged channel type, 7/8 in. deep; for wall
furring and ceiling attachment.

G. Primary Suspension Members for Ceilings
1. General: Size and provide ceiling support components to comply with ASTM C1063 for portland
cement installation and ASTM C841 for gypsum plaster installation.
2. Wire Hanger Inserts: No. 6 galvanized wire loop and 26 ga. galvanized shell or 14 ga. galvanized
steel strap with 5/16 in. hole.

3. Strap Iron Hanger Inserts: Mild steel flats, 1 in. x 3/16 in. with 7/16 in. holes punched on center
line and lower ends, designed to develop the full strength of hangers.
4. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts or other devices applicable to the indicated
method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers. Provide anchorage devices sized for three (3)
times the calculated load supported.
5. Hangers: Galvanized, one of the following:
a. 3/16 in. x 1 in. steel straps.
b. 3 in. diameter steel rods.
c. ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper 9 ga. soft steel wire.
6. Carrying Channels: ASTM C754, cold rolled steel channels, 1-2 in., 475 lbs. per 1000 linear ft.
7. Clips: Provide support clips, clamps, fasteners, and other attachment devices as required to
connect components and transfer imposed loads of primary suspension system.

H. Pencil Rods: Hot-rolled of circular cross-section 3 in. or 3/8 in. diameter as required for the respective
conditions of use.

I. Accessories
1. Interior Use: Provide accessories complying with ASTM C841 and fabricated from zinc coated
(galvanized) steel for interior use. Comply with ASTM C841, Paragraph 6.6 for thickness of
accessories for interior use.
2. General: Accessories shall have perforated or expanded flanges or clips shaped so as to permit
complete embedment in the plaster, to provide means for accurate alignment and secure
attachment to the substrate. Coordinate depth of accessory with thickness of plaster.
a. Corner Beads: Formed with a bead not exceeding 3/16 in. with expanded metal flanges
at least 2-2 in. wide; ground thickness appropriate to installation.
b. Casing and Stop Beads: Formed with 3 in. min. expanded metal wing; ground thickness
appropriate to installation.
c. Expansion and Control Joint: Double "V" type, formed with expanded metal flanges at
least 1-3 in. wide; ground thickness appropriate to installation.
d. Special Stops: Formed as detailed. Tack weld a continuous 20 ga. sheet metal closure
on backside of stop where plaster abuts other surfaces. At expansion joints, where
shown, tack weld a continuous 20 ga. backplate to one casing bead, leaving opposite
bead free to slide on backplate; ground thickness appropriate to installation.
e. Corner Reinforcement: Smooth edge strips of expanded metal lath; Cornerite, 6 in.
wide, bent to form 3 in. wings for internal plaster angles.
f. Striplath: Smooth edge flat strips of expanded metal lath not less than 4 in. wide for
reinforcing joints.
g. Screeds: Formed with expanded metal wings not less than 2 in. wide.
h. Sheet Metal Grounds: 20 ga. galvanized sheet metal; where shown or required for
attachment of other work; size as required for each individual item.

J. Fastenings
1. Tie Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1, soft tempered galvanized steel wire, not less than 16 ga. for tying
furring channels to runner channels or other supports and not less than 18 ga. for tying lathing to
furring channels.
2. Furring Brackets: 20 ga. galvanized steel with serrated edges, adjustable from 3 in. to 2-3 in.
3. Attachment Clips: Galvanized sheet metal devices complying with Paragraph "Standards" and as
recommended by lath manufacturer specially designed for attachment of lath to framing members
and lath to lath.

4. Steel Screws: Corrosion resistant, self-drilling and self-tapping; ASTM C1002, Type G, Type S, or
Type W screws suitable for fastening into steel not greater than 20 ga. and ASTM C954 for
fastening into steel of 20 ga. to 14 ga. thickness.
5. Lathing Nails: Hardened, zinc-coated masonry nails, barbed roofing nails, offset-head or hook-
head lath nails; lengths as required for proper anchorage.

2.02 LATHING MATERIALS

A. Recommended brand for all metal accessories related to plastering works should be CATNIC U.K. or
equivalent approved by Engineer.

B. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C847, expanded metal lath fabricated from galvanized steel sheet. Spray
paint end bundles in different colors to denote various weight and types.
1. Diamond Mesh: Flat expanded metal lath weighing not less than 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd.
2. Self-Furring Diamond Mesh: Flat expanded metal lath with indentations to hold lath 3 in. from wall
surface or from face of steel, weighing not less than 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd.
a. 1/8 in. Flat Rib Lath: weighing not less than 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd.
b. 3/8 in. Rib Lath: weighing not less than 4.0 lbs. per sq. yd.
c. : in. Rib Lath: weighing not less than 5.4 lbs. per sq. yd.

2.03 PLASTER MATERIALS AND MIXES

A. Cement Plaster and Stucco
1. Aggregates: ASTM C897; natural sand, except use graded silica sand passing a 0 mesh screen.
2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206, Type S.
3. Fiber: Alkaline resistant glass fibers, 2 in. long, free from grease, oil, dirt and other impurities or
contaminates.
4. White Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I, II or Type III where shown or specified or equal
approved.
5. Bonding Agent (for Portland Cement Plaster and Portland Cement Stucco): ASTM C932; One of
the following:
a. "Weldcrete" (Larsen Products Corp.)
b. "Daraweld-C" (W.R. Grace & Co.)
c. Or equal approved.


A. Water: Potable and free from deleterious materials which would impair the Work.

B. Acoustical Sealant: "USG Acoustical Sealant" (United States Gypsum Co.).

C. Acoustical Insulation (Partitions): "Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Blanket" (United States Gypsum Co.), 1-
2 in. thick unless otherwise shown.

D. Acoustical Insulation (Ceilings): "Thermafiber Regular Blanket" (United States Gypsum Co.), 2-5/8 in. thick
unless otherwise shown.

2.05 METAL FABRICATION

A. Galvanize all hangers, furring channels and metal lath. Form accessories of white metal (zinc alloy).

B. Metal lath and lathing accessories which are specified to be galvanized, shall be galvanized after fabrication.
Galvanize inserts, hangers and channels by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A123.


C. All items not galvanized shall be given 1 coat of rust-inhibitive primer after fabrication.

D. All weights listed or shown are weights of the material before it is galvanized or painted.

2.06 MIXES

A. Proportions: All mixes are by volume unless otherwise specified.

B. Lime Putty: Make from hydrated lime; machine-mix with water to putty form; allow to stand at least 15
minutes before using. Weight not less than 83 pcf.

C. Cement Plaster (Stucco) Basecoats and Finish Coats: ASTM C926. Mix proportions may be varied to meet
local conditions and achieve the desired finish within the limits specified in cited standards and subject to
acceptance by the Engineer.


2.07 PLASTER TYPES

A. Plaster Type PLA-10: Cementitious Plaster painted as selected by Engineer.

B. Plaster Type PLA-11 : Gypsum plaster painted as selected by Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Prior to the start of the Work, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the Project site to review material
selections, methods and sequence of installation, special details and conditions, standard of workmanship,
quality control requirements, job organization, coordination with other trades, and other pertinent topics
related to the Work. The meeting shall include the Engineer, the Contractor's project superintendent,
subcontractor's superintendent, manufacturer's representative, primary component materials suppliers, and
any other subcontractors whose work requires coordination with this Work.


A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and conditions under which the Work is to be installed. Do
not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.03 PLASTER SUBSTRATE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Verify dimensions of supporting structure by field measurements so that the Work will be accurately
designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure. Tolerances for supporting structure are specified in other
Sections.

B. Coordinate Work with the work of other Sections and provide items to be placed during the installation of
other work at the proper time to avoid delays. Place such items, including inserts and anchors, accurately in
relation to the final location of components. Coordinate access hatches, plaster rings and other items
occurring in lathed surfaces and specified in other Sections with the work of this Section.

C. Erect all components in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations and
referenced standards. Provide the following construction tolerances:

1. Variation from plumb or level in
any exposed line or surface: +/- 1/8 in. in 10 ft. or 3mm in 3 meters

2. Variation between planes of
Abutting edges or ends: +/- 1/16 in. or 1.5mm in 3 meters.

D. Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure, isolate the Work from structural movement
sufficiently to prevent transfer of loading into the Work from the building structure. Install slip type joints to
absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. Provide slip gaskets to ensure freedom of movement. Do
not over tighten fasteners; where movement is required, strike threads to prevent backing off of nuts. Frame
both sides of control and expansion joints independently, and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or
other accessories.

E. Provide supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the Work and for support of fixtures,
equipment, heavy trim and similar work.

F. Dimensions shown on Drawings are based on an assumed design temperature of 70 deg. F. Fabrication
and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature at the time of the respective
operations.

G. Paint cut and abraded surfaces of rust-inhibitive treated and galvanized metal materials with a coat of an
approved rust-inhibitive primer at the project site, before use.

3.04 STEEL STUD INSTALLATION

A. General: Install components for steel stud partition support system to comply with the written instructions
and recommendations of the steel stud manufacturer and applications indicated and with the following
reference standards:
1. For installation of steel studs, furring and accessories for cement plaster and/or stucco application,
use roll formed type steel studs and comply with ASTM C1063.
2. For installation of steel studs and related accessories (including erection tolerances) for load-
bearing (axial and transverse) system application comply with ASTM C1007.

B. Space metal studs a maximum of 16 in. o.c. unless otherwise shown, noted or required by referenced
standard. Align runner tracks accurately to the partition layout at both floor and ceiling. Secure runner
channels to the floor with anchors 24 in. o.c., unless otherwise shown. When construction above is
concrete, fasten ceiling track same as floor track. Where partition extends to a suspended ceiling, wire-tie
stud track to runner channels or furring channels, unless otherwise shown.

C. Place a stud 2 in. from abutting partitions, internal corners, partition terminals, studs inserted into metal
frames and other similar locations. Install two studs on each side of metal door frames, accurately centered,
and attached to the anchor clips securely with double strand 18 ga. tie wire.

D. Provide runner tracks continuously at the head and sill of all framed openings in partitions. Provide all stud
shoes, wire clips and anchorage assemblies recommended by the manufacturer of steel studs for a
complete stud installation. Coordinate work with ceiling work. Stiffen partitions over 10 ft. high with 1-2 in.
channel stiffeners, permanently wired on the inside of the partition running continuously, not to exceed 6 ft.
o.c. spacing. Where door frames do not extend to ceiling, place one : in. channel brace no more than 6 in.
above frame, extended at least two full stud spaces behind each side of the frame and securely wire-tied or
welded to the flange of each stud.

E. Provide load bearing steel joists in the metal stud framed walls as necessary to frame the openings
indicated. Secure joists to studs using pre-manufactured steel brackets or joist hangers of sufficient size
and strength or utilize custom engineered connections as required to sustain the imposed loads.

3.05 FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Provide metal furring where shown and as specified and complying with referenced standards, to provide a
suitable base for plastering. Include all steel shapes, clips, wire and other attachments necessary to bring
finished surface to lines shown. Secure furring to supporting construction with furring brackets.

B. Install furring devices as required providing clearance for forming plaster keys. Stagger end laps.

3.06 SUSPENDED CEILINGS SUPPORTS INSTALLATION

A. Provide ceiling support components complying with referenced standards and manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations.

B. Provide hangers and inserts necessary to support suspended ceilings below concrete slab before concrete
is poured and in time to avoid delay in work. Give particular attention to the correct location and alignment
of hangers and inserts. Provide hangers of ample length. Secure hangers without inserts to steel
reinforcement or embed hangers in the concrete so as to develop full strength. Inserts shall develop full the
strength of hangers attached to them.

C. Locate hangers not less than 6 mm. from each end and spaced 60cm maximum along each runner channel.
Coordinate placement of hangers, runner channels, and furring channels with the location of electrical
fixtures, ceiling diffusers, grilles, access panels, sprinkler heads, and other items occurring in or on the

ceiling. Provide a trapeze framework or splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset
horizontal force by bracing or other approved methods.

D. Where ceilings are suspended below ductwork, piping or other building elements which are not suitable for
ceiling attachment due to strength limitations, or restrictions of authorities having jurisdiction,
provide additional supplemental framing, supports and related work as required to span beneath
these elements from suitable support locations.

E. Provide brass wedges and other materials as required to make metal lathing and furring installation rigid.
Frame openings in lathed surfaces with furring strips so that recessed items finish flush, unless otherwise
shown.
F. Approved supplier for all hangers is Hiliti or equal approved by the engineer.

3.07 LATHING

A. Install lath in accordance with the following referenced standards:
1. For installation of metal lath, furring and accessories for cement plaster and/or stucco application
comply with ASTM C1063.

B. Install continuous strip lath at junction of dissimilar surfaces to be plastered. At corners of openings
exceeding 2 sq. ft. in area, install strips of metal lath 12 in. wide x 24 in. long at a 45 deg. angle. Attach
stucco mesh to solid surfaces with nails spaced 6 in. apart.

C. Frame both sides of control and expansion joints independently and do not bridge joints with furring, lathing
or accessories. Shim metal lath away from metal studs to provide for proper bonding of the plaster to the
lath.

3.08 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Provide corner beads on all external corners and in single lengths where the length of a corner or jamb does
not exceed the manufacturer's standard lengths. Miter or cope at corners, and fasten securely with tie wire,
or lathing nails spaced not more than 8 in. staggered. Provide corner reinforcement at all internal corners.
Provide strip lath at changes in plaster base material.

B. Provide casing beads where shown and where plastering terminates and is not covered by other finish.
Provide sheet metal closures at reveals. Set the beads level, plumb and true to line. Align joints with
concealed splice or tie plates. Where the structural backing is concrete or masonry, secure the beads with
hardened galvanized nails or drive screws driven into fiber plugs set in masonry or by other approved
methods. Space fastenings not more than 8 in. apart.

C. Expansion and Control Joints: Install expansion and control joints at positions shown and as required by
referenced standards. Where joints are not shown but are required, submit locations for Engineer's review.
In general locate expansion and control joints as follows:
1. Where expansion or control joints occur in floor, ceiling or wall construction supporting the lath and
plaster system.
2. Where lath and plaster abuts a structural element other than the floor, or abuts dissimilar
construction or the construction changes within the plane of the system.
3. In Portland cement based plaster systems, install control/expansion joints so that no area exceeds
100 sq. ft. The distance between control joints shall not exceed 10 ft. in either direction.

D. Do not locate expansion or control joints within 8 in. from corners or openings except where joints are shown
at jamb lines or where openings occur adjacent to exterior or interior angles of an area. At door frames,
extend control joints upward from both jamb corners. Terminate channels and metal lath on each side of
joint. Secure to metal lath with tie wire.

3.09 FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION

A. Where Drawings show fireproofing of steel columns or steel beams, apply lath secured to columns or beams
as required by the manufacturer to achieve fire ratings specified.

B. Provide metal furring and lathing and necessary spacers, corner beads, metal lath and other materials to
achieve final plaster thickness over structural members requiring fireproofing, complying with the appropriate
class and hourly rated designs detailed and listed in the Building Materials List by UL.

C. Where fire rated partitions are secured directly to the underside of fluted metal decking, provide galvanized
sheet metal closures to prevent displacement of fire stopping material.

3.10 PREPARATION FOR APPLICATION OF PLASTER

A. Protect all fixtures, frames, access panels, inserts and other contiguous work from rusting, soiling, clogging
or any type damage due to plastering operations.

B. For surface preparation and conditioning of surfaces for application of cement plaster and stucco, comply
with ASTM C926 and recommendations of the PCA.

C. Prepare monolithic surfaces for bonded base coats for application of cement plaster and stucco in
compliance with the referenced standards.

3.11 PLASTER APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. The term "gypsum plaster" on the Drawings means gypsum based plaster with a float finish unless otherwise
noted. Apply 2-coats work on all bases and thickness as required.

B. Where casing beads or plaster stops do not occur at juncture of plaster and hollow metal frames or other
built in metal items, finish with a vee groove. Where a finish coat is not required, as behind built-in cabinets,
furnishings and fixed equipment, finish brown coat to a true, even surface, with angles plumb and square.

C. Prior to lathing, grout hollow metal frames, bases and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base
coat material. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire resistance ratings, grout 6 in.
lengths at each anchorage.

D. Mixing
1. Use mechanical mixers for mixing plaster except where hand mixing of small batches is
acceptable. Do not use frozen, caked, or lumped material. Clean mechanical mixers, mixing
boxes and tools after mixing each batch; keep free of plaster from previous mixes. Thoroughly mix
plaster with proper amount of water until uniform in color and consistency. Re-tempering not
permitted; discard plaster which has begun to stiffen. Provide waterproof protection under mixer.
2. Machine Applied Plaster: Determine proper consistency by slump test as follows: Take slump test
samples from nozzle of plastering machine hose using a 2 in. x 4 in. x 6 in. slump cone. Samples
will be taken at random as often as may be required and without prior notice.
a. Gypsum plaster or Stucco: Maximum 2-2 in. slump.

E. Method of Application: By hand or machine application. Limit machine application to base-coats, except
where machine texture finish is specified.

F. Thickness of Plaster
1. Gypsum plaster and Portland Cement Stucco: Total thickness 1 in. minimum; and maximum as
required by layers maximum in thick and additional mesh, Comply with ASTM C926 Table 4 for
all applications not otherwise shown or specified.

G. Application of Gypsum plaster and Stucco Plaster
1. Apply gypsum plaster and stucco plaster base-coats and finish coats complying with ASTM C926
with the following type finish coat:
a. Smooth Trowel Finish

H. Application of Bonding Agent: Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
and recommendations and the referenced standards.


A. Plaster Sampling: Samples may be taken from work in place at any time. Areas represented by samples
which show over-sanding or wrong aggregate proportion will be rejected.

3.13 PATCHING

A. Work containing cracks, blisters, pits, checks, or discoloration will not be accepted. Remove such work,
including rejected work, and replace with new. Patching of defective work permitted only when approved.

B. Perform cutting, patching, repairing and pointing-up operations neatly and thoroughly. Repair the cracks
and indented surfaces by moistening the plaster and filling with new material, troweled or tamped flush with
adjoining surfaces. Point-up and finish surfaces around fixtures, outlet boxes, piping, fittings, tile and other
work flush with adjacent plaster. Where new plaster adjoins plaster which has been installed more than 48
hours, cut existing plaster at an angle of approximately 45 deg. with the surface before installing new plaster.


A. Make provisions to minimize the spattering of plaster on other work. Promptly clean windows and other
surfaces which have been soiled by the Work of this Section.

B. Protect plaster from the weather, freezing, premature drying, marking, dirt, dust, marring or other damage
throughout the construction period so that it will be without any indication of damage at the time of
acceptance by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

ARTISAN PLASTER 09210-1
SECTION09210

ARTISAN PLASTER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide artisan plaster in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1. Section "Access Doors".
2. Section "Veneer Plaster" for gypsum veneer plaster, plaster base, veneer plaster, and metal
framing systems.


A. Fire Resistance Ratings: Where artisan plaster systems with fire resistance ratings are indicated, provide
materials and installations identical to those of applicable assemblies tested per ASTM E119 by fire testing
laboratories acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide artisan plaster for fire resistance rated systems that has same aggregate as specified for
similar non-rated work, unless specified aggregate has not been tested by accepted fire testing
laboratories.

B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of system components for artisan plaster work with
other work supported by or penetrating through assemblies.

C. The artisan plaster work shall be performed by a firm having a minimum of 10 years experience in the
application of artisan plaster on projects similar in size and scope to this Project.

D. Obtain artisan plaster ingredients, furring and lathing from a single source or manufacturer.

E. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Prior to installation of artisan plaster work, fabricate panels for each type of
finish and application required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects of application as well as qualities of materials and erection. Build mock-ups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work.
1. Locate mock-ups on site in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed.
2. Erect 4 ft. square by full thickness mock-up using materials, including lath and support system,
indicated for final work.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects including color, texture, and workmanship to
be expected in completed work.
4. Obtain acceptance of mock-ups before start of plaster work.
5. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging completed plaster work.

1.03 STANDARDS

1. ML/SFA "Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring".
2. ASTM C841 "Standard Specification for the Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring".
3. ASTM C842 "Standard Specification for the Application of Interior Gypsum Plaster".


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings at full scale of all unusual conditions involving artisan
plaster Work, including expansion and control joints, special hangers, and other work. Show details of rated
assemblies, with copies of their respective approvals. Coordinate all components which are specified
elsewhere, which are a part of, or are contiguous, with the system. Submit the following:
1. Details of all unusual conditions in connection with veneer plaster systems construction.
2. Proposed locations of control joints that are required but not shown.
3. Locations of access doors occurring in veneer plaster systems construction.

B. Product Data: Submit, for information only, manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for
each type of lath, mesh, channel, hanger, stud, joist, clip, bracket, bead, stop, expansion joint, control joint,
screed and special shape required, including other data as may be required to show compliance with the
Contract Documents.

C. Samples
1. Furnish sample panels for preliminary review of each color and finish not less than 2 ft. square, on
movable frames. Include typical control joint. Sample panels shall be representative of materials,
colors, textures and workmanship for the entire Work. Acceptance will be for color and texture
only.
2. Submit samples of the following:
a. Control joint: 12 in. long.
b. Each type plaster accessory: 12 in. long.

D. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings and templates for the location of plaster items that are to be
embedded in or anchored to concrete and masonry.

E. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each component of artisan plaster system,
including all related accessories.

F. Material Certificates: Submit producer's certificate for each kind of plaster aggregate indicated evidencing
that materials comply with requirements.


A. Design and install veneer plaster components so that the completed partition will withstand a minimum
inward and outward pressure of 5 psf normal to the plane of the wall.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of
manufacturer.

B. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight,
surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes. Neatly
stack gypsum lath flat to prevent deformation.


A. General: Comply with the requirements of Paragraph "Standards" and recommendations of the component
manufacturers for environmental conditions before, during and after performing the Work and as follows:
1. Do not start artisan plaster Work until the interior spaces are ventilated and continuously
maintained at a uniform temperature not less than 40 deg. F nor more than 80 deg. F for not less

than one week prior to application. Continuously maintain temperature one week after the artisan
plaster Work is complete. Provide ventilation to remove the water in excess of that required for
hydration of the artisan plaster, immediately subsequent to its application and set.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL MATERIALS

A. Structural Accessories
1. Runners: ASTM C645, roll formed galvanized steel, channel or angle shape, type, size and gage
as recommended by the manufacturer for the wall system indicated.
2. Metal Studs: ASTM C645 roll-formed galvanized steel, size and gage as recommended by the
manufacturer for the wall system and height indicated; "ST" and "CWS" (Unimast Inc.), for interior
partitions, and ceilings.
3. Furring Channels: "Rigid Furring Channel" (Unimast Inc.); ASTM C645, roll-formed galvanized
steel, flanged channel type, 7/8 in. deep; for wall furring and ceiling attachment.
4. Sheet Metal Grounds: 20 gage galvanized sheet metal; where shown or required for attachment
of other work; size as required for each individual item.

B. Fasteners
1. For Plaster Base: Self-drilling cadmium plated bugle head screws.
2. For Studs to Runners: Self-drilling, 3/8 in. pan head screws.

C. Metal Accessories: Products specified herein by proprietary designation are as manufactured by Unimast
Inc. and establish the quality standards required. Equivalent products of other manufacturers will be
considered provided they meet those established standards.
1. Corner Beads: "No. 900" (Unimast Inc.)(for 2 coat applications); galvanized steel. Install in one
piece when manufactured in length required.
2. Metal Trim, Channel Type: " No. 701A" (Unimast Inc.)(for 2 coat applications); galvanized steel.
Install in one piece when manufactured in length required.
3. Metal Trim, Angle Type: "No. 701B" (Unimast Inc.)(for 2 coat applications), galvanized steel.
Install in one piece when manufactured in length required.
4. Control Joints: "No. 093"(Unimast Inc.); roll formed zinc alloy. Install in one piece when
manufactured in length required.

2.02 ARTISAN PLASTER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide artisan plaster consisting of three (3) distinct colors, textures and finishes to match
specimen samples available for inspection at the Engineer's office.

B. Plaster Base: ASTM C588, specifically engineered for use with basecoat and finish plasters of the following
type as required:
1. Non-Fire Rated Plaster Base: 5/8 in. thick, unless otherwise shown, 4 ft. wide. Provide one of the
following:
a. "Dens-Cote Plaster Base" (Georgia-Pacific Corp.)
b. "Kal-Kore Regular" (Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.)
c. "IMPERIAL Gypsum Base" (United States Gypsum Co.)
2. Fire Rated Plaster Base: Type X, as required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly, 5/8 in.
thick, unless otherwise shown, 4 ft. wide. Provide one of the following:
a. "Firestop Dens-Cote Plaster Base" (Georgia-Pacific Corp.)
b. "Kal-Kore Fire-Shield" (Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.)

c. "IMPERIAL Gypsum Base FIRECODE" (United States Gypsum Co.)

C. Gypsum Artisan Plaster
1. Aggregate for Base Coat Artisan plaster: ASTM C35, natural sand
2. Aggregates for Finish Coat Artisan plaster: ASTM C35, natural sand, except gradation as
specified in ASTM C842, Table 1.
3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206, Type S.
4. Gypsum Artisan plaster: ASTM C28 as follows:
a. All Basecoats Not Otherwise Specified: Neat unfibered.
b. Lime Putty Gypsum Trowel Finish: Manufacturer's standard mill mixed gauged interior
finish artisan plaster.
5. Pigments: Mineral pigments of high purity, nonfading and limeproof; colors as selected. Use only
pigments with record of satisfactory performance in gypsum plaster.

D. Artisan Veneer Plaster (Two Coat High-Strength System): Separate ready-mixed veneer plaster
formulations complying with ASTM C587: one for base coat and the other for finish coat, each containing
mill-mixed fine silica sand and having a compressive strength of 3000 psi per ASTM C472. Products
specified herein by proprietary designation are as manufactured by Art-In Construction Ltd. and establish the
quality standards required. Equivalent products of other manufacturers will be considered provided they
meet those established standards.

1. Base Coat: Special Formula AA.I.C. Arriccio IA-107" (Art-In Construction Ltd.)

2. Finish Coat: Special Formula AA.I.C. Intonaco II-16" (Art-In Construction Ltd.)

E. Water: Potable and free from deleterious materials which would impair the Work.

F. Reinforcing Tape: Paper reinforcing tape standard with the manufacturer.

G. Embedding Material for Gypsum Base Joint Tape: As recommended by veneer plaster manufacturer for use
with joint tape material indicated.

H. Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets: "Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets" (Thermafiber Inc.), 1-2 in,
thick unless otherwise shown, specified or required.

I. Plaster Grout: ASTM C28, wood fiber.

J. Acoustical Sealant: One of the following:
1. "SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant" ( United States Gypsum Co.).
2. "AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant" ( Pecora Corp.).
3. Or equal approved.

2.05 ARTISAN PLASTER MIXES

A. Proportions: All mixes are by volume unless otherwise specified.

B. Lime Putty: Make from hydrated lime; machine-mix with water to putty form; allow to stand at least 15
minutes before using. Weight not less than 83 pcf.

C. Gypsum Artisan Plaster Basecoats and Finish Coats: ASTM C842. Mix proportions may be varied to meet
local conditions and achieve the desired finish and color within the limits specified in cited standards and
subject to acceptance by the Engineer. Provide the following:
1. PLA-11: Mfr. No. 3-3450, Off White ; (Art In Construction); Artisan Plaster.

2. PLA-13: MFR. No. WM-325 Moatuaro White /Gold ; (Amiatite America); Encaustic Plaster
3. PLA-13A: MFR No. WM-325 Moatuaro White / Gold: ; (Amiatite America); Encaustic Plaster
Moulding.
4. PLA-14: Mfr. No. 947, Light Blue: (Timeless Plaster); Artisan Plaster.
5. PLA-15: Mfr. No. 6066, Beige ; (Fresco); Smooth White Armourcoat Artisan Plaster.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and conditions under which the Work is to be installed. Do
not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 SUBSTRATE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Verify dimensions of supporting structure by field measurements so that the Work will be accurately
designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure.

B. Coordinate Work with the work of other Sections and provide items to be placed during the installation of
other work at the proper time to avoid delays. Place such items, including inserts and anchors, accurately in
relation to the final location of components. Coordinate access hatches, plaster rings and other items
occurring in lathed surfaces and specified in other Sections with the work of this Section.

C. Erect all components in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations and
referenced standards. Provide the following construction tolerances:
1. Variation from plumb or level in any exposed line or surface: +/- 1/8 in. in 8 ft.
2. Variation between planes of abutting edges or ends: +/- 1/16 in.

D. Where metal support system abuts building structure, isolate the Work from structural movement sufficiently
to prevent transfer of loading into the Work from the building structure. Install slip type joints to absorb
deflections but maintain lateral support. Provide slip gaskets to ensure freedom of movement. Do not
overtighten fasteners; where movement is required, strike threads to prevent backing off of nuts. Frame
both sides of control joints independently, and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or other
accessories.

E. Provide supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the Work and for support of fixtures,
equipment, heavy trim and similar work.

F. Dimensions shown on Drawings are based on an assumed design temperature of 70 deg. F. Fabrication
and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature at the time of the respective
operations.

G. Paint cut and abraded surfaces of rust-inhibitive treated and galvanized metal materials with a coat of an
approved rust-inhibitive primer at the project site, before use.

3.03 STEEL STUD INSTALLATION

A. General: Install components for steel stud partition support system to comply with the written instructions
and recommendations of the steel stud manufacturer and applications indicated, Division 9 Section "Lath
and Plaster" and with the following reference standards:
1. For installation of steel studs, furring and accessories for gypsum artisan plaster application, use
roll formed type steel studs and comply with ASTM C841.

B. Space metal studs a maximum of 16 in. o.c. unless otherwise shown, noted or required by referenced
standard. Align runner tracks accurately to the partition layout at both floor and ceiling. Secure runner
channels to the floor with anchors 24 in. o.c., unless otherwise shown. When construction above is
concrete, fasten ceiling track same as floor track. Where partition extends to a suspended ceiling, wire-tie
stud track to runner channels or furring channels, unless otherwise shown.

C. Place a stud 2 in. from abutting partitions, internal corners, partition terminals, studs inserted into metal
frames and other similar locations. Install two studs on each side of metal door frames, accurately centered,
and attached to the anchor clips securely with double strand 18 ga. tie wire.

D. Provide runner tracks continuously at the head and sill of all framed openings in partitions. Provide all stud
shoes, wire clips and anchorage assemblies recommended by the manufacturer of steel studs for a
complete stud installation. Coordinate work with ceiling work. Stiffen partitions over 10 ft. high with 1-1/2 in.
channel stiffeners, permanently wired on the inside of the partition running continuously, not to exceed 6 ft.
o.c. spacing. Where door frames do not extend to ceiling, place one 3/4 in. channel brace no more than 6
in. above frame, extended at least two full stud spaces behind each side of the frame and securely wire-tied
or welded to the flange of each stud.

3.04 FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Provide metal furring where shown and as specified and complying with referenced standards, to provide a
suitable base for artisan plastering. Include all steel shapes, clips, wire and other attachments necessary to
bring finished surface to lines shown. Secure furring to supporting construction with furring brackets.

B. Install furring devices as required to provide clearance for forming plaster keys. Stagger end laps.

3.05 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Provide corner beads on all external corners and in single lengths where the length of a corner or jamb does
not exceed the manufacturer's standard lengths. Miter or cope at corners, and fasten securely with tie wire,
or lathing nails spaced not more than 8 in. staggered. Provide corner reinforcement at all internal corners.
Provide strip lath at changes in artisan plaster base material.

B. Provide casing beads where shown and where plastering terminates and is not covered by other finish.
Provide sheet metal closures at reveals. Set the beads level, plumb and true to line. Align joints with
concealed splice or tie plates. Space fastenings not more than 8 in. apart.

C. Control Joints: Install expansion and control joints at positions shown and as required by referenced
standards. Where joints are not shown but are required, submit locations for Engineer's review.

D. Do not locate control joints within 8 in. from corners or openings except where joints are shown at jamb lines
or where openings occur adjacent to exterior or interior angles of an area. At door-frames, extend control
joints upward from both jamb corners. Terminate channels and metal lath on each side of joint. Secure to
metal lath with tie wire.

3.06 PREPARATION FOR APPLICATION OF ARTISAN PLASTER

A. Protect all fixtures, frames, access panels, inserts and other contiguous work from rusting, soiling, clogging
or any type damage due to plastering operations.

B. For surface preparation and conditioning of surfaces for application of gypsum artisan plaster, comply with
ASTM C842.

3.07 ARTISAN PLASTER APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. The term "artisan plaster" on the Drawings means gypsum artisan plaster base coats and integrally colored
lime putty trowel finish unless otherwise noted.

B. Where casing beads or plaster stops do not occur at juncture of plaster and hollow metal frames or other
built in metal items, finish with a vee groove. Where a finish coat is not required, as behind built-in cabinets,
furnishings and fixed equipment, finish brown coat to a true, even surface, with angles plumb and square.

C. Prior to lathing, grout hollow metal frames, bases and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base
coat material. Grout 6 in. lengths at each anchorage.

D. Mixing
1. Use mechanical mixers for mixing artisan plaster except where hand mixing of small batches is
acceptable. Do not use frozen, caked, or lumped material. Clean mechanical mixers, mixing

boxes and tools after mixing each batch; keep free of artisan plaster from previous mixes.
Thoroughly mix artisan plaster with proper amount of water until uniform in color and consistency.
Retempering not permitted; discard artisan plaster which has begun to stiffen. Provide waterproof
protection under mixer.
E. Method of Application: By hand or machine application. Limit machine application to basecoats.

F. Thickness of Artisan Plaster: Standard with the manufacturer.

G. Application of Gypsum Artisan Plaster: Apply gypsum artisan plaster basecoats and finish coats complying
with ASTM C842 and with the manufacturers written instructions and recommendations to achieve match
with Engineers sample.

3.08 PATCHING

A. Work containing cracks, blisters, pits, checks, or discoloration will not be accepted. Remove such work,
including rejected work, and replace with new. Patching of defective work permitted only when approved.

B. Perform cutting, patching, repairing and pointing-up operations neatly and thoroughly. Repair the cracks
and indented surfaces by moistening the artisan plaster and filling with new material, troweled or tamped
flush with adjoining surfaces. Point-up and finish surfaces around fixtures, outlet boxes, piping, fittings, tile
and other work flush with adjacent artisan plaster. Where new artisan plaster adjoins artisan plaster which
has been installed more than 48 hours, cut existing artisan plaster at an angle of approximately 45 deg. with
the surface before installing new artisan plaster.


A. Make provisions to minimize the spattering of artisan plaster on other work. Promptly clean windows and
other surfaces that have been soiled by the Work of this Section.

B. Protect artisan plaster from the premature drying, marking, dirt, dust, marring or other damage throughout
the construction period so that it will be without any indication of damage at the time of acceptance by the
Owner.

END OF SECTION

EXTERNAL PLASTER 09220-1
SECTION 09220

EXTERNAL PLASTER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01. SECTION INCLUDES
1. High-performance pre-mixed basecoat for plaster and stucco finishes.
1.02. RELATED SECTIONS
2. Section 03300 - Concrete.
3. Section 04200 - Masonry.
4. Section 04500 - Plywood.
5. Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Light gauge load-bearing metal framing.
6. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing.
7. Section 07260 - Vapor Retarders: Building paper.
8. Section 07920 - Joint Sealants.
9. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames.
10. Section 08200 - Wood and Plastic Doors.
11. Section 09100 - Metal Support Assemblies.
12. Section 09111 - Non-load Bearing Steel Framing: Non-load-bearing metal framing systems.
13. Section 09205 - Furring and Lathing.
14. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Exterior gypsum substrates.
1.03 REFERENCES
1. ASTM C150: Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
2. ASTM C847: Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
3. ASTM C926: Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster.
4. ASTM C933: Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath.
5. ASTM C1032: Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base.
6. ASTM C1063: Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior
Portland Cement-Based Plaster.
7. ICC-ES AC11: Cementitious Exterior Wall Coatings.
8. ESR-1471: ICC Evaluation Service, Inc., ESR-1471.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
9. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
10. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1 Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3 Installation methods.
11. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing
manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
12. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm)
square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Experienced in the manufacturing of pre-sanded materials.
2. Installer Qualifications: Shall provide evidence of qualifications to apply the basecoat.
3. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.
1 Finish areas designated by Architect.
2 Construct mock-up as per construction documents.
3 Show workmanship of finished work.
4 Proceed with work only after the mock-up has been approved.
5 Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.
6 Maintain the mock-up on site and remove at the completion of the project.
4. Regulatory requirements: Conform to applicable code requirements for finish system.
5. Designing and Detailing the Basecoat.
1 Use the manufacturer's installation instructions, published details, and technical information
verifying that all materials meet specification.
2 Sealants and backer rod are required at dissimilar materials and expansion joints within the
basecoat system to provide a watertight system.
3 Minimum slope for all projections shall be 1;2 with a maximum length of 12 inches (305 mm)
unless other manufacturer approved detailing is shown on the construction documents.
6. Substrate Systems:
1 Deflection of the substrate systems shall not exceed L/360.
2 Acceptable substrates are water-resistant core exterior grade gypsum sheathing (ASTM C1396),
Dens-Glass Gold sheathing (ASTM C1177), fiberboard ANSI/AHA A 194-85, exposure 1 (Grade
C-D or better) plywood, expanded polystyrene insulation board ASTM C578, exposure 1 oriented
strand board, cement board (ASTM C1325), poured concrete, and masonry units.
3 Painted and otherwise coated surfaces of brick, unit masonry, stucco and concrete shall be
inspected and prepared as approved by manufacturer's technical department before application.
Paint-on surface consolidates or primers shall not be used to bond base coat to painted surfaces.
4 Provide approval from manufacturer's technical department, in writing, prior to the application, of
other substrates.
5 The applicator shall verify that the proposed substrate is acceptable prior to the base coat
installation.
7. System Joints:
1 Expansion joints in the system are required at building expansion joints, at prefabricated panel
joints, where substrates change and where structural movement is anticipated. Control joints are
required at a minimum of every 13 sq. meters (144 sf) of wall surface area and where specified by
the design professional. The maximum uncontrolled length or width is 18 lf (5.5 lineal meters) and
a maximum uncontrolled length to width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.

1. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Deliver materials in original unopened packages with manufacturer's labels intact.
3. Protect materials during transportation and installation to avoid physical damage.
4. Store materials in cool, dry place protected from freezing.
5. Handle materials and products with appropriate precautions and care per MSDS information
1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1. Do not apply materials in ambient temperatures below 40 degree F (4 degree C). Provide supplementary
heat during installation and drying period when temperatures less than 40 degree F (4 degree C) prevail.
2. Do not apply materials to frozen surfaces.
3. Maintain ambient temperature at or above 40 degree F (4 degree C) during and at least 24 hours after base
coat installation and until dry.
1. Coordinate and schedule installation of the base coat with related work of other sections.
2. Coordinate and schedule installation of trim, flashing, and joint sealers to prevent water infiltration behind the
system.
1.09 WARRANTY
3. Provide a manufacturer's warranty based on the information provided by the applicator or the distributor
following the completion of the system.
4. Comply with manufacturer's project review requirements and notification procedures to assure qualification
for warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
1. Base coats, National Industries or equal approved by the engineer.
Finishing coats, Heritage from Jotun or equal approved by the engineer.
2. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 MATERIALS
1. Base coat shall be cement based material from national industries..
2. The lath is self furred or furred when applied over all substrates except unbacked polystyrene.
3. Expanded Metal Lath should 1100grm/sqm minimum in accordance with section 09200.
4. Laths shall comply with ASTM C933-80 (welded) and ASTM C1032-86
5. Water: Clean and potable without foreign matter.

2.03 ACCESSORIES
1. Trim: Casing bead, corner bead, expansion joint and weep screed accessories shall meet the requirements
of ASTM C1063 and section 09200

2. Casing Bead: Square edge style.
3. Corner Bead: Small radius nose style.
4. Control Joints: W-shaped accordion profile style.
5. Expansion Joints: Two piece type slip-joint design or pair of casing beads spaced for application of backer
rod sealant bead.
6. Fasteners: Comply with ASTM C1063 for type and size of fastener required to rigidly secure materials in
place.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
1. Verify project site conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
2. Walls:
1 Substrates:
1 Acceptable Substrates: exposure 1 or exterior grade plywood sheathing (Grade C-D or
better); exposure 1 OSB; cement boards conforming with (ASTM C1325); poured
concrete/unit masonry; Dens-Glass Gold sheathing (ASTM C1177); or gypsum sheathing
(ASTM C1396).
2 Wall sheathings shall be securely fastened per applicable building code requirements.
3 Examine surfaces to receive system and verify that substrate and adjacent materials are
dry, clean, and sound. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of fins or planar irregularities
greater than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3m).
2 Flashings:
1 Heads, jambs and sills of all openings must be flashed with a minimum 9 inches (230 mm) strip of
secondary moisture barrier prior to window/door, HVAC, installation.
2 Windows and openings shall be flashed according to design and building code requirements.
3 Individual windows that are ganged to make multiple units require continuous head flashing and/or
the joints between the units must be fully sealed.
3 Utilities:
1 The system shall be properly terminated (back-wrapped, sealed, flashed) at all lighting fixtures,
electrical outlets, hose bibs, dryer vents, etc.
3. Decks: Wood decks must be properly flashed prior to system application. The system shall be terminated a
minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) above all decks, patios, sidewalks, etc.
4. Secondary Moisture Barrier: Verify that the secondary moisture barrier is installed over the substrate per
applicable building code requirements, manufacturer's specifications prior to application of the base coat.
5. Roof:
1 Verify that all roof flashings have been installed in accordance with the guidelines set by the
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA).
2 Kick-out Flashing:
1 Kick-out flashing shall be installed where required prior to the application of the base coat.
The kick-out flashing shall be leak-proof and angled (min 100 degrees) to allow for proper
drainage and water diversion.
6. Unsatisfactory conditions shall be reported to the architect and/or owner. Do not proceed until all
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2 MIXING
1. General: No additives are permitted unless specified in product mixing instructions. Close containers when
not in use. Prepare in a container that is clean and free of foreign substances. Do not use a container which has
contained or been cleaned with a petroleum-based product. Use a mixer which is clean and free of foreign
substances. Clean tools with soap and water immediately after use.

2. Base Coat:
1 Place 2/3 of the required potable water into the mixer. Typically one bag requires 1.5 to 2 gallons
(5.5 l to 7.5 l) of water.
2 Add the bag(s) of base coat
3 Mix for 4 to 5 minutes and then let the mixture slake for 3 to 4 minutes.
4 Re-mix to break the initial set add small amounts of water to adjust the consistency.
3 APPLICATION
1. General: Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's. specifications.
2. Apply to approved substrates in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and government code
requirements.
3. Lath:
1 Wire Fabric Lath:
1 Wire or lath shall be applied with minimum 1-1/2 inches (13mm) end and side laps.
2 Furring crimps shall occur at maximum 6 inches (152 mm) intervals each way. Furring
crimps shall provide a minimum 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) clearance from the substrate after installation.
2 Metal Lath:
1 The metal lath shall be applied with minimum 1-1/2 inches (13mm) side and end laps.
2 When end laps occur between supports, lace or wire ties the ends of the sheets with
0.0475 inch (1.2 mm) galvanized annealed steel wire. Refer to ASTM C1063 for additional
information.
3 Corrosion-resistant fasteners for lath attachment shall penetrate a minimum of 1 inch (25
mm) into wood framing.
4 Apply the base coat over steel framing minimum No. 20 gauge, 0.0359 inch (0.912 mm)
thick. Lath is secured to framing using No.8-18, S-12, pan head, self-tapping screws spaced a
maximum of 6 inches (152.4 mm) vertical on center to studs.
4. Trim Junction:
1 When two pieces of trim abut:
1 Set intersection of trim in a minimum 4 inches (100 mm) bed of trim sealant approved by
the manufacturer.
2 Allow 1/8 inch to 3/16 inch (3 to 5 mm) gap between the abutting trim pieces. Do not
overlap trim.
3 Attach the trim in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Working expansion
joints shall be fastened to the structural substrate.
2 When two or more pieces of trim intersect:
1 The vertical trim piece shall be continuous with all horizontal pieces.
2 Miter all corners at intersections of trim.
3 Set intersection of trim in a minimum 4 inches (100 mm) bed of trim sealant approved by
the manufacturer.
4 Allow 3/16 inch (5 mm) gap between the intersecting trim pieces. Do not overlap the
trim.
5 Attach the trim in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Working expansion
joints shall be fastened to the structural substrate.
5. Application Over Open Framing:
1 The weather-resistive membrane is placed over open wood or steel framing spaced a maximum of
24 inches (610 mm) on center. Wall bracing, in accordance with the applicable code, shall be installed.
Square wall corners and parapet corners, metal corner reinforcement is optional. The expanded
polystyrene insulation board shall be placed horizontally with the tongue facing upward and temporarily
held in place with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Self- tapping screws shall be used to temporarily
fasten the board to metal framing. Vertical butt joints shall be staggered a minimum of one framing
space from the adjacent courses and occur directly over framing.
2 The lath shall be applied tightly over the insulation board and shall be fastened through the board
to wood framing with minimum 2 inches (50 mm) long, No. 11 gauge (3.75 mm) shaft diameter, 0.438
inch (11.1 mm) head diameter, galvanized roofing nails or No. 16 gauge (1.59 mm) shaft diameter
galvanized staples spaced a maximum of 6 inches (152 mm) on center with a minimum 1 inch (25.4

mm) penetration into the wood framing. Staples shall have a minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) crown width.
Stapling shall be utilized only in wood species having a minimum specific gravity of 0.42.
3 The lath shall be fastened to all steel framing members, minimum No. 20 gauge, (0.912 mm) thick
using No. 8-18, S-12, pan head, self-tapping screws spaced a maximum of 6 inches (152 mm) on center
to all framing. The screws shall penetrate framing at least 1/4 inch (6 mm). The wire lath shall be applied
with minimum 1 inch (25.4 mm) end laps.
6. Base Coat Application:
1 Total thickness of base coats shall meet code requirements for fire rated construction.
2 Nominal plaster base coat thickness 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch (9.5 to 12 mm) for "one coat" application.
3 Nominal plaster base coat total thickness 3/4 inch to 7/8 inch (19 mm to 22 mm) for scratch and
brown application
1 First coat "scratch": 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch (9.5 to 12 mm).
2 Second coat "brown": 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch (9.5 to 12 mm).
4 Apply cement plaster with sufficient force to develop full adhesion between plaster and the
substrate.
5 Apply the base coat to completely embed lath or wire and to completely fill the thick ness of the
casing, screeds, or expansion/control joint.
6 It is acceptable to use the double back method of application, whereby the first pass of base coat
`covers the lath or wire and the second pass of base coat fills in the casing, screed, or control/expansion
joints.
7 Once the base coat has been applied to the required thickness, a rod should be used to level the
base coat with screeds, to provide a true, flat plane. Follow this by wood floating or darbying the surface.
Fill all voids and dress surface for the finish coat.
8 Damp cure for at least 48 hours by lightly and evenly fogging the surface with water at least twice
a day. Direct sunlight, hot temperatures, low humidity and wind shall require additional fogging as
necessary.
9 Allow base coat to cure a minimum of 6 days prior to application of EPS insulation board shapes
or primer and finish.
4 CLEANING
1. Clean material from adjacent surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Remove surplus material and debris, including field sample, from site.
5 PROTECTION
1. Protect base coat from rain, snow and frost for 48 to 72 hours following application.
2. Protect all dissimilar materials from the finished base coat.

END OF SECTION

GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM 09225-1
SECTION 09225

GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide glass fiber reinforced gypsum (GFRG) in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1. Painting
2. Gypsum drywall.


A. Fabricator: Provide glass fiber reinforced gypsum work complete with all required accessories as produced
by a single manufacturer for the entire project.

B. Installer: The glass fiber reinforced gypsum work shall be performed by a firm having 5 years experience in
the installation of similar materials to those specified herein on projects comparable to this Project. This firm
shall have the approval of the glass fiber reinforced gypsum manufacturer.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for GFRG units. Show typical details of all conditions at large scale
including profiles, thicknesses, finishes, ornamentation, anchorage details, cutouts for sprinklers, diffusers,
grilles, speakers, and lighting fixtures and interface with contiguous construction. Indicate attachment
methods, embedded supports, reinforcement, fabrication methods, installation tolerances, joint treatments,
clearances, and supports. Include final engineering calculations with shop drawings.

B. Samples
1. Submit 2 sets of 24 in. long x full width samples of finished glass fiber reinforced gypsum showing
full profile, curvature and finish shown or specified showing quality, variation, profiles and texture.
2. Submit samples of integral reinforcing and anchor devices proposed for use.

C. Product Data: Submit, for information only, manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for
glass fiber reinforced gypsum including other data as may be required to show compliance with the Contract
Documents.

D. Product Test Reports: submit product test reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by
glass fiber reinforced gypsum fabrication manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing
agency, indicating that it=s current glass-reinforced gypsum fabrications comply with ASTM C1355
requirements.

E. Certification
1. Submit manufacturer's certification stating that units comply with the flame spread rating specified.
Submit certified test reports of an independent laboratory indicating compliance with specified
criteria.

F. Calculations: Prepare and submit complete design calculations for ceiling suspension system, including
loads imposed on structure, prepared, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in Kuwait.
Submittals of calculations for permanent parts of the structure will be reviewed by the Engineer only for
compliance with stipulated design criteria.

1. Submit structural calculations for connections. Submit engineering calculations to show that
maximum deflections do not exceed specified performance requirements under full design loading.

G. Maintenance: Submit the manufacturer's instructions for maintenance of the GFRG units.


A. The GFRG system, when installed, shall not develop structural failure, joint failure, cracking, crazing,
permanent distortion or displacement or other damage. Permanent distortion and displacement are defined
as values exceeding 50% of erection tolerances.

B. The maximum temporary deflection due to all loads shall not exceed 1/360 of the distance between
supports.

C. Design, fabricate and install component parts so that no movement will occur which might abrade abutting
members, loosen fastenings or anchorage or cause other detrimental effects.

D. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
1. Shell Thickness: 3/16 in. minimum
2. Weight: 2 lbs/sq. ft.
3. Density: 12 lbs/cu. ft.
4. Ultimate Tensile Strength: 1400 psi.
5. Impact Strength: 8 ft. lb./sq. in.
6. Compressive Strength: 4200 psi min.
7. Yield Strength: 1060 psi
8. Fire Resistance: The GFRG units shall have ratings not exceeding the following when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84:
a. Flame Spread 0
b. Fuel Contributed 0
c. Smoke Developed 0

1.05 MOCK-UP

A. Provide mock-up of each type of ceiling system and adjacent materials, minimum 2m x 2m in size, including
lighting fixtures and perimeter mouldings, in a space within the building to be designated by the Engineer.
Mock-up shall be representative of the finished work in all respects.

B. Provide mock-up of Dome in Wedding Hall, including all hangers and attachments and relationship to
adjacent materials.

C. Mock-ups may be installed in final locations and if accepted, may be utilized in the finished work.


A. Protect GFRG units from damage during transit, storage and installation. Store in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, above grade on dunnage, so as to avoid damage of any kind.

B. Acclimatize glass-reinforced gypsum fabrications to ambient temperature and humidity of spaces in which
they will be installed. Remove packaging and move units into installation spaces not less than 48 hours
before installing them.


A. Do not install glass fiber reinforced gypsum materials and accessories unless temperature and humidity
conditions closely approximate the interior conditions which will exist when the building is occupied.
Maintain temperature/humidity conditions before, during and after installation in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of glass reinforced gypsum fabrications and suspension system
components with other construction, including ceilings, light fixtures, HVAC equipment,
fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other

B. Warranty: Provide a written warranty, directly to the Owner, for a period of 2 years, warrantying that the
GFRG units will meet the specified Structural Criteria, and will not craze, crack or split. Upon notification of
such defect, within the guarantee period, make the necessary repairs at the convenience of the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Glass Reinforced Gypsum: Glass fiber reinforced and polymer modified high density gypsum, factory
prefabricated and complying with ASTM C1355; Provide components and fabrications from one of the
following:
1. "Formglas" (Formglas, Inc.).
2. "Custom-Cast" (Custom Castings Inc.).
3. "Plastrglas" (Plastrglas Corp.).
4. "PlasterForm G.R.G." (PlasterForm Inc..).

B. Adhesive: Casein, conforming to FS MMM-A-125C, Type 2.

C. Joint Prefill: "Durabond 90 Joint Compound" (U.S. Gypsum) or approved equal.

D. Joint Treatment Materials: Joint compound and finishing compound; ASTM C475, asbestos free (U.S.
Gypsum).

E. Joint Tape: Open mesh fiberglass tape, 2-2 in. width minimum.

F. Fasteners, Inserts and Attachment Devices: Stainless steel as specified, best suited for intended use.

G. Integral Reinforcement: Roll-formed galvanized steel complying with ASTM A653, G60 and exterior grade
plywood.

H. Primary Suspension Members
1. Strap Iron Hanger Inserts: Mild steel flats, 1 in. x 3/16 in. x 3 in. with 7/16 in. holes punched on
center line and both ends, designed to develop the full strength of hangers and bent at 90 deg. to
permit anchor bolt attachment to existing slab.
2. Hangers: Galvanized 3 in. dia. steel pencil rods.
method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers. Provide anchorage devices sized for three (3)
4. Carrying Channels: Cold rolled steel channels, 1-2 in., 475 lbs./1000 lin. ft.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate units to the shapes shown in the largest sizes possible in accordance with ASTM C1355
"Specification for Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Composites". Fabricate glass fiber reinforced gypsum
units from molds constructed of rigid materials that will result in smooth-finished surfaces conforming to
profiles, dimensions, and tolerances indicated. Provide units as large as practical to minimize joints. Provide
integral rib and edge reinforcing for units as necessary for loads and handling stresses, and for anchorage
reinforcing where shown and where required.

B. Remove units from molds and repair hollows, voids, scratches, and other surface imperfections. Material
Compatibility: Fabricate glass-reinforced gypsum fabrications with surface characteristics required for a
high-gloss paint finish. Incorporate embedments so they develop the full strength of glass-reinforced gypsum
fabrications. Cover embedments with glass-reinforced gypsum composite not less than 3/16 in. thick.

C. Fabricate units to the shapes shown with all penetrations as required for mechanical and electrical work
completed. Prefabricate corners, radii, reveals, etc. to minimize field cutting.

D. Molding tolerances shall be as follows:
1. Length, corner to corner of +/- 1/16 in. any straight or curved edge
2. Twist, bow or warp, corner to +/- 1/16 in. diagonally opposite corner measured along straight line
across back of unit
3. Radius of curved surfaces +/- 1/16 in. measured with rigid template of full cross
section
4. Thickness, minimum +/- 1/8 in.

E. The finished product shall be free of visual defects, such as foreign matter, dry spots, cracks, air bubbles,
pin holes and pimples. Identifying markings shall not appear on any exposed surface.

F. Fabricators (Local)
1. Sadeer Trading and Contracting Co.
Tel . : (00965) 2412363, 2412369 Fax : (00965) 4714301
E-mail : sadeerco@qualitynet.net
2. Index
Tel . : (00965) 2441746, 2469348 Fax : (00965) 2402286
3. Fibrex Co., w.l.l.
Dana International, Al-Rasheed Building, 5
th
Floor Office
Fahad Al Salem Street, Kuwait
Tel . : 244-9834 Fax : 244-9835
E-mail : sbshara@hotmail.com

2.03 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED GYPSUMTYPES

A. Type GFRG-10: Custom shapes; custom pattern; in PC-11 color with accent colors as indicated,
(Formglass).

B. Type GFRG-11: Custom shapes; custom pattern; in PC-11 color with accent colors as indicated,
(Formglass).

PART 3 - EXECUTION



B. Condition system(s) to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate glass fiber reinforced gypsum with the adjacent work of other sections. Provide
items to be placed during the installation of other work at the proper time to avoid delays. Coordinate
placement of such items, accurately in relation to the final location of glass fiber reinforced gypsum.

B. General: Install glass fiber reinforced gypsum in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations. Coordinate installation with the work of other trades to ensure exact fit and perfect
alignment. Verify dimensions before proceeding and obtain measurements at job site for work required to
be accurately fitted to other construction.

C. Install all materials and systems as shown on the Drawings and final shop drawings and in accordance with
the GFRG manufacturer's instructions. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of
system using type of mounting accessories indicated or, if none indicated, as recommended by
manufacturer.

D. Make all exposed abutting surfaces of units level, plumb, true to curve, and flush, with all joints straight and
true, scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. Provide neat cutouts for items
protruding through GFRG units.

E. Cope units at the juncture of construction as required and without exposing cut edges or voids.

F. Adhere abutting flanges of wall panel and ceiling panel joints. Provide temporary ties and braces as may be
required. Fill, tape and spackle joints unless otherwise shown.

G. Use procedures that will minimize damage or soiling of the units during installation. Do not erect units which
are damaged or defaced to such extent as to impair strength or appearance. Replace units which are
damaged, or cannot be adequately repaired or cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

H. Install supporting members to support required loads and to prevent distortion in excess of that specified.
Provide accessible ceiling and wall panels where shown or required for access to contiguous work.

I. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints. Comply with the following erection tolerances:
1. Variation from plumb: 1/8 in. in 20 ft.
2. Joint alignment: +/- 1/32 in.
3. Joint width: + 1/32 in. - 0.0 in.
4. Surface alignment across joints: +/- 1/32 in.

J. Provide joint finishing in accordance with joint compound manufacturer's printed instructions, modified as
required by GFRG manufacturer. Provide smooth joints and seams which, when finished, are
undistinguishable from contiguous work.

K. Provide temporary ties and braces as may be required.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of the work, thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces using materials and methods
recommended by the manufacturer. All surface stains shall be removed by means compatible with paint
finish as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Protect exposed surfaces during the construction period so that they will be without any indication of
deterioration or damage.

END OF SECTION

GLASS-REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS 09271-1
SECTION 09271

GLASS-REINFORCED GYPSUMFABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes factory-molded, glass-reinforced gypsum (GRG) fabrications for interior applications.
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for blocking, nailers, shims, and carpentry supporting GRG
fabrications.
2. Division 9 Section " Gypsum Board Assemblies" for steel framing, blocking, and bracing supporting GRG
fabrications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, weights,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show profiles, thicknesses, embedded supports, and anchorage details for fabrications.
Indicate requirements for joint treatment, clearances, and attachment to supports.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and
coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to GRG fabrications and to building structure.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels,
and moldings.
D. Samples: For each exposed product in each profile and size required, and as follows:
1. Linear Moldings: 610-mm- long section with finished joint. Show complete pattern.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standard for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockups of each type of GRG fabrication.
2. Paint mockups to match final decoration scheduled or indicated and to comply with requirements
specified in other Division 9 Sections.
Completion.

A. Comply with ASTM C 1467/C 1467M.
A. Environmental Conditions:
1. Comply with requirements in ASTM C 1467/C 1467M.
2. Do not deliver or install GRG fabrications until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC
system is operating and continuously maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels intended
for building occupants.
B. Conditioning: Acclimatize GRG fabrications to ambient temperature and humidity of spaces in which they will be
installed. Remove packaging and move units into installation spaces not less than 48 hours before installing
them.
C. Field Measurements: Where GRG fabrications are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of
other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of GRG fabrications with support components specified in other Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRG FABRICATIONS
A. Fabrications: Molded 25mm thick, glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum units complying with ASTM C 1381.
B. Embedments: As standard with GRG fabrication manufacturer and as required for reinforcement and for
anchorage to substrates and framing.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Steel Drill Screws: Of sufficient length and size to securely fasten GRG fabrications to framing members, and as
follows:
1. Screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for fastening GRG fabrications to steel members less than 0.84
mm thick.
2. Screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening GRG fabrications to steel members from 0.84 to 2.84
mm thick.
B. Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475/C 475M.
2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate GRG units to comply with ASTM C 1381, with smooth-finished surfaces; repair hollows, voids,
scratches, and other surface imperfections. Fabricate units in lengths and sizes that will minimize number of
joints between abutting units.
B. Embedments: Incorporate embedments into units to develop the full strength of GRG fabrications. Cover
embedments with not less than 5-mm thickness of GRG composite.
C. Connection Hardware: Designed and fabricated to support and connect GRG fabrications to hangers, support
framing, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
3.2 GRG INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in ASTM C 1467/C 1467M.
B. Install GRG fabrications level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where
required for alignment.
C. Attach GRG fabrications to framing and substrates with steel drill screws, unless otherwise indicated. Do not
use pneumatic staple guns. Countersink screw heads below adjoining finished surface.
1. Predrill fastener holes in units. Clean fastener holes to remove dirt and oil.
2. Locate fasteners not less than 7.9 mm from edges or ends of units.
D. Use joint-treatment materials to finish GRG fabrications to produce surfaces ready to receive primers and paint
finishes specified in other Division 9 Sections.
1. Finish joints between units, other than control joints, and countersunk fastener heads to comply with
ASTM C 840 for Level 4 and to match surface texture of units.
2. Repair hollows, voids, scratches, and other surface imperfections on units.
END OF SECTION

CERAMIC TILE 09310-1
SECTION 09310

CERAMIC TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide ceramic tile in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1. Scratch coat for wall tile.


A. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile
from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying progress of the Work.

B. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from
one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for
each aggregate.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Waterproofing Materials: Obtain waterproofing materials and associated
accessories from one manufacturer for each type waterproofing system.

D. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project.

1.03 STANDARDS

1. TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation".
2. ANSI A137.1 "Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile."
3. ANSI A108/A118/A136 "Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile."


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for the following:
1. Tile patterns and locations.
2. Widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile
substrates and finished tile surfaces.

B. Samples: Submit samples of each type, class, color and tile patten, not less than I meter square on plywood
backing, and grouted as required. Sample submittal and Engineer's acceptance shall be for color, pattern
and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information, specifications and installation instructions for
each material required.

D. Certification
1. Submit a Certificate of Compliance to ANSI A137.1 prior to submission of samples for review.

2. Furnish a "Master Grade Certificate" in the form approved in ANSI 137.1 for each type of tile,
signed by the manufacturer, certifying to the grade, type and quantity of tile, together with
satisfactory information for identification of the containers to which they apply. These certificates
shall be supplied promptly after material has been shipped from the factory.
3. Submit certification from the manufacturers of dry-set mortar and grouts that their products
conform to the appropriate ANSI "Materials" specifications.

E. Substrate Acceptability: Submit a certified statement issued by the manufacturers of tile setting materials
and countersigned by the tile installer, attesting that all areas and surfaces designated to receive ceramic
tiles have been inspected and found satisfactory for the reception of the tile, and are not in conflict with the
referenced standards requirements. Application of tile will be construed as acceptance of surfaces.

1.05 MOCK-UP(S)

A. Following approval of each tile, tile type ( including custom made tile mosaics) and colored grout sample(s),
construct a visual mock-up of each tile system in minimum 3m x 3m panels unless otherwise indicated,
consisting of specified tile placed on setting bed to simulate final condition, tile pattern, corner conditions
and grouting. Alter or revise mock-up(s) as directed, to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer, at which
time they shall remain as the standard of workmanship for the Project. Mock-up(s), if approved, may be
utilized in the final work.


A. Deliver materials, other than bulk materials, in manufacturer's unopened containers fully identified with grade
labels as specified in TCA 137.1, and with name, brand, type, class, size, color and pattern. Store all
materials above grade and protect from weather and damage from any source. Store in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.

B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.

C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from
contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite these precautions coating does contact bonding
surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.

D. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit Material Safety Data Sheets with products delivered to job-site.


A. Maintain project conditions and protect the Work during and after installation as required to comply with
referenced standards, manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions.

B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup.

C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg. F. or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion,
unless higher temperatures and/or longer cure times are required by referenced installation standard or
manufacturer's instructions.

1.08 EXTRA STOCK

A. Furnish to the Owner, at the job-site, a quantity of tile, grout and trim units equal to 2 percent of amount
installed, but not less than one unopened box, for each type, composition, color, pattern and size properly
packaged and identified with labels clearly describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Tile Products
1. General: Provide tile "Standard Grade", complying with ANSI A137.1. Tile shall match samples
accepted by the Engineer. Obtain each material required for any one type and color of tile work
from a single source, so as to minimize variations in appearance and quality.
a. Slip Resistance (COF) Values: All tile indicated to be used on floor surfaces, as
manufactured, shall bear a coefficient of friction of not less than .6 when tested in
accordance with ASTM C1028 under a wet and dry condition.
2. Ceramic Wall Tile: Non-vitreous full body with matte or gloss finish, cushion edged, spacer lugs
on all four sides; 10 mm. thick unless otherwise shown or specified; Colors as specified in the Tile
Schedule. (Engineer reserves the right to use 16 tile sheets pre-grouted with silicone sealant).
3. Unglazed Slip-resistant Tiles: Where shown, identical to unglazed ceramic/ mosaic tile with the
addition of 7-1/2% abrasive grain by weight.
4. Glazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Porcelain impervious body, cushion-edged and PVC-mounted into
12 in. x 24 in. sheets. (Flat tile mounted onto mesh, perforated paper or other sheet material is
unacceptable when such material is to remain in place after installation) 2 in. sq., 3 in thick unless
otherwise shown or specified. Colors as specified in the Tile Schedule.
5. Trim Shapes: Shaped as shown for typical conditions and as required to make a complete
installation at all conditions including all required cove type bases, bull-nosed round external
corners and square internal corners. Wainscots shall be topped with bull-nose trim. Match type,
class, color and edge of adjoining field units and coordinate sizes with field units.

6. Technical Details:
(Ref. standard: ISO 13006 / EN 14411

Test Description Standard Test Method Standard Requirements
ISO 13006 /EN 14411
Length & Width BS EN ISO 10545-2 0.6%
Thickness BS EN ISO 10545-2 5%
Straightness of sides BS EN ISO 10545-2 0.5%
Rectangularity BS EN ISO 10545-2 0.6%
Surface flatness BS EN ISO 10545-2 0.5%
Water absorption BS EN ISO 10545-3 0.5%
Breaking strength BS EN ISO 10545-4 1300N
Modulus of rupture BS EN ISO 10545-4 35N /mm
Resistance to deep absorption BS EN ISO 10545-6 175 mm
Coefficient of linear thermal
expansion
BS EN ISO 10545-8 Test method available
Resistance to thermal shock BS EN ISO 10545-9 Test method available
Frost resistance BS EN ISO 10545-12 Required
Resistance to household chemicals &
swimming pool salts
BS EN ISO 10545-13 Minimum UB
Resistance to low concentrations
acids & alkalis
BS EN ISO 10545-13 Manufacturer to state
classification
Resistance to high concentrations
acids & alkalis
BS EN ISO 10545-13 Test method available
Resistance to stain BS EN ISO 10545-14 Test method available

2.02 MORTARS AND GROUTS

A. Basic Setting Materials
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I; white where required to match Engineer's sample.
2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206, Type S, or ASTM C207, Type S.
3. Sand: ASTM C144.

B. LatexBPortland Cement ThinBSet Mortar: ANSI A118.4, liquid acrylic or SBR resin type latexBmodified
cement mortar for thinBset application. Factory proportioned cement, sand and polymer additives in dry
blend to be mixed with water. Provide one of the following:
1. "PremiumPlus Thin Set Mortar" with "CustomFlex Ultra Strength Thin Set Additive" (Custom
Building Products).
2. "Laticrete 211 Crete Filler Powder" with "Laticrete 4237 ThinBSet Mortar Additive" (Laticrete
International, Inc. ).
3. "Kerabond Mortar" with "Keralastic Additive" with (Mapei).
4. "TAB380/381 Flu Set Plus Premium" with "TA-867 Full Bond Additive"(TEC Incorporated).

C. Organic Tile Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type 1, waterBresistant latex emulsion. Provide one of the following:
1. "Hydroment 7001 Tile Mastic" (Bostik).
2. "AcrylPro Ceramic Tile Mastic" (Custom Building Products).
3. "Laticrete 15 MultiBMastic Adhesive" (Laticrete International, Inc. ).
4. "Ultra Mastic 1" (Mapei).
5. "TAB122 Double Duty Adhesive" (TEC Incorporated).
6. Kara bound. Italy

D. LatexBPortland Cement Sanded Grout for Unglazed Tile: ANSI A118.6,polymerBmodified cement grout
suitable for nonBabsorptive tile. Factory proportioned cement, sand, liquid polymer additives and alkali
resistant nonBfading mineral pigments in dry blend to be mixed with water. Grout color as selected by
Engineer. Provide one of the following:
1. "Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout (sanded)" with "Acrylic Latex Admixture 425" (Bostik).
2. "Classic Blend Colored Grout (sanded) with "Acrylic Mortar Admixture" (Custom Building
Products).
3. "Laticrete 500 Series Sanded Grout" with "Laticrete 1776 Admixture" (Laticrete International, Inc. ).
4. "TAB650 AccuColor Premium Sanded Grout" with "TA-869 Acrylic Grout Additive"(TEC
Incorporated).

E. LatexBPortland Cement Unsanded Grout for Glazed Tile: ANSI A118.6, polymerBmodified cement grout for
use with non-absorptive ans vitreous type tile. Factory proportioned cement, liquid polymer additives and
alkali resistant nonBfading mineral pigments in dry blend to be mixed with water. Grout color as selected by
Engineer. Provide one of the following:
1. "Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout (unsanded)" with "Acrylic Latex Admixture 425" (Bostik).
2. "Laticrete 600 Series Unsanded Grout" with "Laticrete 1776 Admixture" (Laticrete International,
Inc. ).
3. "Keracolor Wall" with Plastijoints Admixture" (Mapei).
4. "TAB620 AccuColor Unsanded Grout" with "TA-869 Acrylic Grout Additive"(TEC Incorporated).

2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Stone Thresholds
1. Marble Saddles: Fabricate from highest grade Madre Cream Alabama or Georgia White marble,
having an minimum abrasion hardness (Ha) of 10.0 when tested in accordance with ASTM C241,
thickness as shown with chamfered corners and eased edges, cut from sound stock, uniform in
color, free from cracks, and spalled edges. Honed finish on exposed surfaces.

B. Miscellaneous Materials
1. Water: Clear, potable, and without deleterious substances which would impair the work.

2. Pigments: Pure mineral pigments, resistant to alkalies, non-fading and weatherproof, colors as
required to match Engineer's sample.

C. Waterproofing Materials
1. Polyethylene Sheet Membrane Waterproofing: Manufacturer's standard proprietary product
complying with ANSI A118.10 and consisting of composite sheets, 60 inches wide by a nominal
thickness of 0.030 in. minimum, composed of an inner layer of chlorinated polyethylene (CPE)
sheet faced on both sides with laminated high-strength nonwoven polyester material. Provide
preformed outside and inside corners, pipe protrusion collars, cap strips, seaming adhesive and
other accessories as required for a complete waterproof installation. Provide one of the following:
a. "NobleSeal TS" (The Noble Co.).
b. "NobleSeal TS" (American Olean).
c. "Dal-Seal TS" (Dal-Tile).

2.04 TILE SCHEDULE

Type of tiles, as indicated in the finishes drawings/schedule.

2.05 MANUFACTURER AND LOCAL SUPPLIER
All ceramic brands, manufacturer and local distributor to be proposed by contractor and accepted by client and
consultants representative

PART 3- EXECUTION


A. Prior to the installation of tile, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the project site to review the material
selections, substrate preparations, installation procedures, coordination with other trades, special details and
conditions, standard of workmanship, and other pertinent topics related to the Work. The meeting shall
include the Engineer, the Contractor, ceramic tile installer, ceramic tile and setting material manufacturer's
representatives, and representatives of other trades or subcontractors affected by the installation. Examine
sample installations which have been prepared and determine and record whether everyone present is in
agreement that the proposed installations are likely to perform as required.


Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Verify that substrates for
setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil laitance, waxy films and curing compounds. Confirm that
installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical, plumbing and mechanical elements, and similar
items located in or behind tile has been completed prior to beginning the Work.

B. Allowable Variations in Substrate Levels
1. Thin-Set Work: Same as allowable variations in finished work.

C. Grind or fill concrete, masonry and plaster substrates as required to comply with allowable variations.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Mechanically scarify concrete substrate by sandblasting, grinding or a portable shot blast cleaning system as
may be required to provide a proper surface or to remove curing compounds or other surface contaminants
that would interfere with proper bond of mortar, waterproofing membrane, or adhesive for tile.

B. Seal substrate with sealer if and as recommended by manufacturer of mortar or adhesive.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that
tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show

the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory
blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise shown or specified comply with the referenced standards and the manufacturer's
instructions.

B. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including
those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection
of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and
grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

C. Allowable Variations in Finished Work: Do not exceed the following deviations from level and plumb, and
from elevations, locations, slopes and alignments shown:
1. Floors: 1/8 in. in 10 ft. run, any direction; +/- 1/8 in. at any location; 1/32 in. offset at any location.
2. Walls: 1/8 in. in 8 ft. run, any direction; +/- 1/8 in. at any location; 1/32 in. offset at any location.
3. Joints: +/- 1/32 in. joint width variation at any location; 1/16 in. in 3 ft. run for deviation from plumb
and true, and for other variations in alignment of joints.

D. Lay out tile work in pattern shown using field tile and trim shapes as shown or required. Center tile fields
both directions in each space or on each wall area and adjust to minimize tile cutting. Use uniform joint
widths of 1/16 in. for ceramic tile and 3 in. for quarry tile unless otherwise shown. Align joints when adjoining
tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Cut field tile, not trim
shapes, unless otherwise shown. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces.
Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely
to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that plates, collars or covers overlap tile. For
tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so that extent
of each sheet is not apparent in finished work.

E. Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures in the spaces shown or scheduled to
receive tile. Form a complete covering without interruptions except for control and expansion joints as
shown and as required to comply with requirements. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and
corners without disruption of pattern or joint alignments.
F. Sheet Membrane Waterproofing Installation: In areas shown, install sheet membrane waterproofing as per
recommendations and written instructions of the manufacturer. Bond to substrates with full bed of adhesive.
Position seams so that water would flow over and not against laps in direction toward drains. Turn up sheet
membrane waterproofing onto vertical surfaces so that top edge of membrane is not less than 6 in. above
the completed tile floor surface and neatly fasten. Seal all corners and seams, penetrations of pipes,
conduits, fixtures and drains watertight in accordance with manufacturers written instruction using
recommended materials.

G. Install reinforcement in all horizontal mortar setting beds over membrane waterproofing.

H. Dry-Set Installation: Except for installations directly on wood or metal substrate, use factory pre-mixed dry-
set mortar with latex additive for dry-set tile work, unless otherwise shown. Install dry-set system over
waterproofing membrane in accordance with membrane manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations. Comply with TCA Method F122 and ANSI A108.5 for installation of tile.

I. Adhesive Installation: Use organic tile adhesive for setting tile on gypsum wallboard and elsewhere as
shown. Comply with TCA Methods W223 or W242 and ANSI A108.4 for installation of tile.

J. Grout: Unless otherwise shown use factory pre-mixed grout with latex additive specified for non-vitreous
body tile, porcelain body tile and for quarry tile. Comply with the following for grouting: ANSI 108.10.

K. Slip-Resistant Tile Installation: Use slip- resistant tile in areas shown as "Slip-Resistant". Install as specified
for normal ceramic tile or quarry tile of the same type and class.

L. Control and Expansion Joints: TCA Method EJ171. Where shown as "Control Joint" or "Expansion Joint",
and also where required by ANSI Standard for proper workmanship, install removable divider strips of the
width shown or of the proper width. Provide strips of same depth as the work, including setting bed.
Remove strips after grouting tile and properly curing the work. Install joint fillers and sealants, in control and
expansion joints of type as recommended by manufacturer of tile.

M. Marble Saddles: Install in one piece, fit neatly to door jambs and set in same type of setting bed as abutting
field tile unless otherwise indicated. Set thresholds in latex-Portland cement mortar for locations where
mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent non-tile floor finish. Comply with TCA Method
TH611.

3.05 CLEANING

A. In addition to the initial cleaning procedure required, and not more than 2 days before occupancy or
preliminary acceptance by the Owner, clean ceramic tile work as recommended by the tile manufacturer and
TCA.

B. Protect tile-work during the construction period so that it will be without any indication of use or damage at
the time of acceptance.

END OF SECTION

PRECAST TERRAZZO TILES 09410-1

SECTION 09410

PRECAST TERRAZZO TILES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes Precast terrazzo floor; Precast terrazzo skirting tiles at roof etc.

1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete subfloor with finish.
2. Section 07905 Interior Sealants: Joint between terrazzo base and wall surface.
3. Section 05810 - Expansion Joint Assemblies: Product requirements for building control and
expansion joint devices installed under this section.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
B. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
C. ASTM C144 Sand Cement Mortar.
D. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
E. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
F. ASTM D2103 - Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
G. NTMA TIG (The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc.) - Terrazzo Information Guide.
H. TCA (Tile Council of American)- Handbook for Tile Installation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate divider strip layout, control joint and expansion joint layout,flooring material
transitions, color patterns, and details of adjacent components.

C. Product Data: Submit data for reinforcing, divider strips, control joint strips, non-slip inserts sealer and
terrazzo precast tile.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of each terrazzo tile, Precast base, tread and riser and skirting 150 x 150
mm in size illustrating color, chip size and variation, chip gradation, mortar color, and typical divider strip.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit procedures for stain removal, stripping, and sealing.


A. Perform Work in accordance with NTMA recommendations contained in "Terrazzo Information Guide."

B. Maintain one copy of document on site.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten
years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years documented
experience.

1.07 MOCKUP

A. Construct mockup, 1 x 1 m, including terrazzo flooring and base illustrating appearance of finished work.

B. Locate where directed by Engineer.

C. Remove mockup when directed by Engineer.


A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.


A. Do not install terrazzo when temperature is below 10 degrees C or above 32 degrees C.

B. Maintain temperature within specified range 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of
terrazzo.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement of terrazzo divider strips with location of mechanical and electrical access covers and
other items built in to terrazzo.


A. Supply 2% of each type, color, pattern and size of precast terrazzo product installed properly packaged and
labelled

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Al-Duaij.
2. Dashti Sons Group.
3. Emirates Industries.
4. Quiligotti & Co. Ltd.
5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
6. National industries.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1 Normal; white color for topping mix; gray color for underbed;
modified to NTMA higher compressive strength requirements; obtained from single source.

B. Color Pigments For Topping: Non-fading mineral type, alkali-resistant.

C. Terrazzo Sand: ASTM C33, fine aggregates Sharp, coarse, clean, screened, and free of deleterious
material.

D. Cushion Sand: ASTM C33 Clean and free of deleterious material.


E. Water: Potable.

F. Surface Aggregate: Crushed marble, chips size in accordance with NTMA chip size for standard gradation
and uniform coloration.


2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Underbed Reinforcing Mesh: Galvanized weld wire fabric to comply with ASTM A185;

B. Divider Strips: 3 mm thick brass exposed top strip, zinc coated steel concealed bottom strip, with anchoring
features.

C. Control Joint Strips: 3 mm nominal width brass exposed top strips, zinc coated steel concealed bottom strip,
3 mm wide neoprene filler strip between vertical strips, with anchoring features.

D. Strip Height: To suit thickness of terrazzo topping, with allowance for grinding.

E. Base Cap, Base Divider Strip, and Separator Strip: Match divider strips.

F. Foam Filler: Closed cell urethane foam capable of compression to 50 percent of its thickness with full
recovery.

G. Slip Sheet: ASTM D2103; 0.15 mm polyethylene sheet.

H. Non-slip Strips: Rough textured surface finish.

I. Curing Compound: Comply with ASTM C309.

J. Cleaniquid type, pH of 7 10.

K. Sealer: Colorless, non-yellowing, penetrating liquid type, pH of 7 -10; not detrimental to terrazzo
components.

2.04 MIXES

A. Underbed: One part Portland cement to 4 parts sand by volume. Add water to produce low slump mix.

B. Floor: Comply with mix requirements of NTMA gray Portland cement, with exposed divider and accessory
strips.

C. Base and Border: Comply with mix requirements of NTMA white Portland cement, with exposed divider and
accessory strips.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify substrate surfaces are ready to receive Work.

B. Do not begin terrazzo tile work until concrete substrate has cured 28 days, minimum, and has dried to
maximum moisture content of 12 percent.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of foreign matter.

B. Remove loose or flaking concrete and repair to form sound, solid substrate.

C. Remove surface water and thoroughly brush in neat cement slurry bond coat.

D. Set out so that cut tiles are kept to a minimum


E. Concrete floor irregularities to be corrected.

F. Tiles to be immersed in clean, potable water before laying.
3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Precast terrazzo tiles.
1. Inspect areas to receive under bed.
a. Defects in existing concrete work that affect proper execution of precast terrazzo work.
b. Variances beyond allowable tolerances (cracks, deflection, voilds, etc.)
2. Under bed;
a. Area to be covered with dry sand not to exceed the required thickness.
b. Install cleavage membrane 4mm polyethylene film in accordance with ASTM D 2103
over-lapping all ends and edges minimum of 3 inches.
c. Install 50mm x 50mm x 16 gauge welded wire mesh. Overlap at ends and edges a
minimum of 2 squares.
d. Place under bed in a uniform thickness of 30 mm.
e. Underbed elevation to 22mm below finished floor elevation to receive 20mm terrazzo
tile.
3. Grouting
a. Prepare, mix and apply latex Portland cement grout mix to clean and sound surfaces in
accordance with material manufacturers instruction.
1. Tinted grout to utilize an alkali-resistant colour stable pigment.
b. Ensure full penetration of entire joint depth and allow surplus on face of all joints.
c. Allow grout to cure, normally 24 hours.
4. Initial grind
a. Grind floor with 24-40 grit stone or with comparable diamond plates to remove all surplus
grout and any unit lippage.
b. Inspect floor for pinholes and voids. Machine grout floor before final grind.
5. Finish Grind
a. Grind floor with 80-120 grit stone to smooth finish.

B. Curing:
1. Begin curing procedures as soon as curing materials can be applied without damaging formed
surfaces.
2. Use curing method in accordance with NTMA instructions.
3. Close area to construction traffic, allowing undisturbed curing.

C. Surface Finishing:
1. Brush apply terrazzo topping mix slurry to topping surface.
2. Finish terrazzo in accordance with NTMA instructions.
3. Produce terrazzo finish surface to match approved mock-up with minimum 70 percent chip
exposed.
4. Grind terrazzo surface with power disc machine; successively sequence using coarse to fine grit
abrasive, using wet or dry method.
5. Apply grout mix matching matrix color to fill honeycomb exposed during grinding.
6. After grout has sufficiently cured, grind repaired areas using fine grit abrasive.
7. Hand grind base cove, and curb.



A. Maximum Variation from Flat Surface: 3 mm in one m.

B. Maximum Variation from Level (Except Surfaces Sloping to Drain): 3 mm.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Scrub and clean terrazzo surfaces with cleaner in accordance with NTMA instructions. Let dry.

B. Immediately after terrazzo has dried, apply sealer in accordance with NTMA instructions and let dry.

C. Seal and polish surfaces in accordance with NTMA instructions.

3.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Protecting installed construction.

B. Do not permit traffic over finished terrazzo surfaces.

END OF SECTION

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-1
SECTION 09510

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide acoustical ceilings in accordance with the Contract Documents.


1. Support clips for gypsum drywall partitions scheduled to be attached to underside of acoustical
ceiling system.


A. The acoustical ceiling work shall be performed by a firm having 5 years experience in the installation of
materials specified herein on projects comparable to this Project. The firm shall have the approval of the
acoustical materials manufacturer.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling system from a single source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying
progress of the Work.


A. Fire-Rated Acoustic Ceiling Assemblies: Provide ceiling assemblies to achieve the fire-resistance
classification or rating shown. Comply with the material and installation requirements of the UL "Building
Materials List", Guide No. 40 U 18 and other referenced guides for the UL design numbers corresponding
with the construction systems shown.

1. Provide complying protection for recessed light fixtures and other penetrations in ceilings where
required for applicable UL approved design.

2. Provide complying ceiling access units as shown or where required.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit details and reflected ceiling plans of acoustical ceilings before proceeding with
Work. Provide coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to large scale and
coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Joint pattern.
2. Ceiling suspension members.
3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinkler heads;
access panels; and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures with
adjoining construction.

B. Samples: Submit samples of each acoustical material specified. Each set of samples shall show the full
range of texture and color to be expected in the completed work. Sample submittal and Engineer's
acceptance will be for color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the responsibility of
the Contractor.
1. Acoustic board: 12 in. sq.
2. Exposed tees and moldings (one of each type): 1 ft lengths.

3. Accessories: one of each type.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each acoustical material,
suspension system and other products required, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as
may be required to show compliance with the Contract Documents.
D. Test Data: Measure volume of air delivered by installed ventilating ceilings. Submit results and calculations
showing that the amount of air supplied to the plenum will be delivered through the ventilating ceiling in
accordance with the design requirements and that the plenum pressures developed will not exceed the safe
load limits for the ventilating ceiling and the system.


A. In areas where gypsum drywall partitions are dependent on the ceiling suspension system for lateral
support, design and install suspension system components to sustain the imposed load from the completed
partition system including a minimum inward and outward pressure of 5 psf normal to the plane of the wall.

B. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for the
following fire-performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and
inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E
1264 for Class A products.
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less.

1.06 MOCK-UP

A. Provide mock-up of each type of acoustical ceiling system and metal pan ceiling system, minimum 2m x 2m
in size, including lighting fixtures and perimeter mouldings, in a space within the building to be designated by
the Engineer. Mock-up shall be representative of the finished work in all respects.

B. Mock-up may be installed in final locations and if accepted, may be utilized in the finished work.


A. Deliver materials to the Project site in manufacturer's unopened containers, clearly indicating manufacturer's
name, brand, type, style, size, color, texture and other identifying information.

B. Store materials in a dry location, off the ground and in a manner to prevent damage, deterioration and
intrusion of foreign matter. Replace materials which have been damaged or are otherwise unfit for use.

C. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture
content.


A. Do not install acoustical materials unless temperature and humidity conditions closely approximate the
interior conditions which will exist when the building is occupied. Maintain temperature and humidity
conditions before, during, and after installation. Plastering, concrete and terrazzo work (including grinding)
shall be complete and dry. Windows and doors shall be in place and glazed.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling systems with other construction that penetrates
ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and
partition assemblies.

1.10 WARRANTY


A. Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other

1. Warranty: Provide a written warranty, directly to the Owner, for a period of fifteen (15) years
warranting Acoustic Board against warping or sagging resulting from defects of materials or factory
workmanship and against the occurrence of 50% red dust. Upon notification of such defects,
within the warranty period, make the necessary repairs and replacements, at the convenience of
the Owner.

1.11 EXTRA STOCK

A. Furnish to the Owner and store at the site where directed, 2% of each type of acoustic tile and acoustic
board installed in the Project, packaged in manufacturer's unopened cartons and identified as to contents.

B. Furnish quantity of each exposed component of suspension systems equal to 2% of amount installed in the
Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Acoustic Materials
1. Provide acoustical materials complying with the following performance requirements, unless
otherwise specified:
a. Light Reflectance: ASTM C523, 0.75 or more.
b. Flame Spread: ASTM E84, Flame Spread 25 or less.
c. Sound Absorption: ASTM C423, NRC not less than 0.65.
d. Sound Transmission Class: ASTM E90, not less than 35.
2. Acoustic Board:
a. Acoustic Board (Type AC-11): Beveled tegular edge lay-in, 24 in . x 24 in. x in. thick,
oversized for use with 9/16 in. wide narrow reveal grid. Provide one of the following:
1) Mfr. No.1912, Ultima RH90 with HumiGuard Plus" (Armstrong World
Industries, Inc.).
2) Mfr. No. 86985, Mars Climaplus (U.S.G. Interiors).
b. Acoustic Board (Type AC-12): Square edge lay-in, 24 in. x 24 in. x 5/8 in. thick. Use with
15 /16 in. thick standard grid. Provide one of the following:
1) Minaboard/Cortega. No. 769" (Armstrong World Industries, Inc.)
2) Omni No. 345A ( U.S.G. Interiors, Inc.).
3) Baroque. No. BET-197( The Celotex Corp.).
c. Acoustic Board (Type AC-13): Square edge lay-in, 24 in. x 24 in. x 5/8 in. thick. Use with
15/ 16 in. thick standard grid. Provide one of the following:
1) "Travertine Ceramaguard No. 607 with HumiGuard Max" (Armstrong World
Industries, Inc.) size: 24 in. x 24 in. x 5/8 in.
2) "Ceramic ClimaPlus No. 56644" (USG Interiors, Inc.);size: 24 in. x 24 in. x 5/8
in.

B. Primary Suspension Members

1. Provide ceiling support components complying with ASTM C635 Classification "Heavy Duty",
unless otherwise specified.

2. Provide primary suspension members of suitable design and adequate strength to support the
acoustic materials, light fixtures, diffusers and other items occurring in or on the ceiling.


3. Finish to lines and levels shown, with maximum deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the span
between supports.

4. Wire Hanger Inserts: No. 6 galvanized wire loop and 26 Ga. galvanized shell or 14 Ga. galvanized
steel strap with 5/16 in. hole.

5. Strap Iron Hanger Inserts: Galvanized, mild steel flats, 1 in. x 3/16 in. with 7/16 in. holes punched
on center line and lower ends, designed to develop the full strength of hangers.

method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers. Provide anchorage devices sized for five (5)

7. Hangers: Galvanized, one of the following:

a. 3/16 in. x 1 in. steel straps.

b. in. diameter steel rods.

c. 9 Ga. soft steel wire.

8. Carrying Channels: ASTM C754, cold rolled steel channels, 1 1/2 in., 475 lbs. per 1000 linear ft.

9. Clips: Provide support clips, clamps, fasteners, and other attachment devices as required to
connect components and transfer imposed loads of primary suspension system.

C. Metal Wall Moldings: Electro-galvanized roll formed steel with manufacturer's standard baked-on white
enamel coating to match finish of acoustical material and that fit type of edge detail and suspension system
indicated.

1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same
depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension
member.

2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit
penetration exactly.

3. For narrow faced suspension systems, provide suspension system manufacturer's standard edge
moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners.

D. Exposed Mechanical Suspension System for Acoustic Board (AC-12 & AC-13): Manufacturer's standard
design; complying with ASTM C635 Classification "Heavy Duty"; complete with hangers, main tees, cross
tees, splices, angle molding, and accessories. Provide components as follows:

1. Primary Suspension Members

2. Main Tees: 1 1/2 in. by 15/16 in. wide formed of 0.025 in. galvanized cold-rolled steel section
and bottom flange, faced with a roll formed galvanized steel cap.

3. Cross-Tees: 1-1/4 in. by 15/16 in. wide formed of 0.025 in. galvanized cold-rolled steel, double
web bulb tee section and bottom flange, faced with a roll formed galvanized steel cap. Web ends
of cross-tees shall be die formed for the tablock attachment to adjoining tee through the main tee
to provide alignment with a minimum of torsional movement and lateral displacement.

4. Metal Wall Moldings

5. Accessories: Galvanized steel, specifically designed for use with the main components.


6. Exposed Finish: Chemically clean, electro-galvanize and bonderize all rolled formed parts. Finish
with a white baked-on enamel coating, to match finish of acoustic boards unless otherwise shown.

7. Provide one of the following:
a. "200 Snap-Grid System" (Chicago Metallic Corp.)
b. "DX 26 System" (USG Interiors).
c. "Prelude MX 15/16 " Exposed Tee System" (Armstrong World Industries, Inc.)

E. Exposed Mechanical Suspension System with Recessed Reveal for Acoustic Board (AC-11): Manufacturer's
standard design complying with ASTM C635 Classification "Heavy Duty"; complete with hangers, main tees,
cross tees, splices, stepped angle molding, and accessories. Provide partition attachment clips for areas
where partition ceiling runners are secured to the ceiling suspension system. Provide components as
follows:

1. Primary Suspension Members

2. Main Tees and Cross Tees: 1-5/8 in high with a 9/16 in. face with 1/8in. center regress fabricated
from commercial grade galvanized cold-rolled steel sections; notched and mitered at all
intersections.

3. Metal Wall Moldings: Commercial grade galvanized cold-rolled steel, stepped to provide same
reveal as main tees and cross tees.

4. Accessories: Galvanized steel, specifically designed for use with the main components.

5. Exposed Finish: Chemically clean, electro-galvanize and bonderize all rolled formed parts. Finish
with a white baked-on enamel coating, to match finish of acoustic boards unless otherwise shown.

6. Provide one of the following:
a. "Ultraline 3600" (Chicago Metallic Corp.)
b. "Fineline DXFF 1/8" (USG Interiors).
c. Silhouette 1/8 (Armstrong World Industries).

F. Adhesive: Type manufactured expressly for the purpose, not water soluble, containing no alcohol or other
ingredients that react chemically with paint, and containing no solvent having a stronger action than naphtha
on oil paint: recommended by manufacturer of acoustic tile.

G. Miscellaneous Materials

1. Round Column Collar Molding: 0.050 in. thick extruded aluminum edge molding with adjustable
band clamp and PVC spacer; "Column Collar" (Fry Reglet Corp.). Finish exposed portions with
baked enamel, color to match other exposed trim.

2. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, nonbleeding,
gunnable sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Prior to installation of acoustical ceilings, meet at the Project site to review the material selections,
installation procedures and coordination of the Work with other trades. Meeting shall include the Engineer,
the Contractor, the acoustical ceiling subcontractor, manufacturer's representatives, and any other
subcontractors whose work requires coordination with this Work.


A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer present,
for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of
ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is
specified in other sections. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in
advance of time needed for coordination of other work.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Verify all measurements and dimensions at the Project site and coordinate the Work with the work of other
trades, with particular attention given to the work of mechanical and electrical trades.

B. Install all materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and ASTM C636
unless otherwise shown or specified.

C. Make all exposed surfaces of acoustical units level and flush with all joints straight and true. Neatly cut and
fit units around light fixtures and around other items protruding through acoustical ceilings. Install all
exposed members with flush hairline joints.

D. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant on back of
vertical leg before fastening to vertical surface. Locate so that sealant will be concealed after installation.
Screw attach moldings to substrate 16 in. o.c. maximum, and not more than 3 in. from ends, leveling with
ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 in. in 12 ft. Miter corners accurately to provide hairline joints
and connect securely.

E. Factory drill acoustic tile occurring at hidden loudspeakers and fire alarm gongs.

F. Center tile or board pattern both directions in each major space or room as shown or directed and, where
possible, adjust pattern so that edge pieces will be not less than 2 unit in width.

G. Run grain of units in one direction, as shown or directed, and align joints in both directions unless otherwise
shown.

H. Use procedures that will minimize damage or soiling of the units during installation. Replace units which are
damaged or cannot be adequately cleaned as directed.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM, GENERAL

A. Install primary suspension members and mechanical suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636
and manufacturer's written instructions to support required loads and to prevent deflection in excess of 1/360
of the span between supports. Water or laser level accurately in both directions, leveling to a tolerance of
1/8 in. in 12 ft.

B. Install suspension systems with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers
not less than 6 in. from each end and spaced 4 ft. maximum along each carrying channel or runner.
Coordinate spacing of hangers, carrying channels, runners and molding with the location of electrical
fixtures, sprinkler heads, and other items occurring in or on the ceiling. Splay hangers only where required
to miss obstructions and offset horizontal force by bracing or other approved methods.

C. Where ceilings are suspended below ductwork, piping or other building elements which are not suitable for
ceiling attachment due to strength limitations, restrictions of local authorities having jurisdiction, or ceiling
system manufacturer's limitations, provide additional supplemental framing, supports and related work as
required to span beneath these elements from suitable support locations. Design supplemental framing and
supports to accommodate the spans and loads to be sustained and to limit maximum deflections to the
criteria specified and to finish to the lines and levels shown.

D. Where ceilings provide lateral support for tops of partitions, coordinate with Section Gypsum Drywall for
provision of attachment clips required to secure partition to exposed mechanical suspension system. Utilize
hold down clips to secure acoustical panels on each side of partition, and provide diagonal bracing of
mechanical suspension system above partition utilizing min. 2-1/2 in. metal studs secured to mechanical
suspension system at max 4 ft o.c. and diagonally braced to structural slab above.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTIC BOARD, EXPOSED SYSTEM

A. Install board with edges resting on flanges of tees. Cut and fit board neatly against abutting surfaces and
penetrations. Support edges by wall moldings.

B. Install hold-down clips in areas shown and in areas where required by governing regulations or for
fire-resistance ratings; spacing as recommended by panel manufacturer.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSIBLE TILE SYSTEM

A. Attach main runners to carrying channels by means of channel clamps. Insert cross tees into main runners.

B. Install tile in cross tees in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Clean and repair surfaces that have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged. Comply with
manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work
that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

B. Protect acoustical ceilings during the construction period so that they will be without any indication of
deterioration or damage at the time of acceptance by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-1
SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment
devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AC: Articulation Class.
B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and
coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension system members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose
installation is specified in other Sections.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and
special moldings.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1:50.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 150-mm- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 300-mm- long Samples of each type,
finish, and color.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for
each acoustical panel ceiling.
F. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

A. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one
source from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following
requirements:
1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of
assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or
from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning
characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical
products per ASTM E 84:
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
Completion.
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened
packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from
moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof,
wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical
panel ceiling installation.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system,
and partition assemblies.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity
installed.
3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with
ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 400
mm away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in
ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by
Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern,
color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
C. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with
manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-
negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and
evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
include, but are not limited to, the following product manufacturers:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as
follows:
1. Type and Form:
2. Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.
C. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
D. LR: Not less than as indicated.
E. NRC: Not less than as indicated.
F. CAC: Not less than as indicated.
G. AC: Not less than as indicated.
H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

I. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
J. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
K. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings.
L. Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based.
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of
types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-
applied finish for type of system indicated.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe
Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching
hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that
imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable,
conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
a. Type: Cast-in-place anchors.
b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class
Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
c. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594,
Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor.
d. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with
ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy.
2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of
type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic.
3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.
4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct
Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 2.69-mm- diameter wire.
E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 22 mm wide; formed with 1-mmthick, galvanized steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating designation; with bolted connections and 8-mm- diameter
bolts.
G. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 610 mm o.c. on all
cross tees.

H. Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system designed to absorb impact
forces against acoustical panels.
I. Clean-Room Gasket System: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard system, including manufacturer's
standard gasket and related adhesives, tapes, seals, and retention clips, designed to seal out foreign material
from and maintain positive pressure in clean room.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMFOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
include, but are not limited to, the following product manufacturers:
B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Fire-Rated Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from
cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than Z90 coating designation, with prefinished 24-mm- wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Plated with metallic finish, as selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge
moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner
pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements and the following:
1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and
finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions
complying with for Alloy and Temper 6063-T5.
2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for
designating aluminum finishes.
3. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical
Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; organic coating: as specified below). Apply
baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and
painting.
a. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, primer/topcoat system with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.02 to
0.03 mm.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining
latex sealantcomplying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter
joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to
ASTM E 90.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or
abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling
installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of
each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected
ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated,
per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are
not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing,
countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions;
offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere
with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install
supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight
turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or
elevated temperatures.
6. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which
hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to
deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
7. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place
hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend
through forms into concrete.
8. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying
channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
9. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
10. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
11. Space hangers not more than 1200 mm o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless
otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 200 mm from ends of each member.
12. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits
established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend
bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms,
steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to
conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they
are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 400 mm o.c. and not more than 75 mm from
ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 3.2 mm in 3.6 m. Miter corners accurately
and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and
replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge
moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system
runners and moldings.
3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact
with top surface of runner flanges.
4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with
reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of
runners.
5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using
coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.
6. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-
resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise
indicated.
7. Install clean-room gasket system in areas indicated, sealing each panel and fixture as recommended by
panel manufacturer's written instructions.
8. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated
assembly.
A. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers and
anchors and fasteners shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do
not proceed with installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously
completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements.
1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20
percent completion but no panels have been installed.
a. Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 of every 10 power-actuated fasteners and
postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 890 N of tension; it will
also select one of every 2 postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test
them for 1957 N of tension.
b. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency
will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial
testing frequency.

B. Remove and replace acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners that do not pass tests and
inspections and retest as specified above.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system
members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage.
Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently
eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION

STONE FLOORING 09638-1

SECTION 09638

STONE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following applications of dimension stone:
1. Interior flooring.
1. Division 7 Section "Hot Fluid-Applied Waterproofing" for waterproofing, protection board under stone
paving.
2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in stonework with elastomeric
sealants.
3. Division 9 Section "Interior Stone Facing" for stone base.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. For each variety of stone. Include data on physical properties required by referenced ASTM standards.
2. For stone accessories and other manufactured products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 300 mm square. Include four or more
Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in
completed Work. Samples will establish the standard by which stone will be judged.
2. For each color of pointing mortar required.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.
E. Maintenance Data: For stone flooring to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for stone-care
products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for
products.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that custom fabricates stone.
B. Installer Qualifications: Stone fabricator.
C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single quarry, whether
specified in this Section or in other Sections of the Specifications, with resources to provide materials of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties.


1. For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from same source for
each.
2. Make quarried blocks available for examination by Architect for appearance characteristics.
3. Make stone slabs available for Architect to examine for appearance characteristics.
a. Architect will select aesthetically acceptable slabs and will indicate aesthetically unacceptable
portions of slabs.
b. Segregate slabs selected for use on Project and mark backs indicating approval.
c. Mark and photograph aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs as directed by Architect.
D. Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of cementitious material, grout, admixture, stone
accessory, and other material from single source.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical interior floor area as shown on Drawings.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in
mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
Completion.
A. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required,
using dollies with cushioned wood supports.
B. Store stone on pallets with nonstaining separators and nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to
prevent condensation.
C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious
materials that have become damp.
A. Cold-Weather Requirements for Interior Stone Flooring:
1. Do not set stone when air or material temperature is below 10 deg C.
2. Maintain temperature at 10 deg C or above in installation areas during installation and for 7 days after
completion unless higher temperatures are required by fabricator's or supplier's instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 External Stone Flooring
A. Type: Granite Stone
B. Finish: Horned
C. Color: Grey
D. Size: Not less than 2cm thick unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar
color indicated.


1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or III, and
hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144; except for joints narrower than 6 mm and pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with
100 percent passing 1.18-mm sieve.
E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use pigments with a
record of satisfactory performance in mortar and containing no carbon black.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Bayer, Industrial Chemicals Div.; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
b. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors.
c. Solomon Colors; SGS Mortar Colors.
F. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard acrylic-resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber water emulsion, serving as
replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for
use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
\
a. Carabond or equal approved.
G. Water: Potable.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Temporary Spacers: Resilient plastic, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thickness.
B. Cleavage Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 0.1 mm thick; or unperforated asphalt felt,
ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15).
C. Reinforcing Wire: Galvanized, welded, 1.57-mm- diameter wire; 50-by-50-mm mesh; comply with ASTM A 185
and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.
D. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as
recommended by stone producer and, if a sealer is specified, by sealer manufacturer. Do not use cleaning
compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.
E. Floor Sealer: Colorless, slip- and stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone
surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
.
a. Sealer recommended by the stone supplier.


2.4 MORTARMIXES
A. Mortar: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions, mixing
equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortar of
uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics.
1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent
agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium
chloride.
2. Combine mortar materials and thoroughly mix in a mechanical batch mixer unless otherwise indicated.
Discard mortar when it has reached initial set.
3. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together before adding any
water. Add only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed
into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small
portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do not
retemper or use partially hardened material.
B. Portland Cement-Lime Setting Mortar: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N. Use amount of water to
produce a stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive stone.
C. Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement and latex additive to a creamy consistency.
D. Pointing Mortar: Comply with requirements indicated above for setting mortar, including type and the following:
1. Pigmented Pointing Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color
required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10, by weight.
2.5 STONE FABRICATION
A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could
impair structural integrity or function.
1. Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do not impair
structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged by Architect.
B. Fabricate stone to comply with requirements indicated and with the following references:
1. For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."
2. For stone not otherwise indicated, comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design
Manual."
C. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop
Drawings.
1. Pattern: As indicated.
2. Stone Edges: As indicated.
3. Joint Width: As indicated.
D. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other natural markings to comply with
the following requirements:
1. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings occur.
2. Arrange units with veining as indicated on Drawings.
3. Arrange units in blend pattern.
4. Book match adjacent units in each row and between adjacent rows.
5. Book match adjacent units in each row and arrange units in end-slip pattern between adjacent rows.
6. Arrange four units adjoining center point of room in two-way book match, and arrange surrounding units in
side-slip and end-slip pattern.


7. Number stone units and note numbers on Shop Drawings to designate installed location of each unit.
E. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance,
material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron
particles.
1. Grade and select stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place.
2. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other
appearance characteristics represented in approved Samples and mockups.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone
flooring.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
B. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing and sealing
compounds, form oil, and laitance.
C. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by
thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds
that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.
A. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Cut lines straight and true and finish field-cut edges to match shop-cut
edges.
1. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone except for stone that is specified to have rough-split
edges.
B. Set stone to comply with Drawings and Shop Drawings. Match stone for color and pattern by using units
numbered in sequence as indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Scribe and field-cut stone as necessary to fit at obstructions. Produce neat joints of size specified or indicated.
D. Expansion- and Control-Joint Installation: Locate and install according to Drawings and Shop Drawings.
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation in Line: For positions shown in plan for edges of paving, flooring, ramps, steps, changes in color or
finish, and continuous joint lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 2400 mm, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm maximum.
B. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1.5 mm or 1/4 of nominal joint width, whichever is
less.


C. Variation in Surface Plane: Do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m, 6 mm in 6 m, or 10 mm maximum from level or slope
indicated.
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 0.8-mm difference between planes of
adjacent units.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF STONE DIRECTLY OVER CONCRETE
A. Saturate concrete with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface water about one
hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat to damp concrete and broom to provide an even coating that completely covers the
concrete. Do not exceed 1.5-mm thickness. Limit area of mortar-bed bond coat to avoid its drying out before
placing setting bed.
1. Place reinforcing wire mesh over concrete, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and supported so mesh
becomes embedded in middle of setting bed. Hold edges back from vertical surfaces about 13 mm.
C. Apply mortar bed immediately after applying mortar-bed bond coat. Spread, tamp, and screed to uniform
thickness at elevations required for setting stone to finished elevations indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone before initial set. Cut back, bevel
edge, and discard material that has reached initial set before stone can be placed.
E. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone on setting bed, apply uniform
1.5-mmthick bond coat to bed or to back of each stone unit.
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to bring
finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not
return to areas already set and disturb stone for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
G. Rake out joints to depth required to receive pointing mortar as units are set.
H. Point joints after setting. Fill full with mortar type and color indicated. Tool joints flat, uniform, and smooth, without
visible voids.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF STONE OVER CLEAVAGE MEMBRANE
A. Place cleavage membrane over substrates indicated to receive stone, lapped at least 100 mm at joints.
B. Place reinforcing wire fabric over cleavage membrane, lapped at least one full mesh at joints and supported so
mesh becomes embedded in middle of setting bed. Hold edges back from vertical surfaces about 13 mm.
C. Place mortar bed over cleavage membrane with reinforcing wire fabric fully embedded in middle of mortar bed.
Spread, tamp, and screed to uniform thickness at elevations required for setting stone to finished elevations
indicated.
D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with stone before initial set. Cut back, bevel
edge, and discard material that has reached initial set before stone can be placed.
E. Place stone before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing stone on setting bed, apply uniform
1.5-mmthick bond coat to bed or to back of each stone unit.
F. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to bring
finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not
return to areas already set and disturb stone for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
G. Rake out joints to depth required to receive pointing mortar as units are set.


A. Remove and replace stonework of the following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are
approved by Architect.
2. Defective joints.
3. Stone paving, flooring, and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups.
4. Stonework not complying with other requirements indicated.
B. Replace in a manner that result in stonework matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other
requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stonework as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling
joints.
D. Clean stonework after setting and grouting are complete. Use procedures recommended by stone fabricator for
types of application.
E. Apply sealer to cleaned stonework according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
B. Protect installed stonework during construction with nonstaining kraft paper. Where adjoining areas require
construction work access, cover stonework with a minimum of 20 mm untreated plywood over nonstaining kraft
paper.
C. Repellent coating to be added on final handover as recommended by the supplier.

END OF SECTION

PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900-1
SECTION 09900

PAINTS AND COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide painting in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1. Examine the requirements of the other technical Sections as to the location, extent and nature of
painting work specified therein and include such items to be painted under this Section as are not
included in the other Sections.
2. In general, paint all exposed surfaces except surfaces noted as pre-finished or not to be painted.
Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as adjacent materials or
areas. Specifically, "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels,
stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or
finish coats.

1. Factory finished items.
2. Priming of miscellaneous metals and structural steel.
3. Pavement marking.


A. Provide painting Work from a experienced firm that has specialized in such Work for at least 5 years, who is
experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance, and
who shall have undivided responsibility for the Work.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers, fillers and undercoat paint produced by the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.

C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating
types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be
acceptable. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products
named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers.

1.03 STANDARDS

1. SSPC Volume 1 "Good Painting Practice".
2. SSPC Volume 2 "Systems and Specifications".

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Color Samples: Submit two (2) labeled 12 in. x 12 in. samples on hardboard substrate, for each color,
sheen and texture duplicated to simulate final conditions. Show various stages of finish on displays.

B. Detailed Painting Schedule: Submit a "Detailed Painting Schedule" for review by the Engineer. Prepare this
schedule on the basis of the surfaces, types of paint materials, number of coats required, and list the brand
name of the product of the manufacturer proposed for each use. Indicate each material and cross-reference
specific coating, finish system, and application with identification related by manufacturer's catalog number
and general classification.


C. Product Data: Submit product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers.
Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling,
storage, and application of each material proposed for use. List each material and cross-reference the
specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by either by the actual formula or the
manufacturer's catalog and/or code number and general classification as suitable for duplication and
replacement purposes.

1.05 MOCK-UP

A. Prepare sample panels, after approval of paint displays, totaling approximately 100 sq. ft. in spaces
designated by the Engineer for his final review.


A. Deliver paint materials to the job site in original containers and packages, bearing the manufacturer's labels,
indicating name, type, brand, color name and number, application instructions, contents by volume, for
pigment, vehicle and volatile constituents. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, deliver paints ready-
mixed. Order in advance in large enough quantities and in ample time to facilitate the Work.

B. Store materials and equipment in a designated storage space on the site. Protect paint and associated
materials from freezing. Keep storage space neat, clean and accessible at all times. Protect floors from
paint spillage. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and
work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.


A. Do not paint when the air is dust-laden nor when weather and temperature conditions are unsuitable.
Maintain temperatures within the building at a minimum of 60 deg. F. during the painting and drying periods.

B. Apply paint only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are
between 50 deg. F. and 90 deg. F. Comply with manufacturer's recommendation when they are more
stringent with respect to application temperatures.

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%; or at temperatures
less than 5 deg. above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendation when they are more stringent with respect to application temperatures.

D. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and
heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods.

1.08 PROTECTION

A. Place paint or solvent soaked rags, waste or other materials which might constitute a fire hazard in metal
containers and remove from premises at the close of each day's work. Take every precaution to avoid
damage by fire.

B. Provide suitable coverings to protect surfaces not requiring painting. Protect work of other trades, whether
to be painted or not, against damage by painting operations. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or
replacing, and repainting, as required and acceptable to Owner. Comply with paint manufacturer's
recommendations regarding materials and methods to be utilized.

C. Remove or protect items such as hardware, hardware accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items
placed prior to painting. Reposition or remove protection upon completion of each space. Disconnect
equipment adjacent to walls by workmen skilled in these trades to permit painting of wall surfaces; replace
and reconnect after completion of painting.

D. Maintain wrappings or other factory applied protection furnished with finish hardware (or other items
provided by other trades) installed in areas where painting is required. If such protection is displaced or
removed, replace before painting work continues and maintain for the duration of painting work.

E. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. At completion of
construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are
compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Paint Materials: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide materials of the following manufacturers:

Exterior Interior

Jotun Pains. Crown paints
Equal approved. Equal approved.

C. Use products of the same manufacturer for succeeding coats. Where primer is shop applied to steel,
subsequent coats may be the product of another manufacturer provided the coatings are mutually
compatible. Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems
for various substrates.

D. Colors, textures and degree of luster will be as selected by the Engineer. Tint prime and undercoats
approximately to the shade of the final coat but with sufficient variation to distinguish them from the
preceding coat. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that
products named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers.

E. Standard Coating Terms and Specular Gloss Range : Standard coating terms and gloss ranges as defined
in ASTM D16 apply to this Section.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an
85-degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a
60-degree meter.
3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured
at a 60-degree meter.
4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a
60-degree meter.

F. In locations where ambient temperature-humidity conditions encourage the ready formation of mildew, use
paints with additional mildew inhibitive agent incorporated during the manufacturing process, of type and in
concentration recommended by the paint manufacturer to withstand such mildew formation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Prior to the start of the Work, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the Project site to review methods
and sequence of Work, special details and conditions, standard of workmanship, and other pertinent topics
related to the Work. The meeting shall include the Engineer, the Contractor, Contractor's project
superintendent, painting subcontractor's superintendent, painting manufacturer's representative, and any
other subcontractors whose work requires coordination with this work.

B. Review other areas of the Work in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for
various substrates.


Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Start of painting Work will
be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation, General
1. Prepare surfaces to receive paint; thoroughly clean of grime, grease, dirt, loose material and other
substances that may interfere with proper adhesion of paint. Provide barrier coats over
incompatible primers or remove and re-prime. Paint dry surfaces only.
2. Remove or protect hardware, hardware accessories, plates, signs, trim for mechanical work,
machined surfaces, lighting fixtures and similar items in place and not to be finish painted.
Disconnect and move equipment adjacent to areas scheduled to be painted. Reposition and
reconnect items and remove protection upon completion of each space.
3. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances
that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not
fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
4. Fill dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints and other irregularities with a filler suitable for the
purpose and, after setting, sand to a smooth finish.
5. Prime surfaces not more than 8 hours after cleaning except as otherwise specified by the prime
paint manufacturer.

B. Metals
1. General: Clean bare metal surfaces thoroughly of foreign matter such as mortar, plaster, grease,
rust, scale and dirt before priming coat is applied. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in
accordance with SSPC SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning", prior to any additional surface preparation
specified. Remove rust and mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning".
Where solder flux has been used, clean surface with solvent, or use mechanical tools to remove.
Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage and dry film thickness
specified. After erection is completed, touch-up heads of bolts, welded surfaces and other field
connections with specified primer.
2. Shop Primed Ferrous Metal Surfaces: Remove grease and oil with a cleaner recommended for
the purpose. Exercise care to prevent damage to shop coat. Touch-up abraded or marred shop
coats with paint used for priming or "universal primer" compatible with primer, topcoat, and field
surface preparation.
3. Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Aluminum and Stainless Steel Surfaces: Remove grease and oil with a
cleaner recommended for the purpose. Treat and roughen surfaces using either mechanical or

chemical means in accordance with recommendations of prime paint manufacturer. When
chemical compound is used rinse the chemical compound completely with clean, fresh water.

C. Concrete and Masonry Surfaces: Delay painting on concrete or masonry surfaces as long as practicable
within the limits of the Contract. Test surfaces for presence of alkali and neutralize as required. Test
surfaces for moisture content and do not paint surfaces which exceed manufacture's printed instructions.
Remove grease, oil, form release agents and efflorescence. Patch cracks and other blemishes to be
covered by paint. Neutralize concrete surfaces which have received capillary waterproofing, utilizing
materials and methods as recommended by the manufacturer and applicator of the capillary waterproofing.
1. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage
with pores filled in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching
cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to
dry, and vacuum before painting.

D. Plaster Work
1. Test plaster surfaces with a moisture meter and do not proceed with painting until the moisture
content satisfies the recommendation of the respective paint manufacturer.
2. Remove grit and loose particles and repair surface irregularities before paint is applied. Repair
cracks and holes with patching plaster, properly keyed to the existing plaster, and sandpaper
smooth. Patching plaster must be compatible with finish paint system.
3. Prime plaster surfaces with approved fiber mesh and an approved alkali-resistant primer. Spackle
imperfections in the plaster that becomes visible after the prime coat is applied. Make flush with
adjoining surface, and spot prime with the prime coat material. If the prime coat does not dry to a
uniform sheen over the entire surface, the areas that indicate suction shall also be spot primed
before applying succeeding coats.

E. Woodwork
1. Sandpaper woodwork to remove roughness, loose edges, slivers or splinters and then brush to
remove dust. Wash off grease or dirt with an approved cleaner.
2. Clean knots, pitch streaks or visible sap spots of residue and treat with two coats of "Formula WP-
578 Knot Sealer" (Western Pine Association). Allow at least two hours between the application of
the first and second coats. Prime millwork on all sides before installation. Treat surfaces of open-
grained woods with paste filler. Thin paste filler to brushing consistency with turpentine and apply
in two coats, with stiff, short-bristled brushes. Allow filler to dry for one hour, then rub surfaces
across the grain with coarse burlap or pads of excelsior until the surplus filler is removed. After the
primer or paste filler has dried, fill nail holes and other indentations with putty, flush with the
adjacent surfaces. Sand wood surfaces smooth with No. 00 sandpaper and remove dust.

F. Pipe Covering and Insulation: Clean surfaces of pipe, duct and equipment insulation (such as canvas
jackets and troweled-on insulation), of loose, foreign and objectionable material prior to priming or sealing.

3.04 WORKMANSHIP

A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicator and techniques
best suited for substrates and type of material being applied. Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as

B. Mix materials thoroughly before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; strain if necessary,
before using. Do not mix surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and re-strain material
before using. Do not adulterate ready-mixed materials except in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions. If no printed instructions appear on the container, obtain this information in writing from the
manufacturer. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

C. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of
the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient
differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

D. Apply materials with care to a uniform and proper film thickness, showing no runs, holidays, sags, crawls or
other defects. Apply with a minimum of brush marks. Finish surfaces shall be uniform in sheen, color and
texture.

E. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to
the manufacturer's directions.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.

F. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do
not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand
between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to the
manufacturer's directions. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final
coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that
surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness
equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

G. Apply two thin coats of paint to bare wood surfaces in sliding contact so as not to interfere with proper
operation. Do not paint other materials in sliding contact. Remove paint applied to such surfaces.

H. Paint access doors, plates, panel boxes, steel grilles, louvers, convector covers, registers, exposed prime
painted hardware and the like in colors as selected. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or
hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. Paint interior surfaces of ducts or piping where visible through
registers or grilles with a flat, non-specular paint type appropriate to surface to be painted. Finish paint
doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. Do not paint nameplates on equipment
or over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

I. Do not paint heating elements and pipes while they contain heat. Keep them cold until after the final coat
has thoroughly dried.

J. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in
equipment rooms and occupied spaces.

1. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to uninsulated metal piping, uninsulated
plastic piping, pipe hangers and supports, tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes,
visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets, duct,
equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket material, and
mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

2. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, switchgear, panelboards and electrical
equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

K. Allow coats to dry and cure thoroughly before succeeding coats are applied; allow a minimum of 24 hours
between applications on any one surface unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer.

L. Sandpaper undercoats on interior metal thoroughly and uniformly to provide a smooth, even surface for
finish coats.

M. Surfaces given a prime or body coat of paint under other Sections of these Specifications will not require
such coats of paint under this Section. Repair existing prime coatings with same primer or undercoat unless
otherwise specified.

N. Furnish competent technical assistance by the paint manufacturer on the job to ensure proper application of
his material.

O. When using paint with additional mildew inhibitive formulation, observe the procedures and precautions in
the paint manufacturer's printed instructions for the use of this product.

3.05 SCHEDULE OF EXTERIOR PAINTING

A. General: Paint exterior surfaces exposed to view in accordance with this Schedule of Exterior Painting,
except as specifically shown or specified.

B. Ferrous Metal

1. Shop-Primed: Compatible with the primer. Provide the manufacturer recommended dry film
thickness for each coat; semi-gloss finish coats;

1st coat - Alkyd Semi Gloss
2nd coat - Alkyd Semi Gloss

2. Galvanized: Compatible with the surface preparer. Provide the manufacturer recommended dry
film thickness for each coat; semi-gloss finish coats;

1st coat - Epoxy Primer
2rd coat - Alkyd Semi Gloss

C. Aluminum: Compatible with the surface preparer. Provide the manufacturer recommended dry film
thickness for each coat; semi-gloss finish coats;

1st coat - Epoxy Primer

D. Portland Cement Stucco

1st coat - Acrylic Latex Flat
2nd coat - Acrylic Latex Flat

E. Concrete, Concrete Masonry Units

1st coat - Latex Block Filler
2nd coat - Elastomeric Acrylic Latex
3rd coat - Elastomeric Acrylic Latex

F. Wood

1. Stain Finish

1st coat - Stain Penetrating Wood Preservative
2nd coat - Clear Penetrating Wood Preservative

2. Gloss, Semi-Gloss or Eggshell Finish

1st coat - Wood Primer
2nd coat - Alkyd Paint
3rd coat - Alkyd Paint

3. Flat Finish

1st coat - Wood Primer
2nd coat - Acrylic Latex
3rd coat - Acrylic Latex
3.06 SCHEDULE OF INTERIOR PAINTING

A. General: Paint interior surfaces exposed to view in accordance with this Schedule of Interior Painting,
except as specifically shown or specified.

B. Ferrous Metal

1. Shop-Primed

1st coat - Enamel Undercoater
2nd coat - Alkyd Eggshell Enamel

2. Galvanized

1st coat - Water Based Acrylic Primer
2rd coat - Alkyd Eggshell Enamel

3. Semi-Gloss Epoxy Finish: One of the following systems:

a. Pittsburgh Paints

1st coat - "Speedhide Primer 6-712"; 2.0 mils d.f.t.
2nd coat - "Pitt-Glaze Acrylic Epoxy"; 3.0 - 4.0 mils d.f.t.(PPG)
3rd coat - "Pitt-Glaze Acrylic Epoxy"; 3.0 - 4.0 mils d.f.t.(PPG)

b. DuPont Company

1st coat - "Tufcote 72P"; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.
2nd coat - "Corlar 76P"; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.
3rd coat - "Corlar 76P"; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.

c. Devoe Paints

1st coat - "Mirrulac No. 13101 "; 2.0 - 2.5 mils d.f.t.
2nd coat - "Gardcote-WB No. 25U8xx "; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.
3rd coat - "Gardcote-WB No. 25U8xx "; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.

d. Carboline

1st coat - "Multibond 120"; 1.2 - 1.5 mils d.f.t.
2nd coat - "Sanitile 250 WB"; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.
3rd coat - "Sanitile 250 WB"; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.

C. Plaster and Fiberglass Reinforced Gypsum

1. Flat Finish

1st coat - Latex Primer
2nd coat - Latex Flat
3rd coat - Latex Flat

2. Eggshell Finish


2nd coat - Latex Eggshell
3rd coat - Latex Eggshell

3. Satin Finish

2nd coat - Enamel Undercoater
3rd coat - Alkyd Satin Enamel

4. Semi-Gloss Epoxy Finish: One of the following:


1st coat - "Latex Primer Sealer, 6-2"; 1.0 - 1.5 mils d.f.t.
2nd coat - "Pitt-Glaze Acrylic Epoxy"; 3.0 - 4.0 mils d.f.t.
3rd coat - "Pitt-Glaze Acrylic Epoxy"; 3.0 - 4.0 mils d.f.t.

b. DuPont Company

1st coat - "310 Acrylic"; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.

c. Devoe Paint

1st coat - "Wonde-Prime No. 51701"; 1.5 mils d.f.t.
2nd coat - "Gardcote-WB No. 25U8xx Tru-Glaze-WB No. 128"; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.
3rd coat - "Gardcote-WB No. 25U8xx Tru-Glaze-WB No. 128"; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.

d. Carboline

1st coat - "Multibond 120"; 1.2 - 1.5 mils d.f.t.

D. Concrete, Concrete Masonry Units

1. Enamel Finish

1st coat - Latex Block Filler
2nd coat - Enamel Undercoater

2. Epoxy Finish


1st coat - "Pitt-Glaze Latex Block Filler 16-90"; 12.5 mils d.f.t.
2nd coat - "Pitt-Glaze Acrylic Epoxy"; 3.0 - 4.0 mils d.f.t.
3rd coat - "Pitt-Glaze Acrylic Epoxy"; 3.0 - 4.0 mils d.f.t.

b. DuPont Company

1st coat - "300P Acrylic Block Filler"; Apply to fill

c. Carboline

1st coat - "Flexxide Masonry Block Filler"; Apply to fill

d. Devoe Paints

1
st
coat - "No. 52903 Block Filler"; Apply to fill
2nd coat - "Gardcote-WB No. 25U8xx"; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.
3rd coat - "Gardcote-WB No. 25U8xx"; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.


3. Semi-Gloss Epoxy Finish Utilized as Access Floor Concrete Slab Sealer:

a. Devoe Paints

1st coat - "Gardcote-WB No. 25U8xx" ; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.
2nd coat - "Gardcote-WB No. 25U8xx" ; 2.0 - 3.0 mils d.f.t.

E. Wood, Except Shop Finished

1st coat - Alkyd Primer Sealer
2nd coat - Enamel Undercoat

F. Piping and Mechanical Equipment: Paint piping, pipe hangers and supports, heat exchangers, tanks,
ductwork, insulation, motors, electrical conduits, switchgear and other mechanical and electrical equipment
except equipment which is non-ferrous metal, plated, finished by manufacturers, permanently concealed or
noted to be painted under other Sections. Properly clean, prepare and finish as specified. Paint materials
shall be heat-resisting type when applied to heating lines and equipment.

1. Uninsulated Piping Ductwork, Fittings and Equipment

1st coat - Enamel Undercoater
2nd coat - Alkyd Eggshell Enamel

2. Insulated Piping, Ductwork, Fittings and Equipment

1st coat - Latex Flat

3. Machinery and Equipment

1st coat - Epoxy Type Machinery Enamel
2nd coat - Epoxy Type Machinery Enamel

H. Pipe Identification

1. Comply with ANSI A13.1 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems".

2. Provide plastic coated fabric pipe markers, "All-Temperature" labels (W.H. Brady), or approved
equal. Indicate the pipe contents in printed, block letters. Provide labels of such length as to
completely circumscribe the pipe and overlap not less than 1 in. upon one edge.

3. Provide flow markers consisting of labels similar to the pipe markers with a large black arrow
printed on the same background color to indicate the direction of flow of material in the pipe.

4. On each side of walls or floors through which pipes pass, place a pipe marker and a flow marker
on each pipe Place markers adjacent to valves and fittings. For exposed piping locate markers to
be clearly visible to a person standing on the floor.

5. On pipes or covering 1 in. and smaller in diameter requiring identifying markings, attach metal tag
of not less than 1 in. in diameter, with lettering etched and filled with enamel, in lieu of stencils.

3.07 PAINT COLOR TYPES

A. Reference to a particular manufacturer's number or color name is used only as a convenience for the
Engineer in order to establish the Project color requirements. These references are not intended to describe
the required generic paint systems. For generic paint systems requirements, refer to the "Schedule of
Exterior Painting" and the "Schedule of Interior Painting" as applicable to the respective conditions of use.

B. The Engineer's selection of paint colors are indicated by color type; designated "P- ". If suffixes "A" through
"E" are utilized on the Finish Schedule, they denote the paint type's specular gloss range (adjust specified
paint system as per manufacturers recommendations to achieve desired sheen) as follows:
A - Flat Finish
B - Eggshell Finish
C - Satin Finish
D - Semi-Gloss Finish
E - Gloss Finish
F - Fine Textured Finish
G - Medium Textured Finish

C. Except as otherwise noted, use flat finish on ceilings and soffits, eggshell finish on walls and fascias, satin or
semi-gloss finish on doors and frames, semi-gloss finish on convector covers and metal trim, and epoxy
finish on ceilings and walls in wet spaces where shown or specified.

D. Samples showing color and sheen selected by the Engineer for specific items or areas specified to receive
paint finishes are available for examination in the Engineer's office.

E. Color Schedule: The following schedule shall be considered as a guide only to color requirements, subject
to the Engineer's modification or approval:

1. Paint Type (PT01): Mfr. Name: Jotun; Color: RAL 9010; Eggshell finish.

2. Paint Type (PT02): Mfr. Name: Jotun; Color : RAL 9011; Eggshell finish.

3. Paint Type (PT03): Mfr. Name: Jotun; Color: RAL 6018; Eggshell finish.

4. Paint Type (PT04): Mfr. Name: Jotun; Color: RAL 9010.

5. Paint Type (PT05): Mfr. Name: Jotun; Color: RAL 7023.

6. Paint Type (PT06): Mfr. Name: Jotun; Color: RAL 9011 (Black); Satin finish.

7. Paint Type (PT07): Mfr. Name: Jotun; Color: RAL 9010; Satin finish.

8. Paint Type (PT08): Mfr. Name: Jotun; Color: RAL 9010; Eggshell Matt.

9. Paint Type (PT09): Mfr. Name. Jotun,; Color: RAL 9007; Semi-Matt Finish.

10. Paint Type (PT10): Mfr. Name. Jotun,; Color: RAL 6018; Satin Finish.

11. Paint Type (PT11): Mfr. Name. Jotun,; Color: RAL 6018.

12. Paint Type (PT12): Mfr. Name. Jotun,; Color: RAL 6018; Eggshell Finish.

3.08 CLEANING

A. At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from
the site.

B. Remove paint spots, oil or stains upon adjacent surfaces not requiring painting and leave entire job clean.

C. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing
and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.


A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner
deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:

1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material
being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in the presence of the Contractor.

2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by
the Owner:
a. Quantitative materials analysis.
b. Abrasion resistance.
c. Apparent reflectivity.
d. Flexibility.
e. Washability.
f. Absorption.
g. Accelerated weathering.
h. Dry opacity.
I. Accelerated yellowness.
j. Recoating.
k. Skinning.
l. Color retention.
m. Alkali and mildew resistance.

3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the
Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint
surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if,
upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.

END OF SECTION

PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10165-1

SECTION 10165

PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plastic laminate toilet compartments.

1. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metal Work Concealed steel support members.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A208.1 - Wood Particleboard.

B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.

C. NEMA LD 3 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates.

D. NBS PS 1 (National Institute of Standards and Technology) - Construction and Industrial Plywood.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall,floor, and ceiling
supports, door swings.

B. Product Data: Submit data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.

C. Samples: Submit two 500 x 500 mm in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring
special attention.

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall and ceiling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLASTIC LAMINATE TOILET COMPARTMENTS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Knierim GmbH & Co. KG. (DOMO)
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
3. Alliance Enamel Steel Corporation NV (ac-cubes)
4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Floor anchored.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Particleboard for Core: ANSI A208.1,] with waterproof resin binder impregnated grade, sanded faces.

B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD-3 High pressure melamine laminate, General Purpose Type 1.3 mm thick.
E. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard type; prevent delamination from moisture and heat.


D. Toilet Compartments: Plastic laminate finished, floor-mounted unbraced.

E. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Plastic laminate adhesive and pressure bonded to faces and edges of
particleboard core, with beveled corners and edges; edges of cut-outs sealed.
1. Plastic Laminate Color: as selected, matt finish.

F. Door and Panel Dimensions:
1. Thickness: 19 mm.
2. Door Width: 610 mm.
3. Accessible Door Width: 910 mm.
4. Height: 1830 mm.
5. Stiles size: 19x200-mm fixed to floor anchored sleeve.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Pilaster Shoe: Formed ASTM A666 Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish, 75 mm high, concealing floor
fastenings. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with
pilaster.

B. Head Rails: Hollow stainless steel tube, 25 x 41 mm size, with anti-grip profiles.

C. Brackets: Satin stainless steel to color as selected.

D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel.
1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through-bolts and nuts; tamper proof.

E. Hardware: Satin Stainless steel:
1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two for each door.
2. Nylon bearings.
3. Thumb turn door latch with exterior emergency access feature.
4. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch.
5. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one for each compartment, mounted on door.
6. Furnish door pull for outswinging doors.
7. Furnish continuous channel brackets at walls.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures.

C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Maintain 9 to 13 mm space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters.

B. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.

C. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets.

D. Replace damaged materials with new materials.



A. Maximum Variation From Indicated Position: 6 mm.

B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 3 mm.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 5 mm.

B. Adjust hinges to position doors in position when unlatched. Return out-swinging doors to closed position.

C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.

3.05 SCHEDULES

As indicated on drawings.

END OF SECTION

LOUVERS 10200-1
SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers.
2. Fixed, wooden louvers.
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter joints between louver frames and
adjoining construction.
2. Division 15 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless
otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and
mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.
A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver
components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and
anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act on vertical projection of louvers.
1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum
change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.
C. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, Air-Leakage, and Wind-Driven Rain Ratings: Provide louvers complying with
performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those
provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other Work. Show blade profiles, angles, and spacing.

LOUVERS 10200-2
1. For installed louvers indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of metal finish required.
E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency or by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers through one source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same
type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for
fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without field measurements. Coordinate
construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209M, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise
recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy 319.
D. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
2. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-
steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for
concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

LOUVERS 10200-3
A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping
and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to
permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.
1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern unless
horizontal mullions are indicated.
2. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints unless continuous vertical assemblies are
indicated.
C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce
uniform appearance.
D. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.
E. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication
and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
1. Frame Type: Channel, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
G. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or
1830 mm o.c., whichever is less.
1. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver
frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split
mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction.
2. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded blades and with fully recessed
mullions at corners.
H. Where indicated, provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers.
I. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, unless
otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.
J. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as
standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly
makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.
2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUMLOUVERS
A. Horizontal Storm-Resistant Louver:
1. Louver Depth: As indicated.
2. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: As required to comply with structural performance requirements, but
not less than 2.0 mm.
3. Performance Requirements:
a. Free Area: Not less than 0.46 sq. m for 1.2-m- wide by 1.2-m- high louver.
b. Air Performance: Not more than 25-Pa static pressure drop at 3.0-m/s free-area velocity.
c. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99 percent effectiveness when subjected to a rain
fall rate of 75 mm per hour and a wind speed of 13 m/s 200 mm per hour and a wind speed of
22.4 m/s at a core area intake velocity of 1.5 m/s.
4. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Horizontal, Sightproof, Drainable-Blade Louver:

LOUVERS 10200-4
1. Louver Depth: 125 mm.
2. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: As required to comply with structural performance requirements, but
not less than 2.0 mm
3. Mullion Type: Exposed.
4. Performance Requirements:
a. Free Area: Not less than 0.77 sq. m for 1.2-m- wide by 1.2-m- high louver.
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 3.8 m/s.
c. Air Performance: Not more than 25-Pa static pressure drop at 2.8-m/s free-area velocity.
2.4 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at louvers indicated.
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.
2. Screening Type: Bird screening.
B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 150 mm from each
corner and at 300 mm o.c.
C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.
1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce
extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.
2. Finish: Mill finish, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Type: Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames for permanently securing screen mesh.
D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:
1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 12.7-mm- square mesh, 1.6-mm wire.
2. Bird Screening: Stainless steel, 12.7-mm- square mesh, 1.19-mm wire.
3. Bird Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 19 by 1.27 mm thick.
2.5 BLANK-OFF PANELS
A. Insulated, Blank-off Panels: Laminated metal-faced panels consisting of insulating core surfaced on back and
front with metal sheets.
1. Thickness: As indicated.
2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.8-mm nominal thickness.
3. Insulating Core: Unfaced mineral-fiber or foamed-plastic rigid insulation board.
4. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer's standard extruded-
aluminum-channel frames, not less than 2.0-mm nominal thickness, with corners mitered and with same
finish as panels.
5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with 3.2-by-25-mm PVC compression gaskets.
6. Panel Finish: Same type of finish applied to louvers, but black color.
7. Attach blank-off panels to back of louver frames with stainless-steel, sheet metal screws.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for
applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish louvers after assembly.
2.7 ALUMINUMFINISHES

LOUVERS 10200-5
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating
aluminum finishes.
B. High-Performance Organic-Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals;
Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below).
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
written instructions.
1. Fluoropolymer 4-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard three-coat, thermocured system consisting
of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both
color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight;
complying with AAMA 2605.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that
are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to
protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of
corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and
refinish entire unit or provide new units.
F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of
bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where
weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during
louver installation.
A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil
during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning.

LOUVERS 10200-6
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes.
Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If
results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new
units.
1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is
compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION

ACCESS (COMPUTER) FLOORING 10270-1
SECTION 10270

ACCESS (COMPUTER) FLOORING

Access Floor Panels and Finishes:

Panels: Cementitious filled formed steel, gravity held panels with free standing pedestal system. Under-
floor plenum dividers, cutouts, service outlets, grilles, and portable ramps will be specified where required.

Finish: Panels to be factory finished with anti-static type VCT flooring.
Loading Requirements: Access flooring systems will be required to withstand the following loads and stresses
within limits and under conditions indicated, as determined by testing manufacturer's current standard products
according to referenced procedures in CISCA A/F, "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors":
Concentrated-Load Performance (Per CISCA A/F, Section I, "Concentrated Loads"): 4448 N.
Ultimate-Load Performance (Per CISCA A/F, Section II, "Ultimate Loading"): A safety factor of 3 times
the concentrated load performance.

Rolling-Load Performance (Per CISCA A/F, Section III, "Rolling Loads): CISCA A/F Wheel 1 Rolling
Load: 3559 N.
Pedestal Axial-Load Performance: Withstands a 22.24 kN axial load per CISCA A/F, Section V,
"Pedestal Axial Load Test."

Floor Panel Impact-Load Performance: Withstands an impact load of 445 N when dropped from 914
mm onto a 6.5-sq. cm area located anywhere on panel, without failing. Failure is defined as collapse of
access flooring system.

Product References:

Maxcess Technologies, Inc. USA; RWC-100.
Tate Access Floors, Inc., USA; ConCore 1000.

END OF SECTION

TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810-1
SECTION 10810

TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide toilet accessories in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1. Mirrors not designated as Toilet Accessories.
2. Electrical connections to power source for electrical toilet accessories.


A. For each type of accessory specified, provide products produced by a single firm which has been
manufacturing toilet accessories for not less than 5 years.

1.03 STANDARDS

A. Except as modified by governing codes and the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions
and recommendations of the following:
1. Wiring Between Motors and Controls: Comply with the National Electrical Code.
2. Motors and Controls: Comply with the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
3. NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual".
4. Industrial Fasteners Institute "Fastener Standards Book".


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings for toilet accessory cutouts required in other work; include
templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring
devices.

B. Samples: Submit full size samples of each toilet accessory specified, as requested. Accepted samples may
be used in the final installation.

C. Schedule: Submit a schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes and installation locations by room for each
toilet accessory item specified. Use designations indicated in the Schedule of Accessories specified herein
and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.

D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type toilet
accessory specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions, gages of metals,
profiles, method of mounting, specified options and finishes.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit three (3) copies of the manufacturer's operating and
maintenance manuals, including parts lists for the electrical toilet accessories.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery of Materials: Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened protective containers fully identified with
manufacturer's name, trade name, type of items, size, color finish and other information required for full
identification.

B. Storage of Materials: Store materials in unopened containers. Store off the ground and under cover,
protected from damage by the elements.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate toilet accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference with
and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the
Work.

1.07 WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under
other provisions of the Contract Documents and are in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties

B. Warranty: Provide a written warranty , directly to the Owner, for a period of five years, for mirrors against
visible silver spoilage defects. Upon notification of such defects, make necessary replacements at the
convenience of the Owner.

C. Warranty , Electric Hand Dryers: Provide a written warranty directly to the Owner, for a period of ten (10)
years for the electric hand dryers against defects. Upon notification of such defects, make necessary
replacements at the convenience of the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCESSORIES MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, AISI Type 302 or 304 with No. 4 finish, for all toilet accessories unless
otherwise specified.

B. Brass
1. Leaded and Unleaded Flat Products: ASTM B19.
2. Rods, Shapes, Forgings and Flat Products with Finished Edges: ASTM B16.
3. Castings: ASTM B30.

C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366, cold rolled, commercial quality, surface preparation and metal pretreatment as
required for applied finish.

D. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A\, Grade G60.

E. Chrome Plating: ASTM B456, Service Condition No. SC2; US26D finish. On brass, nickel coating applied
either directly to the base metal or over a coating of copper. On steel, nickel coating applied over a coating
of copper.

F. Mirrors: ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q
1
, 3 in. thick unless otherwise specified. Mirrors shall have
a uniform coating of silver, protected by a film of electrolytically deposited copper and a protective organic
coating.

G. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153, hot dip galvanized after fabrication.

H. Fastening Devices: Stainless steel or cadmium plated steel, concealed in the finished work wherever
possible. Exposed screws shall be theft-proof, flat head, countersunk, finished to match the accessory
where exposed. Furnish two (2) special tools per floor.

I. All Other Materials: Manufacturer's standard for the items required or type best suited for the intended use.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Recessed Units: Except where otherwise shown, fabricate units of all welded construction, without mitered
corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide fasteners and
anchorage that are fully concealed when unit is in the closed position.

B. Surface Mounted Units: Except where otherwise shown, fabricate units with tight seams and joints and all
edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide fasteners
and anchorage that are fully concealed when unit is in the closed position.

C. Manufacturer's nameplates on exposed faces of units will not be permitted. Provide identification of each
accessory item indicating manufacturer's name and product model number either on the back of the
accessory or on a surface not exposed to view utilizing printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate
indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.

D. Keys: Unless otherwise indicated, provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring
internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six (6) keys to Owner's representative and
obtain receipt.

2.03 MANUFACTURER

A. Specified proprietary designations are from the current catalogs of the indicated product manufacturers and
suppliers and establish the minimum standards of design, dimension and quality. Alternate products for
each application manufactured by others will be considered, provided they satisfy the established
requirements.

2.04 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed
in the same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer.

B. Towel Rod - Long (TA-1): Mfr. No. 40808000 (Hansgrohe Axor); Stark Towel Holder; finish: Chrome;
length: 930mm.

C. Towel Rod - Short (TA- 2): Mfr. No. 40806000 (Hansgrohe Axor); Stark Towel Holder; finish: Chrome;
length: 730mm.

D. (TA-3): NOT USED

E. Illuminated Magnifying Mirror (TA-4): Mfr. No. 7354000 (Hansgrohe Axor); Princess De Luxe and Cosmetic
Mirror with plug and integrated Power Point; finish: Chrome.

F. Robe Hook (TA-5): Mfr. No. 40837000 (Hansgrohe Axor); Stark Robe Hook; finish: Chrome.

G. Soap Dish (TA-6): (Hansgrohe Axor); Nile Stone Marble Soap Dish; finish: White Marble.

H. Toilet Paper Holder - Double (TA-7): Mfr. No. 40836000 (Hansgrohe Axor); Stark Roll Holder; finish:
Chrome; 256mm.

I. (TA-8): NOT USED

J. Facial Tissue Holder (TA-9): To Be Determined (Via Motif); Free Standing Tissue Holder supplied by others.

K. Shower Curtain Rod (TA-10): Mfr. No. 1939B & 1139R/6 (Ginger); Synchro Shower Rod Brackets & 6 foot
Shower Curtain Rod; finish: Chrome.

L. (TA-11): NOT USED

M. (TA-12): NOT USED


N. (TA-13): NOT USED

O. Mirror Defogger (TA-14): (Demista); Heated Mirror Pads; Size to be selected.

P. Hair Dryer (TA-15): Aliseo Classic (Aliseo); finish: Beige.

Q. Shower Enclosure Panel (TA-16 ): Custom Frameless Glass Panel (Ketchum); Custom size; finish: Clear
Glass with Chrome Hardware.
R. Shower Door (TA- 17): Custom Frameless Glass Door (Ketchum); Custom size; Clear Glass with Chrome
Hardware.

S. Shower Enclosure Panel (TA-18): Custom Frameless Glass Panel (Ketchum); Custom size; finish: Clear
Glass with Chrome Hardware.

T. Grab Bar (TA-19): Mfr. No. 40830000 (Hansgrohe Axor); Stark Grip Bar; finish: Chrome; 430mm.

U. Trash Can (TA-20): To Be Determined (Via Motif); with metal lining supplied by others.

V. Towel Bar -Long (TA-21): Mfr. No. AETB 24 (Waterworks); Aero Towel Bar; finish: Gold Plated; 24 inch.

W. Towel Bar - Short (TA-22): Mfr. No. AETB 18 (Waterworks); Aero Towel Bar; finish: Gold Plated; 18 inch.

X. Lotion Dispenser (TA-23): Mfr. No. 82.435.970.00 (Dornbracht); Tara Deck-Mounted Lotion
Dispenser;finish: Polished Chrome.

Y. Illuminating Magnifying Mirror (TA-24): Mfr. No. 7162 (Mirror Brot); Duplex Electric Mirror; finish: Gold;
extends 18 inches from wall.

Z. Robe Hook - two (TA-25): Mfr. No. AERH 28(Waterworks); Aero Robe Hook; finish: Gold Plated.

AA. Soap Dish (TA-26 ): (D.I.G.S.); Nile Stone Marble Soap Dish; finish: Alabaster Stone.

BB. Toilet Paper Holder (TA-27): Mfr. No. AEPH 19 (Waterworks); Aero Paper Holder; finish: Gold Plated.

CC. Spare Toilet Paper Holder (TA-28): Mfr. No. AEPH 19 (Waterworks); Aero Paper Holder; finish: Gold
Plated.

DD. Facial Tissue Holder (TA-29): To Be Determined (Via Motif); Free Standing Tissue Holder supplied by
others.

EE. (TA-30): NOT USED

FF. (TA-31): NOT USED

GG. (TA-32): NOT USED

HH. (TA-33): NOT USED

II. Mirror Defogger (TA-34): (Demista); Heated Mirror Pads; Size to be selected.

JJ. Hair Dryer (TA-35): Aliseo Classic (Aliseo); finish: Beige.

KK. Shower Door (TA- 36): Custom Frameless Glass Door (Ketchum);Custom size; Clear Glass with Gold
Plated Hardware.

LL. Grab Bar (TA-37): Custom to match Aero Accessories (Waterworks); finish: Gold Plated.

MM. Shower Curtain Rod (TA-38): Mfr. No. 1939B & 1139R/6 (Ginger); Chelsea Shower Rod Brackets & 6 foot
Shower Curtain Rod; finish: Gold.

NN. Trash Can (TA-39): To Be Determined; with metal lining supplied by others.

OO. Towel Rod (TA-41): Mfr. No. 36.10.40.26 Kubic 16 in. Towel Rod (Ginger); finish: Polished Chrome.

PP. Towel Rod (TA-42): Mfr. No. 36.10.60.26 Kubic 24 in. Towel Rod (Ginger); finish: Polished Chrome.

QQ. Mirror (TA-43): Mfr. No. 36.80.51.050 Kubic Frameless Mirror (Ginger); 16 inch x 34 inch.
RR. Robe Hook (TA-44): Mfr. No. 36.30.02.26. Kubic Double Robe Hook (Ginger); finish: Polished Chrome.

SS. Toilet Paper Holder (TA-45): Mfr. No. 36.14.81.26 (Ginger); finish: Polished Chrome; 2 inch x 6.7 inch.

TT. Spare Toilet Paper Holder (TA-45A): Mfr. No. 36.14.81.26 (Ginger); finish: Polished Chrome; 2 inch x 6.7
inch.

UU. (TA-46): NOT USED

VV. (TA-47): NOT USED

WW. Grab Bar (TA-48): Mfr. No. 662 (Ginger); finish: Polished Chrome; 18 inch length.

XX. Shower Curtain Rod (TA-59): Mfr. No. 1139R/6 (Ginger); finish: Polished Chrome; 6 foot length.

ZZ. (TA-60): NOT USED

AAA. Double Toilet Tissue Holder (TA-61): Mfr. No. 428 (Ginger); finish: Polished Chrome; 11 inch x 3.5 inch x
1.2 inch high.

BBB. Paper Towel Dispenser / Trash Bin (TA-62): Mfr. No. B-36903 (Bobrick); finish: Satin Stainless Steel; 13
inch x 31-1/8 inch x 3-5/8 inch.

CCC. Grab Bars (TA-63): Mfr. No. B-6806, 1-1/2 inch diameter (Bobrick); finish: Satin Stainless Steel.

DDD. Coat Hook (TA-64): Mfr. No. 16.560.01 (Dline); finish: Polished Stainless Steel; 30mm dia. x 34mm.

EEE. Soap Dispenser (TA-65): Mfr. No. 14.7045.02 (Dline); finish: Satin Stainless Steel; 205mm high x 85mm
wide

FFF. (TA-66): NOT USED

GGG. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit (TA-67): Mfr. No. B-35303 (Bobrick); finish: Satin Stainless Steel; 13 in. wide
x 18-15/16 in. high x 3-5/8 in. deep, recessed 9/16 in. above surface.

HHH. Hand Dryer (TA-68): Airspeed Dryer (World Dryer); finish: Brushed Chrome; 10-1/8 in. wide x 11-5/8 in.
high x 7 in. deep

III. Roll paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle (TA-69): Mfr. No. B-39603 (Bobrick); finish : Satin
Stainless Steel; 16-1/26 in. wide x 41-1/4 in. high x 8-7/8 in. deep, recessed 9/16 in. above surface.

JJJ. Soap Dispenser (TA-70): Mfr. No. B-8221 (Bobrick); Lavatory- Mounted Soap Dispenser (serves two toilet
compartments); finish: Satin Stainless Steel.

KKK. Sanitary Disposal (TA-71): Mfr. No. B-354 (Bobrick); Partition- Mounted Sanitary Disposal (serves two toilet
compartments); finish: Satin Stainless Steel.

2.05 TOILET AND SHOWER DOORS AND PARTITIONS

A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed
surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, oil canning, distortions, rollermarks, stains, discolorations, or
other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.

B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 301, 302 or 304, minimum 20 gage.
1. Panels: 20 gage.
2. Pilasters: 18 gage.
3. Doors: 22 gage.
4. Concealed Reinforcement: 14 gage for tapping, 12 gage for anchoring devices.

C. Core Filler: Manufacturer's standard rot-proof and vermin-proof, resin impregnated sound deadening,
corrugated or honeycomb type core material.

D. Adhesive: Manufacturer recommended adhesive.

E. Brackets: Stainless steel of manufacturer's standard plain design.

F. Pilaster Shoes: Stainless steel, minimum 20 gage, of manufacturer's standard design, not less than 3 in.
high.

G. Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard plain, heavy pattern hardware of stainless steel.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard cutout inset type, gravity type or spring tension cam type hinges,
fully adjustable to bring door to rest in any position, with all moving parts self-lubricating.
2. Latches: Manufacturer's standard concealed mounting unit, with rubber bumper on keeper
designed for emergency access, one unit required on each door at mid-point.
3. Door Pulls: Manufacturer's standard unit for outswinging doors.
4. Bumpers: Manufacturer's standard for outswinging doors.
5. Combination Coat Hook and Bumper: Manufacturer's standard hook and pin with rubber bumper,
one unit required on each door 3 in. from top at center of door.

H. Fastening Devices: Stainless steel machine screws, sex bolts and stud bolts with exposed finish to match
hardware. Use manufacturer's standard fastening devices except use only 1-way or spanner type heads
and nuts for exposed screws and bolts.

I. Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement: Minimum 12 gage stainless steel sheet. All concealed anchorage
reinforcement required for hardware, accessories fittings, toilet accessories and similar systems shall be
installed in the shop.

J. Concealed Tapping Reinforcement: Minimum 14 gage stainless steel sheet. All concealed tapping
reinforcement required shall be installed in the shop.

K. Dielectric Separator: Cold applied type, non-sagging, resistant to severe corrosion conditions; applied in two
coats for an overall minimum dry film thickness of 25 mils. One of the following:
1. "Carbomastic 90" (Carboline Co.).
2. "Bitumastic 50" (Kop-Coat, Inc.)
3. "Jennite J-16" (Maintenance Inc.).

L. Structural Supports for Ceiling Hung Partition System
1. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36.
2. Modular Structural Framing System: ASTM A569; modular, structural quality steel pre-formed "U"
channel framing system with continuous open slot prepared to receive attachment nuts, bolts,
straps, threaded rods, beam clamps, hanger rods support brackets and other accessories.
Provide manufacturers standard corrosion resistant finish. Provide one of the following:
a. "Kindorf" (Midland-Ross Corp.).
b. "Unistrut" (Unistrut Corp.).


M. Provide partitions of types shown, per manufacturer's specifications except as modified herein;
manufactured by one of the following:

1. Ceiling Hung Compartments
a. "Flushung" (Flush Metal Partition Corp.).
b. "Century" (Sanymetal Products Co., Inc.).
c. "Imperial" (Global Steel Products Corp.).
d. "Forum CH-700" (Metpar Corp.).

N. Fabrication
1. General: Fabricate work with flat and smooth surfaces free of waves, warps, buckles, rough
areas, and voids. Provide internally welded reinforcements and cutouts required for attaching
anchoring devices, fittings, hardware and toilet accessories.
2. Panels
a. General: 1 in. thick; fabricate from two steel faceplates; assemble over and cement
under pressure to core filler with waterproof thermosetting adhesive.
b. Edges: Fasten, seal and interlock formed edges with manufacturer's standard design
edge molding to conceal faceplate edges; miter corners, weld and grind smooth.
c. Anchorages
1) Ceiling Hung Partitions: Furnish galvanized steel anchorage devices,
complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at
pilasters, to permit connection to structural support above finished ceiling.
Furnish devices which are designed to support pilasters from structure without
transmitting load to ceiling finish. Furnish 3 in. high stainless steel trim piece,
finished to match hardware, at each pilaster.
3. Doors: 1 in. thick; fabricate as specified for panels. Strengthen doors against torsional stresses
by tack or spot welding faceplates together under edge moldings or plug welding faceplate edges
through edge molding; space welds not over 18 in. apart. Make doors 24 in. wide, unless
otherwise shown. Unless otherwise shown, furnish 24 in. wide inswinging doors for ordinary toilet
stalls and 32 in. wide (clear opening) outswinging doors at stalls equipped for use by handicapped.
4. Pilasters: 1-1/4 in. thick; same construction as specified for doors. Provide each connecting end
with an anchoring device consisting of a reinforced galvanized steel cross-bar internally welded to
faceplates. Device to provide adjustment for leveling, plumbing and tightening of installation.
5. Urinal Screens
a. Wall Hung, Bracket Supported Type: Same thickness and type construction specified
for doors with an additional 4 in. wide solid internal reinforcement extending along both
vertical edges.
6. Entrance Screens: Same thickness, height and type of construction specified for panels and
pilasters, unless otherwise shown.
7. Drilling and Tapping
a. General: Provide factory drilling to receive fittings, hardware and other accessories
attached to metal toilet partitions; tap holes for machine screw fastenings.
b. Toilet Accessories: Obtain templates to drill holes to receive toilet accessories:
templates furnished to partition manufacturer by Toilet Accessories" manufacturer. All
cutting, drilling, tapping and internal reinforcement required for partition mounted toilet
accessories shall be performed in the shop. No field cutting of toilet partitions will be
permitted in the field unless approved by the Engineer.

O. FINISHES

1. Stainless Steel:

a. AISI No. 4 satin finish. Apply finished exposed stainless steel with texture aligned in
same direction for all components.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Verify all measurements and dimensions at the Project site and coordinate the Work with the work of other
trades.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Templates and Instructions: Furnish templates of accessories for drilling, tapping and cutouts. Furnish
directions for preparing cutouts, installation of anchorage devices, substrate preparations and any other
installation information required for work by other trades.

B. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid
interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet
accessory items.

C. Install accessories where shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Utilize fasteners
suitable for the substrate; rigidly secured and in accurate alignment with other fixtures. Provide concealed
reinforcement and anchor plates as required to support units. Install accessories plumb and level.

D. Do not through bolt toilet accessories mounted on toilet partitions. Drill and tap partition reinforcement for
accessory bolts.

E. Framing For Suspended Toilet Partitions
1. Provide continuous steel framing for toilet partition supports, coordinated with the toilet partitions
and including provisions for partition anchorage as required to sustain imposed loads and to limit
deflections to L/360 between hangers.
2. Provide steel rods, 2 in. dia., spaced not more than 36 in. o.c. Thread rods to receive anchor and
stop nuts. Fit hangers with wedge shape washers for full bearing on sloping flanges of support
beam.
3. Coordinate installation with toilet partition manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations.

F. Comply with partition manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install partitions
rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or
tile joints. Secure panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup
brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

G. Pilasters
1. General: Fasten each pilaster directly to structure or an anchor plate with 2 stud bolts integrally
welded thereto per manufacturer's recommendations. Rigidly secure pilasters to stud bolts by
means of the anchoring device with face washers and leveling nuts so as to transmit strain of
lateral thrust and pull to structure.
2. Pilasters Adjacent to Walls: Install as specified hereinbefore; provide with one stud bolt. Fasten
each pilaster to walls at same number of points specified for panels. Provide single-wing type
brackets; align with panel brackets; secure each bracket to walls with 2 bolts of appropriate type
and secure pilasters to each bracket with one sex bolt. Clearance between pilasters and walls, 1
in. maximum.

H. Panels: Fasten to walls and pilasters at not less than 2 points. Provide U-type brackets for fastening to
pilasters and double-wing type brackets for fastening to walls. Secure each bracket to pilasters with 2
machine screws, to walls with 2 bolts of appropriate type; secure panels to each bracket with one sex bolt.
Clearance between panels and pilasters, 2 in. maximum; between panels and walls, 1 in. maximum.

I. Doors: Hang doors on hinges, located per manufacturer's standard, with working parts concealed in door.
Set compartment door hinges to bring door to rest at approximately 30 deg. position from closed position
when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed
position. Coordinate location of bumpers on outswinging doors with counters, partition or other obstructions.

J. Urinal Screens
1. Wall Hung; Bracket Supported Type: Fasten to walls at not less than 3 points with double-wing
type brackets. Provide clearance and secure to walls as specified for panels.

K. Entrance Screens: Fasten to structure as specified hereinbefore for the applicable types of connections,
unless otherwise shown. Set entrance door screen hinges to bring door to rest tight against keeper.

3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. After review of the installation by the Owner, remove protection, labels, smears and stains. Clean and polish
each accessory in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions.

B. Adjust accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or
defective items.

END OF SECTION

ENTRANCE MAT 12482-1
SECTION12482

ENTRANCE MATS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Vinyl finish entry mats.
B. Aluminum alloy framing.

1.02 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01300.

1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND TYPE

A. Manufacturers :
1. Construction Specialities Group, UK, Canada and USA
2. Geggus E-M-S GmbH, Germay
Local Agent : Jassimand Sons Trading Co., Kuwait
(for 1 & 2) Tel : 2465682 Fax : 2465681

B. Type: Vinyl finish floor mat with aluminumalloy frame; Recessed type 44mmthick
Model: as selected by the Engineers Representative.
Color: as selected by the Engineers Representative.

C. Grid Structure
Recess mounted for flush installation.
Mill finish aluminiumT-section rails at 38mmcenters
Vinyl support cushions
Transverse aluminiumlocking bars at 300mmcetnres
Removable Sections for cleaning.

D. Well Details
46mmframe depth, 44mmfinished well depth.
Aluminiumframes with snap-in corner locks
Base of well can be drained.

E. Tread Finishes
Vinyl - Ribbed for effect drainage and grip

F. Substitutions: Items of the same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with Section
01630.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

ENTRANCE MAT 12482-2

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Verify size of floor recess before fabricating mats.

B. Place mats in floor recess after final cleaning of finish flooring.

END OF SECTION

FOOT GRILLES 12485-1
SECTION 12485

FOOT GRILLES

Removable, subframe supported, satin finished aluminum type foot grilles with carpet inserts, for installation into
base building slab depression.

Manufacturer References:
C/S Group, USA.
Reese Enterprises, Inc., USA.

END OF SECTION

MOTORIZED AND MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES 12515-1
SECTION 12515

MOTORIZED AND MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES
External +Internal

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide motorized and manually operated shades in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1. Electrical power wiring.
2. Miscellaneous metal work.
3. Rough carpentry
4. Acoustical ceilings
5. Gypsum drywall/
6. Sheet metal


A. Provide motorized and manually operated from a firm that has specialized in the fabrication and installation
of such work for at least 5 years, in projects of similar size and scope of this Project, and who will have an
undivided responsibility for the Work.

B. Provide motorized and manually operated as complete units produced by a single manufacturer, including
necessary mounting brackets, enclosures, motors, controls, fabrics, accessories, fittings and fastenings.
Installation of motorized and manually operated assemblies shall be performed by an authorized
manufacturers representative experienced in the installation and maintenance of such assemblies.

1. Maintenance Proximity: The Installer shall maintain offices and repair or service facilities not more
than 2 hours normal travel time from the Project site.

1.03 STANDARDS

1. Wiring between motors and controls in compliance with the National Electrical Code.
2. Motors and controls in compliance with the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
3. All electrical components and systems shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Listed.
4. Shade material and lining shall be flame resistant in accordance with NFPA 701, Small Scale Test,
washable, dimensionally stable and resistant to ultra-violet deterioration.

B. Where the language in the document referred to herein is in the form of a recommendation or suggestion,
such recommendations or suggestions shall be deemed to be mandatory under this Contract.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, operating and installation instructions for
motorized and manually operated shades.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for motorized and manually operated shades. Include dimensioned
plans, details, connections, anchorages, relation to adjacent construction, and other necessary data. Show
locations and details for installing operator components, switches, and controls. Indicate motor size,
electrical characteristics, drive arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions.

C. Schedule: Submit a schedule based on field measurements and showing the locations of each size of
motorized and manually operated shade, as well as the locations of all controls.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams detailing wiring for motorized shade operators, signal, and control
systems differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring. Show the
locations of connections to electrical service provided as a unit of work under other Sections.

E. Samples: Submit the following:
1. Submit 24 in. x 24 in. samples of each type of shade specified.
2. Submit a complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches wide for each type of roller
shade indicated.
3. Submit a sample of the control device to be utilized for control of the motorized shade assembly.
4 Submit sample of mullion guides used for motorized blackout shades.

F. Maintenance Manual: Submit three copies of manufacturer's printed instructions for maintaining and
repairing the motorized and manually operated shades. Include complete parts list. Include methods for
maintaining finishes and precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes
and performance.
1. Typical conference room with both solar shade and blackout shade.


A. Do not install motorized and manually operated shade until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in
space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final
occupancy.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Do not deliver motorized black-out shades until rooms containing shades are painted, ready for their
installation. Protect motorized blackout shades and all components from damage during delivery, handling,
storage and installation.



B. Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, and pattern of shade material indicated, provide
full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have
under other provisions of the Contract Documents and are in addition to and run concurrent with other
warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty: Submit a written warranty directly to the Owner, agreeing to repair or replace electrical
components of the motor operated motorized black-out shade system, controls, fabrics and related
accessories which have failed due to faulty materials or workmanship. The period of warranty shall be three
(3) years and the warranty shall be signed by the manufacturer and the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. General: Provide motorized and manually operated shade systems as produced by one manufacturer.
Products specified herein by proprietary designation are as manufactured by MechoShade Systems, Inc.
and Sol-R-Control and establish the quality standards required. Equivalent products of other manufacturers
will be considered provided the meet those established standards and comply with the Contract Documents.

B. Motor Operated System: Provide one of the following
1. "ElectroShade" (Mechoshade Systems, Inc.).
2. MO HO MOT-R Shade System" (Sol-R-Veil, Inc.).

C. Manually Operated System: Provide manually operated shades form one of the following manufacturers:
1. Mechoshade Systems, Inc.
2. Sol-R-Veil, Inc.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide factory-assembled motorized and manually operated shade systems designed for lifting
shades of type, size, weight, construction, use, and operation frequency indicated. Provide operation
systems of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for Project
conditions and recommended by shade manufacturer, complete with electric motors and factory-prewired
motor controls, remote-control stations, remote-control devices, power disconnect switches, enclosures
protecting controls and all operating parts, and accessories required for reliable operation without
malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and
electrical characteristics with the building electrical system.

B. Motorized Shade Assembly: Provide motorized shades where shown, including but not limited to, the
following:
1. Roller: Shade roller fabricated of extruded aluminum with internal keyway to receive tubular motor
and providing for continuous attachment of shade fabric.
2. Spline: Fabric mounting spline constructed of extruded vinyl with asymmetrical locking guides and
fabric guides.
3 Bottom Bar (Top Bar for Roll-up Units): Bottom hem of each shade shall enclose a 1-3/8 in. x 5/8
in. aluminum bottom bar incorporating an obscuration brush along the entire exposed surface of
the underside of the hem bar to assure complete blackout, with bar painted the same color as
shade material.
4. Side Channels: Extruded aluminum channels into which the bar slides. Recess the fabric into
side channels utilizing 2-: in. x 1 in. deep extruded aluminum side channels, including two interior
mounted obscuration brushes running the entire length of the channels, along which the hem bar
travels to assure total blackout. Provide two-piece channel design to eliminate visible fasteners.
5. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard, designed to suit application indicated and to provide a secure
and concealed mounting of mechanism. Include all hardware, fittings and fasteners required for
secure attachment of track. Design brackets to support safely the weight of the shade assemblies
plus the forces applied to operate shades. In addition, design brackets for easy removal and
reinstallation of shade, for supporting roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and
shade mounting method indicated. Provide no fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated
from metal non-corrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for
securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of
normal use.
6. Motor: Asynchronous motor with built-in reversible capacitor start and run, made to be operated
with 120V-AC at 50 Hz, Single Phase (unless otherwise indicated); temperature Class A

(maximum temperature rating 140 deg. C.); thermally protected, totally enclosed, maintenance
free with locking disconnect plug assembly provided with each operator.
a. Motor torque shall be sufficient for the size and weight of the shade without excessive
wear, distortion affecting the shade operation or appearance.
b. Internal limit switches controlling the extremes of travel.
c. Solenoid disc brake that stops and holds in any position and automatically disengages
when motor is operating.

7. Controls: Provide controls for each shade or group of shades including, but not limited to, the
following:
a. Manual switches, electronic relay for operating more than one motor, local control
stations, and motor logic controls.
b. Locate controls as shown or as directed.

C. Manually Operated Shade Assembly: Provide manually operated shade assemblies where shown, including
but not limited to, the following:
1. Roller: Rollers: Extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and wall thickness required to support and fit
internal components of operating system and the weight and width of shade band material without
sagging; designed to be easily removable from support brackets and providing for continuous
attachment of shade fabric.
2. Spline: Fabric mounting spline constructed of extruded vinyl with asymmetrical locking guides and
fabric guides.
3 Bottom Bar: Bottom hem of each shade shall enclose a 1-3/8 in. x 5/8 in. aluminum bottom bar
incorporating an obscuration brush along the entire exposed surface of the underside of the hem
bar to assure complete blackout, with bar painted the same color as shade material.
4. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard, designed to suit application indicated and to provide a secure
and concealed mounting of mechanism. Include all hardware, fittings and fasteners required for
secure attachment of track. Design brackets to support safely the weight of the shade assemblies
plus the forces applied to operate shades. In addition, design brackets for easy removal and
reinstallation of shade, for supporting roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and
shade mounting method indicated. Provide no fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated
from metal non-corrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for
securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of
normal use.
5. Shade Operation: Manual; with continuous loop bead chain and clutch. Position of clutch right side
of roller, as determined by hand of user facing shade from inside, unless otherwise indicated. 6.
Clutch: Capacity to lift size and weight of shade; sized to fit roller or provide adaptor.
a. Loop Length: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level
b. Bead Chain: Stainless steel.
c. Operating Function: Stop and hold shade at any position in ascending or descending
travel

D. Finishes: All exposed aluminum materials shall have a baked on enamel primer and a finish coat of baked
enamel, color as selected by Engineer. All exposed steel materials shall be bonderized and receive a finish
coat of baked enamel, color as selected by Engineer.

E. Shade Material: Finish fabric so that it will hang flat, without buckling or distortion. Edges, when trimmed,
shall hang straight without unraveling. Seams shall be straight, uniform in both appearance and strength
and shall be at least as strong as the fabric itself.

F. Miscellaneous: Provide miscellaneous materials as required by the manufacturer for a complete installation.

G. Shade Device Schedule
To be selected by the Client.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Examine substrates, adjoining construction and conditions under which the Work will be installed. Do not
proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install motorized and manually operated shade until dirt producing construction work has been
completed in that area.

B. Install motorized and manually operated shade over each window as shown in strict compliance with
manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide suitable uniform clearances, in exact alignment with
adjoining construction and adjacent shades.

C. Where black-out shades are scheduled for installation, provide side channels for with (UHB) ultra-high bond
double sided tape. Do not penetrate window wall mullions with fastenings of any kind.

D. Install motorized black-out shades so that shade fabric will hang flat, vertical and with edges aligned when
rolled up. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range. Make height adjustments after installation with stop
positions determined by Engineer.

E. At completion of the Work, test all motorized and manually operated shade in the presence of the Engineer
and the Owner's Representative and demonstrate operation to their complete satisfaction. Replace units
that cannot be field corrected.

F. After testing is performed clean all surfaces utilizing materials and methods as recommended by the
manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

BUILDING ACCESSORIES 12900-1
SECTION 12900

Building Accessories

Miscellaneous equipment required for the completion of the work, described as follows:

Precast Concrete Bumper Curbs: Size and shape as shown on the drawings, to be provided by a local
manufacturer specializing in this type of work. Reinforcing and anchoring as required per installation de-
tails.

END OF SECTION

SWIMMING POOL AND JACUZZI CONSTRUCTION 13150-1
SECTION 13150
SWIMMING POOLS AND WATER DISPLAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
A. Pump(s).
B. Filter(s).
C. Pipes, Fittings and Valves.
D. Sterilization and Cleaning Equipment.
E. Specialities.
F. Control Panels and Electrical Works.
1.2 RELATED WORK(S) : Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this specification includes
but is not restricted to:
A. Section 07141 - Cold Fluid Applied Waterproofing.
B. Section 09310 - Ceramic Tiles.
C. Section 15050 - Plumbing Systems.
D. Section 15060 - Supports and Hangers.
E. Section 15070 - Vibration Isolation.
F. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification.
G. Section 15100 - Plumbing Piping.
H. Section 15122 - Meters and Gauges.
I. Section 16045 - Electrical Works in connection with Mechanical Services.
A. ANSI B 2.1 - Pipe threads.
B. BS 4375 - PTFE tape for pipe thread sealing application.
C. ASTM B 88 - Seamless copper water tube.

D. ANSI B 16.18 - Cast bronze solder joints pressure fittings.
E. ANSI B 16.22 - Wrought copper solder joint pressure fittings.
F. ASTM D 1785 - UPVC pipe, schedules 40, 80, and 120.
G. ASTM D 2466 - Socket type PVC fittings, schedule 40.
H. ASTM D 2467 - Socket type PVC fittings, schedule 80.
I. ASTM D 2564 - Solvent cement for PVC pipes and fittings.
J. ASTM D 2855 - Making solvent cemented joints with PVC pipes and fittings.
K. ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and brazing qualifications.
L. AWS A 5.8 - Brazing filler metal.
M. ANSI B 16.21 - Non-metallic gaskets for pipe flanges.
N. API 600 - General design specifications for gate, globe and check valves.
O. ANSI B 16.34 - Pressure temperature ratings for valves.
P. ANSI B 16.10 - Face to face dimensions of cast iron gate, globe and check valves.
Q. ANSI B 16.24 - End flange dimensions of bronze valves.
R. ANSI B 16.1 - End flange dimensions of cast iron valves.
S. AWS D 10.9 - Standard for building services piping.
T. AWWA C 601 - Standard methods for the examination of water and waste water.
A. The requirements of the following shall be conformed with, as appropriate:
1. The National Spa and Pool Institute standard (NSPI).
2. Ministry of Health and other lawful enforcement agencies of the State of Kuwait.
B. The swimming pool installation shall be done by a Contractor having at least 3 years experience in successfully
executing similar works in Kuwait.
C. Materials incorporated in the work covered by this Section shall be unused, new products in good condition.
Materials spoiled due to improper storage or mishandling shall be rejected. Materials which come in contact with
the pool water shall be resistant to corrosion by excessive free chlorine, which may appear in the pool water.
D. Valves and similar control gear, used in the works, shall have the manufacturer's name or logo, size, pressure rating
and direction of flow cast-on, on the body.
E. Copper alloys used in the construction of valves, pipe fittings, sanitary fittings, plumbing specialities etc, which
comes in contact with water, shall be dezincification resistant type.

F. Uniformity shall be maintained in respect of connection standards (threads or flanges), throughout. Where this is not
practical due to justifiable reasons; compatibility shall be ensured by the use of appropriate adaptors, conversion
spools, mating flanges and the like; with the written approval of the Engineer.
G. Pipes and fittings used in the works shall have the standard of manufacturer, type, class or rating etc continuously
printed or marked otherwise in compliance with the standard of manufacture. Materials without such identification
shall be rejected.
H. Conform to the requirements and recommendations of the following organizations, in respect of equipment:
1. National Sanitation Federation (NSF).
2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
3. International Electro-technical Commission (IEC).
4. Fdration Internationale de Natation (FINA)
I. Equipment supplied shall have local agents certified by the manufacturer to check, test, adjust and commission the
equipment. Equipment shall have labels attached permanently, indicating:
1. Name of manufacturer.
2. Model no. and serial no.
3. Certified ratings.
4. Maximum operating parameters.
J. Materials to equivalent British (BS), German (DIN), or Japanese (JIS) or other international standards shall be
acceptable, provided that the Contractor substantiates their equivalence and ensures their compatibility with other
components of the system. Copies of the current version of the reference standards shall be submitted for
comparison, if required by the Engineer.
K. Test certificates for materials used in the work covered by this Section, from approved independent laboratories or
testing agencies, shall be furnished, if required by the Engineer.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Requirements of Section 15400 shall be referred to and complied with.

A. Products shall be delivered to site, stored and protected under provisions of the general conditions of Contract.
B. Plastic and rubber products shall be stored out of direct sunlight and protected in a proper manner to prevent
deterioration.
C. Pipes shall be stored on elevated racks and the ends kept closed with factory manufactured plugs to prevent the
entry of foreign matter.
D. Valves shall be delivered and stored in shipping containers with labelling in place. Plug and ball valves shall be kept
in open position and gate / globe valves in closed position to prevent damage to valve seats. Flange protectors
shall be retained on the valves, until installation, to prevent damage to the flange faces.
E. Protective covering on equipment and polished surfaces installed in position shall be retained, until after the
commissioning.
F. Chemicals shall be delivered in approved, sealed containers with appropriate warning labels.

1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Pool Water Treatment
1. Filtration shall be carried out by the continuous recirculation of the pool water through two high rate sand
filter(s), rated for a turnover period not exceeding four (4) hours. Water shall be returned from pool floor
through main drains and from the surface through the over-flow channels and supplied to the pool
through inlet fittings strategically located at the pool bottom to avoid stratification.
2. Pool water sterilization shall be carried out by injecting toxic free oxidations combined with ionic residual into
the pool supply stream in a preset dosing rate.
3. Pool shampoo and other conditioning chemicals shall be manually added to the pool water for attaining
sparkle and PH control.
4. Scum and other floating particles shall be carried away by the overflow into the perimeter channels and
removed by the filter.
B. Surge Handling
1. Over flow shall be conducted through perimeter channels into the Surge (Balance) Tank, which are sized to
accommodate the expected surge volume.
2. Float operated butterfly valve shall control the flow from the main drain and the balance tank to the filter in a
proportionate manner.
3. Fountain:
Submersible pump will be used to draw water from the Basin and supply the Central nozzle to create the
required the water fall.
C. Quick Fill And Automatic Makeup
1. The required water supply for the pools shall be supplied from the domestic fresh water supply system
through a backflow preventer.
2. Quick filling of the pool shall be done through the water supply connection to the pool supply header
supplying the inlet fittings.
3. The loss of pool water by evaporation or otherwise is automatically made up by the booster set through a
pilot operated valve controlled by float in surge chamber automatic make up assembly installed at the
pool wall.
D. Pool/S And Balance Tanks Drainage
1. The pool main drains and drains in balance tank shall be connected to waste water sump pit through shutoff
valves, enabling the emptying of these by gravity.
E. Pool Cleaning
1. Suspended matter shall be removed by leaf rake, leaf skimmer etc.
2. Brushes shall be used to loosen the dirt embedded on pool walls and floors.
3. Vacuum cleaner set shall be used to clean the pool walls and floors.
F. Basic Draining: Basins of the Fountain and the Swimming Pool will be drained by the circulating pumping system to
be free discharged free at grade level.
G. Water Conditioning
1. Instantaneous water heaters and packaged air cooled chillers will be provided to maintain the required water
temperatures during summer and winter.
H. Reflecting Pools
1. Sand filters complete with circulating pumps will be provided to keep the pools water clean.
2. Electric control unit will be provided to maintain the water level in the basins.
I. Fish Bond
1. Biological filter complete with submersible pump and UVC device will be used to keep the pool clean.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS

SERVICE LOCATION TYPE

A. Pool & Fountain supply All UPVC
and return schedule 80.
B. Quick fill and All Copper
automatic make up type `K'.
C. Filter backwash and All UPVC
pool drainage up to schedule 80.
valve pit
2.2 PIPE JOINTS
A. Copper: B cup-5 brazed joints. Threaded adaptors / flanges shall be used as required.
B. UPVC: Solvent welded joints. Threaded adaptors / flanges shall be used for connection to equipment and
specialities, as appropriate.
C. Pipe joints shall be rated for 1034 Kpa (150 psig) working water pressure at 121
o
C (250
o
F).
2.3 VALVES
A. Requirements of Section 15410 shall be referred to and complied with in respect of specifications, selection and
installation.
B. Valves used in the works covered by this Section shall be of the same standard and manufacture as that of the
Section 15400.
C. Pressure Ratings:
1. Unless otherwise indicated all valves shall be rated for 1034 Kpa (150 psig) working water pressure at 121
deg.C (250 deg.F).
2. Contractor shall allow for selecting higher pressure rated valves to meet the valve construction features.

2.4 PUDDLE FLANGES

A. For UPVC piping, fabricate from pipes and undrilled flanges.
B. For copper piping, fabricate as detailed.
C. Manufactured, proprietary products may be used for this purpose.
2.5 SPECIALITIES
A. Schedules on drawings shall be referred to for selection of specialities.
2.6 FILTERS
A. Type: Permanent media, pressure.
B. Function: Turbidity removal, to 5 microns filtration fineness in continuous recirculation application.
C. Construction: Welded steel shell with dished ends, welded inlet and outlet pipes with flanged ends, steel / ABS
distribution and collection pipes with laterals, access hand hole with synthetic gasket and external locking bar,
integral supports and lifting lugs.
D. Coatings: Food grade epoxy inside and two coats enamel outside over two coats of rust inhibiting primer, inside and
out.
E. Face Piping: Welded steel / ABS.
F. Valves: Hydraulically operated diaphragm type with steel body and threaded flanged ends. Give epoxy coating on
wetted areas.
G. Controls: Electrically operated (240 v / 1 ph / 50 Hz) semi automatic controller (mounted on the filter body) to
perform backwash, rinse and reversion to service; once initiated manually.
H. Accessories: Air bleed valve, pressure gauge manifold, auxiliary cartridge filter for control supply etc.
I. Capacity: Schedules on drawings shall be referred to for selection and capacity ratings.
Ref : Culligan SWA series.
2.7 PUMPS
A. Type: Horizontal, end suction, close coupled single stage centrifugal type of 1450 rpm speed. Materials of
construction shall be as follows:
1. Casing Bronze.
2. Impeller Bronze.
3. Shaft Stainless steel.
4. Seal Mechanical.
5. Case wearing ring Bronze.
6. Self priming silent type
B. Pump motor construction shall be as detailed in Section 15245.
C. Pre-filter: Bronze construction with flanged ends, quick release cover clamps and polypropelene basket.

D. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Circulator Pumps
1. Astral - Spain
2. Jacuzzi - USA
3. Culligan - USA
4. Pahlen - Spain

B. Sand Filters

1. US FILTER - USA
2. ASTRAL - SPAIN
3. Culligan - USA
4. Hayward - USA

C. Pool Heater
1. Ecotherm - ASTRIA
2. PAHLAN - SWISS
3. Comfortzon
4. Coats -USA-
C. Pool Water Cooler
1. Ecotherm - Australia
2. Astral - Spain
D. Ozone Generator System
1. Compact Ozone system (ozonia triogen)
2. Promoinent , Germany (SETCO)

D. Pool Water Softner
2. Culligan , USA
E. Reverse smoothies

2. Culligan , USA
E. Coagulant dosing system
2. Culligan , USA
3. Astral , Spain
F. Chlorine and PH dosing system
2. Culligan , USA
3. Astral , Spain
E. UPVC pipes and Fittings
1. Adasani - Kuwait
2. Europipes - Australia
F. Pool Fittings and accessories
1. Astral - Spain
2. Mar-Pascine - Italy
3. Jandy - USA
2.8 COMPACT OZONE SYSTEM (Ozonia Triogen)
Compact ozone generators comprise of three main components a high voltage, high frequency power board
driving a ceramic core cooling discharge module which is air cooled by a integral cooling fan. Normal atmospheric
air can be used as a feed gas, or pre-dried air supplied by compact air dryer, either of which is drawn through the
ozone generator under vacuum which created by a water driven venturi injector. The high voltage high
frequency power board should incorporates full overload and short circuit protection. In addition, a thermostat is
fitted to the module which isolate the power in the event of a cooling fan failure causing the module to overheat.
The ozone generator should be fitted with an output control knob located on the underside of the unit which
electrically varies the ozone output between 50% nad 100% of the rated output of the
2.08.1 THE AIR DRYER
Compact air dryers should be fully automatic desiccant dryers. The dryer contains two desiccant columns with
integral heater elements, two three-port solenoid valves, two small air pumps for purging moisture from the
columns during regeneration and the electric controls. When the unit is in operation, air should be withdrawn
through one of the desiccant columns which removes the excess moisture from the air before it is passed to the
ozone generator. While this is happening, the other column automatically heats up and the small purge pump
passes air through the column to drive out the moisture retained within the desiccant material. After a preset
period of time, the heater and pump should be switched off to allow time for the column to cool down prior to it
going on stream to allow regeneration of the other column. This process should be continous unless the unit is
switched off. Automatic cycling of the air dryer columns should be controlled by a no-maintenance can timer
ensuring no loss of cycling sequence when the unit is switched off.
2.08.2 THE INDUCTION SYSTEM

The ozone induction system comprises a water driven venturi injector and a booster pump. the booster
pump increases the pressure of a proportion of the pool water after which it should be passed through the venturi
injector consisting of two internally tapered bores which forces the water through a small orifice and creates
vacuum at the side connection of the unit. It is the creation of this vacuum that draws the air though the ozone
generator and then into the injector where it is mixed with the pool water. The amount of suction created by the
injector can be controlled by varying the water flow through the unit thus altering the airflow through the ozone
generator. This alteration of airflow relates directly to the output of ozone from the ozone generator.
2.08.3 THE DEGASSING SYSTEM
The degassing system should be designed to facilitate the removal of air bubbles from the system prior to the treated
water re-entering the pool. Degassing is required where the introduction of air bubbles is through to be
detrimental to the visual effect of the pool. The Degassing system consists of a contact column though which the
treated water flows and an automatic air release valve which maintains a correct water level within the columns
as well as venting the excess air that collects at the top of the vessel.
2.09 ELECTRIC POOL HEATERS
A. Type: Vertical/horizontal instantaneous type, with externally stainless steel jacketting and welded pipes.
B. Connections: Water inlet and outlet, temperature and pressure relief valve and drain valve. Removable flanged
connection for heating elements.
C. Recovery Section: Immersion type removable heating elements of stainless steel. Watt density shall not exceed
7.75/sq. cm. (50 watt s/sq. inch).
D. Control: Water temperature control thermometer regulator, with fine adjustment, high temperature cut out (over
riding thermostat) with manual reset and flow switch at discharge of heater, interlocked with the starter contactor of
the heating elements.
E. Accessories: P and T relief valve, drain valve, etc.
F. Capacity: Schedules on drawings shall be referred to for selection and capacity ratings.

2.10 POOL WATER CHEMICAL TREATMENT SYSTEM
A. Function: Addition of Chlorine (as Sodium Hypochlorite solution) and acid / alkali (Hydrochloric Acid / Caustic Soda
solutions) to maintain residual chlorine and pH respectively. System will include probes, control panel, dosing
pumps, chemical storage tanks and associated fittings and controls.
B. Chemical storage tanks: Moulded polyethylene tanks with sufficient capacity for storage of chemical solutions for a
minimum period of one month with lockable lid, stirrer, siphon tube etc., complete.
C. Feed pumps: Diaphragm type of chemical resistant construction with adjustable feed rates.
D. Controller: Solid state equipment suitable for 240 volts / 1 phase / 50 Hertz input supply, complete with probes and
associated wiring
E. Accessories: Probes housing, flexible sensor / discharge tubes, Injection fitting etc.
F. Set of terminals/relays to interface with building management system (BMS) for attaining the followings :
1. Display/printout of pool water chlorine, PH, temperature and ORP values.

2. Remote start/stop of feed pumps
3. Status of Pumps
4. Critical alarms and other functions as stipulated in sequence of operation/control schematic.
2.11 CHILLER
G. Type: Completely packaged liquid.
H. Compressor: Semi-hermetic type supplied with high/low pressure start, freeze control, head and suction gauges,
pump down solenoid valve, thermostatic expansion valve, refrigerant sight glass and dehydrator.
I. Cooling tank and evaporator: Welded 316 stainless steel shell and copper immersion coil evaporator.
J. Pump, stainless steel centrifugal pump, complete with copper, insulated pipes.
K. Cabinet: 18 gauge painted steel/stainless steel.
L. Capacity: Schedules on drawings to be referred for selection and capacity ratings.
2.12 Control Panel:
- The control panel shall be comply with MPW and MEW regulation and all other international safety codes and
standards as appropriate and not limited to:
- The control panel shall be factory assembled and pre wired and tested.
- The control panel Enclosure shall be IP54 with cooling fan, dust filter and temperature controller.
- The entire control panel component (Relays-Breakers Contactorsetc) shall be industrial rating component for long life
- The control panel should have main switches (emergency off switch) to power-up the cooler.
- The control panel should have digital electronic thermostat for controlling in-built pool water circulation pump.
- Remote control ON/Off switch control connection strip.
- Pool water flow pump operating terminal strip.
2.10 WATER DISPLAY PUMPS
A. Type: Submersible, single stage centrifugal type, constructed of corrosion resistant materials, with larger filter cas-
ing of glass-fibre rein-forced polyamide.
B. Accessories: Piping with union, globe valve and check valve at the discharge and under water junction box and
water proof cable for power supply.
C. Capacity: Schedules on drawings shall be preferred for selection and capacity ratings.

2.11 NATURAL OXYGEN PURIFICATION SYSTEM
A. Oxygen Electrode chamber, complete with special patented plates produce four non toxic oxidizers and monitoring
system.
2.12 EQUIPMENT BASES AND VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Refer to and comply with Section 15070.
2.13 CLEANING EQUIPMENT
A. Vacuum Cleaner:
2.11.1.1.1.1 Chrome plated, cast bronze body, 18 inch long with 4 wheels and 1 1/2 inch suction
fitting.
2.11.1.1.1.2 Telescopic, aluminium handle, 3.2 to 7.8 meters long, with connectors (Ref: Culligan
no. 9369 - 74).
2.11.1.1.1.3 Corrugated plastic, vacuum hose, 1 1/ 2 inch diameter, 50 feet long, with vacuum
cleaner sleeve and suction adaptor (Ref: Culligan no. 9411-33, 9361-50 and 9408-04).
B. Pool Brush:
2.11.1.1.1.4 Nylon bristles on 18 inch long ABS body (Ref: Culligan no. 9408 - 48).
2.11.1.1.1.5 Telescopic, aluminium handle, 3.2 to 7.8 meters long, with connectors (Ref: Culligan
no. 9369 - 74).
C. Leaf Skimmer:
2.11.1.1.1.6 Plastic frame with embedded permanent magnet and nylon net (Ref: Culligan no.
9407 - 87).
2.11.1.1.1.7 Use same telescopic handle as that of the brush.
D. Leaf Rake:
2.11.1.1.1.8 Plastic body with nylon net bag ( Ref: Culligan no. 9408 - 36).
2.11.1.1.1.9 Use same telescopic handle as that of the brush.


3 EXECUTION
3.10.1.1 COORDINATION
E. Requirements of clause 3.01 of Section 15050 shall be referred to and complied with in all respects.
3.10.1.2 PIPE PREPARATION
A. Pipes and tubes shall be cut perpendicular to the axis, with approved cutting tools; the ends reamed and burrs
removed.
B. Scale and dirt, on inside and outside and weld splatter shall be removed before assembly.
C. Piping connections to equipment shall be made with flanges or unions.
3.10.1.3 PIPE SPACING AND LOCATION
A. Piping shall be installed in such a way that conserves building space and not interfering with the use of space.
B. Exposed piping shall be installed parallel or at right angles to the building walls, except where otherwise shown on
the Contract drawings.
C. Minimum clearances shall be provided between piping covered by this Section and those of other trades.
D. Adequate clearance shall be provided around the piping for access to valves and fittings.
E. Piping shall be grouped at common elevations, wherever possible.
F. Access doors shall be provided where valves and fittings are not exposed. Size and location of access doors shall
be co-ordinated with Section 08305.
3.10.1.4 PIPE FITTINGS
A. Tapered reducer fittings shall be installed where changes in pipe sizes occur. The use of site fabricated fittings or
bushings shall not be permitted.

B. Tapered, factory manufactured reducer fittings (eccentric type at suction and concentric type at discharge) shall be
installed at pump connections. Eccentric reducer fittings shall be installed with level crown. Eccentric reducing
fittings for use at the suction of pumps shall be machined from solid PVC stock where standard manufactured
fittings are not available.
C. Factory manufactured fittings shall be installed where changes in pipe direction occur. Bending or forming of piping
shall not be permitted without the written permission of the Engineer.
D. Connections shall not be made between piping of different services, under any circumstance. The existence of any
one such connection in the project, whether temporary or permanent, shall make the Contractor liable for an anti-
confusion test for all of the concerned services.
3.10.1.5 SLOPES AND INVERTS
A. Invert elevations shall be established and drainage pipes sloped to one percent minimum unless otherwise stated.
The minimum gradients that are shown on the Contract Drawings shall be maintained.
B. Pool supply piping shall be sloped to facilitate complete drainage of the piping for maintenance purposes.
C. Elevations of buried piping, outside the building, shall be established to ensure not less than 90 cm (3 ft) of cover,
especially in areas subject to traffic loading.
D. The crown (or soffit) levels of the pipes shall be matched when joining horizontal drainage pipes of differing sizes, as
far as possible.
3.10.1.6 THREADS AND SEALANTS
A. Full depth threads shall be cut on prepared pipe ends, preferably using power driven machines using cutting fluids.
The threads shall be cleaned thoroughly before applying thread sealant.
B. Teflon thread sealing tapes or hard setting, non-toxic sealing compounds shall be used on the male thread (only)
before making joints. Joints opened for repairs shall be brushed clean and given fresh sealing tape or compound.
3.10.1.7 PIPING INSTALLATION - PARTICULAR FOR UPVC PIPING
A. Only approved (recommended by the manufacturer) solvent cement shall be used for making the joints.
B. Solvent joints shall not be made in humid or dusty atmosphere.
C. Prior to making the joint, mark the required penetration and fitting alignment, in a clearly visible manner, on the pipe
end for later verification.
D. Allow a minimum period of twenty four (24) hours from the time of making the joint, before filling the line.

3.10.1.8 PUDDLE FLANGES
A. Puddle flanges shall be installed on all pipe penetrations on walls and floors of water holding structures.
B. Puddle flanges shall be erected in the form work, perpendicular to the wall face and rigidly to resist displacement
during pouring of concrete.

C. The openings around the puddle flanges shall be sealed, so as to avoid leakage (and resultant honey combing) and
undesirable formation of concrete.
D. Alignment shall be checked, immediately after pouring of concrete and adjustments made, where necessary.
3.10.1.9 UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Flanges / unions shall be provided on horizontal pressure piping at spacing not exceeding 18.0 Ms (60 feet);
downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B. Grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners shall be used only in accessible locations.
3.10 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Ends of piping shall be kept closed with factory manufactured plugs or blind flanges with integral indicating flags, to
prevent the entry of foreign matter, during the progress of the work. Such plugs or flanges shall be removed on
completion of the works.
B. Threaded piping outlets shall be kept closed with threaded (PVC) pipe stub with one end crimped or closed
otherwise until the time of installing the outlet fittings.
C. The piping surface shall be protected from splashes of cement, plaster, paint and similar construction materials.
D. The piping shall be blown out using dry compressed air, prior to testing.
3.11 VALVES
A. Valves shall be installed with stem upright or horizontal, not inverted; except with the written permission of the
Engineer, for each location.
B. Valves shall be same size as pipeline, except where shown otherwise on the Contract Drawings.
C. Full bore ball valves shall be used for isolation purposes and for drainage of pools.
D. Globe valves shall be used for throttling, bypass or manual flow control services.
E. In-line spring loaded (self closing) check valves shall be installed at the discharge of water pumps and flap type
check valves on the discharge of waste water sump pumps.
F. Appropriate valve gland packing, sealing and gasket materials shall be selected for the temperature and pressure
encountered.
3.12 VIBRATION ISOLATION
A. Requirements of Section 15070 shall be referred to and complied with, as appropriate.
3.13 INSPECTION, TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Requirements of Section 15050, shall be referred to and complied with, as appropriate.

3.14 TESTING OF PIPING
A. Requirements of Section 15100, shall be referred to and complied with, as appropriate.
3.15 ELECTRICAL WORKS
A. Stranded copper, PVC insulated color coded wires of appropriate size shall be used for all power and control wiring
in conduits, trunking and panels.
B. Stranded copper, PVC/SWA/PVC single core or multicore cables shall be used for supply to motors, laid on cable
trays.
C. Brass cable glands with armour retainer shall be used at entry of cables to terminal boxes and panels.
D. Crimped on, brass terminal lugs shall be used for termination of wires and cables. Control wire terminals shall be
numbered using slip on ferrules, for quick identification.
E. Heavy duty galvanized iron conduits shall be used for exposed wiring.
F. PVC conduits tied down on cable trays may be used for control wiring extended to unit assemblies.
G. Enclosed, galvanized steel trunking shall be used at or near the ceiling soffit for connecting conduits to control
panels. Entry of multiple conduits to control panels shall be avoided.
H. Slotted, galvanized steel cable trays shall be used for extending services to motors, unit control panels etc. Factory
manufactured offsets, transition pieces etc. shall be used, where required. Factory manufactured, suspended
cantilever type supports shall be used for cable trays.
I. Dead lock type plastic cable ties shall be used for attaching cables to cable trays.
J. Wall mounted control panels shall be attached by expansion anchors and studs. Panels shall be stiffened with
profiled sections welded to the back plate, as required. Additional wall brackets or pedestals shall be used, where
required. Top of panel shall be at 180 cm maximum above FFL.
K. Assemblies shall have enclosures to NEMA 4 (IP 44) as minimum requirement. Anti-condensation heaters shall be
used in all panels.
L. Panels shall be fabricated from minimum 1.5 mm thick sheet steel with continuously welded butt joints and required
holes and cutest shall be done at the factory. Two (2) coats of red oxide primer and two coats of baked on enamel
shall be applied after fabrication.
M. Internal wiring shall be done in a neat and professional manner, using cable ties, slip on spiral plastic bundle
sheaths etc. Ample free lengths shall be provided to allow the full swing of doors.
N. Earthing bar shall be provided for equipotential bonding.
3.16 SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION
A. The services of a competent engineer shall be provided by the Contractor to supervise the commissioning of all
equipment and to train the Owner's personnel in all aspects of the same during a five (5) working days period,
during normal working hours. All expenses in connection with the above shall be allowed for by the Contractor.
B. The system demonstrations shall be conducted only after the substantial completion of the project. A minimum of
one week's written notice shall be given and the Owner's written consent obtained, prior to such demonstrations.

3.17 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE
A. Clause 4.5 of the general conditions of contract shall be referred to and complied with in respect of warranty
requirements.
B. The following activities shall be allowed for by the Contractor, in respect of the complete system; for a period of two
(2) calendar year(s) from the date of substantial completion.
3.10.1.9.1.1 Defect liability / breakdown maintenance, inclusive of replacement parts.
3.10.1.9.1.2 Preventive maintenance as scheduled, inclusive of replacement parts and
consumables.
3.10.1.9.1.3 Attending to emergency situations, which may damage property or endanger lives,
even outside normal working hours.
C. A written report, including dates, parts replaced etc., shall be provided to the Owner, detailing the maintenance work
performed.
D. The Owner's personnel shall be allowed to witness or participate (without damaging interference) in the above
activities.
END OF SECTION

ELEVATORS 14200-1

SECTION 14200

ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. Provide all conveying systems in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents.

B. Conveying systems shall be executed by an approved specialist subcontractor from the following list.
1. Otis, USA
2. Mitsubishi, Japan
3. Kone, Finland
4. Schindler, Germany
5. Approved Alternatives/Substitutions under provisions of the general conditions of contract.

C. Certificate of origin shall be submitted to substantiate the country of origin of the equipment. Country of
origin other than mentioned above shall not be accepted.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. General

This specification covers the functional and technical requirements for supplying and installing all conveying
systems complete in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents, which shall include, but
not be limited to the following.
1. Details in schedules .
2. Details on drawings.
3. Details in bills of quantities.

B. Related work specified elsewhere: Related electrical and mechanical installations are specified elsewhere in
other divisions of the specifications and the contractor shall coordinate these works with the elevator
installations and with all other works. In addition, the following works are specified elsewhere.
1. Support to carry all structural reactions, impact and uplift loads imposed by the elevator
equipment.
2. Barricades to protect the hoistway openings during the period of installation of elevator equipment
3. Protection of hoistway entrance head and side jamb, with plywood after installation while
construction work is in progress.
4. Water proofing of elevator pits, as necessary, after setting of all pit supporting steel and rail
inserts.
5. Access doors, railings, pit ladders, machine room ladders support for elevator buffers .
6. Installation of electrical power supplies, lighting, socket outlets smoke detectors and telephone
outlets in machine room with supply power feeders.
7. Permanent lighting fittings with switches and grounded receptacles in each elevator pit and
machine room.
8. Electric power of permanent characteristics for installing, testing and adjusting the elevator
equipment.
9. Air-conditioning of the Machine rooms.
10. The standby generator and the associated switching will be sized to run all elevators designated to
be on emergency and/ or normal supply.
11. Volt free contacts in elevator machine rooms as required for the fire operation from fire alarm
panel.
12. Volt free contacts in elevator machine rooms to distinguish between normal and emergency power
supply .

ELEVATORS 14200-2

13. Wiring between BAS room and elevator machine rooms to monitor the status of the elevators, if
BAS is in this project.
14. Interphone/ telephone wiring between BAS room and elevator machine rooms.
15. Hoisting beams/ hooks in elevator machine rooms.
16. Hoistway lighting as required.
17. Ring earth system of elevator equipment in the machine rooms.
18. Required lead wires to be given to fix audio system in the elevator cabin (All passenger elevators)
19. Car manufacturer shall provide cables and interfaces for concealed camera and video screen to
be installed by the security system specialist.
20. Car arrival chime
20. Curtain hooks
21. Multi beam infrared door sensor/ultrasonic door sensor (USDS)
22. Car finishes weight to be added as required


A. Applicable standards and codes: The elevator equipment, material and installation shall be in compliance
with the following relevant standards and codes.
1. JIS/JEC
2. ANSI/ASME/A17.1
3. BS 5655/BSCP 407

B. In addition to the above, design, material, fabrication, examination, testing, inspection, certification,
documentation, and operation shall conform to the following codes, regulations, standards and addenda, as
applicable.
1. Regulations issued by Kuwait Fire Brigade.
2. Regulations for Elect. Installations 4th Edition, 1983 (MEW/R-1), issued by MEW.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General

Manufacturers Data: Prior to the submission of shop drawings, submit to the Engineer full technical details,
specifications, catalogues etc. for Product approval.

B. Shop Drawings
1. Submit detailed shop drawings drawn to a 1/20 scale for car enclosure, landing entrance and
signal fixture showing construction, finish etc.
2. Submit layout shop drawings to scale of not less than 1/20 which shall show but not be limited to
the following:
a. Guide rail bracket pitch, joining points, guide rail reactions etc.
b. General layout showing lift well layout, pit, machine room, hoistway
section etc.

C. As-built drawings

At the conclusion of work, prepare and submit As-built drawings incorporating all changes and alterations
made during the execution of work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manuals

ELEVATORS 14200-3

At the time of submitting As-built Drawings, provide the engineer with three copies of operation and
Maintenance Manuals.

E. Staff Qualifications

A staff organization chart with details of experience and qualifications of all engineers and foremen proposed
for the project should be submitted for Engineer's approval.

1.05 CLIMATIC/ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. All equipment and materials used in the elevator installation work shall be so designed and constructed that
they shall provide satisfactory service for prolonged and continuous periods in the climatic conditions of
maximum room temperature of 35 degree centigrade dry bulb.

1.06 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. On completion of installation work perform trial tests and correct, adjust, calibrate, balance, regulate, etc.,
the installation as necessary until the specified and required performance conditions are obtained.

B. Supply all labour, materials, instruments, tools and equipment required for carrying out the tests.

C. After the connection of permanent power supply, commission all parts of the elevator installations covered
by this specification and demonstrate to the Engineer that the entire elevator installations are in perfect
working order.

D. Submit to the Engineer test reports, which shall include all records of test procedures, readings and results
obtained.

1.07 APPROVAL BY PUBLIC AUTHORITIES

A. Ensure that, where applicable, the work and any materials used in the execution of the work in accordance
with the contract, comply with the requirements of the particular Public Authority having jurisdiction.

B. Where necessary to comply with the regulations, inform the Public Authority of the proposed work and obtain
from them any written approval that may be required.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide a complete maintenance service throughout the Free Maintenance Period for all elevators to include
making good, repairing , replacing all defective works and equipment and leaving the elevators in perfect
working order.

B. Provide free Maintenance Services for a period of two years from the date of handing over the elevators.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS

A. The elevator machines shown located directly above the hoistway in machine room shall be mounted on
steel beams, ends of which are supported at the hoistway walls.

B. The elevator machines shown located at the side of the hoistway or below the hoistway shall have the
pulleys fixed at the top of the hoistway on beams, ends of which are supported at the hoistway walls.

ELEVATORS 14200-4

C. Clearance around the equipment located in each machine room shall comply with the applicable provisions
of governing codes and local regulations.

D. Where practical, elevator controllers shall be located near the driving machines that they control. The driving
machine shall be visible from its controller.

2.02 MACHINES

The driving machine shall be geared or gearless depending upon the speed and standard of specified suppliers.

A. Geared Hoisting Machine.
1. The geared traction machine shall be designed to meet the continuous duty of elevator operation.
A properly grooved sheave shall be driven through a high performance double reduction helical
gear reducer by a moderate speed motor. The sheave shall be mounted with heavy antifriction
bearings on a rigid shaft or shall be firmly pressed onto a shaft supported by antifriction bearings.
2. The gear housing, brake support and motor support shall be a single casting or they shall be
mounted on a rigid fabricated steel bedplate. The gear housing shall be divided horizontally at the
centerline of the shaft to provide access to the gear. A gasketed inspection handhole shall be
provided in the lower half of the housing to permit inspection of the meshing of the worm and worm
gear. Suitable drain plugs and oil level gauges shall be provided.
3. The sheave shall be accurately keyed on the output shaft of the reducer. The sheave material
shall be of cast hardened steel of the proper hardness to give minimum wear of the sheave and
hoist ropes. An effective oil seal shall prevent leakage of lubricating oil.
4. The double reduction helical gear reducer shall be machined from a heavy casting of special gear
bronze and shall have accurately hobbed teeth.
5. The brake shall be of mechanically (spring) applied and electrically released type. The brake shall
have sufficient power to hold the car at any landing with the normal amount of counter - balancing
and with 125% contract load.
6. An effective sound reducing material shall be installed between the bed plate of the driving
machine and the machine beams.
7. Manual break releasing and turning handles shall be provided to release the trapped passengers
in the even of the breakdown.
B. Gearless/Geard Machine.
1 Provide a Gearless/Geard traction machine with low-speed motor, electro-mechanical brake,
sheave shaft and traction sheave, all in proper alignment, compactly grouped on a single shaft that
is supported by two bearings, rigidly mounted on a cast-iron or structural steel bed-plate.
2 Provide equipment fully capable of handling the specified duty, and delivering specified
performance. Isolate the machine from building structure with 25 mm thick neoprene pads,
properly loaded for static and dynamic forces developed. Seat all parts securely on bed-plate,
without using brackets (or extensions) as principal supports.
3 Use a multi-pole reversible motor having high starting torque and low starting current, designed
especially for lift service, of sufficient size to run continuously at rated speed and rated load, in
both travel directions, with winding temperature rise under 50C.
4 Exceed the calculated requirement (for the specified duty application) by at least 5 hp.
5 Use a shaft of forged steel, electric furnace cast steel, or equal. Provide a traction sheave, having
demountable rim made of hard alloy cast iron or cast steel, grooved for proper traction, with
sufficiently excess thickness to ensure reasonable rate of groove wear. Provide rim markings to
indicate the direction of car travel.
6 Electrically balance the armature & dynamically balance all rotating elements.
7 Provide guards to prevent wire rope from leaving the sheave under any condition with clearance
between guard and sheave to be less than rope diameter.

ELEVATORS 14200-5

8 Provide a noiseless mechanical brake, spring applied and electrically released, designed to act
instantly and automatically upon interruption of motor power supply. Use two brake shoes to hold
a lift at any landing with 125 percent of rated load and normal counterbalance. The brake drum
wearing surface and the edge of flange shall be turned true and smooth, with wearing surface
eccentricity at less than 0.125 mm. Line brake shoes with suitable fireproof material, shaped to
the shoe so that the drum can run free with minimal clearance.
9 Stop a lift by electrical means before the mechanical brake is applied. Systems where slowdown
and normal stopping is achieved by brake use shall be rejected. A system of controlled
emergency stops with delayed brake application shall be rejected.
10 Securely mount and guard all related monitoring devices. Fix all parts in place with finish bolts and
nuts.

C. The Driving Motor.
1. The driving motor shall be of the three phase AC, induction motor type specially designed to meet
the torque and frequent starting requirements of the elevator operation.
2. The motor shall be suitably designed to operate with less noise under the variable voltage variable
frequency speed control system.
3. The driving motor shall have sufficient capacity to operate continuously at 100% of contract load
and 100% of contract speed and for a 10 minute period at 125% of contract load and 100% of
contract speed in both directions without overheating.
2.03 CONTROL

A. Variable Voltage Variable Frequency Control.
1. Converts A.C line current to D.C using diode converters and then reconverts to A.C at the voltage
and frequency required to move a given load at the desired speed. The resulting precise motor
control shall provide precision speed regulation and smooth acceleration and deceleration
regardless of the load on the car. Latest power device switching shall be employed to allow
switching the high frequencies involved in the speed control. Latest microprocessor &
semiconductor technology shall be employed to provide an energy efficient drive system without
an annoying hum.
2. Microprocessor units ( Master unit & Slave unit) shall be provided to ensure switching over the
control to slave unit in the event of malfunctioning of the main unit.
3. A digital encoder shall detect accurately the position of floor and feed back to the control circuit.
4. The elevator, if stopped due to reasons other than actuation of safeties or power failure, shall go to
the nearest floor in slow speed and shall open the door.
5. An anti nuisance/mischief prevention feature shall be employed to prevent unnecessary/accidental
registration of car calls.
6. Each elevator shall be provided with a self leveling feature that will automatically bring the
elevator to the floor landings within a tolerance of +/- 5mm. maximum. Self leveling shall, within its
zone, be entirely automatic and independent of the operating device and shall correct for
overtravel and rope stretch. The elevator shall be maintained approximately level with the landing,
irrespective of distance, travel or load and while loading and unloading.

2.04 CONTROLLERS

A. Micro computer based control units shall be provided to control the operation, the starting, the stopping,
accelerating and decelerating the speed of the elevator motor and also to apply the brake if any of the safety
devices operate or the power fails.

B. All controllers shall be enclosed in sheet metal cabinets finished in air dried enamel. Doors and covers shall
be of removable type to provide easy access to all components and parts housed in the control panel.

ELEVATORS 14200-6

C. The controller shall house all necessary contactors, relays, switches, cards, micro processors, interface
modules, power amplifiers, solid state devices, timing devices, transformers and all apparatus associated
with the control of the elevator in the machine room.

D. The controller shall provide protection against the following:
1. Phase reversal of the power supply.
2. Overload.
3. Single phasing.

E. The control system shall provide a smooth acceleration and deceleration with the leveling accuracy at all
landings from no load to full rated load in the elevator. This smooth operation shall be obtained for all
elevators under stable conditions which provide for a "maximum car start to car stop" times for a floor-to-
floor run with a balanced load at the midpoint of the hoistway ( start of a door closing at one floor to the fully
opened door position at the next local floor). Prior to completion of the works and prior to expiry of the
maintenance period, the elevators shall be re-adjusted as required to meet the approved performance
requirements within 10%.

F. The equipment shall be designed to operate at plus or minus 10% of normal feeder voltage and plus or
minus 3% of normal feeder frequency without damage or interruption of elevator service.

2.05 CAR AND COUNTERWEIGHT GUIDE RAILS.

A. Provide steel guide rails with brackets and railclips for each elevator car and counterweight, suitably
attached to the building structural members. car guide rails and car frame shall be so located to balance the
car assembly in the guides. Rail brackets shall be suitably attached to the building structure. Bracket spacing
shall be in accordance with the applicable safety codes listed elsewhere.

B. Rails shall be of steel "TEE" section of standard length with its faces properly machined to provide a smooth
and uniform track for the moving car and counterweight. Joints of rails shall be accurately machined with
tongues and grooves at the end of the rails at the center of the railhead and base forming matched joints.

C. All joints shall be so located that fishplates will not interfere with the relative motion of the rail with respect to
the rail clips and brackets. Car and counterweight rails shall be thoroughly cleaned and filled smooth
throughout their length and at the rail joints before cars are put in operation.

D. The car and counterweight guide rails shall be provided and aligned so that the faces of the rails are plumb
within plus or minus 6mm. from top to the bottom of the hoistway. The maximum change in the Distance
Between Guides (DBG) shall not exceed 6mm.

E. Rail shim packs shall be 19 mm. maximum and shall secure railclip alignment and shall be so designed that
they will remain in position even though the fastening bolts may become loosened.

2.06 HOIST AND GOVERNOR ROPES

A. Each elevator shall be provided with hoist ropes of specification sizes and numbers sufficient to comply with
the requirements of the applicable codes listed elsewhere.

B. The ends of the hoist ropes shall be properly secured to the car and counterweight crosshead or to the dead
end hitch plates on 2:1 roping, with adjustable rope shackles. Screw adjustment shall permit equalization of
the tension in all ropes.

C. The specification and size of the governor rope for each elevator shall be as per the requirements of the
applicable codes specified elsewhere. The governor rope shall pass over the governor sheave and over a
tension device at the pit.

D. Tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer's works to ascertain that the ropes comply with the
appropriate code or standard, and test certificates shall be produced upon request.

ELEVATORS 14200-7

2.07 CAR PLATFORMS

A. The car platform of each elevator shall be rigid all steel construction consisting of steel sheet or pan
mounted on structural framing. Alternatively platform construction shall be structural steel frame filled with
20mm thick marble finish. The under side of the car platform shall be covered with sheet steel.

B. The platform shall be mounted on rubber isolating cushion pads between the car and steel car frame.

2.08 COUNTERWEIGHTS

A. Each elevator shall be suitably counterbalanced for smooth and economical operation. Cast iron, cast steel,
or flame cut steel plate sub weights shall be contained in a guided structural steel frame. The counterweight
shall be equal to the weight of complete elevator car plus at least 40% of the contract load .

2.09 CAR &COUNTERWEIGHT GUIDES.

Roller guides or guide shoes as required for the speed and load of the elevator shall be provided as follows.

A. Roller Guides
1. Each elevator shall have four sets of car and counterweight roller guides. Each roller guide shall
have 3 or six wheels tired with durable resilient material, each rotating on ball bearings having
sealed in lubrication, assembled in substantial metal base and so mounted as to provide
continuous contact of all wheels with the corresponding rail surfaces under all conditions of loading
and operation. The wheels shall run on three finished rail surfaces. The roller guides shall run on
dry surfaces.

B. Guide Shoes
1. Each elevator shall have four sets of car and counterweight guide shoes. Each guide shoe shall be
made of suitable resilient material, each fixed inside suitable metal frames. A suitable guide rail
oilier shall be fixed on each guide rail side at the top and bottom of the car and counterweight.
2.10 BUFFERS

A. Provide car and counterweight buffers as per the requirement of applicable codes mentioned elsewhere in
the specifications. Buffers shall be tested in the works and test certificate shall be produced upon request.
Provide pipe stands, struts, braces or other supports, for buffers.

2.11 SAFETY DEVICES.

A. General
1. All safety devices shall be provided as per KFBs requirement and approval.

B. Pit safety switch
1. Provide pit safety switches in all elevator pits. Pit safety switches shall interrupt the power supply
and hold the cars to permit access to the pits for servicing.

C. Terminal stopping devices.
1. The slow-down, normal and final terminal stopping devices shall be provided for each elevator at
top and bottom terminal floors. The devices shall be enclosed type and shall be arranged so that
as the elevator approaches either terminal landing, a roller with noiseless tread, mounted on a
movable arm, will come into contact with cams, and through operation of the device, bring the
elevator automatically to a smooth stop at the terminal landing. The roller of the device shall
engage its full area on the cam surface.
2. The final limit switches shall be operated by a fixed cam attached to the elevator. The switches
shall be so located that they will be operated should the elevator travel a predetermined distance
above or below the upper or lower terminal landing. These limit switches shall be independent of
any other stopping devices and shall positively open without the use of springs to cut off power

ELEVATORS 14200-8

from the driving machine motor and brake. It shall prevent the operation of the elevator in either
direction.

D. Hoistway door unlocking devices.
1. Hoistway door unlocking devices shall be provided for all elevators on all doors as per the
requirement of applicable codes specified elsewhere. The unlocking device shall permit access to
hoistway using a special key.

E. Electric interlocks and door contacts.
1. The door at each elevator hoistway entrance shall have door interlocks as required by the
applicable codes specified elsewhere. The unlocking of any hoistway entrance shall cut the
electrical contact of that particular door which shall prevent the operation of the elevator by cutting
the power to motor.
2. The doors of elevator cars shall have electrical contacts conforming to the applicable codes.

F. Emergency exits with contacts.
1. Each elevator shall have emergency exits conforming to applicable codes specified elsewhere.
2. All emergency exits shall be provided with electric contacts to prevent the operation of the elevator
when the exit door is open. The exit door shall be easily openable from on top of the car without
using any tools.

2.12 CAR FRAME, SAFETY AND GOVERNOR

A. The car frame shall consists of structural steel members, securely bolted together and the frame shall be so
reinforced and braced as to relieve the car enclosure from undue strains. The safety shall be mounted on
the bottom members of the car frame and shall be operated by a gradual speed governor located over the
hoistway. The safety shall stop the elevator whenever excessive descending speed is attained and means
shall be provided to cut off power from the motor and apply the brake prior to application of the safety. The
safety shall be released by moving the elevator in the upward direction.

B. The type of safety and the method of application shall conform to applicable codes specified elsewhere.

C. The governor rope system, including the governor and tension sheave, shall be arranged so that the carrier
will not release due to system dynamics when the elevator is subjected to an emergency stop in the up
direction.

D. The governor switch tripping speed and governor tripping speed shall conform to applicable codes specified
elsewhere. The governor shall be calibrated and sealed at the factory. Factory test reports shall be furnished
upon request.

2.13 ELEVATOR LANDING ENTRANCES.

A. General
1. Each hoistway landing entrance assembly consisting of unit frame, door panels, sill, hanger,
closer, interlock and their installation shall comply with applicable code requirements and have a
fire rating of 1 hours.

B. Unit frames
1. Unit frames shall be of self supporting type constructed of steel with dimensions and finishes as
mentioned in the schedule of each elevator and as per architectural drawings.

C. Door panels.
1. The door panels shall be of 1.6mm thick hairline stainless steel construction with suitable
stiffeners. The bottom of each door panel shall be provided with a minimum of two removable

ELEVATORS 14200-9

laminated phenolic guides which run in the sill slots. Guide shall be designed to be replaced
without removing door panels.

2. The finishing and dimension of door panels shall be as detailed in schedules.

D. Sills
1. Unless otherwise specified, all landing sills shall be made of extruded aluminium. Grooves shall be
machined to give minimum clearance for the guides. The sills shall be supported on steel angles
which are in turn securely fastened to building structure.

E Door hangers
1. Provide a sheave type two point suspension hanger and track complete for each hoistway and car
door.
2. Hangers shall be supplied with adjustable rollers to take the up thrust of doors.
3. Tracks shall be of heavy section with surface shaped to conform to the tread of hanger sheaves
and rollers. Suitable means shall be used to transmit motion from one door panel to the other.
F. Hanger supports
1. Hanger supports shall be of thick steel sections securely bolted to strut angles or to building
structure.

G. Hanger cover plates.
1. Hanger cover plates shall be made of sheet steel and shall extend the full width of door.

H. Sight guards.
1. Provide sight guards for all openings, installed in a manner to reduce to a minimum the clearance
between the hoistway doors and the car doors so as to conceal the hoistway and car beyond the
door opening.

I. Toe guards
1. Toe guards shall be of sheet steel and shall be installed at the lowest landing. They shall extend to
the full width of the door opening.

2.14 ELEVATOR CAR AND LANDING DOOR OPERATOR

A. The doors on car and each landing shall be opened and closed quietly and smoothly by an electric AC door
operator (VVVF) or DC operator mounted on car top, as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Unless otherwise specified in the schedules, all elevators shall be provided with a protective leading edge,
which shall extend the full height and project beyond the front edges of each leading car door panel. Should
this device touch a person or object while the car doors are closing, the car and hoistway doors shall return
to their open position.

2.15 CAR ENCLOSURE

A. Provide car enclosures as detailed below and conforming to all applicable codes.

B. Car Walls.
1. Car walls shall be in hairline stainless steel sheet, minimum 1.6mm thick, of sufficient mechanical
strength, finished as detailed in the schedules of each elevator.

C. Car roof

ELEVATORS 14200-10

1. Roof shall be constructed of heavy duty sheet steel of sufficient mechanical strength conforming to
all applicable codes. The roof of car shall be sufficiently reinforced to withstand the distributed
weight of two men.
2. All elevator car roofs shall have the following accessories and other features as detailed elsewhere
in the specifications.
a. Inspection lamp.
b. Power socket.
c. Emergency stop switch.
d. Inspection switch.
e. "UP" & "DOWN" button.
3. Provide exhaust blowers, silent in operation, to draw air into car enclosure for all elevators. A
switch shall be provided in the car operating panel to cut off the fan as and when required.

D. Emergency lights
1. Each elevator shall be provided with an emergency light with NICD rechargeable batteries, battery
charger, a swing circuit and other accessories which will give not less than three hours duration on
main failure.

E. Alarm bell
1. A electro touch buttons shall be fitted on the car operating panel of each car arranged to ring a
battery operated bell mounted on top of elevator car. Bell, trickle charger, rechargeable battery
and all interconnecting wiring shall be supplied and installed as a part of this contract.

F. Interphone/Telephone
1. Interphone or telephone shall be fixed in the cabin, which shall allow passengers to communicate
with Building Automation System control room. It should also be possible to communicate between
cabin and machine room of each elevator.
2. All interconnecting wiring outside the hoistway and telephone points in each machine room shall
be provided by other trades.

G. Car Load Weighing Devices.
1. Each elevator shall have a car weighing device to render the elevator inoperative incase of over
loaded car.
2. An audio visual alarm in the car shall indicate incase of an overloaded car.
3. When the car is loaded to its full capacity, a device shall monitor the situation and bypass all the
hall calls registered and the elevator shall respond to car calls only .

2.16 OPERATIONS

The operation of each elevator shall be as defined in the schedule of each elevator.

A. Simplex selective collective fully automatic operation.
1. The operation of the elevator shall be from the landing buttons and the car buttons in the car
operating device.
2. The operation shall be such that momentary pressure on one or more car buttons or landing
buttons, other than those for the landing at which the elevator is standing, shall start the elevator,
provided the interlock circuits are established and cause the elevator to stop at the first landing for
which a car or landing call is registered corresponding to the direction in which the elevator is
traveling. The elevator shall stop at all landings for which calls are registered and these stops
shall be made in order in which the landings are reached, irrespective of the sequence in which
the calls are registered, provided the call for a given landing is registered sufficiently in advance of
the arrival of the elevator at that landing to permit the stop to be made.

ELEVATORS 14200-11

3. If there are no car calls and the elevator starts UP in response to several DOWN calls, the elevator
shall proceed first to the highest DOWN call and then reverse to collect the other DOWN calls. UP
calls shall be collected similarly when the elevator starts DOWN in response to such calls. If the
elevator without car calls stops for a landing call and a car call is registered within a predetermined
interval after the stop for a landing corresponding to the direction the elevator was traveling, the
elevator shall proceed in the same direction regardless of other landing calls registered.
4. If DOWN landing buttons are pressed while the elevator is traveling UP, the elevator shall not stop
at these landings, but these calls shall remain registered. After the highest car and landing calls
have been answered and the door interlock circuit is established, the elevator shall reverse
automatically and respond to DOWN car and landing calls. When traveling DOWN, the elevator
shall not respond to UP landing calls, but these calls shall remain registered and be answered on
the next UP trip.

B. Duplex selective collective fully automatic operation.
1. Two elevators shall be effectively controlled by duplex selective collective operation. Directional
zoning system shall be employed in which two cars select themselves their own service zones in
reference to their respective position and travelling directions. Each of them shall respond to the
calls made in the service zone assigned to it.
2. The service zone assigned to any one car shall range from the floor to be served in its travelling
direction to the floor that follows the one to be served by the preceding car.
3. The two car operation shall be effectively controlled to minimise the waiting time to the maximum
extent.
4. All the basic operation of simplex selective collective operation shall individually be applicable to
each elevator in the duplex group elevators.
5. In the event of one of the elevators is out of service due to any reasons the system shall allow the
remaining elevator to work automatically in simplex selective collective operation.

C. Group supervisory system.
1. Group supervisory system shall be employed for groups having three or more elevators. In this
system the operation of three or more elevators shall be controlled in a well balanced form.
In this system the waiting time is computed as to which car is most suitable for responding to
the call newly made. The service conditions of all the cars shall be monitored and optimization
control shall be effected at all times.
Each time the hall call is made, the maximum waiting time relative to the assigned hall calls that
precede the newly made hall call are compared among the cars and the car having the smallest
figure shall be selected.
Long waiting time and unnecessary movement of cars shall be eliminated.
In cases where one car is separated from the group operation for maintenance and other
purposes, the hall calls to be attended by the separated car shall be reassigned to the remaining
cars.
Hall lantern shall flicker 4-5 seconds before the arrival of the elevator and the gong shall be
sounded at the same time to inform the waiting passengers.

2.17 SPECIAL OPERATIONS

A. Emergency landing device

Emergency landing device which will bring the generator to the nearest floor by standby batteries allowing
passengers to alight from the car in the event of power failure.

B. Fireman's operation.

ELEVATORS 14200-12

Fireman's operation shall be provided for elevators as per the requirement in the schedules. The operation
shall be as detailed below and as per the requirement of applicable codes specified elsewhere.
1. A two position key switch shall be provided adjacent to the main landing electro touch buttons
satiation for all the designated elevators. The key switch shall have the following positions: ON &
OFF.
2. Each elevator designated for firemen service operation shall have a two position key switch in the
main car operating panel. The key switch shall have OFF & ON positions.
3. The elevators designated for fireman's operation shall operate from the main landing key switch
when it is changed from the OFF to the ON position as follows:
a. The elevator shall close its doors if open and return nonstop to the main landing without
responding to registered car or landing calls. An elevator traveling away from the main
landing shall stop and reverse its direction at its next possible landing without opening its
doors.
b. All car and landing buttons shall be rendered inoperative and all call acknowledging
lights and waiting passenger lanterns shall be extinguished until the Firemen service
switch at the main landing is turned to the OFF position.
c. Once the elevator is reached at the main landing, it shall wait as standby elevator with its
door in the open position until the Fireman's switch at the main landing is turned to the
OFF position. The elevator shall return to the normal operation as soon as the Fireman's
switch at the main landing is turned to the OFF position.
4. The elevators designated for firemen service shall be operable only from their car call buttons by
actuation of the two-position key switch in the main car operating panel from the OFF position to
the ON position.
a. Each elevator may be controlled from the normal car buttons for the landing served and
from the normal DOOR CLOSE button. This operation shall over ride other controls and
all landing call buttons but shall be operational only when the Firemen service switch at
the main landing is in the ON position.
b. Once the Fireman registers the call for the desired floor, continuous pressure on the
DOOR CLOSE button shall close the doors and start the elevator. Once desired floor is
reached elevator is stopped until another similar operation is made by the fireman.
5. All elevators when on INDEPENDENT or inspection operation shall be signaled to return to the
main landing when landing key switch is in the ON position or elevator is called by automatic
detection means.
a. The emergency signal shall sound a distinctive tone, bell or gong located on top of the
car enclosure.
6. All elevators if connected with automatic fire monitoring panel shall operate as follows when
getting a signal from the main fire alarm and detection system through the relay contacts provided
at the control panel located at each elevator machine rooms.
a. All elevators shall return nonstop to their main landing without responding to registered
car or landing calls. An elevator traveling away from the main landing shall stop and
reverse its direction at its next possible landing without opening its doors.
b. All car and landing buttons shall be rendered inoperative and all call acknowledging
lights and waiting passenger lanterns shall be extinguished until the Firemen service
mode is changed by the fire monitoring panel through the relay contacts.
c. Once the elevator is reached at the main landing, it shall wait as standby elevator with its
door in the open position until the Firemen service mode is changed by the fire
monitoring panel through the relay contacts. The elevator shall return to the normal
operation as soon as the Fireman's mode is cleared by the fire monitoring panel through
the relay contacts.

C. Independent service operation.

Independent operation, if required by the schedule of specifications, shall be provided as follows:

ELEVATORS 14200-13

1. An Independent Normal switch shall be provided on the main car operating panel for all elevators
specified for independent operation. When this switch is in the ON position, the elevator shall be
operated from the car buttons only independent of all other operation modes.
2. The doors shall remain open when an elevator is at a landing until the car button for another
landing and the DOOR CLOSE button are pressed. If several car calls are registered, it shall be
necessary, after each stop, to press the door close button to effect the closing of the doors.

D. Door safeties.
1. Infrared door safety edge.
An invisible safety wall constructed of 40 infrared beams located vertically along the edge of the
car door panel shall be provided as required by the schedule of specifications. These beams shall
detect virtually any obstruction. When a passenger or object disrupts the infrared plane, the doors
shall reopen automatically.
2. Mechanical safety edge
Unless otherwise specified in the schedule of specified a mechanical retractable safety edge shall
be provided on the cabin door.

2.18 FEATURES AND FITTINGS:

A. The following features and fixtures to be provided:
a. Car position indicator
b. Car direction indicator
c. Hall position indicator for all floors
d. Infrared curtain door detector
e. Intercom 3 ways
f. Automatic bypass
g. Automatic car return device
h. Anticrime protection
i. Emergency fire alarm
j. Fan with switch
k. Door open button
l. Door close button
m. Re-leveling operation
n. Emergency power operation
o. Emergency fireman switch
p. Emergency car light
q. Attendant service
r. Independent service
s. Overload device

2.19 SCHEDULES OF SPECIFICATIONS:

To be selected by the client.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATIONS

A. Hoistway Inspection: Installer shall verify dimensions of hoistways, pits, and machine rooms, and inspect the
support structure, services, and the conditions under which elevator work is to be installed, and notify
General Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory dimensions or conditions. Proceed with elevator installations
only after unsatisfactory dimensions and conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

ELEVATORS 14200-14

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with the approved shop drawings, the original design, and all pertinent regulations
and codes, anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use.

3.03 FINISHES

A. Provide field finishes by cleaning and applying paint to all equipment and metal work installed as a part of
this Contract, except those items of equipment with factory applied finishes, stainless steel, and special
architectural finishes, or as may be noted hereinafter.

B. Guide Rails: In elevator pit only, clean and apply rust inhibiting primer and 1 coat of enamel paint to all
surfaces of guide rails and supports.

C. Machine, Controller, Selector, and Conduit or Duct: Thoroughly clean and apply 2 coats of manufacturer's
standard machinery enamel.

D. Thoroughly clean all factory finish surfaces to receive baked enamel finishes; apply 1 filler coat over uneven
surfaces. Bake filler coat, sand, and grind smooth; apply mineral paint and bake. Upon completion apply 3
coats of manufacturer's standard finish enamel and bake; color as selected by Engineer.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Installer shall advise General Contractor of recommended protection facilities and procedures, to prevent
damage and deterioration of completed elevator work (regardless of whether placed in temporary service)
during remainder of construction period.

B. Temporary enclosures or hoistway opening protection, protection against damage to the machines, car, doors
or door frames shall be provided by the General Contractor.

C. Provide complete inspection and maintenance service while in temporary service, for period of such
service. See TEMPORARY USE under Part 1 above for payment provisions.

3.05 TESTING

A. Upon completion of the installation, and as a condition of its acceptance, provide all necessary equipment
and personnel and perform all tests required. Secure all required approvals from agencies having
jurisdiction.
1. Perform testing as required by governing Elevator Inspection Agency to demonstrate compliance
with performance requirements.

B. Advise General Contractor, Engineer, Owner, and Inspection Department of governing agencies, in advance
of dates and times tests are to be performed.

C. Make a final check of operation just prior to time of substantial completion. Determine that control systems
and operating devices are functioning properly.

3.06 INSTRUCTION

A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance. Review emergency
provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and
other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for
sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete elevator
maintenance program.

END OF SECTION

KW.09.0128 - DOC - 11.12.12 - 1 of 5 - Specifications - Structural & Architectural PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

KW.09.0128 - DOC - 11.12.12 - 1 of 5 - Specifications - Structural & Architectural PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Volume III: CIVIL ANDARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

You might also like